©1991-2019 Inter-CAD Kft.

All rights reserved

USER’S MANUAL
 Copyright © 1991-2019 Inter-CAD Kft. of Hungary. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may
Copyright
be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, me-
chanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, for any purposes.

Trademarks AxisVM is a registered trademark of Inter-CAD Kft.

All other trademarks are owned by their respective owners.
Inter-CAD Kft. is not affiliated with INTERCAD PTY. Ltd. of Australia.

Disclaimer The material presented in this text is for illustrative and educational purposes only and is not intended to
be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem for design. While reasonable efforts had
been made in the preparation of this text to assure its accuracy, Inter-CAD Kft. assumes no liability or
responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of any
information contained herein.

Changes Inter-CAD Kft. reserves the right to revise and improve its product as it sees fit. This publication describes
the state of this product at the time of its publication and may not reflect the product at all times in the
future.

Version This is an International Version of the product that may not conform to corresponding standards in a
respective country and is available solely on an “as is” basis.

Limited warranty Inter-CAD Kft. makes no warranty, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to any implied
warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose, regarding these materials.
In no event shall Inter-CAD Kft. be liable to anyone for special, collateral, incidental, or consequential
damages in connection with or arising out of purchase or use of these materials. The sole and exclusive
liability to Inter-CAD KFT., regardless of the form of action, shall not exceed the purchase price of the
material described herein.

Technical support If you have questions about installing or using the AxisVM, check this User’s Manual first - you will find
and services answers to most of your questions here. If you need further assistance, please contact your software
provider.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 3

CONTENTS

1. New features of Version X5 ................................................................................................................................................. 11

2. How to use AxisVM ................................................................................................................................................................ 15
2.1. Hardware requirements..................................................................................................................................................................15
2.2. Installation ......................................................................................................................................................................................16
2.3. Getting started ................................................................................................................................................................................24
2.4. AxisVM user interface .....................................................................................................................................................................25
2.5. Using the cursor, the keyboard, the mouse ....................................................................................................................................26
2.6. Keyboard shortcuts .........................................................................................................................................................................27
2.7. Quick Menu.....................................................................................................................................................................................31
2.8. Dialog boxes ....................................................................................................................................................................................32
2.9. Table Browser .................................................................................................................................................................................32
2.10. Report Maker ................................................................................................................................................................................38
2.10.1. Report toolbar .....................................................................................................................................................................40
2.10.2. Report ..................................................................................................................................................................................41
2.10.3. Edit.......................................................................................................................................................................................42
2.10.3.1. Template-based reports .............................................................................................................................................43
2.10.3.2. Editing a template ......................................................................................................................................................44
2.10.3.3. Filter-based report .....................................................................................................................................................47
2.10.4. Drawings ..............................................................................................................................................................................47
2.10.5. Gallery..................................................................................................................................................................................48
2.10.6. Gallery and Drawings Library Toolbars ................................................................................................................................48
2.10.7. Text Editor ...........................................................................................................................................................................48
2.11. Stories ...........................................................................................................................................................................................49
2.12. Layer Manager ..............................................................................................................................................................................49
2.13. Drawings Library ...........................................................................................................................................................................49
2.14. Save to Drawings Library...............................................................................................................................................................50
2.15. Export current view as 3D PDF ......................................................................................................................................................50
2.16. The Icon bar ..................................................................................................................................................................................50
2.16.1. Selection ..............................................................................................................................................................................51
2.16.2. Zoom icon bar ......................................................................................................................................................................53
2.16.3. Views ...................................................................................................................................................................................54
2.16.4. Display mode .......................................................................................................................................................................55
2.16.5. Color coding .........................................................................................................................................................................58
2.16.6. Geometric transformations on objects ................................................................................................................................60
2.16.6.1. Translate .....................................................................................................................................................................60
2.16.6.2. Rotate .........................................................................................................................................................................62
2.16.6.3. Mirror .........................................................................................................................................................................62
2.16.6.4. Scale ...........................................................................................................................................................................63
2.16.7. Workplanes ..........................................................................................................................................................................63
2.16.8. Structural grid ......................................................................................................................................................................64
2.16.9. Guidelines ............................................................................................................................................................................67
2.16.10. Geometry tools ..................................................................................................................................................................68
2.16.11. Dimension lines, symbols and labels .................................................................................................................................68
2.16.11.1. Orthogonal dimension lines .....................................................................................................................................69
2.16.11.2. Aligned dimension lines............................................................................................................................................71
2.16.11.3. Angle dimension .......................................................................................................................................................72
2.16.11.4. Arc length .................................................................................................................................................................73
2.16.11.5. Arc radius..................................................................................................................................................................73
2.16.11.6. Level and elevation marks ........................................................................................................................................73
2.16.11.7. Text box ....................................................................................................................................................................74
2.16.11.8. Object info and result text boxes .............................................................................................................................76
2.16.11.9. Isoline labels .............................................................................................................................................................78
2.16.11.10. Dimension lines for footing ....................................................................................................................................78
2.16.12. Editing background layers..................................................................................................................................................78
2.16.13. Renaming/renumbering ....................................................................................................................................................80
2.16.14. Parts ...................................................................................................................................................................................80
2.16.15. Sections .............................................................................................................................................................................82
2.16.16. Virtual beams .....................................................................................................................................................................86
2.16.17. Find ....................................................................................................................................................................................89
2.16.18. Display options ..................................................................................................................................................................89
2.16.19. Options ..............................................................................................................................................................................94
2.16.19.1. Grid and cursor .........................................................................................................................................................94
2.16.19.2. Editing.......................................................................................................................................................................94
4

2.16.19.3. Drawing ....................................................................................................................................................................95

2.16.20. Model info .........................................................................................................................................................................96
2.17. Speed Buttons ...............................................................................................................................................................................96
2.18. Information windows ....................................................................................................................................................................97
2.18.1. Coordinate window .............................................................................................................................................................97
2.18.2. Info window .........................................................................................................................................................................97
2.18.3. Color coding .........................................................................................................................................................................98
2.18.4. Color legend window ...........................................................................................................................................................98
2.18.5. Perspective window tool ...................................................................................................................................................101
3. The Main Menu .................................................................................................................................................................... 103
3.1. File .. .............................................................................................................................................................................................103
3.1.1. New model ..........................................................................................................................................................................103
3.1.2. Previous revisions… .............................................................................................................................................................104
3.1.3. Open ....................................................................................................................................................................................105
3.1.4. Save .....................................................................................................................................................................................105
3.1.5. Save as .................................................................................................................................................................................105
3.1.6. Export ..................................................................................................................................................................................105
3.1.6.1. Export to DXF..............................................................................................................................................................105
3.1.6.2. Export to IFC ...............................................................................................................................................................106
3.1.6.3. Export to Revit ............................................................................................................................................................107
3.1.6.4. Export to Tekla Structures ..........................................................................................................................................110
3.1.6.5. Export to Nemetschek Allplan ....................................................................................................................................110
3.1.6.6. Export to other applications .......................................................................................................................................111
3.1.6.7. Export to AxisVM ........................................................................................................................................................112
3.1.7. Import ..................................................................................................................................................................................112
3.1.7.1. Importing DXF files .....................................................................................................................................................112
3.1.7.2. Importing IFC files.......................................................................................................................................................113
3.1.7.3. Importing Revit RAE files ............................................................................................................................................115
3.1.7.4. Importing PDF files .....................................................................................................................................................120
3.1.7.5. Importing AxisVM AXS files ........................................................................................................................................120
3.1.7.6. Importing files from other applications ......................................................................................................................121
3.1.8. Parametric design ................................................................................................................................................................121
3.1.8.1. Grasshopper/Rhinoceros plugin .................................................................................................................................122
3.1.8.2. Dynamo/Autodesk plugin ...........................................................................................................................................122
3.1.9. Tekla Structures – AxisVM connection – TI module.............................................................................................................122
3.1.9.1. TI module for Tekla Structures versions 2019 and later .............................................................................................122
3.1.9.2. TI module for Tekla Structures versions before 2019 .................................................................................................126
3.1.10. Page header .......................................................................................................................................................................129
3.1.11. Print setup .........................................................................................................................................................................129
3.1.12. Print ...................................................................................................................................................................................129
3.1.13. Printing from file ................................................................................................................................................................131
3.1.14. Model Library ....................................................................................................................................................................132
3.1.15. Material Library .................................................................................................................................................................133
3.1.16. Cross-Section Library .........................................................................................................................................................139
3.1.16.1. Cross-Section Editor .................................................................................................................................................142
3.1.17. Spring characteristics library..............................................................................................................................................153
3.1.18. Exit .....................................................................................................................................................................................156
3.2. Edit .. .............................................................................................................................................................................................157
3.2.1. Undo ....................................................................................................................................................................................157
3.2.2. Redo.....................................................................................................................................................................................157
3.2.3. Repeat last command ..........................................................................................................................................................157
3.2.4. Select All ..............................................................................................................................................................................157
3.2.5. Restore previous selection ..................................................................................................................................................158
3.2.6. Copy .....................................................................................................................................................................................158
3.2.7. Paste ....................................................................................................................................................................................158
3.2.8. Copy / paste options ............................................................................................................................................................158
3.2.9. Delete ..................................................................................................................................................................................159
3.2.10. Table Browser ....................................................................................................................................................................160
3.2.11. Report Maker.....................................................................................................................................................................160
3.2.12. Saving drawings and design result tables ..........................................................................................................................160
3.2.13. Weight Report ...................................................................................................................................................................160
3.2.14. Assemble structural members ...........................................................................................................................................161
3.2.15. Break apart structural members ........................................................................................................................................161
3.2.16. Convert surface loads distributed over beams ..................................................................................................................161
3.2.17. Convert beams to shell model ...........................................................................................................................................161
3.2.18. Create shell model for nodal connection ...........................................................................................................................162
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 5

3.2.19. Convert loads of the selected load panels to individual loads ...........................................................................................162
3.2.20. Convert automatic references ...........................................................................................................................................162
3.3. Settings .........................................................................................................................................................................................163
3.3.1. Display options ....................................................................................................................................................................163
3.3.2. Options ................................................................................................................................................................................163
3.3.3. Layer Manager .....................................................................................................................................................................164
3.3.4. Stories ..................................................................................................................................................................................165
3.3.5. Guidelines ............................................................................................................................................................................167
3.3.6. Structural Grid .....................................................................................................................................................................167
3.3.7. Design codes ........................................................................................................................................................................167
3.3.8. Units and Formats ...............................................................................................................................................................168
3.3.9. Gravitation ...........................................................................................................................................................................168
3.3.10. Stiffness reduction .............................................................................................................................................................169
3.3.11. Preferences ........................................................................................................................................................................170
3.3.12. Keyboard shortcuts ............................................................................................................................................................183
3.3.13. Language............................................................................................................................................................................184
3.3.14. Report language ................................................................................................................................................................184
3.3.15. Toolbars to default position ..............................................................................................................................................185
3.3.16. Dialog boxes to default position ........................................................................................................................................185
3.4. View .............................................................................................................................................................................................185
3.5. Plugins ...........................................................................................................................................................................................186
3.6. Window.........................................................................................................................................................................................186
3.6.1. Property Editor ....................................................................................................................................................................187
3.6.2. Information Windows ..........................................................................................................................................................187
3.6.3. Background picture..............................................................................................................................................................188
3.6.4. Split Horizontally ..................................................................................................................................................................188
3.6.5. Split Vertically ......................................................................................................................................................................189
3.6.6. Close Window ......................................................................................................................................................................189
3.6.7. Changing label font size .......................................................................................................................................................189
3.6.8. Preventing labels from overlapping .....................................................................................................................................189
3.6.9. Drawings Library ..................................................................................................................................................................190
3.6.9.1. Export drawings to a 3D PDF file - PDF module .........................................................................................................191
3.6.10. Save to Drawings Library ...................................................................................................................................................191
3.7. Help . .............................................................................................................................................................................................192
3.7.1. Contents ..............................................................................................................................................................................192
3.7.2. Guides ..................................................................................................................................................................................192
3.7.3. AxisVM Home Page..............................................................................................................................................................192
3.7.4. AxisVM Update ....................................................................................................................................................................192
3.7.5. About ...................................................................................................................................................................................192
3.7.6. Release information.............................................................................................................................................................193
3.8. Main toolbar .................................................................................................................................................................................193
4. The Preprocessor ................................................................................................................................................................. 195
4.1. Geometry ......................................................................................................................................................................................195
4.2. The Model Editor ..........................................................................................................................................................................196
4.2.1. Multi-window mode ............................................................................................................................................................196
4.3. Coordinate systems ......................................................................................................................................................................197
4.3.1. Cartesian coordinate system ...............................................................................................................................................197
4.3.2. Polar coordinates .................................................................................................................................................................197
4.4. Coordinate window.......................................................................................................................................................................198
4.5. Grid . .............................................................................................................................................................................................198
4.6. Cursor step ....................................................................................................................................................................................199
4.7. Editing tools ..................................................................................................................................................................................199
4.7.1. Cursor identification ...........................................................................................................................................................199
4.7.2. Entering coordinates numerically ........................................................................................................................................200
4.7.3. Measuring distance .............................................................................................................................................................200
4.7.4. Constrained cursor movements...........................................................................................................................................201
4.7.5. Locking coordinates .............................................................................................................................................................201
4.7.6. Auto intersect ......................................................................................................................................................................202
4.8. Geometry Toolbar .........................................................................................................................................................................202
4.8.1. Node (Point) ........................................................................................................................................................................202
4.8.2. Line ......................................................................................................................................................................................203
4.8.3. Arc........................................................................................................................................................................................203
4.8.4. Horizontal division ...............................................................................................................................................................204
4.8.5. Vertical division ...................................................................................................................................................................204
4.8.6. Quad/triangle division .........................................................................................................................................................205
4.8.7. Intersect ...............................................................................................................................................................................206
6

4.8.8. Remove node .......................................................................................................................................................................206

4.8.9. Remove intermediate nodes ...............................................................................................................................................206
4.8.10. Extend lines to meet another line or plane .......................................................................................................................206
4.8.11. Trim lines to meet another line or plane ...........................................................................................................................207
4.8.12. Extend/cut lines to their point of intersection ..................................................................................................................208
4.8.13. Line division .......................................................................................................................................................................208
4.8.14. Normal transversal ............................................................................................................................................................208
4.8.15. Intersect plane with the model .........................................................................................................................................208
4.8.16. Intersect plane with the model and remove half space ....................................................................................................209
4.8.17. Domain intersection ..........................................................................................................................................................209
4.8.18. Purge unnecessary lines and nodes ...................................................................................................................................209
4.8.19. Geometry check .................................................................................................................................................................209
4.8.20. Surface ...............................................................................................................................................................................210
4.8.21. Modify, transform..............................................................................................................................................................210
4.8.22. Delete ................................................................................................................................................................................212
4.9. Finite Elements .............................................................................................................................................................................212
4.9.1. Materials ..............................................................................................................................................................................212
4.9.2. Cross-sections ......................................................................................................................................................................213
4.9.2.1. Browse cross-section libraries ....................................................................................................................................214
4.9.3. Spring characteristics ...........................................................................................................................................................216
4.9.4. Direct drawing of objects .....................................................................................................................................................217
4.9.5. Direct drawing of supports ..................................................................................................................................................218
4.9.6. Domain ................................................................................................................................................................................218
4.9.6.1. Defining a normal domain ..........................................................................................................................................220
4.9.6.2. Composite ribbed domain ..........................................................................................................................................222
4.9.6.3. Hollow core domain ...................................................................................................................................................223
4.9.6.4. Parametric ribbed plates ............................................................................................................................................224
4.9.6.5. Domain with custom stiffness matrix .........................................................................................................................224
4.9.6.6. XLAM domain .............................................................................................................................................................226
4.9.7. Hole .....................................................................................................................................................................................227
4.9.8. Domain operations ..............................................................................................................................................................227
4.9.9. Line elements ......................................................................................................................................................................228
4.9.10. Surface elements ...............................................................................................................................................................236
4.9.11. Nodal support ....................................................................................................................................................................240
4.9.12. Line support .......................................................................................................................................................................242
4.9.13. Surface support .................................................................................................................................................................244
4.9.14. Edge hinge .........................................................................................................................................................................245
4.9.15. Rigid elements ...................................................................................................................................................................245
4.9.16. Diaphragm .........................................................................................................................................................................246
4.9.17. Spring .................................................................................................................................................................................246
4.9.18. Gap ....................................................................................................................................................................................248
4.9.19. Link ....................................................................................................................................................................................249
4.9.20. Nodal DOF (degrees of freedom) .......................................................................................................................................252
4.9.21. References .........................................................................................................................................................................253
4.9.22. Creating model framework from an architectural model ..................................................................................................257
4.9.23. Modify ...............................................................................................................................................................................260
4.9.24. Delete ................................................................................................................................................................................261
4.10. Loads ...........................................................................................................................................................................................261
4.10.1. Load cases, load groups .....................................................................................................................................................261
4.10.2. Load combinations ............................................................................................................................................................268
4.10.3. Nodal loads ........................................................................................................................................................................272
4.10.4. Concentrated load on beam ..............................................................................................................................................272
4.10.5. Point load on domain or load panel ..................................................................................................................................273
4.10.6. Distributed line load on beam/rib .....................................................................................................................................274
4.10.7. Edge load ...........................................................................................................................................................................275
4.10.8. Domain / Load panel line load ...........................................................................................................................................277
4.10.9. Surface load .......................................................................................................................................................................279
4.10.10. Domain / Load panel area load........................................................................................................................................280
4.10.11. Surface load distributed over line elements ....................................................................................................................282
4.10.12. Load panels ......................................................................................................................................................................283
4.10.13. Snow load – SWG module................................................................................................................................................285
4.10.14. Wind load – SWG module ................................................................................................................................................293
4.10.15. Fluid load .........................................................................................................................................................................303
4.10.16. Self-weight .......................................................................................................................................................................304
4.10.17. Fault in length (fabrication error) ....................................................................................................................................304
4.10.18. Tension/compression ......................................................................................................................................................304
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 7

4.10.19. Thermal load on line elements ........................................................................................................................................304

4.10.20. Thermal load on surface elements ..................................................................................................................................305
4.10.21. Forced support displacement ..........................................................................................................................................305
4.10.22. Influence line ...................................................................................................................................................................306
4.10.23. Seismic loads – SE1 module .............................................................................................................................................307
4.10.23.1. Seismic load calculation according to Eurocode 8 ..................................................................................................308
4.10.23.2. Seismic load calculation according to Swiss SIA 261 ..............................................................................................313
4.10.23.3. Seismic load calculation according to German EC8-1 NA .......................................................................................313
4.10.23.4. Seismic load calculation according to Italian DM2008 ...........................................................................................313
4.10.23.5. Seismic load calculation according to Romanian P100-1 .......................................................................................313
4.10.23.6. Seismic load calculation according to Dutch NPR 9998:2015 .................................................................................313
4.10.24. Pushover loads – SE2 module ..........................................................................................................................................314
4.10.25. Global imperfection .........................................................................................................................................................316
4.10.26. Tensioning - PS1 module.................................................................................................................................................317
4.10.27. Moving loads ...................................................................................................................................................................324
4.10.27.1. Moving loads on line elements...............................................................................................................................325
4.10.27.2. Moving loads on domains ......................................................................................................................................326
4.10.28. Dynamic loads (for time-history analysis) – DYN module ................................................................................................327
4.10.29. Fire effect on steel elements – SD8 module ....................................................................................................................333
4.10.30. Fire effect on timber elements – TD8 module .................................................................................................................340
4.10.31. Split loads in separate load cases ....................................................................................................................................343
4.10.32. Nodal mass ......................................................................................................................................................................344
4.10.33. Modify .............................................................................................................................................................................344
4.10.34. Delete ..............................................................................................................................................................................344
4.11. Mesh ...........................................................................................................................................................................................345
4.11.1. Mesh generation ...............................................................................................................................................................345
4.11.1.1. Meshing of line elements .........................................................................................................................................345
4.11.1.2. Meshing of domains .................................................................................................................................................345
4.11.2. Mesh refinement ...............................................................................................................................................................346
4.11.3. Checking finite elements ...................................................................................................................................................348
4.11.4. Delete all meshes...............................................................................................................................................................348
5. Analysis ................................................................................................................................................................................... 349
5.1. Static analysis ................................................................................................................................................................................351
5.2. Vibration .......................................................................................................................................................................................356
5.2.1. Vibration response factor ....................................................................................................................................................358
5.3. Dynamic analysis ...........................................................................................................................................................................360
5.4. Buckling .........................................................................................................................................................................................363
5.5. Finite elements .............................................................................................................................................................................364
5.6. Main steps of an analysis ..............................................................................................................................................................366
5.7. Error messages..............................................................................................................................................................................367
6. The Postprocessor ............................................................................................................................................................... 369
6.1. Static .............................................................................................................................................................................................369
6.1.1. Minimum and maximum values ..........................................................................................................................................375
6.1.2. Animation ............................................................................................................................................................................376
6.1.3. Diagram display ...................................................................................................................................................................377
6.1.4. Pushover capacity curves.....................................................................................................................................................381
6.1.4.1. Capacity curves according to Eurocode 8 ...................................................................................................................382
6.1.4.2. Acceleration-Displacement Response Spectrum (ADRS) ............................................................................................382
6.1.4.3. Drift ............................................................................................................................................................................383
6.1.5. Result tables ........................................................................................................................................................................383
6.1.5.1. Section segment result tables ....................................................................................................................................384
6.1.6. Displacements .....................................................................................................................................................................385
6.1.6.1. Nonlinear calculation of total deflection (wtot) for RC plates ....................................................................................387
6.1.6.2. Relative displacements ...............................................................................................................................................388
6.1.7. Nodal velocities ...................................................................................................................................................................389
6.1.8. Nodal accelerations .............................................................................................................................................................389
6.1.9. Truss/beam internal forces ..................................................................................................................................................389
6.1.10. Rib internal forces..............................................................................................................................................................391
6.1.11. Virtual beam internal forces ..............................................................................................................................................392
6.1.12. Surface element internal forces ........................................................................................................................................393
6.1.13. Support internal forces ......................................................................................................................................................395
6.1.14. Internal forces of line to line link elements and edge hinges ............................................................................................396
6.1.15. Spring element internal forces ..........................................................................................................................................396
6.1.16. Truss, beam and rib element strains .................................................................................................................................397
6.1.17. Truss, beam and rib element strains at stress points ........................................................................................................398
8

6.1.18. Surface element strains .....................................................................................................................................................398

6.1.19. Surface element strains at stress points ............................................................................................................................400
6.1.20. Spring element deformations ............................................................................................................................................400
6.1.21. Truss/beam/rib stresses ....................................................................................................................................................400
6.1.22. Surface element stresses ...................................................................................................................................................404
6.1.23. Spring element nonlinear results .......................................................................................................................................407
6.1.24. Spring element dynamic results ........................................................................................................................................409
6.1.25. Influence lines ....................................................................................................................................................................409
6.1.26. Unbalanced loads ..............................................................................................................................................................410
6.2. Buckling .........................................................................................................................................................................................411
6.3. Vibration .......................................................................................................................................................................................411
6.4. Dynamic ........................................................................................................................................................................................413
6.5. R.C. Design ....................................................................................................................................................................................413
6.5.1. Surface reinforcement parameters and reinforcement calculation - RC1 module ..............................................................413
6.5.1.1. Calculation of orthogonal x/y reinforcement according to Eurocode 2 .....................................................................416
6.5.1.2. Calculation of orthogonal x/y reinforcement according to DIN EN, DIN 1045-1 and SIA 262 ...................................417
6.5.1.3. Calculation of skew reinforcement according to Eurocode 2 and SIA 262 .................................................................418
6.5.2. Actual reinforcement ...........................................................................................................................................................420
6.5.2.1. Reinforcement for surface elements and domains ....................................................................................................421
6.5.2.2. Mesh-independent reinforcement .............................................................................................................................422
6.5.3. Beam reinforcement parameters (uniaxial bending) ...........................................................................................................423
6.5.4. Actual reinforcement against biaxial bending (column) ......................................................................................................427
6.5.5. Nonlinear analysis of reinforced concrete beam and column elements .............................................................................430
6.5.6. Nonlinear analysis of RC surfaces ........................................................................................................................................432
6.5.7. Cracking ...............................................................................................................................................................................433
6.5.7.1. Cracking calculation according to Eurocode 2 ............................................................................................................434
6.5.7.2. Cracking calculation according to DIN 1045-1 ............................................................................................................434
6.5.8. Shear resistance and reinforcement calculation for plates and shells ................................................................................435
6.5.8.1. Calculation according to Eurocode 2 ..........................................................................................................................435
6.5.8.2. Calculation according to SIA 262 ................................................................................................................................436
6.5.9. Column reinforcement – RC2 module .................................................................................................................................437
6.5.9.1. Eccentricity calculation ...............................................................................................................................................441
6.5.9.2. Check of reinforced columns according to Eurocode 2 (bending with axial force) ....................................................444
6.5.9.3. Check of reinforced columns according to DIN1045-1 (bending with axial force) .....................................................446
6.5.9.4. Check of reinforced columns according to SIA 262 (bending with axial force) ..........................................................447
6.5.9.5. Shear and torsion check of reinforced concrete columns ..........................................................................................447
6.5.9.6. Shear and torsion check according to Eurocode 2 and DIN 1045-1 ...........................................................................450
6.5.9.7. Shear and torsion check according to SIA 262............................................................................................................451
6.5.9.8. Capacity design: calculation the design value of shear force according to Eurocode and SIA ...................................452
6.5.10. Composite column design – RC2 module ..........................................................................................................................453
6.5.10.1. Design check according to Eurocode and SIA standards ..........................................................................................455
6.5.11. Beam reinforcement design – RC2 module .......................................................................................................................456
6.5.11.1. Steps of beam reinforcement design .......................................................................................................................457
6.5.11.2. Checking calculated beam reinforcement ................................................................................................................459
6.5.11.3. Checking actual beam reinforcement.......................................................................................................................461
6.5.11.4. Beam reinforcement according to Eurocode2 .........................................................................................................464
6.5.11.5. Beam reinforcement according to DIN 1045-1 .........................................................................................................466
6.5.11.6. Beam reinforcement according to SIA 262:2003 ......................................................................................................467
6.5.12. Punching analysis – RC3 module .......................................................................................................................................469
6.5.12.1. Punching analysis according to Eurocode ................................................................................................................469
6.5.12.1.1. Punching analysis of columns according to Eurocode ............................................................................................................ 469
6.5.12.1.2. Punching analysis of wall ends and corners according to Eurocode ................................................................................... 474
6.5.12.2. Punching analysis according to SIA 262 ....................................................................................................................475
6.5.12.2.1. Punching analysis of columns according to SIA 262 ................................................................................................................ 475
6.5.12.2.2. Punching analysis of wall ends and wall corners according to SIA 262 .............................................................................. 479
6.5.13. Footing design – RC4 module ............................................................................................................................................480
6.5.13.1. Pad footing design ....................................................................................................................................................480
6.5.13.2. Strip footing design ..................................................................................................................................................491
6.5.14. Design of reinforced concrete cores and walls – RC5 module ...........................................................................................492
6.5.14.1. Defining reinforcement ............................................................................................................................................496
6.5.14.2. Check reinforcement ................................................................................................................................................499
6.5.14.3. Calculation of eccentricity ........................................................................................................................................500
6.5.14.3.1. Check reinforcement according to Eurocode 2 ........................................................................................................................ 501
6.5.14.3.2. Check reinforcement according to SIA 262 ................................................................................................................................ 503
6.5.14.4. Results ......................................................................................................................................................................504
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 9

6.6. Steel design ...................................................................................................................................................................................506

6.6.1. Steel beam design according to Eurocode 3 – SD1 module .................................................................................................506
6.6.1.1. ULS design parameters ...............................................................................................................................................512
6.6.1.2. SLS design parameters................................................................................................................................................517
6.6.1.3. Diagrams and design calculations ..............................................................................................................................519
6.6.1.4. Steel cross-section optimization - SD9 module ..........................................................................................................520
6.6.2. Steel beam fire design according to Eurocode 3 – SD8 module ..........................................................................................523
6.6.3. Bolted joint design of steel beams.......................................................................................................................................532
6.7. Timber design ...............................................................................................................................................................................536
6.7.1. Timber beam design – TD1 module .....................................................................................................................................536
6.7.2. Timber beam fire design – TD8 module...............................................................................................................................544
6.7.3. Timber cross-section optimization – TD9 module ...............................................................................................................547
6.8. Design of XLAM domains – XLM modul ........................................................................................................................................547
6.9. Masonry wall design – MD1 module ............................................................................................................................................551
6.9.1. Unreinforced masonry walls subjected to mainly vertical loading ......................................................................................551
6.9.1.1. Definition of masonry walls and their parameters .....................................................................................................551
6.9.1.2. Design check of masonry walls, definition of design- and joint parameters ..............................................................556
6.9.1.3. Display of masonry walls in the model .......................................................................................................................561
6.9.1.4. Results ........................................................................................................................................................................561
6.9.1.5. Principles of checking .................................................................................................................................................565
6.9.1.6. Design check according to Eurocode 6 .......................................................................................................................565
6.9.1.7. Design check according to NTC...................................................................................................................................567
6.9.1.8. Design check according to SIA ....................................................................................................................................570
7. AxisVM Viewer and Viewer Expert .................................................................................................................................. 573
8. Programming AxisVM – COM module ............................................................................................................................ 573
9. Examples ................................................................................................................................................................................ 575
9.1. Linear static analysis of a steel plane frame .................................................................................................................................575
9.2. Geometric nonlinear static analysis of a steel plane frame ..........................................................................................................576
9.3. Buckling analysis of a steel plane frame .......................................................................................................................................577
9.4. Vibration analysis (I-Order) of a steel plane frame .......................................................................................................................578
9.5. Vibration analysis (II-Order) of a steel plane frame ......................................................................................................................579
9.6. Linear static analysis of a reinforced concrete cantilever .............................................................................................................580
9.7. Linear static analysis of a simply supported reinforced concrete plate ........................................................................................581
9.8. Linear static analysis of a clamped reinforced concrete plate ......................................................................................................582
10. References........................................................................................................................................................................... 583
10

This page is intentionally left blank.

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 11

1. New features of Version X5

General
Customizable default names for new models, load cases and load groups 3.3.11 Preferences

Keyboard shortcuts can be assigned to Deformed shape, show non-visible 3.3.12 Keyboard shortcuts
parts grayed (see Menu.View category) and several rotation control com-
mands (see Speed buttons category).
Automatic dimensioning of structural gridlines 2.16.9 Guidelines

Labeling options can be set for library drawings as well 2.16.18 Display options
3.6.9 Drawings Library
Displaying applied reinforcement in rendered view 2.16.4 Display mode

Editing
Parametric thick-walled C, L and T shapes
Outline and hole polygons of thick-walled cross-sections can be edited or 3.1.16.1 Cross-Section Editor
deleted

BIM and connectivity

Improved Tekla Structures – AxisVM connection for Tekla Structures ver- 3.1.9.1 TI module for Tekla Structures versions 2019
sions 2019 and later (Import to AxisVM) and later

Improvements of reinforcement export to IFC, now including column and 3.1.6.2 Export to IFC
beam stirrups

Import/export of tapered walls to IFC (Open BIM connection) 3.1.6.2 Export to IFC
3.1.7.2 Importing IFC files

Export of eccentric walls and slabs to IFC, including reinforcement 3.1.6.2 Export to IFC

Export of selected elements from Revit to AxisVM

Tracking changes in the workflow between Revit and AxisVM (Close BIM 3.1.7.3 Importing Revit RAE files
connection)

Plugin to import parametric structures generated in Grasshopper 3.1.8.1 Grasshopper/Rhinoceros plugin

Plugin to import parametric structures generated in Dynamo 3.1.8.2 Dynamo/Autodesk plugin

Elements
Composite cross-sections 3.1.16.1 Cross-Section Editor

Custom stiffness and resistance for beam end releases in each direction
Semi-rigid connection defined by spring characteristic 4.9.9 Line elements

Plastic hinges on beam ends are available in x direction as well

New type of spring elements with plastic behavior defined by nonsym-

metric force-displacement function and hysteresis for nonlinear and dy-
namic analysis
3.1.17 Spring characteristics library
Damping coefficient is in spring characteristic library.
Bilinear damping function
Dashpot elements
12

Nodal support in a custom local system 4.9.11 Nodal support

Line support in reference direction 4.9.12 Line support

High grade concrete materials 4.9.1 Materials

Loads
Custom load combination in seismic analysis 4.10.23.1 Seismic load calculation according to
Eurocode 8

Resampling the original function with equidistant sampling 4.10.28 Dynamic loads (for time-history analysis) –
DYN module

Correcting of the dynamic acceleration function for zero final displace- 4.10.28 Dynamic loads (for time-history analysis) –
ment and velocity DYN module
5.3 Dynamic analysis

User-defined parametric fire curves for steel design (SD8 module) 6.6.2 Steel beam fire design according to Eurocode 3
– SD8 module

Fire design of timber structures according to EC5 (TD8 module) 6.7.2 Timber beam fire design – TD8 module

Optional new tendon geometry editor using linear or circular or parabolic 4.10.26 Tensioning - PS1 module
arc segments (PS1 module)

Analysis

Iteration control (constraint for strain & displacement increments) 5.1 Static analysis
5.3 Dynamic analysis

Interpolation and correcting method at dynamic load functions 5.3 Dynamic analysis

Point of application is calculated for unbalanced loads 6.1.26 Unbalanced loads

Results
Extension of an existing section segment group is also possible 2.16.15 Sections
Surface element stresses 6.1.22 Surface element stresses
Dynamic results (relative velocity, damping force, total force) of spring
6.1.24 Spring element dynamic results
elements are displayed
Automatic scaling of displacements
Dropdown lists displaying load cases / combinations, result components
6.1 Static
and result display modes on the main window and on design dialogs are
directly resizable.
It is easier to compare critical combinations as their numeric identifier 3.3.11 Preferences
can also be displayed

New result component α derived from support forces showing the ratio of 6.1.13 Support internal forces
horizontal and vertical forces
New principal surface force components: an1, an2, am1, am2, avRz 6.1.12 Surface element internal forces
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 13

Design
Steel design module checks Class 4 T sections ( (SD1 module) 6.6.1 Steel beam design according to Eurocode 3 –
SD1 module

Design of masonry walls according to Eurocode 6 & SIA –

6.9 Masonry wall design – MD1 module
new MD1 module

Composite column design (RC2 module) 6.5.10 Composite column design – RC2 module

Punching analysis with a custom reinforcement ratio (RC3 module)

6.5.12 Punching analysis – RC3 module
Punching analysis of wall ends and corners according to EC & SIA

Surface reinforcement parameters: Concrete cover can be specified for the

secondary (inner) layer of reinforcement as well
6.5.1 Surface reinforcement parameters and reinfor-
Limiting crack width for surface reinforcement calculation can be defined cement calculation - RC1 module
both for the axis of rebars (wk,max) and at the extreme concrete fiber
(wk2,max)
Diameter of side rebars can be defined for reinforced concrete beams 6.5.3 Beam reinforcement parameters (uniaxial
(RC2 module) bending)
User-defined actual stirrup spacing for reinforced concrete beams 6.5.11 Beam reinforcement design – RC2 module

Punching analysis according to calculated/actual reinforcement or with a 6.5.12 Punching analysis – RC3 module
custom reinforcement ratio (RC3 module)
Footing design for seismic combinations (RC4 module)
6.5.13 Footing design – RC4 module
Pad footing design for circular footings (RC4 module)

Design of reinforced concrete walls and - new RC5 module 6.5.14 Design of reinforced concrete cores and walls
– RC5 module

Approximate design of U and C steel cross-sections against lateral tor-

sional buckling for bending in the symmetry plane (SD1 module)
6.6 Steel design
Improving detection of lateral supports for the AutoMcr method (SD1
module)

Fire design of timber structures – new TD8 module 6.7.2 Timber beam fire design – TD8 module

Reports
New tables made available in report templates (rebar steel grades, seis- 2.10.3.1 Template-based reports
mic parameters, modal mass factors, fire loads, snow load parameters)
14

This page is intentionally left blank.

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 15

2. How to use AxisVM

Welcome to AxisVM!
AxisVM is a finite-element program for the static, vibration, and buckling analysis of structures. It was
developed by and especially for civil engineers. AxisVM combines powerful analysis capabilities with
an easy to use graphical user interface.
Preprocessing Modeling: geometry tools (point, lines, surfaces); automatic meshing; material and cross-section
libraries; element and load tools, import/export CAD geometry (DXF); interface to architectural design
software products like Graphisoft’s ArchiCAD via IFC to create model framework directly.
At every step of the modeling process, you will receive graphical verification of your progress. Multi-
level undo/redo command and on-line help is available.
Analysis Static, vibration, and buckling
Postprocessing Displaying the results: deformed/undeformed shape display; diagram, and iso-line/surface plots;
animation; customizable tabular reports.
After your analysis, AxisVM provides powerful visualization tools that let you quickly interpret your
results, and numerical tools to search, report, and perform further calculations using those results. The
results can be used to display the deformed or animated shape of your geometry or the
isoline/surface plots. AxisVM can linearly combine or envelope the results.
Reporting Reporting is always part of the analysis, and a graphical user interface enhances the process and
simplifies the effort. AxisVM provides direct, high quality printing of both text and graphics data to
document your model and results. In addition data and graphics can be easily exported (DXF, BMP,
JPG, WMF, EMF, RTF, HTML, TXT, DBF).

2.1. Hardware requirements

The table below shows the minimum/recommended hardware and software requirements, so you can
experience maximum productivity with AxisVM.
Recommended 8 GB RAM
configuration 50 GB of free hard disk space
17” color monitor (or larger), at least 1920x1080 pixels
A dual or multi-core processor over 2 GHz
Windows10 64-bit operating system
Mouse or other pointing devices
Windows compatible laser or inkjet printer
Minimal 2 GB RAM
configuration 10 GB of free hard disk space
15” color monitor, at least 1024x768 resolution
Mouse
Windows 7
Supported operat- Windows 10, Windows 8, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 (32 or 64 bit operating systems)
ing systems Partially supported (some add-ons or plugins my fail): Windows Vista, Windows XP/ SP3, Windows
Server 2003/SP1
Memory access To reach more memory is very important as it speeds up the analysis considerably.
64-bit and 32-bit The native 64-bit version of AxisVM X5 runs only on 64 bit operating systems. It has direct access to
versions the physical memory so no further settings are required.
The 32-bit version of AxisVM X5 runs on both 32 and 64 bit operating systems. It has direct access to
the lower 2 GB of the physical memory.
16

2.2. Installation

The software is protected by a hardware or software key.

Hardware key Using a protection by hardware key the software can be installed on multiple computers but can be
launched only if the hardware key is plugged in. Plug the key only after completing the installation as
certain operating systems try to recognize the plugged device and this process may interfere with the
driver installation.
Super Pro The most common protection device is the Sentinel SuperPro hardware key available as a single or a
hardware key multi-user network license. A single license can be used on one computer only (on Windows Terminal
Server networks on one terminal only).
The operation of the hardware key requires a driver. It is automatically installed by the AxisVM
Installer but in case of a failure the installation can be done later.
After completing the AxisVM installation look for the Sentinel folder and run Sentinel Protection Istaller
from there. If you have an installation DVD run Startup.exe and choose Reinstall driver.
Super Pro If you have a network license you must install the network key. In most cases AxisVM and the key are
network on different computers but to make the key available through the network the Sentinel driver must be
hardware key installed on both computers using the Sentinel Protection Installer. Connect the key to the USB port of
one of the computers. This way you select the AxisVM server.
After completing the installation a service called Sentinel Protection Server is launched to establish a
connection between the hardware key plugged into the server machine and the client machines.
Network licenses allow running as many AxisVM copies on the network as the purchased number of
licenses. Launched copies are registered into the hardware key. Closing the copy will remove the
registration making the license available on other machines. If the application becomes unresponsive
for some reason the registration is not removed immediately. The license will be available only after 3
minutes when the lack of response is detected by the server.
The hardware key manufacturer provides a tool called Sentinel License Monitor to check the currently
registered network licenses, the number of free licenses and remove the unresponsive licenses if
necessary. To run this tool start you internet browser and type in the local network IP address of the
server (i.e. the machine where the hardware key is plugged in) and append a reference to the port
6002, e.g.: http://192.168.18.167:6002. If you run the internet browser on the machine where the hard-
ware key is plugged in you can type simply http://localhost:6002.

Speeding up the If AxisVM is launched on a client machine it begins to search the network for available network keys
access of network checking each computer running Sentinel Pro Server regardless if the key is plugged or not. It may
keys slow down the search process. To improve the connection speed it is recommended to create an
NSP_HOST environment variable on the client machine, specifying the local network IP address of the
computer with the key, e.g.: NSP_HOST = 192.168.0.23.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 17

In case of more than one network key it is possible to set the NSP_HOST1, ...., NSP_HOST5 environ-
ment variables identifying computers with keys. The maximum number of keys that can be handled
this way is five.
To run AxisVM on any computer on the network SuperPro Server must be running on the server. If it
stops all running AxisVM programs stop.
Sentinel HL The Sentinel HL key is a new kind of protection device that does not require driver installation.
hardware key Plugging it into the USB port the Windows operating system identifies it as a HID (Human Interface
Device).
Sentinel HL keys also have single user and network models. A single license can be used on one
computer only (on Windows Terminal Server networks on one terminal only).
Sentinel HL Network licenses allow running as many AxisVM copies on the network as the purchased number of
network licenses. Sentinel HL network keys require installation of the HASP runtime environment. To do this
hardware key find the Sentinel LDK folder within the AxisVM installation folder and run the HASPUserSetup
application from there. The HASP runtime environment provides a connection between the hardware
key plugged into the server machine and the client machines. If the environment is not running
AxisVM cannot be launched on the client machines.
To purchase further licenses for a network key run the Admin Control Center (see below), choose
Sentinel Keys from the menu on the left and choose the appropriate network key from the list. Click
on the C2V icon on the right to save a c2v file. Send this file to your distributor with your license order.
Your distributor will send a v2c file with the additional licenses. Save it to your machine. To update the
number of licenses choose Update/Attach from the menu on the left then browse for the v2c file you
saved. Click the Open button to transfer license information to the network key. The new licenses will
become available.
Sentinel Admin To check the status of the environment run your internet browser on the server then type
Control Center http://localhost:1947. The Sentinel Admin Control Center will be displayed.

The Admin Control Center provides overview of the Sentinel HL and SL keys, their usage information
and helps disconnecting clients from licenses. Choose Sentinel Keys form the menu on the left to
display the list of available keys on the network.
18

If more than one hardware key is plugged and you are not sure which one belongs to AxisVM select
Products from the menu on the left. The list of keys will be reorganized by protected products. Look
for the one protecting AxisVM.
Software key Software key protection allows launching the program on the machine where the software key is in-
stalled. Software keys can be transferred to another machine using a tool (see later). After transferring
a software license the program will run only on the other machine and fails to run on the first one.
Sentinel SL Sentinel SL is not a physical device attached to a port but a software key specific to the given hard-
software key ware. It cannot be copied directly but can be transferred to another machine using the RUS tool of the
protection package.
Software key may be a reasonable solution if storage, connection or protection of the physical key
raises problems.
As the software key is stored on the hard drive / SSD of the machine, viruses, malware or flaws in the
update of the operating system may corrupt the key. In this case another software key must be pur-
chased.
Software key requires a HASP runtime environment. See installation details above in the Sentinel HL
network key section.
Requesting a To request a software license run the RUS_AxisVM_En.exe application from the Sentinel LDK subfolder
software license in the AxisVM installation folder.
To request a software license select the option Installation of new protection key at the bottom and
click on the Collect information button.
Save the file with c2v extension generated by this application and send it attached to a lincense re-
quest email to your AxisVM distributor.
Applying a Software license is a v2c file sent by your distirbutor. Save it to your computer.
software license Choose the Apply License File tab and enter the file name with full path to the Update File filed or click
on the […] button to browse.
Clicking on the Apply Update button activates the software license.
Check you license using the Admin Control Center tool (see above). Choose Sentinel Keys from the
menu on the left, and check if your Sentinel SL license appears in the list.
License transfer A software license can be transferred to another machine. After completing the transfer AxisVM will
run only on the other machine (works just like a hardware protection key removed and plugged into
the other machine). To transfer the license run the RUS_AxisVM_En.exe application on the other ma-
chine too, select the Transfer License tab and generate a recipient information file (*.id) and copy that
file to the first machine. Go back to the first machine, select the Transfer License tab, go to the Read
the recipient information file from field, click on the […] button and load the *.id file you have copied
from the other machine, fill out the Generate the license transfer file to field then click on the Generate
License Transfer File button. Copy the generated file with h2h extension to the other machine, go
there, select the Apply License File tab, go to the Update File field, browse for the h2h file you have
copied and click on Apply Update.
Preparing AxisVM Macs have a small number of professional structural analysis softwares on market, most programs
installation on a only support Windows.
Mac
If you want to run AxisVM on your Mac, here you have some ways to do that:
1. Virtual Machines
We recommend using a virtual machine program, ideally Parallels or VMWare Fusion, to run Windows
applications on a Mac without rebooting. For maximum performance we recommend dual-booting
Windows with Boot Camp instead.
A virtual machine is one of the best ways to run Windows desktop software. They allow you to install
Windows and other operating systems in a window on your Mac desktop. Windows will think it’s run-
ning on a real computer, but
You’ll need a Windows license to install Windows in a virtual machine. If you already have a product
key, you can download Windows installation media for free and install it in a virtual machine program.
Popular virtual machine programs for Mac include Parallels and VMware Fusion. Each of these is a
paid program, so you’ll have to buy both a Windows license and a copy of your virtual machine pro-
gram of choice. Parallels and VMWare Fusion both offer free trials, so you can try all these programs
and decide which is best for you.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 19

2. Boot Camp
Apple’s Boot Camp allows you to install Windows alongside MacOS on your Mac. Only one operating
system can be running at a time, so you’ll have to restart your Mac to switch between macOS and
Windows.
When you install Windows on your Mac, you’ll be able to use Windows and Windows applications
with the maximum possible performance. Your Mac will perform as well as a Windows PC with the
same specifications.
The downside here is that you can’t run macOS applications and Windows applications side-by-side at
the same time. If you just want to run a Windows desktop application alongside your Mac applica-
tions, a virtual machine will probably be ideal. On the other hand, if you want to play the latest Win-
dows games on your Mac, Boot Camp will be ideal.
As with virtual machines, you’ll need a Windows license to install Windows on your Mac.
3. Remote Desktop
If you already have a Windows system, you could skip running Windows software on your Mac com-
pletely and use remote desktop software to access the Windows machine from your Mac’s desktop.

 When using a Remote Desktop then users need Network License (including single user
network license) to launch AxisVM on Mac.

Installation If you have downloaded the installer application from our website, run it. Otherwise insert the AxisVM
installation DVD into the DVD drive. The Startup program starts automatically if the autoplay option is
enabled. If autoplay is not enabled, click the Start button, and select Run... . Open the Startup.exe
program on your AxisVM DVD. Select AxisVM X5 Setup and follow the instructions.
Installation under Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8 Operating System:
• You need the latest Sentinel driver. You can download it from www.axisvm.eu - Service /
downloads – Latest release updates / Sentinel Driver 7.6.8. (at the bottom of the left window)
Right click on the program icon with after the installation of AxisVM
• Choose the Properties menu item from the Quick Menu.
• Select the Compatibility tab on the appearing dialog and turn on the Run as administrator
checkbox.

By default the application and the example models will be installed on drive C: in
C:\AxisVM_X5 and C:\AxisVM_X5\Examples
folders. You can specify the drive and the folders during the installation process. The setup program
creates the AxisVM program group that includes the AxisVM application icon.
The application can be installed to the usual C: \ Program Files \ AxisVM_X5 folder (C: \ Program Files
(x86) \ AxisVM_X5 under 64-bit operating systems). However in this case the Run as administrator
property must be set for AxisVM.exe, AxisVM_x64.exe \ IDTFConverter \ DTFConverter.exe. Find these
files through Start Menu / Computer, right click on the files and choose Properties from the popup
menu, go to the Compatibility tab, find Privilege level and turn on the above option. Users without
administrative rights has to ask the administrator to set write access to the C: \ Program Files \
AxisVM_X5 folder (see Permissions under the Security tab).
32/64-bit versions On 64 bit operating systems the user can choose to install either the 32-bit or the 64-bit version of
AxisVM. Installing the 64-bit version also copies the 32-bit version to the hard disk but no shortcut is
created on the desktop for this file. On 32-bit operating systems only the 32-bit version is installed.

 It is not recommended to install AxisVM under the c:\Program Files folder as the program
placed there can be started only with administrative rights and there may be failures in running
libraries like the 3D PDF generator.

Silent installation The software can be installed in silent mode using command line. The Setup program accepts optional
command line parameters. These can be useful to system administrators, and to other programs call-
ing the Setup program.

Two typical examples are shown below considering 32 and 64-bit versions:
20

In case of 64-bit version:

setup.exe /VERYSILENT /SUPPRESSMSGBOXES /NORESTART /Dir="C:\AxisVMX5" lang=nl NoIcons=0
types=64bits Tasks=extensions1,extensions2

In case of 32-bit version:

setup.exe /VERYSILENT /SUPPRESSMSGBOXES /NORESTART /Dir="C:\AxisVMX5" lang=nl NoIcons=0
types=32bits Tasks=extensions1,extensions2

AxisVM setup is made by Inno Setup installer. The most important optional command line parameters
are listed below. For more information please see the Inno Setup help.

/SP-
Disables the This will install... Do you wish to continue? prompt at the beginning of Setup. Of
course, this will have no effect if the DisableStartupPrompt [Setup] section directive was set to yes.

/SILENT, /VERYSILENT
Instructs Setup to be silent or very silent. When Setup is silent the wizard and the background win-
dow are not displayed but the installation progress window is. When a setup is very silent this installa-
tion progress window is not displayed. Everything else is normal so for example error messages dur-
ing installation are displayed and the startup prompt is (if you haven't disabled it with DisableS-
tartupPrompt or the '/SP-' command line option explained above).

If a restart is necessary and the '/NORESTART' command isn't used (see below) and Setup is silent, it
will display a Reboot now? message box. If it's very silent it will reboot without asking.

/SUPPRESSMSGBOXES
Instructs Setup to suppress message boxes. Only has an effect when combined with '/SILENT' and
'/VERYSILENT'.

The default response in situations where there's a choice is:

• Yes in a 'Keep newer file?' situation.

• No in a 'File exists, confirm overwrite.' situation.
• Abort in Abort/Retry situations.
• Cancel in Retry/Cancel situations.
• Yes (=continue) in a DiskSpaceWar-
ning/DirExists/DirDoesntExist/NoUninstallWarning/ExitSetupMessage/ConfirmUninstall
situation.
• Yes (=restart) in a FinishedRestartMessage/UninstalledAndNeedsRestart situation.

5 message boxes are not suppressible:

• The About Setup message box.

• The Exit Setup? message box.
• The FileNotInDir2 message box displayed when Setup requires a new disk to be inserted
and the disk was not found.
• Any (error) message box displayed before Setup (or Uninstall) could read the command
line parameters.
• Any message box displayed by [Code] support function MsgBox.

/LOG
Causes Setup to create a log file in the user's TEMP directory detailing file installation and [Run]
actions taken during the installation process. This can be a helpful debugging aid. For example, if you
suspect a file isn't being replaced when you believe it should be (or vice versa), the log file will tell you
if the file was really skipped, and why.

The log file is created with a unique name based on the current date. (It will not overwrite or ap-
pend to existing files.)

The information contained in the log file is technical in nature and therefore not intended to be
understandable by end users. Nor is it designed to be machine-parseable; the format of the file is
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 21

subject to change without notice.

/LOG="filename"
Same as /LOG, except it allows you to specify a fixed path/filename to use for the log file. If a file
with the specified name already exists it will be overwritten. If the file cannot be created, Setup will
abort with an error message.

/NOCANCEL
Prevents the user from cancelling during the installation process, by disabling the Cancel button
and ignoring clicks on the close button. Useful along with '/SILENT' or '/VERYSILENT'.

/NORESTART
Instructs Setup not to reboot even if it's necessary.

/LANG=language
Specifies the language to use. language specifies the internal name of the language as specified in
a [Languages] section entry.

When a valid /LANG parameter is used, the Select Language dialog will be suppressed.

/DIR="x:\dirname"
Overrides the default directory name displayed on the Select Destination Location wizard page. A
fully qualified pathname must be specified.

/GROUP="folder name"
Overrides the default folder name displayed on the Select Start Menu Folder wizard page. If the
[Setup] section directive DisableProgramGroupPage was set to yes, this command line parameter is
ignored.

/NOICONS
Instructs Setup to initially check the Don't create a Start Menu folder check box on the Select Start
Menu Folder wizard page.

/TYPE=type name
Overrides the default setup type.

If the specified type exists and isn't a custom type, then any /COMPONENTS parameter will be
ignored.

/COMPONENTS="comma separated list of component names"

Overrides the default component settings. Using this command line parameter causes Setup to
automatically select a custom type. If no custom type is defined, this parameter is ignored.

Only the specified components will be selected; the rest will be deselected.

If a component name is prefixed with a "*" character, any child components will be selected as well
(except for those that include the dontinheritcheck flag). If a component name is prefixed with a "!"
character, the component will be deselected.
This parameter does not change the state of components that include the fixed flag.
Example:
Deselect all components, then select the "help" and "plugins" components:
/COMPONENTS="help,plugins"
Example:
Deselect all components, then select a parent component and all of its children with the exception
of one:
/COMPONENTS="*parent,!parent\child"

/TASKS="comma separated list of task names"

Specifies a list of tasks that should be initially selected.
22

Only the specified tasks will be selected; the rest will be deselected. Use the /MERGETASKS parame-
ter instead if you want to keep the default set of tasks and only select/deselect some of them.
If a task name is prefixed with a "*" character, any child tasks will be selected as well (except for
those that include the dontinheritcheck flag). If a task name is prefixed with a "!" character, the task
will be deselected.
Example:
Deselect all tasks, then select the "desktopicon" and "fileassoc" tasks:
/TASKS="desktopicon,fileassoc"
Example:
Deselect all tasks, then select a parent task and all of its children with the exception of one:
/TASKS="*parent,!parent\child"

The setup program creates desktop shortcut for

AxisVM X5 automatically.
Click on the icon to launch AxisVM.
Depending on the security settings of the ope-
rating system a security warning may appear.
Click on Yes and continue.
If AxisVM does not start set user rights as fol-
lows.
• Click the right mouse button on the Ax-
isVM icon.
• Select Properties from the popup menu
• Go to the Compatibility tab, and check
Run this program as an administrator
If you have administrator rights but the program
does not start check the following issues:
1. If a message is displayed with an er-
ror code, please check if the hardware
key is properly connected and the
green LED is lit. If no light can be seen
the USB port may be out of operation.
2. If no message appears, but the pro-
gram does not start check your antivi-
rus program (see below).

Running add-ons You can use add-ons created for AxisVM by external developers – or yourself. To run these programs
the AxisVM COM server must be registered in the Windows Registry. If you installed AxisVM with ad-
ministrative rights this registration is already completed. If the registration failed you can
run!Register_AxisVM.bat (on 32 bit operating systems) or !Register_AxisVM_x64.bat (on 64 bit operat-
ing systems) with administrative rights.

 32 bit add-ons launch the 32 bit version and are compatible only with that. 64 bit add-ons can
be used only on 64 bit versions.
False virus alarms Certain antivirus products running on the PC can send a false alarm during installation. This is caused
by heuristic algorithms searching for virus-like activities. These algorithms may detect the operation of
the special protection system of AxisVM and send a false alarm. If this happens you can do the follow-
ing
• If the antivirus product put AxisVM.exe into quarantine restore it
• Add AxisVM.exe to the exceptions (files not checked by the antivirus software)
• Reduce the sensitivity of the heuristic check on the control panel of the antivirus product
The VirusTotal website offers antivirus check of 47 different products.
Starting AxisVM Click the Start button, select Programs, AxisVM folder, and click the AxisVM X5 icon.
At startup a splash screen is displayed (see... 3.7.5 About) then a welcome screen is shown where you
can select a previous model or start a new one.
Clearing the checkbox at the bottom turns the welcome screen off for the future. To turn it on choose
the Settings\Preferences\Data Integrity dialog and check the Show welcome screen on strartup
checkbox. When setting up a new model the following dialog is displayed.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 23

Running AxisVM Both AxisVM.exe (32-bit version) and AxisVM_x64.exe (64-bit version) can be started in safe mode
in safe mode entering axisvm.exe /SAFE or axisvm_x64.exe /SAFE in the command line.
It is recommended to start AxisVM in safe mode in the following cases: (1) graphic card or driver
problems, (2) if problems are detected in multithreaded mode (3) if AxisVM hangs when trying to
recover the latest file damaged in a crash (4) if a plugin or addon module causes errors.

Program and file File exten- Can be opened by

File type
types sion Standard Viewer Academic Trial Light
Standard .axs/.axe yes yes yes yes DEN
Viewer .axv/.axw no yes no no no
made by Academic .axs/.axe WM yes yes WM DEN
Trial .axs/.axe yes yes yes yes DEN
Light .axd/.axr yes yes yes yes yes

WM watermark appears on the printed output

DEN depends on the number of elements in the model (Light version limit)

Upgrading It is recommended to install the new version to a new folder. This way the previous version will remain
available.

Converting earlier Models created in a previous versions are recognized and converted automatically. Saving files will
models use the latest format by default. Saving files in the file format of one of the previous is possible but
this way the information specific to the newer versions will be lost.

Steps of an analysis The main steps of an analysis using AxisVM are:

Creating the Model (Preprocessing)

Analysis
Static Vibration Dynamic Buckling
(linear/nonlinear) (first/second-order) (linear/nonlinear)

Evaluating the Results (Postprocessing)
Capacity Practically, the model size is limited by the amount of free space on your hard disk.

The restrictions on the model size and on the parameters of an analysis are as follows:
24

Professional
Entity Maximum
Nodes Unlimited
Materials Unlimited
Elements Truss Unlimited
Beam Unlimited
Rib Unlimited
Membrane Unlimited
Plate Unlimited
Shell Unlimited
Support Unlimited
Gap Unlimited
Diaphragm Unlimited
Spring Unlimited
Rigid Unlimited
Link Unlimited
Load cases Unlimited
Load combinations Unlimited
Frequencies Unlimited

Small Business
Entity Maximum
Nodes Unlimited
Materials Unlimited
Elements Only trusses 500
Truss+Beam+Rib * 250
Rib on the edge of a surface 1500
Any combination of membrane, 2000
plate or shell
Support Unlimited
Gap Unlimited
Diaphragm Unlimited
Spring Unlimited
Rigid Unlimited
Link Unlimited
Load cases Unlimited
Load combinations Unlimited

* If there are beams or/and ribs in the structure

2.3. Getting started

The best way to discover AxisVM is to build a simple model, analyse it and evaluate the results.
The steps of model building are described in the AxisVM Step by step tutorial.
There are three major steps in a modeling process:
Geometry The first step is to create the geometry model of the structure (in 2D or 3D).
Geometry can be drawn by hand or can be imported from other CAD programs. It is also possible to
draw elements (columns, beams, walls, slabs) directly.

Elements If you chose to draw the geometry first you must specify material and element properties, mesh the
geometry into elements (assigning the properties and a mesh, to the wire-frame model), and define
the support conditions.

Loads In the third step you must apply different loads on the model.
The end result will be a finite element model of the structure.
Once the model is created it is ready for analysis.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 25

You can find the steps of model building in detail in the AxisVM Step by step tutorial made available
from the Help menu. This tutorial helps to build and analyse simple structures.
• Beam model
• Frame model
• Plate model
• Membrane model (with parametric mesh)
• Membrane model (with domains)
• Shell model

AxisVM Step by step (for advanced users) guides the user through dynamic and seismic analysis of two
advanced models.
English language video tutorials for the example models can be found here:
https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCJoC3PkFc8XK4hGZ-1dUzuw
It is recommended that you read the entire User’s Manual at least once while exploring AxisVM.
In Chapter 1 you can find the timely, new features of the version.
Chapter 2 contains general information about using AxisVM. In other chapters the explanation follows
the pre- and postprocessor menu structures. Please, consult this User’s Manual every time you are
using AxisVM.

2.4. AxisVM user interface

This section describes the working environment of the full AxisVM graphical user interface. Please
read these instructions carefully. Your knowledge of the program increases the modeling speed and
productivity.
AxisVM screen After you start AxisVM a screen similar to the following picture appears:

Model name and location path

Top menu bar

Color legend window

Status window

Moveable Icon bar

Graphics
Property
area
Editor

Perspective toolbar Coordinate

window

Context sensitive Pet palette Speed buttons

help message

The parts of the AxisVM screen are briefly described below.

Graphics area The area on the screen where you create your model.
Graphics cursor The screen cursor is used to draw, select entities, and pick from menus and dialog boxes. Depending
on the current state of AxisVM, it can appear as a pick-box, crosshairs with pick-box, or pointer.
Top menu bar Each item of the top menu bar has its own dropdown menu list. To use the top menu bar, move the
cursor up to the menu bar. The cursor will change to a pointer. To select a menu bar item, move the
pointer over it, and press the pick button to select the item. Its associated sub-menu will appear.
26

Active icon The active icon represents the command that is currently selected.
Icon bar The icons represent working tools in a pictorial form. These tools are accessible during any stage of
work. The icon bar and flyout toolbars are draggable and dockable.
Coordinate window The window on the graphics area displaying the graphics cursor coordinates.
Color legend win- The window shows the color legend used in the display of the results. Appears only in the post-
dow processing session.
Info window The window shows the status of the model and results display.
Context sensitive Provides a help message that depends on the topic under process.
help
Property Editor The Property Editor offers a simple way to change certain properties of the selected elements or loads.
Pet palette Pet palettes appear when modifying geometry according to the type of the dragged entity (node,
straight line, arc). See... 4.8.21 Modify, transform
Speed buttons Speed buttons in the bottom right provide the fastest access to certain switches (parts, sections,
symbols, numbering, workplanes, etc.)
The model With AxisVM you can create and analyze finite element models of civil engineering structures. Thus
the program operates on a model that is an approximate of the actual structure.
To each model you must assign a name. That name will be used as a file name when it is saved. You
may assign only names that are valid Windows file names. The model consists of all data that you
specify using AxisVM. The model’s data are stored in two files: the input data in the filename.axs
and the results in the filename.axe file.
AxisVM checks if AXS and AXE files belong to the same version of the model.

2.5. Using the cursor, the keyboard, the mouse

Unicode is a computing industry standard for the consistent encoding, representation and handling of
text expressed in most of the world's writing systems. AxisVM X5 provides full Unicode support.
All windows appear according to the current Windows theme.
Graphics cursor As you move your mouse, the graphics cursor symbol tracks the movement on the screen. To select
an entity, an icon or menu item, move the cursor over it and click the left mouse button. The shape of
the cursor will change accordingly (see... 4.7.1 Cursor identification), and will appear on the screen in
one of the following forms:
Crosshairs: Pointer: Crosshairs/zoom mode:

If you pick an entity when the cursor is in its default mode (info mode), the properties of that entity
will be displayed as a tooltip.
Tooltip Depending on the menu your cursor is on, you may get the properties of the following entities:
Geometry node (point) coordinates, line length
Elements finite element, reference, degree-of-freedom, support, length, mass, material,
cross-section
Loads element load, nodal mass
Mesh meshing parameters
Static displacement, internal force, stress, reinforcement, influence line ordinate
Vibration mode shape ordinate
Dynamic displacement, velocity, acceleration, internal force, stress
R.C. Design specific reinforcement values
Steel Design displacement, internal force, utilization results and resistances
Timber Design displacement, internal force, utilization factor results and resistances
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 27

The keyboard You can also use the keyboard to move the cursor:

Arrow keys,  Moves the graphics cursor in the current plane.

[Ctrl] + Moves the graphics cursor in the current plane with a step size enlarged/reduced by a factor set in the
Arrow keys,  Settings dialog box.

[Shift]+ Moves the graphics cursor in the current plane on a line of angle n· , custom  or  +n·90°.
[][][][→],
[Home] [End] Moves the graphics cursor perpendicular to the current plane.

[Ctrl]+ Moves the graphics cursor perpendicular to the current plane with a step size enlarged/reduced by a
[Home], [End] factor set in the Settings dialog box.

[Esc] or  Interrupts the command and/or returns to an upper menu level.

right button
[Enter]+[Space]  Selects an item from a menu, executes a command, and selects entities.
left button These are termed command buttons.
[Alt] Activates the main menu
[Tab] Moves the focus from control to control in a dialog.
[+] [-] Performs fast zoom in/out and pan. The zoom and pan parameters are defined by the current position
of the graphics cursor in the graphics area, and by the magnification factor set in Settings / Options /
Zoom Factor. Center of the fast zoom in/out is always the current graphics cursor position.
[Insert] Moves the relative origin (i.e. the reference point of the relative coordinates) to the current graphics
or [Alt]+[Shift] cursor position.

 wheel Roll forward to zoom in

Roll backwards to zoom out
Press the wheel and drag to drag the drawing area
Centre of zoom in and zoom out is the current position of the cursor.
Hot Keys Keyboard combinations to access frequently used functions faster.
See... 2.6 Keyboard shortcuts

 right button Displays the Quick Menu. See... 2.7 Quick Menu

2.6. Keyboard shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts can be assigned to common operations, toolbar buttons, menu items. The default settings of AxisVM
are the following. The main toolbar button shortcuts are context-sensitive, i.e. the same shortcut can perform different tasks
on different tabs (Geometry, Elements, Loads, etc.).

General commands
Open ............................................. Ctrl+O
Save ............................................. Ctrl+S
Print ............................................ Ctrl+P
Undo ............................................. Alt+BkSp
Redo ............................................. Shift+Alt+BkSp
Layer Manager .................................... F11
Stories .......................................... F7
Table Browser .................................... F12
Report Maker ..................................... F10
Drawings Library ................................. F6
Save to Drawings Library ......................... F9
Delete ........................................... Del
Set relative origin .............................. Ins
Previous load case ............................... Ctrl+PgUp
Next load case ................................... Ctrl+PgDn
Icon bar
Selection ........................................ S
Color coding ..................................... Shift+C
Translate / Copy ................................. Shift+T
Rotate ........................................... Shift+R
Mirror ........................................... Shift+M
28
Scale ............................................ Shift+S
Dimension lines .................................. Ctrl+Alt+D
Edit background layers ........................... Ctrl+Alt+E
Part ............................................. Shift+P
Section lines .................................... Shift+Ctrl+X
Find ............................................. F3
Display options .................................. Ctrl+Y
Model information ................................ Shift+I
View
Zoom in ........................................ Ctrl+ü
Zoom out ....................................... Shift+Ctrl+ü
Fit in window .................................. Ctrl+W
Pan ............................................ Ctrl+M
Rotate ......................................... Ctrl+R
Front view ..................................... Ctrl+1
Side view ...................................... Ctrl+3
Top view ....................................... Ctrl+2
Perspective .................................... Ctrl+4
Wireframe ...................................... Alt+F5
Hidden line removal ............................ Alt+F6
Rendered ....................................... Alt+F7
Texture ........................................ Alt+F8
Guidelines
Structural grid ................................ Shift+G
Perpendicular .................................. Alt+V
Parallel ....................................... Alt+P
Bisector ....................................... Alt+B
Dividing point ................................. Alt+M
Intersection point of two lines ................ Alt+I
Toolbar
[Geometry] ....................................... Shift+F1
[Elements] ....................................... Shift+F2
[Loads] .......................................... Shift+F3
[Mesh] ........................................... Shift+F4
[Static] ......................................... Shift+F5
[Buckling] ....................................... Shift+F6
[Vibration] ...................................... Shift+F7
[Dynamic] ........................................ Shift+F8
[R. C. Design] ................................... Shift+F9
[Steel design] ................................... Shift+F10
[Timber design] .................................. Shift+F11
Geometry
Node ........................................... N
Line ........................................... L
Polygon ........................................ P
Rectangle ...................................... R
Arc ............................................ A
Arc based on three points ...................... B
Horizontal division ............................ H
Divides lines .................................. D
Intersect ...................................... I
Elements
Material ....................................... Shift+Ctrl+M
Cross-section .................................. Shift+Ctrl+C
Draw objects directly .......................... F4
Draw supports directly ......................... F5
Domain ......................................... D
Hole............................................ H
Line elements .................................. L
Nodal support .................................. T
Line support ................................... U
Node to node interface element ................. I
Line to line interface element ................. J
Loads
Load cases and load groups ..................... L
Teherkombinációk ............................... C
Nodal loads .................................... N
Concentrated loads on beams .................... B
Domain point load .............................. A
Load along line elements ....................... J
Surface edge loads ............................. E
Domain line load ............................... I
Distributed surface load ....................... H
Distributed load on domain ..................... D
Derived surface load over trusses/beams/ribs ... K
Load panel ..................................... P
Snow load ...................................... O
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 29
Wind load ...................................... W
Fluid loads .................................... F
Self Weight .................................... G
Moving line load definition .................... T
Mesh
Domain meshing ................................. G
Static
Linear static analysis ......................... L
Nonlinear static analysis ...................... N
Result display parameters ...................... D
Min, Max values ................................ Ctrl+X
Animation ...................................... A
Buckling
Buckling analysis .............................. L
Result display parameters ...................... D
Min, Max values ................................ Ctrl+X
Animation ...................................... A
Vibration
Vibration analysis ............................. L
Result display parameters ...................... D
Min, Max values ................................ Ctrl+X
Animation ...................................... A
Dynamic
Dynamic analysis ............................... L
Result display parameters ...................... D
Min, Max values ................................ Ctrl+X
Animation ...................................... A
R. C. Design
Reinforcement parameters ....................... P
Actual reinforcement ........................... T
Result display parameters ...................... D
Min, Max values ................................ Ctrl+X
Animation ...................................... A
Column reinforcement ........................... C
Beam reinforcement design ...................... B
Plate punching analysis ........................ U
Pad footing design ............................. F
Strip footing design ........................... I
Steel design
Design parameters .............................. P
Result display parameters ...................... D
Min, Max values ................................ Ctrl+X
Joint design ................................... J
Joint design ................................... K
Steel cross-section optimization ............... O
Timber design
Design parameters .............................. P
Result display parameters ...................... D
Min, Max values ................................ Ctrl+X
Animation ...................................... A
Menu
File
Open ........................................... Ctrl+O
Save ........................................... Ctrl+S
Print .......................................... Ctrl+P
Exit ........................................... Ctrl+Q
Edit
Undo ........................................... Alt+BkSp
Redo ........................................... Shift+Alt+BkSp
Select all ..................................... Num *
Copy ........................................... Ctrl+C
Paste .......................................... Ctrl+V
Delete ......................................... Del
Table Browser .................................. F12
Report Maker ................................... F10
Drawings Library ............................... F6
Save to Drawings Library ....................... F9
Weight report .................................. F8
Piano Sisma .................................... Ctrl+Alt+P
Assemble structural members .................... Shift+A
Break apart structural members ................. Shift+B
Reverse local coordinate system ................ Ctrl+E
Settings
Symbols ........................................ Ctrl+Y
Switches ....................................... Ctrl+D
Layer Manager .................................. F11
Stories ........................................ F7
Guidelines setup ............................... Ctrl+G
30
Structural grid ................................ Shift+G
Keyboard shortcuts ............................. Ctrl+K
Preferences
Fonts ........................................ Shift+Alt+F
Analysis ..................................... Shift+Alt+B
View
Front view ..................................... Ctrl+1
Top view ....................................... Ctrl+2
Side view ...................................... Ctrl+3
Perspective .................................... Ctrl+4
One story up ................................... PgUp
One story down ................................. PgDn
Zoom in ........................................ Ctrl+ü
Zoom out ....................................... Shift+Ctrl+ü
Fit in window .................................. Ctrl+W
Pan ............................................ Ctrl+M
Rotate ......................................... Ctrl+R
Wireframe ...................................... Alt+F5
Hidden line removal ............................ Alt+F6
Rendered ....................................... Alt+F7
Texture ........................................ Alt+F8
Window
Property Editor ................................ Shift+Alt+P
Status ......................................... Shift+Alt+I
Color coding ................................... Shift+Alt+C
Coordinates .................................... Shift+Alt+K
Color legend ................................... Shift+Alt+L
Load background picture ........................ Ctrl+B
Split horizontally ............................. Shift+H
Split vertically ............................... Shift+V
Close window ................................... Ctrl+F4
Decrease label font size ....................... Ctrl+Alt+I
Increase label font size ....................... Ctrl+Alt+O
Drawings Library ............................... F6
Save to Drawings Library ....................... F9
Help
Contents ....................................... F1
Speed buttons
Auto intersection ................................ Ctrl+I
Mesh display on/off .............................. M
Show only selected elements ...................... Ctrl+F
Load display on/off .............................. Ctrl+L
Result display options
None ............................................. Ctrl+F5
Diagram .......................................... Ctrl+F6
Isolines ......................................... Ctrl+F7
Isosurfaces 2D ................................... Ctrl+F8
Section line ..................................... Ctrl+F9
Isosurfaces 3D ................................... Ctrl+F10
Diagram + average values ......................... Ctrl+F11
List of result components ........................ Q
Coordinates
X ................................................ X
Y ................................................ Y
Z ................................................ Z
L ................................................ Shift+Ctrl+L
R ................................................ Shift+Ctrl+R
A ................................................ Shift+Ctrl+A
H ................................................ Shift+Ctrl+H
B ................................................ Shift+Ctrl+B
Temporary workplane .............................. Shift+Ctrl+W
Lock X[m] : ...................................... Ctrl+Alt+X
Lock Y[m] : ...................................... Ctrl+Alt+Y
Lock Z[m] : ...................................... Ctrl+Alt+Z
Lock L[m] : ...................................... Ctrl+Alt+L
Lock r[m] : ...................................... Ctrl+Alt+R
Lock a[°] : ...................................... Ctrl+Alt+A
Lock h[m] : ...................................... Ctrl+Alt+H
Lock b[°] : ...................................... Ctrl+Alt+B
Relative / global coordinates .................... Shift+D
Relative / global polar coordinates .............. Shift+E
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 31

Hot Keys in Tables

Ctrl+L Browse Libraries

Alt+F4 Exit
Ctrl+Insert New line
Ctrl+Del Delete line
Ctrl+A Select all
F5 Jump to line
Ctrl+D Default format
Ctrl+Alt+F Set column format
Ctrl+R Set result display mode (for result tables)
Ctrl+G Edit new cross-section (for cross-section tables)
Ctrl+M Modify cross-section (for cross-section tables)
F1 Context sensitive help
F9 Add table to the report
F10 Report Maker

Hot keys in the Report Maker

Ctrl+T Insert text

Ctrl+Alt+B Insert Page Break
Ctrl+W Export to RTF file
F3 Report Preview
Ctrl+P Print
Ctrl+Del Delete

Mouse wheel commands

Scroll up Zoom in
Scroll down Zoom out
Wheel down + move Pan (slow)
Wheel down + ALT + move Rotate
Wheel down + CTRL + move Pan (fast)

2.7. Quick Menu

 right button When the cursor is over the graphics area, by pressing the right mouse button a quick menu appears
in accord with the current command in use.
32

Selection Geometry / Elements / Loads Results

2.8. Dialog boxes

After selecting a function usually a dialog box appears on the screen. These dialog boxes can be used
the same way as any other Windows dialog.
The dialog font can be changed by selecting the Settings / Preferences / Fonts dialog and clicking the
font sample label Dialog boxes.
You can change the position of all dialog windows. The program saves the latest position and displays
the dialog on the same position next time.

2.9. Table Browser

AxisVM uses tables to display numerical information on the screen allowing changes in formatting. The
tables operate in the same way independent of the content displayed. All the tables AxisVM creates are
[F12] available through the Table Browser dialog box by clicking its button or pressing [F12].
The model data to be displayed in the Table Browser can be selected from the tree structure in the left
side of the browser. If you use Table Browser while working in the pre-processor, input model data is
displayed only. While working in the post-processor, the model results are also displayed.

 Only the data of the current selection (if any) or of the active (i.e. displayed) part is listed by
default.
The tree view on the left lists element / load data, result tables and libraries in a hierarchy and can also
be used as a model overview.

Sorting by columns Data entry and result tables can be sorted by most of the columns. Hovering over the header of a
sortable column makes the header cell color change. Clicking on the header turns the cell to light blue
and the sorting order changes (ascending, descending, no sort). Table rows will be sorted accordingly.

Most data entry tables can be sorted by multiple criteria. Sorting the table of nodes by Z then by X
means that nodes with an equal Z coordinate will be sorted by their X coordinate. The order of criteria
depends on the order of clicking. Result tables allow sorting by one result component column only.
But there may be certain columns that can be used as the first criterion (like Cross-section in the Beam
force tables, i.e. you can sort the results first by cross-section then by a force component).
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 33

In multiple criteria are applied the order of

criteria can be checked by right clicking the
header cell and checking the last item of the
popup menu (Turn off sorting by columns):

Color coding of Tables of the Table Browser apply color coding to the displayed values (e.g. domain thickness, beam
table cells cross-section, beam length, result components, etc.). Cell background colors appear only on the
screen. It helps to find common, smaller of bigger values.
Result tables show negative values in shades of blue, positive values in shades of red. Efficiencies are
displayed in shades of green under the limit and in shades of red above it. Color coding can be disa-
bled, see Format / Color coding of table cells.
Add new
row Copy Print
Paste
Cross-Section Fit
Delete Columns
Editor

Library Add to report

Using the table A table can contain more rows and/or columns than can be displayed at the same time.
It can be viewed in its entirety using the scroll bars and/or using the keyboard as follows:
Arrow keys Moves the edit focus up and down, to the left and to the right, and scrolls the table along the rows or
 left button columns. Clicking an editable cell moves the edit focus to that cell.
[Home] Moves the focus to the first cell of the row.
[End] Moves the focus to the last cell of the row.
[Ctrl]+[Home] Moves the focus to the first cell of the first row
[Ctrl]+[End] Moves the focus to the last cell of the last row.
[Page Up] Displays the previous page of rows.
[Page Down] Displays the next page of rows.
34

[Ctrl]+ [→] Moves the focus to the next (to the right) page of columns (only in tables where more columns can be
displayed at the same time).
[Ctrl]+ [] Moves the focus to the previous (to the left) page of columns (only in tables where more columns can
be displayed at the same time).
[Enter] Ends the current editing in the edit box storing the data entered and moves the edit box a column to
the right or to the first column of the next row.
[Esc] Aborts the current editing in the edit box.
 right button
[Shift] While the [Shift] key is down all direction keys will select cells instead of moving the edit focus. You can
also select cells by dragging the mouse. Clicking a fixed (topmost) cell of a column selects the column.
Clicking a fixed (leftmost) cell of a row selects the row. Clicking the top left cell selects the entire table.
Selected cells can be copied to clipboard as a table. If selection is within an editable column you can
set a common value for the selected cells.
See... Set Common Value below

File

Browse from If the table of Materials, Cross-sections, Spring characteristics or XLAM timber panels is selected the first
libraries menu item allows browsing of the built-in material library, cross-section library, spring characteristics
library or XLAM timber panels library.
[Ctrl]+ [L]
Import DBase File Imports a DBase file name.dbf into the current table. The program checks the values of the fields and
sends an error message if an incompatible value is found.

Save As DBase File Exports the current table into a Dbase file name.dbf. The field names are generated based on the
names of the columns. The fields will be of text type.

Save As HTML Exports the current table into an HTML file name.htm. This file can be imported as a table into Word
or can be opened in web browser applications. Some formatting information of the columns will be
lost.
Save As TXT Exports the current table into a TXT (ASCII) file name.txt.

Save As RTF Exports the current table into an RTF file name.rtf using the current template file. You can import this
file into Microsoft Word or any other word processor which can import RTF files.
See... 2.10.2 Report
New cross-section Creates a new cross-section data file name.sec. The table created will be placed together with the
table cross-sections of the same type.
You can store cross sections of any type in these tables. Type of the table determines only the position
of the table in the Cross-section Library.
Cross-section table You can modify properties (table’s name, cross.section type) of a user defined table.
properties
Delete cross- sec- You can delete a user defined table.
tion table
New XLAM table Creates a new XLAM timber panel layer table under LIBRARIES / XLAM timber panels.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 35

Rename XLAM table You can change the name of a user defined table within XLAM timber panels.
Delete XLAM table You can delete a user defined table within XLAM timber panels.
New spring charac- Creates a new spring characteristics table under LIBRARIES / Spring characteristics library.
teristics table
Rename spring If a custom spring characteristics table is selected within the Spring characteristics library this menu
characteristics table item appears and the name of the table can be changed.
Delete spring If a custom spring characteristics table is selected within the Spring characteristics library this menu
characteristics table item appears and the table can be deleted.
Print Prints all the information displayed in the table to the selected printer or to a file, with the page
[Ctrl + [P] header and comment row previously set with the File/Header menu command.
Turning on Description of table columns an explanation of columns appears at the bottom of the
table.

Exit Exits the table in the same way as the Cancel button (the changes are not saved).
[Alt]+ [F4]

Edit

New row Adds a new row to the list, and allows you to fill all the editable cells with data in a fixed order from
left to right.

[Ctrl]+ [Insert]
Delete rows Deletes the selected rows. Also available in the popup menu.

[Ctrl]+ [Del]
Delete textures Available only if materials are listed. Removes texture from the
selected materials. Available in the popup menu.

Select table Selects the entire table. Clicking the top left cell does the same.
[Ctrl]+ [A]

Design new custom Starts the graphics Cross-Section Editor, allowing the input of a new custom cross-section.
cross-section

[Ctrl]+[G]
36

Modify custom Starts the graphics Cross-Section Editor, allowing the modification of a custom cross-section
cross-section previously created with the graphics Cross-Section Editor.

[Ctrl]+[M]
Automatic cross- If this function is on changing section parameters in the table leads to the recalculation of geometry
section shape and cross-section parameters.
update
Delete unused Unused cross-sections will be deleted from the table.
cross-sections
Copy Copies selected cells to the Clipboard as a table. Also available in the popup menu.

[Ctrl]+ [C]
Paste Pastes table cells from the Clipboard overwriting cell values.
If any of the values is unacceptable Paste aborts.
If entire rows were cut or copied and the table allows inserting new rows you can also add clipboard
[Ctrl]+ [V]
data to the end of the table instead of overwriting the existing rows.
Set common value Sets a common value for the selected cells within a column.
Example: you can set the Z coordinate of all nodes to the same value making the model absolutely
flat. Available from the Table Browser Menu / Edit / Set common value.
Also available in the popup menu.
Go to Jumps to a specified row in the table.
[F5]

Format
Data entry tables

Turn on/off columns You can specify whether a column is visible or not, by setting the check boxes of the corresponding
columns. If some columns are turned off, information on hidden columns appear below the table.
Checking the Save as default option makes the column status the default for that type of table.
[Ctrl]+ [Alt]+ [F]
The display format is set according to the settings in the Units/Settings dialogue window (See... 3.3.8
Units and Formats).
Many cells require the entry of a numeric value. When entering real numbers you can use the
following characters:
+-01234567890E
and the standard Windows decimal separator specified in Start / Settings / Control Panel / Regional
Settings / Number / Decimal symbol field.
In some cases you cannot enter a negative number so the - key is deactivated while entering these
kind of values. If an integer value is required you cannot use the decimal separator and E.
Restore default Restores the default format of the entire table (column visibility and decimals).
format
Ctrl+D
Color coding of Color coding of cell backgrounds can be enabled or disabled here.
table cells
Ctrl+Alt+C
Order of load cas- The display order of load cases can be customized.
es... See... 4.10.1 Load cases, load groups

Intermediate secti- After dividing or meshing beams or ribs with variable cross-section AxisVM builds up intermediate
ons cross-sections. This menu item is to turn on/off the display of intermediate cross-sections at the end
of the list.
Show used cross- After the Delete unused cross-sections command only the sections in bold will remain in the list.
sections in boldface
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 37

The cross-section names which are signed by bold letter will remain in the table if the Delete unused
cross-sections switch is turned on.
In case of result query new items appear on the Format menu and the Toolbar.

During
result query

Result Display You can control finding the extremes for result components and set to show results (Result) and/or
Options just the extremes (Extremes).
[Ctrl]+[R] See in detail… 6.1.5 Result tables
Results On/Off Display of results can be turned on / off.
[Ctrl]+[T]
Extremes On/Off Display of extremes can be turned on / off.
[Ctrl]+[E]
Property Filtering Property filtering helps you to select elements
to include in the table.

[Ctrl]+[Q]

Report

Current report You can set the current report. Tables will be added to this report. See... 2.10 Report Maker
Add table to Adds the current table to the current report. If the selected node in the treeview has sub-nodes (e.g.
report MODEL or Loads) all tables under that node will be added. If the current table is a result table and is
set to display extremes only all sub-tables will display extremes only. See... 2.10 Report Maker.
[F9]
Report Maker Opens Report Maker.

[F10]
38

Help

Help on Current Displays info about the table.

Table

Help to Use Table Displays info about the table browser operation.
Browser

OK Saves the data and closes the table.

Cancel Closes the table without saving the data.

 Result tables also display the extremes (minimum and maximum values) of the data if you
select this option in the Display options dialog when you enter Table Browser. Displaying both
the individual values and the extremes is the default setting.

2.10. Report Maker

[F10]

Report Maker is a tool to compile a full report of a project using report items (tables / drawings /
pictures created by AxisVM and user-defined text blocks). Reports are stored in the model file (*.axs)
and can be printed or saved as a Rich Text Format (RTF) file. RTF files can be processed by other
programs (e.g. Microsoft Word).
Tables exported from Table Browser are automatically updated if the model has been changed or
some of its parts were deleted.
Report Maker can handle several different reports for the same project. The structure of reports is
displayed in a tree view on the left. The properties of the selected report item are shown on the right
side of the window.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 39

Folder If a folder is selected its name can be edited on the right.

Table If a table is selected, its comment text, column titles and other properties are shown. Display of title,
comment and columns can be turned on and off. Title and comment can be edited but custom titles
are not translated when changing report language.
Text If a text block is selected the text is shown on the right. Click the button Edit text... to make changes.
Picture or Drawing If a picture or drawing is selected it is shown on the right. Its size, alignment and caption can be set by
clicking the Settings button.

Drawings Library By clicking the Drawings Library tab you can browse the saved drawings and add the selected ones to
the report. Unlike the pictures in the Gallery these drawings are not graphics files, but view settings
stored to recreate the drawing at any time. This way drawings will be automatically updated if we
change and recalculate the model.
See in detail... 3.6.9 Drawings Library, 3.6.10 Save to Drawings Library.
Gallery By clicking the Gallery tab you can browse the saved pictures (BMP, JPG, WMF, EMF) located in a
folder named Images_modelname and add the selected ones to the report. This folder is automatically
created as a subfolder of the model folder.
See in detail... 2.10.5 Gallery

Settings
40

Click the Settings... button to change the caption, size, justification, rotation color mode or scaling of
drawings.
You can save the current drawing on screen or the result tables in design modules with the function of
Edit\ Saving drawings and design result tables in main menu.
See... 3.2.12 Saving drawings and design result tables
One or more selected pictures in the Gallery can be inserted into a report by selecting menu item
Gallery/Add pictures to the report or clicking the arrow button above the Gallery or by drag and drop.
In printed reports Report Maker automatically builds a table of contents and inserts it to the
beginning of the report. Tables are listed according to their titles. Text blocks are listed only if they
were formatted using one of the Heading styles in the Text Editor. Pictures are listed only if they have
a caption.

2.10.1. Report toolbar

Creates a new report

See… 2.10.2 Report
Creates a new report based on a template
See… 2.10.3.1 Template-based reports
Creates a new report based on filters
See… 2.10.3.3 Filter-based report
Inserts a folder
See… 2.10.3 Edit
Inserts formatted text
[Ctrl]+[T] See… 2.10.3 Edit

Inserts a page break

[Ctrl]+[Alt]+[B] See… 2.10.3 Edit

Selection filter
See… 2.10.3 Edit
Deletes selected reports or report items
[Del], [Ctrl]+[Del] See… 2.10.3 Edit

Preview of the entire report

[Ctrl]+[R] See… 2.10.2 Report

Exports the report as an RTF file

[Ctrl]+[W] See… 2.10.2 Report

Print
[Ctrl]+[P] See… 2.10.2 Report

Undo
[Ctrl]+[Z] See… 2.10.3 Edit

Redo
[Shift]+[Ctrl]+[Z] See… 2.10.3 Edit
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 41

2.10.2. Report

New report Creates a new report. Report names can be 32 characters long.

Delete entire report Deletes the current report (i.e. the report which contains the selected item). Pictures used in the report
are not deleted from Gallery.
[Del], [Ctrl]+[Del]
Rename Gives a new name to an existing report.
Save As TXT Exports the report into a ASCII text file. Drawings or pictures are not included.
Export as RTF Saves the report as name.rtf using the current template. If you save the file to a folder different from
the model folder all picture files used in the report are copied to an automatically created subfolder
Images_modelname. It is necessary because pictures are only linked and not saved into the RTF
document. To print the RTF report on a different machine make sure that picture files are also copied
to a subfolder Images_modelname.
Character and paragraph formatting of text blocks will be exported. The only exception is the
character color. Tables will be exported as RTF tables. Table titles are formatted with Heading 3 style
so it is easy to build a table of contents automatically using Microsoft Word.

RTF Options AxisVM saves reports to RTF files using a template

(the default one is Template.rtf in the program
folder). You can use other templates as well. When
changing a template you can create your own cover
sheet and header/footer for the report. Read the text
of the template file carefully before changing it.

Format of drawings in RTF file can also be set:

Embedded PNG: Drawings are embedded into the file. This method provides portability with a smaller
size due to lossless compression of pictures.
Link to PNG files: This option keeps the RTF file smaller as drawings are stored in external files.
Drawings appear only if pictures are present in an Images_modelname subfolder relative to the folder
of the RTF file.
Embedded EMF: Drawings are embedded into the file as EMF (Enhanced Windows Metafile). It impro-
ves portability but can result in huge file size.
Label font size: Here the label font size used on exported drawings can be fine-tuned.
Gridlines: Gridlines of exported tables can also be turned on/off.
Report preview Displays a print preview dialog. You can set the zoom factor between 10% and 500% (Page Width and
Full Page is also an option). Click the buttons or use the keyboard to move backward and forward
[F3]
between pages ([Home] = first page [←] = previous page, [→] = next page, [End] = last page.
Report preview can display multiple pages. [PgUp] [PgDn] steps back and forward according to the
number of pages displayed.
42

Print A dialog to set printing parameters and print a report. The options are the same as the table printing
options. Turning on Description of table columns an explanation of columns appears at the bottom
[Ctrl]+[P] of each table.

Exit Quits the Report Maker.

2.10.3. Edit

Some of the functions in the Edit menu are also available in the popup menu after clicking right
mouse button on a report item.
Undo Undoes the effect of the previous command.
Redo Executes the command which was undone.
Report template See… 2.10.3.1 Template-based reports

Insert folder Inserts a new folder into the tree, below the current item. The current folder name appears on the
right side under the folder icon.
The number of expanded levels (1-7) of the report tree can be set with the level-adjustment bar.
Insert text into Starts a built-in Text Editor to create a new text block. The formatted text will be inserted after the
report selected report item.

[Ctrl]+[T]

Page break Inserts a page break after the selected report item.

[Ctrl]+[Alt]+[B]
Move up/down Moves up/down the selected report item by one.
selected report item

Move to / Copy to Moves / copies the selected report item to the end of another report.
Selection filter Determines which types of report items can be selected (report, table, drawing, picture, text, page
break, folder).
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 43

Select subitems If you turn this checkbox on and select a folder all subitems will be selected automatically.
automatically

Deselect all Deselects all selected items in the documentation.

Select all items of Every report item of the current report will be selected.
the current report

Delete Deletes the selected report item (text block, picture, table, page break). If the current selection in the
tree is a report it deletes the entire report.
[Del], [Ctrl]+[Del]
Delete all report Deletes all items from the current report but does not delete the report itself.
items

2.10.3.1. Template-based reports

Report templates can be used to generate reports based on certain presets, filters and preferences.
Generated reports consist of drawings and tables. Templates can be saved as files and reused to gen-
erate report for other models.
The range of included elements, model data and result components can be set by filters.

Clicking on the icon opens the template administrator

dialog. If the current report was generated from a
template, the template is loaded. If the current report
was not based on a template a new default template
appears.
If the dialog is opened up (see below) a list of prede-
fined (gray background) and user-defined (on white
background) templates appears in the lower part.
Clicking on a list item loads the template.
Templates are listed with their names specified in the
template editor (See… 2.10.3.2 Editing a template).

Templates are saved to and loaded from the follow-

ing folder:
c:\ Users \ [user name] \ AppData \ Roaming \ AxisVM
\ [version number] \ Templates.

Rebuild report If the model has been extended and the report should be updated (for example the steel member
design has been completed) click on the Rebuild button.
Any report item inserted by the user will be removed.
This button is to open or close the bottom part of dialog with the list of templates.

Toolbar icons have the following functions.

Edit template
Content filters and views used on drawings can be edited. See… 2.10.3.2 Editing a template
Save this template to a file
The current template can be saved to a file to reuse it in another model. Report templates have a *.rep
extension and are saved to the templates folder described above.
Create a new report
Builds a new report based on the current template.
Import...
Template files (*.rep) can be imported from other locations to the folder of the template library. Im-
ported templates can be used the same way as the predefined ones.
Delete
Removes the selected template from the template library.
44

2.10.3.2. Editing a template

It is a complex task to create a report template. The steps of this process is listed on the left. Clicking
on these items we can edit filter options and other settings. An edit box under the list allows entering a
name for the template. The template administrator dialog lists templates by their names.

Elements

The first step is selecting element types to include in the report and choosing the element classi-
fication. If Structural element types is selected, elements will be classified by their finite element type. If
Architectural element types is selected, elements will be classified by their architectural type (determ-
ined from the element geometry).
Element data and results can be selected separately for reporting.
Next steps will display tables and drawings based on this selection.

Subgroups

The second step is to set the subgroups for the reported elements. A complete sub-report will be built
for each subgroup.
If the option Selected elements is activated only elements selected before opening Report Maker will be
reported.
If the option Subgroups from logical parts is activated subgroups can be created from domains with the
same thickness, structural members with the same cross-section or stories (only the selected stories will
be reported).
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 45

If Report domains one by one is checked each domain will be reported separately. Internal domains
(being entirely within another domain) are reported with the outer domain even in this case.
If the Entire model is selected subgroups can be created also from user defined parts.

Model data
drawings

If Overview is checked a view of the model will be insterted at the beginning of the report. Click Select a
view... to choose a view from the Drawings Library.
Check Model drawings if you want to include automatically created load and result diagrams. Click
Select a view... to choose a view from the Drawings Library.
Generated diagrams will inherit all settings of the selected drawing (point of view, status of graphics
symbols, numbering, labeling etc.) with minor adjustments. If no drawing is selected (e.g. the Drawings
Library is empty) drawings will follow the current view in the active window.
If a diagram is displayed only on a certain part of the structure the view is zoomed to fit drawing to the
window. The point of view and the status of graphics symbols will remain unchanged.
Checking Adjust drawings to leave space for info windows sets the zooming to fit the drawing within the
maximum rectangular space available among the info windows.

Load diagrams

If Insert load diagrams for the following load cases is checked, select load cases to add their load diag-
rams to the report. Load diagrams will be generated from the view set for Model drawings in the pre-
vious step.
46

Model data tables

Select model data tables to add to the report. You can set the visible columns for tables to fine tune
the report content.
Under Elements you will find only those elements you selected in the first step.
Under Loads you can select load cases to add their load data tables to the report.

Load cases and

combinations
for result display

AxisVM provides a huge amount of results. It is important to decide which load cases, combinations,
envelopes or critical combinations should contribute to the report for displacements, internal forces,
stresses, reinforcement values, steel or timber design checks.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 47

Result diagrams
and tables

The last step is to select from the possible result tables and control the visibility of their columns. It is
also possible to generate result diagrams for result components. Click in the Drawing column in a row
of a result component. You can choose a drawing mode for that component from the dropdown list
even if you leave the checkbox unchecked (hiding the respective column). Result diagrams will be ge-
nerated from the view set for Model drawings and will be inserted before the table.

2.10.3.3. Filter-based report

Creating reports from filter options is an earlier method which is less configurable and its content is not
updated but can be used in simple cases. Select element and load types, load cases and result compo-
nents from the filter tree on the left to control report composition. The resulting report appears in the
tree on the right. Its individual items can be checked or unchecked. Only checked items will be included
in the generated report.

2.10.4. Drawings

Add drawings to the Inserts the selected drawing(s) from the Drawings Library into the selected report. Place of insertion is
report determined by the selected item of the report tree. Effect of this function is the same as that of the
button on the Drawings Library tab.
Format of drawings See... 2.10.2 Report
in RTF file...
48

2.10.5. Gallery

Add pictures to the Inserts selected pictures into the current report.
report
Copy pictures to You can copy bitmaps (.BMP, .JPG, .PNG) and Windows Metafiles (.WMF) to the folder
Gallery Images_modelname.

Delete pictures from Deletes selected pictures from the Gallery. Files are permanently deleted.
Gallery

Delete unused Deletes pictures which are not used in the reports.
pictures
Sort by name Gallery sorts pictures by filename / by type (.BMP, .EMF, .JPG, .WMF) or by date.
/ type / date

Reverse order If checked pictures are sorted in descending order. Otherwise pictures are sorted in ascending order.

2.10.6. Gallery and Drawings Library Toolbars

You can perform certain tasks faster using these small toolbars.

Deletes selected pictures or drawings from the Gallery/Drawings Library.

Inserts selected pictures or drawings into the current report.

Place of the insertation is determined by the selected item in the report tree.
Copies pictures from other locations to the Gallery. This function is not available on the Drawings
Library tab.

2.10.7. Text Editor

After selecting Insert text to report a formatted text can be created in a simple WordPad-like text
processor.
File
Open The main purpose of this function is to load a Rich Text file written in Text Editor. If you open an RTF
[Ctrl]+[O] file created in another word processor it may contain special commands (e.g. tables, paragraph
borders, Unicode characters) which are not supported this simple editor. As a result you may get a
series of rtf control commands instead of formatted text.
Save Saves the text into an RTF file.
[Ctrl]+[S]
Exit Quits Text Editor.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 49

Edit
Undo / Redo Undoes / redoes the last editing action.
[Alt]+[BkSp] /
[Shift]+[Alt]+[BkSp]
Cut Cuts the selected text and places it to the Clipboard.
[Ctrl]+[X]
Copy Copies the selected text to the Clipboard.
[Ctrl]+[C]
Paste Pastes the content of the Clipboard at the current position.
[Ctrl]+[V]
Find You can search for any text in the document. You can search from the beginning or from the current
[Ctrl]+[F] position. You can search whole words only and turn on and off case sensitivity.
Find next If a match was found you can get the next match with this function.
[F3]
Select all Selects the entire text.
[Ctrl]+[A]
Character
Bold Applies bold formatting to the selected text.
[Ctrl]+[B]
Italic Applies italic formatting to the selected text.
[Ctrl]+[I]
Underline Applies underline formatting to the selected text.
[Ctrl]+[U]
Color Sets the character color of the selection.
[Ctrl]+[Alt ]+[C]

Paragraph
Left justify Justifies the selected paragraphs to the left.
[Ctrl]+[L]
Centered Justifies the selected paragraphs to the centerline.
[Ctrl]+[E]
Right justify Justifies the selected paragraphs to the right.
[Ctrl]+[R]
Bullet Places bullets before the selected paragraphs.
[Ctrl]+[Alt]+[U]

2.11. Stories

See in detail... 3.3.4 Stories

2.12. Layer Manager

See in detail... 3.3.3 Layer Manager

2.13. Drawings Library

See in detail... 3.6.9 Drawings Library

50

2.14. Save to Drawings Library

See in detail... 3.6.10 Save to Drawings Library

2.15. Export current view as 3D PDF

Saves the current vew as a 3D PDF file.

The result is a PDF file containing a 3D view. Adobe Acrobat Reader supports zooming and rotating the
model since the updated 8.1 version.

2.16. The Icon bar

Selection *

Zoom

Views

Display mode

Color coding

Transformations

Workplanes

Structural grid

Guidelines

Geometry tools

Dimensioning,
labeling
Background layer
editing
Renaming,
renumbering

Parts

Sections

Virtual beam

Search

Display options

Options

Model info
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 51

Dragging and The left-side icon bar and any flyout toolbar can be dragged and docked.
docking the Icon bar
and the flyout Dragging and docking of the Icon bar
toolbars If you move the mouse over the handle of the Icon bar (on its top edge), the cursor will change its
shape (moving). You can drag the Icon bar to any position on the screen. If you drag the Icon bar out
of the working area through its top or bottom edge the Icon bar becomes horiozontal. If you drag it
to the left or right edge it becomes vertical.
If the Icon bar is horizontal you can dock it at the top or at the bottom. You can change the position
and the order of docked toolbars by dragging. In the Cross-Section Editor and in Beam and Column
Reinforcement dialogs the Icon bar cannot be docked. Closing a floating Icon bar restores its original
position docked on the left.
Dragging and docking of flyout toolbars
You can also separate flyout toolbars from the Icon bar by dragging their handle. Closing or dragging
them back to the Icon bar restores their original position. Floating flyout toolbars can be docked at
the top or at the bottom.

 The Icon bar and the flyout toolbars can be restored to their original position by selecting
Settings / Toolbars to default position from the menu

2.16.1. Selection

Activates the selection mode and displays the selection icon’s bar.

Select Deselect
Filter
Invert Region

All
Intersected lines
Previous Annular

Parts Sectorial

Polygon

Skewed rectangular

Rectangular

Lets you select a set of entities (nodes (points), lines, finite elements and loads) for processing. When
you execute commands you can use the Selection icon to specify the entity set to which to apply the
command to. If the Parts check box (See section 2.16.14 Parts) is enabled the selection will refer only
to the active (visible) parts.
You can change the view settings or continue selection in another window pane during the selection
process. These allow you to select elements in the most convenient view. The selected entities are
displayed in magenta in the graphics area.
The selection process is considered finished when the OK button is pressed.

Selection methods with selection frame:

Dragging the selection frame from left to right selects elements entirely within the frame
Dragging the selection frame from right to left selects elements which are not entirely outside the
frame

Select Adds the currently selected entities to the set of selected entities.

Deselect Removes the currently selected entities from the set of selected entities.
52

Invert Inverts the currently selected entities’ selection status.

All Applies the current selection mode (add, remove, or invert) to all filtered entities.

Previous Restores the previous selection set.

Selection of parts Clicking the button and a part from the list will select elements of the chosen part.

Filter Lets you specify filtering criteria to be used during selection. Check element types to select.
Property filtering lets you apply further criteria (beam length, cross-section, material, surface
thickness, reference).

Method Selects entities using different methods (selection shapes). Rectangular, skewed rectangular, sectorial
or ring selection shapes are available. In the followings examples of the application of various
selection shapes are provided:

Selection: Result:
Rectangular

Skewed rectang.

Polyline

Sectorial

Annular
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 53

Intersected lines

OK Ends the selection, retaining the selected set for use.

Cancel Ends the selection, discarding the selected set.

 If an entity is hidden by another entity you cannot select it by simply clicking on it. In such a
case, you have to change view to select it.

 The selected nodes are marked with a surrounding magenta rectangle. Sometimes it is necessary to
double-select nodes. In this case these nodes are marked with an additional blue rectangle
surrounding them.

Selections can also be made, without using the Selection Icon Bar. Pressing and holding the [Shift]
button while selecting with the  will add entities to the selection and pressing and holding the [Ctrl]
button while selecting with the  will remove entities from the selection.

Double selections can be made by pressing and holding the [Alt] button while double clicking on the
entities with the .

 During selection you can modify the view or switch to another view or perspective.

2.16.2. Zoom icon bar

Displays the zoom icon bar.

Zoom in Displays an area of the model drawing specified by two points (two
opposite corners) on the graphics area defining a rectangular zoom
region. As a result, the apparent size of the model displayed in the
graphics area increases.

Zoom out Displays the model drawing from the graphics area on the area
specified by two points (two opposite corners) defining a
rectangular zoom region. As a result, the apparent size of the model
displayed in the graphics area decreases.

Zoom to fit Scales the drawing of the model to fit the graphics area, so you can view the entire model.

Pan Moves the drawing. Press and hold the left button of the  while moving the mouse, until the desired
position of the drawing is obtained on the screen.

Quick Drag:
You can use the mid mouse button to drag the model drawing at any time (without the the Pan icon).
1. Click the Pan icon.
2. Drag the model to its new position.
54


This cursor shape indicates that you can pan the model.

Rotate After clicking this icon you can rotate the model around the centre of the encapsulating block of the
model by dragging. During the rotation the following pet palette appears at the lower part of the
screen:

Rotation methods:

Free rotation around the horizontal axis of the screen and the global Z axis.

Rotation around the global Z axis.

Rotation around the vertical axis of the screen.

Rotation around the horizontal axis of the screen.

Rotation around an axis perpendicular to the screen.

Rotation around the bounding box of on-screen elements

Rotation around a selected point. Click on a point to use it as the center of rotation.

Controls the display of the rotation center symbol.


This cursor shape indicates that you can rotate the model.
Undo view Undoes / redoes the action of up to 50 view commands.
/ Redo view

2.16.3. Views

Displays the projection of the model on the X-Z plane (front view).

Displays the projection of the model on the X-Y plane (top view).

Displays the projection of the model on the Y-Z plane (side view).

Perspective toolbar
Axonometry X-Z view
Perspective
X-Y view
Rotate about the
perpendicular axis Z-Y view

Rotate about the

vertical axis

Rotate about the

horizontal axis

Rotate (activates
the pet palette)

Observation distance
Delete active
New perspective view perspective view
Perspective view list
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 55

Sets the parameters of the perspective display. The proper view can be set by rotating the model
drawing around the three axes, and by setting the observation distance. Rotation angles can be set
with a precision of 0.1 degrees. You can assign a name to each setting that you want to save for later
use. Type a name into the combo and click on the icon on the left of the combo to save the settings.
To delete a perspective setting choose it from the dropdown list and click on the Delete icon on the
right side of the combo. Palette settings are stored.
Observation Observation distance is the distance between the viewpoint and the centre of the encapsulating block
distance of the model.

Rotation After clicking on the rotate icon a pet palette appears as

described earlier (Zoom\Rotate).

Views, Displays three projection views and the perspective view of the model, and allows you select the view
perspective that you want to display. Click the view you want to select.

2.16.4. Display mode

Wireframe:
Displays a wireframe model drawing. In this mode the axis of the line elements and
the mid-plane of the surface elements are displayed.

Hidden:
Displays a wireframe model drawing with the hidden lines removed.

Rendered:
Displays a rendered model drawing. The line elements are displayed with their
actual cross-section and the surface elements with their actual thickness.
The elements colors are displayed corresponding to colors assigned to their
materials. Rendered view is smoother and shows the details of thin-walled cross-
sections.
56

Transparency In View / Rendering options... transparency

of element types can be set. Element types
are determined by geometry.
Vertical line elements are considered to be
columns, horizontal ones are handled as
beams, horizontal domains as floors, verti-
cal domains as walls.

Opaque Transparent

Rendering type Two rendering types are available:

Rendering schematic model
Realistic display of structures. Display of tendons and surface/column/beam reinforcement bars is
optional. Click on the color rectangles to change colour.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 57

Rendering architectural model

Instead of drawing the structural framework this rendering mode intersects connections getting
closer to the final look of the model.
Render bolted joints in detail turns on detailed rendering of designed bolted joints.
Draw object edges turns on/off object edges.

Schematic model Architectural model

Texture: A rendered view using textures assigned to individual materials. Textures

can be assigned to materials by clicking the Texture field in the table of materials
or in the material database and choosing a texture from the library of textures.
It contains predefined textures and let the user define custom textures as well. If
more than one row is selected in the table texture will be applied to all selected
materials.
58

Branches of the tree view on the left and the horizontal list above the texture thumbnails show the
material types (brick, concrete, metal, stone, timber, other). The last type (custom) is for the user-
defined textures. Textures of the current type are displayed as thumbnails. The selected texture ap-
pears in the preview window with a thick black frame.

Popup menu After clicking the texture with the right mouse button a popup menu
appears with the following functions:
Removing the texture from the material
Defining or deleting a custom texture
Rotation settings

No texture Removes the texture from the current material

Add 24-bit True Color bitmaps (JPG or BMP) can be converted to textures of 64 x 64, 128 x 128 or 256 x
custom texture 256 pixels. If the bitmap was not rectangular it will be cropped into a rectangle.
Delete Predefined textures cannot be deleted from the library, only the assigment can be removed. User-
custom texture defined textures in the Custom category can be deleted.
Rotation settings Textures are mapped to the elements according to their local coordinate system. Sometimes it can
lead to undesirable results (e.g. in case of brick walls). Texture rotation can solve these problems with-
out changing the local system of elements. By default the textures are not rotated. The other two
options are Rotate left and Rotate right rotating the bitmap by 90°. Rotation is indicated in the table
by a < or > character appearing at the end of the texture name.

2.16.5. Color coding

Color coding helps to get an overview of element properties. Different color coding can be set for the
rendered and wireframe display modes.
Type of color coding can be chosen from a dropdown list.
The program automatically associates different colors to different properties, but colors can be
changed.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 59

Line elements Domains

Surface Surface
supports loads

Type of Default Uses default colors.

color coding
Type Finite element type (truss, beam, rib for line elements, shell, plate, membrane for
domains and surface elements) determines the element color.
Architectural type Architectural type (column, beam and miscellaneous for line elements, slab, wall,
roof for domains) determines the element color.
Material Element colors are assigned by material
Thickness Element colors are assigned by domain thickness
Cross-section Element colors are assigned by line element cross-section
Stiffness Element colors are assigned by surface support stiffness
Eccentricity Element colors are assigned by rib or domain eccentricity
Eccentricity groups Element colors are assigned by eccentricity groups
End releases Element colors are assigned by end releases on beam ends
Load value Surface load colors are assigned by load intensity.
Areas where load polygons overlap are colored according to the sum of the indi-
vidual loads.
Uniform Uniform color for all elements

Setting colors

Click any color cell to change the color.

Toolbar buttons change more than one cell.

Default
Restores the default values (default element type color, default material color).
60

Color gradient
Enter the start and end color of the gradient by
dragging arc endpoints on the hue / saturation
circle to the desired position. The program picks
up the necessary number of colors between the
endpoints.
Use the trackbar on the right to set brightness for
the selected endpoint.
Shorter arc connects colors with the smallest pos-
sible hue changes. Longer arc goes around the hue
circle in the other (longer) way.

Random colors
Program selects random colors but ensures that colors are not too close.

Set a common color

Pressing the Shift key before clicking you can select a range of color cells. Selected color cells
appear with a thick black outline. This tool allows assigning the same color for the selected cells.

 Rendered and wireframe colors are handled separately but can be synchronized. Clicking with
the right mouse button on the color list a popup menu appears. Select Apply colors assigned to
rendered view (wireframe view) to import the color set from the other display mode.

The current color coding is displayed as a separate info window.

You can turn on and off this window from the main menu (Win-
dow / Color coding)

Auto Refresh Views are automatically updated after changes.

Refresh all Applies changes to all views. If unchecked only the active view is changed.

2.16.6. Geometric transformations on objects

2.16.6.1. Translate
Translate Makes multiple copies of, or moves the selected
geometric entities or loads, by translation along
a vector. You must specify the translation vector
(dX, dY, dZ), and the number of copies (N).
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 61

Translation options Incremental makes N copies of the selected

entities by the distance dX, dY, dZ.
Distribute makes N copies of the selected
entities along the distance dX, dY, dZ
(by dX/N, dY/N, dZ/N increments).
Spread by distance: makes copies of the selected
entities spread by distance d in the direction of
the translation vector. The number of copies
depends on how many copies will fit into the
length defined by the translation vector dX, dY,
dZ.
Consecutive: makes N consecutive copies of the
selected entities by different distances
dX, dY, dZ.

Move: moves the selected entities by the distance dX, dY, dZ. Lines running into the moved nodes
remain connected.
Detach: moves the selected entities by the distance dX, dY, dZ. Lines running into the moved nodes
are detached.
None: No nodes will be connected.
Double selected: Holding the [Alt] key pressed you can double select nodes. These nodes will be
connected.
All: All nodes to be copied will be connected.
Switches
Copy options Copy elements: You can specify the finite elements assigned to the geometric entities to be copied as
well.
Copy loads: You can specify the loads assigned to the geometric entities to be copied as well.

 Loads can be copied separately (without the elements).

Copy nodal masses: You can specify the nodal masses to the geometric entities to be copied as well.

Copy dimension lines: The dimension lines will be copied only if the nodes to which they are assigned
are selected.
With guidelines All rulers will also be moved (useful when moving the entire model).
With DXF layer With this option checked the transformations will be performed on the objects of the DXF layer as
well. If individual layer elements are selected the transformation will be applied only to the selected
elements. If nothing is selected the entire layer is transformed.

Visible layers only With this option checked only the visible layers will be transformed.

Steps of translating The translation consists of the following steps:

1. Click on the Translate icon
2. Select the entities or loads to be copied
3. Click OK on the Selection Window (or Cancel to interrupt the selection and translation
commands)
4. Select your options from within the Translate Window.
5. Click OK
6. Specify the translation vector by its start and end point
The command can be applied in the 2-3-1-4-5-6 sequence as well.

 If you have repetitive parts in your model, you should first create these (including the
definition of finite elements, support conditions, loads, and dimension lines), and then make
copies of them.
You can use any existing point when you have to specify the translation vector.
Selected loads can be copied or moved to another load case if load case is changed to the tar-
get load case during the operation.
62

2.16.6.2. Rotate
Rotation Makes multiple copies of, or moves the selected
geometric entities or loads, by rotation around a
center. In X-Y, X-Z or Y-Z views the rotation axis is
normal to the current view plane. In perspective
view rotation axis is always the Z axis.

You can specify the method of rotation.

Parameters depend on the method: rotation
angle α the number of copies (N) and an
additional translation h along the rotation axis
(each copy will be shifted by this distance).
Click the rotation center (OX, OY, OZ), the
rotation arc start point and draw the cursor angle.

Rotation options Incremental: makes N copies of the selected entities by the cursor angle.
Distribute: makes N copies of the selected entities by cursor angle/N increments.
Spread by angle: makes copies of the selected entities spread by a given angle  specified in the
dialog. The number of copies depends on how many copies will fit into the cursor angle.
Consecutive: makes N consecutive copies of the selected entities at different cursor angles.

Move: moves the selected entities by the cursor angle. Lines running into the moved nodes remain
connected.
Detach: moves the selected entities by the cursor angle. Lines running into the moved nodes are
detached.
Nodes to connect See... 2.16.6.1 Translate

Switches See... 2.16.6.1 Translate

In perspective view, the centerpoint, start point and endpoint can be specified only using existing
points or other identified 3D locations (i.e. a point on a line). In perspective view, cursor angle is
determined by the global X and Y coordinates only.

2.16.6.3. Mirror
Mirror Makes a copy of, or moves the selected
geometric entities or loads, by mirroring. Specify
two points of the symmetry plane. The sym-
metry plane is always parallel to a global axis
depending on what view you are in.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 63

Mirror options Copy: reflects a copy of the selected entities

over the mirror plane.

Multiple: makes consecutive copies of the

selected entities over different mirror planes.
Move: moves the selected entities across the
mirror plane. Lines running into the moved
nodes remain connected.

Detach: moves the selected entities across the

mirror plane. Lines running into the moved
nodes are deatched.

Mirror local x axis of line elements: This option

controls if local x orientation of the mirrored line
elements will be inverted or not.

Nodes to connect See... 2.16.6.1 Translate

Switches See... 2.16.6.1 Translate

In perspective view, the mirroring is possible only across a plane parallel to the global
Z axis.

2.16.6.4. Scale
Scale Makes multiple copies of, or moves the selected geometric entities, by scaling from a center. You
must specify the scaling center, a point of reference and its new position after scaling (coordinate
ratios will determine the scaling factors).

Scale options Incremental: makes N scaled copies of the selec-

ted entities by repeating the scaling N times.
Distribute: distributes N scaled copies of the selec-
ted entities between the original and the scaled
image.
Consecutive: makes differently scaled copies of the
selected entities in consecutive steps.
Resize: redefines the selected entities by scaling.

Nodes to connect See... 2.16.6.1 Translate

Switches See... 2.16.6.1 Translate

2.16.7. Workplanes

Workplanes (user coordinate systems) makes it easier to draw on oblique planes. Consider a hole for
a skylight on an oblique plane of a roof. The plane of the roof can act as a workplane so drawing can
be performed in two dimensions. In case of workplanes altitudinal coordinate means the distance
along the axis normal to the workplane.

 All drawing/editing functions are available in workplane mode.

Using multi-window mode a different workplane can be set for each window.
64

Global X-Y, These workplanes are parallel with a global coordinate

Global X-Z, plane so their position is defined by a single coordinate.
Global Y-Z Useful when drawing stories of a building.
workplanes
General workplanes These workplanes are defined by an origin and two vectors
for the local x and y axes.
Smart workplanes These workplanes follow the local system of a truss, beam,
rib or domain. The origin is the first point of the element,
local x and y axes are parallel to the local x and y axes of
the local system of the element.

 Changing the local system of the finite element the

workplane is also changing. Deleting the finite element
you delete the workplane as well.

Clicking the workplane speed button the workplane can be

selected from a list. Workplanes are also available from the
main menu by selecting View \ Workplanes or from the
popup menu by selecting Workplanes.

Clicking the workplane speed button the workplane can be selected from a list. Workplanes are also
available from the main menu by selecting View \ Workplanes or from the popup menu by selecting
Workplanes.

Display options A workplane can be displayed in the global coordinate system or in its local system. After checking
Hide elements not in the workplane only those elements are displayed that are in the workplane. After
checking Show elements out of workplane grayed elements out of the workplane appears grayed.
Changing If you select a workplane from the tree, its parameters are displayed. Editing them and clicking the OK
workplane button or selecting another workplane will change the parameters of the selected workplane.
parameters

Delete Deletes user defined workplanes.

Pick Up >> Lets you define workplane parameters (origin or axes) graphically.

Project to If this option is activated all editing will be projected to the workplane. To work in the coordinate
workplane system of the workplane but out of the workplane (e.g. setting z to 3 meters) turn off this option.

2.16.8. Structural grid

Two options are available: a structural grid or custom grid lines.

To define a structural grid set an X0, Y0, or Z0 origin then enter the ΔX, ΔY or ΔZ relative spacing val-
ues. For example with X0 = 0 entering 4*3.5; 2*5; 7.5 into the ΔX field gridlines will appear at the fol-
lowing X positions: 3.50; 7.00; 10.50; 14.00; 19.00; 24.00; 31.50.
The structural grid can be rotated by a custom  angle.
The length of lines is determined by the minimum and maximum coordinate positions of gridlines in
the other direction, so the shape of the grid is always a rectangle.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 65

Structural grids are sets of coloured lines in a common plane,

with a given length and a label helping the model building
process. These sets of gridlines can be parallel to the global X-
Structural grids
Y, X-Z or Y-Z planes, workplanes or stories.
Structural grids are displayed in a tree, organized by the grid
plane.
Display structural grids
Turns on/off the display of structural grids in the model.
If it is turned off all grids disappear.
If it is turned on all grids matching the following two criteria
will be displayed: 1) it is checked 2) the rule associated to the
grid allows the display of the grid. Grids assigned to work-
planes and stories can hide themselves if their workplane or
story is not active.
Refresh all
Update structural grids for all views.

New
structural grid

Grid plane For grids parallel to a global plane the X0, Y0, or Z0 distance between the
grid plane and the global plane can be set

If the model has stories different structural grids can be assigned to

each story. The grid can be associated to all stories by selecting On all
stories from the dropdown list. If the grid is associated to a specific story
Story grid
(e.g. Story 1) and Display only if the story is active is checked the grid
remains hidden until Story 1 is activated.

Structural grids can be assigned to workplanes (if there are workplanes

in the model). If Display only if the workplane is active is checked the
grid remains hidden until the workplane is activated.
Workplane grid
Name Name of the structural grid
Color Click the button to change the color of the gridlines.
X0 / Y0 / Z0 [m] Origin of the structural grid relative to the global origin.
The origin can be picked up by clicking on the Pick up the origin button and clicking on anywhere on
the model. By activating or deactivating the X, Y, Z fields above the button the user can control which
coordinates to pick up.
α[°] Angle of rotation around the origin of the structural grid
66

Create structural Grid spacings, prefixes, labels, directions can be defined.

grid

Gridline labels can be consecutive numbers (1, 2, 3, ...) or

letters (A, B, C, ...) according to the Labels dropdown
lists. Start value defines the first label. A common prefix
can be set to create labels like 1A, 1B, 1C, ... or F1, F2, F3.
The order of grid lines can be set by selecting one of
the icons (left to right, right to left in X direction and
bottom to top, top to bottom in Y direction).

Order of creating vertical grid lines

Order of creating horizontal grid lines

Labels can be positioned to the startpoint, endpoint or both.

e[m] It is recommended to set a nonzero Grid line extension so that the labels
fall outside the rectangle of gridlines
Automatic If the option Automatic dimensioning is checked dimension lines are also created with the structural
dimensioning gridlines. These dimension lines are associative, e.g. follow changes of the structural grid.
It is also possible to place smart dimension lines manually between intersection points of structural
gridlines (see… 2.16.11.1 Orthogonal dimension lines). It means that activating smart mode and placing a
dimension line between A1 and G1 will generate a group of dimension lines: A1-B1, B1-C1, C1-D1,
D1-E1, E1-F1, F1-G1.

Modify Name, labels, positions, color of a grid can be modified. If Create structural grid is checked the entire
structural grid grid will be recreated with the new parameters. In this case all custom gridlines associated to the grid
(see below) will be removed.

Delete Selected structural grids will be deleted.

structural grid Pressing Ctrl or Shift during mouse clicks more than one grid can be selected.

Custom gridlines can also be defined by clicking on the startpoint and the endpoint. Properties of the
gridline (label position, extension, prefix, labels, colour) can be set on a pet palette.
Custom gridlines Custom grid lines must be associated to a structural grid and can be turned on / off with that grid.
Recreating the grid with new parameters deletes all associated custom gridlines.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 67

2.16.9. Guidelines

Helps in editing the geometry of the model. Guidelines can be defined in the global coordinate
system. This way an arbitrary grid can be created, intersections can be determined and distances can
be set. The cursor identifies the guidelines.
See... 4.7 Editing tools

 The guidelines are displayed as blue dashed lines. The

display of the guidelines can be enabled or disabled in the
Display Options menu (or icon) in the Switches section.

Places a vertical guideline at the current position of the cursor.

Places a horizontal guideline at the current position of the cursor.

Places a vertical and a horizontal guideline at the current position of the cursor.

Places an oblique guideline at the current position of the cursor.

Places a pair of orthogonal oblique guidelines at the current position of the cursor.

In perspective view all the guidelines are displayed but only oblique guidelines can be placed. You
can change the position of a guideline with the mouse by dragging it to a new position. You can
remove (delete) a guideline by dragging it off the graphics area.
Guidelines can be entered numerically by coordinates. Clicking with the mouse on a guideline or
selecting Settings / Guidelines Setup command from the main menu, the following dialog is displayed:

guideline

b
a

a: is the angle of the guideline’s projection on the X-Y plane and the X axis.
b: is the angle of the guideline and its projection on the X-Y plane.
Display Turns on / off the display of guidelines.

Refresh all If checked changes will be applied to all views otherwise only in the active view.
68

2.16.10. Geometry tools

The icons of Geometry tools allow you to lock the direction of drawing a line.

Perpendicular Parallel

baseline
baseline

Begin to draw a line. Click the Perpendicular or Parallel icon then click an existing line or click two
points to define the direction. The cursor will move perpendicular or parallel to this baseline.

Begin to draw a line. Click the Perpendicular to a plane icon then click
the domain defining the plane. The cursor will move perpendicular to
Perpendicular to a plane the plane. The plane can also be defined by clicking three points.
These icons can be conveniently used while editing the geometry of the model or defining section
planes.
Begin to draw a line then click startpont and endpoint of another line.
Midpoint will determine the direction.
Line towards a midpoint

Begin to draw a line then click the two legs of an angle. Bisector will
determine the direction of the line.
Bisector

Begin to draw a node or a line then click the icon, click the two lines or
their start and endpoint. A node or line point is created at the point of
Point of intersection intersection. Any of the lines (or both) can be an arc. In this case there
may be more than one point of intersection. If so, calculated points
are marked with small circles. The required point has to be selected by
clicking.
Begin to draw a node or a line then click the icon and click the two
nodes. Specify the division by ratio or by distance in the popup dialog.
Dividing point A node or line point is created.
The action for Point of intersection and Dividing point can be set here.
Two options are available: creating a node or moving the relative
Point constraint operation origin to the position calculated.

2.16.11. Dimension lines, symbols and labels

This group of functions lets you assign associative orthogonal and aligned dimension lines or strings
of dimension lines to the three dimensional model, as well as angle, arc length, arc radius, level and
elevation marks, labels for result values. Click on the Dimensions icon to display the Dimension
Toolbar. That will allow you to select the proper dimension tool. Click on the left-bottom icon of the
Dimension Toolbar to set the parameters of the selected tool.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 69

You can change the position of dimension lines or labels at any time by dragging them to their new
position. If the dimension lines were associated with the model their position and dimension will be
continuously updated as you modify the geometry of the model.

2.16.11.1. Orthogonal dimension lines

Associative orthogonal dimension lines or strings of dimension lines, parallel to the global X, Y, or Z
axes can be assigned to the model by following the next steps:
1. Click on dimension line start point and on the end point. If these points are connected by a line
you can just click on the line.
2. Move the mouse. The position of the dimension line depends on the direction in which you
moved the mouse. There is one exception: when the segment is not parallel to any global
plane and the editing is in the perspective view. In this case you have to select the direction dX,
dY, or dZ from the toolbar.
3. Click the left mouse button to set the final position of the dimension line.
To insert a string of dimension lines, click on the points in the corresponding order or on the lines if
any. Steps 2 and 3 are the same as for the individual dimension lines. A string of dimension lines can
be selected at once if you click on one of them while depressing the Shift key. It allows you to move it
as a group. To change the position of a group segment individually select it using the selection
rectangle and drag it to its new position. As a result this dimension line will be removed from the
group (it can be moved individually).

A string of dimension lines can also be

created by turning on the smart
Smart dimension lines. If you enable this
dimension lines
function by pressing the button, you
have to select only the end points of the
string, assuming that the intermediate
points were not generated by a domain
mesh command. All intermediate
dimension lines will be created auto-
matically.

An example of smart dimension lines

If the dimension line is assigned to the points of a model, it will always behave in an associative way
(e.g. will move with the model when the model is changed or resized or moved).

Orthogonal and Aligned Dimension Line Settings

70

Tick mark Lets you set the tick marks of the dimension lines. You can select from nine predefined symbols.

Color Lets you set the color of dimension lines individually. You can get the color from the active layer. The
dimension lines, marks, and texts are placed on the Dimensions layer by default but you can change it
any time.
Sizes Lets you set the drawing parameters of the dimension line.
Dimension style/ Lets you to set the type and thickness of a dimension or extension line. You can choose a predefined
Extension style value or get it from the active layer. You can turn on/off the display of extension lines.

Label orientation Lets you set the orientation of the text labels of the dimension lines (Always horizontal, Always verti-
cal, Auto horizontal/vertical, or Aligned to dimension line) inside or outside the dimension line.
Use defaults Lets you restore the default setting.
Apply font to all Apply the same font to every dimension line.
symbols
Save as default Lets you save the current setting as default setting.
setting
Apply to all Applies the current setting to all existing orthogonal or aligned dimension lines to ensure a uniform
dimension lines look.

Layers Lets you select/define/set layers where the dimension lines will be placed. If there are no layers
defined when you start defining dimension lines, a Dimension layer will be automatically created.
See... 3.3.3 Layer Manager
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 71

Text Parameters

Allows to you to define the settings of the text on the dimension lines.
Measured value Allows you to place the measured value on the dimension line, using the current prefix and suffix
settings. By clicking the Units and formats button the number format can be set in the Dimensions
section of the Settings / Units and formats dialog box.
Display unit of Display of the unit of measured value.
measurement
Units and Formats... To change the current font parameters click the button below the Units and formats... button.
Prefix Sets the prefix used with the text on the dimension lines. You can choose from the following options:
Auto (dX, dY, dZ, dL = [depending on the direction])
Auto (DX, DY, DZ, DL = [depending on the direction])
User defined (this option will require you to enter the prefix).
Suffix Sets the suffix used with the text on the dimension lines.

2.16.11.2. Aligned dimension lines

Assigns aligned dimension lines or a string of dimension lines to the model.

plane of dimension line based on Z-axis

plane of dimension line based on Y-axis

plane of dimension line based on X-axis

The steps are the same as the steps of creating an orthogonal dimension line.
See...2.16.11.2 Aligned dimension lines
The plane of the parallel dimension line is determined automatically. There is one exception: when the
segment is not parallel to any global plane and the editing is in the perspective view. In this case you
have to select the direction X, Y, or Z from the toolbar. The plane of the section line will be defined by
the segment and the selected global axis.
72

Sets the dimension line settings (See... 2.16.11.1 Orthogonal dimension ).

For aligned dimension lines the automatic prefix is always dL= or DL=.

An example of associative dimension lines (orthogonal and aligned):

Before Scale command After Scale command

2.16.11.3. Angle dimension

Associative angle dimensions, as the symbol of the angle between two segments, can be assigned to
the model in the following steps:

1. Click on start point and on the end point of the first segment. If the points are connected by a
line you can just click on the line.
2. Click on start point and on the end point of the second segment. If the points are connected
by a line you can just click on the line.
3. Move the mouse. The position and radius of the angle
dimension will be determined by the mouse movement.
Based on the position of the mouse, the angle,
supplementary angle or complementary angle
dimension can be entered.
4. Click the left mouse button to set the angle dimension
in its final position.

By clicking the Text parameters / Units and formats… button the angle number format can be set in
the Dimensions section of the Settings / Units and Formats dialog box.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 73

2.16.11.4. Arc length

Creates arc length dimension symbols in your model.
To assign this symbol to a full circle click any point of the circle and drag the symbol.
To assign this symbol to an arc click any point of the arc and drag the symbol.
To assign this symbol to a part of an arc click any endpoint of the arc, click the middle point of the arc
and drag the symbol.

2.16.11.5. Arc radius

Creates arc radius dimension symbols in your model.
To assign this symbol to an arc click any point of the arc drag the symbol.

2.16.11.6. Level and elevation marks

Creates associative level and elevation marks in your model.
By clicking the Units and formats button the number format can be set as the unit of Distance in the
Geometry section of the Settings / Units and Formats dialog box. This is the unit and format used in
the Coordinate Window. See... 3.3.8 Units and Formats
Level marks can be placed in top view, by clicking on the desired point. The top view is defined as the
view in the direction of gravity (You can change it in the Settings / Gravitation dialog).
See... 3.3.9 Gravitation
Elevation marks can be placed in front view, side view, or in perspective, by following the next steps:

1. Click on the point you want to mark.

2. Move the mouse in the direction you want to place the elevation
mark, and click to set the symbol in its final position.
74

Level and elevation mark parameters

Level Selects the level mark symbol, and sets its size and format.
Elevation Selects the elevation mark symbol, and sets its size and format.

2.16.11.7. Text box

Creates an associative text box in your model.
You can enter multiline text in a text box. The
text will use the same text formatting within a
text box.

You can create a text box in the following

steps:

1. Enter the text in the Text box parameters window, or in case of a single line text enter it directly
into the edit field of the Toolbar.
2. Click on the point to which you want to assign the text box.
3. Move the mouse to the desired position and click to set the text box in its final position.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 75

Color Sets the color of the text, frame, and extension line. You can get the color from the layer.

Text box These switches set the drawing parameters of the text box, frame, and extension line, the transparency
and alignment of the text, and the d distance of the extension line from the reference point (to which
the text box is assigned to).
Font Sets the text font, style and size.
You can reload and change default settings, apply text box or font parameters to all existing text
boxes
Active Links Active links can be placed in text boxes to attach any external information tot the model.
If the text contains a file reference or a link to a web page clicking the text box launches the applica-
tion associated to the file or URL instead of opening the above dialog. To change the text, select text
box first (e.g. Shift+click) then click into the box.
File reference A file reference is made of the -> characters and a file name. E. g.:
->C:\MyModel\Reports\Details.doc
If no full path is specified AxisVM starts from the folder of the model, so if our model is in C:\MyModel
we can enter: -> \Reports\Details.doc
Clicking the text box starts the application associated to the file type. This way we can attach pictures,
movies, sounds, Excel tables or other documents to any part of the model.
URL Supported protocols and link formats are:
http://..., ftp://..., https://..., file://..., www. ...
After clicking the textbox, the default web browser launches and opens the web site or file.
If the text contains more than one URL, the first one is used.
76

2.16.11.8. Object info and result text boxes

Object info text box Element or load properties appear in the text box depending on the current tab (Geometry, Element or
Loads). Information text box parameters can be set in a dialog:

Result text box When displaying results the cursor determines the value of the current result component on nodes,
mid-side nodes, surface centers, or intermediate points of beams or ribs and shows it as a tooltip. The
text of the tooltip is automatically entered in a text box.
The steps of result labeling are similar to creating a text box.
The result text box is visible only when the selected result component is the same as the one that was
selected when the result text box was created. For example an My result text box is displayed only
when the My component is selected as the current result component.

Result text box options can be set in a dialog box:

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 77

In this load case only

Result label is visible only in the load case in which it was created.
In all load cases
Result label remains visible regardless the load case. The actual values will be updated on
changing the case.
For this result component only
Result label is visible only if its result component is displayed.
For all result components
Result label remains visible regardless the displayed result component.

Result label text options:

Element: Include element type and number.
Component: Include result component name.
Case: Include name of the load case, combination
or description of the critical combination.
Unit: Include unit name.

Below the button of Use defaults three checkboxes helps to customize the text box:

Apply font to all text box

After clicking the OK button only the font of all text boxes will change.
Save as default setting
New text boxes will appear using the current settings as default.
Apply parameters to all text box
After clicking the OK button parameters of all text boxes will be set to these values.

Layer Manager Lets you create new layers or modify existing ones.
This function is also available from the menu as Settings / Layer Manager.
See... 3.3.3 Layer Manager
[F11]
78

2.16.11.9. Isoline labels

Lets you place a series of labels to isolines.

1. Click to the Isoline labels icon

2. Enter two points defining a line segment
3. The labels are placed at the intersections of the segment and the isolines

Automatic labeling of isolines can be activated in the color legend window. See… 2.18.4 Color legend
window

2.16.11.10. Dimension lines for footing

Sets the properties of dimension lines for designed footings.

Settings are the same as for normal dimension lines.

2.16.12. Editing background layers

This editor allows making changes in the imported DXF and PDF layers and adding new shapes.
Background layers contain only geometry information and play no role in the structure.
Background layer
editor

Layer Manager
Opens the Layer Manager. See… 3.3.3 Layer Manager
Selecting a layer Select a layer for editing from the dropdown tree.
To create a new layer open the Layer Manager and create a new layer and click OK. Then you can select
the new layer.
Another way to select a layer is to click on this button beside the dropdown tree then click on a shape.
The layer associated to that shape will be selected.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 79

Selection
Click on this button to activate shape selection.
Click the outline of the shape or drag a frame around shapes and click
on the outline of a selected shape then set properties in the Edit
shape properties dialog.
Using special selection functions choose the next button of the
toolbar (Special selection modes).
Right clicking on a layer object displays a popup menu. Isolate layer
for editing locks all the other layers and allows editing of the contain-
ing layer. Delete layer allows deleting of the containing layer.
Special selection modes
Clicking on this button displays a palette for selection options. See… 2.16.1 Selection
Click OK if the selection is finished and click on any selected shape to set shape properties.
Pick up properties
Click on this button and to activate pick up. Clicking on a shape picks up all properties of that shape (i.
e. all subsequent drawing functions will use these properties).
Convert points of the selected shapes to AxisVM nodes

Convert selected shapes to AxisVM lines

After clicking this button, a selection toolbar appears. Click OK if the selection is finished. All selected
shapes will be copied as regular AxisVM lines.
Send selected objects to back

Bring selected objects to front

Delete shapes To delete shapes first select them then press the Delete key of the keyboard.
Pen color Pen color is used to draw the outline of shapes and also to fill the interior of filled shapes.
There are three ways to set the current pen color.

Set the layer color as pen color.

Choose a color from a dialog.

Pick up the pen color of an existing shape by clicking on it.

Line style Two dropdown lists on the right show the available line styles (top) and line weights (bottom). Select
Line weight the desired values.
These settings don’t have any effect on filled shapes as they don’t have an outline.

Pick up line style or line weight of an existing shape

Toolbar for drawing lines and outlined shapes.

Toolbar for drawing filled shapes.

80

2.16.13. Renaming/renumbering

Nodes, trusses, beams, ribs, domains,

nodal, line and surface supports of the
model, steel and timber design members
can be renumbered and renamed (their
numbering follows creation order by de-
fault).
To rename and renumber nodes or ele-
ments select them first then click the func-
tion icon on the Icon bar on the left.

The list on the left shows the number of selected nodes and elements. Choose what you want to re-
name / renumber.
Start at Enter the starting number. Selected elements will be renumbered in an order determined from their
position. Renumbering can have effect on elements not selected as two nodes or elements cannot have
the same number.
Name In name strings element number is represented as an underscore (_). For example: if starting number is
1, and the Name field contains T_, the names of the selected elements will be T1, T2, T3 … If only one
element is selected it is not necessary to include _ in the Name. Otherwise it must be included as ele-
ments must have different names.
If the Name field is empty, the name will be the number itself.
Restore original If Restore original numbers is checked clicking the OK button restores the original numbers of the se-
numbers lected elements and clears their names. Element type must be selected from the list on the left.
To turn on/off the display of numbers / names of elements open the Display options dialog
(see... 2.16.18 Display options) or use the speed button (see... 2.17 Speed Buttons)

2.16.14. Parts

Lets you create sets of structural elements called

parts. Working with parts makes the pre- and post-
processing easier.
AxisVM allows you to display one or more parts,
called active parts, at the same time. In addition, if
the Parts check box is enabled the commands will
only affect or refer to the entities of the active parts.
The name of the current part is displayed in the Info
window. If more than one part is turned on n parts is
displayed, where n is the number of active parts.
There are two types of parts: user-defined parts and
logical parts. User defined parts are created by the
user selecting elements belonging to the part. Logical
parts are created automatically by the program sort-
ing the elements into categories by different criteria
(material, cross-section, thickness, element type, story
or optimization groups, eccentricity groups).
You can activate an existing part by clicking its name
in the list box.

Parts can also be activated without opening this dialog box by simply clicking the Parts speed button
(at the bottom of the screen).

Depth of the tree expansion can be set by clicking on the numbers on the right-hand side of the win-
dow.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 81

New Creates a new user-defined part (a set of model entities).

You must assign a name to each new part. You must then define the new part by selecting entities
(using the Selection Icon Bar if necessary) in the active display window.
Modify Lets you modify the selected user-defined part. When the selection menu appears, the entities of the
model that are in the part are displayed as selected.

Delete Lets you delete the selected user-defined part from the list. This command will not affect the model.

 If section segment result tables are selected only section segments within the active parts are
listed.

Logical Creates a new part by performing logical set opera-

set operations tions on the user-defined parts of a model. You
have to specify the set operations. To enter the
name of a part, double click on the respective name
in the list. Use the % symbol to include the entire
model.
For example: %-Columns will create the part that
will include the entire model less the part named
Column.
Clicking on the Create button, you can enter in the
Name field the name of the newly created part. If
you want to use the +, -, , (, ) characters in the
name of a new part, you need to put the name
between “” marks (example: "floor +12.00").

Creating Creating folders offer a way of sorting user-defined model parts. Parts can be moved and rearranged
new folders by dragging them to a new position. [Ctrl] and [Shift] allows multiple selection in the usual way.
Turning folders on/off turns on/off the parts within the folder.

Logical parts This dialog is to set criteria for creating logical parts.
Architectural objects are defined by their geometry. Vertical beams, ribs and trusses are considered to
be columns, horizontal ones are considered to be beams. Domains in horizontal plane are slabs, do-
mains in planes perpendicular to horizontal planes are considered to be walls.
If there are stories defined logical parts can be created by stories.
Parts created from timber and steel optimization groups make it easy to change cross-section of an
optimization group. For eccentricity groups see… 4.9.6 Domain.
If the model contains structural grids it is also possible to define logical parts based on structural grid-
lines. These parts contain elements within the plane obtained by sweeping the gridline perpendicular
to the plane of the grid. Line elements and domains are included only if all their nodes fall within the
plane. Plane tolerance can be customized for each gridline. Multiple gridlines can be selected
(Ctrl+click or Shift+click on the gridline name) and a common value can be set.
82

Display switches Display switches work in the following way:

Parts If it is on only the parts checked in the list are displayed.
If it is off the entire model is displayed.

Logical parts Turns on/off display of logical parts.

 When working on parts, only the data of the active parts will appear in the tables by default.

Auto Refresh
If it is on turning on or off parts will immediately cause a redraw. If it is off the screen is updated
only after clicking the OK button.
Refresh all
If it is on parts will be turned or on off in all window panes in multi-window mode.
If it is off part settings will be updated only in the active panel.
Show non-visible parts grayed
If it is on the entire modell wireframe is also displayed in gray to help identification of model parts.

Save as default If this option is checked the current state of Logical parts, Refresh all and Show non-visible parts grayed
will be saved as the default setting when closing the dialog.

2.16.15. Sections

Lets you create section lines, planes and segments through any surface model, that can be used to
process the results (displacements, internal forces, etc).
If a truss, rib or beam is within an active section plane and the result component has values on these
elements a diagram is displayed on these line elements too.
Section segment results can be listed in the Table Browser.
See… 6.1.5.1 Section segment result tables
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 83

The dialog works similar to the Parts dialog.

Section lines, planes and segments can also be turned on and off using a
speed button at the bottom toolbar.
If the result display mode is Section result diagrams are displayed only on
section lines, planes and segments.
To reduce the complexity of drawings display of individual sections lines,
planes or segments can be controlled to appear only in a certain load case
and/or for a certain result component. Section segments, planes and lines are
automatically sorted into three different folders (type groups).
 Items cannot be dragged into a group with different type.
 If section segment result tables are selected only section segments within the active parts are
listed.

Creating a section
segment group
84

Section segment groups can be created to make it easier to turn on/off several section segments
together. Click New section segment group, enter a name for the group (name) and define any number
of section segments. End definition by pressing [Esc]. Section segments will be numbered (xx) and get
into the name folder as name_xx. Extension of an existing section segment group is also possible
selecting the folder or a member of that before starting this function.
Creating Creating folders offer a way of sorting sections. Segments can be moved and rearranged by dragging
new folders them to a new position within its own type group. [Ctrl] and [Shift] allows multiple selection in the usual
way.
Turning folders on/off turns on/off the segments within the folder.

New section To define the segment enter two points of a domain or on domains in the same plane.
segment Setting the radio buttons you can control how the internal forces diagram will be displayed. The
average and resultant integrated values are calculated for subsegments defined between adjacent
changings of the sign of the diagram.

 If Envelope or Critical is selected the envelope or critical values are calculated for each point (as
it is shown in the diagram) and then integrated. Therefore the integrated value is unreal in the
sense that it is computed from not simultaneous values.

Left or right segment width can also be specified. In this case the diagram values are computed by
averaging along the segment width. For the more expressive visualization of the segment width the
diagram can also be displayed on both side of the strip.
Diagrams are usually displayed perpendicular to the element plane but checking the option Draw
diagram in the plane of the elements rotates the diagram into the plane. In the Display parameters
dialog this parameter can be turned on/off for all section segments.

 If the option Draw diagram in the plane of the elements is selected, the option Diagram with
segment width cannot be used.

Display of the average values

Display of the resultant integrated values

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 85

Resultant integrated over the segment

The section segment divides the domain into two parts. For
the calculation one of them is removed. The removed part is
selected such a way that the local axis perpendicular to the
section segment (axis y denoted by yellow in the picture)
points outward from the remaining part. The arrows are
displayed on the side of the removed part. They show the
forces and moment acting on the remaining part by the
removed one. The direction of the section segment is shown
by the arrows along the section plane contour. The section
segment is directed from the first to the second point picked
at its definition. The picture on the right shows the positive
direction of resultant components.
 The resultant integrated over the segment is displayed only for section segments prallel with
the local x or y axis.
 If Envelope or Critical is selected the resultant components are displayed in Min or Max mode
only. The values of the three resultant components are not simultaneous.
 If Envelope or Critical is selected the resultant value is integrated for each envelope or critical
load combination over the segment and then the minimum or maximum is shown. Therefore
the displayed result belongs to only one load combination and it is independent from the
displayed diagram that contains non-simultaneous values.

New section plane Click New section plane and assign a name to the section. This type of section is based on a plane.
Click or enter two points to set the section plane. Then click OK in the Selection Icon Bar to save. In
perspective view you have to click or enter three points to set the section plane. Section planes are
displayed as rectangles of dotted lines. You can enable/disable the display of section plane rectangles.
Section planes are useful when you want to display results only along a certain line through the entire
structure.
86

New section line Click New section line and assign a name to the section. You then have to select surface edges or
beam elements that define the section line. Then click OK in the Selection Icon Bar to save. Section
lines can be discontinuous.

The checked section lines, planes and segments are active.

You can use Auto Refresh and Refresh All checkboxes, New, Modify and Delete buttons the same way
as in the Parts dialog.

 The tracelines of the section lines are not correlated with the directions of the result
components displayed.

2.16.16. Virtual beams

Virtual beams are used for beam-like

representation of results of domains
and attached ribs. After calculating
the surface forces the program
creates a finite number of sections
perpendicular to the direction of the
virtual beam and reduces the section
forces to the center of gravity of the
section.
If active parts contain domains with
virtual beams and a result component
is selected from Virtual beam internal
forces (6.1.11 Virtual beam internal
forces) the diagram will be displayed
along the centerline of the virtual
beam.
If a virtual beam and the correspond-
ing domains are turned on, and
compatible force-like results are
selected, then the reduced forces will
be plotted on the axis of the virtual
beam.

Virtual strips are like virtual beams but sections do not run until the domain edge (they are limited by
a fixed strip width on the left and on the right side, ΔL and ΔR).

Table of virtual beam results can be displayed in the Table Browser.

See… 6.1.5.1 Section segment result tables
New virtual beam Enter a name and select domains where the virtual beam should run. The axis of the virtual beam is
not necessarily a continuous line and its type can be set (see below). See… 4.9.21 References.
New virtual strip Enter a name then the startpoint and endpoint of the strip. These points define the axis of the virtual
beam. If the two points are on different domains, domains must be in the same plane. The ΔL and ΔR
strip width values of a new strip are set automatically to 0.5 m, but it can be changed.

 Virtual beam sections are created from both the meshed and unmeshed domains. Virtual strips
require a mesh.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 87

 The definition of virtual beams and strips is much quicker on unmeshed domains, since then the
program calculates the intersections with all the finite elements only after mesh generation, not
at the moment of definition.

 Items cannot be dragged into a group of different type.

Axis of reduction of Centre line: The axis of reduction is the centre line of the virtual beam. The local
virtual beams system of the virtual beam can be set independently from the axis of reduction by
setting the local x and z direction under References.
Straight line: The program slices the domains along the local x direction, perpen-
dicular to the x direction. The cross-section at a certain point consists of the intersec-
tion of the domains and the section plane. The first and last non-empty cross-
section defines the startpoint and endpoint of the virtual beam. The axis of reduction
is a straight line between the center of gravity of the first and last section. The axis of
reduction does not necesserily runs parallel with the local x direction but depends
on it.
Point and reference vector: The axis of reduction will be a line going through a given
point and parallel with a selected reference vector.
Two points: The axis of reduction goes through two selected points.

Axis of reduction of Centre line: The axis of reduction coincides with the center line of the virtual strip,
virtual strips which is the collection of centres of gravity of the sections perpendicular to the line
defined by the two endpoints of the strip.
88

Excentric: The creation of segments is identical, but the internal forces are reduced
to a line segment, excentric to the one connecting the end points of the strip. The
eccentricity is governed by the transition of the endpoints of the strip.

Take into account If checked, the program also takes into

inner domains account the unselected inner domains when
finding the centre line and integrating the
results. If unchecked these domains do not
contribute to the centreline and they are
ignored during the integration as well.

The same virtual beams taking into account the

inner domains (left) and ignoring them (right).

References References are set automatically. By default, the local x direction of the virtual beam is parallel with the
longest side of the bounding box of the selected domains in the global space. The local y and z direc-
tions are set the same way as the automatic references for beam elements. The references can be
customized. (See... 4.9.21 References).
Cross-section A custom cross-section can be defined for virtual beams and strips. This cross-section can be read
through the COM interface and can be used in external design programs.
Creating Creating folders offer a way of sorting virtual beams. Virtual beams can be rearranged by dragging
new folders them to a new position within its own type group. Turning folders on/off turns on/off all virtual beams
within the folder. [Ctrl] and [Shift] allows multiple selection in the usual way.

Virtual beams This checkbox controls the display of virtual beams in the model.
Display strip width This checkbox controls the display
of virtual strip width.

The same virtual strip with (left) or without (right) displaying strip width.
Speed button A dedicated speed button at the bottom right allows turning on/off virtual
beams and strips.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 89

2.16.17. Find

Finds the entity having a specified

index, and moves the cursor over it.
If Select element is turned on the
element found will also be selected
(displayed in purple).

2.16.18. Display options

Symbols Enables/disables the display of symbols.

Common symbols can be turned on/off using a speed button.

Symbols can be customized. See Settings / Preferences / Graphic symbols.

Graphics Mesh
Symbols Enables the display of the inner mesh lines.
 When disabled the generated mesh lines are not displayed.
90

Node
Enables the display of the nodes (small black rectangles).
Surface center
Enables the display of the center point (selection point) of the surface elements.
 Color codes: plate = red, membrane = blue, shell = green.
Center of circle
 Enables the display of centers of circles as a small cross.
Domain
Enables the display of the domain’s contour.
 The color of the domain is the same as of the surface type.
Color codes: plate = red, membrane = blue, shell = green.
Nodal support
Enables the display of the nodal supports.
 Nodal supports appear as thick axes.
Color codes: axial displacement=yellow, axial rotation= orange.
Edge support
Enables the display of the edge supports.
 Edge supports appear as a thick edge.
Color codes: axial displacement=yellow, axial rotation= orange.
Surface support
Enables the display of the surface supports.
 Surface supports appear as a light brown hatch .
Footing
 Footings designed on the R. C. Design tab appear with their calculated or specified shape
and size.
Dimension lines
 Enables the display of footing dimension lines.
Links
Enables the display of link elements.
 Node-to-node link elements are displayed as solid green lines with an arrowhead showing
the location of the link.
Line-to-line link elements are displayed as solid green lines with an arrowhead showing the
location of the link and dashed green lines at the line endpoints.
Rigids
 Enables the display of rigid bodies. They appear as thick black lines.
Diaphragm
 Enabled the display of diaphragms as dashed thick purple lines.
Reference
Enables the display of the references.
 Red vector, crosshairs or triangle.
Cross-section shape
Enables the display of the shape of the cross-section of the truss/beam/rib elements.
 The user-defined cross-sections will be displayed as rectangles that circumscribe the shape
of the cross-sections.
End releases
Enables the display of the end release and edge hinges.
End release:
 Blue circle: hinge / roller
Blue circle + cross semi-rigid hinge
Red circle: spherical hinge
Solid blue circle: plastic hinge

Edge hinges:
 Circles on the edges.
Structural members
Enables the display of the structural elements.
 An orange line along the member and the number of the member.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 91

Reinforcement param.
 Enables the display of two intersected straight lines at surface
centers where reinforcement parameters are assigned. The direc-
tion of these lines indicates the defined reinforcement directions.
(See... 6.5.1 Surface reinforcement parameters and reinforcement
calculation - RC1 module).
Reinforcement domain
 Enables the display of mesh independent reinforcement
domains as dashed brown outlines.
Top and bottom x and y reinforcements are also dis-
played. Two vertices of the polygon are connected to the
center by brown lines.

Mass
Enables the display of the symbol of the concentrated masses.
 Double red circle.
Story center of gravity
 Enables the display of center of gravity of each story. AxisVM converts loads of load cases
used to calculate the vibration shapes for seimic analysis into masses then calculates the
center of gravity for each story. The centers are displayed as black +s in black circles with a
label Gmi where i is the level number.
Story shear center
Story shear center is determined form wall sections at the story level. The method to determine
shear center of thin walled cross-sections is used.
 Enables the display of shear center of each story. AxisVM calculates story shear centers by
finding wall sections and using the same method as for thin-walled cross-sections.
The centers are displayed as red +s, with a label Si, where i is the level number.
ARBO-CRET elements
Aschwanden ARBO-CRET elements placed into the model.
 A schematic drawing of the element is displayed.
AIRDECK elements
AIRDECK elements placed into the model.
 Void formers are displayed as circles in wireframe mode and balls in rendered view.
Thickness reference points
Reference points entered during definition of tapered domains
 Orange crosses, thickness value labels, dashed lines connecting the reference points.
Reinforcement of cores and walls
For detailed description, please see… 6.5.14 Design of reinforced concrete cores and walls – RC5
module
Local Enables the display of axes of the elements in the local coordinate system.
systems

Beam element local coordinate Surface element local coordinate systems

system
92

Loads Display of load symbols can be set separately for each load
type (concentrated, distributed along a line, distributed on
surface, temperature, self weight, moving load, miscella-
neous (length changing, tension / compression).
To display of surface loads distribution to beams (see the
diagram on the right) check Load distribution. To display
the derived beam loads, check Derived beam load.

Load panel Load panel outlines are thick dashed turqouise lines. If load panels are attached to domains small
rectangles appear along the outline showing the linkage.
Abutting wall or Load panel edges with abutting wall or parapet can be selected when defining snow loads. These
parapet (for snow edges are displayed with a light brown rectangle along the edge.
loads)

Derived beam load Displaying of derived beam loads

Moving load phases If this option is turned on all phases of moving loads are displayed in gray. If this option is turned off
the moving load is displayed only in the position determined by the current load case.
Object contours Displays static model with a 3D wireframe look (cross-section, thickness, eccentricity can be checked).
in 3D Colors depend on architectural type (column, beam, wall, slab).
Auto Refresh If it is turned on any change in settings will make the active panel redrawn immediately.
Refresh All Changes will affect all panels in multi-window mode.

Save as default Saves the current symbol display option settings as default for new models.

Labels
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 93

Numbering

Displaying the number of nodes, elements, For meshed line elements checking Use finite ele-
materials, cross-sections, references. ment numbers displays the number of finite ele-
ments instead.
Use finite element Turning on this switch replaces structural member numbers on diagrams with finite element numbers.
numbers Tables also display results on a finite element basis and not for structural elements.
See… 3.2.14 Assemble structural members, 3.2.15 Break apart structural members
Labels on lines Checking/unchecking Labels on lines seen from axis direction turns on/off labels on lines seen from the
seen from axis direction of their axis (seen as points).
direction
Transparent labels If this option is checked all labels are transparent. Otherwise labels are drawn on a rectangle filled
with the background color.
Prevent labels from If this option is checked the program prevents labels from overlapping by moving and hiding less
overlapping important labels. In the latter case zooming in may increase the number of visible labels. If large
number of labels are to be displayed this optimization may be a time-consuming process.
Story center of If seismic stories are defined, their center of gravity can be displayed as a black circle on a
gravity black cross, with a label Gm<index of story>

Story shear center If seismic stories are defined, their shear center can be displayed as a red x on a red cross, with a label
S<index of story>
Properties Enables the display of the name and values of materials properties, cross-sections, element lengths or
thicknesses, load values, masses, etc.
If the Units option check-box is enabled, the labels will include the units as well.
Write values to Controls how the result labels are placed over the drawing.
Actual reinforce- Enables labeling for top and bottom reinforcement in x and y directions independently and sets the
ment labeling mode.
Turning on According to the displayed result component makes the current reinforcement component
the only displayed component.
Switches
Information Coordinates See... 2.18.1 Coordinate window
Windows Info See... 2.18.2 Info window
Color coding See... 2.18.3 Color coding
Color legend See... 2.18.4 Color legend window

Display The display of the actual parts and guidelines can be turned on and off.
Parts Enables/disables the display of user-defined and logical parts.
Guidelines Enables/disables the display of guidelines.
Structural grid Enables/disables the display of the structural grid.
DXF/PDF layers Enables/disables the display of background layers.
Architectural layers Enables/disables the display of imported architectural objects.
AxisVM layers Enables/disables the display of layers defined within AxisVM.
94

2.16.19. Options

Allows the selection of the options for the settings of the grid, cursor, editing, drawing parameters,
and design code.

2.16.19.1. Grid and cursor

Grid The grid consists of a regular mesh of points or
lines and helps you position the cursor to provide a
visual reference. Depending on its Type the grid is
displayed as:

Dot grid – axes are displayed with yellow crosses,

points in gray.

Grid lines – axes are displayed in yellow, lines in

gray.

Display - Displays or hides the grid.

ΔX, ΔY, ΔZ - Sets the spacing of the dots/lines of the

grid in the direction X, Y or Z.

Cursor step Allows to choose coordinates of an invisible dot mesh (not the grid).
You can set the cursor step parameters as follows:

Mouse snap - Restricts the movement of the mouse cursor to an invisible grid specified by the cursor
step values below.
ΔX, ΔY, ΔZ - Restricts the cursor movement to regular intervals. Each time you press a cursor
movement key the cursor moves in the corresponding direction (X, Y or Z) one step
(X, Y or Z respectively).
Ctrl x - Sets the value of a factor that increases or decreases the cursor step size if you press the [Ctrl]
key when you move the cursor. This allows you to achieve adequate positioning accuracy.

 The cursor step is ignored if you position the cursor on a line not parallel to global coordinate
axes. In such a case, the cursor will move along the line.
If the editing tolerance is greater than the cursor step, the mouse will follow an invisible grid
specified by the editing tolerance.
When using with constraints, the cursor step is applied in the constrained direction with the DX value.
See... 4.7.4 Constrained cursor movements

 If the grid step and the cursor step is set to the same value, nodes will be placed snapped to the
grid.

2.16.19.2. Editing
Constraint angle During the model editing the movement of the
cursor can be constrained.
Using the [Shift] key while moving the cursor, the
movement direction can be set. In this case the
constrained movement of the cursor will be based
on two types of angles (for other type of
constrained movements see... 4.7.4 Constrained
cursor movements).
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 95

Auto Sets commands that are applied automatically if the corresponding check-box is enabled.
Intersect
Sets the line intersection handling. At intersection points of lines a node will be generated and lines
will be bisected. If surfaces are intersected by lines, they will be split, and the resulting elements will
have the same material and cross-sectional properties as the original.
Part management:
Any entity drawn or modified after the check-box is enabled will be associated with all of the active
parts.
Refresh
Sets the display refresh mode to automatic.

Editing tolerance If two nodes are closer than the value set as the editing tolerance, they will be merged in the case of a
mesh check. This value is also used when comparing surface thickness or beam length.

Cursor identification The element under the cursor is identified if it is within an adjustable
cursor identification distance. The unit for cursor identification distance
is pixels.
If more than one element is within this range the closest one will be identified.
See... 4.7.1 Cursor identification

Plane tolerance Nodes of domains and surfaces must be in plane. If a node of a domain or surface deviates from this
plane more than the given value the element will be deleted. Plane tolerance can be specified in two
ways:
Relative [‰] per thousand of the biggest extension of the element polygon
Absolute [m] a given value

Auxiliary Cylindrical or spherical.

coordinates See... 4.3.2 Polar coordinates

2.16.19.3. Drawing
Load symbol Sets the display size of the load symbols. This
display factors factor is applied when the checkbox in the Sym-
bols icon / Graphics Symbols / Load is enabled.
These values do not affect load values.

Force
Sets the display size of the symbol of concent-
rated force loads.
Moment
Sets the display size of the symbol of concent-
rated moment loads.
Line / surface load
Sets the display size of the symbol of line /
surface loads.
Section segment resultant value
This factor determines the size of the arrow rep-
resenting the resultant value over a section
segment.
Contour line angle Sets the display of the inner mesh lines (between adjacent surface elements). The common edge of
two or more surface elements is displayed if the angle enclosed by the normal to the planes of the
elements is larger than the value set here.
96

Edge is displayed

Edge is not displayed

Zoom factor Sets the scale of magnification/reduction of the zoom commands associated to the [ + ] and
[ - ] keys.
Display of axial Until Version 12 normal force and torsion moment diagrams were always drawn in the local x-z plane.
force and torsion From Version 13 it can be set to the local x-y plane as well.
moment diagram

2.16.20. Model info

Shows the main parameters of the model.

Clicking the Analysis parameters button certain parameters of the latest analysis (memory
usage, running time) can be studied. This information is available only if the model was analysed by
Version 10 or later.

2.17. Speed Buttons

The quick switches toolbar allows you to change the display settings without entering the Display
option / Symbols or Options dialog. The icons are located in the bottom right corner of the graphics
area.

Auto intersection

Mouse snap

Stories

Parts in tree view

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 97

Display parts containing the selected elements

Display selected element only

Workplanes

Section lines & planes & segments

Virtual beams/strips

Display mesh

Display load symbols

Display symbols

Display local systems

Numbering

Background layers (visibility, detection, locking)

 Some of these settings are available also from Display and Options icons.

2.18. Information windows

The information windows are situated in the graphics area. You can move these windows on the
screen by clicking title bar, holding down the left mouse button, and dragging it to a new location on
the screen.

2.18.1. Coordinate window

See... 4.4 Coordinate window

2.18.2. Info window

Shows information about the display of the results such as: active part(s), current
perspective setting, type of analysis, current design code, current load case or
load combination, solution errors, current result component.
For the explanation of E(U), E(P), E(W), E(EQ) parameters see 5. Analysis and
5.1 Static
In case of geometric nonlinear calculation, a warning message appears if a stabil-
ity problem occurred in the current increment. See… 5.1 Static analysis
In case of nonlinear calculation taking into account the reinforcement short
forms of the reinforcement warning messages also appear. See… 6.5.5 Nonlinear
analysis of reinforced concrete beam and column elements and. 6.5.6 Nonlinear analy-
sis of RC surfaces.. The warning message appears if the problem occurred in the
current or in any previous increment.

If more than one part is activated a list of active parts is displayed provided that the number of parts
does not exceed a limit. This limit can be set by right clicking the info window and clicking the Settings
menu item.
98

2.18.3. Color coding

This info window appears after activating a color coding (see… 2.16.5 Color coding)
unless it is turned off in the Window menu (see… 3.6.2 Information Windows).
The type of the coding is displayed within the black header line.

2.18.4. Color legend window

Color legend Displays the color legend corresponding to the result component being displayed. You can resize the
window and change the number of levels simply by dragging the handle beside the level number edit
box or entering a new value. Colors will be updated immediately.
Color legend setup You can set the color legend details
in the color legend setup dialog
box. To open this dialog box simply
click the color legend window.

Values
Limits Setting criteria for the interval limits:

Min/max of model
Sets the lower and upper limit values to the minimum and maximum values of the entire model.
Intermediate values are interpolated.

Min/max of parts
Sets the lower and upper limit values to the minimum and maximum values of the active parts.
Intermediate values are interpolated.
Abs. max of model
Sets the lower and upper limit values to the maximum absolute value of the entire model with the
respective negative and positive signs.
The intermediate values are interpolated.
Abs. max of parts
Sets the lower and upper limit values to the maximum absolute value of the active parts with the
respective positive and negative signs.
The intermediate values are interpolated.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 99

Round If the interval limits are interpolated between the minimum and maximum values (no custom values or
calculated values step value has been introduced) the interpolated values can be rounded.

Custom
Click an item of the list on the left to edit its value. If you are in editing mode you can navigate
through the list by ↑ and ↓ keys and edit the current item. When you click OK the series of interval
values must be monotonically decreasing from top to bottom.
Auto Interpolate
If Auto Interpolate is checked the series will be recalculated each time you enter a new value.
If you enter a new top or bottom value the recalculated series will be linear between top and
bottom values. If you enter a new value at a middle interval the recalculated series will be bilinear,
i.e. linear between the top and the new value and between the new and the bottom value but
steps may differ.

By step value
Color values are determined by the given step . When entering a new level value the other levels
will be recalculated using the step. Switching from other crieria the array starts from the lowest
value and using the latest step value.
You can save the settings of the scale using the Save As button. To review saved settings click the ...
button.

Hatching for out of Hatching for out of range values can be set to Opaque or Transparent.
range values

Color gradient Allows swapping the direction of the color gradient.

direction

Isosurface If checked, a contour line appears at the outline of isosurfaces.

contours

Isoline labels If checked, isolines are labeled automatically.

Standard interval limit settings are also available directly from the color legend window popup menu.
To activate popup menu click right mouse button on the window.
Calculate
When displaying reinforcement values click Custom and Calculate to
get the amount of reinforcement from rebar diameters and
distances for the selected list item.

 When displaying actual reinforcement schemes AxisVM does

not assign color to numerical values but to different rebar con-
figurations.
It can be set to display all schemes or just those within the ac-
tive (visible) parts.
100

Colors Colors can be modified by

assigning a color gradient to
the values. A gradient can be
assigned to result compo-
nents, e.g. displacements can
be displayed in different colors
than internal forces.
Setting a gradient form light to
dark can help to resolve the
ambiguity of a grayscale out-
put.

New color gradient

A new color gradient can be defined by dragging the gradient endpoints to the desired
position.

Revert color gradient

Swaps the start and end color of the gradient.

Save color gradient to the color gradient library

Gradients can be saved to a library for future use.
Save current color gradient assignments as default
Current result component assigments become the default setting for new models.

Restore default color gradient assignments

Sets the default color assigments for result components.

Clicking on an item of the Color gradient library applies the gradient.

Color coding for If an actual reinforcement component

actual reinforce- (xb, yb, xt, yb) is displayed the color
ment schemes legend lists all reinforcement schemes
defined in the model in the following
format:
Ø16/200 (1005) [3.4],
i.e. Ødiameter/spacing (rebar area)
[concrete cover]

Click on the color legend to display

options of color coding for actual
reinforcement schemes.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 101

Color gradient A color is assigned to the scheme according to its specific rebar area.
by rebar area
Color coding by A color is assigned to the scheme according to the rebar diameter and spacing. Hue depends on the
rebar diameter diameter and brightness depends on the spacing.
and spacing If reinforcement domains overlap the color of the overlapping area can be determined by one of the
following methods:
Grayscale by rebar area
A gray color is assigned to the area according to the total specific rebar area.
Color coding by average of overlapping reinforcements
An average spacing and diameter is calculated as
1 𝑑𝑖
𝑠= ; 𝑑=𝑠∙∑
1 𝑠𝑖
∑𝑖 ( ) 𝑖
𝑠𝑖

2.18.5. Perspective window tool

See... 2.16.3 Views

102

This page is intentionally left blank.

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 103

3. The Main Menu

3.1. File

The menu commands are described below.

3.1.1. New model

Creates a new untitled model. Use this command to start a new modeling session. If you have not
saved the current model, a prompt appears asking if you want to save it first. Refer to the Save and
Save as commands for more information on how to save your current model.
You must specify a name for the new model. You can select the appropriate Standard and system of
units. You can enter specific information in the Heading section, that will appear on each printed
page. A new model uses the default program settings.
If a page header logo was selected for printing drawings, tables and reports, the header also appears
here. Click on the logo to change it or try Settings / Preferences / Report / Company logo / Settings
104

3.1.2. Previous revisions…

AxisVM can preserve previous revisions of the model. This feature is activated by default. The Previous
revisions dialog lists previous revisions in reverse chronological order (the topmost item is the latest
one). The File size column shows the size of the model file (and the result file if it exists).
Revisions can be opened and locked. Comments can be entered and edited by clicking on a cell in the
Comment column.

The maximum number of stored revisions can be

changed in the Settings dialog. If the number of revi-
sions has reached the maximum the oldest revision is
deleted upon saving a new revision. It is also possible
to store automatically saved revisions and result files
(For the autosave settings see Settings / Preferences /
Data integrity, 3.3.11 Preferences).
Autosave files appear in gray and their revision num-
ber appears in parentheses.
The Revisions folder containing the subsequent revi-
sions of the model is created under the model file
folder by default but the location of this folder can be
changed.

There are two ways to open an earlier revision: open it As a new model or Saving then overwriting the
current model. This latter option saves the current state of the model as a revision then the earlier revi-
sion overwrites the model.

This dialog is also available in Settings / Preferences / Data integrity,

Open. Saves the selected revision as a new model and opens it. It is possible to preserve earler revi-
sions.
Save a previous revision. Saves the selected revision under a new name. It is possible to preserve earler
revisions.
Lock revisions. Locks the selected revisions. These revisions are not deleted even if the number of saved
revisions has reached the maximum defined in Settings.
Unlock revisions. Unlocks the selected revisions. If a revision is unlocked it will be deleted if necessary.

Delete. Deletes the selected revisions (locked revisions will be excluded).

 Previous revisions are stored in a \Revisions\model name subfolder created below the folder of
the model file. Copying or moving the file does not copy or move these subfolders. In order to
copy or move the revisions the above subfolder must be copied or moved to the new location.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 105

3.1.3. Open

Loads an existing model into AxisVM. If you have not saved the current model, a prompt appears
[Ctrl]+ [O] asking if you want to save it first. Refer to the Save and Save as commands for more information on
how to save your current model. Selecting this command will bring up the Open dialog box.
If the folder name appearing in the dialog box is what you want, simply enter the file name in the edit
box or select it from the list box. If the directory is not what you want, select the drive and directory
names along with the file name.
 AxisVM saves your model data in file names appearing as Modelname.AXS (input data), and
Modelname.AXE (the results). Both file contains the same identifier unique for each save which
makes it possible to check if AXS and AXE files belong to the same version of the model.
The open dialog looks different on Windows XP and Vista / Windows 7 / Windows 8 operating sys-
tems.

3.1.4. Save

Saves the model under the name displayed at the top of the AxisVM screen. If you have not saved the
[Ctrl]+ [S] model yet, the Save as dialog box automatically appears prompting you to enter a name. Use the
Save as command if you are changing an existing model, but want to keep the original version.
If you select Create backup copy in the Settings / Preferences / Data integrity / Auto save a backup file
of your previous model will be created.
If Settings / Preferences / Data integrity / Compress AXS is checked the model file will be saved in a
compressed format. The average size of the compressed file is about 10% of the original. Comp-
ression is more efficient on large files.

3.1.5. Save as

Names and saves the model. Use this menu command to name and save a model if you have not
saved the model yet, or if you are changing an existing model, but want to keep the original version.
Selecting this menu command will bring up the Save As dialog box.
Converting models Models created with previous AxisVM versions (if applicable) will be converted into the current version
file format when you open them for the first time.
 The File / Save As / File Format command lets you save the model in earlier formats.
The save dialog looks different on Windows XP and Vista / Windows 7 / Windows 8 operating sys-
tems.

3.1.6. Export

Export functions create different types of files to transfer data to other engineering applications.

3.1.6.1. Export to DXF

DXF file Export of this file type requires a DXF module.
Saves the geometry of the model to a DXF file format for use in other CAD programs. The geometry is
saved with actual dimensions, in a Modelname.DXF file.
Selecting this menu command will bring up the Export DXF dialog box, that lets you specify the units
of measurement in the exported file. The results set in the current view (in diagram, contour, surface
2D, etc.. view mode) can also be exported.
The following formats are available for DXF output:
- AutoCAD 2004 DXF file
- AutoCAD 2000 DXF file
- AutoCAD R12 DXF file
- AutoCAD reinforcement design file
- AutoCAD 2004 reinforcement design file
106

It is recommended to use the AutoCAD 2004 format to avoid data loss. Earlier DXF formats support
256 palette colors and ASCII characters only.
For further DXF file export options and their description, see section 3.1.6.6 Export to other applications.

3.1.6.2. Export to IFC

IFC 2x, 2x2, 2x3 file Export of this file type requires an IFC module.
Exports an IFC file describing the model with achitectural objects (walls, slabs, columns, beams). IFC
files can be imported in ArchiCAD, AutoDesk ADT, Revit, Nemetscheck Allplan, Tekla-Xsteel and other
architectural programs.
Checking Export reinforcement on the save dialog the and clicking on
Preferences displays a dialog to set how the actual reinforcement will
be exported.

Since the release of 13R1, users have the possibility to export reinforcement to .ifc files.
The built-in algorithm of AxisVM helps to export not only the field reinforcement based on user given
intensities, but shaped bars too, like hairpins, hooks etc.
• closing reinforcement on free
plate edges: free plate edges are closed
by hairpins, whose lenghts are calculated
based on the lap length of bars, which is
in turn calculated either by the standard
set in the program, or the user given
value of l0. This option can be turned on
or off.
• reinforcing concave corners:
concave corners can be strenghtened by
simple bars, whose lenghts are calculated
based on the lap length of bars, which is
in turn calculated either by the standard
set in the program, or the user given
value of l0. This option can be turned on
or off.
• convert short rebars to stirrups:
to avoid useless duplicating of rebars, the
algorithm can be given a multiplicator
value. Those simple bars, whose lengths
are greater than the minimal lap length
multiplied by this value, will be converted
to a closed stirrup. This option can be
turned on or off.
• closing of rebars at joining plates: along the edges of plates that do not share the same
plane, the algorithm can connect the reinforcements of the individual plates either by
hairpins or by hooks. The actual geometry of these shaped bars depend on the width and
angle of the joining plates, and sometimes, the algorithm revises the user's choice. The sizes
of the shaped bars are calculated with respect to the minimal lap length.
• reinforcement in embedded domains: the method of closing, embedding rebars of the
embedded domains can be chosen by the user. They can either be handled separately, or
their rebars can be embedded into each other, or if the inner domain is small enough, the
outer domain's bars may as well be driven through its body.
• slab edges with more than two connecting domains: in such cases an automatic solution
cannot be found, so the user can choose whether to completely skip those edges or tho
close them independetly from each other.
• optimization of rebar positions to distribute reinforcement evenly if reinforcement domains
overlap
• calculated raw bar lengths are always rounded up to the nearest value of this array: 0.4, 0.5,
0.6, 0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4, 3.0, 4.0, 6.0, 12.0 m
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 107

Export model data If the Architectural model option is selected only architectural objects will be exported. If Static model
is selected, finite element meshes, loads, load cases, load groups and load combinations will be
included in the IFC file. Dynamic, influence line or moving loads will be excluded.

3.1.6.3. Export to Revit

Export to Revit (*.are)

Export of this file type requires a REV module.
AxisVM model (the entire model, active parts or selected elements) can be saved to a file with ARE
extension, readable from Revit after installing an add-on.
Exported elements are trusses, beams, ribs, domains and supports. The import add-on for Revit al-
lows filtering of elements, defining the default geometry for nodals and line supports and mapping
of materials defined in AxisVM to Revit materials.
If Revit has been installed on the computer, the Revit add-on is installed automatically even if the
REV module is not included in the configuration.

 Started from Revit2017 the popup window shown below will appear at the initialization phase of
every add-in or third party executable.

 In this case, please press "Load Once" if you wish to load the add-in, and use its abilities, or
"Always Load" if you wish to suppress this dialog in the future.
Exported data For the time being, only geomatrical data are exported to Revit, which are:
• linear elements with their materials and sections
• regions and their materials
• supports

Usage Export process must always be started from AxisVM, the way mentioned below:
File menu -> Export -> Export to revit (*.are)
By pressing the Settings button you can choose between several options:

• Entire model – all exportable data will be written into the file
• Displayed parts – all parts visible on screen will be exported
• Selected elements – only elementes selected before will be exported

Having saved the .are extension file you can import it into Revit like on the attached picture:

Add-Ins / External Tools / AxisVM Interface

108

After this, the form seen below will pop up:

In as much as there is an opened project in Revit, then both Export and Import tabsheets will be
enabled, otherwise only Import tabsheet can be used.
To import .are extension files you have to press the button located left to the Filename label.
After this the tree on the left is refreshed by the content of the file, and a preview of the model to be
imported is visible on the bottom right corner.

Elements that are actually imported can be filtered by checking the nodes of the left tree.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 109

Import method If you have an open project at the moment of import, you can select from several options:
• Overwrite – all elements will be deleted from the project (except for the ones pinned before),
and new elements will be imported into this purged project
• Append – new elements are add the project preserving older items
• Create new project – opened projects remain unchanged, and a brand new one will be
created, into which all elements will be imported
On the other hand, if you have no opened project, then a new one will be created.
It is important to note, that if the project is read-only, then only the third option is enabled.

Support parameters Supports are imported based on the following

considerations:
If there has been geometry assigned to a certain
support in AxisVM, then this property will be used.
Otherwise geometry will be created based on default
parameters, which can be adjusted by clicking the
button “Support parameters”.

Mapping materials As AxisVM material records can not be directly mapped to Revit materials, user interaction is needed to
help on this mapping. It can be done on the form seen below:
110

You can only continue the import process only if all mappings are done on this form. In order to map
AxisVM material to Revit material, you have to select a material as material type on the left tree, and
another one from the rigth tree. Then if you press the button between the two trees, the selected
AxisVM material will be mapped onto the selected Revit material. Selection on the left tree will then
automatically jump on the next unprocessed node. Unprocessed nodes are drawn red, everything else
is drawn black.
You do not have to do this mapping one by one. Instead, if you select a node with several children,
then all the node’s children will be assigned the selected Revit material.
If you select the last node of the right tree, a new Revit material will be inserted into the database with
properties inherited from the selected AxisVM material.

Having accomplished all mappings, OK button will be enabled, and you can continue the import
process.

3.1.6.4. Export to Tekla Structures

Tekla Structures Two different file formats are available:
file
Tekla (TS) Structures ASCII file (*.asc)
Saves the geometry of the model into a file format that is recognized by Tekla Structures. The file
includes the coordinates of i and j-end nodes, the cross-sectional properties and the reference point
of truss and beam elements.
Tekla (TS) DSTV file (*.stp)
Saves the data of the truss and beam elements (endpoints, material, cross section, reference) as a
standard DSTV file. This file format is supported by several steel designer CAD software.

3.1.6.5. Export to Nemetschek Allplan

ASF file Export of this file type requires an ALP module.
Exports reinforcement of all active domains into separate files (filename_001.asf…) which can be later
imported to Nemetschek Allplan in batch mode (at once). Due to import limitations of Allplan,
domains are transformed to XY or XZ plane whichever plane is closer to the exported domain.
Only reinforcement of domains are exported, results of individually defined surface elements will be
ignored. Three reinforcement values are exported for triangular mesh elements and four values for
quadrangles.
Select Move To Origin to move exported domains to the origin (outline polygon node closest to the
origin will be justified to the origin).
Select what type of reinforcement to export: required (calculated), actual (applied) or the maximum of
both.

 Export to ASF file is avaliable only on the R.C. Design tab

Importing ASF file • To import an asf file go to Create/Interfaces/Import FEA files menu item in Allplan menu.
into AllPlan • Select the folder with asf files from the directory structure in the top-left window. You can see the
asf files in the bottom-left window. Select one or more asf files from this list and select the place
of these files by clicking in the row of the list on the right side (Destination Files).
• Click on the Transfer -> button, and the selected files will appear in the list.
• Click on Import button, and the selected files will be imported into Allplan program.
• Close the window with OK
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 111

Displaying imported • Click on Create/Engineering/Bar Reinforcement/FEA reinforcement Color Image menu item in
reinforcement in the Allplan menu
AllPlan • Click on the desired asf file
• Choose layer (top/bottom) and type (compression/tension) of the imported reinforcement
values
• Click on OK

3.1.6.6. Export to other applications

Bocad file Saves the geometry of the model into a file format that is recognized by the Bocad software. The file
includes the coordinates of i and j-end nodes, the cross-sectional properties and the reference point
of truss and beam elements.
StatikPlan file For StatikPlan AxisVM exports a DXF file including the contour of the reinforced concrete plate, the
calculated reinforcements as isolines and the result legends on different layers.

PianoCA file Generates a *.pia interface file for PianoCA. It includes the data, supports, loads and the calculated
results of the selected beam elements.

CADWork file Creates a DXF file to use in CADWork reinforcement detailing software.
Only selected domains will be exported.
As CADWork works in 2D, selected domains must be in the same plane. Each domain in the DXF file is
transformed to a local X-Y coordinate system, Z coordinate represents the calculated amount of rein-
forcement.
SDNF 2.0, 3.0 file Saves the model in SDNF (Steel Detailing Neutral Format) file readable by steel detailing products
(Advance Steel, SDS/2, Tekla Structures, PDMS).
Glaser -isb cad- Exports reinforcement domains to the Glaser -isb cad-program.
*.fem fájl
112

3.1.6.7. Export to AxisVM

AxisVM Viewer Saves the model in AxisVM Viewer format (*.axv).
See… 7 AxisVM Viewer and Viewer Expert

AXS file The following groups of elements can

be exported: the entire structure, dis-
played parts or selected elements.
To select export options similar to those
of the Copy options (see… 3.2.8 Copy /
paste options ) click the Settings button
of the Export dialog.

Export selected only Exports the selected elements only.

Coordinate units The coordinate units of the exported file can be selected here.
The default unit is meter [m].

3.1.7. Import

Import functions read and process different types of files to transfer data from other engineering
applications and provide a link to BIM systems (Building Information Modeling).

3.1.7.1. Importing DXF files

AutoCAD *.dxf Importing requires a DXF module.
Imports a geometry mesh from a DXF file
exported in AutoCAD 12, 13, 14, 2000 or
2004 format into AxisVM. The layers of the
imported file are loaded into the Layer
Manager. See... 3.3.3 Layer Manager
If the file date of the imported file has
changed, the Layer Manager will ask if you
want to update the layers. Selecting this
menu command will bring up the Import
DXF dialog box.

 The ellipses will be converted to polygons

only if you load them as active mesh
otherwise they remain ellipses.
In Results view, you can import only to
the background layers.

Parameters Coordinate unit

You need to specify the length unit used in the imported DXF file.

Maximum deviation from the arc [m]:

Importing a DXF file as an active mesh, ellipses will be converted to polygons based on this value.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 113

Geometry check tolerance

When you import a DXF file as an active mesh, AxisVM checks for coinciding points (nodes) and lines
in your model, and merges them.
You can specify the maximum distance to merge points. Points that are closer together than the
specified distance are considered to be coinciding. The coordinates of the merged points (nodes)
are averaged.
You must always set this to a small number relative to your model dimensions.
Import As You must specify whether you wish to use the imported DXF file as an active mesh or as a background
layer.
Active mesh (nodes&lines)
The imported geometry is considered as if it were created with AxisVM commands.
DXF layers can be used to create parts.
Background layer
The imported geometry is used as a background layer that is displayed but is inactive as a mesh.
Import a DXF file as background layer when you want to create the model based on architectural
plans or sections. You can use the entities in the background layer as a reference during editing your
model.
Import Mode You can choose between overwriting the former geometry or adding a new geometry to the former
one

Place Lets you specify the plane of the DXF layer (X-Y, X-Z, or Y-Z).
The Place button allows to graphically position the imported DXF drawing in your model space.

Visible layers only With this option AxisVM imports only the layers set visible in the DXF file.

Import Hatching is represented by individual lines in a DXF file so in most cases it is not recommended to
hatch pattern lines import them. If you need the hatching check this option.

3.1.7.2. Importing IFC files

IFC 2x, 2x2, 2x3, 2X4 Importing requires an IFC module.
*.ifc file Imports objects from an architectural
model saved as an IFC file. Imported
objects can be displayed as a 3D
background layer or can be converted
to a native model by assigning
materials, cross-sections etc. to them.
Existing architectural models are always
overwritten by the new one.
You can import object based
architectural models from ArchiCAD,
AutoDesk Architectural Desktop, Revit
Structure, Revit Building, Nemetscheck
Allplan, Bocad, Tekla and Xsteel.
Importing IFC files can extract the static
model (if available) or the architectural
objects overwriting or updating the
existing information within the AxisVM
model.

 This function is available only on Geometry, Elements, Loads and Mesh tabs!
Static model From IFC version 2x3 it is possible to export details of the static model (nodes, topology, supports,
loads, load combinations). The Static model option is available only if the file contains this information.
If it describes architectural objects (columns, beams, walls, slabs, roofs) only the static model can be
114

created automatically in AxisVM after importing the file.

Architectural model This option can overwrite or update existing architectural model information in the AxisVM model.
objects AxisVM can read columns, beams, walls, slabs, roofs.
See… 4.9.22 Creating model framework from an architectural model
Opening aligned to Import as opening
domain edge

Adjust the domain outline

Moving the struc- If checked, AxisVM calculates the centre of gravity (COG) of the imported model, translates the whole
ture to the origin model, so that X and Y coordinates of the COG get to (0, 0) of the coordinate system. It can be useful
when the imported modell has large coordinate values.
If Also in Z direction checkbox is checked, a vertical translation will be also performed, moving the Z
coordinate of the COG to zero too.
Automatic detection This function lists new, modified and deleted objects when reimporting IFC files. Each change can be
of changes approved or ignored. Selecting a change in the tree shows the position of selected element within the
current model.

Filtering objects
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 115

Filtering by Model history – The user can choose to import new elements or modified elements
This type of filter works properly only on files previously exported from AxisVM and modified in anot-
her program.
Filtering by Properties – The user can choose elements with a load bearing capacity and/or by fire
rating. This type of filter works properly only if this information is included in the file.
Filtering by on Layers – if the IFC file contains layer information for the entities the user can select
which layers to import and which layers to ignore.

 When exporting a model from ADT (Architectural Desktop) turn off the automatic intersection
of walls before creating the IFC file.

3.1.7.3. Importing Revit RAE files

Import from Revit AxisVM can import data through a direct connection between AxisVM and Autodesk Revit 2015 (or
newer). It is based on the Revit API which lets other programs to query and modify its database.
At the end of AxisVM setup process the installer creates a folder called "RevitImport" under the
AxisVM folder, and copies all the necessary files.
The .addin extension file is created in folder
c:\Users\<UserName>\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\Revit\Addins\yyyy\, where "yyyy" represents an
integer value greater or equal to 2015. Both this file and the whole content of "RevitImport" folder are
necessary for the proper communication between the two programs.

There are two methods of communication

1. Using an intermediate file.
2. Through AxisVM COM interface.

 Started from Revit2017 the popup window shown below will appear at the initialization phase
of every add-in or third party executable.

 In this case, please press "Load Once" if you wish to load the add-in, and use its abilities, or
"Always Load" if you wish to suppress this dialog in the future.
Usage The scheme of dataflow is
116

The process must be started from Revit as shown below:

Add-Ins / External Tools / Revit-AxisVM Export

Add-Ins / External Tools / AxisVM Interface

The Export statical model to AxisVM dia-

log let us to choose between the two
methods. This choice also determines the
available settings on the dialog.
Choosing the Using AxisVM COM inter-
face offers setting certain geometry pa-
rameters. The language of the dialog can
also be selected from a list.
If the radio button Use Revit structural
model is checked, then the add-in exports
the structural model defined in Revit as it
is, otherwise it uses the architectural
model to calculate the statical frame to
be exported.

Import via an in- Users should choose this

termediate file option, if they wish to send
the data to another user.

First they have to set the

name of the file to be
saved. After a successful
save operation, the file
created can be imported
into AxisVM.

When importing the file

into AxisVM a dialog will
pop up.

Project The project info declared in Revit is listed in the upper-left list, while the image to the right shows a
screenshot of the project as could be seen in Revit.

Import method If the AxisVM model is not empty, two options are available to overwrite the model or update it.
Structural model If this option is activated AxisVM changes the raw geometry data to build a proper structural frame-
work. Colliding beams are connected with a rigid body, neighbouring domains are joined, beams run-
ning on a domain are converted to ribs. Some of these calculations require considerable resources and
may slow down the import process.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 117

Arc resolution Certain geometry calculation require arcs to be converted into polylines. The conversion criterion can
be set here.
Editing tolerance Tolerance used when calculating geometry.
Joining objects To improve the efficiency of collision detection bounding boxes of objects are inflated a bit. This tole-
rance value can be set here. Active only if the checkbox on panel Structural model is checked.
Import through Use this option if you process the data extracted from Revit yourself and you run Revit and AxisVM on
COM interface the same machine. After a successful export through the AxisVM COM interface, AxisVM launches and
you can continue editing the model there. The above geometry parameters must be set in the Revit
export dialog.
Moving the struc- If checked, AxisVM calculates the centre of gravity (COG) of the imported modell, and translates the
ture to the origin whole model so that X and Y coordinates of the COG get to (0, 0) of the coordinate system. It can be
useful when the imported modell has large coordinate values.
If Also in Z direction checkbox is checked, a vertical translation will be also performed, moving the Z
coordinate of the COG to zero too.

Elements to export Element types to be exported can be

set by selecting tree items.

From the X4 version, tapered and

excentric regions can be exported,
too.

Section recognition Sometimes the cross-section information read from the Revit database is limited so identification of
sections requires user interaction. If so, a dialog is displayed.

Section recgonition can happen in several ways:

Automatic The add-in was able to get sufficient information about a certain type of cross section.
From AxisVM library If the automatic recognition has failed, you can select the proper section from the AxisVM section
library.
Mapping Revit Storage of section parameters in Revit is not consistent so a unique parameter matching may be ne-
parameters to eded. You can select a property from the list and move it up or down into the proper position to asso-
AxisVM parameters ciate parameters in AxisVM and Revit.
118

 The add-in learns the parameter matching you defined so next time it will identify the section
properties without user interaction.
Skip this section Skipping the section means that all elements having this section will be imported as a general object
with its boundary representation but without a structural model.
Setting materials Extracting proper material information from Revit poses similar problems. If the add-in fails, it will call
your help to identify the materials that could not be recognized, and you can associate AxisVM materi-
al names to element names.

You can leave some elements unassigned. At the import phase, AxisVM will assign a default material to
them.
If the installer fails... If the installer fails due to any reason and Revit does not find the dll file of the add-in you can install it
manually by running !REGISTER_Revit.BAT from the folder where AxisVM is installed.
 It is important to know, that the communication between the two programs is based on the
Revit API interface. The structural model of the elements are queried from the Revit database (if
Revit does not provide this information, AxisVM can import only the wireframe of the element).
This structural model still requires many minor adjustments to make it usable. AxisVM tries to
join objects (if you check this option) but sometimes you have to edit the model to get a proper
structural framework.

Comparison based Since version X5, AxisVM and Revit can share a workflow between each other. This is actually a com-
data exchange parison based export-import.
With this, engineers working on the same project can import new or modified entites without effecting
unchanged elements.
The workflow process can be started both from AxisVM and Revit.

When starting from Revit one must leave the checkbox on the bottom of the main window checked.

The reason is that in order to inject the necessary parameters into the project file, the application needs
the permission of the user and to save the file afterwards. If it can not happen, the exported file will not
contain workflow parameters. AxisVM will still be able to read the produced file, however comparion
based import will not be possible.
When starting the workflow from AxisVM there is no need for such acts, necessary parameters will
automatically be embedded in the file.
One can use comparison based import only if there is a modell previously opened in either application.

In Revit radio buttons must be switched like on the picture below:

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 119

While in AxisVM, you can see the lines shown below when importing a file previously saved with
workflow parameters:

For the comparison to actually happen you have to check the checkbox shown below:

During the import, three basic scenarios are handled:

1. Element to be imported can not be found in the actual model, so it can be simply processed
and imported.
2. One or more items of the actual model can not be found in the file to be imported. In this
case, users can select to either delete these elements or to ignore and leave them intact.
3. The item to be imported can be found in the actual model. In this case, we perform a
comparison based on
a. the material of the elements
b. the statical model of the elements
c. the profile or thickness of the elements

If after this we find them equal, the imported item is skipped. However, if they are found to be
different, arriving item is processed, and the former one is deleted.
When -for any reason- we cannot perform a succesful comparison, users can select to keep the existing
item or to import the new one.

These mentioned user preferences can be adjusted prior to the actual import process on the form
pasted below:

Revit form

AxisVM form
120

3.1.7.4. Importing PDF files

PDF *.pdf Imports drawings from PDF files as a background layer or AxisVM lines.
Only lines, curves and text objects are processed, images and other elements are ignored.
The final size of the imported drawing can be set interactively on the screen (Find proper scale interac-
tively) or can be adjusted by specifying a Scale.
Importing text and line width is optional. Note: certain pdf creating engines export text as a series of
graphical objects making it impossible to distinguish between text and graphics.

You can set the Default font to use when displaying text with an unavailable font. After clicking on the
Place button a page number must be entered for multipage documents. Only one page can be import-
ed at a time.

For other settings and commands see the above part describing importing DXF files.

3.1.7.5. Importing AxisVM AXS files

AxisVM *.axs Imports a model from an existing AxisVM file into
AxisVM, and merges it with the current model.
During the merging process, the Geometry Check
(See... section 4.8.19 Geometry check) command is
automatically applied.

If there are different properties assigned to the same merged elements, the properties of the current
model will be retained. Load groups and combinations if any, are appended to the existing ones as
new groups and combinations, and the load cases as new cases. If no load groups or combinations
are defined in the imported model, the load cases will be appended to the existing ones as new cases.
If the same load case exists in both models, loads will be merged if the Merge load cases with the same
name checkbox is checked.
If both models contains loads that are limited to one occurrence (e.g. thermal) in the same load case,
the load in the current model will be retained.
The Section Lines/Planes Parts with the same name are merged, otherwise they are appended.
When importing an AxisVM file a dialog is displayed.
Use the Place button to graphically position the imported model in your model’s space.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 121

3.1.7.6. Importing files from other applications

Stereo Lithography Reads the triangular mesh describing the surface of a model from a file in STL format (binary or text).
*.stl file Multiple nodes and degenerated triangles are filtered out. Import can be transferred to a background
layer as well.
Bocad interface Opens a data file created by Bocad steel construction software (*.sc1) and imports beam cross-
*.sc1 file sections and geometry.

Glaser -isb cad- Imports *.geo files exported by Glaser -isb cad- describing beam or surface models.
*.geo file
SDNF file Imports a file exported in Steel Detailing Neutral Format used in data exchange between steel detail-
(Steel Detailing ing programs.
Neutral Format)
DSTV format In its current version AxisVM is capable of importing stp files implementing "PSS_2000_04" file scheme
*.stp file based on "Standard Description for Product Interface Steel Construction 4/2000". This filetype is de-
signed for storing steel structures' data, and can describe linear structures as well as planar regions.
Even statical calculations can be imported through this interface, though with limited capabilities.
If static calculations and an architectural model are both embedded in the file, the user can choose
importing either the calcualtion or the architectural modell. When trying to import data onto an exist-
ing modell, the user can select between overwriting or just supplementing it.

3.1.8. Parametric design

„Parametric design is based on the idea, that specific numbers, i.e., parameters control the geometry.
To fully exploit its potentials, these parameters are linked to each other, and these links form a system.
Thus, it is possible that by modifying only one parameter, the whole geometry changes. This idea is
regularly used in structural design. Imagine that by modifying only the span of a truss, the height and
the truss layout are automatically updated both in the 3D model and in the shop drawings. To build a
system capable of doing this requires time, and therefore it is essential to think it over whether it is
worth the time to create a parametric model. However, once we have built such a system of parame-
ters, links, and a dynamically changing model, we have a highly flexible tool.”

Based on the article: Péter Romvári: Parametric design in practice in epiteszforum.hu

AxisVM Export The most commonly used parametric design software in structural design are Grasshopper and Dy-
plugins namo. These are often referred to as graphical algorithm editors that can be used to create parametric
models easily. By using the AxiVM Export plugins, the parametric models created in Grasshop-
per/Dynamo can be exported to AxisVM. First, the AxisVM Export plugin should be installed in Grass-
hopper/Dynamo. The AxisVM Export plugin communicates with AxisVM through its API (COM inter-
face). The export requires that AxisVM and a version of Grasshopper/Dynamo are all installed on the
same computer. After starting the export, AxisVM automatically launches, showing the exported mod-
el.
One advantage of this interface is that it is easy to create parametric models and even templates in
Grasshopper/Dynamo. For example, the parameters of a truss may be the span, height, layout, and
cross-section sizes. The other advantage is that in in the Grasshopper/Dynamo there are a lot of geo-
metric functions, that enables creating complex spatial models.

Currently, models with straight lines can be exported to AxisVM. There are two available exporting
options:

• export lines;
• export elements, for which the type of the element (truss, beam, rib), the material properties,
and the cross-section have to be defined.

Currently, only the following properties can be used:

• material property: according to the Eurocodes (from AxisVM material library);

• cross-section: I, hollow (pipe, box), solid round and rectangular cross-sections (from AxisVM
cross-section library).
122

3.1.8.1. Grasshopper/Rhinoceros plugin

*.gh, *.3dm files Grasshopper is the parametric design tool of the Rhinoceros CAD software. Grasshopper can be start-
ed from within Rhinoceros. To export a file with *.gh extension, the AxisVM Export plugin shall be
installed in Grasshopper in Rhinoceros version 6. After installation, the modeling and exporting func-
tions (components) are available in the Grasshopper menu, in the AxisVM tab. Rhinoceros files (*.3dm)
shall be loaded into Grasshopper before exporting to AxisVM.

After exporting, the AxisVM model is independent of the parametric model. Starting a new export
(e.g., with modified geometric parameters) launches a new AxisVM model in a separate window.

The AxisVM Export plugin can be downloaded from https://www.food4rhino.com/app/axisvm-export.

For further details, example files, and installation guide see:
https://github.com/AxisVM/GrasshopperToAxisVM/wiki

3.1.8.2. Dynamo/Autodesk plugin

*.dyn, *.rvt files Dynamo is a parametric design tool of the Autodesk Revit software. Dynamo can either be started
from within Revit or as an independent software (Dynamo Studio, Dynamo Sandbox). To export a file
with *.dyn extension, the AxisVM Export plugin shall be installed in Dynamo. After installation, the
modeling and exporting functions (nodes) are available on the left-hand side menu of Dynamo, at the
AxisVM drop-down menu. Revit files (*.rvt) shall be loaded into Dynamo before exporting to AxisVM.

In Dynamo, before starting the export, first, a new model shall be created using the AxModel node.
Self-weight, nodal load, and nodal supports can be added to the parametric structural model. After
starting the export, a one-directional link is created between the parametric model and the AxisVM
model. This means, that modifying a (geometrical or structural) parameter in Dynamo automatically
updates the structural model in AxisVM. In AxisVM, further structural elements can be added, but
these do not influence the Dynamo parametric model. In Dynamo, it is possible to start an AxisVM
linear static analysis. The link between the models is destroyed by closing any of the models.

The simplest way to download the AxisVM Export plugin is from within the Dynamo software: go to
Packages in the Dynamo menu, then choose Search for a Package... and type AxisVM Export. For
further details, example files, and installation guide see:
https://github.com/AxisVM/DynamoToAxisVM/wiki

3.1.9. Tekla Structures – AxisVM connection – TI module

AxisVM is able to communicate with Tekla Structures softwares different ways in case of
• version 2019 and later,
• version before 2019.

3.1.9.1. TI module for Tekla Structures versions 2019 and later

Setup If the user chooses to install the Tekla add-in, the AxisVM Installer copies all necessary files into the
appropriate places. No other user activity is required.
In as much as there is no AxisVM installed on the user’s machine, or they do not wish to install it, users
can download a separate installer from our website which install only the Tekla add-in.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 123

Connection

After successful installation the modell built up in Tekla can be exported to AxisVM following the steps
below:
1. Create an analytical model

2. Press Create -> New button

3. Adjust the necessary parameters for the analytical model:

124

4. Press button highlighted on the image:

5. Choose the path and name for the intermediate file:

The resulting file with .tae extension can be either dropped onto the user interface of AxisVM or im-
ported via File/Import menu item.
Importing .tae fle

Project The project info declared in Tekla is listed in the upper-left list.
Import method If the AxisVM model is not empty, two options are available to overwrite the model or update it.
Structural model If this option is activated AxisVM changes the raw geometry data to build a proper structural frame-
work. Colliding beams are connected with a rigid body, neighbouring domains are joined, beams run-
ning on a domain are converted to ribs. Some of these calculations require considerable resources and
may slow down the import process.
Arc resolution Certain geometry calculation require arcs to be converted into polylines. The conversion criterion can
be set here.
Editing tolerance Tolerance used when calculating geometry.
Joining objects To improve the efficiency of collision detection bounding boxes of objects are inflated a bit. This tole-
rance value can be set here. Active only if the checkbox on panel Structural model is checked.
Default material Users can select the material assigned to entities for which Tekla supplied no information.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 125
126

3.1.9.2. TI module for Tekla Structures versions before 2019

The connection between the two software is made through a COM server enabled to run AxisVM. To
make the connection work first the COM server must be registered within the operating system (in the
Registry) then Tekla Structures must be notified that a compatible server is available.
AxisVM setup automatically performs these registering operations, however if Tekla Structures is not
installed the second registration cannot be completed. Therefore after installing Tekla Structures the
registration has to be started again by running two batch files from the AxisVM program folder:
!REGISTER_AXISVM_X64.BAT
!REGISTER_TEKLA_X64.BAT

If connections fails any time it is recommended to run this registration again.

Connection After a successful registration the model built in Tekla Structures can be transferred to
AxisVM in the following way: click Analysis & Design models... in the Analysis menu then click the
Properties button to set AxisVM AD Engine as the Analysis engine.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 127

If AxisVM AD Engine does not appear in the dropdown list the registration was not successful and has
to be repeated.

Getting back to the Analysis & Design models dialog click Run to start the transfer of the model. The
process status is displayed in dialog. If the transfer is completed successfully click the OK button to
see the model in AxisVM.
128

The model transferred to AxisVM:

Loads and load cases specified in Tekla Structures are also converted.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 129

3.1.10. Page header

Lets you specify a header text (two lines), which contains the name of the project and designer. It will
appear on the top of every printed page. An additional comment line can be added.

If a page header logo was selected for printing drawings, tables and reports, the logo also appears
here. Click on the logo to change it or try Settings / Preferences / Report / Company logo / Settings…

3.1.11. Print setup

Allows setting the parameters of the default printer.

This is a standard Windows dialog therefore its language corresponds with the language of the
installed operating system.

3.1.12. Print

Lets you print the model according to the current display settings. Allows the setup of the printer, and
[Ctrl]+ [P] of the page.
Current printer Printer setup
Output
and printer setup
Printing drawing

Send To
Lets you send the output directly to the printer or to a graphics file (DXF, BMP, JPG, PNG or
Windows Metafile [WMF/EMF]).
130

Printer
Lets you select and setup the printer.
If Print to file is selected, the data sent to the printer will be stored in the Name.prn file, where
Name is a file name to be entered.
You can set the number of copies required.
Click on the printer name or on the Printer… button to invoke the standard Windows Printer
Setup dialog where you can change printer and printer settings in detail.
Scale
Lets you set the scale of the drawing to print. In case of perspective or rendered view or if the
output is sent to a Windows Metafile the scale cannot be set.

Margins (Printer/DXF)
Lets you set the size and the units of the page margins. You can also drag margin lines within the
preview area by their corner and midside handles.
Bitmap size (BMP, JPG)
Lets you set the bitmap size in pixels, inch, mm or cm and bitmap resolution in dpi (dots per inch).
Preview
Lets you view the printed image prior printing. If you select Printer as a target the graphics cursor
turns to a hand whenever it enters the preview area. By pressing the left mouse button and
moving the mouse you can specify an additional panning which will affect the printed output
only.

Page header
Lets you set the date and remark that will appear on each page, and the starting number for the
page numbering. If the Page numbers checkbox is turned off a blank space will appear after Page
allowing handwritten page numbers. Setup… displays the Page header dialog (see… 3.1.10 Page
header) where you can change the company logo.
Orientation
Lets you set the orientation of the page.
Color options
Lets you select printing in grayscale, color, or black and white.
If your printer cannot print in color you may get different results in the first two cases.
If you select Grayscale the output will be converted to grayscale using an internal grayscale
palette of AxisVM. If you select Color the conversion to grayscale will be performed by the
Windows printer driver. Try both to find which works better for you. When black and white
printing is selected, all entities are printed in black.
Paper size
Lets you set the size of the paper.
Change fonts
Lets you select fonts to be used in printing and set the font size.
Pen widths
Sets the size of the pens for printing.
Thick lines are used for drawing supports and rigid elements.
Medium lines are used for isolines and section line.
Thin lines are used for elements and geometry and other
entities.

Windows to Print
Lets you print either the active window or all windows displayed.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 131

Printing to file When Print to File is selected the printing is redirected to a file, name.prn that you can print anytime
later.
If the file name.prn already exists, you can add your printing to it, or overwrite it.

Printing table When printing from the table browser, you can set the pages (all / even / odd) of all / current /
selected pages you want to print.

Example: Entering 1, 3, 7-10, 20-18 in the Selected field the 1st, 3rd, 7th, 8th, 9th, 10th, 20th, 19th, and 18th
page will be printed in this order.

Print selected only

Enabled only when printing a report. If this option is checked only report items selected in the
Report Maker will be printed. If unchecked, the entire report will be printed.
Table of contents
Printing table of contents at the beginning of the report is optional.
Description of table columns
If this option is checked a summary appears at the end of each table, describing the meaning of
column headers.

3.1.13. Printing from file

You can print the prn file you created from the following window.

You can print more than one prn file at a time. You can set the printing order with the up/down
arrows in the right of the file list box, or dragging the file names to a new position with the mouse.
132

3.1.14. Model Library

The File/Model Library command lets you preview, get information and manage your model files.
As in Open and Save as dialog windows the standard file access dialog box items are displayed, but in
the list box you can select multiple files.

 The AxisVM model files are marked with the symbol. If a model has a result file the symbol has a
blue right-bottom corner, .

Current drive Current folder

Current model preview

New
Creates a new sub-folder in the current folder with the name you enter.
Copy
Copies the selected files to a different folder. You can specify whether to copy the result files or
not.
Rename/Move
Renames the selected files in the current folders or moves them into a different folder.
Delete
Deletes the selected files from the current folders. You can specify to delete only the result files or
all.
Open
Opens the selected file for editing.

 AxisVM files are marked with . If a result file is available, the bottom right corner of the icon is
blue.
Preview
Shows the model wireframe in front, side, top view or in perspective depending on the model
dimensions. Model information is also displayed in a list.
Close
Quits the Model Library.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 133

3.1.15. Material Library

AxisVM provides a preloaded material library (that contains the most frequently used structural
materials) and allows you to create material property sets that you can use over and over again in
many different models. You must assign different names to each material property set.

The material library window can also be opened using the Table Browser icon and by selecting
Libraries/Material Library. See... 4.9.9 Line elements, 4.9.22 Creating model framework from an architectural
model
See the detailed description of the Table Browser in section 2.9.

Properties of This table contains the properties of materials often used in civil engineering to the MSz, Eurocode,
materials DIN-1045, DIN-1045-1, NEN, SIA-162, a STAS and Italian codes. You can add, modify, or delete existing
material data. In case of entering a new material with an existing name it will be added as
materialname_number. These materials can be used in any model.

 Changes in the material library does not reflect in models using the modified material.
When entering a new material, the following dialog is displayed:
Define new material Definig new material or clicking to a non-editable column (eg. national design code, type)
a dialog appears, in which all material properties, calculation and design parameters can be defined or
[Ctrl+Ins] changed. The fields containing the basic properties independent of the design code can be edited in
Change the table.
material properties When a material with a name identical to one existing is entered an index is attached to the name
(name_index) to differentiate from the existing one.
If no texture was assigned to the material click the sample rectangle to select one from the library.
See... 2.16.4 Display mode
134

Material Properties For each material the following properties are stored:
Material type: Steel, concrete, timber, aluminum, masonry, other 
Design code, material code
Material name
Fill color on the screen
Contour line color on the screen,
Texture

Linear properties The material model can be isotropic or orthotropic.

Ex [kN/cm2] Young’s modulus of elasticity in the local x direction
Ey [kN/cm2] Young’s modulus of elasticity in the local y direction
ν - Poisson’s ratio
T [1/C] Thermal expansion coefficient
ρ [kg/m3] Mass density
Calculation of further material properties

𝜈 if 𝐸𝑖 ≥ 𝐸𝑗 𝐸𝑖 𝐸𝑗
𝐸𝑧 = max{𝐸𝑥 , 𝐸𝑦 } ; 𝜈𝑖𝑗 = { 𝐸 ; 𝐺𝑖𝑗 =
𝑖
𝜈 if 𝐸𝑖 < 𝐸𝑗 𝐸𝑖 + 𝐸𝑗 + 2𝜈𝑖𝑗 𝐸𝑗
𝐸𝑗
where 𝑖𝑗 = {𝑥𝑦, 𝑥𝑧, 𝑦𝑧}
In case of timber materials:
𝜌 is the air dry mass density (12% humidity) and, the modulus of elasticity E is based on bending
test results. The effect of time (relaxation) is not taken into account.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 135

Nonlinear properties Material model used in the software is valid only in case of small strains.
Material type
Material model / yield criterion
Steel Concrete, masonry Other

NL elastic / Strain energy based ✓ — ✓

Plastic / von Mises ✓ — ✓

Plastic / Bresler-Pister — ✓ ✓

Stress-strain diagram By parameters

E [kN/cm2] Young’s modulus of elasticity for nonlinear analysis (rise of the initial section of the
- diagram)
ET [kN/cm2] Young’s modulus of elasticity for nonlinear analysis (rise of the tangential section of
the - diagram)
σyT [kN/cm2] Tensile yield stress
σyC [kN/cm2] Compressive yield stress

By function

Stress-strain
diagram editor

Most of the toolbar functions are the same as in the time history diagram editor. See… 4.10.28 Dy-
namic loads (for time-history analysis) – DYN module

Symmetrical If this option is activated defining the positive part of the function also defines the negative part.
function

Biaxial compression σyB [kN/cm2] Biaxial compressive yield stress. 𝜎𝑦𝐵 = 𝐶𝑦𝐵 ∙ 𝜎𝑦𝐶
CyB [] Biaxial compression factor

Restrictions on Material model / yield criterion 𝐸𝑇 𝜎𝑦𝐶 𝐶𝑦𝐵 - diagram

parameters NL elastic / Strain energy based ET ≥ 0 σyC ≥ 0 N.A. arbitrary
Plastic / von Mises ET ≥ 0 σyC = σyT N.A. symmetrical
Plastic / Bresler-Pister ET = 0 σyC ≥ σyT 1 ≤ CyB ≤ 1.2 N.A.

N.A. – not available

136

Yield surface visuali- The diagram shows the section cut of the yield surface by the plane of the principal stresses S1-S2.
zation This boundary curve belongs to plane stress state.

NL elastic / Strain energy based

This material model has nonlinear elastic behav-
iour. It means that the point representing the
state of the material moves along the - curve
when load increase or decrease. No irreversible
deformation.
Asymmetric stress strain behavior is available.

𝜎𝑦𝑇 = 200 MPa , 𝜎𝑦𝐶 = 600 MPa

Plastic behaviour
Increasing load moves the point representing the state of the material along the - curve, decreas-
ing load moves it parallel with the initial section of the curve.

Plastic / von Mises

This material model is recommended for steel
material. Only symmetric stress-strain behaviour
is available for this material model. [35]
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Von_Mises_yield_criterion

𝜎𝑦𝑇 = 200 MPa , 𝜎𝑦𝐶 = 200 MPa

Plastic / Bresler-Pister
This material model is recommended for concrete and masonry materials, because it can model the
low yield strength for tension and the high yield strength for uniaxial and biaxial compression simul-
taneously. [36] https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bresler_Pister_yield_criterion

𝜎𝑦𝑇 = 5 MPa , 𝜎𝑦𝐶 = 50 MPa 𝜎𝑦𝑇 = 5 MPa , 𝜎𝑦𝐶 = 50 MPa 𝜎𝑦𝑇 = 5 MPa , 𝜎𝑦𝐶 = 50 MPa
𝐶𝑦𝐵 = 1.0 𝐶𝑦𝐵 = 1.1 𝐶𝑦𝐵 = 1.2
𝜎𝑦𝐵 = 𝐶𝑦𝐵 ∙ 𝜎𝑦𝐶 = 50 MPa 𝜎𝑦𝐵 = 𝐶𝑦𝐵 ∙ 𝜎𝑦𝐶 = 55 MPa 𝜎𝑦𝐵 = 𝐶𝑦𝐵 ∙ 𝜎𝑦𝐶 = 60 MPa
Stiffness Initial stiffness The materially linear initial stiffness matrix is used for the evaluation of the global
stiffness matrix. The calculation is slower (more iterations are necessary) but the
convergence is more stable.
Tangent stiffness The materially nonlinear tangent stiffness matrix is used for the evaluation of the
global stiffness matrix. The calculation is faster (less iterations are necessary) but if
the increments are not small enough convergence problems may occur.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 137

Strain hardening The strain hardening could be:

(a) Isotropic: 𝛽 = 1 (b) Kinematic: 𝛽 = 0

 B 1
A C(b)
A B
B A
A O O

O A  O 2
C(b)
B
C(a)

C(a)

In case of kinematic hardening the size of the yield surface does not change but its centre moves
from the origin of the stress space to the 𝑂′ location. In such a case the relative stresses 𝜎𝑟,𝑖 = 𝜎𝑖 −
𝜎𝑂′,𝑖 with respect to the current origin are substituted into the equation of the effective stress calcu-
lated on the basis of the yield criterion. See… 6.1.21 Truss/beam/rib stresses and 6.1.22 Surface element
stresses In case of isotropic hardening 𝜎𝑂′,𝑖 = 0 and 𝜎𝑟,𝑖 = 𝜎𝑖 .

Design Parameters Design parameters depend on the material type and the design code.

Steel EC, fy Yield stress

DIN 1045-1, fu Ultimate stress
SIA 26x, fy* Yield stress 40mm < t < 100mm)
Italian fu* Ultimate stress (40mm < t < 100mm)
fyd Yield stress

NEN fyt Ultimate stress

fyd* Yield stress (40mm < t < 100mm)
fyt* Yield stress (40mm < t < 100mm)
Concrete EC, fck Characteristic compressive cylinder strength at 28 days
Italian γc Partial factor
αcc Concrete strength reduction factor for sustained loading
Φt Creep factor
fck Characteristic compressive cylinder strength at 28 days
fck, cube Characteristic compressive cylinder strength of cube
DIN 1045-1 γc Partial factor
α Concrete strength reduction factor for sustained loading
Φt Creep factor
fck Characteristic compressive cylinder strength at 28 days
SIA 26x γc Partial factor
Φt Creep factor
fck’ Characteristic compressive cylinder strength at 28 days
NEN Φ Creep factor
138

Timber fm,k Characteristic bending strength

ft,0,k Characteristic tensile strength parallel to grain
ft,90,k Characteristic tensile strength perpendicular to grain
fc,0,k Characteristic compression strength parallel to grain
fc,90,k,y Characteristic compression strength perpendicular to grain (y)
(for solid and Glulam timber fc,90,k,y = fc,90,k,z = fc,90,k)
fc,90,k,z Characteristic compression strength perpendicular to grain (z)
(for solid and Glulam timber fc,90,k,y = fc,90,k,z = fc,90,k)
fv,k,y Characteristic shear strength (y)
(for solid and Glulam timber fv,k,y = fv,k,z = fv,k)
EC
fv,k,z Characteristic shear strength (z)
(for solid and Glulam timber fv,k,y = fv,k,z = fv,k)
E0,mean Mean Young’s modulus of elasticity parallel to grain (x)
E90,mean Mean Young’s modulus of elasticity perpendicular to grain (y)
E 0.05 5% modulus of elasticity parallel to grain (x)
Gmean Mean shear modulus
ρk Characteristic density
ρmean Mean density
γM Partial factor of the material
s Size effect exponent (for LVL materials)
Masonry fb Normalized compressive strength of the masonry units
fk Characteristic compressive strength of the masonry
fvk0 Initial characteristic shear strength
EC fxk1 Characteristic flexural strength of masonry
bending about an axis parallel with bed joints
fxk2 Characteristic flexural strength of masonry
bending about an axis perpendicular to bed joints
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 139

3.1.16. Cross-Section Library

AxisVM provides preloaded cross-section libraries, that contain the most frequently used steel shapes
and concrete cross-sections, and allow you to create standard cross-section property sets that you can
use over and over again in many different models. The libraries includes products of manufacturers
worldwide.
For the description of the Table Browser see 2.9 Table Browser.

 The Undo function does not work when libraries are modified.
Create a new library You can create a custom cross-section library by the File / New Cross-Section Table command in the
Table Browser. You have to specify a library name, a library file name and a cross-section type to
categorize the library in the Table Browser. A Geographical region and a Manufacturer can also be
entered. These fields can be used to filter cross-sections when importing from the library. See… 4.9.2.1
Browse cross-section libraries
Standard and custom cross-section library files (*.sec) are stored in the folder where the application is
stored.

Assign a name to each cross-section, and specify the following properties:

Name
Process Rolled, welded, cold-formed, other.
Shape I (H, W), U, L, Pipe, Round, Rectangle, C, Z, S, J, T, Box, Custom
Cross-section When creating a new cross-section in the table all property values have to be entered.
properties
h Dimension in the local z direction (height)
b Dimension in the local y direction (width)
tw Web thickness
tf Flange thickness
Ax Axial (cross-sectional) area
Ay Shear area
Az Shear area
Ix Torsional inertia
Iy Flexural inertia about local y axis
Iz Flexural inertia about local z axis
Iyz Centrifugal inertia (area product moment of inertia)
I1, I2 Principal inertia about local 1st / 2nd axis
Iω Warping modulus (used for the design of steel shapes)
W1, el,t Elastic cross-section modulus, top = I1 / e2_max (see diagram below)
W1, el,b Elastic cross-section modulus, bottom = I1 / e2_min
W2,el,t Elastic cross-section modulus, top = I2 / e1_max
140

W2,el,b Elastic cross-section modulus, bottom = I2 / e1_min

W1,pl Plastic cross-section modulus
W2,pl Plastic cross-section modulus
iy, iz Radius of inertia about local 1st / 2nd axis
Hy, Hz Bounding box dimensions in local y and z direction
yG, zG Position of the center of gravity of the cross-section in local y, z direction
relative to the lower-left corner of the circumscribed rectangle
ys,zs Position of the shear center in local y and z directions relative to the
center of gravity
r1, r2, r3 Rounding (corner and fillet) radii
S.p. Stress calculation points

The Cross-section Library contains different type of cross-sections:

Steel cross-section

Hot rolled parallel flange Hot rolled tapered flange I beam

I beam

Hot rolled T shape Hot rolled angle

Hot rolled parallel flange channel (U Hot rolled tapered flange channel (U shape)
shape)

Cold-formed pipe Cold-formed and hot rolled (RHS) box shape

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 141

Cold-formed J shape Cold-formed angle

Cold-formed channel (U shape) Cold-formed C shape

Cold-formed Z shape Cold-formed S shape

Cold-formed C shape (LINDAB) Cold-formed Z shape (LINDAB)

Concrete cross- The concrete cross-sections are listed starting from the size 20x20 to size 80x80 cm in steps of 2 and 5
sections cm.
142

3.1.16.1. Cross-Section Editor

Cross-section Editor allows you to edit thin / thick walled (solid) cross-sections or create certain
parametric composite sections of two or three different materials.
You can use parametric circular, rectangular, ring and polygonal shapes, or any shape listed in the
cross-section libraries to build complex cross-sections. The shapes used to build a new thin-walled or
thin-walled cross-section are referred to as components, and have to be of the same material.
You can translate, rotate, mirror, copy or move the selected components at any time during the editing.
When a component is placed to its location graphically, the principal axes and the cross-sectional
properties of the composite cross-section are computed.
You can use keyboard commands the same way as in main editing windows.
The OK button exits and closes the cross-section editor window, and saves your current cross-section
into the cross-section table of your model with a name you specify.
Cross-section editor is on the toolbar of the Cross-section Library and can also be launched from the
line element dialog. See... 4.9.9 Line elements
The editor can be used when creating a native model from an architectural model through the IFC
interface. See... 4.9.22 Creating model framework from an architectural model

Editor Keys See... 2.5 Using the cursor, the keyboard, the mouse

Toolbar Most important functions are available from the toolbar.

Prints the cross-section. See... 3.1.12 Print

Adds the image of the cross-section to the Gallery.

See... 3.2.12 Saving drawings and design result tables

Undoes the last operation.

Redoes the operation which was undone.

Copies the image of the cross-section to the Clipboard.

From Cross-section Loads a cross-section from the Cross-section Library. Only thick or thin-walled cross-sections are
Library available depending on the cross-section editor tab position.

From DXF file Contour of thick walled cross-sections can also be imported from a DXF file.

Stress-points You can specify the points you want to calculate stresses for. The default stress-point is the center of
gravity. You can specify up to 9 stress-points for each cross-section.
When applying a move command the stress-points can also be moved.
In case of thin-walled sections the shear flow is calculated only along the centerlines. The projected
points, from where the shear stress values are assigned to the stress-points, are also displayed. If a
stress-point is located at a corner or at a joint of several centerline segments, the higest value is taken
into account.

 Stress calculations are performed at the specified stress-points only. If you don’t specify any
stress-points, stress will be calculated in the center of gravity only. It means that no bending
stress will appear.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 143

Icon bar Editor functions and settings can be found on the Icon bar on the left. The behaviour of the Icon bar is
the same as that of the main Icon bar. See... 2.16 Icon bar.

The only difference is that this Icon bar can be moved above the menus at the top or at the bottom but
it is not dockable.

Geometry
transformations
All standard geometry transformations (moving, rotating, mirroring, scaling) can be used. All operations
are performed in the y-z plane of the cross-section editor.

Dimensioning

Dimensioning tools can be selected from the upper toolbar of the palette. These are orthogonal and
aligned dimension lines, angle, radius and arc length dimensions.
The bottom toolbar contains the buttons for fine tuning dimension line properties and choosing the
smart dimension line option which places multiple dimension lines between the start point and the
end point.

Dimensioning Select the type of the cross-section dimension line (or-

thogonal, aligned, angle) from the top toolbar.

The bottom toolbar contains the buttons for fine tuning dimension line properties and choosing the
smart dimension line option.

The Options dialog allows editing constraint

angles and editing tolerance.

Automatic collision check turns the temporary

outline of the shape to red if it touches or over-
laps another shape in its current position.

Automatic recalculation recalculates cross-section

parameters each time the shape changes.
144

Definition of a The Editor can be used to create custom thin-walled or thick-walled (solid) or composite cross-sections.
cross-section The components of a complex but non-composite cross-section will have the same material. Compo-
site cross-sections are parametric and created from two or three materials.

Thin-walled
cross-sections
Cross-section properties

A component belonging to the thin-walled category can be added to your cross-section.

Base-point You can select a base-point to each cross-section component, that allows
you to position the component during editing, depending on its shape
and final location within the composite cross-section.

Standard shapes can also be defined parametrically. In this case the following parameters has to be
defined in the dialog:
Manufacturing There are three options (rolled, welded, cold formed.)
process

Dimensions Values depending on the type of the cross-section (height, width, thickness, corner/fillet radius,
diameter etc.).
Rotation Lets you define a rotation by angle . The default value is 0.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 145

I shape Definition of an I or wedged I shape by

its height, width, web and flange
, thicknesses and a fillet radius.

Wedged I shape

Asymmetric I shape Definition of an asymmetric I shape by

its height, width, web and upper /
lower flange dimensions.

Rectangular Definition of a rectangle by its

parameters b (width), v (thickness), and
, with b > v.

Pipe
Definition of a pipe by its parameters d (outside diameter), and v (thickness). The centerline is
considered as the contour of a closed domain, which is displayed with a dashed line.
Other shapes Definition of cross-sections by height, width, thickness and in the case of rolled or bended cross-
sections by the corner/fillet radius.
146

Double shapes The base cross-section can be defined parametrically (width, height, web and flange thickness) or taken
from the Cross-section Library.
Special parameters for double shapes:
distance: a
orientation : facing or back-to-back (in case of 2U)
Cross shapes Definition of a cross shape by its parameters:
h (height), b (width), tw (web thickness) and tf
(flange thickness).

4L shapes Definition of a 4L shape by its parameters h

(height), b (width), tw (web thickness) and tf
(flange thickness), a, a1 (distances) and r
(rounding radius).

Butterfly shapes Definition of a butterfly shape by its parame-

ters h (height), b (width), tw (web thickness)
and tf (flange thickness), a, a1 (distances) and
r (rounding radius).

Polygonal Definition of a polygonal shape.

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 147

Before the definition the position of the control line of the

segment can be selected:

1. left side
2. center line
3. right side
R: Rounding (corner and fillet) radii

Arc shape Definition of an arc shape by d (diameter),

α* (central angle) and t (thickness).

Changing For thin-walled cross-sections thickness of selected segments

wall thickness can be changed individually. For parametric shapes wall thick-
ness can be changed through the parameters.

Delete Using the [Del] key you can invoke the Selection Icon Bar, and select the components you want to
delete.
When deleting a component the stress-points will also be delete.
Stress-point Deletes the selected stress-points.

 You cannot delete the default stress-point (the center of gravity).

Options Lets you set the grid size, cursor step, and the zoom factors.

Thick-walled cross-
sections

Parametric shapes:
Rectangle Rectangle with a width of b and a height of h.
148

Rounded rectangle Rounded rectangle with a width of b, height of h and rounding radii r1, r2.

Hollow rectangle Hollow rectangle with a width of b, height of h and v1, v2 wall thickness.

I shape I shape defined by a1, a2, a3, b1, b2, b3 parameters.

One of the (a1, a3), (b1, b3) parameters can be set to zero to define
T, U, L shapes

Haunched I shape Haunched I shape defined by the bw web thickness, bt, bb top and bottom width,
h total height and ht, hth, hb, hbh parameters.

T shape Defined like an I shape, but b3 = 0.

L shape Defined like an I shape, but a1 = 0 and b3 = 0.

U shape Defined like an I shape, but a1 = 0.

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 149

T shape with T shape with haunched web defined by bw, bb, bt width, a h total height and ht,
haunched web flange thickness.

T shape with T shape with haunched web defined by bw, web width bt total width, h total
haunched flange height and ht , hth parameters

Hollow circle Hollow circle defined by the D outer diameter and the v wall thickness.

Round or semicircu- Round or semicircular shape with a diameter of d.

lar shape

Symmetric trape- Symmetric trapezoid with bt, bb top and bottom width and a height of h.
zoid

Polygonal Definition of a polygonal shape by drawing a a complex polygon. Press the Esc key, click the right mouse
button or close the polygon to finish editing. During editing the following pet palette appears:

Line

Tangent

Arc with centerpoint

Arc by three points

Tangential arc

Arc with a given tangent

Insert a vertex Insertion of a new vertex on the contour of the cross-section. Shape of the cross-section can be changed
by dragging a vertex by the mouse.

Contour If the Contour button is down the cross-section can be defined. If the Hole button is down a hole can be
specified.
150

Hole You can specify a hole in rectangular, circular, and closed polygonal shape components. The hole can be
rectangular, circular, and closed polygonal.

Composite
cross-sections

Composite sections are made of two or three different materials.

If the composite section contains an inner profile the center of gravity of the inner profile will get to the
position of the center of gravity of the outer cross-section. If the inner profile is too big to fit into the
outer cross-section the drawing of the definition dialog is replaced by a crossed out rectangle.

Concrete-filled tube Definition of a concrete-filled

tube requires the following
parameters: the material, the
d diameter and t thickness of
the tube and the material of
the infill. An optional inner
profile can also be defined.

Materials can be imported from the Material Library, see… 3.1.15 Material Library.

The tube section can be entered parametrically or selected from the pipe cross-sections of Cross-section
Library, see… 3.1.16 Cross-Section Library. Inner profile can be selected from the Cross-section Library.
The selected inner profile can be removed from the section.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 151

Concrete filled Definition of a concrete-filled box shape requires the following parameters: the
box shape material, the b width, h height, tf and tw thickness values of the box and the
material of the infill. An optional inner profile can also be defined.

Circular concrete Definition of a circular concrete-encased profile requires the following para-
encased profile meters: the material and the d diameter of the round shape, an inner profile
and its material.

Rectangular Definition of a circular concrete-encased profile requires the following para-

concrete encased meters: the material, the b width and h height of the rectangle shape, an inner
profile profile and its material.

Delete Using the [Del] key you can invoke the selection window, and select the components you want to delete.
When deleting a component, the stress-points will also be deleted.
Polygon Deletes the selected components.
Stress-point Deletes the selected stress-points.

 You can not delete the default stress-point (from the center of gravity).
Options Lets you set the grid size, cursor step, and the zoom factors.
Compute properties Following cross-section properties are calculated:
AxisVM calculates Ax, Iy, Iz, Iyz by integration, Ay, Az, Ix, I, y, z, yz, 1, 2, A1, A2
by performing a finite element analysis of the cross-section.

 In case of a cross-section consisting of two or more independent parts, Ay, Az, y, z, yz, 1, 2, A1,
A2 are not determinded.
Ax Axial (cross-sectional) area
Ay Shear area in local y direction
Az Shear area in local z direction
Ix Torsional inertia
Iy Flexural inertia about local y axis
Iz Flexural inertia about local z axis
Iyz Centrifugal inertia
I1(*) Principal inertia about local 1st axis
I2(*) Principal inertia about local 2nd axis
α Angle between local 1st axis and the local y axis.
I Warping modulus (used for the design of steel shapes)
y shear factor in local y direction
z shear factor in local y direction
yz shear factor for local yz cross
1 shear factor for local 1st direction
2 shear factor for local 2nd direction
A1(*) Shear area associated with shear forces in local 1st direction
A2(*) Shear area associated with shear forces in local 2nd direction
W1, el,t(*) Elastic cross-section modulus, top = I1 / e2_max (see diagram below)
W1, el,b(*) Elastic cross-section modulus, bottom = I1 / e2_min
W2,el,t(*) Elastic cross-section modulus, top = I2 / e1_max
152

W2,el,b(*) Elastic cross-section modulus, bottom = I2 / e1_min

W1,pl(*) Plastic cross-section modulus
W2,pl(*) Plastic cross-section modulus
i1 Radius of inertia about local 1st axis
i2 Radius of inertia about local 2nd axis
yG Position of the center of gravity of the cross-section in local y direction relative to the
lower-left corner of the circumscribed rectangle
zG Position of the center of gravity of the cross-section in local z direction relative to the
lower-left corner of the circumscribed rectangle
ys, zs Position of the shear center in local y and z directions relative to the center of gravity
Po Outer circumference (cross-section contour)
Pi Inner circumference (holes)
(*) If first and second principal axes are the local y and z axes values with (*) appears with
indices y and z.
Principal inertia
𝐼𝑥 + 𝐼𝑦 𝐼𝑥 − 𝐼𝑦 2
𝐼1 = + √( 2
) + 𝐼𝑥𝑦
2 2

𝐼𝑦 + 𝐼𝑧 𝐼𝑦 − 𝐼𝑧 2
𝐼2 = + √( 2
) + 𝐼𝑦𝑧
2 2
2𝑛𝑥𝑦
tan(2𝛼𝑛 ) =
𝑛𝑥 − 𝑛𝑦
−90° < 𝛼 ≤ +90°, relative to the cross-section’s local y
axis.

Calculation of elas- 𝐼1 𝐼1
𝑊1,𝑒𝑙,𝑡𝑜𝑝 = 𝑊1,𝑒𝑙,𝑏𝑜𝑡𝑡𝑜𝑚 =
tic cross-section 𝑒2,𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑒2,𝑚𝑖𝑛
modulus
𝐼2 𝐼2
𝑊2,𝑒𝑙,𝑡𝑜𝑝 = 𝑊2,𝑒𝑙,𝑏𝑜𝑡𝑡𝑜𝑚 =
𝑒1,𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑒1,𝑚𝑖𝑛

Shear deformations For beam elements the shear deformations are not taken into account even if the cross-section was
entered with nonzero for the shear area.
The shear areas are used by the rib elements, 𝐴𝑦 = 0 and 𝐴𝑧 = 0.
In the steel design module, the shear areas are calculated according to the corresponding design
code, instead of using the values entered here.

𝐴𝑦 = 𝐴𝑥 /𝜌𝑦 𝐴𝑧 = 𝐴𝑥 /𝜌𝑧 where 𝜌 = shear factor

Compute properties Properties of a composite cross-section are calculated as the modulus-weighted [16, Chapter 1.2] sum
of composite cross- of the properties of its parts. The reference moduli 𝐸𝑟𝑒𝑓 and 𝐺𝑟𝑒𝑓 belong to the material of the outer
sections part.
1 1 𝐺𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝐴𝑥
𝐴𝑥 = ∑ 𝐸𝑖 𝐴𝑥,𝑖 𝐼𝑥 = ∑ 𝐺𝑖 𝐼𝑥,𝑖 𝜌𝑦 =
𝐸𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝐺𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝐺𝐴
∑ 𝑖 𝑥,𝑖
𝜌𝑦,𝑖
1 1
𝐴𝑦 = ∑ 𝐺𝑖 𝐴𝑦,𝑖 𝐼𝑦 = ∑ 𝐸𝑖 𝐼𝑦,𝑖 𝐺𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝐴𝑥
𝐺𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝐸𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝜌𝑧 =
𝐺𝐴
1 1 ∑ 𝑖 𝑥,𝑖
𝐴𝑧 = ∑ 𝐺𝑖 𝐴𝑧,𝑖 𝐼𝑧 = ∑ 𝐸𝑖 𝐼𝑧,𝑖 𝜌𝑧,𝑖
𝐺𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝐸𝑟𝑒𝑓
𝐺𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝐴𝑥
1 𝜌𝑦𝑧 =
𝐺𝐴
𝐼𝑦𝑧 = ∑ 𝐸𝑖 𝐼𝑦𝑧,𝑖 ∑ 𝑖 𝑥,𝑖
∑ 𝑦𝐺,𝑖 𝐸𝑖 𝐴𝑖 𝐸𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝜌𝑦𝑧,𝑖
𝑦𝐺 =
𝐸𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝐴𝑥
∑ 𝑧𝐺,𝑖 𝐸𝑖 𝐴𝑖
𝑧𝐺 =
𝐸𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝐴𝑥
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 153

𝐼𝑦𝑧 ∑ 𝐸𝑖 (𝑧𝑆,𝑖 𝐼𝑧,𝑖 − 𝑦𝑆,𝑖 𝐼𝑦𝑧,𝑖 ) − 𝐼𝑧 ∑ 𝐸𝑖 (𝑧𝑆,𝑖 𝐼𝑦𝑧,𝑖 − 𝑦𝑆,𝑖 𝐼𝑦,𝑖 )

𝑦𝜔 = 2
𝐸𝑟𝑒𝑓 (𝐼𝑦 𝐼𝑧 − 𝐼𝑦𝑧 )

𝐼𝑦 ∑ 𝐸𝑖 (𝑧𝑆,𝑖 𝐼𝑧,𝑖 − 𝑦𝑆,𝑖 𝐼𝑦𝑧,𝑖 ) − 𝐼𝑦𝑧 ∑ 𝐸𝑖 (𝑧𝑆,𝑖 𝐼𝑦𝑧,𝑖 − 𝑦𝑆,𝑖 𝐼𝑦,𝑖 )

𝑧𝜔 = 2
𝐸𝑟𝑒𝑓 (𝐼𝑦 𝐼𝑧 − 𝐼𝑦𝑧 )
1 2 2
𝐼𝜔 = ∑ 𝐸𝑖 [𝐼𝜔,𝑖 + (𝑦𝑆,𝑖 − 𝑦𝑆 ) 𝐼𝑦,𝑖 + (𝑧𝑆,𝑖 − 𝑧𝑆 ) 𝐼𝑧,𝑖 − 2(𝑦𝑆,𝑖 − 𝑦𝑆 )(𝑧𝑆,𝑖 − 𝑧𝑆 )𝐼𝑦𝑧,𝑖 ]
𝐸𝑟𝑒𝑓

 The modulus-weighted computation method is based on the assumption that there is no shear
connection between the parts. However, it has no effect for the parameters Ax, Iy, Iz, Iyz, yG, zG,
because of the coincidence of the center of gravity of the parts. But the values of Ay, Az, Ix, I,
yS, zS, ρy, ρz, ρyz would be different if there was shear connection.

3.1.17. Spring characteristics library

The spring characteristics library window can also be opened using the Table Browser icon and by
selecting Libraries/Spring Characteristics Library. In addition it is available in several dialog windows
for easier selection. See... 4.9.17 Spring
The library has a Default library containing Rigid and Soft spring characteristics to translational and
rotational degrees of freedom. Theese characteristics are automatically added for new models. You
can add aa new library and you modify or expand existing spring characteristics libraries. In case of
creating custom library, its elements will be added to the model only if they are added to the Spring
characteristics (4.9.3 Spring characteristics) in Table Browser or be selected from the library when
defining a new spring element.

The columns contain the following main properties:

Name Name of the characteristic

Type Node to node spring (cannot be modified )
Degree of freedom Translational/rotational degree of freedom
K Initial stiffness
Kv Vibration stiffness
C Damping coefficient
Model Behaviour (Linear elastic/ Nonlinear elastic/ Plastic)

Damping coefficient is shown if there is at least one spring characteristic, where this value is greater
then zero.
Changes in the Spring charateristics library does not reflect in models using the modified spring
 characteristic.
154

When entering a new spring characteristic, the following dialog is displayed:

Define new spring Defining a new spring characteristic or clicking on a table column (except the Name column) a dialog
characteristic appears, where all properties of spring charateristic can be defined or changed.
Characteristics with the same degree of freedom (translational or rotational) cannot have the same
[Ctrl+Ins] name. If an existing name is entered a number will be appended to the name.
Change
properties A spring characteristic has the following properties: Name, Type, Degree of freedom.

Clicking on the icon the Spring characteristics import dialog window is displayed.

Stiffness In default setting the springs operate on linear elastic principle. In the table the Model column
contains the type of behaviour of the spring characteristic.
Translational degree of freedom
Ku kN/m Initial stiffness
KuV kN/m Vibration stiffness
Cu kN/(m/s) Damping coefficient
Rotational degree of freedom
Kr kNm/rad Initial stiffness
KrV kNm/rad Vibration stiffness
Cr kNm/(rad/s) Angular damping coefficinet

Nonlinear A spring can have a nonlinear behaviour like materials. The parameters of the nonlinear behaviour are
properties available if Nonlinear properties is checked.

The parameters for stiffness and damping can be defined on different tab.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 155

Spring model Model type Calculation method

Nonlinear elastic Nonlinear characteristic without irreversibile deformation.
Plastic Irreversibile deformation occurs after reaching the limit force / limit moment.

Force – The function of the spring characteristic can be defined in the same way as the nonlinear nodal
displacement support in the previous versions (simple) or as the stress-strain diagram of materials (advanced). The
diagram units depend on the degree of freedom.
By parameter

Simple definition In case of simple definition, the characterictic can be defined as a nonlinear support. There are options
for symmetric, only compression, only tension characteritic and for resistance.

Ku [kN/m] Initial stiffness

Fu [kN] Resistance
Advanced In case of advanced definition the tension and compression side can be different. If the spring model
definition is plastic, the Ku,T and Ku,C have to be the same, the value of Ku,C cannot be edited.
Using Resistance checkbox limit force/moment and tangent stiffness of the diagram after reaching the
limit force can be specified. If the resistance is switched off a simple linear diagram is obtained.
The red dashed line represents the FyC, FyT and MyC, MyT limit values.

Ku,T [kN/m] Initial stiffness for tension

Ku,T [kN/m] Initial stiffness for compression
KuT,T [kN/m] The slope of the diagram after reaching the limit force for tension
KuT,C [kN/m] The slope of the diagram after reaching the limit force for compression
FyT [kN] Limit force under tension
FyC [kN] Limit force under compression
By function Click the small button to edit the diagram.
The editor function is available for both nonlinear elastic and plastic spring models.

Force – The elements of the toolbar are largely the

displacement same as in 4.10.28 Dynamic loads (for time-
diagram editor history analysis) – DYN module.
156

Using function editor the parameter values on advanced panel are set on the basis of the function in
the following way.
Ku,T [kN/m] The slope of the first segment after the origin
Ku,c [kN/m] The slope of the first segment before the origin
KuT,T [kN/m] The slope of the last segment of the diagram
KuT,C [kN/m] The slope of the first segment of the diagram
Fy,T [kN] Plastic – First point after origin (tension) / NL elastic – editable
Fy,C [kN] Plastic – First point before origin (compression) / NL elastic – editable
The user can define the limit values (resistances) only in case of NL linear spring model and the utiliza-
tion will be calculated by comparing to this value.

Damping Bilinear function can be defined, the damping coefficients might be different.

Cu,T [kN/(m/s)] Damping coefficient for tension

Cu,c [kN/(m/s)] Damping coefficient for compression

Stiffness Initial stiffness The materially linear initial stiffness matrix is used when evaluating the global
stiffness matrix. The calculation is slower (more iterations are necessary) but
the convergence is more stable.
Tangent stiffness The materially nonlinear tangent stiffness matrix is used when evaluating the
global stiffness matrix. The calculation is faster (less iterations are necessary)
but if increments are not small enough convergence problems may occur.

3.1.18. Exit
[Ctrl]+ [Q] Exits the program.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 157

3.2. Edit

3.2.1. Undo

Alt+BkSp

Undoes the effect of the previous commands. To undo a sequence of actions (more levels), click the
down arrow next to the Undo icon, and then select the actions you want to undo based on the time or
type of the commands.
You can set the number of undo/redo levels (maximum 99) in the Main menu Settings / Preferences /
Data integrity dialog box.

3.2.2. Redo

Shift+Alt+BkSp

Undoes the undo command or goes forward to reverse one or more undo commands. You can select
the actions you want to redo based on the time or type of the commands.

3.2.3. Repeat last command

Launches the last command again if it was started by clicking on an icon or pressing a keyboard
[Space] shortcut.
The name of the command is also displayed.

3.2.4. Select All

See... 2.16.1 Selection

Num *
158

3.2.5. Restore previous selection

See... 2.16.1 Selection

3.2.6. Copy

Copies the selected elements of the model to the Clipboard. If nothing is selected but there are active
[Ctrl]+ [C] parts, active parts are copied. If neither selection nor active parts are present the entire model is
copied.
This function copies the drawing of the current graphics window to the clipboard like in earlier versions
but this operation can be deactivated.

3.2.7. Paste

Pastes AxisVM elements from the Clipboard. For paste options see next chapter: Copy / paste options.
[Ctrl]+ [V]

3.2.8. Copy / paste options

Copy options Selected elements are always copied to the Clipboard. User-defined parts containing the selected
elements are also copied.
If domains, beams, ribs, trusses are copied certain associated objects (supports, loads, dimension lines,
reinforcement domains) are also copied.

If you want to control which associated

objects should be copied select them
and choose one or more of the follow-
ing options: Selected supports / Selected
loads / Selected dimensions / Selected
reinforcement domains.
Load cases are copied with loads.
If you want to copy all load cases
choose Copy all load cases instead of
Copy load cases of the loads copied.
Load combinations and load groups
can also be copied.
Turn on Copy active window as a draw-
ing to copy the active window as
graphics as well (it was the only option
in earlier versions).

Paste options Load cases

Pasting of load cases can be controlled
with the following options:
Paste as new load case: load cases
found on the Clipboard are copied as
new load cases. If Merge load cases with
the same name is turned on and the
model has load cases with the same
name as the clipboard load case these
load cases will be merged (loads of the
clipboard load case will be added to
model load case). This option must be
turned on when copying within the
model to avoid creating unnecessary
load cases.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 159

Merge loads from all load cases into the current one. This option copies all loads from all clipboard load
cases into the current load case of the model.

Parts
User-defined parts containing the selected elements are also copied to the clipboard. The first option
is to paste elements of parts into all active parts of the model. The second option is to paste the parts
themselves.

Paste position
There are three options.
Paste into original position: pasted elements will get into their original coordinate position.
Drag by the relative origin / Drag by a corner node of the structure: If one of these options are
selected paste position can be defined by clicking the left mouse button. In the first case the clicked
position will become the position of the relative origin in the source model when the elements were
copied. In the other case the clicked position will become the position of an automatically identified
corner of the copied structure.

3.2.9. Delete

Deletes the selected entities. If no elements are selected it brings up the Selection icon bar and then
[Del] the Delete dialog window.
Lets you delete the selected geometric entities.
To delete:
1. Select the geometric entities to be deleted. You can select them by holding the [Shift] key
pressed while you click on the entities with the left mouse button or use the Selection Icon Bar.
2. Press the [Del] key. If there is no selection, the selection toolbar appears and objects can be
selected for deletion. See... 2.16.1 Selection.
3. Enable the check-boxes of the entities you want to delete.
4. Press the OK button, to finish and close the dialog window.
In the dialog window the check-boxes are active or inactive according to the contents of the current
selection set (intended for deletion).
160

Geometry Lets you select geometric entities for deletion. Deleting geometric entities that have assigned finite
elements, will result in the deletion of its finite elements and of the associated loads.
Elements Lets you select finite elements for deletion. Deleting finite elements will not delete the respective
geometric entity, but will delete the loads.
References Lets you select references for deletion. All finite elements that use the deleted references, and the
associated loads will be deleted too.
Mesh Lets you remove mesh from domains.
R.C. Design Lets you select the reinforcement parameters attached to the selected elements for deletion. Footing
parameters are also deleted.
Steel / Timber Lets you select the steel / timber design parameters attached to the selected elements for deletion.
design
Dimensions Lets you select the dimension lines, text boxes etc. for deletion.

3.2.10. Table Browser

See... 2.9 Table Browser

[F12]

3.2.11. Report Maker

See... 2.10 Report Maker

[F10]

3.2.12. Saving drawings and design result tables

You can save drawings from AxisVM in many different contexts: you can save AxisVM main windows,
beam displacement and internal forces diagrams, steel design results, nonlinear calculation results,
Add drawing to reinforced concrete column and beam design diagrams, bolted joint diagrams. In case of a divided
Gallery [F9]
view you can select to save all windows or the active one only.

 Drawings Library is another way to store diagrams. While Gallery contains static image files, the
Drawings Library uses associative drawings following changes in the model.
See... 2.13 Drawings Library
Which file format Bitmap formats (.BMP, .JPG) store the pixels of the diagram, so Windows metafiles provide higher
to use? resolution when printed. JPG is a compressed format with a slight loss of quality but these files are
much smaller than BMPs.
Windows metafiles (.WMF, .EMF) store a series of drawing commands so they can be scaled and
printed in any size in the same quality. However if you choose hidden line removal or a rendered view
drawn by OpenGL technology metafiles will contain only bitmaps.
To get a high resolution rendered view print the picture directly.
Drawings will be saved to a subfolder Images_modelname automatically created under the folder of
the model file. These pictures can be inserted into a report. Do not modify the name of the subfolder
Images_modelname.

3.2.13. Weight Report

The weight of the entire model, selected elements or details can be listed as a table per material, per
[F8] cross-section or surface type. Weights per material also displays weight of the footings.
Weight report / Rebar statistics displays the total amount of reinforcement bars placed in surface
elements, beams and columns.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 161

3.2.14. Assemble structural members

AxisVM handles line elements as structural members. It means that Meshing of line elements on the
Shift+A Mesh tab creates finite elements but the line elements themselves are not divided. The Find structural
members menu command joins adjacent line elements into a single element until a breaking point is
found. A breaking point is defined by different local x or z directions, different material, cross-section
or eccentricity, end release or a domain boundary. Line elements must be on the same line or on the
same arc.

3.2.15. Break apart structural members

The Break apart structural members menu command breaks apart line elements created with the As-
semble structural members command.
Shift+B

3.2.16. Convert surface loads distributed over beams

This menu item converts selected surface loads distributed over beams into individual distributed
beam loads.

3.2.17. Convert beams to shell model

Selected beams can be converted to shell

models. A shell model consists of shell
elements created and connected according
to the beam length and cross-section.
Preferences for conversion of cross-section
and beam arcs into polygons can be set in
the parameter dialog.

Convert loads If Convert loads is selected beam loads can

be converted to shell loads. To do this the
user must specify the load position within
the cross-section. Any of the nine points of
the cross-section bounding rectangle can
be selected but it is reasonable to choose a
point actually on the section. Positions can
be set one by one or in single step for all
loads.
Select a line element from the list and
select a load to convert. The load values
can also be changed if necessary. If all
loads are converted you can close the
dialog.
162

3.2.18. Create shell model for nodal connection

Parts of beams connecting to selected

nodes can be converted to shell model.
The parameters are the same as above but
the length of conversion can be set. The
shell model is connected to the remaining
part of the beam through rigid bodies.
Convert loads works the same way as de-
scribed above.

3.2.19. Convert loads of the selected load panels to individual loads

Loads generated by the distribution algorithm from loads of load panels can be converted to individual
loads. After the conversion they can be modified or deleted but cannot be updated form the load pan-
el.

3.2.20. Convert automatic references

This menu item converts automatic references assigned to line or surface elements into
reference vectors.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 163

3.3. Settings

3.3.1. Display options

Symbols See... 2.16.18 Display options

[Ctrl+Y]
Labels See... 2.16.18 Display options
Switches See... 2.16.18 Display options
[Ctrl+D]

3.3.2. Options

See... 2.16.19 Options

164

3.3.3. Layer Manager

[F11]

The Layer Manager allows you to manage AxisVM layers, imported DXF or ArchiCAD layers. While only
one ArchiCAD layer can be imported, multiple DXF layers are allowed.
If no AxisVM layers are defined AxisVM automatically creates a new layer for dimension lines with the
name Dimensions.
On the left side of the Layer Manager dialog a tree view of the available layers is displayed. If you
select (highlight) a DXF layer in the tree, you can modify its properties in the right side (Name, Color,
Style, Size). If you select the main DXF file entry of the tree, you can modify all the DXF layers at a
time. Properties of AxisVM structural layers cannot be modified.
Apply to All: When using this button, a dialogue window will allow you to select the items in the DXF
layers that will have their properties set based on the layer’s settings.
The visibility of the layers or DXF files can also be set by clicking on the bulb or cursor symbol next to
the layer or file name.

New AxisVM Layer Creates a new AxisVM layer. You can set the layer’s name, color, line style, and width.
Delete More than one layer or group can be selected and deleted by the [Del] key.
Delete Empty Deletes all AxisVM layers that are empty (contain no entities).
AxisVM Layer
Delete Empty DXF Deletes all imported DXF layers that are empty (contain no entities).
Layer
Delete Empty PDF Deletes all imported PDF layers that are empty (contain no entities).
Layer
…Apply to all Applies selected layer properties (color, line style and width) to all objects ont he layer.

Visible Sets the layer visibility.

Equivalent to clicking on the light bulb icon.

Layer detection If activated the mouse will detect the underlying objects of the layer.
Equivalent to clicking on the arrow icon.

Locked Locked layers cannot be edited.

Equivalent to clicking on the lock icon.

Show full path If activated, the tree view will display names of imported files with their full path.

Auto Refresh If activated, changing layer properties or their visibility immediately updates the main window.

Refresh All If activated, all views of the main window reflect changes, otherwise only the active view is affected.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 165

3.3.4. Stories

[Ctrl + R]

Stories are to make it easier to overview and edit the model. They can be defined before drawing the
model or assigned to an existing structure.
A story is a workplane parallel to the global X-Y plane, with a given Z position. If a story is selected
mouse movements will be projected to the plane of the story even if you find an element at a differ-
ent Z position. Coordinates will always be projected to the story plane to help tracing objects at dif-
ferent levels.
Stories are always listed by decreasing Z position, having automatic names. Changing the report lan-
guage makes story names change.
Elements are considered to be part of a story if their lowest Z coordinate is greater than or equal to
the story level but less than the next story level. Therefore, if a multi-story column or wall was defined
as a single element it will appear only at the lowest level. To change this behaviour the element has to
be cut with story planes.
New elements will be linked to their story automatically.

 Stories are logical parts of the model created for editing purposes and they do not affect the
analysis results.
If torsion effects have to be taken into account in seismic analysis, seismic stories have to be
defined separately in the seismic parameters dialog.
Stories can be managed in the following dialog.

Turn off stories If this button is down no stories are displayed. Win-
dows will show the entire strucutre or the active
parts. Stories can be added or deleted in this state
as well.

Display current If this button is down and an active story is chosen

story the active story will be displayed. The active story
can be chosen by clicking the radio button before its
name.
Selection status of the list items is independent of
this choice. More than one story can be selected.
Ctrl+click adds individual list items to the selection,
Shift+click adds ranges to the selection. Delete
operation works on the selected stories and not on
the active story.
Active story is yellow. If a neighbouring story is also
activated to help tracing objects on that story, it
appears as light yellow.
166

 There can be only one active story. However, display of neighbouring stories is also possible.
Editing will be constrained to the active story.

Pick up Click this icon to get back to the model and click one or more nodes to pick up Z coordinates. Close
the process by clicking on an empty area. Z coordinates will be added to the list of stories.

Enter a new story Enter the Z coordinate into the edit field and click the + button. A new story will be added to the list.

Find If you have an existing multi-story structure with slabs you can find and add Z coordinates of horizon-
tal domains to the list with one click. If not the all horizontal domains refer to a real story you can
delete unnecessary stories later.

 Story position cannot be changed. Delete the story and define a new one.

Delete Deletes selected stories. Remaining stories will be renamed and story assignments of the elements will
be updated automatically.

 Deleting a story does not delete any element.

Display the story Display the story If any of these buttons is down elements of the story below/above the active
below the current above the current story is also displayed to help tracing other objects.
story story

If this button is down elements of the story above the active story is also displayed to help tracing
other objects.

 To display further stories open the Parts dialog instead where logical parts of any story can be
turned on. Choosing a new active story overrides the parts settings.

Define a new story

Numbering of Numbering of stories can be controlled with these buttons. If the left one is down (Numbering of sto-
stories ries from the bottom) the lowest floor will be considered as ground floor and other stories will have a
positive number. If Signed numbering of stories is selected the story closest to the zero level will be the
ground floor. Underground stories will get a negative number, others will get positve numbers.

Renaming stories Click the right mouse button over a list item to get to the popup
menu. Stories can be renamed or their default names restored.
Several further options can be selected with checkboxes.

Auto refresh Drawing will be instantly updated.

Refresh all Story settings will be applied on all windows.

Show all lines and If a story is activated all slabs, walls, columns and beams associated to the story will be displayed au-
elements tomatically. If other elements (geometry lines, springs, gap or link elements) on the story are also to be
seen, check this option.
Display only walls The story above/below the active story is usually displayed to find the supporting walls and columns.
and columns of This options hides slabs and beams of the neighbouring story.
neighbouring story If a story is activated direct drawing of a column or a wall automatically starts with the story height.
Project points to This feature is to project all detected coordinates to the base level of the story. It is useful when wall
story level and column positions below the slab must be transferred the floor.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 167

3.3.5. Guidelines

Guidelines
[Ctrl+G] See... 2.16.9 Guidelines

3.3.6. Structural Grid

Structural Grid
[Shift+G] See... 2.16.8 Structural grid

3.3.7. Design codes

Sets the design code to be used in case of code specific tasks. Changing design code changes the
method of calculating critical load combinations therefore all load group parameters but partial
factors will be deleted. Seismic analysis parameters and seismic load cases will also be deleted. As
material properties and certain reinforcement parameters are not the same in different codes it is
recommended to revise the values you have specified.
If Set current settings as default is checked, new models will be created with the current design code.
In case of Eurocode-based design codes, a number of parameters prescribed in National Annexes
(NAs) can be modified in AxisVM. Structural design according to NAs not included in the software can
be performed by the modification of NA parameters of the basic Eurocode.
The table displays the user value, default value, unit, description and code reference for each parame-
ter. User values are editable. Click OK, to apply them. The current set of user values will be
saved/loaded with the model.
Changing the design code causes the current set of user values to be lost unless it has been saved as
the default set of user values by clicking on the Save button. New models will use these default values.
The Default column of the table displays the value as specified in the NA. Clicking on the Restore but-
ton replaces all user values with the NA defaults.
According to the rules and regulations in NAs, the parameters can be classified in three groups:
• the parameter is given by a number (e.g. partial factors): the value can be edited directly;
• the parameter is given by a formula; in most cases the constants of the formula are specified in
the NA (e.g. slenderness limit for RC columns): in this case, the constants can be edited (note:
constans are often represented by letter c);
• the parameter is given by neither a number nor by a formula; (e.g. method for caulculation of
second order eccentricities for RC columns, buckling curves for LTB of steel beams): in this case,
the method or buckling curves can be selected from a dropdown list.
168

3.3.8. Units and Formats

Lets you configure the units (SI and/or Imperial) and formats of variables used throughout the
program (number of decimals used for displaying or exponential format). You can use predefined sets
as the SI set, or create and save your own custom sets.

Storing unit settings The software stores the defined units and formats settings in the Axunits.ini data file which can be
found in the folder c:\Users\'username'\AppData\Roaming\AxisVM\15\.

3.3.9. Gravitation

Lets you set the gravitational acceleration constant and the direction of
gravitation as one of the global coordinate directions or a custom
direction.
If Custom direction is selected the X, Y, Z components of the direction
vector in the global coordinate system must be specified.
If Save as default setting is checked any new model will start with the
entered value of gravitational acceleration.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 169

3.3.10. Stiffness reduction

Seismic analysis based on response spectrum analysis according to Eurocode allows using stiffness
reduction factors (k). These reduction factors can be defined for individual structural members inde-
pendently according to their architectural element type (column, beam, wall, slab, other element).
The radio buttons on the left is to choose the range of definition (Entire model / Displayed parts / Se-
lected elements). Reduction factors for these elements are listed and can be modified in the table. If
elements with the same type have different reduction factors a * is displayed in the respective cell.
Changing it will assign a common value for the specified range of elements.

Line elements k(Ax) Reduction factor for the Ax of the cross-section.

k(Ay) Reduction factor for the Ay of the cross-section.
k(Az) Reduction factor for the Az of the cross-section.
k(Ix) Reduction factor for the Ix of the cross-section.
k(Iy) Reduction factor for the Iy of the cross-section.
k(Iz) Reduction factor for the Iz of the cross-section.
Domains k(Ac) Reduction factor for the cross-section area
k(Acs) Reduction factor for the shear cross-section area
k(Ic) Reduction factor for the bending inertia of the cross-section
Pick up Click on the Pick up button then click on an element to copy its k values to the respective rows of the
table according to the architectural type of the element.
Default The last column displays the default stiffness reduction values for each type of element (these values
are also editable). If new elements are defined these default values will be automatically assigned to
them. Click on the Default button at the bottom to set all k values to their default.
Stiffness reduction is optional in a vibration analysis. If the vibration analysis has been performed with
stiffness reduction and the reponse spectrum analysis used these modal shapes, AxisVM will perform
linear analysis with the same reduced stiffness (in non-seismic load cases as well).
170

Reporting stiffness Stiffness reduction values are available in the Table

reduction Browser (see… 2.9 Table Browser) in tables within the
folder MODEL DATA / Elements / Stiffness reduction.
Stiffness reduction for response spectrum analysis
contains the above table. Other tables list the stiffness
reduction values by elements.

3.3.11. Preferences

Storing preferences The software stores the settings described below in the data files under the
settings c:\Users\'username'\AppData\Roaming\AxisVM\15\ folder.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 171

Data Integrity

Recent file list Lets you set the number of recently opened AxisVM model files listed in the bottom of the File menu,
and set if you want the last edited file to be opened at startup. The welcome screen
(See... 2.2 Installation) will be shown on startup if the Show welcome screen on startup checkbox is
checked.
Save To make sure that you do not lose your work, select the Autosave option by the check box. In the min.
box, enter the interval at which you want to automatically save the opened model (1-99 minutes). You
must still save the model when you exit. A model that is saved automatically is stored in the default
temporary folder of the operating system (by default it is C:\Users\username\AppData\Local\ Temp\) as
~modelname.avm until you perform a save command. When you have to restart AxisVM after a power
failure or due to any other problem that occurred before you saved your work, AxisVM can recover it
from the temporary file stored in the above folder under the name $modelname.avm.
Compressed AXS format
If this checkbox is checked the AXS model file will be saved in a compressed format. The average size
of the compressed file size is about 10% of the original. The larger the model file the more efficient
the compression is. Result files (*.AXE) are not compressed.
Create Backup Copy
If this checkbox is checked and a model is saved after making changes a backup copy is automatically
created from the previous state of the axs file. Name of the backup file is modelname.~AX.
Store previous revisions of the model
If this option is checked subsequent revisions of the model are saved.
Click on the icon to get to the Settings dialog
See also… 3.1.2 Previous revisions…
Save derivative results
If this checkbox is checked stresses, envelopes, critical combinations and design results will be saved
as well.
172

Undo The previous state of the model can be retrieved From hard disk or From memory. If you work on big
models and/or your computer is low on memory it is recommended to use the first option (which is a
bit slower).
You can undo your last actions. You have to specify the maximum number of actions you want to
undo. This number must be between 1 and 99.
The Group Undo option allows you to undo the effects of complex commands in a single step. Undo
data can be stored in memory or on hard disk. The first option is faster, the second option leaves
more memory for the program (it may be important if a huge model is calculated).

Work on local If models are opened through a network, the speed of data transfer may reduce the performance of
copies of network AxisVM. This effect can be eliminated by allowing making local copies of network files. Local copies
files will be placed into the folder where the temporary files are stored during the analysis – except when
this folder is set to the model folder. In this case the files are saved to the default folder for temporary
files. The original files will be updated at each save operation.

Network time-out In case off network hardware protection keys, if in a time period set here there is no activity (checks)
with the key, the current AxisVM session is closed.
Disconnecting may also happen in a situation when you get a phone call and you do not use the
program for a time longer than the network time-out. If another user asks for access to the key the
server gives a license to him/her and when you try to continue your work the program displays an
error message and halts at the next key check.

Colors

Lets you select graphics area background color (black, dark gray, light gray or white). Labels, numbers,
symbols and elements will automatically change their colors to remain visible
Default number of colors on color legend window: Set the number of colors displayed in the color
legend window. See… 2.18.4 Color legend window)
OpenGL settings Turn on Hardware graphics acceleration, Allow caching of OpenGL data and Enable fast coloring for
faster and smoother rotation of the model – if the video card and driver supports it. The results
heavily depend on the configuration details of the operating system, the driver and the graphics card
so sometimes turning of all or some of these settings may improve performance.
Zoom acceleration hides labels and other non-scaled items during zooming.
Reverse mouse wheel direction for zooming. If unchecked the mouse wheel has the default behaviour:
turning the wheel up zooms in, turning the wheel down zooms out the view. If checked these func-
tions will be reversed.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 173

Graphic symbols

Color and line thickness of graphic symbols can be customized.

If the checkbox in the Custom value column is left unchecked the symbol is set to default. If it is
checked click on the Thickness / size value or the Color rectangle to edit the values. The new settings
can be saved to a scheme clicking the Save icon. Schemes can be loaded by selecting from the
dropdown list.
From Version X4 colors and line width of the local system axes, result diagrams and applied rein-
forcement can also be changed.
174

Fonts

This list allows changing fonts used on screen and in printed output. Move in the list with cursor keys
or by clicking on items. Double-click on the selected line or press Enter to change the font.
To change the sample edit Sample text.
Right click on an item to display the popup menu.
Modify... : change the font.
Default font: reset the selected font to its default.
Click on Default settings to reset all fonts to their default.
Screen Drawing labels Font used for numbering and labeling on model drawings. Dimension
lines and text boxes have their own font, see… 2.16.11 Dimension lines,
symbols and labels.
Information windows Font used for information windows on the screen (color legend window,
info window, coordinate window), see… 2.18 Information windows.
Dialog windows Font used for dialogs.
Printer Project title Fonts used for the printed page header. See… 3.1.10 Page header
Page header
Comment
Labels Font used for numbering and labeling on printed model drawings. Di-
mension lines and textboxes have their own font.
Information windows Font used for information windows (color legend window, info window)
when printed on drawings.
Report Table title Font used for titles of printed tables.
Table header row Font used for the first (header) row of tables.
Table rows Font used for the rest of the table.
Due to different resolution of the screen and the printer the ratio of label size and drawing is different
on the two devices, especially in case of textboxes. Check / uncheck Adjust font size when printing if
you are not satisfied with the result.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 175

Dialog windows

If the operating system is Vista or later you can set the Style of Save / Open dialogs used in AxisVM.
Under Windows XP only the first option is available.
If the second option is chosen AxisVM file preview requires a successful registration of a preview li-
brary (this DLL is part of the AxisVM package). Installing AxisVM with administrative rights automati-
cally registers this library. Without administrative rights this registration fails making the preview una-
vailable. The preview library file can be registered later by running !REGISTER_PreviewLib.BAT from the
AxisVM program folder.
Move mouse pointer automatically to dialog windows positions the mouse pointer over the OK button
of dialog windows. Certain mouse drivers provide this functionality without using this option.
When working on high pixel density monitors it is recommended to enlarge toolbars, palettes, dialog
windows and cursors. Main toolbars and pet palettes offers two sizes for toolbar buttons. Choosing
Large icons also scales up certain cursors. Size of dialog windows makes it possible to scale dialogs
between 75 and 200%. Windows settings defined in Control Panel / Display can also be applied.
Opening large models with a huge result file can slow down loading considerably. The Display results
after loading a model option controls what happens when a model with results has been opened.
Results will be displayed Always / Never / Always ask (a dialog is displayed to confirm displaying the
results).

Default names

Change Model to change the default name set for a new model. Select the style of the postfix
(1, 2, 3 ... or A, B, C, ...) appended to generate a unique name.
Default names and postfix styles of new load cases or load groups can be edited the same way.
Clicking Reset resets all names and styles to their defaults.
176

Editing

Circle Closing Angle Parameter for drawing arcs. If the center angle of the arc is smaller than this angle or it is closer to
360° than this angle then a whole circle will be drawn.
Projection line to Display of projection lines can be turned on/off. Its shows the distance of the cursor from the current
workplane workplane.
Delete unnecessary contour lines after automatic domain intersection
Controls if contour lines are automatically deleted after domain intersection. If this function is turned
off contour lines became internal lines of the union.
Break unmeshed structural members whenever a node is inserted
By default AxisVM uses structural members. These are line elements consisting of one or more finite
elements. Unmeshed members contain one finite element only. If a new node is inserted on an
unmeshed member or the line is divided the structural member remains unaffected but will contain
more than one finite element. Clicking on a structural member selects all finite elements belonging
to the member. This behaviour can be changed by checking this option. Then new nodes inserted
on structural members will break apart the member. To break apart existing structural members use
Edit / Break apart structural members.
Enable selection of finite elements on lines
If activated, finite elements of a structural member can be selected individually. Otherwise only the
whole structural member can be selected.
Enable selection of design members
If activated, design members can be selected instead of structural members. Design members
consists of a group of lines with the same design parameters handled as one entity for steel or
timber design purposes.
Elements of a hidden mesh can be selected
If display of mesh is turned off this field controls if the hidden nodes / lines / surface elements can
be selected or not. This switch also controls if these nodes and elements appear in tables or not.
Show instructions at the cursor
Controls the display of a small tooltip window at the cursor with instructions for the next step of the
current task. If unchecked, instruction messages appear only at the bottom status line.
Make all layers editable when entering the layer editor
If activated, all locked layers will be unlocked when entering the background layer editor.
See… 2.16.12 Editing background layers. Otherwise locked layers must be unlocked manually.
See… 2.12 Layer Manager and 2.17 Speed Buttons.
Geometry check before running an analysis
If activated a geometry check is automatically performed before analysis.
See… 4.8.19 Geometry check
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 177

Fit model with structural gridlines into view

If activated and the model is zoomed to fit in view, structural gridlines are also taken into account
when determining the zoom ratio.
Keep the view unchanged in undo operations
If activated undo operations does not affect the view of the model. Otherwise undoing a command
sets the the model as it was displayed before the command.
Highlight elements under the mouse cursor
Element(s) under the mouse cursor will be highlighted (both in wireframe and rendered view). Click
on the color sample to customize highlight color.

Meshing

Mesh management One of the following mesh management methods can be chosen.
Remove and create mesh automatically
Any editing performed on a domain deletes its mesh. When launching the analysis missing meshes
will be recreated based on the meshing parameters of the domain.
Keep mesh editable
Meshes can be edited manually.
Contour division Uniform mesh size
method Meshes will be generated according to the user defined element size regardless of the shape of the
domain (least number of finite elements).
Adaptive mesh size
Takes the shape of the domain into consideration and creates a better mesh by increasing mesh
density wherever it is necessary.
Default mesh size When defining meshing parameters for a domain for the first time this value will appear by default.
Adjust mesh to Turning on/off this option will set the default status of the mesh parameters dialog.
column heads See... 4.11.1.2 Meshing of domains.
Hide mesh lines Checking Hide mesh lines after completing analysis automatically turns off mesh lines after completing
after completing analysis.
analysis
178

Toolbar

Displaying toolbar If Horizontal toolbars expanded is chosen, all icon appears in a row. Separator lines indicate different
groups of functions.
If Flyout toolbars is chosen, different functional groups will be represented by a single icon. Clicking
the arrow in the right bottom another toolbar flies out showing different tools.
Using domains and automatic meshes make it unnecessary to create individual surface elements and
place loads on them. For compatibility reasons the related functions are not removed but kept hidden.
Their visibility is controlled by the option Show obsolete surface element tools on toolbars.
Pet palette position Pet palette position can be:
Relative
Specify the horizontal (dx) and vertical (dy) distance from the operation in pixels.
Appear in the latest position
Pet palette appears in its latest position.

Display

Moment diagram Placement rule for moment diagrams can be set.

Arc resolution Arcs are displayed as polygons. Set the display resolution here. The finer the resolution the closer the
polygon will get to the arc. This parameter affects drawing only and is not related to the precision of
the analysis.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 179

Switches Turn on 3D wireframe when drawing models

Displays 3D wireframe of objects while drawing (see… 4.9.4 Direct drawing of objects) even if the ac-
tive view is not in rendered mode.
Show/hide surface centers and mesh together
If checked turning on/off display of the mesh automatically turn on/off surface center symbols.
Display of line loads on all connecting elements
If an edge load is applied where a wall and two plates meet and parts are turned on (see… 2.16.14
Parts) the load will be displayed according to this setting. If this option is turned on the load will be
displayed if an active part contains any of the three elements. If this option is turned off the load will
be displayed only if an active part contains the elements the loads were originally assigned to. This
is useful to check the local system of the load components.
Plastic hinge These settings determine the color coding of plastic hinges. The first option is to color hinges accord-
colors ing to the rotation. The second option is to color hinges according to the section of the moment-
rotation curve where the hinge state point is located. Different colors can be assigned to the positive
and negative side of the curve.

Parts

Turn on logical parts when loading models from previous versions

If activated, opening a model created with a version not supporting logical parts activates logical parts
automatically.
Include internal lines of domains into parts by default
If activated, internal lines of domains will be present in parts where the domain is included.

If the user turns on display of parts and unchecks all parts AxisVM will behave according to the select-
ed radio button.

Display of load panels when only parts are visible can also be controlled here.
Perform design calculations for visible parts only
If the checkbox is active, the design calculations are performed for the visible parts only. In case of
large models, this can result more efficient calculation process. However, if another part is set to visi-
ble, it takes some time to perform design calculation of the elements that do not have design results
yet. If the checkbox is inactive, the program performs design calculations for every element in the
model at once. In this case, if another part is selected, the design results are already available and the
user does not have to wait for the calculation in every case.
The checkbox only affects the calculation of the following result components:
• Required reinforcement
• Crack width
• Steel structural member utilization
• Timber structural member utilization
180

Load group defaults

Here the default values of load group parameters can be set.

Settings for envelopes and combinations are also placed here. The content of load cases and
combinations dropdown lists (on the result and design tabs) can be controlled here. AxisVM allows
creating different envelope sets (see… Result display options in 6.1 Static). If the first option is selected
only the selected envelope will appear in lists. If the second option is selected only custom envelopes
will be listed. If the third option is selected all standard and custom envelopes will be listed.
Critical results: Check to enable finding of critical combinations. If unchecked results will be available
of only for load cases / combinations and their envelopes.
Include combination type in the description of combinations: Description of combinations can be
extended to show the combination type (ULS or SLS types).
Show ID number of critical combinations: To make it easier to compare critical combinations the ID of
the critical combination can be displayed as a prefix.

Analysis

At the beginning of the analysis AxisVM divides the system of equations into blocks according to the
available physical and virtual memory. It makes analysis more efficient but can considerably slow
down other applications. Set the amount of virtual memory you let AxisVM use during the analysis
here.

Enable extended If more than 4 GB of memory is installed with a 32-bit operating system, this option makes it possible
memory access to get more memory for analysis. If this option is disabled it means that memory pages are not locked.
(AWE) See... 2.1 Hardware requirements for details.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 181

Using a single Using multiple threads/cores makes AxisVM run analysis on multiple threads. To make the most of this
thread / option it is recommended to use a processor with HT-Hyperthread or DualCore technology.
Using multiple Multi-threading improves speed of calculation. Improvement depends on the available memory and
threads the model size. Linear analysis will be 1.5 times faster, while vibration analysis can be 4 times faster.
Setting Number of parallel threads allows adjusting the software to the capabilities of the hardware it
is running on.
Folder for tempo- You can specify the location of temporary files during analysis.
rary files during Select any of these options : Model file folder, Local system temporary folder, Custom
analysis Create analysis log file: If this option is turned on technical details of the analysis will be logged and
saved to a text file modelname_log.txt.
Message sounds If this option is activated system sounds will be played after completing an analysis or getting an error
during analysis message. Sound card and speakers must be present.

Report

Report language Depending on your configuration you can select from the following languages: English, German,
French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Hungarian, Russian, Portugese, Romanian, Serbian.
Table layout If Allow multiple columns is checked, narrow report tables will be printed in a multi-column layout to
reduce the space required. Minimum number of rows per column can be specified to avoid column
breaks for short tables.
The position of table of contents in reports can be selected from a list (Front page, Second page, Third
page).
Printer buffer If a report includes many pictures building the entire report in memory may consume too much
system resources and cause printing problems. In this case set printer buffer to hard disk.
Print page numbers even if page header is turned off
If this option is turned on page numbers appear on printed pages even if headers are disabled in
the printing dialog.
Translate automatic item names if report language is changed
If this option is turned on AxisVM-generated names of Drawings Library or report items will be
translated automatically.
182

Company logo

A company logo can be loaded, saved, deleted using the three toolbar buttons. This image will appear
in the page header of printed drawings, tables, reports and/or on the cover page of the report accord-
ing to the settings for position, size, margins.

These settings have no effect on the RTF output as that is based on a separate RTF template file.

See… 2.10.2 Report

Update

Searching for AxisVM checks regularly if there is an update available on the web. The frequency of update checks
program update can be controlled. If Never is chosen an update process can be launched by clicking AxisVM Web Up-
date. The date of the latest search is displayed. If internet connection goes through a proxy server,
proxy settings has to be defined after clicking Proxy settings.
AxisVM Click the button to get to the AxisVM Web Update Wizard which is a guide to the download process.
Web Update If download is complete and the Update the program option is checked on the last page, the program
quits and start the installation of the new release.

Proxy settings If the network reaches the web through a proxy server, the configuration data (proxy name, port, user
name and password) can be entered here.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 183

3.3.12. Keyboard shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts assigned to menu items, toolbar buttons can be customized.

Edit

The tree on the left side displays the available command groups. Click a command in the list on the
right side, then press the desired shortcut. Backspace clears the assigment.
If the desired shortcut is already in use a Conflicting shortcuts warning is displayed.

The message shows the command using the

shortcut.
If Choose a different shortcut is checked the
shortcut can be selected from a list of avail-
able (unassigned) shortucts.

If this option is left unchecked, clicking the

Modify button clears the previous assign-
ment and assigns the shortcut to the given
command.
 Shortcuts assigned to toolbar buttons on different tabs (Geometry, Elements, etc.) are not in conflict. So the
same shortcut can be assigned to commands on different tabs. Only shortcuts for the current tab will be
activated.

Saves the current shortcut configuration to an *.axsc file.

Loads a previously saved shortcut configuration from a *.axsc file.

By default shortcuts are stored in the C:\Users\UserName\AppData\Roaming\AxisVM\13\Shortcuts folder.
The default shortcut configuration of AxisVM 12 can be loaded from AxisVM12Default.axsc the same for
AxisVM 13 is AxisVM13Default.axsc.

Resets the shortcut configuration to its default.

A switch to display English or German key names in the shortcut descriptions.

184

Shortcut list

The Shortcut list tab displays a list of all available shortcuts. It can be a Command list or a Shortcut list
(the first is ordered according to the command groups, the second by the shortcuts)
For the entire list for the default configuration see 2.6 Keyboard shortcuts.

3.3.13. Language

From Version X5, DM module is integrated into AxisVM and no longer appears as a separate module.
Language sets the language of the user interface.

3.3.14. Report language

From Version X5, DM module is integrated into AxisVM and no longer appears as a separate module.
Report language controls the language of items that can appear in the printed ouput.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 185

3.3.15. Toolbars to default position

The moveable Icon bar will get back to the left side. All flyout toolbars undocked and dragged to a
new position will get back to the Icon bar. Custom combo box and edit field width settings on
postprocessing tabs will be reset to default. See… 6.1 Static.

3.3.16. Dialog boxes to default position

AxisVM remembers the last position of dialogs and display them there. If any problem is detected on
systems with multiple monitors setting dialog boxes to default position can solve it.

3.4. View

Front view [Ctrl + 1] See... 2.16.3 Views

Top view [Ctrl + 2] See... 2.16.3 Views

Side view [Ctrl + 3] See... 2.16.3 Views

Perspective view [Ctrl + 3] See... 2.16.3 Views

Perspective settings See... 2.16.3 Views

Workplanes See... 2.16.7 Workplanes

One story up / If displaying of a story is activated this is the fastest way to go one
One story down story up or down.
Zoom in [Ctrl + /], [+] See... 2.16.2 Zoom

Zoom out [Ctrl + Shift+ /], [–] See... 2.16.2 Zoom

186

Zoom to fit [Ctrl + W] See... 2.16.2 Zoom

Pan See... 2.16.2 Zoom

Rotate See... 2.16.2 Zoom

View undo [Ctrl + [ ] See... 2.16.2 Zoom

View redo [Ctrl + ] ] See... 2.16.2 Zoom

Wireframe See... 2.16.4 Display mode

Hidden line removal See... 2.16.4 Display mode
Rendered See... 2.16.4 Display mode
Texture See... 2.16.4 Display mode

Rendering options... See... 2.16.4 Display mode

Deformed model Same as setting Display shape to Undeformed or Deformed in the
Display parameters dialog. See… 6.1 Static
Wireframe cross-sections In rendered mode thin walled cross-sections will be displayed
only with mid-planes.
Actual In rendered mode thin walled cross-sections will be displayed as
cross-sections solid objects with their actual shape.
Wireframe while dragging
If it is switch on, the program display the wireframe of the model
during the rotation or pan.
No labels while dragging
If this option is turned on, labels are not drawn during rotation or
panning.

3.5. Plugins

If third party applications are installed into the Plugins folder they appear under the Plugins menu.
Add-ons installed into the AddOns folder does not appear as menu items but create additional
buttons on toolbars.

3.6. Window
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 187

3.6.1. Property Editor

Property Editor provides the fastest way to change properties of the selected nodes, elements or
loads. All changes are made immediately. If the selection contains different elements it is possible to
change their common properties (e.g. after selecting trusses, beams and ribs their material and cross-
section will be editable). If result or design tabs are active the values are read only.
In certain fields regular mathematical expressions are also accepted.
Available operators and functions are:
(, ), SIN, COS, TAN, EXP, LN, LOG10, LOG2, SINH, COSH, TANH, ARCSIN, ARCCOS, ARCTAN, ARCSINH,
ARCCOSH, ARCTANH, INT, ROUND, FRAC, SQR, SQRT, ABS, SGN.
Few fast operators:
++8 adds 8 to the actual value
--8 substracts 8 from the actual value
Negative numbers within operation have to be in brackets.
In these expressions # substitutes the actual value (For instance #/3 divide it by 3). When entering a
value of nodal coordinates, load values, surface thicknesses you can refer to global coordinates as X,
Y, Z or x, y, z. In case of certain load types variables refer to other load components as well.
For nodal loads or point loads on beams variables Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz refer to force and moment
components. For distributed beam loads px1, py1, pz1, m1, px2, py2, pz2, m2 refer to load compo-
nents. Variable names are not case sensitive.
Example 1: If you want to turn selected distributed wind loads with different X components to Y di-
rection enter 'px1' into field pY1 and 'px2' into field pY2 then enter zero into fields pX1 and pX2.
Example 2: to scale the structure in direction X by 200%, first select all nodes then click the line first
line and enter X*2 as X.
The question mark button turns on/off the help information.
Properties are displayed in a tree-like structure. Clicking a [+] or
[–] symbol before the property name expands or collapses a list
of sub-properties.
If the (...) button appears in a line the property can be changed
using a separate dialog.
If the (>>) button appears in a line the property can be picked
up from another element by clicking it.
Property Editor can be used to modify data but also to select
and filter elements with the same property.

Filter Selecting a property and clicking the filter button you can select all the elements having the same
property value.
Example: changing an existing cross-section in the whole structure.
Selecting the cross-section property of a rib element you can select all rib elements with this cross-
section then change their cross-section property.

3.6.2. Information Windows

Lets you set the display of the Status, Color coding, Coordinate, and Color legend windows to on or
off. See... 2.18 Information windows
188

3.6.3. Background picture

The submenu makes several options available. An automatically fitted background picture can be
loaded to the main window of AxisVM to show the model in its future environment. Load Background
Picture... submenu item or [Ctrl+B] opens a file browser dialog, Reload Background Picture shows the
most recently used picture files. In multi-window mode each window can have its own background
picture.

Picture in the active window can be turned on and off by clicking Display or by [Ctrl+Alt+B].
Save Background Picture saves the picture in the active window into a file. If the aspect of the picture
differs from the window aspect Shift Background Picture makes it possible to drag the background to
a new position. Remove Background Picture removes the picture in the active window.
Background pictures are saved into the AXS file.

After loading a background picture the model can be set to an appropriate view by zooming out,
zooming in, panning, rotating and setting the perspective.

3.6.4. Split Horizontally

Splits the graphics window horizontally into two parts. Clicking into one of them makes that window
active. The display settings of each window can be set independently. Different load case or
combination can be selected for each window.
You can maximize or minimize or restore the graphics windows by using the buttons at the top-right
of the windows.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 189

3.6.5. Split Vertically

Splits the graphics window vertically into two parts. Clicking into one of them makes that window
active. The display settings of each window can be set independently. Different load case or
combination can be selected for each window.
You can maximize or minimize or restore the graphics windows by using the buttons at the top-right
of the windows. Different load cases can be set in each window but only when displaying results.

3.6.6. Close Window

Closes the current graphics window.

3.6.7. Changing label font size

Decrease / In- These two menu items is to change the font size for all labels on diagrams.
crease label font
size

3.6.8. Preventing labels from overlapping

If this option is checked the program prevents labels from overlapping by moving and hiding less
important labels. In the latter case zooming in may increase the number of visible labels. Priorities are
determined by label types and values. If large number of labels are to be displayed this optimization
may be a time-consuming process.
You can also set this option in Display options/Labels. See… 2.16.18 Display options
190

3.6.9. Drawings Library

The Drawings Library contains drawings saved in the program. Drawings are not saved pictures but
instructions how to draw a view of the model or parts of it including multi-window settings. Drawings
can be reloaded to restore saved view and display settings. Including drawings into a report makes it
easier to update the report when the model has changed and recalculated as drawings will be
updated automatically like tables.

Drawings Library can store displacement, force, stress diagrams of line elements, diagrams of steel
and bolted joint design, punching analysis, reinforced concrete column check and beam design in an
associative way.

Clicking the arrow beside the tool button an existing drawing can be
selected from a pop-up list, restoring its view and display settings.

After clicking the Drawings Library tool button a dialog appears.

This dialog is to overview, maintain and reload saved drawings.

Deletes a drawing from the Drawings Library

Loads a chosen drawing to the active window.

(available in multi-window mode only)
Loads a chosen drawing to the window.

Displays a diagram dialog

Graphic symbols
Display of graphic symbols can be modified in library items. Select one or more items and
click the button on the toolbar. The status of symbols in the selected drawings is displayed
and can be changed. Mixed status is represented by greyed checkmarks.
Exports Drawing Library items as a 3D PDF file.
See… 3.6.9.1 Export drawings to a 3D PDF file - PDF module

Restore result components

If this option is checked loading a drawing displaying results restores the result component as well
and sets the appropriate tab (Static, Vibration, etc.).
If this option is unchecked loading a drawing does not restore the result component and the tab.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 191

Fit view to window automatically

Check this option if you want the drawing to accommodate to model changes (drawing is zoomed
to show all visible parts).

Units
This checkbox controls whether generated names of diagrams contain the units (like eZ[mm]).

OK Saves the changes and loads the selected drawing.

Cancel Does not save changes.

3.6.9.1. Export drawings to a 3D PDF file - PDF module

Drawing Library items can be exported
as a multipage 3D PDF file. To view
the interactive 3D images use Adobe
Acrobat Reader (the updated 8.1 Ver-
sion or later).
Library items selected from the tree
view on the left can be moved into the
PDF list by clicking on the right arrow.
Left arrow removes selected items
from the PDF list. Each library item will
be rendered on a separate page in the
PDF following the order of the PDF
list. Items in the PDF list can be rear-
ranged using the up and down arrow.
Both 2D and 3D views can be export-
ed. 2D drawings will appear as regular
images, 3D views can be rotated,
zoomed in and out using Acrobat
Reader.

Text options Text size and appearance can be controlled in the Text options group.

Page options Size and orientation of the PDF document pages can be set in the Page options group.

3D export options Sometimes drawing all edges makes the view a bit blurred. So export of edges can be turned on / off.

3.6.10. Save to Drawings Library

By clicking this tool button one or more drawings can be saved into the Drawings Library.
If the current drawing already exists, a Found in the Drawings Library label is displayed in the dialog. It
can be overwritten or the drawing can be renamed. Multiple drawings button opens additional
options. Load cases, load combinations (and result components if results are displayed) can be
chosen. AxisVM creates all combinations (i.e. all selected result components in all selected load cases)
and saves them into the library with the current view and display settings.
If multiple model views have been created by dividing the main window two options are available:

Saves the whole view with all window panes.

Saves the drawing from the active window pane only.

Clicking the Drawings Library button displays the Drawings Library dialog.
192

3.7. Help

Provides access to this User’s Manual in PDF

format and other offline and online resources.

3.7.1. Contents

Opens the present User’s Manual in PDF format. AxisVM X4 Release 2 reintroduces context-sensitive
[F1]
help: pressing F1 in dialog windows opens the manual at the related topic.

3.7.2. Guides

Guides offer insight into some of the design methods used in AxisVM.
SC1 Steel connection design explains how the SC1 module should be used.
The AutoMcr Guide summarizes the calculation method of the lateral-torsional buckling resistance in
the SD1 steel design module. The AutoNcr Guide explains the method of determining the buckling
length in the same module, shows the area of applications and the proper usage.
Custom Stiffness Matrix Guide explains the theoretical background of calculating elements of a cus-
tom stiffness matrix that can be assigned to a domain. See… 4.9.6.5 Domain with custom stiffness matrix.
The FFA Guide is about the theoretical background behind the footfall analysis implemented in the
FFA module.

3.7.3. AxisVM Home Page

Visits AxisVM Home Page using the default Internet browser (https://www.axisvm.eu)

3.7.4. AxisVM Update

Launches the AxisVM Web Update Wizard. See... 3.3.11 Preferences

3.7.5. About

This window displays version and release

number, configuration, serial number and time
limit of your AxisVM version.
Available modules are in black, others are in
gray.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 193

3.7.6. Release information...

Latest release information and history of fixes and new developments.

3.8. Main toolbar

See... 3.1.1 New model

See... 3.1.3 Open

[Ctrl+O]

See... 3.1.4 Save

[Ctrl+S]

See... 3.1.12 Print

[Ctrl+P]
Making 3D PDF
Checking Keep the U3D the intermediary U3D file can be retained for later use. Export of edges can be
controlled through the Export edges checkbox.
For more information see chapter 3.6.9.1 Export drawings to a 3D PDF file - PDF module
See... 3.2.1 Undo
[Ctrl]+[Z]
See... 3.2.2 Redo

[Shift]+[Ctrl]+[Z]
See... 3.3.3 Layer Manager
[F11]
See... 3.3.4 Stories
[F7]
See... 2.9 Table Browser
[F12]
See... 2.10 Report Maker
[F10]
See… 3.6.9 Drawings Library

See… 3.6.10 Save to Drawings Library

194

This page is intentionally left blank.

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 195

4. The Preprocessor
The preprocessor lets you create or modify the geometry of the model, in a completely visual way.
The advanced Visual Modeling feature allows quick and reliable modeling and design.
This chapter introduces the AxisVM modeling commands (geometry generation, element / mesh
generation, and load case/combination definition).

4.1. Geometry

Geometry commands let you interactively and graphically create the model geometry in 3D.
The model geometry is defined by nodes (points), mesh lines (lines) between nodes, and surfaces
(triangular or quadrilateral) created from three or four appropriate lines. Later you can define finite
elements based on the geometry constructed here.

 Direct drawing of objects does not require drawing geometry in advance.

See… 4.9.4 Direct drawing of objects
In the case of surface structures (plates, membranes, or shells) the mesh consists of quadrilaterals that
represent the median plane of the elements.

Automatic meshing on domains Automatic meshing on macro quads and triangles

In the case of frame structures (beams or trusses) the mesh consists of the axes of the elements.
196

4.2. The Model Editor

Model name and location path

Top menu bar

Color legend window

Status window

Moveable Icon bar

Graphics
Property
area
Editor

Perspective toolbar Coordinate

window

Context sensitive
help message
Speed buttons

When AxisVM starts, the graphical user interface is ready for geometry editing. In case of a new model
X-Y, X-Z or perspective view can be set as the default view. In case of an existing model the latest view
settings will be loaded.
Using the horizontal icon toolbar at the top of the graphics area you can apply various commands to
construct geometry meshes describing the geometry of your finite element model.
See... 4.8 Geometry Toolbar
Using the vertical icon bar on the left you can apply commands that change the display of the model,
and can configure the working environment of the editor.
See... 2.16 The Icon bar

4.2.1. Multi-window mode

When the model is complex, it is useful to display different views of the model simultaneously on the
screen. AxisVM allows you to split the graphics area horizontally or vertically. Each newly created
graphics window has its own settings, and allows the independent display of the model views. This
feature is also useful when interpreting results. Find split commands in the Window menu.
Split horizontally Splits the active graphics window horizontally into two equal parts. The top window will become the
active window.
See... 3.6.4 Split Horizontally
Split vertically Splits the active graphics window vertically into two equal parts. The left window will become the
active window.
See... 3.6.5 Split Vertically

Close Window Closes the active window if there are more than one graphics windows in use.
The new default window will be that in which you previously worked.
You can change views during any editing command.

 In the perspective view some editing commands cannot be used, or are limited in use.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 197

4.3. Coordinate systems

AxisVM uses different coordinate systems, to describe the model. The global coordinate system is
used to describe the model geometry. Local coordinate systems are mainly used in the element
definitions. The local systems are usually defined by the element geometry and additional references.
AxisVM denotes the axes of the global system with capital letters, and the local axes with small letters.
The geometry can be created using Cartesian, Cylindrical or Spherical coordinate systems.
See... 4.3.2 Polar coordinates

4.3.1. Cartesian coordinate system

Base coordinate AxisVM uses Cartesian coordinates to store geometry

system data. AxisVM uses the right-hand rule exclusively to
define the positive directions of axes and rotation. The
illustration shows the positive directions of the axes
and of rotation according to the right-hand rule.

Global and relative A new model uses the view selected in the New Model dialog (see... 3.1.1 New model).
origin The origin of the coordinate system is shown by a blue X initially located at the left bottom corner of
the editor window.
A fixed (X, Y, Z) and a relative (dX, dY, dZ) global system are used to locate points (nodes) in your
model. The origin of the relative system can be moved anywhere (using [Alt]+[Shift] or [Insert]), at any
time during modeling.
The Coordinate Window displays either the fixed or the relative global coordinates according to its
current settings. If the relative mode is selected, the denotation of axes becomes dX, dY, dZ.
With the help of the Coordinate Window, and according to the movement of the relative origin you
can make measurements on the model (distances, angles).
The nodal displacements and mode shapes refer to the fixed global system.

 In the X-Y and Y-Z views the third axis (normal to the view’s plane) is oriented towards you. As
a result, when a copy is made by translation with a positive increment about the respective
third axis, the copies will be placed nearer you. In X-Z view the opposite occurs as the third
axis in this case points to the opposite direction.
See... 4.9.21 References

4.3.2. Polar coordinates

In addition to the Cartesian global coordinate system, you can use either a cylindrical or a spherical
coordinate system. One of the polar coordinate systems can be selected through its corresponding
radio button in Settings / Options / Editing / Polar coordinates.
In the Coordinate Window three variables will be displayed depending on selection:
Cylindrical
h: the value measured from the view plane to a point on the cylinder’s main axis (that is
perpendicular to the view plane) oriented outward from the screen
r: radius that is the distance on the view plane from the projection of the point to the cylinder’s
main axis
a: the angle between the line that joins the point with the origin and the horizontal
Spherical
r: the radius, that is the distance from the point to the sphere’s center (origin)
a: the angle on the view plane between the line that joins the projection of the point with the
origin and the horizontal
b: the angle between the line that joins the point with the origin and the view plane, which is
positive if the point is in front of the view plane (between the user and the view plane).
198

Cylindrical coordinate system Spherical coordinate system

4.4. Coordinate window

Displays the current absolute and relative values of the cursor position in the global coordinate
system (Cartesian and cylindrical or spherical).
You can switch between absolute and relative coordinate displays, by clicking on the letters d in the
Coordinate Window (delta switch). The display of the d’s also show whether the relative coordinates
are enabled or not.
During editing it is possible to jump into the coordinate window by shortcuts. The default assignment
can be changed, see… 3.3.12 Keyboard shortcuts

Coordinate command Shortcut

X X
Y Y
Z Z
L Shift+Ctrl+L
r Shift+Ctrl+R
a Shift+Ctrl+A
h Shift+Ctrl+H
b Shift+Ctrl+B
Temporary workplane Shift+Ctrl+W
Lock X Ctrl+Alt+X
Lock Y Ctrl+Alt+Y
Lock Z Ctrl+Alt+Z
Lock L Ctrl+Alt+L
Lock r Ctrl+Alt+R
Lock a Ctrl+Alt+A
Lock h Ctrl+Alt+H
Lock b Ctrl+Alt+B
Relative / global coordinates (delta switch) Shift+D
Relative / global polar coordinates Shift+E

The positive angles, :

 The relative switch (delta) can be used together with the constrained cursor movements. See...
4.7.4 Constrained cursor movements.
 You can enter expressions in the edit fields (e.g.: 12.927+23.439, cos(45), sin(60))

4.5. Grid

See in detail... 2.16.19.1 Grid and cursor

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 199

4.6. Cursor step

See in detail... 2.16.19.1 Grid and cursor

4.7. Editing tools

Editing tools help the work by several features. See... 2.16.19.2 Editing

4.7.1. Cursor identification

Sets the size of the cursor identification area (in pixels).

When you position the cursor over the graphics area, AxisVM finds the entity of the model that is
closest to the center of the cursor from among the entities that are located in or intersect the
identification area. The size of the identification area can be set at Settings / Options / Editing / Cursor
identification.
The current shape of the cursor shows what kind of entity was identified. Depending on entity type,
the cursor will have the following shapes:
Node

Mid-side node

Support

Edge hinge

Mesh independent load

Load polygon vertex

Center of an arc

Arc

Tangent

Bézier curve

References

Line

Surface

Domain

Rigid element

ARBO element

CRET element

Text box, label

Reinforcement domain, AirDeck solid

area
200

Edge, corner of a pad footing

Edge, corner of a strip footing

SC1 bolted joint

Virtual beam or virtual strip

Guideline

Structural gridline

Intersection

Perpendicular (normal)

Dimension line

In case of Pick up function

If there are several entities at the same location, the program identifies the first entity according to the
ordering of the list above. If there are multiple entities of the same type, the cursor will show a double
symbol.

 Use the Coordinate Window to find out which one of the elements was actually identified.
Background The cursor can be set to detect the lines on architecture background layers.
detection

4.7.2. Entering coordinates numerically

During the model editing, coordinates of the cursor can be specified directly entering the numerical
values into the Coordinate Window. There are two ways to enter the numerical values:
1. by pressing the corresponding character button on the keyboard
2. by clicking with the left  button on the desired coordinate value display field, and then typing
in the value.
If the relative mode is enabled (the letter d is pressed), the coordinates you enter will define a point
from the relative origin.
If contradictory values are entered (in case of a constraint), the last entered value will update the
others.

 You can enter expressions in the edit fields (e.g.: 12.927+23.439, cos(45), sin(60))

The relative origin can be moved at any time to the current mouse cursor position by pressing the
Insert key. So when drawing a polyline, you can specify the endpoint coordinates relative to the previ-
ous point.

 To draw a line with a given length and direction move to relative origin to the starting point
(using [Alt]+[Shift] or [Insert]), enter the angle at d a[°] and enter the length at d r[m] then press the
Enter button.

4.7.3. Measuring distance

The distance between two points or the length of a line can be measured by moving the relative
origin onto the first point and then identifying the second point by positioning the cursor over it. In
this case the value of dL in the Coordinate Window is the distance between the points.
The cursor can be moved to a location relative to a reference point by moving the relative origin onto
the reference point, then entering the angle in the input field da and the distance in the dr input field.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 201

4.7.4. Constrained cursor movements

The cursor movement constraints can be customized in the Settings /

Options / Editing dialog. The constrained cursor movements use the
following values:

Δα Holding the [Shift] key pressed, the cursor is moving along a line that connects its current positionwith
the origin, and that has an n*Δα angle, where the value of n depends on the current cursor position.

Custom α Holding the [Shift] key pressed, the cursor is moved a line that connects its current position with the
origin, and that has an  or  + n*90° angle, where the value of n depends on the current cursor
position.
 and  can be set in Settings/Options/Editing/Constraint Angle.
The meaning of origin depends on the d switches of the coordinate palette. Turning off both the
origin will be the global origin. Turning on any of the d switches the origin will be the local origin.

 You cannot use Δα and Custom α constraints in perspective view.

If the cursor is over a line, holding the key [Shift] depressed, will
constrain the cursor movement to the line and its extension .

If the cursor identifies a point, holding the key [Shift] depressed,

makes the cursor move along the line defined by the point and
the relative origin..

When the cursor identifies a domain or surface element pressing [Shift] makes the cursor move in the
plane of the element.

Intersection point

Perpendicular

Midside point

Geometry tools

The icons of Geometry tools allow you to lock the direction of drawing a line.
See... 2.16.10 Geometry tools

4.7.5. Locking coordinates

You can lock the value of a coordinate, allowing for better positioning. A locked coordinate will not
change on cursor motion. Locking can be achieved by using [Ctrl+Alt] + [X], [Y], [Z], [L], [R], [A], [B], [H]
respectively.
202

A black rectangle over the coordinate input field shows that the coordinate is locked. To cancel
coordinate locking, press the same button combination, that was used to lock it.
Frozen X coordinate Frozen angle Frozen radius

4.7.6. Auto intersect

At the intersection point of the lines, a node will be generated and the lines will be bisected. If
surfaces are intersected by lines, they will be split, and the resulting elements will have the same
material and cross-sectional properties as the original. Set the line intersection options in Settings /
Options / Editing / Auto Intersect. See... 2.16.19.2 Editing
If Auto Intersection is on, surfaces will be divided into smaller surfaces if necessary. Surface finite
elements are also divided and the new elements inherit the properties and loads of the original
element.

4.8. Geometry Toolbar

These tool buttons create new geometry or change the existing one..

 If you are working on parts and Settings / Options / Editing / Auto / Part Management option is
checked then all new geometric entities will be added to the active parts.
The geometric entities can be selected prior to applying the geometry construction commands, as
well.

4.8.1. Node (Point)

Lets you place new nodes or modify existing ones.

To place a node:
1. Move the graphics cursor to the desired location and press the [Space] key or the left mouse button
(in perspective view you can place nodes only to special locations).
2. Enter the node coordinates numerically in the Coordinate Window, and then press [Space] or [Enter]
(it works in all views).
You can place a node on a line or surface. If the Settings / Options / Editing / Auto Intersect check-box
is enabled, the line or surface will be divided by the new node, otherwise it remains independent of
the line.
 If nodes are generated closer to each other than the tolerance specified in Settings / Options /
Editing / Editing Tolerance value, nodes will be merged.
When working on parts with Settings / Options / Editing / Auto / Part Management turned on all
geometric entities created will be automatically added to the active parts.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 203

4.8.2. Line

The Line tool is to construct lines or other simple shapes. The line type can be chosen by clicking on
the arrow at the bottom-right corner of the currently used Line tool icon, and then clicking on the
desired icon.
The Line tool offers the following options to draw simple shapes:

Line Constructs straight lines by defining their end points (nodes). You must graphically or numerically (by
the Coordinate Window) specify the endpoints (nodes). The command lets you generate one or more
independent lines. You can cancel the process by pressing the [Esc] key or the right mouse button.
In perspective view lines are drawn on the Z = 0 plane by default. To draw lines in perspective in a
different plane workplanes can be used.
See... 2.16.4 Workplanes.
Polyline Constructs a series of connected straight lines (a polyline). You must specify the vertices.
Exit current polyline by any of the following

1. [Esc] key
2. [Esc] key a second time will exit polyline drawing mode.
3.  right button & popup menu/Cancel
4.  left button while pointing to the last point (node) of the current polyline.

Rectangle Constructs a rectangle (its corner points (nodes) and edge lines). You must specify two opposite corner
points.

After you specified the first corner you can

cancel the command by pressing the [Esc]
key. This command is not available in
perspective view.

Skewed rectangle Constructs a skewed rectangle (its corner points (nodes) and edge lines). You must specify one of its
sides (by its endpoints), and then the other side.

After you specify the first corner you can

cancel the command pressing the [Esc] key.
In perspective view, you can draw skewed
rectangles using only the existing points.

Polygon Number of sides has to be defined in a dialog. Polygon has to be defined by entering a centerpoint
and 2 polygon points.

Polygon Number of sides has to be defined in a dialog. Polygon has to be defined by entering three points of
the arc.

4.8.3. Arc

Draws an arc or a circle. Arcs and circles will be displayed as polygons according to the Arc resolution
set in Settings / Preferences / Display.
[Esc] cancels the command.
204

Defining an arc by its radius, and starting and ending points.

2nd point
3rd point arc

1st point (central point)

Defining an arc by three points. The command can be applied in perspective setting as well.

2nd point
3rd point

arc

1st point
Endpoint

4.8.4. Horizontal division

This function creates a horizontal divider line passing through the cursor position. This line is in a
plane parallel to the X-Y, X-Z or Y-Z plane depending on the actual view (or parallel to the workplane
if a workplane is used). Creates new nodes at the intersections. If finite elements are intersected new
elements inherit properties and loads of the original element.

4.8.5. Vertical division

This function creates a vertical divider line passing through the cursor position. This line is in a plane
parallel to the X-Y, X-Z or Y-Z plane depending on the actual view (or parallel to the workplane if a
workplane is used). Creates new nodes at the intersections. If finite elements are intersected new
elements inherit properties and loads of the original element.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 205

4.8.6. Quad/triangle division

Visibility of these icons is controlled by the option Settings/Preferences/Toolbar/Show obsolete surface

element tools on toolbars.
Constructs a mesh of quads/triangles over a quad or triangle. This command is to generate a macro
mesh before applying a finite element mesh generation command. If the mesh is fine enough, it can
be used directly as a finite element mesh. Checking Creating surfaces makes surface elements from
the triangles or quadrilaterals. Introduction of domains and automatic meshing rendered this method
obsolete.

Quad-to-quads Generates an n  m mesh between the corners of a 3D quad (not

necessarily flat, or with any side lines). You must successively
graphically select the corners (four points), and specify the number
of segments ( N1  1 ) between corners 1 and 2, and the number of
segments ( N 2  1 ) between corners 2 and 3.

 The quad and the mesh are displayed with solid grey lines.
If the mesh leads to quad subdivisions that are distorted (have an angle smaller than 30° or greater
than 150°), the quad is displayed with grey dotted lines.
If a quad shape is entered that is not allowed (e.g. concave), the quad is displayed with red dotted
lines.

Quad-to-triangles The command is similar to the quad-to-quads command, but each

generated quad is divided into two triangles by its shorter diagonal.
The quad and the mesh is displayed with solid grey lines.
If the mesh leads to triangle subdivisions that are distorted (have an
 angle smaller than 15° or greater than 165°), the quad is displayed
with grey dotted lines.

If a quad shape is entered that is not allowed (e.g. concave), the quad is displayed with red dotted
lines.

Triangle-to-quads Constructs a mesh between the corners of a triangle (not necessarily

with any side lines). The mesh will also contain triangles along the
side that corresponds to the first two corners entered.
You must graphically select the corners successively (three points),
and specify the number of segments N between corners.

 The triangle and the mesh are displayed with solid grey lines.
If the mesh leads to quad subdivisions that are distorted (have an angle smaller than 30º
or greater than 150º), or to triangle subdivisions that are too distorted (has an angle smaller than 15º
or greater than 165º), the triangle is displayed with grey dotted lines.
If a quad shape is entered that is not allowed (e.g. three collinear corners), the triangle is displayed
with red dotted lines.

Triangle-to-triangle The command is similar to the triangle-to-quads command, except

that each generated quad is divided into two triangles by its
diagonals which are parallel to the side first entered.

 Same as for triangle-to-quads.

206

4.8.7. Intersect

If the Settings / Options / Editing / Auto / Intersect checkbox was not enabled in the dialog window at
the time of creating the geometric entity, using this command you can intersect the selected lines.
Intersection can be filtered by element types in a dialog. Selected lines will be divided by creating
nodes (points) at their intersections.
If finite elements are assigned to the lines, finite elements are also divided and inherit the properties
and loads of the original element..

 You can select elements for intersection beforehand.

4.8.8. Remove node

Removes the selected nodes at the intersections of lines. It makes it easier to construct trusses
crossing but not intersecting each other or to remove unnecessary division points along a line.

 Intersection nodes can be removed only if the number of connecting lines are even and lines
can be joined.

4.8.9. Remove intermediate nodes

Removes unnecessary intermediate nodes on lines. Nodes with two connecting lines are removed
provided they can be joined.

4.8.10. Extend lines to meet another line or plane

Extends existing straight lines or arcs to meet another straight line, arc or plane.
Extension modes Extend lines to meet another line
The first step is to specify the boundary: click on an existing line or arc or enter two points of
an imaginary boundary line. Click on lines near their end point to extend.
Extend lines to meet more than one line
The first step is to click on multiple lines defining the boundary. Click OK on the selection
toolbar or press Enter. Select the lines to extend. Click OK on the selection toolbar or press
Enter. Both ends of the lines will be extended to meet the boundary.
Extend lines to meet a plane
The first step is the specify the boundary plane: click on an existing domain or enter three
non-collinear points of an imaginary boundary plane. Click on lines near their end point to
extend.
Extend lines to meet more than one plane
The first step is to click on multiple domains defining the boundary. Click OK on the selection
toolbar or press Enter. Select the lines to extend. Click OK on the selection toolbar or press
Enter. Both ends of the lines will be extended to meet the boundary.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 207

Settings Extend lines even if there is no actual intersection

This is a two-state button. If it is down (its background turns white) lines will be extended
even if the point of intersection does not fall between the start and endpoint of the bounda-
ry line. If it is up (its background is blue) lines will be extended only if the point of intersec-
tion is on the boundary line.
The last three buttons control the behaviour of lines connected to the extended point.
Move free ends, add splice if other elements are connected
The program automatically chooses from the two options listed below. If no lines are con-
nected to the extended point, it chooses the first option, otherwise it chooses the second
one.
Always move line ends
The node of the extended point is moved to the point of intersection. The direction of lines
connected to this node will change.
Always splice line ends
The node of the extended point is not moved. A new node will be created at the point of
intersection and a new line (a splice) is inserted between the two nodes. Connected lines
remain unchanged.

4.8.11. Trim lines to meet another line or plane

Trims existing straight lines or arcs to meet other straight lines, arcs or planes.
Trimming modes Trim lines to meet another line
The first step is to specify the cutting line: click on an existing line or arc or enter two points
of an imaginary cutting line. Click on the line segments to be removed.
Trim lines to meet other lines
The first step is to click on multiple lines defining the cutting lines. Click OK on the selection
toolbar or press Enter. Select the lines to trim. Click OK on the selection toolbar or press
Enter. Click on that side of the cutting lines where you want to remove the line segments.
Trim lines to meet a plane
The first step is the specify the cutting plane: click on an existing domain or enter three non-
collinear points of an imaginary cutting plane. If the cutting plane intersects the lines click on
the line segments to be removed.
Trim lines to meet more than one plane
The first step is to click on multiple domains defining the cutting planes. Click OK on the
selection toolbar or press Enter. Select the lines to trim. Click OK on the selection toolbar or
press Enter. Click on that side of the cutting planes where you want to remove the line seg-
ments.
Settings Trim lines even if there is no actual intersection
This is a two-state button. If it is down (its background turns white) lines will be trimmed
even if the point of intersection does not fall between the start and endpoint of the bounda-
ry line. If it is up (its background is blue) lines will be trimmed only if the point of intersection
is on the boundary line.
The last three buttons control the behaviour of lines connected to endpoint of trimmed lines.
The trimmed line always get a new endpoint at the point of intersection.
Move free ends, remove segment if other elements are connected
The program automatically chooses from the two options listed below. If lines are connected
to the extended point, it chooses the second option.
Always move line ends
The endpoint of connected lines will move to the new endpoint. The old endpoint is re-
moved.
Always remove line segment
The original endpont and connected lines remains unchanged.
208

4.8.12. Extend/cut lines to their point of intersection

Modes Extend/trim two selected lines to their point of intersection

Extends/trims pairs of consecutively selected lines to their point of intersection.

Extend/trim selected lines to the point of intersection with the first one
Extends/trims consecutively selected lines to their point of intersection with the first line.

The next two buttons control the behaviour of arcs where there may be two points of intersection.
Settings Extend the arc end where the extension is shorter
The program always chooses the end where the point of intersection is closer.

Click to choose the arc end to extend

The end to extend can be selected by clicking near the chosen end.

The last three buttons control the behaviour of connected lines according to the above description.

4.8.13. Line division

Lets you create new point (nodes) on the selected lines.

The following input options are available:

By Ratio: Lets you divide the selected lines into two segments. You
must specify the parameter a of the location of the inserted
node relative to the first node (i). The parameter a must be
between 0 and 1. a = 0.5 represents a division of the selected
lines into two equal segments.

By Length: Lets you divide the selected lines into two segments.
You must specify the length (d) of the segment corresponding
to the first node (i end). The parameter d must be between 0
and the total length.

Into N equal parts: Lets you divide the selected lines into several
equal-length segments. Specify the number of segments (N).
Uniform by length: Lets you divide the selected lines into several
equal-length segments. Specify the length of segments (d).

before division after division

If finite elements are divided the new elements inherit properties and loads of the original elements.

 If you divide surface edge lines surface elements will be deleted.

4.8.14. Normal transversal

Creates a connection between two lines along their normal tranversal.

4.8.15. Intersect plane with the model

After defining the intersecting plane intersection lines and nodes will be added to the model. Domains,
beams and ribs will be divided.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 209

4.8.16. Intersect plane with the model and remove half space

This operation is similar to Intersect plane with the model, but after defining the plane a half space can
be selected. Elements within that half space will be deleted.

4.8.17. Domain intersection

Creates intersection lines of domains and line

elements. After clicking the tool button select
domains to create their intersection or select a
domain and a line to create the intersection.

4.8.18. Purge unnecessary lines and nodes

This function removes nodes not connected to any element (line element, domain, support, etc.) and
lines without element properties assigned. Possible options are

From the selection: Only selected nodes and lines will be checked.
Also check nodes and lines within domains: When mesh-independent loads are placed on the domain
additional nodes and lines may be created within the domain to guide the meshing algorithm. Delet-
ing the mesh does not remove these nodes and lines. As these nodes and lines have no physical role
in the model they are detected during purging. Leaving this option unchecked keeps them.
Select but don’t remove: Unnecessary lines and nodes will be selected and not removed.

4.8.19. Geometry check

Finds unattached or duplicated nodes and lines

within the given Tolerance. Nodes closer than this
distance are considered to be duplicates.
If Selection of problematic nodes is checked nodes
closer than Tolerance will be selected. If it is
unchecked these nodes will be deleted and a new
node will be created with averaged coordinates.
The command reports the number of merged
nodes/lines. If List deleted nodes is checked a list
of deleted nodes is displayed using the node
numbers before the deletion. Lines connected to
the nodes will be replaced with a single line to the
new node.
If Selection of intersecting elements is checked it
selects intersecting elements where there is no
node at the point of intersection.
If Select unattached nodes or lines is checked a warning will be displayed if there are independent lines
or nodes not connected to the rest of the structure.

The function fixes domain contours forcing contour segments into the same plane checks the
openings and adjusts arcs if radius is not the same at the startpoint and the endpoint.
210

Checking domain If checked the program removes zigzags from nearly straight segments of domain contours if the
contours deviation from the line is below the Tolerance set here.
Check all loads This function recreates all loads that depend on the geometry (like surface loads distributed over
beams or load panel loads). Rebuilding of loads may cause loss if results.

 The case on the right is not identified by the Check

command.
To avoid having hiding lines check Settings / Options / Editing
/ Auto / Intersect or click Intersect on the Geometry toolbar.

4.8.20. Surface

In any cases when you wish to model surfaces (plates, membranes, or shells) you have to create a
mesh that consists of triangles and convex flat quadrilaterals. The mesh then can be refined. The
command searches all triangles and quads in the selected mesh of lines. You must select all surface
edges when applying the command.
Introduction of domains and automatic meshing rendered this method obsolete.
The number of surfaces detected
is displayed in an info dialog.
The reported surfaces are
geometry surfaces but not
surface elements. You can make
them surface elements by
assigning material and cross-
section properties to them.

 Quads have to be flat. AxisVM takes into account only those surfaces that have an out-of-plane
measurement smaller that the tolerance entered in the Settings / Options / Editing / Editing
Tolerance.

4.8.21. Modify, transform

Lets you modify existing geometric entities.

To modify nodes or lines:
1. Position the cursor over the node/line/centre of surface.
2. Holding the left mouse button pressed, drag the node/line/surface.
3. Drag the node/line/surface to its new position, or enter its new coordinates in the Coordinate
Window, and then press enter or press the left mouse button again.
 If multiple nodes and/or lines are selected, the position of all nodes and lines will be modified.
Fast modify: Clicking a node you get to the Table Browser where you can enter new coordinate
values. If multiple nodes are selected and you click one of them, all the selected nodes will appear in
the table.

Moving selected nodes into the same plane: if the plane is a global one you can move selected
nodes into this plane easily.
1. Click on any of the selected nodes.
2. Select the entire column of the respective coordinate.
3. Use Edit / Set common value to set a common coordinate value.

Using pet palettes Depending on the type of the dragged element different pet palettes appear on the screen. Their
position can be set in Settings / Preferences / Toolbar. See… 3.3.11 Preferences

Dragging nodes

Dragging node with connecting lines

Dragging node disconnecting the selected lines

Dragging all connecting lines

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 211

Chamfer

Fillet

Lengthening or shortening connecting arcs

Detaching a copy of the node

Keeping the central angle of the connecting arc constant.

The new arc is defined by the dragged node, the startpoint and midpoint of the original arc.
Enabled only in detaching mode. It pops up a list of
properties to be copied.

Entering node coordinates: Clicking a node the table of nodes appears where coordinates can be
changed. After selecting one or more nodes their coordinates can be edited in the property editor as
well.
Examples of aligning nodes to a plane if this plane is parallel to one of the global coordinate plane:

1. Select nodes to align.

2. Enter the required coordinate value in the property editor.

Dragging lines

Fillet

Dragging the line parallel to its original position

Breaking the line at a given point by adding a node

Converting to arc

Detaching a copy of the line

Dragging a cutoff parallel to its original position

Replacing a straight line with an arc based on two endpoint tangents.

See Dragging nodes

Modifying arcs

Fillet

Dragging the arc parallel to its original position

Converting to line

Changing arc radius

Inflating / deflating arc

Detaching a copy of the arc

See Dragging nodes

Transforming ob- See... 2.16.6 Geometric transformations on objects

jects
212

4.8.22. Delete
[Del] See in detail... 3.2.9 Delete

4.9. Finite Elements

The commands related to the definition of the finite elements are described below.

The commands associated with the icons let you define the finite elements used for modeling. In the
definition process you must define and assign different property sets.
Properties of finite Depending on the type of finite element, you have to define the following properties:
elements
Finite element Material Cross-section Reference Stiffness Surface
Truss • • o
Beam • • • o
Rib • • o
Membrane • • •
Plate • • •
Shell • • •
Support • •
Rigid
Spring o •
Gap •
Link •
Edge hinge •

o: optional
Note that some elements like springs and gaps can have nonlinear elastic stiffness properties that are
taken into account only in a nonlinear analysis. In a linear analysis the initial stiffness is taken into
account for the spring element, and the active or inactive stiffness depending on its initial opening for
the gap element.

4.9.1. Materials
Define Materials

For color coding of table cells and sorting by columns see 2.9 Table Browser.
Lets you define and save material property sets or load them from a material library.
If you delete a material the definition of the elements with the respective material will be deleted.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 213

Browse Material The material library contains

Library material properties of civil
engineering materials based on
[Shift+Ctrl+M] Eurocode, DIN, NEN, SIA and
other specifications.

Select a material type from the

horizontal list at the top to filter
the list of available materials.

Click Add to add a new material

to the table of materials. Click
Replace to replace the material
of the current table row.

Activating Format / Show used materials in boldface

helps to avoid deleting a material when it is in use.
Listed but unused materials can be easily removed
by the command Edit / Delete unused materials.

 If a material type is deleted all elements made of this material will be deleted.
Material Properties Depending on the type of the finite element you must define the following material properties:

Finite Element E ν α ρ
Truss • • •
Beam • • •
Rib • • •
Membrane • • • •
Plate • • • •
Shell • • • •
Support
Rigid
Diaphragm
Spring
Gap
Link

Displaying and changing material properties is described in 3.1.15 Material Library

 In AxisVM all the materials are considered to be linear elastic (Hooke’s Law) or plastic, and
uniform isotropic or orthotropic (for beam, rib, membrane, plate, and shell elements).
Some elements can have nonlinear elastic material (truss), or stiffness (support, gap, link, spring
elements).
Nonlinear material models are taken into account only in a nonlinear analysis.
In a linear analysis the initial stiffness is taken into account for the nonlinear elements.

4.9.2. Cross-sections
Define Cross-
sections
214

For color coding of table cells and sorting by columns see… 2.9 Table Browser.
Lets you define and save cross-sections or load them from a cross-section library (see… 4.9.2.1 Browse
cross-section libraries). The beam, truss, and rib elements require a cross-section. The properties are
interpreted in the element’s local coordinate system.
For cross-section properties see... 3.1.16 Cross-Section Library

 If you delete a cross-section, the definition of the elements to which it was assigned will also be
deleted. The lines will not be deleted.
You must enter values for all properties.
Cross section properties are defined in the coordinate system of a truss / beam / rib element.

4.9.2.1. Browse cross-section libraries

A cross-section can be imported from the database of the Library or can be defined by entering geo-
metric parameters describing Parametric shapes.

Library Choose thin-walled, thick-walled or composite cross-sections and click on the desired shape on the
toolbar. The tree on the left will list the available tables for the selected shape.
The list in the middle shows the cross-sections of the selected table. Clicking on column header sorts
the list into ascending/descending order by the respective parameter: Name, Height, Width, Ax (cross-
section area). One or more cross-sections can be selected. Cross-section parametres and drawing ap-
pears on the right.
For cross-section properties see... 3.1.16 Cross-Section Library
 If a button is disabled the library does not contain cross-section tables for the respective shape.
If you define a custom cross-section table with that section type, and open this dialog the button
will be enabled.

Click on the Replace button to replace the the selected row in the table of cross-sections with the item
selected here. Click the Add button to append selected items to the table of cross-sections. If multiple
cross-sections are selected Replace will be disabled.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 215

Filters The list of cross-sections with the selected shape can be

filtered by geographical regions and manufacturers. Click
the Filter button under the tree on the left to configure
the filter.

Another Filter button is situated under the cross-section

list. Click on it to set the desired filtering criteria for
minimum / maximum height, width or cross-section area.

Parametric shapes Choose thin-walled, thick-walled or composite cross-sections and click on the desired shape on the
toolbar to open a dialog. Set the parameters describing the geometry and click OK to add the cross-
section to the list of parametric cross-sections with a generated name. You can add different paramet-
ric shapes to the list.
Double-click on the name to edit it. Press the Delete key to remove a selected cross-section(s) from the
list.

If there is only one cross-section in the list click on the Replace button to replace the the selected row
in the table of cross-sections. Click the Add button to append all cross-sections in the list to the table
of cross-sections. If the list contains more than one cross-section Replace will be disabled.
 In case of parametric shapes there is no need to select cross-sections in the list to import them.
The entire list is imported.
216

4.9.3. Spring characteristics

Define spring char- New spring characteristic can be entered in Table Browser under Spring characteristics. This table
acteristics shows the spring characteristics specified in the current model. The unused characteristics can be
deleted with the Edit/Delete unused springs function.

Spring characteristic can be selected from the Spring characteristic library. A window with libraries and
the characteristics is displayed. The spring characteristics are listed depending on the selected degree
Browse Spring of freedom (translational, rotational, all). The properties of selected characteristic are shown in the
characteristic
third column.
library

Activating Format / Show used springs in boldface helps to

avoid deleting a spring characteristic when it is in use.
Listed but unused springs can be easily removed by the
command Edit / Delete unused springs.

Specify a new spring characteristic is described in 3.1.17 Spring characteristics library section.
New spring
characteristic
Properties of spring Existing spring characteristics can be modifeid by clicking to a non-editable column. In the appearing
characteristics dialog all properties of the spring carateristic can be defined or changed.
The properties of spring characteristics are described in 3.1.17 Spring characteristics library section.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 217

4.9.4. Direct drawing of objects

Top toolbar

Property fields

Bottom toolbar

After clicking the icon a direct drawing toolbar and property editor appears. With the help of this
window coloumns, beams, walls, slabs and holes can be drawn. Their properties can be set previously
and changed any time during the drawing.
The top toolbar shows the type of the object to draw and the orientation of the object
(for columns and walls). Property fields can be edited like in the Property Editor.
The bottom toolbar shows the drawing methods available for the object (one segment,
polyline, polygon, rectangle, etc.).
Clicking a domain contour before drawing holes forces the drawing into the plane of the domain.

Object types
Column (in global Z direction)

Beam (in global X-Y plane)

Beam (spatial)

Wall (always vertical with a constant height, i.e. its normal and upper/lower edges are parallel
to the global X-Y plane)
Slab domain (parallel to the global X-Y plane)

Surface domain (spatial)

Hole

Object dragpoints Column upwards / downwards

Wall upwards / downwards

Wall justification: during drawing walls it can be set whether the line drawn is the
centerline or left / right side of the wall (or interior / exterior side in case of arcs
and rectangles).

Object geometry Column

Single segment beam or wall

Beam or wall polyline

Arced beam with centerpoint, start and endpoint

Arced beam with three points

Polygonal beam or wall

Walls on a rectangle
218

Walls on a slanted rectangle

Walls along existing AxisVM lines or background layer lines

Rectangle shaped slab / opening

Slanted rectangle shaped slab / opening

Polygon shaped slab / opening

Round shaped slab / opening

Complex slab / opening

4.9.5. Direct drawing of supports

This function allows direct drawing of nodal and line supports

with predefined properties.

Nodal support

Line support, single line

Line support, polyline

Line support, rectangle

Line support, skewed rectangle

Line support, polygon by centerpoint and two points

Line support, arc by centerpoint and two points

Line support, arc by three points

Line support on domain edges

4.9.6. Domain

A domain is a planar structural element with a complex geometric shape described by a closed polygon
made of lines and arcs. A domain can contain holes, internal lines and points.
Polygon vertices, holes and internal lines must be in same plane.
A domain has the following parameters:
Element type (membrane, plate, shell)
Material
Thickness
Eccentricity
Local coordinate system
Custom color for rendered view
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 219

The following parameters can be assigned to the polygon, hole edges, internal lines and points of a
domain:
point, line, and surface support
rib element
distributed load
dead load
thermal load
nodal degrees of freedom (DOF)

 A domain is displayed by a contour line inside of the

domain’s polygon, with a color corresponding to the
domain’s element type (blue for membrane, red for plate,
and green for shell).

Domains can be defined for floors, walls, and any other complex structural surface element.

The domain can be meshed automatically. See... 4.11.1.2 Meshing of domain

More than one domain can be used to model a structural element.

2nd domain

1st Domain 1st domain

3rd domain

A domain can contain other (sub-) domains.

Different domain types are available
• Normal domain (for simple slabs, walls, etc.)
• AirDeck domain (for voided slabs, requires ADK module)
• Ribbed domain (for parametric ribbed slabs)
• Hollow core domain (for hollow core slabs)
• Composite ribbed domain (for composite ribbed slabs)
• XLAM domain (for cross-laminated timber panels)
• Custom stiffness matrix
220

4.9.6.1. Defining a normal domain

Type Domains have different types (membrane, plate, shell) according to the finite elements used for mo-
delling. To understand the meaning of these types see… 4.9.10 Surface elements.

Select lines on the contour of the domains you

want to define. If you select more lines or lines
from different planes, AxisVM will find the
planes and the contour polygons of the set.
The program applies the parameters you
entered in a dialog window.
Material Select a material from the list of materials used
in the model or pick one from the material
library.

Thickness, Eccent- To define a domain with a constant thickness

ricity and eccentricity only the two values must be
entered.
Tapered domains and/or domains with variable
eccentricity can be defined by clicking the
button beside the edit fields.

k,torsion If the material is concrete, it is possible to set reduced torsional strength of RC plate or shell.
k,torsion factor must be between 0.1 and 1, i.e. the torsional strength of the RC plate or shell can be
10%-100% compared to the elastic, isotropic material.

k,shear If the material is masonry, it is possible to set reduced shear strength.

k,shear factor must be between 0.1 and 1, i.e. the shear strength of the masonry membrane or shell can
be 10%-100% compared to the elastic, isotropic material.
If the material is concrete, it is possible to set reduced shear strength of RC membrane or shell.
k,shear factor must be between 0.1 and 1, i.e. the shear strength of the RC membrane or shell can be
10%-100% compared to the elastic, isotropic material.

k,bending If the material is concrete, it is possible to set reduced bending strength of RC plate or shell.
k,bending factor must be between 0.1 and 1, i.e. the bending strength of the RC plate or shell can be
10%-100% compared to the elastic, isotropic material.
In case of concrete surfaces with reinforcement, nonlinear analysis does not take into account k,shear

and k,torsion factors if Use reinforcement in calculation is checked. (See... 6.5.6 Nonlinear analysis of RC
surfaces)

In case of Constant thickness the domain thickness h must be ente-

red.

For One-way tapered domains enter h1, h2 and click on

the button then click on two thickness reference points.
Domain thickness will change linearly between the refer-
ence points, being h1 at the first point and h2 at the sec-
ond one.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 221

For Two-way tapered domains enter h1, h2, h3 and click on

the button then click on three thickness reference points.
Domain thickness will change linearlz between reference
points, being h1 at the first point h2, at the second one, h3
at the third one. The three reference points cannot be on
the same line

 If domain thickness would be reduced to zero on certain points a warning will appear.
 If thickness gradient is over 5% surface reinforcement calculation becomes unavailable.

Eccentricity Setting eccentricity is optional. Choosing Constant eccentricity from the list or setting e = 0, the mid-
plane of the domain will be the same as the plane of the statical framework. Other options are
Constant eccentricity: Midplane of the domain gets an offset of e in
the local z direction.

One-way eccentric: Enter e1, e2, click on the button then click on two
eccentricity reference points on the model. The eccentricity of the
midplane will change linearly between reference points, being e1 at
the first point and e2 at the second one.

Two-way eccentric: Enter e1, e2, e3, click on the button then click on
three reference points on the model. The eccentricity of the midplane
will change linearly between reference points, being e1 at the first
point, e2 at the second one and e3 at the third one.

Top / Bottom aligned eccentricity is useful when working with tapered

domains or many domains connecting with different thickness. In
these modes eccentricity is calculated automatically. Tapered do-
mains will have zero eccentricity at their thinnest point - unless they
are within an eccentricity group (see below).
Top aligned domains have their upper plane parallel to the local x-y
plane. Bottom aligned domains have their lower plane parallel to the
local x-y plane

If multiple domains are selected and the Eccentricity group option is activated domain eccentricities will
be set to make the upper or lower plane of the domains align. Changing the thickness of any domain
in the group will update the eccentricity of other domains within the group to keep the planes aligned.
The Pick up button is to pick up thickness and eccentricity from another domain. As reference points
are also picked up the thickness change will follow the plane defined by the domain.
Eccentricities and eccentricity groups can serve as a base for color coding (see… 2.18.3 Color coding),
and eccentricity groups can de displayed as parts (see… 2.16.14 Parts).
Color Domains can have their own fill and outline color used in rendered display mode. The default values
are taken from the material colors. If a color coding is applied the domain color is determined by the
color coding both in wireframe and rendered modes.
See… 2.16.5 Color coding
Modify a domain Select the domain (click on the contour line of the domain) you want to modify and make the changes
in the dialog displayed.
Delete a domain Press the [Del] button, select the domains (click on the contour line of the domain) you want to delete
and click OK in the dialog.
222

4.9.6.2. Composite ribbed domain

Defining a composite ribbed domain is an easier way to place a system of ribs over a domain. Unlike the
parametric ribbed slabs (1) the ribs can run in local x or y direction but not both, (2) their material can be
different from that of the domain and (3) they can have any cross-section taken from the cross-section
library or created in the cross-section editor.
Beyond basic domain parameters (see… 4.9.6.1 Defining a normal domain) the following parameters can
be specified:
 Composite ribbed domains require plate or shell element type.
Origin of the rib grid Ribs can run in the local x or y direction.
The origin of the rib grid can be entered
numerically or picked up from the model.

The spacing of ribs (d) cannot be smaller

than the width of the cross-section.
Eccentricity of the ribs can be set, shear
connection can be set to Elastic or Rigid
with a given kx stiffness.

Create actual ribs In case of steel ribs cast partially or entirely in concrete Create actual ribs must be left unchecked. If
upper or lower ribs are attached to the surface of the slab or the spacing is high compared to the di-
mensions of the domain it is recommended to activate this option.
Application of logi- If Create actual ribs is left unchecked, composite ribs will be represented as logical entities, no finite
cal ribs elements will be created. Ribs will be taken into account when creating the material stiffness matrix of
the plate. From the 3D geometry we calculate the effective orthotropic elastic constants of the material,
suitable to represent the stiffness of a periodic body with a 2D model. This is carried out according the
theory of asymptotic homogenization. The effectiveness of such a method is mainly influenced by the
ratio of the length of the period and the dominant size of the domain being modelled (in this case the
ratio of parameter d and the span of the domain along the rib-perpendicular direction).

 As a general guideline we can say that the spacing of the ribs be way smaller than the dominant
in-plane size of the problem domain.
The material stiffness matrix of a general shell element:
{𝑁} 𝒜 ℬ {𝜖0 }
{ }=[ T ]{ },
{𝑀} ℬ 𝒟 {𝜅}

𝑄𝑥 𝐴 𝐴45 𝛾𝑥
{ } = 𝐾𝑠 [ 44 ]{ }
𝑄𝑦 𝐴45 𝐴55 𝛾𝑦
where matrices
𝐴11 𝐴12 𝐴16 𝐵11 𝐵12 𝐵16 𝐷11 𝐷12 𝐷16
𝒜 = [𝐴12 𝐴22 𝐴26 ] ; ℬ = [𝐵12 𝐵22 𝐵26 ] ; 𝒟 = [𝐷12 𝐷22 𝐷26 ]
𝐴16 𝐴26 𝐴66 𝐵16 𝐵26 𝐵66 𝐷16 𝐷26 𝐷66
can be originated from the 6x6 stiffness matrix of general Hooke’s law. Matrix ℬ represents the coupling
effect between bending and membrane or in other words the eccentric effects. This matrix can be zero if
and only if the ribs both have zero eccentricity. In every other case the structure must be modelled using
shell elements to avoid a serious loss of information. The entries of the matrices are determined by
applying independent strain states on a 3D model, and retrofitting the obtained stress field. Since a shell
has 8 generalized strain components, we need to perform 8 finite element calculations in the back-
ground. A shell equipped with the so calculated stiffness properties is equivalent to the original problem
in a way that the work needed to deform the body to a certain level remains the same, but it doesn’t
entail the equivalence of all displacement components at all points.

 Logical ribs are most effective when the spacing of the ribs is dense or the plate is mostly loaded
by distributed loads. This is due to the local effects of concentrated forces.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 223

4.9.6.3. Hollow core domain

Beyond basic domain parameters the following parameters can be specified:

 Hollow core domains require concrete material and plate or shell element type.
Void type

Tubular Rectangular
Origin of the grid Voids are running in local x or y direction
along a grid.
The origin of this grid can be specified
numerically or picked up from the model.

Voids in x / y direc- The direction of voids can be chosen here.

tion

Tubular voids Parameters: Ø is the diameter of the void, d is the distance between the centers of the
voids.
Rectangular voids Parameters: b is the width of the void, h is the height of the void, d is the distance
between the centers of the voids.
Calculation The calculation method is the same what can be seen at Composite ribbed domain, since present configu-
rations can be considered as special cases of that. Consequently all the properties of the method written
there applies for this domain type too.
 As a general guideline we can say that the spacing of the voids be way smaller than the dominant
in-plane sizes of the problem domain.
In the context of elastic anisotropy, the material stiffness (ABD matrix) of a general flat shell element can
be described with the following system of equations
{𝑁} 𝒜 𝓑 {𝜖0 } 𝑄𝑦 𝐴 𝐴45 𝛾𝑦
{ }=[ T ]{ } ; { } = 𝐾𝑠 [ 44 ]{ }
{𝑀} ℬ 𝓓 {𝜅} 𝑄𝑥 𝐴45 𝐴55 𝛾𝑥
where
𝐴11 𝐴12 𝐴16 𝐵11 𝐵12 𝐵16 𝐷11 𝐷12 𝐷16
𝒜 = [𝐴12 𝐴22 𝐴26 ] ; ℬ = [𝐵12 𝐵22 𝐵26 ] ; 𝒟 = [𝐷12 𝐷22 𝐷26 ]
𝐴16 𝐴26 𝐴66 𝐵16 𝐵26 𝐵66 𝐷16 𝐷26 𝐷66
matrices can be derived from the 6x6 stiffness matrix of the generalized Hooke’s law. ℬ represents the
material relation between normal forces and bending, which has only zero values int the present case.
Nonzero stiffness values are determined by the calculation of average stresses, due to pure strain states
applied on the representative volume element of the material.
224

4.9.6.4. Parametric ribbed plates

Beyond basic domain parameters the following parameters can be specified:

Rib type

Custom
Bottom rib Top rib eccentricity

Origin of the rib Ribs follow a grid of lines in the local x

grid and y directions. The origin of this grid
can be entered numerically or picked up
from the model. The ribs may be
modelled with logical or actual ribs.

Ribs in x / y Ribs running in x or y direction has the following geometric parameters h is rib height b is rib width, d
direction is distance between ribs, exc is the eccentricity (if custom eccentricity is selected).
 The maximum value of the rib eccentricity = ( plate thickness + h ) / 2
Calculation The calculation method is the same what can be seen at Composite ribbed domain, since present con-
figurations can be considered as special cases of that. Consequently all the properties of the method
written there applies for this domain type too.
 As a general guideline we can say that the spacing of the ribs be way smaller than the dominant
in-plane size of the problem domain.
Another consequence of the homogenization is that stiffness peaks at the rib intersections will be
smoothed, which may lead to insufficient design. The limits of application regarding a ribbed plate as
a homogeneous one is collected in EN 1992-1-1:2008, chapter 5.3.1. The program automatically de-
tects is these suggestions are not met.
 In case of violating geometric restriction the user is informed with a message window.

Create The homogenization method is not applicable in nonlinear analysis. To get proper nonlinear results
actual ribs actual ribs must be created. This option allows automatic generation of rib elements according to the
parameters.

4.9.6.5. Domain with custom stiffness matrix

Entering a custom stiffness matrix provides full control over the relations between internal force
components and strains. This solution is suggested in every case when other modelling solutions are not
possible and the user is capable of generating the necessary values, or is in posession of suggested
values from any source. The common term for this matrix is ABD matrix. ABD matrices must be positive
definite, this criterion is checked by the program.
Indices of matrix elements follow the Voigt notation with the slight modification of interchanging the
incices of 𝜏𝑥𝑧 and 𝜏𝑦𝑧 . Therefore
𝜎1 = 𝜎11 , 𝜎2 = 𝜎22 , 𝜎3 = 𝜎33 , 𝜎4 = 𝜎23 , 𝜎5 = 𝜎13 , 𝜎6 = 𝜎12
and
𝜀1 = 𝜀11 , 𝜀2 = 𝜀22 , 𝜀3 = 𝜀33 , 𝜀4 = 𝜀23 , 𝜀5 = 𝜀13 , 𝜀6 = 𝜀12 .
Hence the mapping from strains to stresses is given with the general form of Hooke’s law for
anysotropic materials:
𝜎1 𝐶11 𝐶12 𝐶13 𝐶14 𝐶15 𝐶16 𝜀1
𝜎2 𝐶21 𝐶22 𝐶23 𝐶24 𝐶25 𝐶26 𝜀2
𝜎3 𝐶31 𝐶32 𝐶33 𝐶34 𝐶35 𝐶36 𝜀3
𝜎4 = 𝐶41 𝐶42 𝐶43 𝐶44 𝐶45 𝐶46 𝜀4
𝜎5 𝐶51 𝐶52 𝐶53 𝐶54 𝐶55 𝐶56 𝜀5
{𝜎6 } [𝐶 𝐶62 𝐶63 𝐶64 𝐶65 𝐶66 ] {𝜀6 }
61

where a pair of indices refer to the element of the material stiffness matrix which is related to the given
stiffness component.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 225

The meaning of blocks can be described as follows

𝐴𝑖𝑗 – membrane stiffness (normal forces – relative strain)
𝐷𝑖𝑗 – plate stiffness (moments – bending)
𝑆𝑖𝑗 – adjusted shear stiffness (shear forces – relative shear strain)
𝐵𝑖𝑗 – connecting stiffness (normal forces – bending or moments – relative strain)

The basic properties of the domain can be entered as for normal domains. Those parameters will affect
only the visual representation as the physical properties are controlled by the stiffness matrix.
 Corrected shear stiffness components must include the shear correction factors as described in
the chapter about XLAM domains. In a general case these may be other than 5/6, used for
homogeneous sections and may be different in local directions. Determining shear corretion
factors is the responsibility of the user.
 The meaning of the different stiffness parameters is explained in a dedicated theory guide.

Stiffness matrix At the bottom of the dialog stiffness values

assigned to the A, B, D, S submatrix elements
are displayed.

Click on this button to edit matrix elements.

The matrix can be saved to an smx file by clicking on
Save..., and can be loaded from an smx file by clicking
Edit
on Load....
stiffness matrix
This file is a simple text file with the stiffness values.
So it is also possible to create smx files manually or by
other programs.
Click on 0 to set all stiffness components to zero.

Click on this button to pick up stiffness matrix of other

domains (even if they does not have custom stiffness).

Pick up
stiffness matrix

For further information see Help / Custom Stiffness Matrix Guide.

226

4.9.6.6. XLAM domain

This domain type requires the XLM module
handling XLAM (cross-laminated timber) panels.
AxisVM offers a library of many common products
but custom layer structure can also be entered.

Analysis provides displacements, forces, stresses and utilizations in XLAM domains.

Definition
Browse XLAM AxisVM has a wide variety, built-in
libraries databases from the XLAM manu-
facturers, which is constantly ex-
panding.

XLAM layer structure can be loaded

from libraries.

Panel Structure This editor allows to define custom layer structure.

Editor
The Name field contains the name of the panel structure.
Thickness is the calculated total thickness of the panel.
The Number of layers is always odd, the layer structure can be
symmetrical or asymmetrical. Besides the thicknesses of the
individual layers, the user can change the orientation as well.

Service Class This is a classification based on the moisture content of the material and the relative humidity. For
details see Service class in 6.7.1 Timber beam design – TD1 module
Top layer grain Grain direction of the topmost layer must be specified it can be the local x or y direction.
direction
ksys When checked, the system strength factor is taken into consideration when calculating the strength
properties of the member. For further information see the “XLAM Theory and Design Guide”.
kfin When checked, the flexural strength is taken into account with reduced value. Check it on if the lamel-
las are finger-jointed. For further information see the “XLAM Theory and Design Guide”.
Calculation Layered structures built from homogenous layers an equivalent orthotropic material stiffness matrix
can be calculated. This method converts the geometric inhomogeneity into material orthotropy
Material stiffness of a general shell element can be described with the following system of equations

{𝑁} 𝒜 𝓑 {𝜖0 } 𝑄𝑦 𝐴 𝐴45 𝛾𝑦

{ }=[ T ]{ } ; { } = 𝐾𝑠 [ 44 ]{ }
{𝑀} ℬ 𝓓 {𝜅} 𝑄𝑥 𝐴45 𝐴55 𝛾𝑥
where
𝐴11 𝐴12 𝐴16 𝐵11 𝐵12 𝐵16 𝐷11 𝐷12 𝐷16
𝒜 = [𝐴12 𝐴22 𝐴26 ] ; ℬ = [𝐵12 𝐵22 𝐵26 ] ; 𝒟 = [𝐷12 𝐷22 𝐷26 ]
𝐴16 𝐴26 𝐴66 𝐵16 𝐵26 𝐵66 𝐷16 𝐷26 𝐷66
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 227

matrices can be derived from the 6x6 stiffness matrix of the Hooke model for orthotropic materials.
ℬ represents the material relation between normal forces and bending. Ks denotes the shear correction
factor, which is uniquely determined for each lamination scheme. AxisVM handles symmetric and
asymmetric cases as well, the layer orientations must be aligned with one of the local coordinate direc-
tions of the domain.
The above matrices are calculated as

𝐴𝑖𝑗 = ∑(𝑄̅𝑖𝑗 )(𝑘) (𝑧𝑘+1 − 𝑧𝑘 ),

𝑘=1

𝐿
1
𝐵𝑖𝑗 = ∑(𝑄̅𝑖𝑗 )(𝑘) (𝑧𝑘+1 2 − 𝑧𝑘 2 ) = 0,
2
𝑘=1

𝐿
1 𝐿𝑎𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑝𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑛. (Reddy, J. Mechanics
𝐷𝑖𝑗 = ∑(𝑄̅𝑖𝑗 )(𝑘) (𝑧𝑘+1 3 − 𝑧𝑘 3 ).
3 of Laminated Composite Plates and Shells.
𝑘=1
CRC Press, 2004.)

where 𝑄̅𝑖𝑗 is the Hooke-modell value transformed into the panel coordinate system.
For further details on the stiffness calculation procedure, check the XLAM Theory and Design Guide.

4.9.7. Hole

Holes can be defined in domains. Holes have to be inside the domain and in the domain’s plane.

Select the (closed) polygons that are the edges of

the holes you want to define. More than one
outline can be selected. If an outline is not in the
plane of the domain no hole will be created. You
can move holes from one domain to another, or
change their shape. If the hole outline intersects
the domain outline the hole is.
Holes are displayed by a contour line with the
color of the domain in which they are located.

4.9.8. Domain operations

Domain contours can be changed, cut and a union of domains can be calculated.
Change domain 1. Click the Change domain contour icon on the toolbar.
contour 2. Select a domain to change. Domain countour will be selected.
3. Change selection to modify domain contour and click OK on the selection toolbar.

Before After
 Domain properties (material, thickness, local system) will be retained but the existing mesh will
be removed.

If loaded areas are removed from the domain, loads will automatically be removed.
228

Union of domains Union can be created from adjacent domains.

1. Click the Union of domains icon on the toolbar.
2. Select the domains and click OK on the selection toolbar.
3. If domains have different properties (thickness, material or local system) one of the domains has
to be clicked. The union will inherit properties from the clicked domain.

Before After

Cut domains To cut domains along en existing line:

1. Click the Cut domains icon on the toolbar.
2. Select the domains.
3. Select the cutting line and click OK on the selection toolbar.

Before After

4.9.9. Line elements

Line elements are defined and modified in a common dialog. After choosing the element type specific
truss / beam / rib element parameters can be set.
Line elements are handled as structural members and not as finite elements. Meshing a line element
divides a beam or a rib into finite elements. Existing line elements can be joined to form a single
element if the geometry and their properties allow it (Edit / Find structural members).
Numbering, labeling, listing functions will consider it to be a single structural member. Structural
members can be broken apart by Edit / Break apart structural members) See... 3.2.14 Assemble
structural members, 3.2.15 Break apart structural members

Color Elements can have their own fill and outline color used in rendered display mode. Default colors are
taken from the material colors. If a color coding is applied the color of a line element is determined by
the color coding both in wireframe and rendered modes.
See… 2.16.5 Color coding
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 229

Truss

Browse material library

Cross-section Editor

Browse cross-section library

Truss elements can be used to model truss structures. Trusses

are two node, straight elements with constant cross-section pro-
perties along the truss length. A maximum of three translational
degrees of freedom are defined for each node of the elements.
The elements are pin-ended (spherical hinges).

Axial internal forces Nx are calculated for each truss. The variation of the axial force is constant along
the element.
i denotes the truss end with the lower node index (first node). By default the element x axis goes from
the node (i), to the node (j). It can be changed by selecting the other orientation from Local x
Orientation.
Define You must select the lines to which you want to assign the same material and cross-sectional
properties in order to define truss elements.
If elements of different type are selected element definition will be activated.
Defining materials Materials and cross-sections can be selected from built-in libraries or from a list of the
and cross-sections materials/cross-sections already defined.

Allows browsing of the material library to assign a material to the element. The material selected will
be added to the material table of the model.
Allows browsing of the cross-section library to assign a cross-section to the element. For details see
4.9.2.1 Browse cross-section libraries. Only one cross-section can be selected from the library or only
one parametric shape can be created.
Launches the Cross-section Editor. The cross-section created in the Editor will be registered in the list
of model cross-sections.

 The truss elements are displayed on the screen as red lines.

Service class If the current design code is Eurocode and a timber material is selected, the service class can be set
here. For details see… 6.7.1 Timber beam design – TD1 module
Local x Orientation Local x direction of a beam can be set to point from Node i to Node j or vica versa.

i → j : local x axis is directed from the end node with a lower number to the node with the higher one
j → i : local x axis is directed from the end node with a higher number to the node with the lower one
230

Setting this parameter to automatic means that the program determines this orientation based on the
endpoint coordinates.
The orientation can be reversed any time using the shortcut [Ctrl+E] or in the dialog or in the property
editor window.
Cross-section In the calculation of the element stiffness, only the cross-sectional area Ax is considered from the
cross-sectional properties.
Local z Reference A reference point can be assigned to define the element orientation.
This allows a correct display of the cross-section on the screen. In case of selecting Auto the
reference(s) will be set by the program. Affects only the display of references.
See... 4.9.21 References
Reference angle Rotation of cross-sections is made easy by the reference angle. The automatic local coordinate system
(and the cross-section) can be rotated around the element axis by a custom angle. If the element is
parallel to the global Z direction, the angle is relative to the global X axis. In any other case the angle
is relative to the global Z axis.
Nonlinear In a nonlinear analysis you can specify that a truss has stiffness only if it is in tension or compression.
parameters You can optionally enter a resistance value as well. A nonlinear elastic behavior is assumed for the
nonlinear truss elements.

 The nonlinear parameters are taken into account only in a nonlinear analysis.
The initial elastic stiffness of a truss element is taken into account if a linear static, vibration, or
buckling analysis is performed, disregarding any nonlinear parameter entered.

Beam Beam elements may be used to model frame

structures.
Beams are two-node, straight elements with
constant or variable (linearly changing) cross-
section properties along the beam length. A
reference point is used to arbitrarily orient
the element in 3-dimensional space (to
define the local x-z plane). A maximum of
three translational and three rotational
degrees of freedom are defined for each
node of the elements. The ends of the ele-
ments can have arbitrary releases.
Three orthogonal internal forces, one axial
and two shear (Nx, Vy, Vz), and three internal
moments, one torsional and two flexural (Tx,
My, Mz) are calculated at each cross-section
of each element.

i denotes the beam end with the lower node

index (first node). By default the element x axis Reference point
goes from the node (i), to the node (j). It can
be changed by selecting the other orientation
from Local x orientation.

Material, cross- Defining material, cross-section and local direction X are similar to truss elements.
section, local x
orientation

Automatic The reference vector will be generated by the program according to the section 4.9.21 References.
reference
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 231

The orientation of the local x axis of the element can be reversed or can be set to Auto which means
that local x directions will be set automatically based on the beam end coordinates.

Reference angle Rotation of cross-sections is made easy by the reference angle. The automatic local coordinate system
(and the cross-section) can be rotated around the element axis by a custom angle. If the element is
parallel to the global Z direction, the angle is relative to the global X axis. In any other case the angle is
relative to the global Z axis.

 The beam elements are displayed on the screen as blue lines.

End releases You can specify releases that remove the

connection between the selected elements’
degrees of freedom (in the local coordi-
nate system) and the nodes. The end-
releases are set by a six code set for each
end. Each code corresponds to one
internal force component. By default the
beam ends are considered rigidly
connected (all codes are of rigid
connection) to the nodes. Setting a code
as hinged connection will result in the
corresponding internal force component of
the respective end to be released. A semi-
rigid connection code can be assigned to
the in-plane rotation components of the
beam ends.

Graphical symbol of a rigid connection code (the corresponding local displacement component of the
beam end is transferred to the node)
Graphical symbol of a hinged connection code (the corresponding local displacement component of
the beam end is not transferred to the node)
Graphical symbol of a semi-rigid connection code (the corresponding local displacement component of
the beam end is partially transferred to the node). The semi-rigid connection requires spring
characteristic, as in case of springs and nodal support elements. The drop-down menu contains just the
applicable spring characteristics. New characteristic can be defined by the spring characteristic icon,
see… 3.1.17 Spring characteristics library. Characteristics can be any monotonic increasing function.
Graphical symbol of steel plastic connection: the maximum value of the moment at the endpoints is
calculated from the material and cross-section properties.
Graphical symbol of customizable pushover hinge: the corresponding moment-rotation relationship is
defined by the user..
232

The table below demonstrates the use of end releases for some common cases:

End Release Symbol

Hinge in x-y plane.

Can’t transmit Mz moment.
Hinge in x-z plane.
Can’t transmit My moment.
Hinge in x-y and x-z plane.
Can’t transmit Mz and My moments.
Hinge in x-y and x-z plane and free rotation about local x axis (spherical hinge).
Can’t transmit Mx, My, and Mz moments.
Free translation along local y axis.
Can’t transmit Vy shear force.
Free translation along local z axis.
Can’t transmit Vz shear force.

 Care must be taken not to release an element or group of elements such that rigid body
translations or rotations are introduced.
For example, if you specify spherical hinges at both ends (code: 000111), a rigid body rotation about
element axis is introduced. In this case at one of the ends you may not release the element degree of
freedom corresponding to the rotation about local x axis (e.g. i end numerical code: 000011; j end
numerical code: 000111).

Example: Start node End node

Semi-rigid To define semi-rigid hinges set the radio button to semi-rigid and enter the corresponding trans-
connection lational or rotational spring characteristics. Semi-rigid hinges can be assigned to all components (3
translational and 3 rotational components). The value should be the initial stiffness of the real
connection M- characteristics.
The moment - relative rotation diagram of a connection is modeled by a linear or nonlinear elastic
rotational spring. The nonlinear characteristic can only be used in a nonlinear static analysis. In a linear
static, vibration, or buckling analysis, the initial stiffness of the connection is taken into account.
If new characteristic must be defined the default stiffness values (Ku translational and Kr rotational
stiffnesses) are computed on the basis of the cross-sectional characteristics, but are multiplied by 1000
as follows.
Ku translational stiffness:
𝐴𝑥 ∙ 𝐸𝑥
𝑥: 𝐾𝑢 = 1000 ∙
ℓ
where Ax is the cross-sectional area, Ex is the Young’s modulus and ℓ is the length of the element,

Kr rotational stiffnesses:
4 ∙ 𝐸𝑥 ∙ 𝐼𝑦
𝑦𝑦: 𝐾𝑟 = 1000 ∙
ℓ

4 ∙ 𝐸𝑥 ∙ 𝐼𝑧
𝑧𝑧: 𝐾𝑟 = 1000 ∙
ℓ
where Iy and Iz the flexural inertias of the cross-section.

The program does not calculate a default value for y and z shear deformation components and for the
torsional component.

The stiffness of the joints has to be determined according to its local coordinate system. Generally, the
initial stiffness (or its certain quotient) of the nonlinear characteristics is given.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 233

The following example demonstrates how to interpret the rotational stiffness of a steel joint:
Connection: Model: Moment - Relative Rotation Diagram

 For example, in the case of steel frame structures, Eurocode EN 1993-1-8 gives the details of
application.
Resistance To semi-rigid connections a resistance can be assigned, that is the maximum force/moment that can
develop in the connection. The value can be defined in the window of spring characteristics.
In case of steel material, the default values for Fu, My and Mz resistance values are calculated
based on the cross-sectional characteristics and the material yield strength. In case of any other
material, no default resistance value is calculated by the program.

 The resistance parameter is only used in case of a nonlinear static/dynamic analysis.

Steel plastic hinge To define steel plastic hinges set the radio button to steel plastic. Plastic hinge can only be set for x
directional displacement and y, z rotational components.
Moment resistance will be displayed but cannot be edited. If elements with different materials or
cross-sections are selected no value will appear in the edit field but hinges will be defined with the
appropriate resistance.
After completing the nonlinear analysis and displaying beam internal force diagrams hinges that got
into plastic state at the current load step become red. The number beside the hinge shows the order
of getting into a plastic state. Hinge with number 1 is the hinge getting plastic first. Where hinges are
not red, plastic limit moment is not reached yet.

 Steel plastic hinges can only be used with steel beams but only in nonlinear static/dynamic
analysis are considered.
Pushover hinge To define pushover hinges set the radio button to pushover hinge. A custom moment-resistance
relationship can be defined by clicking on the Function editor button under the appropriate pushover
hinge characteristic title.
A total of five points can be defined for both directions of the moment-rotation diagram. This allows
for modeling of complex connection behaviour including the possibility of hardening, softening and
strength degradation. Behaviour after the last point is extrapolated based on points D and E. The
diagram is defined by specifying the corresponding moment and rotation coordinates in the table on
the left side of the window. The created digaram is symmetric by default, but this can be overriden by
clicking on the Symmetrical function button. The created diagrams can be saved and used for other
elements in the model.
To facilitate numerical analysis and prevent convergence difficulties, it is recommended to avoid
sudden drops of capacity and perfectly plastic sections in the diagram. Instead, relax the diagram, by
making sure that there is at least a small difference in both coordinates of consecutive points.
This does not influence the results, but improves numerical stability significantly.
234

After completing the nonlinear analysis and displaying beam internal force diagrams hinges that have
got into plastic state by the current load step become red. The number beside the hinge shows the
order of getting into a plastic state. Hinge with number 1 is the hinge getting plastic first. Where
hinges are not red, plastic limit moment has not been reached yet.

 If any beam end release code is of a hinged connection, the beam end is displayed on the screen as a
blue circle. If it has a stiffness value a blue cross is inscribed. If the end release corresponds to a
spherical hinge, it is displayed as a red circle.
The plastic hinges are displayed as solid circles.
The defined beams appear as dark blue lines.

Rib Rib elements may be used, independently or in

conjunction with surface elements (plates,
membranes, and shells) to model ribbed surface
structures. When used attached to surface ele-
ments, the ribs can be connected centrically or
eccentrically to the surface elements. The prop-
erties of the corresponding surface elements are
used to orient the element in the 3-dimensional
space (to define the local x-z plane).
When used independently, the ribs can model
frame structures in a similar way as the beam
element, but it can take into account the shear
deformations. A reference point or vector is
required to arbitrarily orient the element in the
3D space.
Rib elements are isoparametric three node,
straight elements with constant or variable
(linearly changing) cross-section properties along
the rib length, and with quadratic interpolation
functions. Three translational and three
rotational degrees of freedom are defined for the
nodes of the element. Three orthogonal internal
forces, one axial and two shear (Nx, Vy, Vz), and
three internal moments, one torsional and two
flexural (Tx, My, Mz) are calculated at each node
of each element.
The variation of the internal forces within an element can be regarded as linear.

Define You must assign the following properties:

Material, Defining material, cross-section and local direction X are similar to truss elements.
Cross-section,
Local x orientation
Material The material of the rib can be different from the surface material (if it is connected to a surface).
Cross-section The rib element’s cross-section is taken into account as is shown in the figure below:
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 235

Automatic The reference vector will be generated by the program according to the section 4.9.21 References
reference
Reference Independent rib: Reference point
The local coordinate system is defined as follows:
the element axis defines the x local axis; the local
z axis is defined by the reference point or vector;
the y local axis is according to the right-hand rule.

Rib connected to a surface element:

The local coordinate system is defined as follows: the element axis defines the x local axis; the
local z axis is parallel to the z axis of the surface element; the y local axis is parallel to the plane of
the surface element, oriented according to the right-hand rule.
The figure below shows that when the beam is located on the edge of two surface elements that
makes an angle, the local z axis is oriented by the average of normal axes of the surfaces. If more
than two surfaces are connected to the edge and you select one or two of them then an
automatic reference will be available when defining the rib.
The cross-sectional properties must be defined in this coordinate system.

Reference point

Reference angle The automatic local coordinate system (and the cross-section) can be rotated around the element axis
by a custom angle. If the element is parallel to the global Z direction, the angle is relative to the global
X axis. In any other case the angle is relative to the global Z axis.
End releases End releases can be defined for ribs the same way as for beams. By default both ends are fixed.

Eccentricity You can specify eccentricity for a rib only if it is on the edge of one or two surfaces. If more than two
surfaces are connected to the edge select one or two of them to define eccentricity for the rib.
The eccentricity (ecc) of a rib is given by the distance of the center of gravity of its cross-section to the
plane of the model of the surface (neutral plane). It is positive if the center of gravity is on the positive
direction of its local z axis.
There are four options to set the rib eccentricity. Bottom rib, top rib, rib in the midplane or custom
eccentricity.
Rib types in case of
concrete slab and
concrete rib
Bottom rib Top rib Rib in midplane Custom eccentricity

Rib types in case of

concrete slab and a
rib of a different
material
Bottom rib Top rib Rib in midplane Custom eccentricity

In the first three cases the actual eccentricity is calculated from the rib cross-section and the plate
thickness. If the rib is made of concrete the definition of top and bottom ribs are different, so button
pictures change according to the rib material. If rib cross-section or plate thickness changes the ec-
centricity is automatically recalculated.
If the rib is made of steel or timber, connected to a shell and is defined as a top or bottom rib, an
additional axial connection stiffness can be defined.
236

 In case of reinforced concrete plate-rib connections rib cross-section must include the plate
thickness. In other cases (steel or timber structures) the cross-section is attached to the top or
bottom plane of the plate.

 For plates, the eccentricity of the rib will modify the flexural inertia of the rib as follows:
𝑰∗𝒚 = 𝑰𝒚 + 𝑨 ⋅ 𝒆𝒙𝒄𝟐
For shells, due to the eccentric connection of the rib to the shell, axial forces will appear in the
rib and shell.
Shear connection In case of top and bottom ribs (except for concrete structure), the shear connection between the slab
and rib can be set, which can be Rigid or Elastic. The elastic stiffness – kx component - has to be set by
the user, it is not calculated by the program (the default value is 1E+6 kN/m/m).
Using Elastic setting, the specific longitudinal shear connection force (Vxz component) is also
calculated (this is not calculated with rigid settings).

Stifffness reduction Using Eurocode standard, stiffness reduction can be set for certain architectural elements (such as
columns, beams, walls, slabs and other type of elements) for modal response spectrum analyis. For
details see chapter 3.3.10 Stiffness reduction. In case of concrete ribs two kind of reduction factor can
be set: kA and kI.

Factor kA lowers the cross-sectional area of the concrete. It has an effect only on the elongation
stiffness and has no effect on the shear stiffness. Factor kI lowers only the flexural stiffness of the
cross-section.

 Ribs appear as blue lines.

Modifying Selecting elements of the same type and clicking the tool button Modifying will be actived. Properties
of elements can be changed if the checkbox before the value is checked. If a certain property is does
not have a common value its edit field will be empty. If a value is entered it will be assigned to all
selected elements.
Pick up>> Properties of another element can be picked up and assigned to the selected elements. Clicking the
Pick up button closes the dialog. Clicking an element picks up the value and shows the dialog again.
Only those properties will be copied where the checkbox is checked.

4.9.10. Surface elements

Surface elements can be used to model membranes (membrane element), thin and thick plates (plate
element) and shells (shell element) assuming that the displacements are small.
As surface elements you can use a six node triangular or eight/nine node quadrilateral finite elements,
formulated in an isoparametric approach. The surface elements are flat and have constant thickness
within the elements.
Introduction of domains and automatic meshing rendered the definition of surface elements
obsolete.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 237

 It is preferable for the element thickness not to exceed one tenth of the smallest characteristic
size of the modeled structural element, and the deflection (w) of a plate or shell structural
element is less than 20% of its thickness (displacements are small compared to the plate
thickness).
Use of elements with the ratio of the longest to shortest element side lengths larger than 5, or with
the ratio of the longest structural element side length to the thickness larger than 100 are not
recommended.
In some cases when the elements are used (that are flat with straight edges) to approximate curved
surfaces or boundaries, poor results may be obtained.

Reference point Reference point

Membrane

Select the surface

element type

Assign a reference for

the local x axis
Assign reference Assign a reference for
graphically
the local z axis

Membrane elements may be used to model flat structures whose behavior is dominated by in-plane
membrane effects. Membrane elements incorporate in-plane (membrane) behavior only (they include
no bending behavior).

 The membrane element can be loaded only in its plane.

AxisVM uses an eight node Serendipity,
plane stress (𝜎𝑧𝑧 = 𝜎𝑥𝑧 = 𝜎𝑦𝑧 = 0, 𝜖𝑥𝑧 = 𝜖𝑦𝑧 = 0, 𝜖𝑧𝑧 ≠ 0) or
plane strain (𝜖𝑧𝑧 = 𝜖𝑥𝑧 = 𝜖𝑦𝑧 = 0, 𝜎𝑥𝑧 = 𝜎𝑦𝑧 = 0, 𝜎𝑧𝑧 ≠ 0)
finite element as membrane element.
The membrane internal forces are: 𝑛𝑥 , 𝑛𝑦 , 𝑛𝑥𝑦 . In addition the principal internal forces 𝑛1 , 𝑛2 and the
angle 𝛼𝑛 are calculated.
The variation of internal forces within an element can be regarded as linear.
The following parameters should be specified:
1. Plane strain or plane stress
2. Material
3. Thickness
4. Reference (point/vector/axis/plane) for local x axis
5. Reference (point/vector) for local z axis
Allows browsing of the material library to assign a material to the element. The material selected will
be added to the material table of the model.
238

Automatic reference:
The axis of element local directions x and z can be determined by reference elements,
see part 4.9.21 References or can be set automatically.

 The center of the membrane elements is displayed on the screen in blue.

Plate

Plate elements may be used to model flat structures whose behavior is dominated by flexural effects.

AxisVM uses an eight/nine node Heterosis finite element as plate element, that is based on Mindlin-
Reissner plate theory that allows for transverse shear deformation effects). This element is suitable for
modeling thin and thick plates as well.
Plate elements incorporate flexural (plate) behavior only (they include no in-plane behavior).

 The element can only be loaded perpendicular to its plane.

The plate internal forces are: 𝑚𝑥 , 𝑚𝑦 , 𝑚𝑥𝑦 moments, and 𝑣𝑥 , 𝑣𝑦 shear forces (normal to the plane of the
element). In addition, the principal internal forces: 𝑚1 , 𝑚2 , the angle 𝛼𝑚 and the resultant shear force
𝑞𝑅 are calculated.
The variation of internal forces within an element can be regarded as linear.
The following parameters should be specified:
1. Material
2. Thickness
3. Reference (point/vector/axis/plane) for local x axis
4. Reference (point/vector) for local z axis
Allows browsing of the material library to assign a material to the element. The material selected will
be added to the material table of the model.
Automatic reference:
The axis of element local directions x and z can be determined by reference elements, see part 4.9.21
References or can be set automatically.

 The center of the plate elements is displayed on the screen in red.

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 239

Shell

Shell elements may be used to model structures with behavior that is dependent upon both in-plane
(membrane) and flexural (plate) effects.
The shell element consists of a superimposed membrane and plate element. The element is flat, so the
membrane and plate effects are independent (first order analysis).

 The element can be loaded in its plane and perpendicular to its plane.
The shell internal forces are: 𝑛𝑥 , 𝑛𝑦 , 𝑛𝑥𝑦 forces (membrane components), 𝑚𝑥 , 𝑚𝑦 , 𝑚𝑥𝑦 moments, and
𝑣𝑥 , 𝑣𝑦 shear forces (plate components). In addition, the principal internal forces and moments
𝑛1 , 𝑛2 , 𝑚1 , 𝑚2 , the angles 𝛼𝑛 , 𝛼𝑚 and the resultant shear force 𝑣𝑆𝑧 are calculated.
The variation of internal forces within an element can be regarded as linear.

The following parameters should be specified:

1. Material
2. Thickness
3. Reference (point/vector/axis/plane) for local x axis
4. Reference (point/vector) for local z axis

Allows browsing of the material library to assign a material to the element. The material selected will
be added to the material table of the model.
Automatic reference:
The axis of element local directions x and z can be determined by reference elements, see part 4.9.21
References or can be set automatically.

 The center of the shell elements is displayed on the screen in green.

Modifying Selecting elements of the same type Modify will be activated. Checked properties can be changed or
picked up from another element. Selecting elements of different types Define will be activated.
Pick up>> See... Pick up at 4.9.9 Line elements

The rotational DOF about the axis normal to the surface is a

rigid elements
special DOF. It is the 3rd DOF of membrane elements and the 6th
DOF of shells. It is not coupled with the planar translations. Only
the drilling DOF of the nodes are connected with a small stiffness.
In case of shells the main goal is to avoid singularities at 3D
connections (L or T shape connection of flange and web or
modeling curved shells). In case of membranes the main purpose
is to obtain the same results like in-plane loaded shells see…
References [2].)
Since the drilling DOF has only a small stiffness a directly loaded
node of a membrane or shell element works as if it was released
about the axis normal to the surface. Using rigid elements the
moment resistance of this node can be increased.
240

4.9.11. Nodal support

Nodal support elements may be used to model the point support conditions of a structure. Nodal
support elements elastically support nodes, while the internal forces are the support reactions.
Midside nodes of surface edges cannot be supported. References are used to arbitrarily orient the x
and z axes of the element.The x axis is directed from a reference point to the attachment node (the
node to which it is attached).
You can specify the translational and/or rotational (torsional) properties about the element axes by
spring characteristic. The values of initial and vibration stiffness and the damping coefficient are also
displayed. Nonlinear parameters can be assigned to each direction. To change the characteristics click
the spring characteristic icon (see… 3.1.17 Spring characteristics library). The values of damping
coefficient are visible if at least one of them is not zero.

 The default stiffness values are 1E+10 [kN/m], [kNm/rad].

 The support elements are displayed on the screen in yellow (translational spring) or orange (rotational
spring).
The support can be defined in the following systems:
- Global - Local - Beam/rib relative
- Reference - Edge relative

Global Defines nodal support elements parallel to global coordinate axes.

You must select the nodes that are identically supported, and specify
the corresponding translational (𝐾𝑋 , 𝐾𝑌 , 𝐾𝑍 ) and rotational
(𝐾𝑋𝑋 , 𝐾𝑌𝑌 , 𝐾𝑍𝑍 ) stiffnesses.

 You can define only one global support for a node. You cannot define nodal support for a
midside node of a surface element.
Local Minimum two applicable reference is necessary to define local nodal
support element. This kind of nodal support is actually a rotated
version of the global one. The firs reference is the direction of local
x-axis and the second reference together with the first one
deterimines the plane of the local z-axis. Beside the references the
corresponding stiffness (spring characteristic) must be specified.

 You can define only one local support for a node.

Reference Defines nodal support elements in the direction of a reference (point or vector). You must select the
nodes that are identically supported, and specify the corresponding stiffness (translational 𝑲𝑥 , and
rotational 𝐾𝑥𝑥 ).
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 241

The direction of the reference vector is

defined by the element node and its
reference point or reference vector in the
following way:

Reference point Reference vector

Support elements oriented Support elements parallel

toward a reference point to a reference vector

Beam/rib relative Defines nodal support elements about local coordinate axes of
beam / rib elements. You must select the beam / rib elements
and the nodes that are identically supported, and specify the
corresponding translational (𝐾𝑋 , 𝐾𝑌 , 𝐾𝑍 ) and rotational
(𝐾𝑋𝑋 , 𝐾𝑌𝑌 , 𝐾𝑍𝑍 ) stifnesses.

Edge relative Defines nodal support elements about local coordinate axes of
surface element edges. You must select the surface elements
and the nodes that are identically supported, and specify the
corresponding translational (𝐾𝑋 , 𝐾𝑌 , 𝐾𝑍 ) and rotational
(𝐾𝑋𝑋 , 𝐾𝑌𝑌 , 𝐾𝑍𝑍 ) stifnesses.

If one surface is connected to the edge the local coordinate axes of the edge are:
x = the axis of the edge
y = the axis is oriented toward inside of the surface element in its plane
z = parallel to the z local axis of the surface element

If two surfaces are connected to the edge the local z-axis direction is bisecting the angle of surfaces.
The y-axis is determined according to the right hand-rule.
If more than two surfaces are connected to the edge and you select one or two of them then support
local system will be determined based on the selected surfaces.

 Positive displacement elongates the support spring that causes tensile force. Negative displacement
shorten the spring that causes compressive force.
Nonlinear behavior Nonlinear force-displacement characteristics can be specified for this element as follows: compression
only (very small stiffness in tension), tension only (very small stiffness in compression). A resistance
value can be also be entered. In addition, it is possible to give an arbitrary monotonic increasing
characteristic.

 The nonlinear stiffness parameters are taken into account only in nonlinear static and nonlinear
dynamic analyses. In linear static, linear dynamic and in buckling analyses the initial stiffnesses
are considered, while in Vibration I/II analysys the vibration stiffnesses are taken into account.
The damping coefficients are considered only in dynamic analysis.
 Nodal supports appear as brown (𝐾𝑋 , 𝐾𝑌 , 𝐾𝑍 ) and orange (𝐾𝑋𝑋 , 𝐾𝑌𝑌 , 𝐾𝑍𝑍 ) pegs in 3 orthogonal
direction.
242

Support stiffness
calculation Load from material
library

Use the cross-section

editor
Fixed/pinned at the top
of column

Load from the cross-

section library Fixed/pinned at the
bottom of the column

Use the Calculate... button to calculate the support stiffness (including the rotational stiffness) due to
a column type support. The support stiffnesses are determined based on the end releases, material,
and geometry of the column. Using the parameters, spring characteristics are generated by the
program.

Calculating nodal support stiffness a column below and a column above the node can be specified
separately. These column parameters can also be used in punching analysis (especially in the case of
intermediate slabs). The columns and walls modeling the supports also appear in rendered view and
the cursor can identify them.

Modifying Selecting elements of the same type Modifying will be activated. Checked properties can be changed
or picked up from another element. Selecting elements of different types Definiton will be activated.

Pick up>> See... Pick up at 4.9.9 Line elements

4.9.12. Line support

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 243

Line support elements may be used to model the line support conditions of a structure. Line support
elements (Winkler type) are elastically supporting beams, ribs, or surface (domain) edges, while the
internal forces are the support reactions.

You can specify the translational and/or rotational (torsional) stiffness values about the element axes.
Nonlinear parameters can be assigned to each direction. To change the characteristics click one the
three buttons (bidirectional, compression only, tension only) and set the resistance checkbox and
specify a value if necessary.

The support can be defined in the following systems: Global, Beam/rib relative, Edge relative, Referential
(taking int direction from a reference point or reference vector)

 The default stiffness values are 1E+7 [kN/m/m], or [kNm/rad/m].

 Both line element or domain edge supports are considered to be structural elements, i.e. when a
mesh is created these elements will be automatically divided internally but tables and labels
always refer to the structural elements.

Global Defines line support elements parallel to global coordinate axes. You must specify the corresponding
translational (𝑅𝑋 , 𝑅𝑌 , 𝑅𝑍 ) and rotational (𝑅𝑋𝑋 , 𝑅𝑌𝑌 , 𝑅𝑍𝑍 ) stiffnesses.

Beam/Rib relative Defines line support elements for beam/rib elements in their local coordinate system acting as an
elastic foundation. You must specify the corresponding translational 𝑅𝑥 , 𝑅𝑦 , 𝑅𝑧 and rotational
𝑅𝑥𝑥 , 𝑅𝑦𝑦 , 𝑅𝑧𝑧 stifnesses.

 The beams/ribs with line supports must be divided into at least four elements.
In addition, the following condition must be satisfied:

1 4 4𝐸𝑥 𝐼𝑧 4 4𝐸𝑥 𝐼𝑦
𝐿 ≤ 𝑙𝑘 = min ( √ ,√ )
2 𝑘𝑦 𝑘𝑧
where L is the beam / rib length.

 AxisVM warns you if the condition is not satisfied (by one or more elements). In this case the
Winkler’s modulus of the defined elements are set to zero, therefore you can divide the elements
and repeat the definition / modification process.
If you specify line supports the internal forces are linearly interpolated between the ends of the
element, therefore the division of the elements is required.

Edge relative Defines edge support elements relative to local coordinate axes of the edges. You must specify the
corresponding stiffness (translational 𝑅𝑥 , 𝑅𝑦 , 𝑅𝑧 and rotational 𝑅𝑥𝑥 , 𝑅𝑦𝑦 , 𝑅𝑧𝑧 ).
If one surface is connected to the edge the local coordinate axes of the edge are:
x = the axis of the edge
y = the axis is oriented toward inside of the surface element in its plane
z = parallel to the z local axis of the surface element
If two surfaces are connected to the edge the local z-axis Reference point
direction is bisecting the angle of surfaces. The y-axis is
determined according to the right hand-rule.
If more than two surfaces are connected to the edge and
you select one or two of them then the local system will
be determined from the selected surfaces.

Referential Defines edge support in a right-handed x, y, z coordinate system, where

x = edge direction
y = perpendicular both to the edge and the z reference direction
z = direction defined by the reference point or reference vector

 Positive displacement elongates the support spring that causes tensile force. Negative displacement
shorten the spring that causes compressive force.
Nonlinear behavior Nonlinear force-displacement characteristics can be specified for this element as follows: compression
only (very small stiffness in tension), tension only (very small stiffness in compression). A resistance
value can also be entered.
244

 The nonlinear parameters are taken into account only in a nonlinear analysis. In any other case in
the analysis (Linear static, Vibration I/II, Buckling) the initial stiffnesses are taken into account.

 Line supports appear as brown (𝑅𝑋 , 𝑅𝑌 , 𝑅𝑍 ) and orange (𝑅𝑋𝑋 , 𝑅𝑌𝑌 , 𝑅𝑍𝑍 ) lines.

Support stiffness Use the Calculate... button to calculate the global or edge-
calculation relative line support stiffness (including the rotational
stiffness) due to a wall type support. The support
stiffnesses are determined based on the end releases,
material, and geometry of the wall.

4.9.13. Surface support

Surface support Defines a surface support element (Winkler type elastic foundation) to surface elements. You must
specify a translational stiffness in the surface element local coordinate system. The surface support
behaves identically in tension and compression and is considered constant within the element.
You must specify the support stiffness 𝑅𝑥 , 𝑅𝑦 , 𝑅𝑧 (Winkler’s modulus) about the surface element local
x, y, and z axes.

 The default stiffness values are 1E+4 [kN/m/m], or [kNm/rad/m].

 Positive displacement elongates the support spring that causes tensile force. Negative displacement
shorten the spring that causes compressive force.
Nonlinear behavior Nonlinear force-displacement characteristics can be specified for this element as follows: compression
only (very small stiffness in tension), tension only (very small stiffness in compression), or with
resistance (the same stiffness for compression and tension).

 The nonlinear parameters are taken into account only in a nonlinear analysis. In any other case
in the analysis (Linear static, Vibration I/II, Buckling) the initial stiffnesses are taken into
account.

 Surface supports appear as an orange square-hatched fill.

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 245

4.9.14. Edge hinge

Edge hinge can be defined between domain edges or between a rib and a domain edge. Select edge
and a domain. Hinge stifness can be defined in the local system of the edge of the selected domain.

4.9.15. Rigid elements

Rigid elements may be used to model parts with a rigid behavior relative to other parts of the
structure.
The elements can be defined by selecting the lines that connect its nodes. The selected lines that have
common nodes define the same rigid element. There is no limit to the number of nodes of any
element.

 The degrees of freedom of the nodes of a rigid element cannot be constrained (fixed).
Modeling membrane–beam Modeling eccentric beam–beam element
element connection: connection:

Define Lets you define rigid elements. You must select the lines that connect the nodes attached to rigid
elements. Recall that the lines with common nodes define the same rigid element.

You can join or split rigid elements using the modify command.
If you select lines that connect nodes of different rigid elements, the elements will be joined. If you
deselect lines of rigid elements interrupting their continuity, the respective elements will be split.

 A finite element cannot have all of its lines assigned to the same rigid body.
If we want to calculate the mass of the body in a vibration analysis, place a node to the center
of gravity, connect it to the body and make this line a part of the rigid body. Assign the mass of
the body to this node.

 The rigid elements are displayed on the screen with thick black lines.
246

4.9.16. Diaphragm

Using diaphragms means simplifying the model. Diaphragms are special rigid bodies where the relative
position of the element nodes remain constant in a global plane. Diaphragms considerably reduce the
amount of calculation. It can be an advantage running vibration analysis of big models. Diaphragms
can represent plates totally rigid in their planes.

Definition Select lines to define diaphragms. Each set of connecting lines will form a diaphragm.

 Diaphragms are displayed as dashed thick purple lines.

After definition you must set the working plane of

the diaphragm. The relative position of element
nodes remains constant in this plane. For rigid
plates in the X-Y plane choose XY.
After changing, deleting or adding diaphragms all
diaphragms will be checked again to find con-
nected groups of lines. Unconnected groups will
form separate diaphragms.

4.9.17. Spring

The spring element connects the degrees of freedoms of two nodes of the model. The element has its
own coordinate system. You can specify the translational (Kx, Ky, Kz) and/or rotational (Kxx, Kyy, Kzz)
spring characteristics about the element axes. The values of initial and vibration stiffness and the
damping coefficient are also displayed. Nonlinear parameters can be assigned to each direction. To
change the characteristics click the spring characteristic icon (see… 3.1.17 Spring characteristics library)
Springs can be defined in the following systems: Global, By geometry, By reference, Element relative,
Node relative
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 247

Global Defines spring elements parallel to global coordinate axes. You

must select the line and specify the corresponding translational
(𝐾𝑋 , 𝐾𝑌 , 𝐾𝑍 ) and rotational (𝐾𝑋𝑋 , 𝐾𝑌𝑌 , 𝐾𝑍𝑍 ) characteristics.

By geometry Specifying a spring element based on geometry, the direction of

the selected line will be the local x-axis of the spring element. The
plane containing the local z-axis is determined by reference z and
the local x-axis.
The model requires at least one applicable reference to be
specified.
By reference The spring element defined by reference can be specified by two
references. The direction of the local x-axis is assigned by x-
reference. The z-reference, together with the local x-axis
determines the plane in which the local z-axis is located. After
selecting the line, references and spring characteristics must be
specified.
The model requires at least two applicable references to be
specified.
Element relative The local coordinate system of the spring element is aligned to
the local coordinate system of the selected beam/rib. You must
select the required line and the beam/rib element and finally the
spring characteristics for each direction. The model must include
at least one beam or rib element to define this kind of spring
element.

Node relative Spring element with node relative is determined by two

applicable nodes in addition to the selected line. The local x-
reference node with the lower number node of the spring line
specifies the local x-axis of the spring. The local z-reference node
with the local x-direction determines the plane that contains the
local z-axis.
The model requires at least two applicable nodes to be specified.
Spring character- Spring characteristic can be imported from Spring characteristics library see… 3.1.17 Spring characteris-
istics library tics library. The program automatically filters out the spring properties corresponding to the degree of
freedom.

Spring character- The components can be edited with the spring characteristic icon.
istic editor See… 3.1.17 Spring characteristics library.

 Nonlinear spring characteristics are taken into account only in case of materially nonlinear
static and materially nonlinear dynamic analyses.
Initial stiffnesses are taken into account in materially linear static, materially linear dynamic and
buckling analyses even if the spring properties are nonlinear. In case of Vibration I/II the
vibration stiffnesses are taken into account, that values remain constant during the analyses.
The spring elements are not real structural elements. They connect the nodal DOFs of the
endpoints one by one. There is no geometric coupling between the different DOFs (translation-
rotation, force-moment).
248

4.9.18. Gap

The gap element is used to model point-

to-point contact.

The element has two states:

• one active, when its stiffness is
several orders of magnitude higher
than in inactive state (simulates that a
contact is achieved)
• one inactive, when it has a small
stiffness value (simulates that no
contact is achieved).

As the inactive state has a small but nonzero stiffness a gap element is an approximate model of this
type of connection. But using this element the stiffness matrix remains a band matrix and any number
of gaps can be used in a model.

The gap element is a nonlinear element that can impose difficulties to the solution of the nonlinear
problem, due to large changes of element stiffness when it changes status (active/inactive).
If numerical convergence problem occurs, it may be desirable to reduce the ratio of active and inactive
stiffness, thereby mitigating the nonlinearity induced by the contact element. This has to be checked by
the user, that it is possible or not.

A gap element is defined by selecting two nodes.

Defining Local x orientation is the same as for beam elements.

Active: The active state that can be tension (a tension bolt connection) or compression (contact of two
plates)
Orientation (from one of its node to its other node)
Active stiffness: By default it is 1E+8 kN/m.
Inactive stiffness: By default it is 1E-2 kN/m.
Initial opening\penetration: By default it is 0. The initial opening can be set based on element geometry
as well (Check By geometry). The initial opening is a positive or zero value. While the initial opening
does not close, the gap is considered inactive.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 249

 If the gap element is used in an analysis different from a nonlinear static analysis, the element
will be taken into account as a spring with a stiffness corresponding to its initial opening. If the
initial opening is zero, the active stiffness will be taken into account.

4.9.19. Link

Link elements Link elements connect two nodes (N-N) or two lines (L-L) and have six stiffness components (defined in
their coordinate system) that are concetrated on an interface (located between the connected
nodes/lines). Its position can be entered relative to one node/line that is considered as reference.
Link elements can have a nonlinear parameter called limit resistance that limits the force they are able
to transfer.

Node-to-Node (N-N) Link

Connects two nodes. The stiffness components are defined in the global coordinate system. The
position of the interface can vary from 0 to 1 relative to the master node (selected by the user). If the
location of the interface is = 0 the interface is at the master node. If it is = 1 the interface is at the
opposite node. For any value greater than 0 or lower than 1 the reference is between the nodes.

Typical applications are: main girder-purlin connection; some types of grillage connections; bracing
connections; etc.
Example: A main girder-purlin connection (see… SteelFrame.axs in the examples folder)
Let assume that the vertical axis is Z being parallel to the local z axis. The main girder is an IPE-400 in X-
Z plane, the purlin is an I-200. You would like to transfer forces from the purlin to the main girder but
not the moments.
250

These elements are represented by their line of gravity. The link has to be placed between these two
axes at their point of intersection (if seen from above). Therefore, this link has to be assigned to a verti-
cal line having a length equal to the distance of axes i.e. 30 cm (40/2 + 20/2). Select the node on the
main girder to be the master node of the link. The inter-face always has to be placed at the actual point
of contact. In this case the interface is located 20 cm far (40/2) from the master node (i.e. the main
girder axis). So, the interface position is 20/30 = 0.666. You assume that the connection is fixed against
displacements but can rotate. Therefore, you enter 1E10 for translational stiffnesses and 0 for rotational
ones. If the purlins are supported only by these links you have to enter KYY=0.001 or a similar small
value to eliminate rotation around the main girder axis.
Nonlinear Nonlinear parameters can be assigned to each nonzero stiffness component. To change the character-
parameters istics click one the three buttons (bidirectional, compression only, tension only) and set the resistance
checkbox and specify a value if necessary.

Line-to-Line Link

Connects two lines with three nodes each that can

be rib elements and/or edges of surface elements. A
line-to-line link has 6 nodes. The stiffness compon-
ents are defined in the local coordinate system of
the link that is in the plane of the link element with
the x local axis parallel to the master line, and the
local z axis oriented toward the other line in the
plane of the link and is orthogonal to the local x
axis.

The position of the interface can vary from 0 to 1 relative to the master line (selected by the user).
If the location of the interface is 0, the interface is at the master line (at the start point of the arrow).
If it is 1 the interface is at opposite line (at the end point of the arrow). For any value greater than 0 or
lower than 1 the interface is between the lines.
Typical applications are: floor-wall hinged connections; semi-composite / full-composite layered beams;
Semi-rigid rib-shell connections; etc.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 251

Example: A floor-wall hinged connection.

Let’s assume that the vertical axis is Z, the wall is

in Y-Z plane, the floor is parallel to the X-Y plane
and walls are represented by shell elements.
Floor thickness is 15 cm.
You would like to transfer forces from the floor
to the wall but not the moments.
Elements are represented by their middle plane.
The wall has to reach until the bottom plane of
the floor. Links have to be placed between the
upper wall edge and the floor edge.
In this case the link elements have to be in the plane of the wall. The distance between the edges is
7.5 cm (15/2). Select wall edge nodes to be the master nodes. The interface has to be at the actual
point of contact which is in the bottom plane of the floor and is 0 cm far from the master node.
Therefore enter 0 for the interface position. You assume that the connection is fixed against
displacements but can rotate. Therefore, you enter 1E10 for translational stiffnesses and 0 for
rotational ones.

Nonlinear A limit resistance can be specified for each corresponding component with non-zero stiffness.
parameters

When used in conjunction with domains the following steps can be followed to define line-to-line link
elements:

1. Define the domains (See... 4.9.6 Domain) and

connect the cor-responding opposite nodes of the
domains with lines (the number of nodes on the
edges of the domains should be equal).

2. Select the quadrilateral between the domains.

Click OK on the Selection Toolbar.

3. Select the master line of the link element. Click

OK on the Selection Toolbar.

4. Define the link stiffness, and set the interface

location. By default the interface is in the
midpoint of the link element. The link element(s)
are created.

5. Now you can mesh the domains.

See... 4.11.1.2 Meshing of domain

6. Link elements are divided according to the

domain mesh.
252

4.9.20. Nodal DOF (degrees of freedom)

Lets you constrain the six nodal degrees of freedom that are: translations (eX, eY, eZ and rotations (X, Y
and Z).
In the default setting no nodes have constrained degrees of freedom.
In the calculations, equilibrium equations will only be written in the direction of the free displacements
(translations/rotations).
Any combination of the six nodal degrees of freedom (eX, eY, eZ, X, Y and Z) can be selected.
However, in many cases typical combinations of degrees of freedom can be used. In these situations,
you can quickly apply a predefined setting by selecting it from the list box.
The following particular structures are listed:
Plane truss girder / Space truss / Plane frame/ Grillage / Membrane / Plate

Define a nodal DOF Use the buttons to set the degrees of freedom. Button cap-
tions will reflect the current value. Changes will be applied
only to those nodal DOF which have their corresponding
check-box checked. Unchecked components will retain their
original values in the selection.
You have two options to change nodal DOF:
Overwrite
The new setting overwrites the existing degrees of free-
dom settings of the selected nodes.
Union
Performs a union set operation with the set of the new
degrees of freedom codes and the set of existing degrees
of freedom codes of the selected nodes. This option is
useful in the definition of symmetry conditions.

Example of union ex eY eZ ΘX ΘY ΘZ
initial value free constr. free constr. free constr.
new value free free free constr. constr. constr.
result free constr. free constr. constr. constr.

The six nodal degrees of freedom (𝑒𝑋 , 𝑒𝑌 , 𝑒𝑍 , 𝜃𝑋 , 𝜃𝑌 , 𝜃𝑍 ) are set by a six digit code comprised of f (free)
and c (constrained) symbols.
Each digit corresponds to one degree of freedom component. By default the nodes are considered
free (all digits are f-free symbols). By setting a digit to c (constrained) the corresponding degree of
freedom component is constrained. The default DOF code of a node is [f f f f f f].

 The loads that apply in the direction of a constrained degree of freedom are not taken into
account. Loads in the direction of the constrained degrees of freedom will appear in the table
of unbalanced loads.

 The nodes with DOF different from [f f f f f f] are displayed on the screen in cyan.

Notations: free translation, free rotation about the specified axis.

Degrees of freedom Free displacements Degrees of freedom Free displacements

Truss girders
Truss girder in Truss girder in
X-Y plane X-Z plane

Truss girder in Space truss

Y-Z plane
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 253

Degrees of freedom Free displacements Degrees of freedom Free displacements

Frames
X-Y plane frame X-Z plane frame

Y-Z plane frame

Grillages
Grillage in X-Y plane Grillage in X-Z plane

Grillage in Y-Z plane

Membranes
Membrane in X-Y Membrane in X-Z plane
plane

Membrane in Y-Z
plane

Plates
Plate in X-Y plane Plate in X-Z plane

Plate in Y-Z plane

Symmetry
X-Y X-Z
symmetry plane symmetry plane

Y-Z
symmetry plane

Pick up>> Degrees of freedom can be picked up from another node and assigned to the selected nodes.

4.9.21. References

Lets you define reference points, vectors or axes, and planes. The references determine the orientation
of the local coordinate systems of the finite elements in the 3D space. The local coordinate system of
the elements defined with the references is used to define cross-sectional properties and to interpret
results.
The element properties are defined and the internal forces (Nx, Vy, Vz, Tx, My, Mz for beams, mx, my,
mxy for plates, nx, ny, nxy for membranes, etc.) are computed in that local system.
254

Quick modify: Clicking on the symbol of a reference the Table Browser is invoked displaying the table
of the references. The reference vector and axis can be defined by two points, the reference plane by
three points. When closing the table the reference vectors, and axes are normalized with respect to 1.
 Color codes: x = red, y = yellow, z = green.

The following references can be used:

Automatic Automatic references for truss and beam elements:
references A reference vector is generated and assigned to the truss and beam elements as follows:
If the axis of the element is parallel to the global Z axis the reference vector will be parallel to the global
X axis.
In any other case it will be parallel to the global Z axis.
For arcs: if the arc plane is parallel to the global X-Y plane, automatic reference is perpendicular to it
and points to the +Z direction. If the arc is in a different plane its reference vector is in the arc plane
and points outwards from the arc centerpoint.
Automatic references for rib elements:
If the rib is independent the reference vector will be generated and assigned to the element as for
the beam elements.
If the rib is connected to a surface element, the generation of the reference vector is as follows:
The reference vector will be parallel to the bisector of the local z axes (normal to the surfaces) of the
surfaces that have the rib element attached.
Automatic references for domains and surface elements:
Reference vectors will be generated and assigned to the surfaces as follows:
Local x-axis reference
If the plane of the surface is parallel to the X-Y plane the reference vector for the x local axis will be
generated as a vector parallel to the global X axis.
In any other case, it will be parallel to the intersection line of the surfaces and X-Y plane.
Local z-axis reference
If the plane of the surface element is parallel to the Z axis, the generated reference will be a vector
oriented toward the origin of the global XYZ system. If th global origin is in the plane of the surface,
the reference vector points to the positive half space in the X or Ydirection. In any other case it will be
parallel to the global Z axis.
The Edit / Convert automatic references menu item converts automatic references into reference vec-
tors.

Reference point Reference point is used to define the orientation (local coordinate system) of beam, rib, support, and
spring elements or to define the positive local x and z axes of surface elements.
The reference points are defined (by its coordinates) in the global coordinate system.

 The reference points are displayed on the screen as small red + symbols.

Beams, ribs, and springs:

The reference point and the element’s local x axis defines the local x-z plane. The positive local y and z
axis direction is determined by the right-hand rule.

Reference point Reference point

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 255

Surface elements:
The positive local z axis is oriented toward the half-space in which the reference point is located, and is
perpendicular to the element’s plane. Once the local x-axis is defined local y-axis is determined
according to the right hand-rule.

Reference point Reference point

The local x axis will be oriented in the direction of the reference point.
In the case of a surface element the reference point must be located in the plane of the element.

Reference point

Supports:
In the case of a support element you can use a reference point to define local x axis.
Reference point

Reference vector Lets you define the local x axis for surface, support, and spring elements. Also defines the orientation of
local z coordinate axis of beam, rib and spring elements.

 The reference vectors are displayed on the screen as red arrows.

Surfaces:
The local x axis will be parallel to the reference vector. In the case of a surface element the reference
vector must be parallel to the plane of the element.
The orientation of local z-axis can also be defined by a reference vector.
256

Supports:
In the case of a support element you can use a reference vector to define local x axis.

Beams, ribs, and springs:

The reference vector and the element’s local x axis defines the local x-z plane.
The positive local y and z axis direction is determined by the right-hand rule.

Reference vector
Reference vector

Reference axis Reference axis is used to define the local x-axis of surface elements, that will be oriented towards the
reference axis. The reference axis must not include element centerpoint.

 The reference axises are displayed on the screen as red arrows.

Reference plane Reference plane is used to define the local x axis of surface elements, that will be parallel to the
intersection line of the reference plane and the plane of the element. The reference plane must not be
parallel to the plane of the element.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 257

Reference angle Rotation of truss / beam / rib cross-sections is made easy by the reference angle. The automatic local
coordinate system (and the cross-section) can be rotated around the element axis by a custom angle.
If the element is parallel to the global Z direction, the angle is relative to the global X axis. In any other
case the angle is relative to the global Z axis.

 The reference plane is displayed on the screen as a red triangle.

 Unused references can be deleted in the Table Browser by selecting References and choosing
Edit / Delete unused references from the menu.

4.9.22. Creating model framework from an architectural model

Creating model framework requires IFC

module.

This icon starts the conversion operation of the

architectural model if previously an IFC file (*.IFC)
was loaded by File / Import as a background
layer. See... 3.1.6.7 Import

Display Select architectural project stories and element types you want to be displayed.

 Use the built-in Filter to enhance selection.

If you create model framework or delete objects and nothing is selected the Selection Toolbar
appears. Click the Property Filter icon to select beams and columns within a certain range of section
size according to their minimum side length or select walls or slabs within a certain range of thickness.
If you want to restore the whole range click the button at left bottom.
If the Only objects without static model is checked only elements not having static model will be
selected.
Refresh all Makes the architectural model visible in all windows.
Import footings If activated, footings in the IFC file are also processed.

 Deleting an architectural object having a static model will not delete its associated static model.

Create Model Model framework will be created from selected layer elements. Columns will be reduced to their axis,
Framework walls, slabs and roofs will be reduced to their center plane. Framework nodes and lines become part
of the AxisVM model and are independent of the background layer.
When importing ifc files, it is not always possible to detect the statical frames of objects. Those objects
whose statical frame detection failed, are drawn to the screen with a dashed line. User now has many
possibilites to create, modify or delete statical model though:

Automated detection of statical frame: in as much as the automated detection method has
been successful while importing, the program can use those precalculated data to create
statical frame. More than one item can be selected for this operation.
Deleting selected ifc objects: with this function user can delete the selected ifc objects from
the model. It is important to note, though, that if we delete objects, whose statical
frame has been created before, this frame will not be deleted with the object. More
than one item can be selected for this operation.
258

Clipping beam-like objects by clipping plane: the selected objects are clipped by the plane
the user has supplied by giving 3 points. Then the algorithm defines the sections to all the
selected elements, and calculates their normals and centres of gravity. These values give us
lines imprinting the selected bodies. The resulting segments shall than be treated as statical
frames of the objects, and the calculated polygons as their cross-sections. More than one
item can be selected for this operation.
Handling beam-like objects by supplying their middle lines: user must support two points
that will form a line. This line then is imprinted to the selected bodies, and the resulting
segments will serve as the middle lines of the objects. Taking the middle points of these
segments and their direction vectors, clipping planes can be obtained. At the final step, the
segments are moved to the centres of gravity of the cross-sections. More than one item
can be selected for this operation.
Handling beam-like objects by supplying their middle lines and position of the cross-section:
almost the same like the previous operation, except for that here, the position of the cross-
section must be given by the user, too. Then the center line of the selected body is modified
in a way, that the startpoint is left unchanged, and the endpoint is the mirage of the
startpoint to the cross section. Only one item can be selected for this operation.

Handling circular beam-like elements: user must supply an arc by 3 points. Then the algo-
rithm calculates the intersections of this arc and the selected body. If more than 2 intersec-
tions are obtained, then it takes the two extremes. The middle point of the resulting arc and
the normal of the arc provide a clipping plane that the algorithm uses to get the cross-
section. More than one item can be selected for this operation.
Clipping plates by clipping plane: the selected domains are clipped by the plane given by 3
points, and the resulting polygons will be the statical frames of the objects. More than one
item can be selected for this operation.

Clipping cylindrical swept bodies by a clipping cylinder: the user must supply a cylinder that
the algorithm will use for clipping. This cylinder is adjusted in a two step operation. First, an
arc is obtained by 3 points. Secondly, this circular arc is offsetted when moving the cursor.
This resulting arc shall serve as the base of the cylinder. Its height is calculated automatically
from the geometric parameters of the selected body. Finally, the statical frame is the result
of the intersection of the cylinder and the selected body. Only one item can be selected
for this operation.
In all editing operations, user is given a real-time visual feedback about the current statical frame, thus
it is possible to edit the correct statical model of the object. Sometimes some preediting can be
necessarry, though. An optional filter is given to filter out ifc objects that already have statical models
calculated. However, if we edit an object with an existing statical model, the result of the operation will
overwrite the former statical frame.
Parts will automatically be created for levels and object types and the elements created for the static
model will be included in the appropriate parts.
Hinged wall connections can be modeled using edge hinges when creating a model framework from
the architectural model.
If the Material field is set to Automatic, and the IFC file includes material data and assigments the
model will import them.
You can assign properties to the selected architectural objects as follows:
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 259

Slab Floors can be defined as plates or shells. Assign a

material and a thickness. For layered floors, the
thickness of the layers will appear in the layer list.
Load from Material You can select the layers that you want to take into
Library account.

Wall Walls can be defined as membranes or shells. Assign

a material and a thickness. For layered walls you can
choose to apply the thickness of the load bearing
layer, the total thickness or a custom value.

Apply bottom support:

You can automatically assign a support to the
bottom edge of the selected walls.

Convert walls to supports: You can convert wall objects to supports by enabling this checkbox.
The support will be placed at the top edge of the corresponding wall. The support stiffness will be
computed based on the top and bottom end releases.

Column Column objects are always converted to beam

elements. Assign a material and a cross-section.
If Auto is selected the cross-section is created based
on the geometrical description of the architectural
object.

You can assign a support to the bottom of the

column.

Graphical
Cross Section
Editor
Cross-section
Library

Convert columns to supports: The selected column objects can be converted to supports. Support
stiffness is established based on the end releases. Supports will be placed at the top of the column.
260

Beam Beam objects are always converted to beam

elements. Assign a material and the cross-section.
If Auto is selected the cross-section is created based
on the geometrical description of the architectural
object.

Roof Roof objects are always converted to shell elements.

Assign a material and a cross-section.
For layered roofs, the thickness of layers will appear
in the layer list.

You can select the layers that you want to take into
account.

4.9.23. Modify

Lets you modify the definition of the selected elements.

1. Holding the [Shift] key down, select the elements to modify. You can use the Selection icon as
well.
2. Click the element’s icon on the Elements Toolbar.
3. In the element’s dialog window check the properties you want to modify. Property fields show
the common value in selection. If selected elements have different values the field is empty.
4. Modify the respective properties as desired.
5. Click the OK button to apply the modifications and exit the dialog window.

 In fact, the modification is similar to the element definition, but does not assign properties to
undefined geometrical elements and allows access to a specific property without altering
others. You can switch to the element definition radio button to define all properties of all the
selected elements, lines or surfaces.
Immediate mode If the Geometry or Elements tab is active click a finite element to modify its properties. If more finite
elements have been selected they can be immediately modified by clicking one of them. If you click
an element which is not selected, selection disappears and you can modify the element you clicked. If
you click on a node its nodal degrees of freedom can be edited immediately.
You can also modify the properties using of Property Editor.
See... 3.6.1 Property Editor
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 261

4.9.24. Delete
[Del] See... 3.2.9 Delete

4.10. Loads

Lets you apply various static loads for static, dynamic and buckling analysis, and define concentrated
masses for vibration analysis.

4.10.1. Load cases, load groups

Load Case Lets you set the current, create new, and modify or delete existing load cases. Any load you create will
be stored in the current load case. In the professional version the number of load cases is not limited.
In the standard version a maximum of 99 cases can be created. Load groups can also be created from
the different load cases.

New Case You must assign a different name to each case. These are the possible
types of load cases that you can choose from when you want to create a
new load case:

1. Static
The static load case can be applied to static, vibration, and buckling analysis. In case of vibration
analysis, the loads can also be taken into account as masses.
The load case can be included into a load group. When calculating the critical load combination,
the load case will be taken into account according to the parameters of the load group to which it
belongs.
262

 Critical combination can be determined only from the results of a linear static analysis.
2. Influence line
Lets you apply a relative displacement load to obtain the influence line of a result component, of a
truss or beam element.

 When the influence line load case type is selected you can apply only the influence line load.

3. Moving load
In this type of load case only moving (line or surface) loads can be defined. When defining a mov-
ing load a group of new load cases will be created. The number of these load cases is equal to the
number of steps specified in the moving load definition dialog. Their name is created automatically
like MOV_xx. As they get into a load group the most unfavorable effect of the moving load can be
checked displaying the result of the critical combination. These auto-created load cases can be
moved together only and only into another moving load group.
If more than one moving load is applied in the same load case the number of steps (and auto-
created load cases) will be equal to the maximum number of steps specified. If the maximum num-
ber of steps is k, and another moving load has i steps (i < k), then this load will remain at the end of
the path in steps i+1, i+2, …, k.
See details... 4.10.27 Moving loads

 Moving load cases can be placed only in moving load groups. Static loads can also be defined in
moving load cases. They will be present in all steps but only in moving load cases.
4. Seismic (SE1 module is required)
When selecting seismic load case type you can specify the parameters for calculation of
earthquake loads. Prior to creating an seismic load case, you must perform a vibration analysis.
Based on the mode shapes, and on the structural masses, AxisVM generates seismic loads case, in
a k+2 number, where k is the number of available smallest frequencies. The two additional cases
corresponds to the signs +, and -, that contain the critical combinations. See details... 4.10.23
Seismic loads – SE1 module

 When selecting seismic load case the only icon available on the Toolbar will be Seismic para-
meters.
5. Pushover (SE2 module is required)
When selecting pushover load case type you can specify parameters for generating load distribu-
tions that can be used in pushover analyses. Prior to creating a pushover load case, you must per-
form vibration analysis. Based on specified mode shapes AxisVM generates nodal forces on each
node of the model. A total of four load cases are generated initially. They represent a uniform (U)
and a modal (M) distribution in the direction of each of the horizontal axes (X and Y by default). The
uniform load distribution option generates nodal forces proportional to the masses assigned to
each node in the model. The modal load distribution uses the mode shape weighed by the masses
at each node to generate the nodal force distribution. In both cases the sum of forces generated is
1 kN in the same horizontal direction.
See details… 4.10.24 Pushover loads – SE2 module

 When selecting pushover load case the only icon available on the Toolbar will be Pushover
parameters.
6. Global imperfection
If an imperfection load case is created it is automatically placed into an imperfection load group
which can contain only imperfection load cases. This load group has no parameters and is automat-
ically deleted if their load cases are deleted. Imperfection load cases can be used in nonlinear analy-
sis with geometric nonlinearity. When generating critical ULS load combinations in the load combi-
nation table imperfection load cases can be included. Load combinations including an imperfection
load case require nonlinear analysis with geometric nonlinearity.
See details … 4.10.25 Global imperfection

 Imperfection load cases does not contribute to critical combinations of linear analysis results.

7. Tensioning (PS1 module is required)

If tensioning calculation according to the current design code is supported, tensioning load cases
can be created. These load cases always get into a tensioning load group. After defining a load case
with the name name, two load cases will be created. name-T0 will contain the equivalent load calcu-
lated for the end of tensioning process, name-TI will contain long term values of the equivalent
load. Any of these load cases can be selected to define tensioning. After definition just loads for
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 263

name-T0 will be calculated as static analysis results are required to determine the long term equiva-
lent loads. See details… 4.10.26 Tensioning - PS1 module

 When selecting tensioning load case the only icon available on the Toolbar will be Tensioning.

8. Dynamic load case (DYN module is required)

After defining a dynamic load case and selecting it the Loads tab will allow definition of dynamic
loads and nodal acceleration.
See details…4.10.28 Dynamic loads (for time-history analysis) – DYN module

 Dynamic load cases cannot be included in load groups and load combinations. Loads within
dynamic load cases will be applied only in Dynamic analysis.
9. Snow load cases (SWG module is required)
AxisVM can calculate and apply snow loads on the structure. The limits of automatic snow load
generation in the program are explained in 4.10.13 Snow load – SWG module.
Snow loads can be placed on flat load panels in arbitrary planes. As a first step a temporary snow
load case is created in the snow load group and its name can be set. If the design code requires
verification for exceptional snow load, an exceptional snow load case is also created in an excep-
tional snow load group (except for exceptional snow loads as per Annex B of Eurocode 1-3). After
defining load panels and setting the snow load parameters the program replaces the temporary
load case with automatically generated snow load cases.
The undrifted load case receives a UD suffix. Drifted load cases receive a D suffix with 2-4 extra
characters. These characters indicate the wind direction (X+, X–, Y+, Y–). Besides winds parallel to
the coordinate axes, winds in 45°+n*90° directions (where n = 0, 1, 2, 3) are also taken into account
and are indicated by the quadrant where the wind speed vector points to. X+Y– refers to a wind in
the 315° direction for example (0° being defined by the positive X axis, and angles measured coun-
terclockwise).
Only the necessary load cases are created by the algorithm, therefore the number of load cases and
their type depends on the type of structure under consideration and the snow load parameters giv-
en by the user. Load parameters shall be defined after closing the Load Cases Dialogue by clicking
on the Snow Load icon in the Toolbar. Before this step it is recommended to define load panels of
the roof using the Load Panels icon in the Toolbar.
For details of snow load generation see… 4.10.13 Snow load – SWG module.

 If a snow load case is selected only two buttons are enabled on the Loads toolbar. These are the
the load panel and snow load definition.
10. Wind load cases (SWG module is required)
During parametric definition of wind loads it is necessary define one or more substructures exposed
to wind. If Separate load cases for each substructure is checked wind loads of different substructures
will be generated into different load cases. Otherwise load cases will contain wind loads for more
substructures.
Calculated wind loads are reliable only for certain building types as described in the design code. It
is recommended to use these automatic methods only for geometries within the limits explained in
detail at 4.10.14 Wind load – SWG module. Wind loads can be placed on flat load panels in arbitrary
planes. As a first step a temporary wind load case is created in the wind load group and the name
of the wind load case can be set. After defining load panels and setting the wind load parameters
the program replaces the temporary load case with automatically generated wind load cases.
Wind load cases are generated with a name code corresponding to the loading situation.
The first two characters after the name of the load case describe the wind direction (X+, X–, Y+, Y–).
The logic behind this notation is the same as for snow loads. The next one or two characters de-
note the type of wind action.
P and S denote pressure and suction, respectively. For pitched roofs the design code requires to
check all possible combinations of wind actions on the two sides of the roof. Therefore, for pitched
roofs Pp, Ps, Sp and Ss load cases are created. Here the first character refers to the windswept side,
the second one refers to the sheltered side. For special torsion actions T+ and T– are used referring
to the two different torsion directions.
The last character denotes the type of internal action. The internal wind actions are ignored for O; P
stands for internal pressure, S stands for internal suction. These load cases are needed only if no
further information is available on internal pressure so a positive and a negative critical value must
be used as an approximation on the conservative side. If the last character is C, the load case was
created based on a user-defined μ value which depends on the layout of openings of the structure.
264

If a C load case is created for a given direction P and S load cases are not required, hence not creat-
ed.
Only the necessary load cases are created by the algorithm, therefore the number of load cases and
their type depends on the type of structure under consideration and the wind load parameters giv-
en by the user. Load parameters shall be defined after closing the Load Cases Dialouge by clicking
on the Wind Load icon in the Toolbar. Before this step it is recommended to define load panels of
the building walls and roof using the Load Panels icon in the Toolbar.
For details of wind load definition see… 4.10.14 Wind load – SWG module.

 If a wind load case is selected only two buttons are enabled on the Loads toolbar. These are the
the load panel and wind load definition.
11. Fire load cases (SD8 or TD8 module is required)
Fire effects can be assigned to steel and timber line elements.
Fire load groups contain only fire load cases. This load group has no parameters and is automatically
deleted if their load cases are deleted. In the process of finding critical combinations AxisVM takes
into account fire load cases only in accidental load combinations. However, it is also possible to
consider fire load cases in user specified load combinations.
The definition of fire effects is discussed in 4.10.29 Fire effect on steel elements – SD8 module and
4.10.30 Fire effect on timber elements – TD8 module
 If a fire load case is selected only the Fire effect on steel/timber elements button is enabled on
the Loads toolbar.

Load-duration Timber design module requires information on the load duration. So if a timber material has been
class defined in the model load case duration class can be entered. (Permanent: > 10 years; Long term: 6
months–10 years; Medium term: 1 week–6 months; Short term: < 1 week; Instantaneous; Undefined)

Duplicate Lets you make a copy of the selected load case under another name. You must specify the new name,
and a factor that will multiply the loads while copying. The factor can be a negative number as well.

 Selected loads can be copied or moved to another load case by changing load case during the
copy or move process.

Conversion Generated snow or wind load cases can be converted to regular load cases by clicking the Conversion
button. All load cases of the selected type will be converted. After conversion converted loads and
load cases can be deleted and modified.

Delete Lets you delete the selected load case.

You can change the current load current case by selecting from the drop
down list near the load case icon. Selection can be moved using the up and
down arrow keys. This is the best way to overview moving load cases.

 The name of the selected load case will appear in the Info window and
the loads you define will get to this load case.

In case of choosing Tensioning load case only the Tensioning icon will be
active on the toolbar.
Click on it then select the proper beam or rib elements, so the Tensioning
dialog will appear.
See... 4.10.26 Tensioning - PS1 module

Click right mouse button over the list, select Order of load cases to get to a dialog setting the load case
order. This dialog is also available in the Table Browser (Format / Order of load cases).

Load Groups Load groups are used when generating of critical (design) values of the results.
New Group Lets you define a new load group. You must specify the name and the type (permanent, incidental,
exceptional) of the load group, and the corresponding factors according to the current design code.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 265

Click on these buttons to select from the list of recommended values according to the current design
code.
Later you can specify which load cases belong to a specific load group. Clicking any icon within the
New Group group box will create a new group in the tree and you can specify a name for it. Existing
load group names will be rejected. After creating a load group you have to specify the value of its
paremeters (like the partial factor, dynamic factor, simultaneity factor, etc.). A load case can be
assigned to a load group by choosing a group from the dropdown list or dragging the load case
under a load group in the tree. See... 4.10.2 Load combinations
The default behaviour of new load cases can be set in Settings / Preferences / Load group.
See… 3.3.11 Preferences

Critical load group Critical combinations are determined according to the load groups. Certain exclusive loading situa-
combinations tions (like snow and exceptional snow) are detected (so critical combinations do not include both
snow and exclusive snow loads). If it is required to ensure exclusivity between load groups, then it is
possible to create critical load group combinations individually. These combinations can be defined in
the Table browser at Critical load group combinations.

The rows in the Table browser can have different functions: user can specify load group combinations
or can connect two or more load groups that are considered as simultaneous load groups in combi-
nations. The last cell in each row indicates the function of the row. Connection between load groups
can be specified by checking the last cell named ’Linking of groups’. If user intends to create a load
group combination, this cell should be leaved empty.
When specifying load group combinations, each line describes a possible combination of load groups.
Load cases in checked load groups will be combined in critical combinations. The table contains only
one line by default where all load groups are checked. New lines can be added by clicking the + but-
ton and checkbox states in existing lines can be changed but permanent load groups cannot be
turned off.
By connecting load groups, user can set which load groups are simultaneous. Accordingly, these
groups can be leading or accompanying variable actions in combinations, but the case is excluded
when a load group is leading while the other one is accompanying action. The advantage of this fea-
ture is that coherent load cases can be placed in separate load groups: different safety and combina-
tion factors can be assigned to each load group and load groups can contain different type of load
cases (e.g. one group contains only mutually exclusive load cases while the other has simultaneous
load cases). Connection can be specified among several load groups. Definition of more than one
connection rule is also possible, however, if there is overlapping between rows (the set group contains
a load case that has been already selected in an other linked group), the program merges them to-
gether. The defined connections are valid for all combinations, except when the combination rule and
a linking of groups are contradictory (e.g. if one of the combination rule does not include all the ele-
ments of the connected group). In this case the program ignores all the elements of the connected
group in that combination.
The connected groups are indicated in the Load cases and load groups window as follows: the same
background color shows the load groups (and load cases belonging to them) that are connected.
266

The program finds the extreme values according to the possible combinations.
The possible combinations can be automatically generated based on the defined combination rules in
the Table browser, at Custom load combinations. This may result a significiant number of combina-
tions depending on the number of load groups and cases. In linear analysis it is not necessary to gen-
erate combinations individually, the software automatically calculates extreme values based on the
combination rules.

The following load groups are allowed depending on the design code:
Permanent
Includes dead load, permanent features on the structure...

Include all load cases in combinations

All load cases from the group will be taken into account in all load combinations with their upper
or lower partial factor.

Include the most unfavourable load case only

Only the most unfavourable load case will be taken into account from the load group with its
upper or lower partial factor.
Incidental
Includes live load, wind load, snow load, crane runway load...
Simultaneous load cases
Any number of load cases from the group can act simultaneously in critical combinations.

Mutually exclusive load cases

In a critical load combination only one load case from the group will be taken into account at
one time.

Exceptional
Includes earthquake, support settlements, explosion, collision... Only one load case from the
group will be taken into account in a load combination at one time. That load case must have the
simultaneity factor of .
Moving load group
Auto-created load cases for the moving loads in a moving load case get into a moving load
group.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 267

Tensioning load group (if tensioning can be calculated according to the current design code)
Tensioning load group is handled as a permanent load group. It can contain only tensioning load
cases. Both load cases for the same tensioning (name-T0 and name-TI) cannot be included in any
load combination.
Seismic load group (Eurocode, SIA 26x, DIN 1045-1, STAS and Italian code)
Only one load case from the group will be taken into account in a load combination at one time.
That load case must have the simultaneity factor of α = 0.
Fire load case (Eurocode)
Fire load groups contain only fire load cases. Load cases can be simultaneous or mutually exclusive.
One line element can have only one fire effect in simultaneous load cases.

Critical Critical combinations are determined according to the load groups. Certain exclusive loading situa-
load group tions (like snow and exceptional snow) are detected (so critical combinations do not include both
combinations snow and exclusive snow loads). If it is required to ensure exclusivity between load groups it is possi-
ble to control this through critical load group combinations.
Go to the Table Browser and find Critical load group combinations.

Each line describes a possible combination of load groups. Load cases in checked load groups will be
combined in critical combinations.
By default the table contains only one line where all load groups are checked. New lines can be added
by clicking the + button and check box states in existing lines can be changed but permanent load
groups cannot be turned off.
The program finds the extreme values according to the possible combinations.

Load types The following loads can be applied to the elements:

Load Element

Concentrated node, beam

Line (distributed) beam, rib, plate, membrane, shell
Edge (distributed) plate, membrane, shell
Dead load truss, beam, rib, plate, membrane, shell
Temperature truss, beam, rib, plate, membrane, shell
Fault in length truss, beam
Tension/Compression truss, beam
Forced support displacement support
Fluid plate, shell
Seismic node
Influence line truss, beam
Tensioning beam,rib
Moving beam, rib, plate, shell
Snow beam, rib, plate, shell
Wind beam, rib, plate, shell
Fire beam, rib, truss
268

4.10.2. Load combinations

Lets you define load combinations of the defined load cases. You can specify a factor for each load
case in a load combination.
The results of a load combination will be computed as a linear combination of the load cases taking
into account the specified load case factors. A zero factor means that the respective load case does
not participate in the load combination. To find the most unfavourable of the custom combinations
defined here create an envelope for the combinations.
Load combinations can be listed, defined and deleted by load cases or by load groups (the second
option is easier to overview).
In the former case a factor must be entered for each load case.
In the latter a factor must be entered for each load group. The actual load combinations will be
created using these factors and according to the load group properties (e.g. if the load cases within
the load groups are exclusive or not. See the previous chapter for details). Combining load groups
with many load cases may result in huge number of individual load combinations.

 It is not necessary to create load combinations to determine the critical combination.

If load groups are defined and load cases are placed within load groups the program automatically
finds the critical combination in each node of the structure without actually creating the combinations.
Inserts a load combination table to the current report.

Pastes the load combinations collected on the Clipboard.

When finding minimum and maximum values or displaying the results for an individual element the
user can add the actual critical combination to a list stored on the Clipboard (see… 6.1.1 Minimum and
maximum values). This is the icon to paste these combinations into the table.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 269

Calculates all critical combinations based on load groups and transfers them into the load
combination table.

The option Include imperfctions is available only if the model contains an imperfection load group.

If Replace critical combinations is checked all previously generated critical combinations will be deleted
and replaced with the new combinations. If Replace only combinations of the same type is checked only
combinations from the selected ULS/SLS combination types will be replaced.

Checking Create load combinations with descriptive names changes the naming convention, so gener-
ated combination names will be the description of the combination (like 1.1*ST1+0.9*ST2) instead of
Co. #1, Co. #2, etc.

 You can also define load combinations after you have completed a linear static analysis. The
postprocessor computes the results of these load combinations when required
In case of nonlinear static analysis, AxisVM first generates the combination case, and then
performs the analysis (one load combination at a time).

Automatic load The program investigates all possible combinations depending on the load group parameters and the
combination equations of the current design code.
The minimum and maximum result values of these combinations are selected as critical (design)
values. Critical combinations for Eurocode, SIA26x, STAS, DIN, Italian code are assembled according to
the following schemes:
270

Critical combinations of internal forces (ULS)

ULS1 - Permanent and Incidental

Eurocode AxisVM uses the combination formulas below according to EN 1990:2005 (6.10.a) and (6.10.b). These
formulas result in smaller forces and displacements making the design more economical.

∑ 𝛾𝐺,𝑗 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 𝛾𝑃 𝑃 + 𝛾𝑄,1 𝛹0,1 𝑄𝑘,1 + ∑ 𝛾𝑄,𝑖 𝛹0,𝑖 𝑄𝑘,𝑖

𝑗≥1 𝑖>1 6.10. 𝑎
max
∑ 𝜉𝑗 𝛾𝐺,𝑗 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 𝛾𝑃 𝑃 + 𝛾𝑄,1 𝑄𝑘,1 + ∑ 𝛾𝑄,𝑖 𝛹0,𝑖 𝑄𝑘,𝑖 6.10. 𝑏
{ 𝑗≥1 𝑖>1 }

In certain countries (e.g. Austria) the national annex does not allow to use (6.10.a) and (6.10.b). In this
case the following formula is used:

Eurocode(A), ∑ 𝛾𝐺,𝑗 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 𝛾𝑃 𝑃 + 𝛾𝑄,1 𝑄𝑘,1 + ∑ 𝛾𝑄,𝑖 𝛹0,𝑖 𝑄𝑘,𝑖

DIN, SIA26x, 𝑗≥1 𝑖>1
Italian code

Partial factors for geotechnical limit states verification (GEO)

In case of geotechnical combinations, the program uses the above formulae, as well. The partial fac-
tors for actions are selected from the groups of values A1 and A2, which are categorized according to
annex A of EN 1997-1.

Set
Action Symbol
A1 A2
Permanent unfavourable 1,35 1,0
𝛾𝐺
favourable 1,0 1,0
Variable unfavourable 1,5 1,3
𝛾𝑄
favourable 0 0

Remark: the values may be specified differently by the National Annex. The specifications of the selec-
ted NA are considered.

Partial factors for equilibrium limit state (EQU) verification

In case of verification of static equilibrium, the following partial factors are considered (annex A of EN
1997-1):

Action Symbol Value

Permanent unfavourable (destabilising) 𝛾𝐺;𝑑𝑠𝑡 1,1

favourable (stabilising) 𝛾𝐺;𝑠𝑡𝑏 0,9
Variable unfavourable (destabilising) 𝛾𝑄;𝑑𝑠𝑡 1,5
favourable (stabilising) 𝛾𝑄;𝑠𝑡𝑏 0
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 271

ULS 2 - Seismic

Eurocode, SIA26x ∑ 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 𝑃𝑘 + 𝐴𝐸𝑑 + ∑ 𝛹2,𝑖 𝑄𝑘,𝑖

𝑗≥1 𝑖≥1

Italian code ∑ 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 𝑃 + 𝐸 + ∑ 𝛹2,𝑖 𝑄𝑘,𝑖

𝑗≥1 𝑖≥1

DIN ∑ 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 𝐴𝐸𝑑 + ∑ 𝛹2,𝑖 𝑄𝑘,𝑖

𝑗≥1 𝑖≥1

ULS 3 - Exceptional
Eurocode ∑ 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 𝑃𝑘 + 𝐴𝑑 + Ψ1,1 𝑄𝑘,1 ∑ 𝛹2,𝑖 𝑄𝑘,𝑖
and other codes 𝑗≥1 𝑖≠1

SIA26x ∑ 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 𝑃𝑘 + 𝐴𝑑 + Ψ2,1 𝑄𝑘,1 ∑ 𝛹2,𝑖 𝑄𝑘,𝑖

𝑗≥1 𝑖≠1

Critical combinations of displacements (SLS)

SLS 1 - Characteristic
Eurocode ∑ 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 𝑃𝑘 + 𝑄𝑘,1 + ∑ 𝛹0,𝑖 𝑄𝑘,𝑖
and other codes 𝑗≥1 𝑖≠1

SLS 2 – Frequent
Eurocode ∑ 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 𝑃𝑘 + Ψ1,1 𝑄𝑘,1 ∑ 𝛹2,𝑖 𝑄𝑘,𝑖
and other codes 𝑗≥1 𝑖≠1

SLS 3 - Quasipermanent
Eurocode ∑ 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 𝑃𝑘 + ∑ 𝛹2,𝑖 𝑄𝑘,𝑖
and other codes 𝑗≥1 𝑖≥1

STAS, Eurocode(RO) ∑ 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.6𝛾𝐼 𝐴𝐸𝑘 + ∑ 𝛹2,𝑖 𝑄𝑘,𝑖

𝑗≥1 𝑖≥1

Critical load combination method for internal forces and for displacements are selected automatically.
Critical load combination method for displacements depends on the type of structure you are
modeling. Click Result display parameters on the Static toolbar to set the critical combination formula.

Seismic loads: see above at Internal forces.

Italian code Combination of seismic loads with other load types: ∑𝐺𝐾 + 𝛾𝐼 ⋅ 𝐸 + ∑Ψ𝑗𝑖 𝑄𝐾𝑖

Where: 𝛾_𝐼 importance factor

𝐸 seismic load
𝐺𝐾 characteristic value of permanent loads
𝑄𝐾𝑖 characteristic value of variable loads
Ψ𝑗𝑖 Ψ2𝑖 (ULS) combination factor for quasipermanent 𝑄𝑖
Ψ0𝑖 (DLS) combination factor for rare 𝑄𝑖
272

4.10.3. Nodal loads

Lets you apply forces / moments to the

selected nodes. You must specify the
values of the load components (FX, FY,
FZ, MX, MY, MZ) in the global
coordinate system. For a referential
load (where the direction is given by
the reference) enter an Fx and an Mx
component.
If you apply a nodal load to a node that
is already loaded, you can overwrite or
add it to the existing load.

The positive directions are according to the positive directions of global coordinate axes.
Modify nodal loads You can select, move, copy or modify the load independently of the node.
Modify position 1. Select the loads you want to move together.
2. Grab any of them by pressing the left mouse button.
3. Move them to their new position.
4. Click the left mouse button or use a command button. (Enter or Space).
Modify value 1. Select the load.
2. Click the Nodal Load icon on the toolbar.
3. Change the values
Nodal loads can be moved onto a beam, a rib or a domain.
Signs of the load values are calculated according to the right hand rule.

 Load components applied in the direction of a constrained degree of freedom will be not taken
into account in the analysis.

 The forces are displayed on the screen as yellow arrows, the moments as green double arrows.

4.10.4. Concentrated load on beam

Lets you apply concentrated forces /

moments to the selected beam or rib
elements. You must specify the values
of the load components (Fx, Fy, Fz,
Mx, My, Mz ) in the local or global
coordinate system. For a referential
load (where the direction is given by
the reference) enter an Fx and an Mx
component.
The reference can be selected from
the list or picked up from the view (if
display of references is activated,
see… 2.16.18 Display options) clicking
on the Reference>> button.
If you apply a concentrated load to a
node that is already loaded, you can
overwrite or add it to the existing
load.
Concentrated loads can be selected, moved, copied, modified independently of the beam. Modify load
values like in case of nodal loads
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 273

The positive directions are in accord with the positive directions of the local or global coordinate axes.

 If only some part of the structural member is selected (i.e. certain finite elements) then loads
will be interpreted in the local system of finite elements. In this case the same load will be app-
lied to all selected finite elements.

 The forces are displayed on the screen as yellow arrows, the moments as green double arrows.
Interpretation of In case of eccentric ribs, the actual axis of the rib is not the same as the axis that appears in the finite
the loads of element model: the rib can be assigned to a line of a domain midplane or to an independent line
eccentric ribs considering the eccentricity set by the user. Nodal load can only be assigned to this line element, not
to the actual axis of the rib. The given load is interpreted according to this functioning, the bending
moment of eccentric loads are also considered in the calculation.
The following figure shows two examples, where the bending moment of Fx,d component is also taken
into account using the formula 𝑀𝑦,𝑎 = 𝐹𝑥,𝑑 ⋅ 𝑒, in which “e” is the eccentricity of the rib. Index “d”
indicates the load set by the user, index “a” refers to the actual point of the load.

The figure above shows a bottom rib (the upper plane of the rib and the slab is the same) with variable
cross-section, where the eccentricity of the rib is automatically adjusted to the upper plane of the
domain.

The figure shows a customized rib with variable cross section, where the eccentricity of the endpoints
are uniquely defined.

4.10.5. Point load on domain or load panel

Applies a point (concentrated) load at the location of the cursor if it is over a domain or a load panel.
You can also enter the location of the load by its coordinates. Place loads by clicking the left mouse
button or pressing any of the command buttons.
See... 4.7.2 Entering coordinates numerically
The direction of the load can be:
Global (with respect to the global coordinate system)
Local (with respect to the local (element) coordinate system)
Reference (with respect to a reference)
274

Modify point load You can modify the location and value (intensity) of the load:
on domain

Modify position 1. Select the load with the cursor (a load symbol appears beside the cursor).
2. Keep left mouse button depressed.
3. Move the mouse or enter the relative coordinates to move the load to a new location.
4. Release left mouse button to set the load in its new location.

Modify value 1. Select the load with the cursor.

2. Click the left mouse button.
3. Enter the new load values in the dialog.
4. Click on the Modify button to apply the changes and close the window.
The load value can also be changed in the Table Browser.

 Modifying domain mesh leaves the concentrated loads (applied on the domains) unchanged.

4.10.6. Distributed line load on beam/rib

Lets you apply constant or linearly

distributed forces and torque to the
selected beam / rib elements. You
can apply multiple distributed loads
to a beam/rib in the same load
case.

Line loads can be selected, moved,

copied, modified independently of
the beam or rib. Modify load values
like in case of nodal loads.

If only some part of the structural

member is selected (i.e. certain
finite elements) then loads will be
interpreted in the local system of
finite elements. In this case the
same load will be applied to all
selected finite elements.

You must specify the distribution, the location and the values of the load components in the local or
global coordinate system as follows:
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 275

Loads in local coordinate system Loads in global coordinate system

You have to specify the following parameters:

Type
segment trapezoid triangle
Position By length: between d1 and d2 [m], By ratio: between a1 and a2
Starting location d1[m] or a1 in the local coordinate system
Starting value px1, py1, pz1 [kN/m] forces, mTOR1 [kNm/m] torque
End location d2[m] or a2 in the local coordinate system
End value px2, py2, pz2 [kN/m] forces, mTOR2 [kNm/m] torque
By ratio: 0  x1  x2  1, By length: 0  x1  x2  L, where L [m] is the length of the element
If the load is projective, the value of the load that is applied to the beam/rib is p*sin α, where α is the
angle of the load direction and the beam/rib axis.

Interpretation of Line loads of an eccentric ribs are interpreted according to the instructions described in section 4.10.4
the loads of Concentrated load on beam. In the program, the loads can only be specified concerning to the displayed
eccentric ribs axis of the rib (it is not the actual axis of the rib), but in the calculation the eccentric effects of these
loads are also considered with the set eccentricity.

4.10.7. Edge load

Lets you apply distributed (constant)

loads to the selected edges of the
selected surface elements.
If more than two finite elements are
connected to the edge or they have
different local coordinate systems you
have to select both the edge and the
finite element when you specify the local
load. Load will be defined in the local
system of the selected element.
276

Element Load in local directions Load in global directions

(in local coordinate system) (in global coordinate system)

- -
x

Membrane

- -
y

- -
Plate z

X
x

Shell Y
y

Z
z

In the case of shell elements, the load that is applied in global coordinate directions can have a
projective distribution. If the load p is projective, the value of the load that is applied to the shell is p
cos  , where  is the angle of the load direction and the element plane normal.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 277

4.10.8. Domain / Load panel line load

Applies a uniform or linear distributed line load over a domain or a load panel.

The direction of the load can be global projective, global along element, edge
relative or surface relative.
mx is always the torsional moment (around the application line of the load). Set
load components and placement method then draw the load (or click the lines)
to place it.
In case of Edge relative mode, the local coordinate system of the line load follows the direction of the
specified edge (line, arc or polyline). The x axis is always the axis of the specified line pointing towards
the drawing direction. The local z axis of the load is parallel with the local z axis of the domain. When
placing a line load on an existing edge of the model, always check the direction of the resulting load,
as the drawing direction of the selected line cannot be determined from node numbers.
If the line load is defined as Surface relative, then the local coordinate system of the load (x, y and z
axes) follows the local coordinate system of the domain

Line load between

two points

Line load along a

polyline

Line load along a rectangle

Line load along a rotated rectangle

Line load along an arc defined by its centerpoint and two points

Line load along an arc defined by three points

278

Line load along an arc polygon defined by its centerpoint and two points

Line load along an arc polygon defined by three points

Line load along a complex polygon. Complex polygons can contain arcs.

During definition of a complex polygon a pet palette appears with several geometry functions. These
are: drawing a line, drawing a line as a tangent of an arc, drawing an arc with centerpoint, drawing an
with a midpoint, drawing an arc with the tangent of the previous polygon segment, drawing an arc
with a given tangent, picking up an existing line.

Distributed line load on an existing line or arc.

Click any line or arc on the domain boundary or within the domain to apply the load previously
defined. This type of load is associative.
Moving the boundary or the internal line moves the load as well. Deleting the line deletes the load.

Line load by selection.

Similar to the previous function but the load will be applied to the selected lines.

You can modify the location and value (intensity) and any vertex of the load polyline:

Modify location 1. Select the load with the cursor.

2. Keep left mouse button depressed.
3. Move the mouse or enter the relative coordinates to move the load to a new location.
4. Release left mouse button to set the load in its new location.

Modify shape 1. Move the cursor above the vertex (a load polyline vertex symbol appears beside the cursor).
2. Click the left mouse button
3. Drag the vertex to its new position after pressing the left mouse button.
4. Click the left mouse button.

Modify value 1. Select the load with the cursor (a load symbol appears beside the cursor).
2. Click the left mouse button.
3. Enter new load values in the dialogue window.
4. Click on the Modify button to apply the changes and close the window.

The load value can also be changed in the Table Browser.

Delete Select the loads you want to delete and press Delete.

 Modifying domain mesh leaves line loads (applied on the domains) unchanged.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 279

4.10.9. Surface load

Surface load can be applied on surface finite

elements, domains and load panels.
The intensity of a distributed load on a
surface element is constant.

Modifying domain mesh leaves the loads

(applied on the domains) unchanged.

Element Load in local directions Load in global directions

(in local coordinate system) (in global coordinate system)

x - -

Membrane

y - -

z - -
Plate

x X

Shell y Y

z Z
280

4.10.10. Domain / Load panel area load

Applies a mesh-independent area load to a domain or a load panel.

The domain element type determines the load type and direction as follows.
For a membrane domain the load must be in the plane of the domain. For a plate domain the load
must be perpendicular to the plane of the domain. For a shell domain any load direction is acceptable.
Load panels accept loads in any direction but if they transfer loads to membrane or plate domains the
above limitations apply.
The load can be a global load on surface, a global projective load or a local load and the components
will be interpreted accordingly.
You can select between constant or linear load intensities and set if loads disapper over holes or are
distributed on the edge of the hole.

The first icon represents the option that loads over holes are not applied to the structure. The second
one represents the option that loads over holes are distributed on the edge of the hole.
Loads disappear/
allowed on holes

Constant load Steps of load definition in case of constant load:

1. Enter load components (pX, pY, pZ)

2. Enter two diagonal end points of the rectangle
Rectangular area
load by clicking or by coordinates.
(This function is available only on the X-Y, Y-Z
and X-Z planes)

1. Enter load components (pX, pY, pZ)

2. Enter three corners of the rectangle by clicking
Skewed rectangle or by coordinates.
area load
(This function is available only on the X-Y, Y-Z
and X-Z planes)

1. Enter load components (pX, pY, pZ)

2. Enter polygon vertices by clicking or by coordinates. In this latter case press an extra Enter after
specifying the last position. If you enter the polygon by clicking on the domain close the polygon
Polygon load by clicking on the first vertex again or by double-clicking at the last vertex. Instead of the left
mouse button you can also use Space or Enter key to enter polygon vertices.
Disk or sector load defined by centerpoint and two points

Disk or sector load defined by three points

Regular polygon load defined by centerpoint and two points

Regular polygon load defined by three points

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 281

Complex polygon load

During definition of a complex polygon a pet palette appears with several geometry functions. These
are: drawing a line, drawing a line as a tangent of an arc, drawing an arc with centerpoint, drawing an
with a midpoint, drawing an arc with the tangent of the previous polygon segment, drawing an arc
with a given tangent, picking up an existing line.
1. Enter load components (pX, pY, pZ)
2. Click on the domain
Distributed domain
load The load will be distributed over the domain. The shape of this type of load will automatically follow
any change in the domain geometry. Within a load case you can apply only one load of this type on a
domain. New distributed domain load definition always overwrites the previous one.

Linear load Steps of load definition in case of linear load:

The plane of the load intensity can be specified by load intensity values (p1, p2, p3) at three points [(1),
(2), (3)] in the plane of the domain. These points are the load value reference points. If you want to use
the same reference points and values to many loads of different shape and position you can lock the
reference points and values by clicking the Lock button. Loads are applied by entering an area.

Define load value reference points

Lock/unlock value reference points

1. Enter load values at the reference points (p1, p2, p3).

2. Enter two diagonal end points of the rectangle by clicking or by coordinates. (This function is
Rectangle area load available only on the X-Y, Y-Z and X-Z planes)
3. Enter three reference points by clicking or by coordinates.
1. Enter load values at the reference points (p1, p2, p3).
2. Enter three corners of the rectangle by clicking or by coordinates.
Skewed rectangle
area load 3. Enter three reference points by clicking or by coordinates.

1. Enter load values at the reference points (p1, p2, p3).

2. Enter polygon vertices by clicking or by coordinates. In this latter case press an extra Enter after
Polygon load
specifying the last position. If you enter the polygon by clicking on the domain close the polygon
by clicking on the first vertex again or by double-clicking at the last vertex. Instead of the left
mouse button you can also use Space or Enter key to enter polygon vertices.
3. Enter three reference points by clicking or by coordinates.
Sector or disc shaped load defined by centerpont and two points

Sector or disc shaped load defined by three points

Arc polygon shaped load defined by centerpont and two points

Arc polygon shaped load defined by three points

Complex polygon shaped load

282

During definition of a complex polygon a pet palette appears with several geometry functions. These
are: drawing a line, drawing a line as a tangent of an arc, drawing an arc with centerpoint, drawing an
with a midpoint, drawing an arc with the tangent of the previous polygon segment, drawing an arc
with a given tangent, picking up an existing line.
1. Enter load values at the reference points (p1, p2, p3).
2. Click on the domain.
Distributed domain
load 3. Enter three reference points by clicking or by coordinates.
Within a load case you can apply only one load of this type on a domain. New distributed domain
load definition always overwrites the previous one.
Modify area load The position, shape and intensity of a mesh-independent area load can be changed.
Modify position 1. Place the mouse above the load contour (the cursor will identify the load).
2. Press the left mouse button and move the mouse.
3. Find the new load position by moving the mouse or by coordinates.
4. Drop the load by clicking the left mouse button or pressing the Space or Enter key.
Modify shape 1. Place the mouse above a vertex of the load polygon (the cursor will identify the load polygon
vertex as a corner).
2. Press the left mouse button and move the mouse.
3. Find the new vertex position by moving the mouse or by coordinates.
4. Place the vertex by clicking the left mouse button or pressing the Space or Enter key.
The load shape will change.
Modify intensity 1. Place the mouse above the load contour (the cursor will identify the load).
2. Click the left mouse button. The area load windows appears.
3. Change the load intensity values.
4. Click on the Modify button to confirm the changes.
Multiple loads can be selected and modified this way.
Area load intensity and shape can also be changed in the Table Browser by changing the appropriate
values in the load table.
Delete Select the loads to delete and press [Del]

 Mesh-independent loads are not affected by removing meshes or re-creating meshes on

domains.

4.10.11. Surface load distributed over line elements

Homogenous surface load can be placed over line elements (trusses, beams and ribs).
Loads over trusses will be converted into loads on the truss end nodes.
1. Click the icon and select the load distribution range in the dialog.

Auto distributes the load over the elements under the load. Any new
truss, beam or rib defined under the load will redistribute the load.

To selected elements only distributes the load over the selected ele-
ments only. Select lines using the selection toolbar. Distribution
remains the same if a new beam or rib is defined under the load.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 283

2. Define load polygon the same way as for a constant or linearly changing domain area load.

Load direction can be global on surface, global projective or local. Local directions are
defined like automatic references for domains See... 4.9.21 References.

Enter load values into the edit fields. (pX, pY, pZ)

The load polygon can be a rectangle, a skewed rectangle or any

closed polygon. The fourth method on the icon tollbar is to click
lines of a closed beam/rib polygon. This way the load becomes asso-
ciative. Moving the elements or their end nodes changes the load
polygon accordingly.

Edit / Convert surface loads distributed over beams menu item con-
verts loads created this way to individal beam loads.

4.10.12. Load panels

Load panels are used to transfer nodal loads, distributed line and surface loads to the structural ele-
ments. It is also necessary to define load panels, if snow and wind loads are generated automatically by
the software (SWG module). They have no structural role, the only function of a load panel is to distrib-
ute loads over the domains, beam and rib elements. Loads can be distributed to all domains, ribs and
beams automatically, that are in the plane of the panel. It is also possible to specify manually the load
bearing elements within or out of the plane of the panel controlling the load transfer. Their projection
to the load panel should be within the closed contour of the load panel.

Shape tools
Rectangular

Slanted rectangle

Sector or full circle by centerpoint and two points

Sector or full circle by three points

Sector or regular polygon by centerpoint and two points

Sector or regular polygon by three points

Complex polygon

Special
selection tools
Clicking on a domain creates a load panel over the domain

Creating load panels for the selected domains

This function creates load panels based on selected lines. Load panel outlines are determined from the
outlines of coplanar subsets of selected lines.
284

Load distribution
modes
Select this option to distribute the load on all domains, ribs and beams under the load panel.

Load is distributed to all domains, and selected ribs and beams.

Loads on load panels can be distributed over selected nodes as well.
Loads can be distributed over nodes and beam or rib elements out of the plane of the load panel if
their projection to the load panel is within the load panel outline. In this case loads are distributed over
the projected segments but will act in the element position.

Load is distributed to selected domains and selected ribs and beams.

Select this option to distribute the load on domains, ribs and beams in active parts under the load
panel.

Load options for If the first icon is selected the load panel applies loads over the openings (interpreting them as win-
openings dows), otherwise it ignores the loads over the openings (interpreting them as actual openings).

Loads from the selected load panels can be converted to individual loads. See… 3.2.19 Convert loads of
the selected load panels to individual loads.

 Selected beams / ribs / domains can be out of the plane of the load panel.
If multiple domains are selected and their outlines projected to the plane of the load panel over-
lap, loads will be transferred only to the domain closest to the load panel.

Concentrated loads on columns from transferring a distributed load on the load panel

Method of load Distributing of a concentrated load models the load panel as a rigid sheet supported by three springs
distribution at each load distribution point. The three springs have the same stiffness inversely proportional to the
square of the distance from the point of action.
s
10 4 2
F d max d 
s =  max 
 d 
di 1 d
d max = max d i  d max d max
100
Loads distributed along lines are converted to a series of point loads and the point loads are distribut-
ed with the above method. Surface loads are distributed using the method in 4.10.11 Surface load dis-
tributed over line elements.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 285

Defining loads Point, line and surface loads can be placed on load panels the same way as on domains. An example:

Choose the Loads tab and the Distributed loads on domain tool

Enter load value components and choose Distrubited domain load from the palette.
Click into any number of domains or load panels. The load will be applied to them.

4.10.13. Snow load – SWG module

Design codes Snow load is generated automatically in the program according to the regulations of several national
standards and their applicable annexes. The standards in the program for which snow load generation
is available are listed below. The national design standards that served as the basis of calculation for
the given standard in the program are also listed.

Eurocode general EN 1991-1-3:2003 (EC 1-3)

Eurocode 1 Action on Structures
Part 1-3 General Actions – Snow loads

EC German EN 1991-1-3:2003
DIN EN 1991-1-3/NA December 2010
NTC Italian EN 1991-1-3:2003
UNI EN 1991-1-3/NA July 2007
NTC 2018

EC Dutch EN 1991-1-3:2003
NEN EN 1991-1-3/NB November 2007

EC Hungarian EN 1991-1-3:2003
MSZ EN 1991-1-3:2016/NA September 2016

EC Romanian CR 1-1-3/2012
conform with SR EN 1991-1-3

EC Czech EN 1991-1-3:2003
CSN EN 1991-1-3/NA July 2012

EC Slovakian EN 1991-1-3:2003
STN EN 1991-1-3/NA December 2004

EC Polish EN 1991-1-3:2003
PN EN 1991-1-3/NA September 2005

EC Danish EN 1991-1-3:2003
DS/EN 1991-1-3 DK NA October 2015

EC Belgian EC 1991-1-3:2003
NBN EN 1991-1-3/ANB October 2007

EC Austrian EN 1991-1-3:2003
ÖNORM B 1991-1-3 September 2013

EC Finnish EN 1991-1-3:2003
SFS-EN 1990-1-3/NA November 2007

Swiss SIA261:2003 Einwirkungen auf Tragwerke

SIA261/1:2003 Ergänzende Festlegungen
Assumptions Applicability of the algorithm in the program is limited by the applicability of the specifications in the
Application limits standards it is based on. Following is a list of such limitations for each standard in the program.
286

Eurocode • The algorithm generates snow loads on building roofs. It is not recommended for
general snow load generation on other types of structures, such as bridges.
• The algorithm is applicable to various roof geometries. It takes the effect of ridges
and troughs on snow accumulation into account when calculating the snow effect
on roof panels adjacent to the ridge or trough. It does not take into account the
effect of local snow accumulation on distant (i.e. not adjacent) roof panels, there-
fore, it is not recommended for complex roof geometries where such effect is ex-
pected to have significant influence on the characteristic snow load. Note that ne-
ither does EC 1-3 specify snow load calculation for the latter cases.
• Building altitude shall be less than 1500 m.
• Snow impact when snow falls off a higher roof is not considered; snow load is
always classified as static action.
• Ice loading is not considered.
• Lateral loading from snow is not considered.
• Exceptional snow drifts as per Annex B are not considered.
• Exceptional snow loads are not considered.
• Sliding of snow off the roof is assumed not to be prevented.
• Local snow accumulation in the vicinity of taller construction works and smaller
projections on the roof are taken into account.
• Snow overhanging the edge of the roof is considered.
• Snow load on snowguards is not considered.
• The program can generate snow load corresponding to any arbitrary return peri-
od.

EC German • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well with the extensions/modifications listed below.
• The methodology in 5.3.4 for multi-span roofs is not implemented, because it
leads to ambiguous load generation in 3D cases.
• Exceptional snow load with the same distribution is taken into account

NTC Italian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well.

EC Dutch • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well with the extensions/modifications listed below.
• No altitudes above 1500 m can be found in the Netherlands, thus the limit on
altitude is not applicable.

EC Hungarian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well.

EC Belgian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well with the extensions/modifications listed below.
• No altitudes above 1500 m can be found in Belgium, thus the limit on altitude is
not applicable.

EC Romanian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well.

EC Czech • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well.

EC Slovak • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well.
• Exceptional snow load with the same distribution is taken into account.

EC Polish • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well.

EC Danish • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 287

EC Austrian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well with the extensions/modifications listed below.
• The algorithm provides reliable results only for altitudes below 1500 m.
For higher altitudes the snow load shall be calculated as per 5.1 in EC 1-3 NA.
• The effect of solar panels as per Annex B in EC 1-3 NA is not considered.
• The influence area for snow load is assumed to be greater than 10 m 2. For struc-
tural members affected by snow from smaller areas see 9.2.1.1 in EC 1-3 NA and
use an increased value of sk for the analysis.
• The total area of the roof is assumed to be less than 2000 m2. For larger roof areas
see 9.2.1.2 in EC 1-3 NA and apply an appropriate increase in sk for the analysis.
• The effect of short eaves (h < 0.5 m) as per 9.2.1.3 in EC 1-3 NA is not considered
automatically. This effect can be considered by an appropriately extended model
that includes the ground surface around building as an extension of the roof.
• The effect of graves (as per 9.2.5.4 in EC 1-3 NA) is not considered.

EC Finnish • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well.

Swiss • The algorithm generates snow loads on building roofs. It is not recommended for
snow load generation on other types of structures, such as bridges.
• The algorithm is applicable to various roof geometries. It takes the effect of ridges
and troughs on snow accumulation into account when calculating the snow effect
on roof panels adjacent to the ridge or trough. It does not take into account the
effect of local snow accumulation on distant (i.e. not adjacent) roof panels, there-
fore, it is not recommended for complex roof geometries where such effect is ex-
pected to have significant influence on the characteristic snow load. Note that ne-
ither does SIA261 specify snow load calculation for the latter cases.
• Building altitude shall be less than 2000 m.
• Exceptional snow loads are not considered.
• Sliding of snow off the roof is assumed not to be prevented.
• Local snow accumulation in the vicinity of taller construction works and smaller
projections on the roof are taken into account.
• Snow overhanging the edge of the roof is considered.

Calculation details The logic of snow load calculation is explained below for each standard in the program
Eurocode • The recommended values are assumed for all coefficients unless specified other-
general wise by the user. None of the recommendations in National Annexes is assumed.
• The factors for combination value, frequent value and quasi-permanent value of
the snow load are taken according to Table 4.1 of EC 1-3.
• The characteristic value of snow load on the ground shall be specified by the user.
• Snow load on the roof is calculated using Eq. (5.1) in EC 1-3.
• The exposure coefficient is based on the topography selected by the user. The Ce
values that correspond to each topography type are taken from Table 5.1 in EC 1-
3.
• The thermal coefficient is taken as 1.0 by default and shall be modified by the user
if the application of a different value is justified.
• The snow load shape coefficient for roofs composed of planar panels is calculated
as per Section 5.3.1 - 5.3.4 in EC 1-3.
• Snow load shape coefficients for the undrifted load case are based on μ1 in Table
5.2 in EC 1-3. Each panel has its own μ1 value that is calculated using the slope of
the panel.
• Snow load shape coefficients for the drifted load case are based on μ2 in Table
5.2. μ2 coefficients for troughs are calculated as per Figure 5.4 in EC 1-3 using the
slopes of the connecting roof panels in the wind direction of the given drifted
snow load case. (e.g.: A horizontal trough in the X direction results in no snow ac-
cumulation when the wind blows in the X direction because the slopes of the
connecting roof panels in the X direction are 0°.) When there are no troughs on a
roof, the drifted load arrangements in Figure 5.3 in EC 1-3 are considered. The re-
duced snow intensity is always assumed on the windswept side of the roof.
• Snow load shape coefficients for cylindrical roofs are calculated as per 5.3.5. in EC
288

1-3. In order to achieve sufficient accuracy in the load shape, it is recommended

to approximate the cylindrical roof with at least 20 planar segments.
• The effect of taller construction works and obstructions on the roof are consi-
dered as per 5.3.6 and 6.2 in EC 1-3. Their influence is only taken into account in
the drifted load cases. Snow is assumed to be drifted only if the wall or obstacle is
not parallel to the wind direction.
• Snow load overhanging the edge of the roof is considered as per 6.3 in EC 1-3.
• Snow load corresponding to a user-defined return period is calculated using the
procedure in Annex D of EC 1-3.

EC German • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented
there is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed
below
• The characteristic value of snow load on the ground is automatically calculated
based on 4.1 in EC 1-3 NA using the zone and the altitude specified by the user.
• Exceptional snow load is generated. The exceptional snow load coefficient is as-
sumed 2.0 by default, but it shall be overwritten by the appropriate value by the
user for Northern Germany as per 4.3 in EC 1-3 NA.
• The effect of taller construction works is calculated as per 5.3.6 in EC 1-3 NA.

NTC Italian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented
there is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed
below.
• The characteristic value of snow load on the ground is automatically calculated
based on 4.1 in EC 1-3 NA using the zone and the altitude specified by the user.
• The value of the exposure coefficient is based on 5.2 (7) in EC 1-3 NA.

EC Dutch • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented
there is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed
below.
• The characteristic value of snow load on the ground is taken as 0.7 kN/m2 as per
4.1 (1) in EC 1-3 NA.
• The factors for combination value, frequent value and quasi-permanent value of
the snow load are taken as 0, 0.2, and 0, respectively as per 4.2 (1) in EC 1-3 NA.

EC Belgian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented
there is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed
below.
• The characteristic value of snow load on the ground is automatically calculated
based on 4.1 (1) in EC 1-3 NA as a function of the altitude specified by the user.
• The combination factors for frequent and quasi-permanent load combinations are
based on EC 1-3 NA 4.2 (1).
• The exposure and temperature coefficients are taken as 1.0 according to the regu-
lations in EC 1-3 NA 5.2 (7) and (8).
• When calculating the effect of taller construction works, the upper limit of μw is
2.0 as per EC 1-3 NA 5.3.6 (1).
• The effect of snow overhanging the roof is not considered (EC 1-3 NA 6.3).

EC Hungarian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented
there is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed
below.
• The characteristic value of snow load ont he ground is automatically calculated
based on NA1.6 in EC 1-3 NA using the altitude specified by the user.
• Exceptional snow load is generated. An exceptional snow load coefficient of 2.0 is
used as per NA1.8 in EC 1-3 NA.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 289

EC Romanian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented
there is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed
below
• The characteristic value of snow load on the ground is calculated automatically
based on 3.1 in CR 1-3 using the basic sk value and the altitude specified by the
user.
• Snow load on the roof is calculated using Eq. (4.1) in CR 1-3.
• The importance factor shall be selected by the user; the list of recommended va-
lues is based on Table 4.2 in CR 1-3.
• The factors for combination value, frequent value and quasi-permanent value of
the snow load are taken as 0.7, 0.5, and 0.4, respectively as per Table 4.4 in CR 1-3.

EC Czech • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented
there is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed
below
• The characteristic value of snow load on the ground is based on the map cited in
2.7 in EC 1-3 NA (www.snehovamapa.cz)
• Snow load shape coefficients for cylindrical roofs are calculated as per 2.19 and
Figure NA.1 in EC 1-3 NA
• The effect of taller construction works is taken into account as per 2.20 in EC 1-3
NA with the following assumption: b1,s = 0.5b1.

EC Polish • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented
there is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed
below
• The characteristic value of snow load on the ground is calculated automatically
based on 1.7, Figure 1 and Table 1 in EC 1-3 NA using the zone and altitude speci-
fied by the user.

EC Danish • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented
there is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed
below.
• The characteristic value of snow load on the ground is taken as 1.0 kN/m2 as per
4.1 (1) NOTE 1 in EC 1-3 NA.
• Default snow load exposure coefficients are based on the assumption of Cs = 1.0
as per 5.2(7) in EC 1-3 NA. When a different size coefficient needs the be applied,
the user shall calculate the resulting exposure coefficient and define it as custom.
• The additional snow load arrangement in 5.3.3(4) in EC 1-3 NA is not considered.
• Snow load shape coefficients for cylindrical roofs are calculated as per 5.3.5. (3) in
EC 1-3 NA
• The effect of taller construction works is taken into account as per 5.3.6 in EC 1-3
NA with the following assumptions: (i) the shelter is global; (ii) bsl = 0.5b1; (iii) the
shelter is on the leeward side.

EC Austrian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented
there is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed
below.
• The characteristic value of snow load on the ground is calculated automatically
based on Eq. (C.1) in EC 1-3 NA using the zone and altitude specified by the user.

• Snow load shape coefficients for multi-span roofs are calculated as per 9.2.3 in EC
1-3 NA.
• Snow load shape coefficients for vaulted roofs are calculated as per 9.2.4.3 in EC
1-3 NA.
• The modifications for calculating the effect of taller construction works in 9.2.5.1
in EC 1-3 NA are taken into account.
290

EC Finnish • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented
there is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed
below.
• The characteristic value of snow load on the ground shall be specified by the user
based on the map in Figure 4.1 in EC 1-3 NA.
• Exposure coefficients are based on Table 5.1 in EC 1-3 NA.
• The snow load arrangement of cylindrical roofs is calculated as per EC 1-3. The
unique load arrangement introduced in Figure 5.6 in EC 1-3 NA is not applied.
This might lead to considerable error for shallow cylindrical roofs.
• The modifications for calculating the effect of taller construction works in 5.3.6(1)
in EC 1-3 NA are taken into account. The area of the roof is assumed to exceed 6
m 2.

Swiss • The recommended values are assumed for all coefficients unless specified other-
wise by the user.
• The characteristic value of snow load on the ground is automatically calculated
based on the reference height. The reference height (altitude) shall be specified
by the user based on the map in Annex D.
• Snow load on the roof is calculated using Eq. (9) in SIA261.
• The exposure coefficient is based on the topography selected by the user. The Ce
values that correspond to each topography type are taken from 5.2.4 in SIA261.
• The thermal coefficient is taken as 1.0 by default and shall be modified by the user
if the application of a different value is justified.
• The snow load shape coefficient for roofs is calculated as per Section 5.3 and Fi-
gures 2 and 3 in SIA261. Each panel has its own μ value that is calculated using
the slope of the panel.
• μ2 coefficients for troughs are calculated as per the second column of Figure 3 in
SIA261 using the slopes of the connecting roof panels in the wind direction of the
given drifted snow load case. (A trough in the X direction for example, results in
no snow accumulation when the wind blows in the X direction if the slopes of the
connecting roof panels in the X direction are 0°.) When there are no troughs on a
roof, the drifted load arrangements in the first column of Figure 3 in SIA261 are
considered. The reduced snow intensity is always assumed on the windswept side
of the roof.
• Snow load shape coefficients for cylindrical roofs are calculated as per the third
column of Figure 3 in SIA261. In order to achieve sufficient accuracy in the load
shape, it is recommended to approximate the cylindrical roof with at least 20
planar segments.
• The effect of taller construction works and obstructions on the roof are consi-
dered as per 5.3.6 and 6.2 in EC 1-3 taking into account the recommended values
for snow weight in 5.4.1 in SIA261. Their influence is only taken into account in the
drifted load cases. Snow is assumed to be drifted only if the wall or obstacle is not
parallel to the wind direction.
• Effects of overhanging snow is taken into account according to EC 1-3 6.3.

Usage The following paragraphs explain the usage of the automatic snow load generator module.
To apply snow loads first click on the Load cases / load groups button and
define a snow load case by clicking on the snow load case button. The snow
load group will be created automatically. An exceptional snow load group is
also created if the checking exceptional snow is required and available in
the given design code.
A temporary snow load case is automatically created in the snow load
group. After the snow load parameters are specified, that load case is re-
placed by the generated snow load cases. The algorithm handles both
undrifted and drifted load cases. Wind directions X+, X–, Y+, Y– and in
45°+n*90° directions (where n = 0, 1, 2, 3) are taken into account For details
and naming conventions see… 4.10.1 Load cases, load groups.
To set the snow load parameters select one of the snow load cases as the
current load case. It makes the snow load icon enabled in the Loads tab.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 291

If no load panels have been created before, draw the load panels according to 4.10.12 Load panels.

To enter snow load parameters click the snow load icon on the Loads tab.
The parameters dialog allows choosing pitched (or flat) roof or cylindrical roof load panels for snow
load and setting the load parameters.
Snow load Two roof types can be assigned to load panels. Click
parameters on the icon and select load panels belonging to the
roof.

Pitched (or flat) roof

Cylindrical roof

Snow load parameters:

Altitude above sea level A[m]

The characteristic snow load on the ground depends
on the climatic region and the altitude of the site.
Higher altitude generally corresponds to higher load
intensity. The program calculates the snow load
intensity from the parameters.

Exposure coefficient Ce
In case of special circumstances an exposure factor
other than 1.0 can be set depending on the topog-
raphy (windswept, normal, sheltered or other).
A custom Ce value can also be specified. In this case
the program asks for confirmation then uses the
custom value when calculating snow and exceptional
snow load intensity.

Thermal coefficient Ct
The Ct thermal coefficient can be set to a value other than 1.0 only if the engineer performed thermal
transmittance calculations for the roof (heat loss can cause melting). In this case the program asks for
confirmation then uses the custom value

Coefficient for exceptional snow loads Cesl

In countries where the design code requires checking exceptional snow loads the exceptional load
intensity is calculated by multiplying the normal intensity by Cesl. Custom values can also be entered.
In this case the program asks for confirmation then uses the custom value.

Zone
In countries where the characteristic snow load depends on the geographical location the national
annex divides the country into zones. The zone selected affects the characteristic snow load.

Importance factor
An importance factor can be entered depending on the classification of the building if it is required by
the design code. Nonstandard values can also be used after confirmation.

Annual probability of exceedance and Coefficient of variation

Input data required to calculate snow load for a user-defined return period. Default values correspond
to the standard 50 year return period.

Characteristic value of the snow load on the ground

AxisVM calculates the sk and sAd values from the above parameters. These can be overwritten with a
custom intensity but in this case changing parameters will no longer affect the load value.

AxisVM calculates snow load shape coefficients for roofs abutting and close to taller construction
works or having a parapet which acts as an obstruction. It can take into account the effect of
overhanging snow on roof edges.
Parameters are stored with the edges so different roof edges can have different parameters.
292

Select abutting wall edges

To define roof edges where the walls are located enter the hw, α, b1 parameters then click
on the this icon to select the respective lines.

Select parapet edges

To define parapets enter the hp parameter then click on the second icon to select the lines.

Roof edges with overhanging snow

Click on the icon to select the roof edges with overhanging snow.

Delete
Edge properties can be deleted by clicking the delete icon and selecting the edges.
Abutting wall height [m]
hw height of the abutting wall relative to the roof
level
Angle of the roof above the abutting wall
α is the angle of the roof above the abutting wall. It
determines the amount of snow falling from the
higher roof.
Width of the taller construction
b1 is the width of the taller construction measured
perpendicularly to the wall
Parapet height
hp is the height of the parapet or other obstruction relative to the roof level .
 User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 293

4.10.14. Wind load – SWG module

Design codes Wind load is generated automatically in the program according to the regulations of several national
standards and their applicable annexes. The standards in the program for which wind load generation is
available are listed below. The national design standards that served as the basis of calculation for the
given standard in the program are also listed.

Eurocode EN 1991-1-4:2005 (EC 1-4)

general Eurocode 1 Action on Structures
Part 1-4 General Actions – Wind Actions

EC German EC 1991-1-4:2005
DIN EN 1991-1-4/NA December 2010

NTC Italian EC 1991-1-4:2005

UNI EN 1991-1-4/NA July 2007
NTC 2018

EC Dutch EC 1991-1-4:2005
NEN EN 1991-1-4/NB November 2007

EC Hungarian EC 1991-1-4:2005
MSZ EN 1991-1-4/NA January 2016

EC Romanian CR 1-1-4/2012
conform with SR EN 1991-1-4

EC Czech EC 1991-1-4:2005
CSN EN 1991-1-4/NA July 2013

EC Slovakian EC 1991-1-4:2005
CSN EN 1991-1-4/NA July 2013

EC Belgian EC 1991-1-4:2005
NBN EN 1991-1-4/ANB December 2010

EC Polish EC 1991-1-4:2005
PN EN 1991-1-4/NA October 2008

EC Danish EC 1991-1-4:2005
DS/EN 1991-1-4 DK NA July 2015

EN 1991-1-4:2005
EC Austrian
ÖNORM B 1991-1-4 May 2013

EN 1991-1-4:2005
EC Finnish
SFS-EN 1991-1-4/NA November 2007

Swiss SIA261:2003 Einwirkungen auf Tragwerke

SIA261/1:2003 Ergänzende Festlegungen
 294

Assumptions Applicability of the algorithm in the program is limited by the applicability of the specifications in the
Application limits standards it is based on. Following is a list of such limitations for each standard in the program.

Eurocode • The algorithm can determine the wind load of rectangular-plan buildings, rectangu-
general lar-plan canopies, free-standing walls and signboards. Buildings are structures with
an internal empty space surrounded by a closed line of walls and covered by a roof.
• The following types of roofs are handled by the algorithm for buildings: flat, mono-
pitch, duopitch, hipped, vaulted.
• The following types of canopy roofs are handled by the algorithm: monopitch and
duopitch.
• The height and the width of the building shall not exceed 200 m.
• The global wind effect is determined for the structure. Hence, pressure coefficients
are calculated with the assumption of at least 10 m2 of loaded area for buildings.
The wind load of canopies and free-standing objects is based on force coefficients.
• The influence of neighboring structures and obstacles is assumed negligible.
• When calculating the internal pressure coefficients, the building is assumed not to
have a dominant external opening. Internal pressure is only calculated for buildings.
• The structural factor cscd is taken as 1.0 (corresponding applicability limits are listed
in 6.2 (1) of EC 1-4).
• the influence of ice and snow on wind load is assumed negligible

EC German • because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well with the extensions/modifications listed below
• building height < 300 m
• building altitude < 1100 m

NTC Italian • because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well with the extensions/modifications listed below
• building altitude < 1500 m

EC Dutch • because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well

EC Hungarian • because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well

EC Romanian • because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well with the extensions/modifications listed below
• building altitude < 1000 m (for buildings in southwest Banat and in areas with an
altitude above 1000 m special consideration is required and the basic wind velocity
shall be specified by the user)

EC Czech • because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well

EC Slovakian • because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well

EC Belgian • because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well

EC Polish • because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well

EC Danish • because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
apply for this standard as well

• because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
EC Austrian
apply for this standard as well

• because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the limits presented there
EC Finnish apply for this standard as well
 User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 295

Swiss • the algorithm is only applicable to buildings with a rectangular plan; an internal
empty space surrounded by a closed line of walls and covered with a roof
• building height < 200 m
• pressure coefficients are calculated as per EC 1-4; roofs of the following types are
covered: flat, monopitch, duopitch, hipped, and vaulted
• wind effects are calculated for the overall load bearing structure, hence a loaded area
of at least 10 m2 is assumed
• the influence of wind friction is assumed negligible
• the building is assumed not to have a dominant face
• the influence of neighboring structures and obstacles is assumed negligible

Calculation details The logic of wind effect calculation is explained below for each standard in the program
• The recommended values are assumed for all coefficients unless specified otherwise
Eurocode
by the user. None of the recommendations in National Annexes is assumed.
general
• Basic wind velocity is calculated as per Eq. (4.1) in 4.2 (2) of EC 1-4
• Terrain roughness is calculated as per Eq. (4.4) in 4.3.2 (1) of EC 1-4
• Terrain orography is taken into account with the orography factor co, but the calcu-
lation of co shall be performed by the user.
• Mean wind velocity is calculated as per Eq. (4.3) in 4.3.1 (1) of EC 1-4
• Wind turbulence intensity is calculated as per Eq. (4.7) in 4.4 (1) of EC 1-4
• Reference height is calculated as per 7.2.2 (1) in EC 1-4
• Peak velocity pressure is calculated as per Eq. (4.8) in 4.5 (1) of EC 1-4
• Pressure coefficients for walls of buildings are calculated as per 7.2.2 (2) in EC 1-4. As
a conservative assumption, the lack of correlation between wind pressures between
the windward and leeward side is not taken into account.
• External pressure coefficients for roofs of buildings are calculated as per 7.2.3 – 7.2.6
and 7.2.8 in EC 1-4.
• Internal pressure coefficients are calculated based on either a μ value (determined
using Eq. (7.3) in EC 1-4 and specified by the user) using Fig. 7.13 in EC 1-4, or cus-
tom cpi values. Should the user decide not to specify μ nor cpi, two different cases
are considered with cpi = +0.2 and cpi = -0.3 as per 7.2.9 (6) NOTE 2 in EC 1-4.
• Torsional effects are calculated as per 7.1.2 of EC 1-4.
• Pressure on the underside of protruding roof corners is considered as per EC 1-4
7.2.1 using the pressure from directly connected walls.
• Wind load of canopies is calculated as per EC 1-4 7.3. The generated distributed load
is compatible with the pressure coefficients for zones A, B, C, D and produces a wind
load with the magnitude and position defined by the general force coefficient.
• Wind load of free-standing walls is calculated as per EC 1-4 7.4.1-7.4.2.
• Wind load of signboards is calculated as per EC 1-4 7.4.3.
• The effect of wind friction is determined as per EC 1-4 7.5.

EC German • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented there
is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed below
• Basic wind velocity is based on Fig. NA.A.1 in EC 1-4 NA. The altitude of the building
is taken into account as per A.2in EC 1-4 NA.
• Mean wind velocity and wind turbulence intensity are calculated as per Table NA.B.2
in EC 1-4 NA.
• Peak velocity pressure is calculated as per Eq. (NA.B.11) in NA.B.4.1 (4) in EC 1-4 NA
• Pressure coefficients for walls are calculated as per Table NA.1 in EC 1-4 NA.
• Pressure coefficients for flat roofs are modified according to 7.2.3 in EC 1-4 NA
296

NTC Italian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented there
is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed below.
• Basic wind velocity is calculated using the parameters in Table N.A.1 in EC 1-4 NA.
• Terrain roughness is calculated using 3.3.7 in NTC 2018.
• The wind load distribution for walls of slender buildings is not variable as per EC 1-4,
but uniform according to the regulations in 3.3 in NTC 2018.
• Pressure coefficients for walls are based on Table IV. in 3.3 in NTC 2018.
• Load zone geometry and corresponding pressure coefficients for roofs are based on
3.3 in NTC 2018.
• Global pressure coefficients as per NTC 2018 are not considered.
• Automatic internal pressure calculation is based on 3.3 in NTC 2018 using cpi =±0.2.

EC Dutch • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented there
is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed below.
• Basic wind velocity is proposed based on the zones in Figure NB.1 and the corres-
ponding values in Table NB.1 in EC 1-4 NA.
• Terrain roughness is calculated as per Eq. (4.5) and Table 4.1 in EC 1-4 NA
• Pressure coefficients for walls are calculated as per Table 7.1 in EC 1-4 NA.
The lack of correlation between wind pressures between the windward and leeward
side is always taken into account by multiplying the pressure intensities with 0.85.
• External pressure coefficients for roofs are calculated as per Tables 7.2, 7.3a, 7.3b,
7.4a, 7.4b, and 7.5 in EC 1-4 NA.

EC Hungarian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented there
is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed below
• Basic wind velocity is taken as 23.6 m/s2 as per NA4.1 in EC 1-4 NA.
• The recommended value of cdir = 1.00 in NA4.2 in EC 1-4 NA is taken into account.

EC Romanian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented there
is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed below
• Basic wind velocity is calculated using Eq. (2.2) and Fig. 2.1 in CR 1-4.
• The importance factor is taken into account when calculating the wind pressure in-
tensity as per Eq. (3.1) and (3.2) in CR 1-4.

EC Czech • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented there
is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed below
• Basic wind velocity is based on the wind map of the Czech Republic in Fig. NA.4.1 in
EC 1-4 NA.

EC Slovakian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented there
is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed below
• Basic wind velocity is calculated as per Table EC 1-4 NA NB1.
• External pressure coefficients for roofs are modified as per EC 1-4 NA 2.27–2.30.

EC Belgian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented there
is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed below.
• Basic wind velocity is based on the wind map of Belgium in Fig. 4.3 in EC 1-4 NA.
• The cdir and cseason coefficients recommended in EC 1-4 NA can be taken into account
by the user, but the default values for both parameters are 1.0.
• The turbulence factor kl is calculated as per 4.4 in EC 1-4 NA.

EC Polish • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented there
is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed below
• Basic wind velocity is calculated as per Table NA.1 in EC 1-4 NA.
• The cdir coefficients recommended in Table NA.2 in EC 1-4 NA can be taken into ac-
count by the user, but the default values for the parameter is 1.0.
• Terrain roughness is calculated as per Table NA.3 in EC 1-4 NA.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 297

EC Danish • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented there
is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed below.
• Basic wind velocity is taken as 24 m/s as per 4.2 (1)P NOTE 2 in EC 1-4 NA. Different
values (such as for areas less than 25 km from the North Sea) shall be specified by
the user.
• The cdir and cseason coefficients recommended in 4.2 (2)P in EC 1-4 NA can be ta-
ken into account by the user. The default values for both parameters are 1.0.
• The pressure coefficient for zone I of flat roofs is calculated as per 7.2.3(4) in
EC 1-4 NA.

EC Austrian • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented there
is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed below
• Basic velocity pressure (qb) shall be specified by the user based on Annex A of
EC 1-4 NA.
• Peak velocity pressure is calculated as per Table 1 in EC 1-4 NA
• The simplified approaches for pressure coefficients in EC 1-4 NA are not applied. The
pressure coefficients are calculated with the more accurate complex approaches at all
times.

EC Austrian • Pressure coefficients for walls are calculated as per Table 3a, 3b and 4 in
EC 1-4 NA.
• Zones F and G are not used for roofs when their cumulative area is less than 20% of
the total roof area as per 9.2 in EC 1-4 NA.

EC Finnish • Because calculation is based on the general Eurocode, the procedure presented there
is applied for this standard as well with the modifications/extensions listed below.
• Basic wind velocity for various parts of the country is based on 4.2(1)P in EC 1-4 NA.
• The unique value for kr in 4.3.2(1) in EC 1-4 NA is taken into consideration when ter-
rain roughness is calculated.

Swiss • The recommended values are assumed for all coefficients unless specified otherwise
by the user.
• The basic value of velocity pressure (qp0) shall be determined by the user based on
Appendix E of SIA 261
• Peak velocity pressure is calculated as per Eq. (11) in 6.2.1.1 in SIA 261
• The wind profile coefficient ch is calculated as per Eq. (12) in 6.2.1.2 in SIA 261 accor-
ding to parameters in Table 4 corresponding to the terrain category selected by the
user.
• Wind pressure is calculated as per Eq. (13) (external) and Eq. (14) (internal) in 6.2.2.1
in SIA 261. The corresponding pressure coefficients are not taken from Appendix C,
but from Tables 7.2.3 – 7.2.6 and 7.2.8 in EC 1-4 to provide a more generally appli-
cable solution that is also in line with Swiss design practice.
• The cred reduction factor is assumed 1.0 in all cases.
• The cd dynamic factor is assumed 1.0 in all cases. The corresponding limitations are
listed in 6.3.5 in SIA 261.
298

Usage The following paragraphs explain the usage of the automatic wind load generator module.

To apply wind loads according to Eurocode, first click on the Load cases /
load groups button and define a wind load case by clicking on the wind load
case button. A wind load group will be created automatically. As a first step
a temporary wind load case is created in the wind load group and its name
can be set. After defining load panels and setting the wind load parameters
the program replaces the temporary load case with the necessary wind load
cases.
For details on the naming convention for wind load cases see…
4.10.1 Load cases, load groups

To specify wind load parameters, select a wind load case. It enables the wind load icon on the Loads
tab. If no load panels have been created draw the load panels for walls and roofs according to
4.10.12 Load panels. Click on the icon to open the wind load parameters dialog.
Wind load The first tab of the Wind load parameters dialog corresponds to the general parameters, while the
parameters second tab is used to define structure-specific parameters.
General parameters
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 299

The following parameters can be specified (certain parameters are not required by every design
code)
Altitude above sea level A [m]
Altitude is one of the factors affecting the basic wind velocity in several countries.
If vb0 depends on A, vb0 is automatically calculated.

Importance factor
An importance factor can be entered depending on the classification of the building if it is required
by the design code. Nonstandard values can also be entered with confirmation.
Zone
In countries where the characteristic wind load depends on the geographical location the national
annex divides the country into zones. The zone selected automatically defines the basic wind veloci-
ty.
Basic wind velocity vb0 [m/s]
vb0 is automatically calculated from the above parameters. This value can be replaced with a custom
value if desired.
Season factor cseason
The design code may allow reducing wind action through a cseason factor for temporary structures. It
takes into account that the calculated wind velocity does not occur during the lifetime of the
structure. The actual value is left to the designer’s judgement and responsibility.
Orography factor c0
The c0 factor takes into account the effect of orography (hills etc.) to the wind velocities. The design
code gives recommendations on when and how to use this factor.
Terrain category
Select a terrain category from the dropdown list. Each category corresponds to the areas listed be-
low:

0 Sea, coastal area exposed to the open sea

I Lakes or flat and horizontal area with negligible vegetation and without obstacles
II Area with low vegetation such as grass and isolated obstacles (trees, buildings) with sepa-
rations of at least 20 obstacle heights
III Area with regular cover of vegetation or buildings or with isolated obstacles with separa-
tions of maximum 20 obstacle heights (such as villages, suburban terrain, permanent for-
est)
IV Area in which at least 15 % of the surface is covered with buildings and their average
height exceeds 15 m
If terrains are different in directions check the Different
in direction checkbox and set the terrain categories for
each wind direction individually.

Checking the option Custom directional factors enables four cdir directional factors which take into
account a dominant wind direction on the site, thus the wind speed is not identical in all directions.
The default factor is 1.0 in all directions.
300

Substructures ex-
posed to wind

Substructures exposed to wind tab allows definition of structure-specific parameters.

The program can calculate the wind load of several independent structures. It is also possible to
model several parts of the same structure independently as substructures. The program can combine
wind loads for such substructures into a general wind load for the whole structure. If that is not de-
sired, check Separate load cases for each substructure at the bottom left corner.
Define a new substructure
First specify the name of the substructure, then select the corresponding load panels. The list of
corresponding load panels is displayed as a tooltip when the mouse hovers over the name.
Delete substructure
Deletes the selected substructures.
Rename substructure
Rename the selected substructures
Modify a substructure
Modifies the load panel assignments of the selected substructure.
Buildings Roof geometry
Select the icon describing the roof geometry that best describes the designed structure. Available
types are: flat, monopitch, duopitch, hipped and barrel roof.
Flat Monopitch Duopitch Hip Barrel
roof roof roof roof roof

After selecting roof geometry, the following parameters can be specified

Roof edge for flat roof

If a flat roof is defined the roof edge has significant effect on wind load intensity. Four options are
available: sharp eaves (no parameters), parapet wall (enter parapet height), round eaves (enter
rounding radius), mansard eaves (enter pitch angle).
Torsional effect
Eurocode requires checking torsional winds for structures sensitive to torsion. If this option is
checked additional load cases will be created for torsional winds.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 301

Internal pressure calculation

Four options are available to determine internal pressure of buildings:
Approximative: The program uses the critical pressure and suction coefficients recommended by the
Eurocode standard. Two sets of wind loads are generated in this case.
Based on area of openings: The user specifies the value of μ based on the distribution of openings in
different directions and the program calculates the internal pressure coefficients as a function of
these values. If μ=0 is specified, the program uses the approximative method in that direction.
Internal pressure coefficients: The user specifies the internal pressure coefficients directly.
Disabled: The program does not apply internal pressure during wind load generation.
Elevation relative to terrain level
The lowest point of the load panels selected for wind load generation is assumed to be at ground
level by default. The custom terrain level option allows the user to specify a custom height for that
point. This allowsthe user to perform advanced analyses such as consideration of wind load for only
the roof of a building.
Wind friction
The effect of wind friction is considered for every structure by default. The friction coefficient corres-
ponding to the surface of the structure shall be selected from the drop-down list. It is also possible
to specify a custom value for the friction coefficient. Wind friction effects can be ignored by setting
cfr = 0 as custom value.
Canopies Roof geometry
Select the icon describing the roof geometry that best describes the designed structure. Available
types are: monopitch and duopitch.

Monopitch Duopitch

After the roof geometry is selected, the following parameters can be specified:
Blockage factors
The p blockage factor describes the amount of obstacles present under the canopy roof that can
block the free flow of air in the given direction. The value of 0.0 represents an empty canopy, while
the value of 1.0 represents a canopy fully blocked in the corresponding direction. A blockage factor
can be specified for each of the four main directions. Note that if the windward side of a canopy is
fully blocked by an obstacle it is often worth considering the application of several substructures and
a combined wind load. The fully blocked side in that case can be modeled as a building.
302

Multi-span canopies
Wind load of mutli-span canopies shall be modeled through the combination of the wind load on a
set of structures. The position of each structure in the multi-span building shall be specified (end bay,
second bay from either end or any of the other bays) using the icons at the bottom left. In order to
get a general wind load for the whole structure, it is important to turn the Separate load cases for
each substructure off.
Elevation relative to terrain level
If the load panels selected to describe the geometry of the canopy roof do not include any wall ele-
ments (this is the typical scenario), then the wind generator algorithm will define the terrain level as
the lowest point of the roof by default. This is an incorrect assumption in most cases that can be
corrected by specifying the elevation of the lowest point of the roof from the terrain level.
Free-standing The following types of free-standing structures are avilable for automatic wind load generation:
structures
Free-standing wall Signboards

After the type of structure is selected, the following parameters can be specified:
Free-standing wall Shelter factors
Shelter factors consider additional walls or fences upwind that can reduce the wind pressure acting
on the modeled wall. Different shelter factors can be specified for the four main directions.
Solidity
The solidtiy ratio is proportional to the amount of openings on the wall. 1.0 corresponds to a solid
wall. Walls with a solidity ratio below 0.8 shall be calculated as fences and are out of the scope of the
wind load generation algorithm.
Elevation relative to terrain level
Signboards that are separated from the ground by a height less than one quarter of their own height
shall be modeled as free-standing walls and their elevation shall be specified here.
Edges with return corner
The wind load of a wall with return corners depends on the length of the return corners on each end
of the wall. The length of the return corner shall be specified first and then – after clicking on the
return corner icon – the edge of the wall corresponding to the return corner shall be selected. Only
the length of the return corner has any effect the calculated wind load, its direction does not.
Remove all return corners by clicking the Delete return corners from edges button
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 303

Signboard The calculation of wind load of signboards requires only

the height of the bottom edge of the signboard from the
terrain level.

After clicking the OK button, the wind loads are generated automatically for the selected load panels.

Wind load data

After the wind loads have been generated all the data related to their calculation is available in the
Table Browser under Loads/ Wind load on substructures.
Wind load parameters summarizes the values that are not load case specific. Default wind load set-
tings lead to direction independent wind loading, thus identical parameters in all four directions.
Should the user specify direction dependent terrain categories and/or custom direction factors, these
values become different in each direction.
Wind load case parameters summarizes load case specific parameters for each wind load case. These
parameters are grouped by the zones generated on the selected load panels. A number after the
zone letter indicates that there are more than one of the given zone type on the model in the select-
ed load case. Wall zones (A-E) are divided to two areas for tall buildings. “1” always corresponds to
the bottom, “2” to the top area for walls. Multiple roof zones of the same type are available for
monopitch (F) and duopitch (F-I) roofs. Zones on the windward side of canopies are marked with “1”
and zones on their leeward side are marked with “2”. Zones with “S” in their name in free-standing
walls are the ones where the effect of shelters is taken into consideration. The FR zone shows the
effect of wind friction for every structure type.

4.10.15. Fluid load

Lets you apply pressure loads characteristic

to fluids to the selected plate or shell
elements. The actual load is calculated from
values computed at the corner of the
elements.
Fluid loads created with the same definition
will be handled as one load. So if you
specified a fluid load on more than one
element and click on the load contour on
any of these elements the load will be
selected on all of them and you can easily
change the load parameters.
304

4.10.16. Self-weight

Lets you take the self-weight of the elements (that have materials assigned) and domains into account
in the analysis. Self-weight is computed based on the cross-sectional, the mass density of the material,
the gravitational acceleration g, and the length or area of the element. The load is applied as a
distributed load in the direction of the gravitation vector.

 A dashed line is drawn along line elements or surface/domain contours. If load intensity labels are
turned on a light blue G appears.

4.10.17. Fault in length (fabrication error)

This load type is used when a structural beam

element is shorter or longer than required due to a
fault in manufacturing.
Lets you apply the load, which is required to force the
shorter/longer beams to fit the distance of the
corresponding nodes, to the selected elements.
You must specify the value of the manufacturing fault,
dL [m]. A positive dL means that the beam is longer
by dL.

The load has the same effect as the 𝑑𝑇 = = 𝑑𝐿/(𝛼 ⋅ 𝐿) thermal load.

4.10.18. Tension/compression

Lets you define an initial axial internal force in

truss/beam elements. The load has the same effect as
a 𝑑𝑇 = = −𝑃/(𝛼 ⋅ 𝐸 ⋅ 𝐴) thermal load.

4.10.19. Thermal load on line elements

Lets you apply temperature loads to the

selected line elements (truss, beam, and/or
rib). You must specify values for the
following parameters:

Truss Treference reference temperature (corresponding to the initial unstressed state)

T -the temperature assumed for the analysis
𝑑𝑇 = 𝑇 − 𝑇𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 is the temperature variation that is taken into account in the analysis. A positive
dT means a warm up of the truss.
Beam/Rib Treference reference temperature (corresponding to the initial unstressed state)
T1 the temperature of the top cord (in the corresponding local direction)
T2 the temperature of the bottom cord (in the corresponding local direction)
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 305

𝑑𝑇 = 𝑇 − 𝑇𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 is the uniform temperature variation that is taken into account in the analysis,
=

where T is the temperature of the cross-section in its center of gravity.

𝑦
in local y direction: 𝑇 = 𝑇2 + (𝑇1 − 𝑇2 ) 𝐺
𝐻𝑦
𝑧𝐺
in local z direction: 𝑇 = 𝑇2 + (𝑇1 − 𝑇2 )
𝐻𝑧

where,
yG, zG, and Hy, Hz are properties of the cross-section.
=
A positive dT indicates a temperature increase of the beam.
𝑑𝑇 ≠ = 𝑇1 − 𝑇2 is the non-uniform temperature variation that is taken into account in the analysis.

4.10.20. Thermal load on surface elements

Lets you apply temperature loads to the selected surface

elements. You must specify values for the following
parameters:
Treference reference temperature (corresponding to the initial
unstressed state)
T1 the temperature of the top cord (in the positive local z
direction)
T2 the temperature of the bottom cord (in the negative
local z direction)

𝑑𝑇 = = 𝑇 − 𝑇𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 is the uniform temperature variation that is taken into account in the analysis,
where T is the temperature in the center of gravity of the cross-section.
𝑑𝑇 ≠ = 𝑇1 − 𝑇2 is the non-uniform temperature variation that is taken into account in the analysis.

Reference point

T1

T2

 =
For membranes only dT is taken into account. For plates only dT# is taken into account.

4.10.21. Forced support displacement

Lets you apply forced displacements to the selected

support elements. You must specify the values of
the forced displacement components (translational:
e[m]; rotational: φ[rad]).
AxisVM approximates the problem, by applying a
force 𝑃𝑠𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡 in the direction of the support
element so as to produce the forced displacement
e.
𝑃𝑠𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡 = 𝐾𝑠𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡 ⋅ 𝑒 ,
where 𝐾𝑠𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡 is the corresponding support
stiffness.
306

If the stiffness of the support element is large enough, the

secondary deflections due to other loads will be negligible.
Therefore, you may apply forced displacements only to the
supports stiff enough relative to the stiffness of the structure (at
least 103 times larger) in the corresponding direction. Check this
assumption every time, by checking the displacement results and
verifying the displacement at the respective node.
A positive forced displacement moves the node in the positive
direction of the local axis.

4.10.22. Influence line

Lets you apply a relative displacement load to

obtain the influence line of an internal force
component, on the selected truss/beam
elements.
You must specify the value of the relative
displacement e as +1 or –1.

 You can define influence line load, only in an influence line type load case.
See... 4.10.1 Load cases, load groups
Truss You can specify the value of the relative displacement ex as +1 or –1.

Beam You can specify the value of the relative displacement ex / ey / ez / x / y / z

as +1 or –1.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 307

4.10.23. Seismic loads – SE1 module

The SE1 module includes several tools that facilitate the execution of Modal Response Spectrum
Analysis (MRSA) in AxisVM. The tools automatically perform seismic load generation in three
orthogonal directions for each vibration mode; calculation of structural response for each vibration
mode and combination of modal responses into a governing seismic effect. The following guide
provides information on the settings and options available in the program and explains how to use
them. Due to the vast literature of MRSA it is not possible to provide a step-by-step theoretical
explanation to the application of such an analysis here.

Design Codes Calculations are performed according to regulations in the general Eurocode standards (particularly
Eurocode 8) complemented by the National Annex that corresponds to the Design Code selected by
the user. Exceptions to this approach are the Swiss and Hungarian National Standards, which are not
based on the Eurocodes. The standards in the program for which MRSA calculation is available are
listed below.
Eurocode general EN 1998-1:2004 (EC 8-1)
Eurocode 8 Design of structures for earthquake resistance
Part 1: General rules, seismic actions and rules for buildings
EN 1998-1:2004 DIN EN 1998-1/NA:2011-01
EC German
NPR 9998:2018
EC Dutch
EN 1998-1:2004
EC Hungarian
P100-1-2013
EC Romanian

EN 1998-1:2004
EC Czech
EN 1998-1:2004
EC Slovakian

EN 1998-1:2004
EC Polish
EN 1998-1:2004
EC Danish

EN 1998-1:2004
EC Austrian
EC British EN 1998-1:2004

EC Finnish EN 1998-1:2004

EC Belgian EN 1998-1:2004

EC Swedish EN 1998-1:2004

DM 14/01/2008
NTC Italian

SIA 261:2003
Swiss

Hungarian National
Standard (MSZ)
Romanian STAS

German DIN 1045-1 DIN 4149:2005-04

MRSA procedure Seismic loads are generated based on the vibration mode shapes in all design codes. Loads are
applied in linear static analysis and the effects of several mode shapes are combined to get the design
internal forces and displacements of the structure. The following parts provide details on the
calculation process. First, the general Eurocode procedure is presented followed by a summary of
country-specific modifications.
308

4.10.23.1. Seismic load calculation according to Eurocode 8

1. Calculate vibration modes
Seismic load generation requires information on undamped free
vibration frequencies and corresponding mode shapes. Thus, the
first step in creating seismic loads is the calculation of a sufficiently
large number of mode shapes and corresponding frequencies of
vibration. This analysis is performed at the Vibration tab by running
a Vibration analysis (5.2).
First order vibration analysis is typically sufficient for seismic load generation. Results depend on the
stiffness of structural elements and the mass distribution of the structure. Masses can be determined
based on a pre-defined load combination that represents the so-called seismic mass of the structure.
Alternatively, lumped masses can be placed in the structural model by the user. Stiffness reduction in
reinforced concrete elements can also be taken into consideration automatically.
Use the Modal mass factors table in the Table Browser to check if the number of calculated vibration
modes is sufficiently large to fulfil the requirements of the applicable standard. The general Eurocode
8 has two requirements: (1) the total considered modal mass in each direction shall exceed 90% of the
total mass; (2) all mode shapes corresponding to a modal mass larger than 5% of the total mass shall
be taken into consideration. The sums of modal mass factors are shown at the bottom of the table.

The user can indicate which mode shapes shall

be used for seismic load generation by putting
a tick in the Active column of the table.
Right-clicking any cell in the Active column
triggers a popup menu, where the Turn on/off
mode shapes dialog can be selected. This
dialog window lets the user define threshold
values for automatic mode shape filtering in
each direction. The checkbox at the bottom of
the window allows the user the request auto-
matic filtering after every vibration analysis.
Filtering mode shapes can significantly reduce
the number of seimic load cases and con-
sequently, the time required for static analysis.
2. Create a new seismic load case
After having the mode shapes available, the seismic load case shall be created at the Loads tab in the
Load Cases and Load Groups dialog window. Select the Seismic load case among the icons of New
Cases. The program will automatically create several new load cases for the seismic load and these will
be supplemented by others after the details of seismic load generation are set. The naming con-
vention for load cases is explained in the static analysis part of this section.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 309

3. Set seismic load parameters

Select any of the generated seismic load cases and click on the Seismic load icon in the Loads tab to
open the Seismic Load dialog window.

Reference value of
ground acceleration
Importance
Behaviour factor factor

Displacement
Soil class behaviour factor

Spectral function
editor

Design response
spectrum parameters

The first tab of the dialog window lets the user set details of the horizontal response spectrum. The
horizontal response spectrum is used to calculate equivalent static loads for each vibration mode
shape in two orthogonal horizontal directions. The spectrum can either be automatically generated
using the functions given in EC8-1 4.2.4 and the parameters provided by the user, or a custom spec-
trum can be defined in the Spectral function editor.
Spectral function editor to create custom spectra

Save spectrum as...

Display time period of calculated modal shapes: Turns on/off the display of time periods provided by
the vibration analysis. Time periods are marked by a vertical pink line at the respective T value.
The automatically generated spectrum uses the following parameters:
agR – Reference peak ground acceleration on rock m/s2
q – Behaviour factor for the reduction of horizontal seismic effects as per EC 8-1 3.2.2.5 (3)P. After
checking Different q factors in X and Y directions, independent qX and qY values can be defined by the
user.
S, TB, TC, TD – Soil-specific parameters that define the spectral shape. If the type of soil is selected from
the list of soil classes, these parameters are automatically loaded according to Tables 3.2 and 3.3 in EC
8-1. Every value can be overridden by the user.
β – Lower bound factor for the horizontal design spectrum. The recommended value in EC 8-1 3.2.2.5
(4)P is 0.2.
310

γI – Importance factor as per EC 8-1 4.2.5

qd – Displacement behaviour factor as per EC 8-1 4.3.4 (1)P

Custom spectra are defined in the Spectral function editor after setting the Design spectrum from Par-
ametric shape to Custom. Spectra are created in the editor by a piecewise linear approximation of the
spectral shape over a list of pre-defined natural period – spectral acceleration coordinate pairs.
Coordinates can be edited, copied to or pasted from other programs.

The second tab of the Seismic Load dialog window corresponds to the parameters of the vertical
response spectrum. Note that the effect of seismic excitation in the vertical (Z) direction is only taken
into account if a vertical response spectrum is defined. Vertical loads are not generated by default.
Parameters and the layout of this tab are identical to the first one.

The third tab lets the user decide if torsional effects due to accidental eccentricity shall be taken into
account. If the user wishes to consider such effects, then the program calculates additional torsional
moments around the vertical axis for every story and every mode shape. The magnitude of torsional
moments depends on the horizontal load and eccentricity of each story.
Horizontal loads are retrieved from load cases corresponding to each vibration mode and horizontal
direction.
The size of eccentricity relative to the total size of each story is defined by the user. An accidental
eccentricity of 5% is recommended in EC 8-1 4.3.2 (1)P.

Torsional moments are calculated with the following expressions:

𝑇X,𝑖,𝑗 = 𝐹X,𝑖,𝑗 ⋅ (±𝑒𝐻Y,𝑖 )
𝑇Y,𝑖,𝑗 = 𝐹Y,𝑖,𝑗 ⋅ (±𝑒𝐻X,𝑖 )
where F is the horizontal force in mode j at the ith story; H is the size
of the ith story in the given X or Y direction. Torsional moments are
considered with either + or – signs, but always with the same sign at
all stories.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 311

The last tab of the Seismic Load dialog window provides control over the combination of results for
individual modes and individual directions. Results from individual modes can be combined using
either the Square Root of Sum of Squares (SRSS) or the Complete Quadratic Combination (CQC)
method. The latter is considered more appropriate if the vibration modes of the structure are not well
separated (i.e. vibration frequencies are close to each other).
Selecting the automatic option lets the program automatically decide if application of the CQC meth-
od is warranted by the vibration results. The program considers modes i and j well separated if the
following condition holds: Tj / Ti < 0.9.
Results in the two horizontal and the vertical direction can be combined using either of the two com-
monly used combination methods displayed in the dialog window.
The seismic effects in various directions can also be summed up manually by creating custom load
combination. SMX, SMY and SMZ and load cases connected to these (see below) are also available in
the table of load combinations, see… 4.10.2 Load combinations.

 Warning! Multiple load cases belonging to the same direction or SMX, SMY, SMZ and SM+/-
load cases must not be taken into account in the same combination collectively.

After the load parameters are set and the Seismic Load dialog window is closed by clicking the OK
button, the program generates a load case for each mode and direction according to the settings
defined by the user. The following naming convention is used for these load cases:
Load cases ending in 01X, 02X, ....nX, 01Y, 02Y, ....nY, 01Z, 02Z, ....nZ are the equivalent forces in X,
Y or Z direction corresponding to individual mode shapes.
Load cases ending in 01tX, 02tX, ....ntX, 01tY, 02tY, ....ntY are the torsional moments due to
accidental eccentricity in X or Y direction.

4. Perform linear static analysis and evaluate results

Modal response spectrum analysis uses a combination of linear static analysis results to get the design
seismic effects for the structure under consideration. After the load cases for each vibration mode in
each direction are created, the next step in the MRSA procedure is to run the linear static analyses.
The program will automatically calculate the effect of each mode in each direction and combine these
effects according to the settings in the Seismic Load dialog window.
After running linear static analyses, there are several seismic load cases available in the list of results
under the Static tab. We use the following naming convention for seismic load cases:
Besides load cases corresponding to individual modes, there are two types of additional results. Load
case names ending in X, Y, or Z contain the combined response from modal results in the X, Y or Z
direction. If accidental eccentricity is considered, there is an additional a or b in the name of load
cases corresponding to horizontal directions. The letters a or b correspond to torsional effects with
positive or negatvie eccentricity, respectively. Ya for instance is a combination of modal results in the
Y direction considering the effect of positive eccentricity of seismic masses in the X direction.
Combination of load cases in X, Y, Z directions is performed by the program automatically. Such
combination yields a single, unanimous result if there is no accidental eccentricity. If accidental
eccentricity is assumed, the combination of effects from several directions is more ambiguous. There
are four basic cases considered in the program depending on the direction of eccentricity in the X and
Y load cases. Each of the following combinations are performed and stored in a load case with its
name ending with the particular number:
312

1 = Xa + Ya + Z
2 = Xa + Yb + Z
3 = Xb + Ya + Z
4 = Xb + Yb + Z

MRSA results are absolute values by definition. Therefore, the load cases presented above would
contain only positive values. The least favorable loading scenario is a combination of seismic effects
and effects from other sources such as gravity loading. Creation of this load combination is facilitated
in the program by providing two load cases for each seismic load: seismic effects with only positive
and seismic effects with only negative values are identified by a + and a – sign at the end of the
name of their load cases. Note that the absolute values of corresponding responses (internal forces,
displacements, etc.) are identical in the + and – load cases.

Displacement results shown in the Static tab are automatically scaled by the qd factor specified in the
Seismic Load dialog window.

Second order effects due to geometric nonlinearity shall be taken into consideration when evaluat-
ing the results of MRSA. The program supports such calculations with the data in the Seismic sensitivi-
ty of stories table in the Table Browser. Independent results are available in the table for each horizon-
tal direction.
The following quantities are calculated by the program:
θmax – plastic stability index, also known as the interstory drift sensitivity coefficient as per
EC8-1 4.4.2.2 (2)
Ptot – total gravity load above the storey
Vtot – total seismic storey shear
dmax – design interstory displacement calculated as the relative displacement of corresponding
storey centroids
S– location of the shear center
Gm – location of the centroid
M– storey mass
Imz – moment of inertia at the centroid about the Z axis

AxisVM does not consider the influence of second order effects automatically through internal force
amplification. The user shall evaluate the sensitivity of the structure to such effects. If the influence of
second order effects can be taken into consideration through force amplification, then the user shall
determine the appropriate value of the amplification factor as per EC8-1 4.4.2.2 (3). That amplification
factor can be specified in the program as the fse factor in the following design tools:

6.5.1 Surface reinforcement parameters and reinforcement calculation - RC1 module

6.5.9.2 Check of reinforced columns according to Eurocode 2
6.5.11.3 Checking actual beam reinforcement
6.5.12.1.1 Punching analysis of columns according to Eurocode
6.5.13 Footing design – RC4 module
6.6.1 Steel beam design according to Eurocode 3 – SD1 module
6.6.3 Bolted joint design of steel
The fse factor scales only the internal forces from seismic load.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 313

4.10.23.2. Seismic load calculation according to Swiss SIA 261

The calculation procedure, dialog windows, assumptions and features are identical to those presented
in the general Eurocode 8 section. The following paragraphs list only the modifications that are
unique to the SIA 261 standard.
3. Set seismic load parameters
The following modifications are applied at the Seismic Load dialog window:
- Horizontal and vertical response spectra are based on SIA261 16.2.4.
- Soil-specific parameters are set according to Table 25 in SIA261.

4.10.23.3. Seismic load calculation according to German EC8-1 NA

The calculation procedure, dialog windows, assumptions and features are identical to those presented
in the general Eurocode 8 section. The following paragraphs list only the modifications that are
unique to the DIN EN 1998-1/NA (EC8-1 NA)standard.
3. Set seismic load parameters
The following modifications are applied at the Seismic Load dialog window:
- Horizontal and vertical response spectra are based on EC8-1 NA NDP 3.2.2.5(4)P.
- Soil-specific parameters are set according to Tables NA.4 and NA.5 in EC8-1 NA.

4.10.23.4. Seismic load calculation according to Italian DM2008

The calculation procedure, dialog windows, assumptions and features are identical to those presented
in the general Eurocode 8 section. The following paragraphs list only the modifications that are
unique to the DM2008 standard.
3. Set seismic load parameters
The following modifications are applied at the Seismic Load dialog window:
- Horizontal and vertical response spectra are based on DM2008 3.2.3.2.
- Soil-specific parameters are set according to Tables 3.2.V-VII in DM 2008 3.2.3.2.

4.10.23.5. Seismic load calculation according to Romanian P100-1

The calculation procedure, dialog windows, assumptions and features are identical to those presented
in the general Eurocode 8 section. The following paragraphs list only the modifications that are
unique to the P100-1 standard.
3. Set seismic load parameters
The following modifications are applied at the Seismic Load dialog window:
- Horizontal and vertical response spectra are based on P100-1 3.1(7), 3.1(13), and 3.2(1).

4.10.23.6. Seismic load calculation according to Dutch NPR 9998:2015

The calculation procedure, dialog windows, assumptions and features are identical to those presented
in the general Eurocode 8 section. The following paragraphs list only the modifications that are
unique to the NPR 9998:2015 standard.
3. Set seismic load parameters
The following modifications are applied at the Seismic Load dialog window:
- Horizontal and vertical response spectra are based on NPR 9998:2018 3.2.2.2.3.

The ag;d acceleration and p, TB, TC, TD parameters shall be specified by the user according to the code
or the code conforming NPR 9998 web tool.
314

4.10.24. Pushover loads – SE2 module

Pushover loads are generated according to the regulations of Eurocode 8 (EN 1998-1:2004) by default.
The load generation uses undamped free vibration frequencies and corresponding mode shapes of
the model, therefore loads can only be generated if a vibration analysis has already been performed.

Steps of pushover The following description shows how to create pushover load cases and set their properties before
load generation performing a nonlinear static analysis.
1. Calculate vibration mode shapes and frequencies.
When running the vibration analysis be sure to use the convert loads to masses option with the
appropriate load case if there are loads defined that need to be considered static. Check the table of
Modal mass factors in the Table Browser. Vibration results will appear only if the Vibration tab is
selected.

Although there is no requirement in Eurocode 8 for the minimum value of seismic equivalence coeffi-
cient, it is strongly advised to perform standard pushover analysis only on structures having clearly
dominant mode shapes in each horizontal direction. The coefficients for each mode shape are listed in
the Modal mass factors table. Unlike seismic loads, standard pushover load generation uses a single
vibration mode shape for each load case, therefore the sum of seismic equivalence coefficients is not
important. Thus there is no need to calculate a large number of modes if the dominant ones are
among the first few.

2. Create a new pushover load case.

Pushover load cases can be created, renamed and deleted in the Load cases & load groups dialog
window. The initial configuration of four load cases is created by clicking on the Pushover load button.

3. Setting pushover load parameters.

After creating the load cases the parameters for the loads can be set up by clicking on the Pushover
analysis button on the toolbar of the Loads tab.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 315

The parameters for load generation can be

set up at the top, while the story levels
used for interstory drift calculation are
specified at the bottom part of the win-
dow. (Previously defined story data is also
available here)
Load generation for a specific direction can
be disabled using the topmost checkboxes.
This is useful in case the model is two
dimensional. For each direction the vibra-
tion analysis type and the assigned load
case needs to be selected first. The check-
boxes below turn the uniform and modal
load generation on or off respectively. The
uniform load distribution option generates
nodal forces proportional to the masses
assigned to each node in the model. The
modal load distribution uses the mode
shape weighed by the masses at each
node to generate the nodal force distribu-
tion. In both cases the sum of forces gen-
erated is 1 kN in the same horizontal direc-
tion.
If modal loads are to be generated it is possible to override the dominant mode shape used for load
generation. It is important to emphasize that this option is only for advanced users and Eurocode 8
requires the use of dominant mode shape for analysis. The number in parentheses by each mode
number shows the corresponding seismic equivalence coefficient.

It is also possible to include the effects of accidental eccentiricities and the resultant torsional
moments. AxisVM calculates the force system equivalent to the torsional moments for each story.
The sum of the signed pushover loads will be still 1 kN but the resultant force will be eccentric causing
torsion.
Pushover loads are generated only after closing the dialog window. Unnecessary load cases are also
removed at this time.

4. Run a Nonlinear Static Analysis

After defining loads for pushover load cases the pushover analysis shall be run using the Nonlinear
Static Analysis button under the Static tab of the main window. Setting the solution control to
Pushover lets the user select a parametric and a constant load case. The parametric load case is
typically a pushover load case, however AxisVM does allow users to define other load cases as
parametric too. The constant load case represents gravitational loads in most cases. The other settings
of this dialog window are explained in 6.1 Static chapter.
The control node shall be one of the nodes at the top of the structure. It is important to set the
direction of the analysis according to the direction of the parametric load case. The stability of the
analysis can be increased significantly by increasing the number of increments. Following geometric
nonlinearity is recommended for pushover analyses. The analysis is started by clicking the OK button.
Generation of capacity curves and related results are explained in 6.1.4 Pushover capacity curves
chapter.
316

4.10.25. Global imperfection

After selecting an imperfection load case, the above icon for imperfection load becomes enabled.
After setting the imperfection parameters the global imperfection is applied to the structure (its
displayed amplitude is magnified to make it more visible).
Imperfection load cases can contribute to load combinations used to perform analysis with geometric
nonlinearity. Nodes will be shifted from their original positions and the other loads in the
combination will be applied to the distorted structure.

Parameters Global imperfection requires the following parameters.

Sway direction Defines the direction of the shift. It can act

• in global X or Y direction
• in a Custom  angle measured from the global X axis

Base level It is the Z0 level where the sway begins. Two options are available
• Set it to the Lowest point of the model
• Set it to a custom Z0 level

Structure height The structure height is measured from the Z0 base level. Available options are
from base level • Set it from the highest point of the model
• Set it to a custom h value

Inclination Inclination is calculated from the following formula: Φ = Φ0 𝛼ℎ 𝛼𝑚 , where

2 2
𝛼ℎ is a reduction factor: 𝛼ℎ = with ≤ 𝛼ℎ ≤ 1
√(ℎ[𝑚]) 3

1
𝛼𝑚 is a reduction factor: 𝛼𝑚 = √0.5 (1 + ) where m is the number of columns involved per level
𝑚
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 317

4.10.26. Tensioning - PS1 module

Tendons can be assigned to a continuous selection of beam or rib elements. After defining tendon
properties and the tensioning process AxisVM determines the stress distribution in tendons immedi-
Post-tensioning ately after anchoring and the equivalent loads at the end of tensioning (load case name-T0). After
completing a static analysis the program determines the time dependent losses of prestress and the
long term equivalent loads from the result of quasi-permanent combinations (load case name-TI).
Tendon trajectory tables can be generated with user-defined steps.
Tendons The first tab is to define tendon parameters and geometry.

The geometry of a tendon can be defined in a stationary coordinate system (left icon) or in a moving
coordinate system (right icon). The stationary coordinate system fits to a straight line, which connects
the first and last node in such a way that axis x is defined by this line and axis y is defined by the initial
y axis of the beam. While the direction of axis z is determined in a right-handed coordinate system.
If the tensioned rod elements are not on a straight line (defined by an arc, or a polygon), then moving
coordinate system can be chosen. If the beam is an arc, then the coordinate system moves along this
arc. If the structure is defined by a polygon of broken lines, then the geometry is interpolated by a
cubic spline. The x axis of this coordinate system fits to the tangent of the generated curve, while axis z
follows the local z axis of the beam at each and every point. Axis y is defined in a right-handed coordi-
nate system.

The geometry of the tendon can be seen in the following three views:
Uncoiled view In the uncoiled view the position of the tendon can be seen in the working plane.
Continuous lines represent the section of the working plane and the elements.
Dashed lines shows the centre line and the projection of the beams’ edges on the
uncoiled working plane.
Cross-section In this view the tendon points are shown in the y-z section (cross-section).
3D view The 3D view shows the cable and the elements in 3D.

Note: The base points of the geometry and the inflection points are shown both in the uncoiled view
and 3D view.
Icons on the vertical toolbar beside the tendon list are
Add new tendon
Geometry for the new tendon can be defined using the toolbar beside the diagram.
318

First the tendon parameters must be defined.

Segments (2D)/ The user can define the geometry of the tendon as a series of segments (straight-parabola-arc connec-
Spline(2D/3D) tions) or spline curve.
Ep modulus of elasticity of tendon steel,
Ap cross-section area of the tendon
fpk characteristic tensile strength of tendon steel
 coefficient of friction between the tendon and its sleeve
k unintentional angular displacement for internal tendons per unit length. Shows the pre-
cision of workmanship. Ususally 0.005 < k < 0.01.
Rmin Minimum radius of curvature. Where the radius of curvature is smaller than this limit
tendons are displayed in red.
Relaxation Relaxation class depends on the relaxation properties of the tendon. Wires and strands
class belong to Relaxation class 2, hot-rolled and processed bars belong to Relaxation class 3.
Injected If ducts are filled with an injected material this option must be checked.
Note: To modify the properties above choose the active tendon and click on the Tendon properties
button.
Spline(2D/3D) To draw tendon geometry click the icons on the vertical toolbar beside the drawing and enter base
points. AxisVM determines the trajectory passing through these base points as a cubic spline to mini-
mize curvature. For each basepoint the angles of tangent can be specified by setting the 𝛼 (top view)
and 𝛽 (side view) values in the table. Enter values between –180° and 180°. Initial values are 0°. Existing
base points can be dragged to a new position using the mouse.
Draw tendon in 2D. Base points can be created by clicking the diagram or using the coordinate window.
Double-click or right click and choose Complete from the popup menu to make the base point the last
one. The tendon position within the cross-section has to be specified only at the first base point. Fur-
ther base points will be in the local x-z (uncoiled) plane containing the first base point.
Steps of drawing a tendon in 2D:
1. Select the position of the cross-section where you want to define the tendon basepoint.
2. Settle the tendon onto the proper position in the cross-section view.
You can position the tendon onto the top or at the bottom of the cross-section considering
the concrete cover:

The program identifies the lower or upper edge of the cross section
in the x-z view. If the concrete cover is checked, then the cable is
defined by considering the entered magnitude of concrete cover.
3. Following the first location you can position the other points of the tendon onto the longitu-
dinal section.

Draw tendon in 3D. The tendon position within the cross-section has to be specified at every basepoint.
You can close a tendon geometry with using Mouse Right Button/Complete.
Steps of drawing a tendon in 3D:
1. Select the position of the cross-section where you want to define the tendon basepoint.
2. Settle the tendon onto the proper position in the cross-section view.
Following the first location repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to define all basepoint.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 319

Add new base point. Click the cable to add a new base point. In case of several tendons this function
only works with the active tendon.

Delete base point. Clicking an existing base point deletes it. After deleting the second base point the
tendon geometry is deleted. In case of several tendons this function only works with the active tendon.

Table of base points Base point properties can be edited in the table. The table and the toolbar beside the table contains
the following:
The following functions are available on the toolbar:

x, y, z the Cartesian coordinates of the base points,

Tangent the direction of the tangent can be defined if this field is checked,
α, β the angle between the x direction and the tangent on the x-y plane and on the
x-z plane.

Add a new base point Copy tendon data to the Clipboard

Delete selected lines Paste tendon data from the Clipboard

Segments 2D This method builds the tendon from segments. Each segment is built from two or three basic subseg-
ments. Click on the toolbar icons beside the tendon diagram to choose geometry of the subsegments.

Note: x, y and z coordinates represents the points in the moving coordinate system if that was chosen
As the segments are planar curves, which lie on the uncoiled plane the software let the user choose a
new, rotated coordinate system with offset. The offset takes place in the cross-section’s y-z plane and
the rotation is around axis x. The origin, and the orientation of the working plane in the uncoiled view
can be chosen.
The plane of the cable can be modified with the following buttons:
By choosing vertical plane the z orientation of the cable coincides with the beam’s z axis.
If the uncoiled plane should be inclined, then the user can define the inclination of the
plane on the cross-section. In both cases a new origin can be defined.

The one letter abbreviations are:

C arc of a circle with a defined radius,

P parabolic arc
L straight line,
x there is no intermediate curve.

Options:

Simplified definition In case of simplified definition the start and end tangents are horizontal and it
is enough to set the first segment type. If the last subsegment of the first seg-
ment is an arc all subsequent segment will be CLC. If it is a parabolic arc all
subsequent segments will be PLP.
Show segment Shows the boundaries of segments and the boundaries between the curves
borders inside the segments.
After these settings the segments can be placed between given start and end points. The start and end
points and the tangents and the length of segments can be modified in the Table of segments.
320

Table of segments The properties of the defined segments can be modified in the Table of segments. The table and the
toolbar beside it contain the following functions:

x0, z0 the coordinates of the start point of the tendon segment,

α0 the angle of the tendon tangent at the start point,
Radius in the case of arc(s) the radius (radii) can be defined,
ΔxP the x-directional length of the first parabola
ΔxL the x-directional length of the straight line,
ΔL the x-directional length of the segment,
x1, z1 the coordinates of the end point of the tendon segment,
α1 the angle of the tendon tangent at the end point.

Note: not all geometrical parameters are available for different segment types. For instance the tan-
gent at the start cannot be modified for straight line-arc segments, as the tangent is already defined by
the coordinates of the start and end points and the radius of the arc.

Add a new segment Copy tendon data to the Clipboard

Delete selected segments Paste tendon data from the Clipboard

Geometrical tansformations of tendons

Tendons selected in the tree can be translated or mirrored. Tendons can be copied or just moved.
Copied tendons inherit the original parameters and the tensioning process assigned to them.

Delete tendon. Deletes the selected tendon.

Options. Separate grid and cursor settings for the longitudinal and cross-section tendon diagram.

Concrete parameters Under the concrete parameters the material properties of the concrete can be
checked. Moreover, 𝑒𝑐𝑠 (∞), the long term value of the concrete shrinkage strain
can be modified.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 321

Tensioning The second tab is to define the tensioning process for tendons by determining the order of certain
process operations.

Possible operations and parameters:

Tensioning from left / right / both side

Force as a fraction of the characteristic value of tendon
Release from left / right / both side steel tensile strength (𝑓𝑝𝑘 ).

Anchor on left / right / both side Wedge draw-in of the anchorage device

Deletes the last operation from the list.

Include tension loss due to sequential stressing If more than one cable relates to a structural element,
then these cables can be stressed at different time
instant. Because of it, stress loss arises in the previously
anchored tensioned cables. With this option the user
can take into account this phenomenon.
Number of steps If the user takes into account the loss from sequential
tensioning, then the number of the tensioning steps
should be set up here.

Results If valid material parameters, geometry and tensioning processes are assigned to every tendon, result
diagrams are displayed on the third tab. The upper diagram shows the ratio of the actual tension and
the characteristic tensile strength of the selected tendons. The lower diagram shows the chosen
equivalent distributed load component for the selected tendons.
322

Component the component of the equivalent load system can be choosen. Three force com-
ponents and three moment components are available.

Time the stresses in the cable and the equivalent load component can be illustrated
right after the tensioning (choosing T=0) and after long term losses (choosing
T=∞). The components, relating to T=∞ can be choosen only after a statc analy-
sis.

Immediate losses of tension:

1. Tension loss due to friction between tendons and their sleeves at position x measured from the
anchorage point along the tendon is calculated as
𝜎𝜇 (𝑥) = 𝜎𝑚𝑎𝑥 (1 − 𝑒 −𝜇(Θ+𝑘𝑥) ),
where
𝜎𝑚𝑎𝑥 is the maximum tension in the tendon
Θ is the sum of the absolute angular displacements over a distance x

2. Losses due to the instantaneous deformation of concrete are calculated as

𝑗Δ𝜎𝑐
Δ𝑃𝑒𝑙 = 𝐴𝑝 𝐸𝑝 ∑ [ ],
𝐸𝑐𝑚
where
Δ𝜎𝑐 is the variation of stress at the centrer of gravity of the cross-section
𝑗 = (𝑛 − 1)/2𝑛 , where n is the number of stressing steps
𝐸𝑐𝑚 is the secant modulus of elasticity of concrete

3. Losses at anchorage are due to wedge draw-in of the anchorage devices.

Long term loss of tension

Long term loss of force due to shrinkage and creep of the concrete and the relaxation of the tendon is
calculated as
𝐸𝑝
𝜖𝑐𝑠 𝐸𝑝 + 0.8Δ𝜎𝑝𝑟 + 𝜑𝜎
𝐸𝑐𝑚 𝑐,𝑄𝑃
Δ𝑃𝑐+𝑠+𝑟 = 𝐴𝑝 Δ𝜎𝑐+𝑠+𝑟 = 𝐴𝑝 ,
𝐸𝑝 𝐴𝑝 𝐴 2
1+ (1 + 𝑐 𝑧𝑐𝑝 )[1 + 0.8𝜑]
𝐸𝑐𝑚 𝐴𝑐 𝐼𝑐
where
Δ𝜎𝑐+𝑠+𝑟 is the tension loss due to the effects above
𝐸𝑐𝑚 is the secant modulus of elasticity of concrete
Δ𝜎𝑝𝑟 is the long term absolute tension loss due to the relaxation of tendons
in case of 2nd relaxation class :
Δ𝜎𝑝𝑟 = 𝜎𝑚𝑎𝑥 ⋅ 0.6𝜌1000 𝑒 9.1𝜇 ⋅ 5000.75(1−𝜇) ⋅ 10−5 ,

in case of 3rd relaxation class :

Δ𝜎𝑝𝑟 = 𝜎𝑚𝑎𝑥 ⋅ 1.98𝜌1000 𝑒 8𝜇 ⋅ 5000.75(1−𝜇) ⋅ 10−5 ,
where 𝜌1000 = 2.5% is the relaxation loss at a mean temperature of 20°C at 1000 hours after
tensioning
𝜑 final value of creep coefficient
𝜎𝑐,𝑄𝑃 is the stress in the concrete adjacent to the tendons, due to self-weight and initial prestress
and other quasi-permanent actions where relevant.
Ap is the total cross-section area of tendons
Ac is the cross-section area of the concrete
Ic is the second moment area of the concrete section
zcp is the distance between the centre of gravity of the concrete section and the tendons
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 323

Trajectory table The last tab is to build a trajectory table for the selected tendons with the desired increment and op-
tional shift of origin. The trajectory table consists of the local y and z coordinates of the selected ten-
dons at the calculated x positions.
The defined basepoints are always displayed in the trajectory table.

Main toolbar The main toolbar has two buttons.

Copies the drawing on the active tab to the Clipboard as a Windows metafile. This way the diagram
can be pasted to other applications (e.g. Word).
Copy diagram
Ctrl+C
Prints a report of the tensioning using diagrams and tables. Tendons and report items can be selected.
You can choose the position of the drawing (landscape or portrait) and set the scale of it (Print options
Print for drawings).
Ctrl+P

Cross-sections can be selected to print cross-section diagrams.

324

Menu You can reach the following functions via the menu:

File

Print See… Main toolbar / Print

Edit

Undo/Redo Undoes the effect of the previous command./ Executes the command which was undone.

Copy diagram See… Main toolbar / Copy diagram

Geometrical trans- See… Tendons / Geometrical transformations of tendons

formations of ten-
dons

Window

Coordinates Editing of the longitudinal and cross-section diagrams is made easier by a coordinate window.
The display of this window can be turned on and off.

Status On diagrams an information window appears displaying diagram-specific information. Display of this
window can be turned on and off.

4.10.27. Moving loads

Moving loads allow modeling of a drifting load with a constant intensity like a vehicle crossing a
bridge or a crane carriage moving along its runway.
To define a moving load a moving load case must exist. It can be created on the Loads tab clicking the
Load cases and load groups icon. See… 4.10.1 Load cases, load groups. Moving load icons will be ena-
bled only if the current load case is a moving load case. After defining the load new load cases will be
created automatically according to the number of steps specified. Auto-created load cases are main-
tained and updated automatically and they cannot be deleted or moved into another load group
individually. Increasing the number of load steps will create additional load cases. Decreasing this
number makes certain load cases useless. These excess load cases will be removed only before saving
the model.
Moving load symbols can be displayed in two ways. The first option is to draw the current phase only.
The second one is to draw other phases in gray.
Open Table Browser to see the load and the load path in tabular format. These tables can be also
used for reporting purposes.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 325

4.10.27.1. Moving loads on line elements

Moving load on line elements is a load pattern moving on a user-defined load path in N steps. The
load pattern can contain any combination of concentrated and distributed loads.
Individual loads in the pattern can be local or global and their position, eccentricity and intensity
components can be set. This way the vertical load of a crane carriage and the horizontal forces can be
applied together on the runway. Load eccentricity is always parallel to the local y axis. If it is on the left
side when moving along the path its eccentricity is negative. If it is on the right side, its eccentricity is
positive.
Loads can be added to the pattern by clicking the plus icon and filling out the fields in the row. Se-
lected rows can be deleted by clicking the Delete icon under the plus icon.
Load patterns can be saved under a name and reloaded.

After load pattern definition it is necessary to select the load path. It must be a continuous sequence
of beams or ribs. After selecting the elements constituting the load path the startpoint and endpoint
has to be selected. These points must be nodes along the path.
Beside the load path button the value of N can be set. It determines the number of steps the load
pattern will make evenly along the path.
The local z direction of the load pattern will always be the local z direction of the line elements it is
placed on. Lengthening, shortening or breaking a line element of the path will lead to an automatic
recalculation of the load phases.
In the first phase the load with the lowest coordinate in the pattern will be placed over the startpoint.
In the last phase the load with the highest coordinate in the pattern will be placed over the endpoint.
Crane runway mode
In the first phase the load with the highest coordinate in the pattern will be placed over the startpoint.
In the last phase the load with the lowest coordinate in the pattern will be placed over the endpoint.
Bridge mode
One way: Load moves from startpoint to endpoint in N steps.

Round trip: Load moves from startpoint to endpoint and back in 2N steps.
326

4.10.27.2. Moving loads on domains

This load type is convenient when vehicle loads has to be defined. The load pattern consists of concen-
trated or rectangular surface loads pairs representing the wheels on the axles.
u is the vehicle gauge, a and b refer to the rectangle dimensions. Axle load F will be distri-buted evenly
on the two wheels. Load patterns can be saved under a name and reloaded.
The load type and direction switches on the left determines the properties of all loads
entered into the table.
Loads can be added to the pattern by clicking the plus icon and filling out the fields in the row. Select-
ed rows can be deleted by clicking the Delete icon under the plus icon.
After load pattern definition it is necessary to select the load path. It must be a continuous polyline
running through domains.
The load path does not have to stay in the same plane and can cross holes or empty areas
between domains.
Path startpoint and endpoint is the first and last point of the polyline.
Each phase will contain only the loads actually falling on a domain. The local z direction of the load
pattern will be the local z direction of the domain it is placed on. In case of a path running along the
edge of two or more domains in different planes only the domains in the active parts are taken into
account. The local z direction will be chosen finding the domain with the minimum angle between local
z and global Z directions.
Beside the load path button the value of N can be set. It determines the number of steps the load pat-
tern will make evenly along the path.
In the first phase the load with the lowest coordinate in the pattern will be placed over the startpoint. In
the last phase the load with the highest coordinate in the pattern will be placed over the endpoint.
Changing domain geometry will lead to an automatic recalculation of the load phases.
In the first phase the load with the lowest coordinate in the pattern will be placed over the startpoint. In
the last phase the load with the highest coordinate in the pattern will be placed over the endpoint.
Crane runway
mode
In the first phase the load with the highest coordinate in the pattern will be placed over the startpoint.
In the last phase the load with the lowest coordinate in the pattern will be placed over the endpoint.
Bridge mode
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 327

One way: Load moves from startpoint to endpoint in N steps.

Round trip: Load moves from startpoint to endpoint and back in 2N steps.

4.10.28. Dynamic loads (for time-history analysis) – DYN module

Dynamic nodal loads and acceleration functions can be defined for time-history analysis.
Acceleration functions can be used for seismic analysis. In this case it is recommended to
obtain proper seismic accelerograms and assign these functions to support nodes to analyse the ef-
fects of the earthquake. This method provides more exact results than the response spectrum analysis
and can be used even if nonlinear elements are defined in the model (nonlinear supports, tension-only
trusses, etc.). Its disadvantage is that it cannot be combined with other load types automatically.

 To define nodal loads or acceleration functions the current load case must be a dynamic load
case. See… 4.10.1 Load cases, load groups

Defining functions

Dynamic loads and accelerations are defined by functions which describe the parameter in time. Func-
tion editor is available from the dynamic load definition dialogs.
Functions must be entered as value pairs in a table. Functions are plotted automatically and can be
printed. Functions can be reused. In order to make them available later, save them into the function
library. Saved functions can be reloaded, edited and saved under a new name. Functions are saved into
separate *.dfn files in a dfn folder created under the main folder of the program.
 If the total duration of the dynamic analysis exceeds the length of the function in time the parameter values
beyond the end of the function are assumed to be zero.

Table editing functions

Add a new row to the table.

Delete selected rows from the table.

Copy the selected cells to the Clipboard.

328

Insert the content of the Clipboard into the table.

Formula editing.
The f(t) load function can be entered as a formula. The follwing opera-
tors and functions are available: +, –, * , /, (, ), sin, cos, tan, exp, ln, log10,
log2, sinh, cosh, tanh, arcsin, arccos, arctan, arcsinh, arccosh, arctanh, int,
round, frac, sqr, sqrt, abs, sgn, random.
random(t) returns a random number between 0 and 1.
A machine rotating about the Y axis has a dynamic load function with
the following X and Z components:

𝑓𝑋 (𝑡) = 𝑎 ⋅ cos (𝜔𝑡 + 𝜑) and 𝑓𝑍 (𝑡) = 𝑎 ⋅ sin (𝜔𝑡 + 𝜑)

As functions are represented as a series of values a t step and a Tmax

total time must be specified.
Resampling the original function with equidistant sampling.
The values of the new function at sampling instants locating between the original points is obtained by
interpolation. The following interpolation methods are available:
Linear
The original function is considered as piesewise linear and the values of the new function are ob-
tained from the linear segments. In the following picture the original function (blue line) and the
new resampled function (red line) can be seen together.

This method is recommended if the original function is really piecewise linear. If the original func-
tion is a sampled continuous function (e.g. measurement record or a function generated from Fou-
rier spectral composition), this method cannot approximate the original curved continuous func-
tion between the sample points. Moreover, in the preceding picture several local extreme values of
the original function is lost, because the sampling instances of the new function does not concide
with the original ones. In such cases the Whittaker-Shannon interpolation method is recommend-
ed.
Whittaker-Shannon
The original function is considered as an equidistant sampled continuous function and the values
of the new function are obtained from the reconstructed continuous function.
In the following picture the original function (blue line), the reconstructed continuous function
(green curve) and the new function (red line) can be seen together. It can also be seen that the
originally unsampled extreme values of the continuous function appeare in the reconstructed func-
tion.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 329

The implemented method is based on the Whittaker-Shannon interpolation formula [37]:

𝑛 𝑛 𝑡 − 𝑡𝑖
𝑡 − 𝑡𝑖 sin (𝜋 )
𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑤 (𝑡) = ∑ 𝑓(𝑡𝑖 ) ∙ sinc ( ) = ∑ 𝑓(𝑡𝑖 ) ∙ ℎ
ℎ 𝑡 − 𝑡𝑖
𝑖=1 𝑖=1 𝜋
ℎ
where ℎ is the sampling interval of the original function and 𝑡𝑖 = ℎ𝑖 is the sampling instance of
the ith point of the original function.
If the Nyquist criterion [38] is satisfied (the continuous function was bandlimited and the sample
rate of the original record was at least two times of the bandlimit), the original continuous function
can be perfectly reconstructed. Although a finite length function cannot be bandlimited the
Nyquist criterion can be well approximated in practical cases. Therefore, a good estimation of the
original continuous function can be obtained.
Since the Whittaker-Shannon interpolation function has infinite length the fading out end of the
functions may become wavy. To avoid this phenomenon a further cosine shape factor is used in
the implemented method:
𝑛 𝑡 − 𝑡𝑖
sin (𝜋 )
∑ 𝑓(𝑡𝑖 ) ∙ ℎ (𝑡) 𝑖𝑓 |𝑡 − 𝑡𝑖 | ≤ 0.5𝑇𝑤
𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑤 (𝑡) = 𝑡 − 𝑡𝑖 ∙ 𝑊𝑖
𝑖=1 𝜋
ℎ
{ 0 𝑖𝑓 |𝑡 − 𝑡𝑖 | > 0.5𝑇𝑤

𝑡 − 𝑡𝑖
1 + cos (𝜋 )
0.5𝑇𝑤
𝑖𝑓 |𝑡 − 𝑡𝑖 | ≤ 0.5𝑇𝑤
𝑊𝑖 (𝑡) = 2

{ 0 𝑖𝑓 |𝑡 − 𝑡𝑖 | > 0.5𝑇𝑤
where 𝑇𝑤 is the length of the cosine wavelet. It is set to 10% of the length of the record.
The following picture shows the original Whittaker-Shannon interpolation function (black curve),
the cosine shape factor (blue curve) and the resultant finite length interpolation function (red
curve).

In the following picture the wavy ends obtained with the original Whittaker-Shannon interpolation
formula (black curve) and smooth end with the wavelet interpolation (red curve) can be seen toge-
her. The blue circles show the sample points of the original function. It can be seen that in the
middle of the large amplitude part of record the reconstructed continuous functions obtained with
the different interpolation functions almoast coincide. But at the ends only the red curve is
smoothed.
330

 The Whittaker-Shannon interpolation method is available only for functions obtained from
equidistant sampling.

Correcting the acceleration record for producing zero final velocity and/or zero final displacement

Measured earthquake acceleration records usually does not produce exactly zero velocity and zero
displacement at the end of the record, because of measurement inaccuracies. The nonzero final veloci-
ty appears as an infinite motion of the supports with constant velocity beyond the end of the record.
The nonzero final displacement causes that the supports stop out of their original position at the end
of the record. Any of these inaccuracies can be eliminated by applying a small modification to the ac-
celeration record. The type of correction can be selected by the checkboxes. The blue graph shows the
original record and the red graph shows the corrected one. The correction rate is defined by the ratio of
the RMS values of the modification and of the original record.

√ 1 ∫𝑇(𝑎𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑟 (𝑡) − 𝑎(𝑡)) 𝑑𝑡

2
𝑅𝑀𝑆(𝑎𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑟 (𝑡) − 𝑎(𝑡)) 𝑇 0
𝐶𝑜𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒 = =
𝑅𝑀𝑆(𝑎(𝑡))
√1 ∫𝑇 𝑎2 (𝑡)𝑑𝑡
𝑇 0
where 𝑎(𝑡) is the original record and 𝑎𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑟 (𝑡) is the corrected one.
The implemented correction method is similar to that proposed by Wilson [39, Appendix J.4].
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 331

The velocity and the displacement at the end of the record are
𝑇 𝑇
𝑉 = ∫0 𝑎(𝑡)𝑑𝑡 U = ∫0 (𝑇 − 𝑡)𝑎(𝑡)𝑑𝑡

The corrected record is computed by

(1 + 𝑐1+ ℎ1 (𝑡) + 𝑐2+ ℎ2 (𝑡))𝑎(𝑡) 𝑖𝑓 𝑎(𝑡) ≥ 0
𝑎𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑟 (𝑡) = {
(1 + 𝑐1− ℎ1 (𝑡) + 𝑐2− ℎ2 (𝑡))𝑎(𝑡) 𝑖𝑓 𝑎(𝑡) < 0
𝑇−𝑡 𝑡
where ℎ1 (𝑡) = and ℎ2 (𝑡) = are weighting functions and 𝑐1+ , 𝑐1− , 𝑐2+ , 𝑐2− are the correction
𝑇 𝑇
factors.
The weighting function ℎ1 (𝑡) focuses the correction due to the nonzero final displacement to the be-
ginning of the record, while ℎ2 (𝑡) focuses the correction due to the nonzero final velocity to the end of
the record. The four correction factors are determined from the following four criteria. The final velocity
and displacement after the correction should be zero or should be equal to their original values de-
pending on the state of the checkboxes. The amount of the corrections applied to the posistive and to
the negative part of the record should be equal.
Although the preceding formulas are written as continuous functions of time the calculations are per-
formed on the discrete time series of the accelerogram.
Diagram and report functions
Print the diagram and the table.

Copy the diagram and the table to the Clipboard.

Start the Report Maker.

Save the diagram into the Gallery. See... 2.10.5 Gallery

A function previously saved to the library can be loaded by selecting its name from the dropdown list.

Rename the current function.

Save the current function to the library.

Load a function from the library.

 The first point of functions must be at t=0. This value pair cannot be changed or deleted. If the
load is applied only at T > 0 , the function value must be zero between 0 and T.
332

Dynamic To define dynamic nodal loads select

nodal load nodes and set the parameters in a dialog.
For each component you can assign an
intensity and a dynamic load function
describing the time-dependence of the
load factor.
To use an existing function from the library
click the first icon beside the combo. To
edit the load function click the second
icon.
The load directions can be the global X, Y
and Z directions or the direction can be
determined by a chosen reference. In this
latter case there is just one force and mo-
ment component.

It is possible to define a constant (time-independent) load by selecting <Static> from the Dynamic load
functions combo.
 The actual value of a load component in t will be calculated as Fi (t ) = Fi  f (t ) , i.e. the load
intensity is multiplied by a time-dependent load factor.
 If a dynamic load is defined for a support with an existing dynamic load the existing load will be
overwritten.
Modify, delete Dynamic loads can be modified or deleted the same way as static loads.
 Dynamic loads are displayed as dashed yellow arrows.

Dynamic support Acceleration function can be assigned to any

acceleration nodal support in the model. For each compo-
nent you can assign an acceleration intensity
and a dynamic load function describing the
time-dependence of the load factor.
The actual value of the acceleration at t will be
calculated as
𝑎𝑖 (𝑡) = 𝑎𝑖 ⋅ 𝑓(𝑡)
i.e. the acceleration is multiplied by a time-
dependent load factor.

 Acceleration acts at the bottom of the support string. The acceleration of the supported node
can be different depending on the support stiffness.
 If acceleration is defined for a support with an existing acceleration load the existing load will be
overwritten.
 If multiple nodal supports are attached to a node, acceleration acts on all supports.
Modify, delete Dynamic support acceleration can be modified or deleted the same way as a static load.
 Dynamic support acceleration is displayed as a circle and a yellow arrow.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 333

Dynamic Nodal acceleration can be assigned to

nodal acceleration any node in the model. For each com-
ponent you can assign an accele-
ration intensity and a dynamic load
function describing the time-
dependence of the load factor.
The actual value of the acceleration in
t will be calculated as
𝑎𝑖 (𝑡) = 𝑎𝑖 ⋅ 𝑓(𝑡)
i.e. the acceleration is multiplied by a
time-dependent load factor.

 If acceleration is defined for a support with an existing acceleration load the existing load is
overwritten.
 To specify ground acceleration for seismic analysis nodal support accelerations must be defined.
Modify, delete Dynamic nodal acceleration can be modified or deleted the same way as a static load.
 Dynamic nodal acceleration is displayed as a circle and a yellow arrow.

4.10.29. Fire effect on steel elements – SD8 module

Design codes In AxisVM, fire effects can be generated according to different national codes. In case of Eurocode National
Annexes that are not listed below, general rules of EN 1991-1-2 and EN 1993-1-2 are applied.

Euro- EN 1991-1-2, Eurocode 1 Action on Structures

code Part 1-2: General actions - Actions on structures exposed to fire
EN 1993-1-2, Eurocode 3: Design of steel strucutures
Part 1-2: Strucutural fire design
EC DIN EN 1991-1-2:2010-12 NA
German DIN EN 1993-1-2:2010-12 NA

EC MSZ EN 1991-1-2:2005 NA
Hunga- MSZ EN 1993-1-2:2013 NA
rian

EC SR EN 1991-1-2:2004/NA:2006
Roma- SR EN 1993-1-2:2006/NB:2008
nian
EC STN EN 1991-1-2/NA:2006
Slovaki- STN EN 1993-1-2/NA:2008
an

EC PN EN 1991-1-2:2006 NA
Polish PN EN 1993-1-2 NA

EC DS/EN 1991-1-2 DK NA:2011

Danish

EC BS EN 1991-1-2:2002 NA
British BS EN 1993-1-2:2005 NA

EC SFS-EN 1991-1-2:2002 NA
Finnish SFS-EN 1993-1-2:2005 NA

EC NEN EN 1991-1-2:2002/NB:2011
Dutch NEN EN 1993-1-2+C2:2011/NB:2015

SIA SIA 261: 2014

SIA 263: 2013
334

In order to define fire effect on line elements, click on Define fire effect on line elements icon on the Loads
toolbar
Definition of
fire effect

Choosing a Fire effect is represented by a fire curve specifying the gas

fire curve temperature in the fire compartment as a function of the
time.

Standard temperature-time curve (so called ISO fire curve) (EN 1991-1-2):
𝜃𝑔 = 20 + 345 log10 (8𝑡 + 1)
External fire curve (EN 1991-1-2):
𝜃𝑔 = 660(1 − 0.687𝑒 −0.32𝑡 − 0.313𝑒 −3.8𝑡 ) + 20
Hydrocarbon fire curve (EN 1991-1-2):
𝜃𝑔 = 1080(1 − 0.325𝑒 −0.167𝑡 − 0.675𝑒 −2.5𝑡 ) + 20
Parametric fire curve:
∗ ∗ ∗
𝜃𝑔 = 20 + 1325(1 − 0.324𝑒 −0.2𝑡 − 0.204𝑒 −1.7𝑡 − 0.472𝑒 −19𝑡 ) 𝑡 ∗ ≤ 𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑥
∗

Cooling phase:
𝜃𝑔 = 𝜃𝑚𝑎𝑥 − 625(𝑡 ∗ − 𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑥
∗ ∗
∙ 𝑥) 𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑥 ≤ 0.5
∗ )(𝑡 ∗ − 𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑥
∗ ∗
𝜃𝑔 = 𝜃𝑚𝑎𝑥 − 250(3 − 𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑥 ∙ 𝑥) 0.5 ≤ 𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑥 <2
𝜃𝑔 = 𝜃𝑚𝑎𝑥 − 250(𝑡 ∗ − 𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑥
∗ ∗
∙ 𝑥) 𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑥 ≥2
where
𝜃𝑔 [°C] gas temperature
𝑡 [min] time
𝑡 ∗ [h] modified time parameter
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 335

Parametric Unlike the ISO-, external and hydrocarbon fire Temperature [°C]
fire curve curves, parametric fire curves have a cooling phase.
Using a parametric fire curve, parameters like the
size and ventilation of the fire compartment,
amount of the combustible materials, etc., can be
considered in the calculation. These parameters
considerably influence the maximum gas tempera-
ture and the duration of the fire.

Time [s]

According to EN 1991-1-2, parametric fire curves are valid for fire compartments up to 500 m2 of floor area,
without openings in the roof and for a maximum compartment height of 4 m.
The following parameters need to be defined for the calculation of the fire curve:
𝐴𝑓 [m2] floor area
𝑞𝑓,𝑑 [MJ/ m2] design value of the fire load density related to the surface area Af of the floor
𝐴𝑣 [m2] total area of vertical openings on all walls
ℎ [m] weighted average of window heights on all walls
𝐴𝑡 [m2] total area of enclosure (walls, ceiling and floor, including openings)
𝑐𝑝𝑤 [J/kg°C] specific heat of boundary of enclosure
𝜌𝑝𝑤 [kg/m3] density of boundary of enclosure
𝜆𝑝𝑤 [W/m°C] thermal conductivity of boundary of enclosure

 If the boundary of enclosure consists of different layers, 𝒄𝒑𝒘, 𝝆𝒑𝒘 and 𝝀𝒑𝒘 parameters should be given
𝑨 𝑨
resulting parameter 𝒃 = √𝒄𝒑𝒘 𝝆𝒑𝒘 𝝀𝒑𝒘 equal to 𝒃 = √𝒄𝒑𝒘,𝟏 𝝆𝒑𝒘,𝟏 𝝀𝒑𝒘,𝟏 ∑ 𝟏 + ⋯ + √𝒄𝒑𝒘,𝒏 𝝆𝒑𝒘,𝒏 𝝀𝒑𝒘,𝒏 ∑ 𝒏 .
𝑨 𝑨

 In case of NEN EN standard, parametric fire curve cannot be selected, but another prescriptive fire
curve, namely RWS tunnel fire curve is available.

User-defined User-defined fire curve is also available to define the fire effect, thus the program allows to perform fire
fire curve design considering simulation or fire test results.
It is important to note that the calculation of steel temperature based on prescriptive fire curves uses the
assumption that the gas temperature is identical everywhere in the fire compartment and the steel element
is exposed identical heat radiation from every direction. In case of real fires, typically, the gas temperature is
lower compared to e.g. ISO standard fire curve. Accordingly, if we calculate the steel temperature with closed
formula of EN 1993-1-2 standard from gas temperatures recorded in a real fire like it would be gas tempera-
tures from ISO fire curve, we can underestimate the steel temperature because this calculation underesti-
mates the proportion of radiated heat. The solution may be the use of the so-called adiabatic surface tempe-
rature [U. Wickström, D. Duthinh, K. McGrattan; 2007: Adiabatic surface temperature for calculating heat
transfer to fire exposed structures]) (adiabatic surface temperature may be 15 - 20% higher than gas tempe-
rature according to the following study [M. Malendowski, A. Glema, W. Szymkuc; 2015: Performance based
coupled CFD-FEM analysis of 3-bay high industrial hall under natural fire in ASFE 2015 proceedings]).
Similarly to custom design seismic spectrum, the points of user-defined fire curve can be defined in function
editor. The maximum number of points is 360.
336

Steel tempera- The steel temperature is calculated automatically from the selected fire curve and fire duration / required
ture time of fire resistance (R15, R30, R60, etc. – where the number gives the time in minutes). This design
temperature is used then in the course of steel fire design (see... 6.6.2 Steel beam fire design according to
Eurocode 3 – SD8 module).
The maximum fire duration is 180 minutes (R180).

The unit of influencing parameters, fire duration and temperatures can be set manually (see... 3.3.8 Units
and Formats).
The diagrams can be saved in the the Drawings Library (see... 3.6.10 Save to Drawings Library) by clicking on
the icon situated below the diagram in the right. The saved diagrams may be added later to reports.
The temperature of unprotected steel elements (EN 1993-1-2; ∆t = 5s):
𝐴/𝑉
Δ𝜃𝑎,𝑡 = 𝑘𝑠ℎ ℎ̇ Δ𝑡
𝑐𝑎 𝜌𝑎 𝑛𝑒𝑡,𝑑
where
𝑘𝑠ℎ [-] correction factor for the shadow effect (in case of SIA standard ksh = 1.0)
𝐴/𝑉 [1/m] section factor for unprotected steel members
𝑐𝑎 [J/kgK] specific heat of steel (according to EN 1993-1-2)
𝜌𝑎 [kg/m3] unit mass of steel
ℎ̇𝑛𝑒𝑡,𝑑 [W/m2] design value of the net heat flux per unit area

 Correction factor for the shadow effect and

section factor can be calculated automatically
for the supported section types (I shape, box
shape, pipe and angles).

The temperature of protected steel elements is (EN 1993-1-2; ∆t = 5s):

𝜆𝑝 𝐴𝑝 /𝑉 (𝜃𝑔,𝑡 − 𝜃𝑎,𝑡 )
Δ𝜃𝑎,𝑡 = Δ𝑡 − (𝑒 𝜙/10 − 1)Δ𝜃𝑔,𝑡
𝑑𝑝 𝑐𝑎 𝜌𝑎 1 + 𝜙/3
𝑐𝑝 𝜌𝑝
𝜙= 𝜆 𝐴 /𝑉
𝑐𝑎 𝜌𝑎 𝑝 𝑝
where
𝜆𝑝 [W/mK] thermal conductivity of the fire protection
𝐴𝑝 /𝑉 [1/m] section factor for steel members insulated by fire protection
𝑐𝑝 [J/kgK] temperature independent specific heat of the fire protection material
𝜌𝑝 [kg/m3] mass density of the fire protection material
𝑑𝑝 [m] thickness of the fire protection material

 Calculated steel temperature related to the selected fire curve and fire duration (in case of paramet-
ric fire curve the maximum temperature calculated in the interval) can be seen on the Steel tempe-
rature panel under the combo box. Under the steel temperature reduction factors related to yield
strength and Young’s modulus according to EN 1993-1-2 are shown.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 337

Exposition On the Exposition panel it is possible to set how the section is exposed to fire. Exposure type considerably
influences the value of shadow correction factor and section factor. In case of supported section types the
following exposure types are available for protected / unprotected members:

For unsupported sections the exposure type appears via user specified shadow correction factor and
section factor (ksh and A/V).
Fire protection For steel structures the application of fire protection is often required
due to the slender elements and the fact that steel has a high thermal
conductivity. Check Fire protection on the Exposition panel to take into
account a fire protection. In this case, the Fire protection panel in the
bottom right is enabled. Parameters and their importance has been
already shown above.
Presence or lack of fire protection has an effect on the exposition types as well.
κ1 and κ2 fac- κ1 and κ2 are adaptation factors related to a non-uniform temperature
tors distribution across the cross-section and along the beam, respectively,
according to EN 1993-1-2. These factors can be set on the Temperature
distribution panel.

Temperature For I shapes and box sections, a more accurate temperature distribution may be calculated by clicking on
distribution the Analysis button on the Temperature distribution panel. Temperatures within the cross-section are
analysis calculated by finite difference method. In this case a two-dimensional heat conduction problem is solved.
338

Depending on the available computational resources and the simmetry of the problem, the calculation
may take a few seconds or a few minutes. The analysis considers the temperature-dependent thermal
conductivity of the steel material according to EN 1993-1-2. The diagram shows the maximum, minimum
and average temperatures as a function of time.
According to the regulations of EN 1993-1-2, in case of non-uniform temperature distribution the
maximum temperature within the cross-section has to be used when verifying the load bearing capacity.
So if temperature distribution results are available, AxisVM uses maximum temperature in further
calculations.
κ1 adaptation factor related to non-uniform temperature distribution across the cross-section is
automatically calculated, however it is possible to override the calculated value above Analysis button.
If the section is connected to a reinforced concrete slab on one side, temperature distribution analysis
requires the values of slab thickness and concrete density.
Given tempera- If Given temperature is selected on the Steel temperature panel, a
ture uniform or linear temperature distribution can be specified. Design
temperature may be selected as θ1, θ2 or their average. This design
temperature is used later in the course of steel fire design (see... 6.6.2
Steel beam fire design according to Eurocode 3 – SD8 module).

Apply as ther- Both calculated and given temperatures can be applied on the structural
mal load element as thermal load (see... 4.10.19 Thermal load on line elements) to
determine internal forces due to restrained thermal deformations by a
linear static analysis.
A reference temperature must be specified (in fire design it could be set to room temperature).

 Using perfect model and linear static analysis significant internal forces may arise from thermal
expansion since possible local stability failures are not considered. These significant forces may be
released by local failures and deformations without considerably risk of global failure. According to
the Eurocode, thermal forces may be neglected in certain cases.
Table Fire effect parameters for each fire load case can be checked in the Table Browser. The listed parameters
are: required time of fire resistance, type of fire curve, fire load density, section factor, shadow factor,
exposure type, properties of fire protection and design steel temperature. The tables can be added to
reports.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 339

Graphical sym- Fire effects are shown in the main window as red zigzag lines. Symbol properties (thickness, colour) can be
bols in the main set in Preferences / Graphical symbols window.
window

Errors If gas or steel temperature cannot

be calculated due to inappropriate
parameter values an error message
appears.
EN 1991-1-2 impose several
restrictions regarding to initial
parameters of parametric fire curves
(opening factor, 𝑏 = √𝑐𝑝𝑤 𝜌𝑝𝑤 𝜆𝑝𝑤 ,
floor area, height, etc.).
340

4.10.30. Fire effect on timber elements – TD8 module

Design codes In AxisVM, fire effects can be generated according to different national codes. In case of Eurocode
National Annexes that are not listed below, general rules of EN 1991-1-2 and EN 1993-1-2 are applied.

Eurocode EN 1991-1-2
Eurocode 1 Action on Structures
Part 1-2: General actions - Actions on structures exposed to fire

EN 1995-1-2
Eurocode 5: Design of timber strucutures
Part 1-2: General - Strucutural fire design

EC DIN EN 1991-1-2:2010-12 NA
German DIN EN 1995-1-2:2010-12 NA

EC MSZ EN 1991-1-2:2005 NA
Hungarian MSZ EN 1995-1-2:2013 NA
CSN EN 1995-1-2/NA 2011
EC
Czech

EC STN EN 1991-1-2/NA:2006
Slovakian STN EN 1995-1-2/NA:2011

EC BS EN 1991-1-2:2002 NA
British BS EN 1995-1-2:2004 NA

EC SFS-EN 1991-1-2:2002 NA
Finnish
SFS-EN 1995-1-2:2004 NA

EC NEN EN 1991-1-2:2002/NB:2011
Dutch NEN EN 1995-1-2 NB

SIA SIA 261: 2014

SIA 265: 2003
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 341

Definition of fire In order to define fire effect on line elements, click on Define fire effect on line elements icon on the
effect Loads toolbar.

Fire curves Fire effect is represented by fire curve specifying the gas temperature in the fire compartment as a
function of the time. In case of timber elements, ISO standard and parametric fire curves can be selec-
ted. These fire curves are presented and discussed in the previous section (see… 4.10.29 Fire effect on
steel elements – SD8 module).
 In case of NEN EN standard, parametric fire curve cannot be selected.
Calculation of The charring depth is calculated automatically from the selected fire curve and fire duration / required
charring depth time of fire resistance (R15, R30, R60, etc. – where the number gives the time in minutes). This charring
depth is used then in the course of timber fire design (see... 6.7.2 Timber beam fire design – TD8 module).
The maximum fire duration is 180 minutes (R180).
The supported cross-sections are the thick rectangle, rounded rectangle and circle sections.
The diagrams can be saved in the the Drawings Library (see.... 3.6.10 Save to Drawings Library) by clicking
on the icon situated below the diagram in the right. The saved diagrams may be added later to reports.

The notional charring depth (dchar,n) of exposed timber elements is calculated as follows:

ISO standard fire curve (according to EN 1995-1-2 3.4.2.) – without fire protection:
𝑑𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑟,𝑛 = 𝛽𝑛 𝑡

𝛽𝑛 [mm/min] design notional charring rate under standard fire exposure

𝑡 [min] time
342

Parametric fire curve (according to Annex A of EN 1995-1-2) – without fire protection:

𝛽𝑝𝑎𝑟 𝑡 𝑡 ≤ 𝑡0
𝑡 2 𝑡0
𝑑𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑟,𝑛 = 𝛽𝑝𝑎𝑟 (1.5𝑡 − − ) 𝑡0 < 𝑡 ≤ 3𝑡0
4𝑡0 4
{ 2𝛽𝑝𝑎𝑟 𝑡0 3𝑡0 < 𝑡 ≤ 5𝑡0
where
𝑞𝑓,𝑑 0.2√Γ − 0.04 (𝑂/𝑏)2 𝐴𝑣
𝑡0 = 0.009 𝛽𝑝𝑎𝑟 = 1.5𝛽𝑛 Γ= 𝑂= √ℎ 𝑏 = √𝜌𝑝𝑤 𝑐𝑝𝑤 𝜆𝑝𝑤
𝑂 (0.04/1160)2 𝐴𝑡
0.16√Γ + 0.08

𝑞𝑓,𝑑 [MJ/ m2] design value of the fire load density related to the surface area Af of the floor
𝐴𝑣 [m2] total area of vertical openings on all walls
ℎ [m] weighted average of window heights on all walls
𝐴𝑡 [m2] total area of enclosure (walls, ceiling and floor, including openings)
𝑐𝑝𝑤 [J/kg°C] specific heat of boundary of enclosure
𝜌𝑝𝑤 [kg/m3] density of boundary of enclosure
𝜆𝑝𝑤 [W/m°C] thermal conductivity of boundary of enclosure

 If the boundary of enclosure consists of different layers, 𝒄𝒑𝒘, 𝝆𝒑𝒘 and 𝝀𝒑𝒘 parameters should be
𝑨
given resulting parameter 𝒃 = √𝒄𝒑𝒘 𝝆𝒑𝒘 𝝀𝒑𝒘 equal to 𝒃 = √𝒄𝒑𝒘,𝟏 𝝆𝒑𝒘,𝟏 𝝀𝒑𝒘,𝟏 ∑ 𝟏 + ⋯ +
𝑨
𝑨𝒏
√𝒄𝒑𝒘,𝒏 𝝆𝒑𝒘,𝒏 𝝀𝒑𝒘,𝒏 ∑ 𝑨 .

Notional charring depth of protected timber elements can be calculated only for ISO standard fire
curve according to Section 3.4.3. of EN 1995-1-2 standard. The following parameters are required:
𝑘2 [-] insulation coefficient
𝑡𝑐ℎ [min] time of start of charring of protected members (delay of start of charring due to pro-
tection)
𝑡𝑓 [min] failure time of protection

These parameters need to be specified based on the regulations of the code, the depth and the type of
fire protection material.
Charring rate The software selects the notinal charring
rate based on the parameters of timber
material of the selected member, howev-
er, the value can be specified by the user.

Exposition On the Exposition panel it is possible to set how the member is exposed to fire. Exposure type
influences only the calculation of reduced cross section during fire design (see... 6.7.2 Timber beam fire
design – TD8 module). In case of supported section types the following exposure types are available for
protected / unprotected members:
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 343

Table Fire effect parameters for each fire load case can be checked in the Table Browser. The listed
parameters are: required time of fire resistance, type of fire curve, fire load density, exposure type,
properties of fire protection and calculated notional charring depth. The tables can be added to
reports.

Graphical symbols Fire effects are shown in the main window as red zigzag lines similarly to steel members (see… 4.10.29
in the main window Fire effect on steel elements – SD8 module). Symbol properties (thickness, colour) can be set in Preferences
/ Graphical symbols window.
Errors If gas temperature or notional charring depth cannot be calculated due to inappropriate parameter
values an error message appears. EN 1991-1-2 impose several restrictions regarding to initial
parameters of parametric fire curves (opening factor, 𝑏 = √𝑐𝑝𝑤 𝜌𝑝𝑤 𝜆𝑝𝑤 , floor area, height, etc.).

4.10.31. Split loads in separate load cases

This function copies or moves

selected loads into separate load
cases (created automatically within a
given variable load group). Each
load will get into a separate load
case.

Root of the load case names cause

load cases to be named as Root1,
Root2, Root3, etc.
Select Variable load group from the
existing variable groups or enter a
new name to create a new group.
 Loads applied to the same element will get into the same load case.
Check Delete original loads to move loads into the new load cases. Otherwise loads will be copied.
This function acts like the previous one but copies or moves selected loads into separate load cases
regardless the element they are applied to. Loads applied to the same element will get into separate
load cases.
344

4.10.32. Nodal mass

In a vibration analysis the masses are concentrated at

nodes that you can take into account by their global
components mX, mY, mZ. In second-order vibration
analysis, the loads due to the nodal masses are applied
on the model, as well as the masses due to the applied
loads.
If mass is the same in each direction it is enough to
specify one value after checking Apply the same mass in
each direction.
In dynamic analysis nodal masses and nodal accelera-
tions result in dynamic loads causing displacements and
forces in the model.

 The nodal mass is displayed on the screen as two dark red concentric circles.

4.10.33. Modify
Modify To modify loads:
1. Press the [Shift] key and select loads you want to modify (or the loaded elements).
You can also select by drawing a selection frame or using the Selection toolbar.
2. Click the load type icon on the Toolbar.
3. Check the checkboxes beside the values you want to change.
4. Enter new values.
5. Close the dialog with OK.

Immediate mode If the Loads tab is active click a finite element to modify its loads. If the element has more than one
load only one of them will come up. If you have placed different concentrated and distributive loads
on a beam and click the beam the load nearest to the click position will come up. If more finite
elements have been selected their loads can immediately be modified by clicking one of them. If you
click an element which is not selected, selection disappears and you can modify the element load you
clicked.

 In fact, load modification is similar to the load definition, but does not assign loads to elements
not being loaded and allows access to a specific load property without altering others. You can
switch to the Define radio button to place loads on all the selected elements, lines or surfaces.
If we select elements with loads not matching the load type we choose these loads remain
unchanged.

4.10.34. Delete
[Del] See... 3.2.9 Delete
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 345

4.11. Mesh

Clicking the mesh tab mesh toolbar becomes available with mesh generation for line elements and
domains, mesh refinement functions and a finite element shape checking.

4.11.1. Mesh generation

Automatic detection of overlapping lines and missing intersections during meshing reduces the errors
in model geometry.
Support of multiple core processors can reduce the time of meshing.

4.11.1.1. Meshing of line elements

Finite element analysis uses linear elements with constant cross-section so arced and variable cross-
section (tapered) line elements must be divided into parts. This is called line element meshing.
The accuracy of the solution depens on the mesh density.
This mesh can be removed or modified just like a domain mesh. Removing a mesh does not delete
loads and properties assigned to the line element.
A mesh can also be defined for linear elements with constant cross-section. It is useful in nonlinear or
vibration analysis when it is required to divide line elements to achieve a higher accuracy.

Mesh parameters Mesh generation can be performed according to different criteria:

for line elements
Maximum deviation from arc: Chord height cannot exceed the value specified.
Maximum element size: Length of the mesh lines cannot exceed the value specified.

Division into N segments: Line elements are divided into N parts.

By angle: Central angle of arced mesh segments cannot exceed the value specified.

4.11.1.2. Meshing of domains

A mesh of triangular surface elements can be generated
on the selected domains by specifying an average surface
element side length for the mesh. Meshing will take into
account all the holes, internal lines and points of the
domain. Meshes optionally can follow loads above a
certain intensity or be adjusted to column heads to
enable cutting of moment peaks.
Mesh type The mesh can be a triangle mesh, a quadrangle mesh or a
mixed mesh, in which most of the elements are quadrilat-
eral with some triangles.
If lines of the domain outline including holes and internal
lines can be divided into quadrangles and the quadrangle
mesh is selected a better quality parametric mesh is gen-
erated.

Mesh size An average mesh element size can be specified. The

actual mesh can contain smaller and larger elements as
well.
Fit mesh to loads Meshes will follow checked loads if load intensity exceeds
the value specified. Point loads will create mesh nodes,
line loads will create mesh lines.
346

Adjust mesh to The mesh must be properly adjusted to column heads to prepare cutting of moment peaks. Turning
column heads this option on automatically fits the mesh according to the cross-section geometry of connecting
columns. All beams joining to the slab at an angle greater than 45° are identified as columns. This
option must be set to enable the Cut moment peaks over columns option of the Display Parameters
dialog. See... 6.1.12 Surface element internal forces.
Contour division Uniform mesh size
method Domain boundaries and inner lines will be divided according to the mesh size to ensure the given
element size.
Adaptive mesh size
Adaptive meshing follows domain geometry and refine the mesh by reducing element size wherever
it is necessary.
Smoothing Track bar controls the smoothing of the mesh. Smoothing slows down mesh generation a bit. Moving
the handle to the left end sets minimum smoothing and fast processing while the right end sets max-
imum smoothing with slower processing. The result of smoothing depends on domain geometry and
other mesh parameters, so setting higher smoothing does not necessarily result in a better mesh
quality.
If Create mesh only for unmeshed domains is checked no mesh will be created for domains already
meshed.
If Calculation of domain intersections is turned on domain intersections are automatically calculated
before meshing.
The progress of the mesh generation process can be monitored in a window, and can be canceled any
time with the Abort button.
The mesh generator uses only the end-points of beam elements that are in the plane of the domain,
and disregards their corresponding line segments. Rib elements are incorporated with their line
segments because they can be defined on surface edges as well.
If there are existing quadrilateral or triangular meshes within the domain, the mesh generator will not
change these meshes, and will integrate them in the new mesh.

Before meshing Triangle mesh Quadrangle mesh with triangles

 If a mesh is generated over an existing domain mesh (with a different average element side
length), the new mesh will replace the existing one.

4.11.2. Mesh refinement

Lets you refine the finite element mesh of surfaces. The elements in the refined mesh have the same
properties (material, cross-section / thickness, references, etc.) as those in the coarse mesh.

 You have to manually set the nodal degrees of freedom of the newly generated mesh that were
not set automatically during the process of mesh generation.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 347

The following options are available:

Uniform Lets you refine the entire selected mesh. You must specify the maximum side length of a surface
element in the refined mesh.

Before mesh refinement After mesh refinement

Bisection Lets you refine the selected

mesh by bisecting the elements
as shown in the figure.
Quadrilateral element Triangular element

before after

Node relative Lets you refine the mesh around the selected nodes (locally around columns, nodal supports). You
must specify a division ratio (0.2-0.8). The command refines the mesh dividing the elements connected
to the respective nodes by the defined ratio.

before after

Edge relative Lets you refine the mesh along the selected edges (locally along edge supports / loads). You must
specify a division ratio (0.2-0.8). The command refines the mesh dividing the elements connected to
the respective edges by the defined ratio.

before after
348

4.11.3. Checking finite elements

Program checks the minimum angle of surface finite elements ().

A triangular finite element is distorted if  ≤ 15.
A qudrilateral finite element is distorted if  ≤ 30.

4.11.4. Delete all meshes

Deletes all meshes from line elements

Deletes all domain meshes from domains

Deletes all (line or domain) meshes of the model.

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 349

5. Analysis
AxisVM lets you perform linear and nonlinear static, linear and nonlinear dynamic, vibration and
buckling analysis. It implements an object-oriented architecture for the finite element method.
The instructions included in this User’s Manual assume a preliminary knowledge of the finite element
method and experience in modeling. Note that the finite element analysis is only a tool, not a
replacement for engineering judgment.

Each analysis consists of three steps:

1) Model optimization
2) Model verification
3) Performing the analysis
4) Result file generation
350

Details of the analysis can be displayed by expanding one or more category panels. The Messages
panel shows the analysis message log. The Statistics panel shows memory requierements, hardware
information, model details and calculation times.
Special categories:
Nonlinear analysis: Tracking displays the movements of the tracked node. Convergence shows the
convergence of the iteration process.
Vibration analysis: Frequencies displays how the frequencies converge. Convergence shows the con-
vergence process.
Buckling analysis: Eigenvalues displays how the eigenvalues converge, Convergence shows the con-
vergence process.
Dynamic analysis: Time steps displays the movement of the tracked node, Convergence shows the
convergence process.
Parameters of the latest analysis is saved into the model file and can be studied in the Model Info
dialog. See... 2.16.20 Model info
Model optimization To reduce analysis time and memory footprint AxisVM optimizes node order. If the total number of
degrees of freedom is over 1000, it creates an internal three-dimensional graph from the model ge-
ometry and begins to partition the system of equations using the substructure method. The system is
stored as a sparse matrix. The parameters of the optimized system of equations appear only at the
end of this process. This process results in the smallest memory footprint and fastest calculation time
but it assumes that the biggest block fits into the available memory. If it doesn’t, AxisVM stores the
system as a band matrix and begins to reduce the bandwidth of the system by iterative node renum-
bering. If the two longest rows fit into the available memory the system can be solved. Changes in the
memory requirements for the band matrix is displayed real-time. The duration of the optimization
process and the final memory footprint depends on the size of the system and the available memory.

 The system of equations can be solved the most efficiently if the whole system fits into the
physical memory. If the system does not fit into the physical memory but its largest block does,
the running time will be moderate.
If the largest block does not fit into the physical memory, the necessary disk operations can
slow down the solution considerably.
Model verification The input data is verified in the first step. If an Error is found a warning message is displayed and you
can then decide whether to cancel or continue the analysis

Performing the AxisVM displays the evolution of the solution process by two progress bars. The bar on the top
analysis displays the current step performed, while the other displays the overall progress of the analysis
process.

The equilibrium equations in the direction of constrained degrees of freedom are not included in the
system of equations. Therefore to obtain support reactions you must model the support conditions
using support elements.

The Cholesky method is applied to the solution of linear equilibrium equations.

The eigenvalue problems are solved with the Subspace Iteration method.

Error of the solution Solution error is calculated from the solution of a load case with a known result. It is a good
estimation of the order of errors in displacement results for other load cases.
Info palette shows this error as E(EQ).
If the value of E (Eq) is greater than 1E-06 the reliability of the computed results is questionable. It is
expected, that the Error of the displacements is of the same order.

Result file During the processing of the results the program sorts the results according to the original order of
generation the nodes and prepares them to graphical display.
In the following chapters we ‘ll show the setting of the parameters of the each calculation methods.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 351

5.1. Static analysis

The term static means that the load does not vary or the variation with the time can be safely ignored.

Linear static Performs a linear static analysis. The term linear means that the computed response (displacement,
internal force) is linearly related to the applied load.
All the load cases are solved in the analysis. Through the geometric linearity, it is assumed that the
displacements remain within the limits of the small displacement theory. Through the material
linearity, it is assumed that all materials and stiffness characteristics are linear-elastic. The materials
assigned to surface elements can be othotropic.

 See the description of the gap, and spring elements in Chapter 4, on how to use these elements
in a linear analysis.
The relative errors at the end of the iteration process appear in the info window.

E(U): relative error of the displacement convergence

E(P): relative error of the force convergence
E(W): relative error of the work convergence

Values indicating instability appear in red.

Nonlinear static Performs a nonlinear static analysis. The term nonlinear means that the computed response
(displacement, internal force) is nonlinearly related to the applied load. This can be due to the use of
e.g. gap, link, non-linear support elements, line/surface elements with nonlinear metarial, or taking
into account the geometric nonlinearity.
Select load cases or combinations in the tree view.

AxisVM will perform nonlinear analysis for the selected load cases / combinations and shows a prog-
ress dialog.
352

Solution control
Force
When Force control is selected, the increments are applied as fractions of the loads (as one
parameter load). It is possible to track the displacement of a node in a given direction. A graph
of this displacement versus increments will be plotted during the analysis.
Displacement
When displacement control is selected, the increments are applied as fractions of the
displacement component of the node specified.
Pushover
Pushover control is a special type of displacement control that allows the use of a constant
load case while having another parametric load case that is increased incrementally. This is
essential for pushover analyses to model P-Δ effects appropriately.
After selecting pushover control, the top of the dialog changes to accommodate the drop-
down boxes for parametric and constant load cases. See... 4.10.24 Pushover loads – SE2 module
for details on load definition and recommended analysis settings.

Tracked node, Direction, maximum displacement

In case of displacement or pushover control a control node and a degree of freedom must be
selected. Maximum displacement is the maximum allowed displacement of the control node in
the given direction.

Number of increments
There are two methods to define the number of increments:
1. Equal increments. Specify the number of increments. The default value is 10. When highly
nonlinear behavior is analyzed, you may specify a greater value in order to achieve
convergence.
2. Increment function. Loads are not increasing in a linear way but follow a predefined function.
Using an increment function it is possible to reduce the number of increments where the
behaviour of the structure is linear and increase the number of increments where the
behaviour is nonlinear.
Convergence criteria
Based on the convergence tolerances you specify, AxisVM will determine if the nonlinear solution
has reached the required accuracy (convergence). Therefore it is important that the convergence
tolerances to be set properly. During the iteration process, the norm of the unequilibrated load
and/or of the iterational displacement increment vector must vanish (to approach zero).

Maximum iterations
You can set the maximum number of the iterations based on the specifics of your model, and
of the incremental solution parameters. By default the value is set to 20. If the convergence is
not achieved within the maximum number of iterations, no results will be obtained.

Displacement / Force / Work / Convergence criteria

In case of a nonlinear calculation you can specify multiple criteria, in terms of load,
displacement, and work, for monitoring the convergence of the nonlinear solution. At least one
criteria has to be selected. The criteria expressed in terms of work can be adequate for most
problems. However, you may encounter a small Error in your unequilibrated load while the
Error in displacements is still large, or vice-versa.
Factors of convergence criteria has the following default values: 0.001 for displacements, 0.001
for force, and 0.000001 for work.
The relative errors at the end of the iteration process appear in the info window.
E(U): relative error of the displacement convergence
E(P): relative error of the force convergence
E(W): relative error of the work convergence
Use secant stiffness (in appropriate cases only)
If this option is selected beam end releases will be represented by their secant stiffness instead
of tangent stiffness. This improves convergence but considerably slows down the calculation. It
is recommended only if convergence cannot be achieved by increasing number of increments
and iterations.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 353

Iteration control
The weak convergence of a nonlinear calculation is often caused by nonlinear elements that have
sharp changing of stiffness in their stress-strain characteristic. Examples of such elements are gaps,
only tension or only compression trusses, supports having limit force and reinforced concrete struc-
tural elements. If the stiffness of several elements has to be change in the same increment, infinite
loop of iterations can occur without reaching the convergence. To avid this situation iteration control
can be used. The implemented control methods constrain the size of the displacement increments in
the critical iterations instead of decreasing the size of the load increment. With this strategy the con-
vergence can be achieved but a lot of iterations would be necessary in the critical increment, because
of the constrained displacement increments.

The program performs the following calcaultion steps in each iteration:

1. Calculates the displacement increment for each DOF caused by the unequilibrated loads.
2. Controls the DOF displacement increments if any of the control options is turned on.
3. Calculates further results…

The iteration control contains the following checks depending on the options selected.

Automatic constraint for strain increments

On the basis of the DOF displacement increments the program calculates the elemental strain
increments. If excessive strain or stress increment or excessive changing in the stiffness occures
in any of the elements, the program calculates an allowed strain increment that does not cause
any of the opreceding problems. After cheking all elements the program scales (decreases) the
displacement increments so that excessive changing does not occur in any of the elements.

Constraint for displacement increments

With this option custom limit values can be defined for translational and rotational displace-
ments. The program scales (decreases if necessary) the DOF displacement increments so that
the maximum of them should be equal to the limit.

Use reinforcement in calculation

When analyzing reinforced concrete plates, it is possible to take into account the calculated or
actual reinforcement.
Displacements and internal forces of reinforced concrete plates are calculated according to the
moment-curvature diagram of the reinforced cross-section of the plate. These results show the
actual plate deflection and forces in the plate (see… 6.5.6 Nonlinear analysis of RC surfaces).

In case of the analysis of reinforced concrete columns and beams, it is also possible to take the
reinforcement into account. Internal forces compatible with strains are calculated through the
integration of fiber stresses at Gauss integration points based on ε normal strains, κy and κz cur-
vatures considering the actual reinforcement, the concrete and nonlinear material behaviour
(see... 6.5.5 Nonlinear analysis of reinforced concrete beam and column elements).

The analysis can be performed either with consideration of creep/shrinkage or without. Further
information related to the consideration of creep and shrinkage can be found in the above re-
ferred sections.
354

Nonlinearity Follow nonlinear behaviour of materials and finite elements

This option is enabled if the model contains elements with nonlinear behaviour (e.g. tension-only
trusses or compression-only supports) or elements with nonlinear material characteristics
(trusses, beams, ribs, membranes, plates, shells). If left unchecked, all elements will respond in a
linear way.
Follow geometric nonlinearity of beams, trusses, ribs and shells
The equilibrium is established with respect to the deformed line elements. Depending on the
magnitude of displacement second or third order analysis is performed. The loads are
conservative, they keep their initial direction during the deformation. Geometric nonlinearity can
be taken into account only for truss, beam, rib and shell elements. If there are no elements with
nonlinear characteristic in the model this options is checked by default. If the model contains
elements with nonlinear characteristic this option is left unchecked but can be activated.
Stability warning In geometric nonlinear calculations a stability problem may occur in some increments. It can be a local
messages or global loss of stability or a snap-through phenomenon. Euler’s critical load may also be exceeded in
any beam. In such cases the following investigation procedure is recommended
• Checking of deformed shapes
• Buckling analysis to compare the critical load parameters and the load factors in the
problematic increments.

A warning message appears in the info window identifying the increments concerned.
See… 2.18.2 Info window
 Beam elements must be divided into at least four parts when geometric nonlinearity is taken
into account.
Store last increment only

Allows you to reduce the size of the results file when an incremental nonlinear analysis is
performed with multiple increments (load or displacement) when just the results of the last
increment are of interest to you. You can enable this checkbox when you do not need the results
of previous increments.
 You should disable this check-box if you want to trace the load-displacement or other
(nonlinear) response of the structure.

AxisVM applies a Newton-Raphson iteration tech-

nique to the iterational solution of each increment.
The technique is known in different variants,
depending on the update of the system (stiffness)
matrix.
In AxisVM n = 1 (default), the system stiffness matrix
is updated in each iteration. The method is known as
the classical Newton-Raphson technique.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 355

Displacement The so-called snap-through phenomenon cannot be analyzed

control with load controlled increments. You must apply a displacement
control to pass through the peak points.
This figure shows a force control applied to a nonlinear system.
The incremental solution fails in the 5th increment. To find the
peak value of the load-displacement characteristics of the sys-
tem, you must apply a displacement control technique.

Finite elements with Beam, rib and surface elements made of nonlinear
nonlinear material (elastic or plastic) material are modelled with a peripheral layer
discretized section model. Plates and shells are
represented by layers, cross-section of beams and
ribs are meshed. Stress distribution is determined midplane

using Navier’s hypothesis (plane sections remain inner layer

plane) and applying the nonlinear material model
on each sub-element.
Stress components are the same as in the linear
material model. For surface elements results are
obtained in top, center and bottom plane, for
beam and rib cross-sections in the stress points
and along the outline.
To obtain accurate results in the extreme fiber the
thickness of the layers are not equal. In case of
plates and shells two thin peripheral layers are
used, of which thickness is one tenth of an inner
layer. The number of inner layers is ten. The cross-
sectional mesh of beams and ribs also contains a
thin peripheral layer, of which thickness is one
tenth of the edge length of the inner elements.
Stress results along the outline are obtained di-
rectly from the peripheral elements.
356

5.2. Vibration

Lets you determine the lowest natural frequencies and mode shapes corresponding to the free
vibration of an undamped linear structure when no externally applied loads are computed. AxisVM
verifies whether the required number of the lowest eigenvalues has been determined.
The system mass matrix has a diagonal structure and includes only translational mass components.
Select load cases or combinations in the tree view. AxisVM will perform vibration analysis for the se-
lected load cases and shows a progress dialog.

 The solution technique applied to the associated generalized eigenvalue problem is designed to
find the lowest real and positive eigenvalues. It is not suitable to find eigenvalues that are zero
or nearly zero.

Solution control
Lets you specify the parameters of the incremental solution process:

First order
The solution does not include the effect of axial forces of truss/beam elements on the system
stiffness.
Second order
The solution include the effect of axial forces of truss/beam elements on the system stiffness.
Tension axial forces have a stiffening effect, while the compression axial forces have a
softening effect. These effects influence the free vibrations of the structure.
Case
Lets you select a case. The loads are converted into masses. If a second-order analysis is
selected, the results of a linear (first-order) static analysis, that precedes the vibration
analysis, will be accounted too.
Number of mode shapes
Lets you specify the number of the vibration mode shapes you want to evaluate.
The default value is 9, maximum number of shapes is not limited. The value specified here
can not be larger than the number of the system’s mass degrees of freedom.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 357

Convert loads to masses

You can enable the conversion of the load components parallel with the gravitation into
masses, and take these concentrated masses into account. The generated nodal masses can
be checked in the Table Browser (Results / Vibration / [load case or combination name] /
Nodal masses).
Concentrated masses: If nodal masses have been defined (see… 4.10.32 Nodal mass) they can
be included in or excluded from the analysis.
Convert concentrated masses to loads: If nodal masses have been defined they can be
converted to loads.
Masses only
You can analyze models without loads, but with masses, and take Element masses into
account. You can even Convert nodal masses to loads.

Convergence criteria
Based on the convergence tolerances you specify, AxisVM will determine if the calculated
eigenvalues and eigenvectors have the required accuracy. Therefore it is important that the
convergence tolerances be set properly.

Maximum number of iterations

You can set the maximum number of the iterations based on the specifics of your model,
and the number of eigenvalues requested (more iterations for more eigenvalues). By default
the value is set to 20. If the convergence is not achieved within the maximum number of
iterations, no results will be obtained.
Eigenvalue convergence
Lets you specify the convergence tolerance for the eigenvalues.
The default value is 1E-10.
Eigenvector convergence
Lets you specify the convergence tolerance for the eigenvectors.
The default value is 1E-5.
Diaphragm
When running a vibration analysis with the option Convert slabs to diaphragms checked, all
slabs (horizontal plates) will be temporarily replaced by diaphragms.
The running time is reduced if the model contains only columns and slabs. If structural walls
are included, the number of equations will be reduced but the bandwidth will be increased.
The resultant running time may be greater than without diaphragms.
Stiffness reduction for response spectrum analysis
Further information in chapter 3.3.10 Stiffness reduction.
Use increased support stiffness
Supports act in a different way during vibrations. Using increased support stiffness (10 7 kN/m/m
for line supports, 104 kN/m2 for surface supports) may help to get more realistic vibration results.
For nodal support components the vibration stiffness of the spring is applied.
See… 4.9.11 Nodal support.

Masses
Include mass components
Only checked mass components will be used in the analysis. It is useful when calculating
modal shapes only in a certain direction.
Mass matrix type
Diagonal: smaller mass matrix but without centrifugal intertias
Consistent (only if justified): complete mass matrix with centrifugal intertias
Masses taken into account
Here the masses taken into account during vibration analysis can be configured. Beside
All masses it is possible to reduce the masses to those above a given Z height or a given level
(if the model contains levels). An example could be the exclusion of the basement from the
vibration analysis.
 The program uses a diagonal mass matrix by default. Due to the lumped mass modeling
technique to achieve the required accuracy the elements must be divided into more elements
(by refining the mesh). Usually at least four finite elements must correspond to each half wave.
A good rule-of-thumb is that beams must be divided into at least eight elements.
358

The mode shapes are normalized with respect to the mass, {𝑈}𝑇 [𝑀]{𝑈} = 1

5.2.1. Vibration response factor

With more efficient design utilizing stronger materials leading to lighter structures, the problem of
human-induced vibrations on floors is increasing. Walking can cause vibration uncomfortable or
unacceptable for occupants of the buildings or make delicate operations impossible (e.g. operating
theatres, precesion laboratories). Footfall analysis considers walking as an external excitation force and
determines the vibration response factor, which is proportinal to the maximal acceleration at the
considered node. Footfall analysis is available only if the configuration includes the FFA module.
In order to analyse the response of a structure to human induced vibration two conditions must be
fulfilled. Model must contain domains and the angle between their normal and the direction of the
gravity should be less then 70°. A domain is considered to be a slab if the angle between its normal
and the direction of gravity is less than 10°, if this angle is between 10° and 70° the surface is consi-
dered to be a staircase. Domains with larger angles between their normal and the gravity are consi-
dered to be walls. AxisVM does not analyse and does not excite nodes of walls as vibration of walls
don’t cause discomfort.

Vibration results The second prerequisite is a vibration analysis with first and/or second order vibration results. Select
to use the vibration results of load cases or combinations that should be taken into account (load cases or
combinations without the appropriate number of mode shapes appear in red).
Choose an excitation method, set the damping ratio and further parameters of the dynamic load. The
result of the analysis is a vibration response factor (R) for the selected excitation method on slabs and
staircases. R must be checked against the recommended values (for details see the FFA Guide (see
Help / FFA Guide).

It is also important that the boundary and continuity conditions must be set up to reflect the stiffer
behaviour of the structures for dynamic loads (see… 5.2 Vibration, Use increased support stiffness).
Furthermore, during the calculation of the modal shapes it is suggested to take into account live loads
with quasi-permanent combination (𝝍𝟐 ), which influences the results favourably due to the significant
increase in the structure’s modal masses.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 359

Modal shapes All modal shapes for the load cases/combinations: All shapes of the selected load cases/combinations
to use will be taken into account.
Shapes activated in the table of modal mass factors: Shapes can be made inactive in the table of Modal
mass factors (see… 4.10.23.1 Seismic load calculation according to Eurocode 8).
Below frequency limit let the user to set a limit for the eigenfrequencies, which will appear in the
calculation. Only modes with a smaller frequency will be taken into account.
Excitation method Three excitation methods are available. Each one creates a separate R result component.
Full: All nodes of slabs or staircases can excite any other node (R full). This is the most robust method.
Excitation at the extremes of the modal shapes: Excitation takes place only at the two global extrema of
the eigenshapes (R extr.).
Excitation at the node where the response is analysed: The analysed node is only excited by itself (R
self).
Excitation until adjacent stories only: This option is enabled if the model contains at least three stories.
If checked the analysed node can only be excited with nodes on the same or adjacent stories.
Damping The critical damping ratio of the analysed structure can be set. Suggestions can be found in [33], [34].

Footfall parameters
Design method Two approaches are available: CCIP-016 [33] and SCI P354 [34]. Their algorithms are described in the
FFA Guide (see Help / FFA Guide). Changing the approach clears the previous results.

Number of steps The CCIP-016 design method allows resonant accelerations to be reduced due to the fact that
(CCIP-016) resonance needs time to develop. So the number of footsteps (the duration of the excitation) has
effect on the results.

Length of the wal- SCI P354 also takes into account the same effect but the relevant parameter is the length of the
king path walking path. In this approach the most unfavourable length should be given.
(SCI P354)
Mass of the walker Both methods allow deviation from the predefined mass of the walker.

Pace frequency AxisVM analyses the effect of steps at several different pace frequencies within a given range. The
lower and upper bound of the frequency range can be set here.

Weighting curve SCI P354 allows the usage of different weighting curves. These curves take into account the fact that
the human perception of vibration varies with frequency.
Wb – Average areas, medium vibration should be used, if general comfort must be provided in the
building,
Wg – Special protection against vibration should be used if precise hand movements, steady vision
must be ensured.
In CCIP-016 design method only one weighting is applied.
For further details see Help / FFA Guide.
360

5.3. Dynamic analysis

Dynamic analysis determines time-dependent displacements and forces due to dynamic loads or nodal
accelerations. Dynamic analysis can be performed on linear or nonlinear models where a dynamic load
case has been defined and a dynamic load has been applied to the structure.

Load cases Static load case or combination

Select the static load case or combination to apply during the analysis. Select 'None' to apply
dynamic loads only.
Dynamic load case
Select the dynamic load case or combination.

Solution control Analysis can be performed in equal increments or according to a custom time increment function.
Predefined functions can be loaded or a new function can be created using the function editor.
If Equal increments is selected two parameters are required: Time increment and Total time. Analysis
uses the value of Time increment as the increment between time steps and Total time defines the total
time of the analysis.
Tracked node:
The displacement of the selected node in the given direction will be plotted during the analy-
sis.
Rayleigh damping constants (a, b)
Damping matrix is determined from the damping contants according to the following formu-
las:
𝐌 𝑢̈ + 𝐂𝑢̇ + 𝐊𝑢 = 𝑃(𝑡)
𝐂 = 𝑎𝐌 + 𝑏𝐊
If Consider loads and nodal masses is checked another matrix will be added to M representing loads
and nodal masses.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 361

Save results Due to the considerable result file size result saving options are introduced: Checking Save all steps
means that all result will be saved. Save at regular intervals saves results only at certain model time
coordinates reducing file size.

Dynamic load Interpolation method

functions The solver has to evaluate the dynamic load functions at every time step of the calculation. If there
are missing sample points at any of the time steps, interpolation is necessary. This option is availa-
ble only in this case. The selected interpolation method is performed for all dynamic load functions
used in the selected load case. The interpolated functions are not saved into the model. They are
available only for the solver. The following interpolation methods can be selected:
Linear
Simple linear sampling (see… 4.10.28 Dynamic loads (for time-history analysis) – DYN module). This
method is recommended if the dynamic load functions in the selected load case are piecewise lin-
ear.
Whittaker-Shannon
This method is based on the Whittaker-Shannon interpolation formula (see… 44.10.28 Dynamic loads
(for time-history analysis) – DYN module). It is recommended if the dynamic load functions in the selected
load case are sampled continuous functions (e.g. measurement records or functions generated from
Fourier spectral composition).

 The Whittaker-Shannon interpolation method is available only for functions obtained from
equidistant sampling.

Correction of the dynamic acceleration function

The selected corrections performed for all dynamic acceleration functions belonging to the selected
load case. These options are available if there are dynamic accelerations in the selected load case. The
corrected functions are not saved into the model. They are available only for the solver. The correction
method is described in section 4.10.28 Dynamic loads (for time-history analysis) – DYN module
Nodal masses Nodal masses will be taken into account like in a vibration analysis.
Mass matrix type Dynamic analysis uses Diagonal matrix type.
Nonlinearity Follow nonlinear behaviour of materials and finite elements
If nonlinear elements are defined (e.g. a tension-only truss) here you can activate or deactivate
the nonlinear behaviour.
Follow geometric nonlinearity of beams, trusses, ribs and shells
If this option is activated loads will be applied to the displaced structure in each step.

Convergence crite- If any of the nonlinearity options is checked convergence criteria has to be set and will be taken into
ria account like in a nonlinear static analysis. Otherwise the actual E(U), E(P) and E(W) values (their final
values appear in the Info window) are compared to the reference values set here.
Iteration control These options are described in section 5.1 Static analysis
362

Solution method Linear or nonlinear equilibrium equations are solved by the Newmark-beta method. If Δ𝑡 is the time
increment, in 𝑡 + Δ𝑡 we get:
𝐌 𝑢̈ 𝑡+Δ𝑡 + 𝐂𝑢̇ 𝑡+Δ𝑡 + 𝐊𝑢𝑡+Δ𝑡 = 𝑃(𝑡)

where C is the damping matrix, M is the mass matrix, K is the stiffness matrix.
Δ𝑡 2
𝑈𝑡+Δ𝑡 = 𝑈𝑡 + Δ𝑡 ⋅ 𝑈̇𝑡 + [(1 − 2𝛽)𝑈̈𝑡 + 2𝛽𝑈̈𝑡+Δ𝑡 ]
2
𝑈̇𝑡+Δ𝑡 = 𝑈̇𝑡 + Δ𝑡[(1 − 𝛾)𝑈̈𝑡 + 𝛾𝑈̈𝑡+Δ𝑡 ]
1 1
AxisVM uses 𝛽 = , 𝛾 = .
4 2

The differential equation of the motion is solved by the method of constant mean acceleration. This
step by step integration is unconditionally stable and its accuracy is satisfying. AxisVM assumes that no
dynamic effect is applied in 𝑡 = 0. Time-limited loads appear in 𝑡 > 0. C is calculated from the Rayleigh
damping constants:
𝐂 = 𝑎𝐌 + 𝑏𝐊
Where a and b should be calculated from the damped frequency range (between fi and fj) and the
damping ratio according to the following figure:
2𝜔𝑖 𝜔𝑗
𝑎=𝜉
𝜔𝑖 + 𝜔𝑗
2
𝑏=𝜉
𝜔𝑖 + 𝜔𝑗
where 𝜔𝑖 and 𝜔𝑗 are
angular frequencies
relating to 𝑓𝑖 and 𝑓𝑗 :
𝜔𝑖 = 2𝜋𝑓𝑖
𝜔𝑗 = 2𝜋𝑓𝑗
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 363

5.4. Buckling

Lets you determine the lowest (initial)

buckling load multipliers and the corres-
ponding mode shapes.
AxisVM verifies whether the required
number of the lowest eigenvalues has
been determined.
The buckling load multiplier 𝑛𝑐𝑟 = 𝜆𝑐𝑟 is
computed, solving the eigenvalue
problem. 𝜆𝑐𝑟 is the smallest eigenvalue
and the corresponding eigenvector is the
buckling mode shape.
The Sturm sequence check is applied to
verify whether the computed eigenvalues
are the lowest. 𝜆𝑐𝑟 < 0 means that buck-
ling occurs for the opposite load
𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒
orientation and 𝜆𝑐𝑟 ≤ |𝜆𝑐𝑟 |.

 The solution technique applied to the

associated generalized eigenvalue
problem is designed to find the lowest
real and positive eigenvalues. It is not
suitable to find eigenvalues that are
zero or nearly zero.

Solution control
Select load cases or combinations in the tree view. AxisVM will run a linear static analysis before the
buckling analysis of the selected load cases.
Lets you specify the parameters of the incremental solution process:
Case
Lets you select a case that will be taken into account. A linear (first-order) static analysis, that
precedes the buckling analysis, will be performed.
Number of mode shapes
Lets you specify the number of the vibration mode shapes you want to evaluate. A maximum
number of 99 can be requested. The default value is 6. The lowest positive eigenvalue is of
main importance.

Convergence criteria
See... 5.2 Vibration/Convergence criteria

Shells The buckling of shell elements are fully taken into account in the analysis.

Beams/ribs The buckling of beams/ribs is considered as in-plane buckling (flexural buckling), which means that
the deformed shape of the element remains in a plane and the cross-section does not warp.
For buckling analysis the beam cross-section must be defined by specifying its principal moments of
inertia.
 The beam elements must be divided into at least four elements.

Trusses The flexural buckling of truss elements are not considered by the program. You must calculate the
buckling load of each truss manually, or by modeling the trusses by four beam elements with the
corresponding end releases.
 If the model contains trusses the critical load parameter of global structural buckling will be
computed only. Buckling of individual trusses is not analysed.
364

5.5. Finite elements

All finite elements may be used in a linear static, nonlinear static, vibration, buckling and dynamic
analysis. Note that not all elements have geometric stiffness.

Truss Beam Rib

Quadrilateral membrane, plate, or shell Triangular membrane, plate, or shell

Spring Gap Support

(only one component (active in compression and (only one component
is shown) tension respectively) is shown)

The directions in the local coordinate system in which an element has stiffness, and the corresponding
local displacement components are summarized below:

Finite ex ey ez Θx Θy Θz
element u v w

Truss *

2-node, linear, isoparametric element

Beam * * * * * *

Euler-Navier-Bernoulli type, 2-node, cubic Hermitian element

Rib * * * * * *

Timoshenko type, 3-node, quadratic, isoparametric element

Membrane * *

Serendipity type, 8-node, quadratic, isoparametric element

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 365

Finite ex ey ez Θx Θy Θz
element u v w

Plate * * *

Hughes type, 9-node, Heterosis isoparametric plate element

Shell * * * * *

Flat shell superimposed membrane and plate element

Support
* * * * * *
(only two components are
shown)

Spring * * * * * * (only two components are

shown)

Gap *
Rigid

Link * * * * * *
(only two components are
shown for a node-to-node
link)

where:
u, v, w denote the deflections in local x, y, z directions.
Θx, Θy, Θz denote the rotations in local x, y, z directions.
* element has stiffness in the respective direction.

Internal forces The computed internal forces in the local coordinate system are:

Finite element Internal forces

Truss Nx
Beam Nx Vy Vz Tx My Mz
Rib Nx Vy Vz Tx My Mz
Membrane nx ny nxy
Plate mx my mxy vxz vyz
Shell nx ny nxy mx my mxy vxz vyz
Spring Nx Ny Nz Mx My Mz
Gap Nx
Support Nx Ny Nz Mx My Mz
Rigid
Link N-N Nx Ny Nz Mx My Mz
Link L-L nx ny nz mx my mz
366

5.6. Main steps of an analysis

1. Define the geometry of the structure, the material and cross-sectional properties of the
members, the support conditions, and the loads.
2. Determine the load transfer path.
3. Determine local discontinuities such as stiffeners, gussets, holes.
4. Determine the type of finite elements that will best model the behavior of the structure. With
this step the properties of structural elements will be concentraded in their neutral axis (point,
axis, or, plane).
5. Determine a mesh type and size for the model. The size of the mesh have to correspond to the
desired accuracy of the results and with the available hardware.
6. Create the model:
a.) Equivalent geometry
b.) Equivalent properties
c.) Topology of the elements
d.) Equivalent support conditions
e.) Equivalent load (static) or masses (vibration, response-spectrum)
7. Check input data (accuracy, compatibility)
8. Run analysis
9. Select important results
10. Evaluate and check the results
a.) Accuracy and convergence of the solution
b.) Compatibility taking into account point 6.d.
c.) Uncommon structures shall be analyzed with other methods and/or software as well.
11. Restart analysis with a correspondingly updated model, if in step 10 a criteria is not satisfied.
12. Evaluate the results by the means of isoline/isosurface plots, animation, tables... Draw
conclusions on the structure’s behavior.
Modelling To build a model of a structure you have to accept many assumptions so you also have to keep the
effects of these assumptions in view when evaluating results.

The finite element method provides an approximative solution for surface models. To make the model
match the real solution you have to use finite element meshes with an appropriate density. Making
finite element meshes you have to take into account the expected stress distribution, the model
geometry and the materials, supports and loads used.

The position af nodes and mesh lines (called the topology of the finite element mesh) depends on the
geometrical discontinuities (irregular contours, line supports) and the discontinuities of loads
(concentrated loads, terraced load values for line loads).
At stress concentration points (sharp corners) you have to refine the mesh. To avoid singularities due
to concentrated effects you can distribute them on a small area around the point of effect.
Arc contours can be approximated as polygons. Using very small tolerance in this approximation leads
to polygons with extreme small sides. The very dense mesh created on this contour may cause the
model exceed the capacity of your computer.

In general if you refine the mesh you get more accurate results.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 367

5.7. Error messages

Multiple error messages and warnings are organized into a tree.

The error messages corresponding to modeling errors are listed below:

Non-positive definite stiffness matrix

The determinant of the stiffness matrix is zero or negative due to modeling error.

Singular Jacobian matrix

Determinant of the element’s Jacobian matrix is zero, due to distorted element geometry.

Excessive element distortion during deformation

The element has been excessively distorted in the current increment.

Too large rotation increment

The rotation increment of an element exceeds /4 radian (90°). You should increase the number
of load increments.

Invalid control displacement component

The displacement control is applied about a constrained degree of freedom.

Convergence not achieved

The number of iteration is too low.

Too many eigenvalues

The rank of the mass matrix is lower than number of requested eigenvalues (frequencies or
buckling modes).

No convergent eigenvalue
No eigenvalue converged.

Not the lowest eigenvalue (xx)

There are xx lower eigenvalues than the lowest the one determined

Element is too distorted

The geometry of the finite element is distorted. In order to maintain the accuracy of the results
you should modify the finite element mesh to avoid too distorted element geometries.

Excessive element deformation

During a nonlinear analysis excessive deformations developed the element within an increment
(load or displacement). You should increase the number of increments.
368

No convergence achieved within maximum number of iterations

There was no convergence within the maximum number of iterations (see... Static /Nonlinear
Static Analysis/Solution Control parameters). You can increase the number of iteration. The model
may not converge at the respective load level, and you should change the Solution Control
parameters accordingly.

Divergence in the current iteration

A divergence was detected in the iteration process. Increments are too large or the convergence
criteria are too loose.

No stiffness at node ... in direction ...

There is a singularity in the system stiffness matrix corresponding to that degree of freedom. You
should check the support and degrees of freedom (DOF) settings of your model.

Other (system) In some cases, other type of error messages may also appear. Based on the system error code,
error messages more information is provided about the error on the following link:
http://docwiki.embarcadero.com/RADStudio/Tokyo/en/Input-Output_Errors
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 369

6. The Postprocessor
Static Lets you display the results of a static analysis. (6.1)
Buckling Lets you display the results of a buckling analysis. (6.2)
Vibration Lets you display the results of a vibration analysis. (6.3)
Dynamic Lets you display the results of a dynamic analysis. (6.4)
R.C. Design Lets you display the results of a reinforced concrete design analysis. (6.5)
Steel design Lets you display the results of a steel design analysis. (6.5.14)
Timber design Lets you display the results of a timber design analysis. (6.7)
XLAM design Lets you display the results of an XLAM-domain design analysis. (6.8)

6.1. Static

The Static menu item allows you to display the tools for displaying and interpreting the static analysis
results.
Display of linear / nonlinear
diagrams

Result display Available result Result Relative

parameters components scaling displacements
factor
Animation
Start a nonlinear Load case, combination, envelope, Display mode
or critical combination Min-max
static analysis search
Start a linear
static analysis

Width of combo boxes and the result scaling factor edit field can be adjusted on each postprocessor
tab separately. Place the mouse between the control and the next control of the toolbar. The cursor
will change to and you can adjust the width of the control. To restore the default sizes click
Settings / Toolbars to default position. See also 3.3.15 Toolbars to default position.
Start a linear static See... 5.1 Static analysis
analysis
Start a nonlinear See... 5.1 Static analysis
static analysis
Result display Lets you set the options of the graphical display of the results.
parameters You can select the results of a load case/combination or critical load combination.
Display Parameters dialog shows the following options.
370

Analysis Type Depending on the performed analysis you can select the results of a linear or nonlinear static analysis.
Each analysis type can be further defined:
Case
Lets you display the results of any load case/combination.
Envelope
Lets you display the envelope of the results from the selected load cases and/or load combinations.
The program searches for the minimum and/or maximum values at each location of the selected
result component.
Critical
Lets you generate the critical load combinations, according to the load group definitions, for each
location of the selected result component.

Envelope

AxisVM allows to define and use different envelopes with names. On the left a list of the available
envelopes are listed. Certain basic envelopes are automatically created (envelope of all load cases, all
load combinations or certain combination types (e.g. ULS, SLS Quasipermanent). The composition of
the selected envelope is displayed in the tree of load cases and combinations. Changing the
composition of an envelope results in creating a new, custom envelope. Selecting a custom envelope
and clicking on its name makes the name editable.
If AxisVM main window is divided into sub-windows a different envelope can be chosen for each sub-
window. The name of the selected envelope is also displayed in the status window. Drawings and
tables of the report also contain and display envelope information.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 371

Create a new custom envelope

Delete a custom envelope (only custom envelopes can be deleted)

.

 Multiple selection is enabled in the tree of load cases and combinations. To check or uncheck a
continuous range of load cases click on the first load case within the range (it will be selected)
then Shift+click on the last load case of the range.
.
Displayed envelopes Select the displayed envelopes from the dropdown list under the list of envelopes. This way you can
control which envelopes are available for result evaluation in the dropdown list of load cases and
combinations.
.

Only the selected envelope Only one envelope will be available which is the currently selected
one.
Only custom envelopes All custom envelopes will be listed

All envelopes All envelopes (basic and custom) will be listed.

Critical

Investigate all By default this option is off. AxisVM takes into account combinations resulting in an extreme for any
combinations resul- result component. In certain design methods however a combination which produces no extremes can
ting in the same be more unfavorable.
maximum value In this case turn this option on. In design calculations AxisVM will build all possible combinations and
check them according to the design code requirements. As the number of combinations can be ex-
tremely high this option is recommended only if the model size and the number of load cases are
small.

Method of combi- If Critical combination formula is set to Auto AxisVM deter-

nation mines if ULS (ultimate limit state) or SLS (service limit state)
combination is required based on the result component.
If Critical combination formula is set to Custom Min / Max /
Min, Max results of all combination methods will be available
in the load case tree regardless the current result component.
In case of Eurocode, DIN 1045-1, SIA 262 and other Eurocode
based design codes the formula for creating SLS combinations
can be chosen.

If the Auto option is selected all design calculations will choose

the appropriate critical formula (e.g. SLS Frequent for cracking
width calculation according to EC-HU, SLS Characteristic for
displacements of a timber structure, ULS for forces and stress-
es).
372

Display values If you have selected Envelope or Critical you can choose from the following options:

Min+Max
Displays the minimum and maximum values of the current result component.
Min
Displays the minimum (sign dependent) values of the current result component.
Max
Displays the maximum (sign dependent) values of the current result component.
Display Shape Undeformed
Displays the undeformed shape (original configuration) of the model.
Deformed
Displays the deformed shape of the model.
Automatic scaling of displacements
Scales the real deformation by an automatic scale factor so that the maximum displacement is
represented as 50 pixels. This pre-scaled deformation is the basis of the further scaling by the
result scaling factor. Without this option the basis of the scaling by result scaling factor is the real
deformation.

Display Mode Diagram

Lets you display the current result component in a colored diagram form. The numerical values
are displayed if a Show value labels on option is enabled.
Filled diagram
Similar to Diagram but fills it in a customizable way (see Graphic symbols, 3.3.11 Preferences)
Diagram+average values
This display mode is available only if line support forces are displayed. If this mode is selected
line support forces diagrams are enhanced with the display and labeling of the average value.
Averaging is made over continuos supports. Supports are considered to be continuous if they
have the same stiffness and their angle is below a small limit.
Section line
Lets you display the current result component in the active section lines and/or planes in a
diagram form. The numerical values are displayed if the Show Value Labels On option is enabled.
Filled section line
Similar to Section line but fills it in a customizable way (see settings for the Filled diagram,
Graphic symbols, 3.3.11 Preferences)
Isoline (contour line)
Lets you display the current result component in a line color contour plot form.
The values that are represented by the isolines are specified in the Color Legend window. You
can set the parameters of the Color Legend window as was described in the Information
Windows paragraph. The numerical values are displayed if a Show Value Labels On option is
enabled.
Isosurface 2D or 3D
Lets you display the current result component in a filled color contour plot form.
The ranges that are represented by the isosurfaces are specified in the Color Legend window. You
can set the parameters of the Color Legend window as was described in Information Windows
paragraph. The numerical values are displayed if a a Show Value Labels On option is enabled.
See... 2.18.4 Color legend window
None
The current result component is not displayed.
Section lines Lets you set the active section lines, planes and segments. If display mode is set to Section line result
diagrams will be drawn only on active (checked) section lines. Symbol of the section planes can be
displayed enabling the Draw section plane contour checkbox. Turning on the Draw diagram in the
plane of elements option changes the appearance of all section diagrams. To change this parameter
individually use the Section lines dialog.
See... 2.16.15 Sections

Component Lets you select the result component to be displayed.

Scale by Lets you set the scale of a diagram drawing. The default value is 1, when the maximum ordinate is
represented as 50 pixels.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 373

Write Values to ... Nodes

Writes the values of the current result component to the nodes.
Lines
Writes the values (intermediate values if applicable) of the current result component to the line
elements.
All surfaces
Writes the values of the current result component to the surface
elements. The maximum absolute value of the nine values
computed at the nodes of each surface is displayed, and the
respective node is marked by a small black circle.
Min/max only
Writes the local min/max values only of the current result component to the nodes, lines and
surfaces.

my moment component Rz support force component

 If labels overlap the drawing can be made clearer (more readable) by checking Prevent
labels from overlapping (2.16.18 Display options)

After clicking the Miscellaneous Settings... button the following options are available:

Result smoothing None

parameters The software does not smooth the values of the internal forces of the surface elements computed
at the nodes (the results related to joint nodes or edges of connecting finite elements may differ).
374

Selective
The values of the internal force components of the surface elements computed at the nodes are
averaged in a depending on the local coordinate systems, the support conditions and the loads of
the elements that are attached to a node.
The software recgonizes the typical cases, when a jump is expected in the internal forces due to
the loads and support conditions (e.g. the step in the internal shear forces at inner line support).
At these nodes the software does not proceed the smoothing.
If the local coordinate systems of the connecting domains are different, smoothing is performed
at the nodes of the connecting edges only if the angle between the locale x or z axes is not
greater than the values specified in the settings.
All surfaces
The values of all internal force components of the surface elements computed at the nodes are
averaged without consideration of the properties of the elements, loads and support conditions.
Intensity reference Intensity variation of the current surface internal force component displays the variation as a
value percentage of the referenmce value set here.
See... 6.1.12 Surface element internal forces
Line support See... 6.1.13 Support internal forces
internal forces
Surface support See... 6.1.13 Support internal forces
internal forces
Settings for Check Round calculated values and step of rounding to make the calculated values more realistic. Fol-
rebar spacing lowing rebar layout rules for spacing is optional.
Cut moment peaks If the mesh on a domain was created with the option Adjust mesh to column heads moment peaks can
over columns be averaged and cut over column heads by activating this option.
See... 6.1.12 Surface element internal forces

Case selector to You can select a case from the drop-down list to display:
display Load case, load combination
The k-th increment of a nonlinear analysis
Envelope display
Critical combination

Available result
components

You can select a result component from the drop-down list for display:
Displacement (eX, eY, eZ fX, fY, fZ,eR, fR)
Beam/rib internal force (Nx, Vy, Vz, Tx, My, Mz , MyD *)
Beam/rib stress (Smin, Smax,Tymean, Tzmean)
Relative displacement of beam/rib end releases (ex, ez, ez, fx, fy, fz, eR, fR)
Surface internal force (nx, ny, mx, my, mxy, vxz, vyz, vSz, n1, n2, an, m1, m2, am, nxD, nyD, mxD,
myD)
Surface stress (Sxx, Syy, Sxy, Sxz, Syz, Svm, S1, S2)
Reinforcement design forces (nxD, nyD, mxD+, mxD-, myD+, myD-)
Amounts of reinforcement (axa, aya, axf, ayf)
Crack width (wk(a), wk(f), wk2(a), wk2(f), wR(a), wR(f))
Nodal support force (Rx, Ry, Rz, Rxx, Ryy, Rzz)
Line support force (Rx, Ry, Rz, Rxx, Ryy, Rzz)
Surface support force (Rx, Ry, Rz)
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 375

Spring internal force (Rx, Ry, Rz, Rxx, Ryy, Rzz)

Gap internal force (Nx)
Node-to-node link element forces (Rx, Ry, Rz, Rxx, Ryy, Rzz)
Line-to-line link element / edge hinge forces (nx, ny, nz, mx, my, mz)
* MyD component is calculated only in certain cases, please see section 6.1.10 Rib internal forces
Display mode You can select a display mode from the drop-down list:
Diagram
Filled diagram
Section lines
Filled section line
Isolines
Isosurfaces 2D
Isosurfaces 3D
None

 If Min,Max envelope or critical load combination is selected, the Isoline and Isosurface 2D
cannot be selected.

Display scaling
factor
Lets you scale the display of the diagrams.

6.1.1. Minimum and maximum values

Lets you search for the minimum and maximum value of the current
result component. If you are working on parts, the search will be
limited to the active parts.
AxisVM will mark all occurrences of the minimum / maximum value.

 If parts are displayed extreme values are determined from the

displayed parts only.

If this function is used when displaying critical combinations, the actu-

al critical combination causing the extreme can be added to a cumula-
tive list on the clipboard (no duplicates will appear).
The combinations in this list can be added to the load combination
table.
See... 4.10.2 Load combinations.
376

6.1.2. Animation

Lets you display the displacements, internal forces, and mode shapes in animated form (frame by
frame). The animation of linear results consists of a sequence of frames that are generated by linear
interpolation between initial values (frame 0) and the actual values of the current result component
(frame n), according to the number of frames (n). Animation of nonlinear or dynamic results generates
frames from the results of individual increments. After choosing Deformed as the Display shape in the
Result display options the animation helps to see the deformation.
The generation process can be canceled by pressing Esc.
Control buttons

Save as a video file (AVI / GIF)

Fit in window

The drawing to be animated can be moved by dragging or zoom in/out using the mouse wheel the
same way as in the main window.

Animation Unidirectional play

Plays the frames starting from frame zero and ending
with frame n.
Bi-directional play
Plays the frames starting from frame zero and ending
with frame n and then the reverse.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 377

Frames
Lets you set the number of animation frames. You must specify a value between 3 and 99. More
frames produce smoother but slower animation.

Animate increment range

In case of nonlinear or dynamic results animation can be limited to a subrange of increments.
Adjust color for each frame
If frames are made from an iso-line/surface display and this option is selected the color range is
recalculated for each frame.
Color legend Proper setting of colors may require the calculation of the overall minimum/maximum of the displayed
result component which can be a time-consuming process for a dynamic analysis with a huge number
of increments. Choosing the first option estimates the minimum and maximum from the increments
used for generating frames.
Video File You can create a video file, name.avi or name.gif. The latter is an animated GIF file. Most web browsers
(*.avi, *.gif) support display of such files.
Click on the Save button to save the parameters of the video file.
You can set the duration of displaying a frame. Lower duration will result in a bigger number of frames.
A number of 30 frames/second is usual, therefore you should not normally enter less than 30 ms for the
duration of a frame.

6.1.3. Diagram display

This dialog displays linear, nonlinear or dynamic results as diagrams. Two diagrams can be displayed
simultaneously. Each diagram has a result component on its X and Y axis. Points representing consec-
utive value pairs are connected. Reading coordinates can be changed by dragging the dashed lines or
the black mark of the bottom trackbar. Diagram points can be displayed as a table and exported to
Excel through the Clipboard.

In case of linear analysis all load cases, all load combinations, all steps of a moving load or all mem-
bers of an envelope are displayed depending on the choosen case in the main window.
If a result component relating to stress points is selected the cross-section is displayed and a specific
stress point or the cross-sectional min/max value can be selected.
378

Stress point selectors

Cross-section for diagram X2-Y2

Selected stress point

Cross-section for diagram X1-Y1 (the selected component is not a stress point component)

In case of nonlinear analysis all increments of an analysis or all members of an envelope can be dis-
played.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 379

In case of dynamic analysis the bottom trackbar displays time instead of increment numbers.

Toolbar

Copies selected cells to Clipboard

If the table is visible its selected cells are copied to the Clipboard.

Print drawing
Prints the diagram (and the table if it is displayed)

Copy to Clipboard
Copies the diagram to the Clipboard.

Add drawing to Drawings Library

Saves the drawing into the Drawing Library to make it available for reports.
380

Diagram Display Parameters

Components to be displayed can be selected from
combo boxes.
If a result component is selected clicking the Node
button allows selecting the node where the result is
read.
The x1-y1 diagram is in blue, with ticks and labels on
the left and bottom axes.
The x2-y2 diagram is in red, with ticks and labels on
the right and top axes.
After turning on Show markers, data points are
marked with small rectangles.

Table
Turn on/off the table displaying numerical values.

Same range on the two X-axes

If the same X-component is chosen for the two horizontal axes their ranges can be set to the same.
Same range on the two Y-axes
If the same Y-component is chosen for the two vertical axes their ranges can be set to the same.

Fit in view in X-direction

Sets the horizontal range between minimum and maximum of X values.
Fit in view in Y-direction
Sets the vertical range between minimum and maximum of Y values.

Interval controls
Turns on/off the green interval control rectangles of the bottom trackbar. Dragging them changes the
displayed range of increments or time.

Loads the chosen load case, load combination, increment or time step to the active window.
(available in multi-window mode only)
Loads the chosen load case, load combination, increment or time step to the window.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 381

6.1.4. Pushover capacity curves

This dialog is only active if results of pushover analysis are available and it helps the user determine
the capacity curve and the target displacement depending on ground motion characteristics.
A combo box on the top of the dialog lets the user select the pushover load case to be analyzed.
Results are based on an acceleration-displacement response spectrum with properties specified on
the left side of the dialog. These are identical to the properties of response spectra used for Seismic
loads (See... 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module). Main results of the calculations are shown both on
the bottom left side of the dialog and under the diagrams themselves.
The default dialog displays a capacity curve for both the Multi Degree of Freedom System (MDOF)
and the equivalent Single Degree of Freedom System (SDOF).
The sky-blue curve is the capacity curve of the equivalent single degree of freedom system (SDOF).
It has the same shape as the deeper blue curve for the multi degree of freedom system (MDOF).
Its points are a result of dividing the corresponding force and displacement values of the MDOF
curve by Γ.
Generally, the end point of both capacity curves is the point corresponding to the maximum dis-
placement (divided by Γ for the SDOF curve) set by the user at the beginning of the nonlinear static
analysis.
The resulting curve on the figure below shows that the structure is capable of even more dis-
placement, since the base shear force (vertical axis) is increasing as the displacements are increasing.
The maximum value of the shear force can only be determined if a sufficiently large target displace-
ment is specified when running the nonlinear pushover analysis.

Toolbar

Print drawing
Prints the current diagram
Copy to clipboard
Copies the current diagram to the Clipboard.
Add drawing to Gallery
Saves the current diagram to the Gallery to make it available for reports.
Table
Turns the table displaying numerical values on/off.
382

Add to Drawings Library

Saves the current diagram to the Drawings Library to make it available for reports.
Seismic parameters
Displays a table with absolute and relative displacements of stories and other parameters.

6.1.4.1. Capacity curves according to Eurocode 8

All of the results are based on the N2 method (see 11.32) recommended in Appendix B of Eurocode 8.
The bilinear force-displacement relationship for the SDOF system (green curve) is calculated by taking
the force at the target displacement (𝑑𝑡∗ ) as the force that corresponds to yielding (𝐹𝑦∗ ) and defining
yield displacement (𝑑𝑦∗ ) using the equivalent deformation energy principle.
A vertical red line marks 150% of the target displacement (𝑑𝑡 ) according to Eurocode 8 (4.3.3.4.2.3).
Generally, if the deformation capacity of the structure is above this level (the line style is dash-dot) it
fulfills the deformation capability requirements, otherwise (the lines style is continuous) it fails these
requirements.

6.1.4.2. Acceleration-Displacement Response Spectrum (ADRS)

The Acceleration-Displacement Response Spectrum (ADRS) is shown by switching to the ADRS tab on
the dialog. Both elastic (dashed yellow line) and inelastic (yellow line) ADRS spectra, SDOF (blue line)
and equivalent bilinear capacity curves (green line) are shown here.
A separate line highlights the natural period corresponding to the elastic behavior of the structure. The
intersection of capacity and demand corresponding to the target displacement is marked by a red
circle. Purple dashed line shows the elastic approximation based on the initial stiffness of the bilinear
capacity curve.

Results The variables marked by an asterisk (*) represent the SDOF system’s behavior, while the others corre-
spond to the MDOF system.
Γ transformation factor for computing SDOF characteristics
m* mass of equivalent SDOF system
Fy* base shear force at dm* displacement of the equivalent SDOF system and yield force of the
elasto-perfectly plastic force-displacement relationship
d m* ultimate displacement of the idealized bilinear force-displacement relationship (not neces-
sarily the ultimate displacement of the SDOF system due to the iterating procedure of the N2
method)
dy* yield displacement of the idealized bilinear force-displacement relationship
T* natural period of the equivalent SDOF system
det* target displacement of the equivalent SDOF system with period T* and unlimited elastic
behavior
dt* target displacement of the equivalent SDOF system considering inelastic behavior
It represents the end of the green bilinear capacity curve.
dt target displacement of the MDOF system considering inelastic behavior
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 383

6.1.4.3. Drift
On the Drift tab the diagrams of absolute
drifts and relative story displacement (in-
terstory drift) ratios are displayed.
The diagram of absolute drift shows the
horizontal displacement of the centre of
gravity of stories relative to the soil. The
interstory drift ratio diagram shows the
interstory drift expressed as a percentage
of the story height. The latter diagram
helps to check if the structure meets the
drift limit requirements of Eurocode 8.
Clicking the Seismic parameters button on
the toolbar the numerical values can be
displayed in a table together with seismic
parameters of stories.

6.1.5. Result tables

Table Browser lets you display the numerical values of the results in a table in customizable form.
If you switched on parts, the table will list the values corresponding to the active parts. If you selected
elements the table will list the selected elements only by default. You can change the range of listed
elements by clicking the property filter button on the Table Browser toolbar.
You can transfer data to other applications via Clipboard. See... 2.9 Table Browser.

Setting Display options / Labels / Use finite element numbers controls not only labeling but
the way result tables are compiled.
For example if this option is activated you will find beam internal forces in the Table Browser
under RESULTS / Linear analysis / Internal forces / Finite elements / Beam internal forces.
Results are listed per finite element.
If it is unchecked this path is RESULTS / Linear analysis / Internal forces / Beam internal forces
and the results are listed per structural member.

Displaying results After calling the Table Browser you can set if you need a detailed table
[Ctrl]+[R] and/or the extremes and you can select which components you need the
extremes from. This dialog can be called later from Format / Result Display
Options.

Results Unchecking this option removes the detailed results leaving

the extremes as the only content of the table.

Extremes Unchecking this option removes the summary of extremes

from the end of the table.
384

Extremes to find The initial set of extremes to find is determined from the default column visibility of the result table.
The user can set which columns (result components) should be visible by default in the result table.
Only visible result components will be checked automatically.
You can set the components for which you want to find the extreme (maximum and minimum) values.
Among the minimum and maximum values the concomitant values of the different result components
are displayed if the minimum/maximum values occur in a single location or otherwise. If there are
multiple locations the symbol * will appear, and in the Loc (location) column the first occurrence of
the extreme value will be displayed.

When you display the results of critical combinations in addition to the minimum and maximum
values, the load cases that lead to the critical values are included with the following notations:
[ ... ] represents the results of a permanent load case.
{ ... } represents the results of an incidental load case.
( ... ) represents the results of an exceptional load case.

Property Filtering See in detail... 2.9 Table Browser

Print Clicking the Print tool button or choosing the File / Print menu item the print dialog appears.
[Ctrl]+[P] See... 3.1.12 Print.

6.1.5.1. Section segment result tables

If section segments are defined in the model section segment
result tables appear under the RESULTS node.
These tables list the values of result components along the
active (displayed) section segment. Internal segment result
points will be created where the segment plane intersected the
finite element edges.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 385

6.1.6. Displacements

Nodes
At each node, six nodal displacement components (three
translations and three rotations) are obtained in the global
coordinate system.
The resultant values of translations (eR) and of rotations (fR) are also
determined.

 In some cases, the displacements and internal forces associated with the same critical or
envelope load combination seem to be inconsistent.

There are two reasons for this phenomenon:

• displacement components and the internal forces are calculated from different compilation of
loads (eg. SLS or ULS), so the results cannot be interpreted together.
• the displacement components are obtained in the global coordinate system, but the internal
forces are presented considering the local coordinate system of the elements (beam, surface,
virtual beam,…). Results can only be interpreted on the basis of the coordinate system.
Simple cases are presented below to illustrate these phenomenons. In the figures, the internal forces
of the beam element is shown in deformed shape.
1. 2. 3.

1. In critical or envelop load combinations, the tension side of the beam seems to be
contradictory based on the results of the displacement and internal forces. The components
come from different compilation of loads (SLS and ULS), so the results are not coherent.
2. This special case also shows the effect of different load combinations. The internal force is
zero, but the deformed shape shows (significant) deformation.
3. The last case illustrates the consequences of different local coordinate systems in envelope
load combination. The applied load and the calculated displacement is the same. The internal
force is also identical, but the diagram of the internal force is on the opposite side due to the
various local z axis. This may seems to be contradictory compared to the deformed shape in
the interpretation of the tension or compression side).
 This may also occur in seismic combinations.
Displaying the displacements of a cantilever (membrane model):
Diagram with nodal values Section line with nodal values
386
Isolines Isosurfaces 2D

Beams For each beam element the intermediate displacements are obtained in the local and global
coordinate systems. When displaying the displacements of the structure the beam displacements are
related to the global coordinate system. If you pick the cursor on a beam element the six beam
displacement components related to the element local coordinate system are displayed in a diagram
form.

You can display displacements of more than one beam element if:
a) The local coordinate system of the elements are almost or entirely identical.
See... 2.16.19.3 Drawing/ Contour line angle
b) The local x orientation is the same.
c) The elements have the same material

Save to Drawings Load current load case or combination to the active

Library view
Load current load case or combination to all views
Save to Gallery Load case or
combination Actual displacements
Report Maker Displacements relative to endpoints
All results
Copy to Clipboard Displacements relative to the left end
Envelopes only
Print Displacements relative to the right end

Display the envelope only

Display results of all load cases / combinations plus the envelope

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 387

Load current load case or combination to the active view (in case of multi-window mode the load case
or combination will only be loaded to the active view)
Load current load case or combination to all views (in case of multi-window mode the load case or
combination will be loaded to all views)

Actual displacements

Displacements relative to Displacements relative to Displacements relative to

endpoints the left end the right end
You can display the diagrams corresponding to any load case or combination, as well as envelopes.
You can turn on and off the display of envelope functions and set the position along the member
where you want the results displayed.

Save diagrams Associative diagrams can be saved to the Drawings Library. Drawings from this library can be inserted
to the Drawings into reports. After changing and recalculating the model diagrams in the library and reports change
Library accordingly.

Result tables See... 6.1.5 Result tables

6.1.6.1. Nonlinear calculation of total deflection (wtot) for RC plates

 The following function is only available in Eurocode-NL and Eurocode-B standards and can be
used only for plates.
EN 1990:2002 A1.4.3, To determine the total deflection of a reinforced plate different type of vertical deflections must be
NEN-EN 1990 A1.4.3 calculated by running a series of nonlinear analyses for certain combinations with and without creep.
 Use reinforcement in calculation must always be checked.
Calculation of total deflection requires the following values
w1 Initial part of the deflection under permanent loads
Run nonlinear analysis for 1) permanent load cases or 2) characteristic, frequent or quasi-permanent
SLS combinations without variable loads) without creep (φ = 0)
w2 Long-term part of the deflection under permanent loads
The same quasi-permanent SLS combinations must be calculated both with and without creep as w2 is
obtained as the difference between the two results.
Permanent part of the SLS combinations must include the same permanent load cases as the combi-
nation used to determine w1.
w3 Additional part of the deflection due to the variable actions of the relevant combinations
Must be calculated from the same SLS combinations as used to determine w1 but including variable
load cases as well without creep. w3 is obtained as the difference between the two results.
wbij wbij =w2+w3
wtot Total deflection
wtot = w1+w2+w3
Steps of calculation 1. Generate all SLS combinations you want to take into account. Quasipermanent SLS combinations
must always be included. See... 4.10.2 Load combinations
2. Run a nonlinear analysis for all combinations without creep. Quasipermanent SLS combinations
must also be calculated with creep.
Use reinforcement in calculation must always be checked. See... 5.1 Static analysis.
3. Select a predefined envelope of SLS Quasipermanent or a custom envelope created from a subset of
the combinations. See... 6.1 Static.

4. If the envelope contains all the needed combinations, the program finds the set of combinations
that include the same permanent load cases and determine w1, w2, w3, wbij and wtot value for each
set, calculates their envelope and makes the envelope values available as w1, w2, w3, wbij and wtot
result components.
388

6.1.6.2. Relative displacements

If the model contains domains and a linear analysis has been performed, the Relative displacement
button on the Static tab is also enabled. This feature displays the displacement of domains relative to
their supports.
Click on it to get to the following dialog.

Selection of domains Three methods are available for defining supported nodes :
and supported nodes
1. Automatically: nodes of the selected domain(s) having a nodal, linear or surface support attached
will be considered to be supported if the support has a nonzero stiffness in the local z direction.
The following nodes are also considered to be supported:

a. nodes of the selected domain(s) with columns attached if the angle between the axis of the
column and the local z direction is less than 45°,
b. nodes of the selected domain(s) with walls attached if the angle between their local z directi-
ons is larger than 45°,

2. Automatically (slabs only): The above method but limited to selected slabs (a domain is consi-
dered to be a slab if its local z direction is parallel to the global Z direction).
3. Selection: the user can select both domains and supported nodes. Only nodes within the plane of
the domain will be taken into account.

Note: one region can only have one reference plane.

Select domains, supported nodes: click on this icon to select domains. In Selection mode the supported
nodes must also be selected.
Analysis The reference plane is determined from the displaced position of supported nodes. The way it is cal-
culated depends on the number of supported nodes.
1. No supported node: in this case no reference is assigned to the domain and results are not
calculated.

2. One supported node: the reference plane has the same normal as the domain and goes thro-
ugh the displaced position of the node.
3. Two supported nodes: the reference plane goes through the two displaced nodes. An in-plane
vector perpendicular to the line going through these nodes is parallel to the similar vector in
the plane of the undisplaced domain.

4. Three or more nodes: in this case the reference plane is fitted to the displaced nodes (it goes
through all supported nodes for three nodes).
The erel relative displacement of a domain node is defined as the dis-
tance of P and P’ where P is the intersection of the reference plane and
a line perpendicular to the original plane of the domain and going
through P’.

Selecting erel from the component list the results of the calculation can
be displayed for any load case, combination, envelope or critical com-
bination.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 389

Reference plane list: Displays a list of reference planes with the domains where erel was calculated
from the given reference plane and a list of supported nodes defining the reference plane. The select-
ed reference plane can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button or by pressing Del.

Result tables See... 6.1.5 Result tables

Save diagrams Diagrams can be saved to the Drawings Library and inserted into reports the usual way.
to the Drawings
Library

6.1.7. Nodal velocities

Dynamic analysis provides six nodal velocity components in the global coordinate system (three
translational and three rotational) at each node. The resultant values of translational (vR) and of
rotational ones (vRR) are also determined.

6.1.8. Nodal accelerations

Dynamic analysis provides six nodal acceleration components in the global coordinate system (three
translational and three rotational) at each node. The resultant values of translational (aR) and of
rotational ones (aRR) are also determined.

6.1.9. Truss/beam internal forces

Truss Axial internal forces (Nx) are calculated for each truss element.
A positive axial force corresponds to tension, a negative axial
force corresponds to compression.

When displaying the Envelope and Critical results the minimum and maximum values can con-
comitantly be displayed.

Displaying the internal forces of a truss girder:

Nx diagram Nx min/max envelope

Beam Three orthogonal internal forces, one axial and

two shear forces (Nx , Vy , Vz ) and three internal
moments, one torsional and two flexural (Tx, My,
Mz) are calculated at the intermediate cross-
sections of each element.

The internal forces are related to the element local coordinate system, and the positive sign
conventions apply as in the figure above. The moment diagrams are drawn on the tension side of the
beam elements.
390

Displaying the internal forces of a frame:

Nx diagram Vz diagram

My diagram My min/max envelope

Displaying You can display internal forces of more than one beam/truss element if:
beam/truss
internal forces a) the angular deviation of local x and z axes does not exceed the respective maximum values
specified in the Result display parameters / Miscellaneous settings dialog.
b) The elements have the same material.
If you click a beam element all six beam internal force components are displayed in a diagram form.

On selecting envelope or critical load combination, the selected beam internal force minimum and
maximum values of the intermediate cross sections will be displayed.
You can display the diagrams corresponding to any load case or combination, as well as envelopes.
You can turn on and off the display of envelope functions and set the position along the member
where you want the results displayed.

Result tables Three different types of table are available.

Beam internal forces: displays internal forces along the beam
Beam end internal forces: displays internal forces only in start and endpoint of the beams
Forces for connection design: lists internal forces of connecting ribs / beams / trusses per node

See… 6.1.5 Result tables

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 391

Save diagrams Associative diagrams can be saved to the Drawings Library. Drawings from this library can be inserted
to the into reports. After changing and recalculating the model diagrams in the library and reports change
Drawings Library accordingly.

If the min/max values occur in a single location the concomitant values of the afferent internal force
components are displayed, or the symbol * (if there are multiple locations). An occurrence of such a
location is displayed.
See... 6.1.5 Result tables

6.1.10. Rib internal forces

Three orthogonal internal forces, one axial and two shear forces (Nx,
Vy, Vz). and three internal moments, one torsional and two flexural
(Tx, My, Mz) are calculated at the nodes of each element. The rib can
be used independently (not connected to a surface element), or
connected to a surface element.

The internal forces are related to the element local coordinate system positioned in the center of
gravity of the cross-section, and the positive sign conventions apply as in the figure below. The
moment diagrams are drawn on the tension side of the beam elements.

If the rib is connected eccentrically to a shell element, axial forces will appear in the rib and in the
shell. In this case the design moment can be calculated as follows: 𝑀𝑦𝐷 = 𝑀𝑦 + 𝑒𝑧 ⋅ 𝑁𝑥
Assumptions for the The design moment MyD is always calculated by the program, but the above calculation method gives
calculation of MyD good results only under the following assumptions. In all cases, the user is to check their fulfillment.
component
• there is a fully rigid shear connection between the rib and the shell,
• there is no significant normal force in the rib except from the bending,
• the rib is rigid/large enough compared to the slab so neglecting bending moment of the
slab does not cause considerable error (bending moment of the slab is not included in
MyD).
MyD is also calculated and displayed when elastic shear connection is defined between the slab and
rib, but in this case the program gives a warning message when MyD result component is selected (it
appears only once after selecting this component for the first time after the analysis).

Conditions of the In case of bottom and top ribs, if Elastic type shear connection (see… 4.9.9 Line elements /Ribs) is set
calculation of vxz then the specific longitudinal shear force - vxz result component - is also calculated. Using Rigid shear
component connection this type of result component is not available).
392

Displaying rib You can display internal forces of more than one rib element if:
internal forces
a) the angular deviation of local x and z axes does not exceed the respective maximum values
specified in the Result display parameters / Miscellaneous settings dialog.
b) The elements have the same material.
Displaying the internal forces of a ribbed plate:
Tx diagram My min/max envelope

Result Tables See... 6.1.5 Result tables

6.1.11. Virtual beam internal forces

Calculation After defining virtual beams (see… 2.16.16 Virtual beams), the program calculates center of gravity in
each section to determine the centre line, on which a finite number of section are taken, depending on
the geometry, connecting elements and the density of the finite element mesh. In each section, the
section forces are reduced into the intersection of the centre line and the plane of the section. After
this procedure, the results of the virtual beam are plotted over the centre line.

Components of Three orthogonal internal forces, one axial and two shear
internal forces forces (Nx , Vy , Vz ) and three internal moments, one tor-
sional and two flexural (Tx, My, Mz) are calculated at the
intermediate cross-sections of each element.
Internal forces are related to the local coordinate system,
and the positive sign conventions apply as in the figure.
Moment diagrams are drawn on the tension side of the
beam elements.

Result tables The results are listed in all sections, with the global coordinates of the center of gravity.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 393

6.1.12. Surface element internal forces

Internal forces The internal forces and the positive sign conventions of each surface element type are summarized in
the table below.

Surface elements
Membrane nx Plate mx Shell nx
ny my ny
nxy mxy nxy
vxz mx
vyz my
mxy
vxz
vyz

Displaying the internal forces of a ribbed plate:

Diagram Section line

Isoline Isosurface 2D

 The x and y index of the plate moments indicates the direction of the normal stresses that
occur due to the corresponding moment, and not the rotation axis.
So, the mx moment rotates about the y local axis, while the my about the x local axis.
The moment diagrams of plate and shell elements are drawn on the tension side. On the top surface
(determined by the local z direction) the sign is always positive, on the bottom surface it is always
negative.
Intensity variation The finite element method is an approximate method. Under normal circumstances the results
converge to the exact values as the mesh is refined.
The refinement of the mesh (the number of the elements used in the mesh), the geometry of the
elements, the loading and the support conditions, and many other parameters influence the results.
Therefore some results will be relatively accurate whereas other results require the user to determine
if they meet the conditions of accuracy that he expects.
The intensity variation values are intended to give you help in identifying the regions in your model
(mesh) where it is possible that the accuracy of the results is not satisfactory, without performing an
additional analysis. This method does not show that the results are good, but will highlight intensity
variations with high magnitudes, where you may want to check and/or refine your mesh.
The allowable values of the intensity variation can be determined based on practice.
Cut moment peaks If we model columns connecting to slabs as nodal supports, moment peaks will appear over the sup-
over columns ports. If we use a denser mesh these peaks increase due to the nature of the finite element method. A
more realistic model takes into account the fact that columns have a nonzero cross-section area. Know-
ing the column cross-section moment peaks can be averaged. If we checked the option Adjust mesh to
column heads (4.11.1.2 Meshing of domains), the mesh already follows the column cross-section. After
turning on Cut moment peaks over columns on the Display parameters dialog (6.1 Static), moment dia-
grams will be displayed in Isosurfaces 3D mode like the right diagram below.
394

Diagram without cutting moment peaks Diagram with moment peaks cut

Result Tables See... 6.1.5 Result tables

Principal forces The n1, n2 and m1, m2, principal internal forces are computed with their
direction: αn and αm.
The direction of principal forces 1 and 2 can also be queried individually
choosing αn1, αn2 and αm1, αm2 result components.
Above these, the resultant shear force vRz is also calculated with its
direction: αvRz.
The sign conventions are as follows:
𝑚1 ≥ 𝑚2 , 𝑛1 ≥ 𝑛2 , −90° < 𝛼 ≤ +90° (relative to the local x axis)

Shell
Membrane Plate

𝑛𝑥 + 𝑛𝑦 𝑛𝑥 − 𝑛𝑦 2
𝑛1 𝑛1 = + √( 2
) + 𝑛𝑥𝑦 —
2 2

𝑛𝑥 + 𝑛𝑦 𝑛𝑥 − 𝑛𝑦 2
𝑛2 𝑛2 = − √( 2
) + 𝑛𝑥𝑦 —
2 2
2𝑛𝑥𝑦
𝛼𝑛 tg(2𝛼𝑛 ) = —
𝑛𝑥 − 𝑛𝑦

𝑚𝑥 + 𝑚𝑦 𝑚𝑥 − 𝑚 𝑦 2
𝑚1 — 𝑚1 = + √( 2
) + 𝑚𝑥𝑦
2 2

𝑚𝑥 + 𝑚𝑦 𝑚𝑥 − 𝑚 𝑦 2
𝑚2 — 𝑚2 = − √( 2
) + 𝑚𝑥𝑦
2 2
2𝑚𝑥𝑦
𝛼𝑚 — tg(2𝛼𝑚 ) =
𝑚𝑥 − 𝑚 𝑦

𝑣𝑅𝑧 — 2 + 𝑣2
𝑣𝑅𝑧 = √𝑣𝑥𝑧 𝑦𝑧
𝑣𝑦𝑧
𝛼𝑣𝑅𝑧 — tg(𝛼𝑣𝑅𝑧) =
𝑣𝑥𝑧

 In the case of plane strain membrane elements, nz  0 and is not determined.

 The internal forces can be displayed in diagram, section line, isoline or isosurface style.
The principal directions (αn, αn1, αn2 and αm, αm1, αm2) can be displayed only as diagrams+++.
The color and the size of the direction vector are determined based on the value of the respective
principal internal forces.
If the principal internal force is negative the corresponding direction vector is bounded by two
segments perpendicular to it.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 395

Negative principal internal force

Result Tables See... 6.1.5 Result tables

Reinforcement For surface elements nxv, nyv, mxv, myv reinforcement (design) forces and moments are also
forces calculated according to the following rules:
𝑛𝑥𝑣 = 𝑛𝑥 ± |𝑛𝑥𝑦 |, 𝑛𝑦𝑣 = 𝑛𝑦 ± |𝑛𝑥𝑦 |
𝑚𝑥𝑣 = 𝑚𝑥 ± |𝑚𝑥𝑦 |, 𝑚𝑦𝑣 = 𝑚𝑦 ± |𝑚𝑥𝑦 |

 The reinforcement design forces can be displayed in diagram, section line and iso-line / surface
colored form.
Intensity variation dnx, dny, dnxy, dmx, dmy, dmxy, dqx, dqy are dimensionless result components showing the intensity
varation within one finite element. The difference between the maximum and minimum value within
the finite element is divided by a reference value. The reference value can be set to any of the follow-
ing:
• Absolute maximum of the respective force component over the entire model
• Absolute maximum of the respective force component over the active parts
• Custom value
The reference value can be selected in the Result display parameters dialog (see… 6.1 Static).

6.1.13. Support internal forces

Positive displacement and rotation components cause positive internal

force components. Elongation of the support spring elements causes
tensile force, while shortening of them causes compressive force.
 The internal forces can be displayed in diagram or colored form. In the case
of nodal supports, when displaying in diagram form, the internal force
components are represented as vectors.

Resultant internal The resultant internal forces 𝑅𝑒𝑅 , 𝑅Θ𝑅 are computed as follows:
forces
𝑅𝑒𝑅 = √𝑅𝑥2 + 𝑅𝑦2 + 𝑅𝑧2 , 2 + 𝑅2 + 𝑅2
𝑅Θ𝑅 = √𝑅x𝑥 y𝑦 z𝑧

Rxyz and Rxxyyzz result components refer to a special display mode where the individual force
or moment components are displayed simultaneously as three arrows pointing in the respective
local direction.
Ratio of horizontal A result component showing the ratio of horizontal and vertical forces is calculated as
and vertical forces 1
𝛼𝑅 = √𝑅𝑥2 + 𝑅𝑦2
𝑅𝑧
396

Displaying the internal forces of supports in a frame and a shell structure:

Ryy moments ReR resultant forces

Ry edge forces ReR edge resultant forces

Result Tables See... 6.1.5 Result tables

Diagram When displaying line support forces a spe-

+average values cial display mode (Diagram + average
values) is available. If this mode is selected
line support forces diagrams are enhanced
with the display and labeling of the average
value. Averaging is made over continuos
supports. Supports are considered to be
continuous if they have the same stiffness
and their angle is below a small limit. La-
bels also show the length of the averaging
segment.

Optionally results can be averaged over each structural member separately. The method of averaging
can be selected in the Result display parameters dialog (see… 6.1 Static).
Average value For surface support forces a separate display mode is introduced displaying the average values of Rx,
Ry or Rz. Optionally results can be averaged over each domain separately. The method of averaging
can be selected in the Result display parameters dialog (see… 6.1 Static). It is also possible to calculate
average for positive and negative regions separately.

6.1.14. Internal forces of line to line link elements and edge hinges
Internal forces AxisVM determines the nx, ny, nz forces and mx, my, mz moments for line to line link elements and
edge hinges. If any stifness component is set to zero the related result component is zero and not
displayed neither in the component combo nor in result tables.

6.1.15. Spring element internal forces

Internal forces are related to the local coordinate system. The

positive sign conventions apply as in the figure.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 397

6.1.16. Truss, beam and rib element strains

The strain results are only available in case of materially nonlinear analysis.

Strain components

exx Axial strain in local x direction

exy Shear strain in local xy plane
exz Shear strain in local xz plane
eyz Torsional strain in local x direction
kyy Curvature in local xy plane
kzz Curvature in local xz plane

The following strain components are available for the line elements:

Strain component Truss Beam Rib

exx exx exx exx
kyy kyy kyy
kzz kzz kzz
eyz eyz eyz
exy exy
exz exz
398

6.1.17. Truss, beam and rib element strains at stress points

The strain results at stress points are only available in case of an analysis with material nonlinearity.
The following strain values are calculated for truss elements and in each stress point of each cross-
section of the beam/rib elements:

Strain components at
stress points
exx T Axial strain in local x direction, total
(NLP) exx E Axial strain in local x direction, elastic
(NLP) exx P Axial strain in local x direction, plastic
(NLP) eeff Effective plastic strain
(NLP) deeff Effective plastic strain increment
Effective strain
(NLE) eeff
(𝑁𝐿𝐸) 𝑒𝑒𝑓𝑓 = |𝑒𝑥𝑥 𝑇|

(NLE) – Nonlinear elastic material

(NLP) – Nonlinear plastic material
Notation T - Total
E - Elastic
P - Plastic

6.1.18. Surface element strains

The strain results are only available in case of materially nonlinear analysis.

Strain components

exx Axial strain in local x direction

eyy Axial strain in local y direction
exy Shear strain in local xy plane
kxx Curvature in local xz plane
kyy Curvature in local yz plane
kxy Distortional curvature
fzz Rotation about local z axis (drilling)
exz Shear strain in local xz plane
eyz Shear strain in local yz plane
Resultant shear strain normal to plane of the element
eSz
𝑒𝑆𝑧 = √𝑒2𝑥𝑧 + 𝑒2𝑦𝑧
e1 Maximum principal strain in local xy plane
e2 Minimum principal strain in local xy plane
ae Angle of the principal strain direction
k1 Maximum principal curvature
k2 Minimum principal curvature
ak Angle of the principal curvature direction
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 399

The following strain components are available for the surface elements:

Strain component Membrane Plate Shell

exx exx exx
eyy eyy eyy
exy exy exy
fzz fzz fzz
kxx kxx kxx
kyy kyy kyy
kxy kxy kxy
exz exz exz
eyz eyz eyz
eSz eSz eSz
e1 e1 e1
e2 e2 e2
ae ae ae
k1 k1 k1
k2 k2 k2
ak ak ak
400

6.1.19. Surface element strains at stress points

The strain results at stress points are only available in case of materially nonlinear analysis. The
following strain components are calculated at each node of the element in the top, center, and bottom
fiber:

Strain components at stress

points
exx T, (NLP) exx E,
Axial strain in local x direction
(NLP) exx P
eyy T, (NLP) eyy E,
Axial strain in local y direction
(NLP) eyy P
exy T, (NLP) exy E,
Shear strain in local xy plane
(NLP) exy P
e1 T, (NLP) e1 E, (NLP) e1 P Maximum principal strain in local xy plane
e2 T, (NLP) e2 E, (NLP) e2 P Minimum principal strain in local xy plane
ae T, (NLP) ae E, (NLP) ae P Angle of the principal strain direction
(NLP) eeff Effective plastic strain
(NLP) deeff Effective plastic strain increment
Effective strain
(NLE) eeff 1 2 + 𝑒 2 + 𝑒 2 ) + 2𝜈(𝑒 𝑒
1 − 2𝜈 2
𝑒𝑒𝑓𝑓 = √ [(1 − 𝜈)(𝑒𝑥𝑥 𝑦𝑦 𝑧𝑧 𝑥𝑥 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑒𝑥𝑥 𝑒𝑧𝑧 + 𝑒𝑦𝑦 𝑒𝑧𝑧 ) + 𝑒𝑥𝑦 ]
(1 − 2𝜈)(1 + 𝜈) 2

(NLE) – Nonlinear elastic material

(NLP) – Nonlinear plastic material
Notation T – Total
E – Elastic
P – Plastic

6.1.20. Spring element deformations

Deformation
Deformations in local directions
components

ex 𝑒𝑥 = 𝑒𝑥𝑗 − 𝑒𝑥𝑖
ez 𝑒𝑦 = 𝑒𝑦𝑗 − 𝑒𝑦𝑖
ez 𝑒𝑧 = 𝑒𝑧𝑗 − 𝑒𝑧𝑖
Rotational deformations about local axes

fx 𝑓𝑥 = 𝑓𝑥𝑗 − 𝑓𝑥𝑖
fy 𝑓𝑦 = 𝑓𝑦𝑗 − 𝑓𝑦𝑖
fz 𝑓𝑧 = 𝑓𝑧𝑗 − 𝑓𝑧𝑖

6.1.21. Truss/beam/rib stresses

The display modes for stress results are the same as for the internal forces. The table of the stress
results are similar to those of internal forces.

Truss The 𝑆𝑥 = 𝑁𝑥 /𝐴𝑥 stress value is calculated for each truss element.
A positive value means tension.

Beams / Ribs The following stress values are calculated in each stress point of each cross-section of the beam/rib
element:

Normal stress from tension/compression and bending is calculated disregarding warping stress:
𝑁𝑥 𝑀𝑦 𝐼𝑧 + 𝑀𝑧 𝐼𝑦𝑧 𝑀𝑧 𝐼𝑦 + 𝑀𝑦 𝐼𝑦𝑧
𝑆𝑥,𝑖 = + 2 𝑧𝑖 − 2 𝑦𝑖
𝐴𝑥 𝐼𝑦 𝐼𝑧 − 𝐼𝑦𝑧 𝐼𝑦 𝐼𝑧 − 𝐼𝑦𝑧
where yi , zi are the stress point coordinates. Positive stress value means tension in the cross-section.
Resultant shear stress is calculated from shear and twisting (Saint-Venant) disregarding warping shear
stress.

For thick-walled cross-sections 𝑉𝑖 = √𝑉𝑦,𝑖

2 2
+ 𝑉𝑧,𝑖 ,
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 401

where shear stress components are:

𝑉𝑦 𝜕Φ𝑦 𝑉𝑧 𝜕Φ𝑧 𝑀𝑥 𝜕𝜔
𝑉𝑦,𝑖 = ( ) + ( ) + [( ) − 𝑧𝑖 ]
𝐴𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝑖 𝐴𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝑖 𝐼𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝑖
𝑉𝑦 𝜕Φ𝑦 𝑉𝑧 𝜕Φ𝑧 𝑀𝑥 𝜕𝜔
𝑉𝑧,𝑖 = ( ) + ( ) + [( ) + 𝑦𝑖 ]
𝐴𝑥 𝜕𝑧 𝑖 𝐴𝑥 𝜕𝑧 𝑖 𝐼𝑥 𝜕𝑧 𝑖
where Φ𝑦 and Φ𝑧 are the shear stress functions for shear in y and z direction,  is the warping func-
tion.
For thin-walled cross-sections:
𝑉𝑦 𝜕Φ𝑦 𝑉𝑧 𝜕Φ𝑧 𝑀𝑥 𝜕𝜔 𝑀𝑥
𝑉𝑖 = | ( ) + ( ) + [( ) − 𝑚𝑖 ] | + 𝑡
𝐴𝑥 𝜕𝑠 𝑖 𝐴𝑥 𝜕𝑠 𝑖 𝐼𝑥 𝜕𝑠 𝑖 𝐼𝑥 𝑖

where the last two terms are the shear stress from twisting derived from shear flow in closed and
open subsections. 𝑚𝑖 is the distance of the centre of gravity from the segment, 𝑡𝑖 is the wall thickness
of the segment. 𝜔, Φ𝑦 and Φ𝑧 are centerline values.

Von Mises stress is defined as 𝑆𝑜,𝑖 = √𝑆𝑥𝑖

2
+ 3𝑉𝑖2

If a cross-section contains two or more separate parts Vi and So,i is not calculated.
𝑉𝑦 𝑉𝑧
Mean shear stresses: 𝑉𝑦,𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 = , 𝑉𝑧,𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 = , if 𝐴𝑦 = 𝐴𝑧 = 0 then 𝐴𝑦 = 𝐴𝑦 = 𝐴𝑥
𝐴𝑥 𝐴𝑥

Stresses of compo- The modulus-weighted [16, Chapter 1.2] stresses are calculated for each part of the composite cross-
site cross-sections sections. The reference moduli 𝐸𝑟𝑒𝑓 and 𝐺𝑟𝑒𝑓 belong to the material of the outer part of the cross-
section.
Normal stress from tension/compression and bending is calculated disregarding warping stress:
𝐸𝑖 𝑁𝑥 𝑀𝑦 𝐼𝑧 + 𝑀𝑧 𝐼𝑦𝑧 𝑀𝑧 𝐼𝑦 + 𝑀𝑦 𝐼𝑦𝑧
𝑆𝑥,𝑖 = ( + 2 𝑧𝑖 − 2 𝑦𝑖 )
𝐸𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝐴𝑥 𝐼𝑦 𝐼𝑧 − 𝐼𝑦𝑧 𝐼𝑦 𝐼𝑧 − 𝐼𝑦𝑧

where yi , zi are the stress point coordinates and 𝐸𝑖 is the Young’s modulus of the part which the
stress point belongs to.
Resultant shear stress is calculated from shear and twisting (Saint-Venant) disregarding warping shear
stress.
For stress points belonging to thick-walled parts 𝑉𝑖 = √𝑉𝑦,𝑖
2 2
+ 𝑉𝑧,𝑖 ,
where shear stress components are:
𝐺𝑖 𝑉𝑦 𝜕Φ𝑦 𝑉𝑧 𝜕Φ𝑧 𝑀𝑥 𝜕𝜔
𝑉𝑦,𝑖 = ( ( ) + ( ) + [( ) − 𝑧𝑖 ] )
𝐺𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝐴𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝑖 𝐴𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝑖 𝐼𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝑖

𝐺𝑖 𝑉𝑦 𝜕Φ𝑦 𝑉𝑧 𝜕Φ𝑧 𝑀𝑥 𝜕𝜔
𝑉𝑧,𝑖 = ( ( ) + ( ) + [( ) + 𝑦𝑖 ] )
𝐺𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝐴𝑥 𝜕𝑧 𝑖 𝐴𝑥 𝜕𝑧 𝑖 𝐼𝑥 𝜕𝑧 𝑖

where Φ𝑦 and Φ𝑧 are the shear stress functions for shear in y and z direction,  is the warping func-
tion and 𝐺𝑖 is the shear modulus of the part which the stress point belongs to.

For stress points belonging to thin-walled parts:

𝐺𝑖 𝑉𝑦 𝜕Φ𝑦 𝑉𝑧 𝜕Φ𝑧 𝑀𝑥 𝜕𝜔 𝑀𝑥
𝑉𝑖 = {| ( ) + ( ) + [( ) − 𝑚𝑖 ] | + 𝑡}
𝐺𝑟𝑒𝑓 𝐴𝑥 𝜕𝑠 𝑖 𝐴𝑥 𝜕𝑠 𝑖 𝐼𝑥 𝜕𝑠 𝑖 𝐼𝑥 𝑖

where the last two terms are the shear stress from twisting derived from shear flow in closed and
open subsections. 𝑚𝑖 is the distance of the centre of gravity from the segment, 𝑡𝑖 is the wall thickness
of the segment. 𝜔, Φ𝑦 and Φ𝑧 are centerline values.

Von Mises stress is defined as 𝑆𝑜,𝑖 = √𝑆𝑥𝑖

2
+ 3𝑉𝑖2

For composite cross-sections 𝑽𝒚,𝒎𝒆𝒂𝒏 and 𝑽𝒛,𝒎𝒆𝒂𝒏 is not calculated.

 The modulus-weighted computation method is based on the assumption that there is no shear
connection between the parts of the composite cross-section. However, it has no effect for the
normal stress, because of the coincidence of the center of gravity of the parts. But the shear
stress would be different if there was shear connection.
402

Further stress com- NL elastic / Strain energy based material model

ponents for nonlin-
ear material Effective stress.
Only the normal stress affects the materially nonlinear behaviour of truss, beam and rib elements.
The shear stress has no effect (further information see at References [5])

(𝑁𝐿) 𝑆𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖 = |𝑆𝑥.𝑖 |

Actual yield strength

It is the actual limit of proportionality influenced by the sign and the magnitude of the normal stress

𝜎(𝜀𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖 ) 𝑖𝑓 𝑆𝑥,𝑖 > 𝜎𝑦𝑇

𝜎𝑦𝑇 𝑖𝑓 0 ≤ 𝑆𝑥,𝑖 ≤ 𝜎𝑦𝑇
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑓𝑦,𝑖 =
𝜎𝑦𝐶 𝑖𝑓 −𝜎𝑦𝐶 ≤ 𝑆𝑥,𝑖 ≤ 0
{|𝜎(−𝜀𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖 )| 𝑖𝑓 𝑆𝑥,𝑖 < −𝜎𝑦𝐶

where 𝜎𝑦𝑇 and 𝜎𝑦𝐶 are the closest points of the stress-strain diagram of the material (see… 3.1.15
Material Library) on the positive and on the negative region and 𝜀𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖 is the effective strain
[(NLE) eeff, see… 6.1.17 Truss, beam and rib element strains at stress points]

Utilization:
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑆𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑈𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑧𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑖 =
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑓𝑦,𝑖
Plastic / von Mises material model
Effective stress.
Only the normal stress affects the materially nonlinear behaviour of truss, beam and rib elements.
The shear stress has no effect [5]
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑆𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖 = |𝑆𝑟,𝑥.𝑖 |

where 𝑆𝑟,𝑥,𝑖 = 𝑆𝑥,𝑖 − 𝐵𝑥,𝑖 is the relative stress with respect to the centre of the yield surface.
See… 3.1.15 Material Library

Actual yield strength

It is the actual yield strength influenced by the hardening effect. It is computed on the basis of the
stress-strain diagram of the material (See… 3.1.15 Material Library)

where 𝜀𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖 is the effective plastic strain ( (NLP) eeff, see… 6.1.17 Truss, beam and rib element strains
at stress points)
Utilization:
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑆𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑈𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑧𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑖 =
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑓𝑦,𝑖
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 403

Plastic / Bresler-Pister material model

Effective stress.
Only the normal stress affects the materially nonlinear behaviour of truss, beam and rib elements.
The shear stress has no effect [5]
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑆𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖 = |𝑆𝑥.𝑖 |

Actual yield strength

It is the actual yield strength influenced by the sign of the normal stress:

𝜎𝑦𝑇 𝑖𝑓 𝑆𝑥,𝑖 ≥ 0
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑓𝑦,𝑖 = {
𝜎𝑦𝐶 𝑖𝑓 𝑆𝑥,𝑖 < 0

where 𝜎𝑦𝑇 and 𝜎𝑦𝐶 are tensile and compressive yield strength respectively (See… 3.1.15 Material Li-
brary)

Utilization:
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑆𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑈𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑧𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑖 =
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑓𝑦,𝑖
Beam stresses Sminmax, Vminmax, Sominmax are minimum / maximum values within the cross-
section and displayed like internal forces.
You can click a beam/rib element to display stress diagrams. On the left the minimum/maximum val-
ues along the line are displayed. Dragging the blue line with the mouse the evaluation position can
be changed. The axonometric diagrams in the middle and the tables on the right show the stress
distribution within the section at the evaluation point.
Select more elements before clicking to display them in one diagram. Continuous beams/ribs can be
displayed in one diagram if conditions described in section 6.1.9 Truss/beam internal forces are satisfied.

You can display the diagrams corresponding to any load case or combination, as well as envelopes.
You can turn on and off the display of envelope functions and set the position along the member
where you want the results displayed.
404

Save diagrams Associative diagrams can be saved to the Drawings Library. Drawings from this library can be inserted
to the Drawings into reports. After changing and recalculating the model diagrams in the library and reports change
Library accordingly.

 Selecting envelope or critical combinations only one of the min and max components will
appear depending on the component. If extreme values are located in one cross-section only
you will see values of the other components as well. Otherwise a  will appear and the cross-
section location will be the first one.
Result Tables See... 6.1.5 Result tables

6.1.22. Surface element stresses

The following stress components are calculated at each node of the element in the top, center, and
bottom fiber:

Component Membrane Plate Shell

𝑠𝑥𝑥 𝑛𝑥 6 𝑛𝑥 6
𝑠𝑥𝑥 = 𝑠𝑥𝑥 = ± 𝑚 𝑠𝑥𝑥 = ± 2 𝑚𝑥
𝑡 𝑡2 𝑥 𝑡 𝑡

𝑠𝑦𝑦 𝑛𝑦 6 𝑛𝑥 6
𝑠𝑦𝑦 = 𝑠𝑦𝑦 = ± 𝑚 𝑠𝑦𝑦 = ± 2 𝑚𝑦
𝑡 𝑡2 𝑦 𝑡 𝑡

𝑠𝑥𝑦 𝑛𝑥𝑦 6 𝑛𝑥𝑦 6

𝑠𝑥𝑦 = 𝑠𝑥𝑦 = ± 𝑚 𝑠𝑥𝑦 = ± 2 𝑚𝑥𝑦
𝑡 𝑡 2 𝑥𝑦 𝑡 𝑡

𝑠𝑥𝑧 3𝑣𝑥𝑧 3𝑣𝑥𝑧

𝑠𝑥𝑧 = 𝑠𝑥𝑧 =
2𝑡 2𝑡

𝑠𝑦𝑧 3𝑣𝑦𝑧 3𝑣𝑦𝑧

𝑠𝑦𝑧 = 𝑠𝑦𝑧 =
2𝑡 2𝑡

 In the case of plane strain membrane elements 𝒔𝒛𝒛 ≠ 𝟎, and is determined as 𝒔𝒛𝒛 = 𝒗 ⋅ (𝒔𝒙𝒙 + 𝒔𝒚𝒚 )
Von Mises stress The Von Mises stress is computed:
2 2 2 + 𝑠2 + 𝑠2 )
𝑠0 = √0.5 [(𝑠𝑥𝑥 − 𝑠𝑦𝑦 ) + (𝑠𝑦𝑦 − 𝑠𝑧𝑧 ) + (𝑠𝑧𝑧 − 𝑠𝑥𝑥 )2 ] + 3(𝑠𝑥𝑦 𝑦𝑧 𝑧𝑥

Further stress com- NL elastic / Strain energy based material model

ponents for nonlin-
ear materials Effective stress
2 + 𝑠 2 + 𝑠 2 − 2𝜈(𝑠 𝑠 2
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑠𝑒𝑓𝑓 = √𝑠𝑥𝑥 𝑦𝑦 𝑧𝑧 𝑥𝑥 𝑦𝑦 + 𝑠𝑥𝑥 𝑠𝑧𝑧 + 𝑠𝑦𝑦 𝑠𝑧𝑧 ) + 2(1 + 𝜈)𝑠𝑥𝑦

 Only the normal stresses 𝒔𝒙𝒙 , 𝒔𝒚𝒚 , 𝒔𝒛𝒛 and the shear stress 𝒔𝒙𝒚 affect the materially nonlinear
behaviour of surface elements. The shear stresses 𝒔𝒙𝒛 and 𝒔𝒚𝒛 have no effect. Further
information see at References [5]
Actual yield strength
It is the limit of proportionality influenced by the actual multiaxial stress state:

𝜎𝑦′ (𝑟) if 0 ≤ 𝑠𝑒𝑓𝑓 ≤ 𝜎𝑦′ (𝑟)

(𝑁𝐿) 𝑓𝑦 = { ′
if 𝑠𝑒𝑓𝑓 > 𝜎𝑦′ (𝑟)
𝜎 (𝑟, 𝜀𝑒𝑓𝑓 )
where 𝜎 ′ (𝑟, 𝜀) is the interpolated stress-strain diagram relating to the actual multiaxial stress state,
𝜎𝑦′ (𝑟) is its closest point to the origin and 𝜀𝑒𝑓𝑓 is the effective strain [(NLE) eeff, see… 6.1.19 Surface
element strains at stress points).
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 405

where 𝑟 is the ratio of the tensile and compressive components of the multiaxial stress state:

𝐼1
−1 𝑖𝑓 < −1
𝜎𝑉𝑀
𝐼1 𝐼1
𝑟= 𝑖𝑓 − 1 ≤ ≤1
𝜎𝑉𝑀 𝜎𝑉𝑀
𝐼1
1 𝑖𝑓 >1
{ 𝜎𝑉𝑀

where 𝐼1 is the first invariant of the stress tensor and 𝜎𝑉𝑀 is the von Mises equivalent stress:

𝐼1 = 𝑠𝑥𝑥 + 𝑠𝑦𝑦 + 𝑠𝑧𝑧

2 2 2
𝜎𝑉𝑀 = √0.5 [(𝑠𝑥𝑥 − 𝑠𝑦𝑦 ) + (𝑠𝑦𝑦 − 𝑠𝑧𝑧 ) + (𝑠𝑧𝑧 − 𝑠𝑥𝑥 )2 ] + 3𝑠𝑥𝑦

Utilization:
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑠𝑒𝑓𝑓
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑈𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑧𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 =
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑓𝑦

Plastic / von Mises material model

Effective stress is calculated according to the yield criterion:
2 2 2 2
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑠𝑒𝑓𝑓 = √0.5 [(𝑠𝑟,𝑥𝑥 − 𝑠𝑟,𝑦𝑦 ) + (𝑠𝑟,𝑦𝑦 − 𝑠𝑟,𝑧𝑧 ) + (𝑠𝑟,𝑧𝑧 − 𝑠𝑟,𝑥𝑥 ) ] + 3𝑠𝑟,𝑥𝑦

where 𝑠𝑟,𝑥𝑥 = 𝑠𝑥𝑥 − 𝑏𝑥𝑥 , 𝑠𝑟,𝑦𝑦 = 𝑠𝑦𝑦 − 𝑏𝑦𝑦 , 𝑠𝑟,𝑧𝑧 = 𝑠𝑧𝑧 − 𝑏𝑧𝑧 and 𝑠𝑟,𝑥𝑦 = 𝑠𝑥𝑦 − 𝑏𝑥𝑦 are the relative
stresses with respect to the centre of the yield surface. See… 3.1.15 Material Library
 Only the normal stresses 𝒔𝒙𝒙 , 𝒔𝒚𝒚 , 𝒔𝒛𝒛 and the shear stress 𝒔𝒙𝒚 affect the materially nonlinear
behaviour of surface elements. The shear stresses 𝒔𝒙𝒛 and 𝒔𝒚𝒛 have no effect. [5]

Actual yield strength

It is the yield strength influenced by hardening effect. It is computed on the basis of the stress-strain
diagram of the material (see… 3.1.15 Material Library)

where 𝜀𝑒𝑓𝑓 is the effective plastic strain (NLP) eeff, see… 6.1.19 Surface element strains at stress
points
406

Utilization:
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑠𝑒𝑓𝑓
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑈𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑧𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 =
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑓𝑦

Plastic / Bresler-Pister material model

The effective stress is defined by the Euclidean distance of the point [𝑠1 , 𝑠2 , 𝑠3 ] from the origin in the
space of pricipal stresses:
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑠𝑒𝑓𝑓 = √𝑠12 + 𝑠22 + 𝑠32
where [𝑠1 , 𝑠2 , 𝑠3 ] is the principal stress representation of the stress state [𝑠𝑥𝑥 , 𝑠𝑦𝑦 , 𝑠𝑧𝑧 , 𝑠𝑥𝑦 ].

 Only the normal stresses 𝒔𝒙𝒙 , 𝒔𝒚𝒚 , 𝒔𝒛𝒛 and the shear stress 𝒔𝒙𝒚 affect the materially nonlinear
behaviour of surface elements. The shear stresses 𝒔𝒙𝒛 and 𝒔𝒚𝒛 have no effect. [5]

Actual yield strength

It is the yield strength influenced by the stress state
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑓𝑦 = 𝜎(𝑠1 , 𝑠2 , 𝑠3 )
where 𝜎(𝑠1 , 𝑠2 , 𝑠3 ) is the point on the yield surface determined by the actual stress state (see the
picture below and see… 3.1.15 Material Library).

Utilization:
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑠𝑒𝑓𝑓
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑈𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑧𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 =
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑓𝑦

 Stress values can be displayed as a diagram, section diagram, as isolines or isosurfaces.

Result Tables See... 6.1.5 Result tables

Stress state for It is a result component to identify the tensioned, compressed and sheared regions of the structure.
nonlinear materials Its numerical value is based on the value of the so called stress triaxiality factor that is the ratio of the
hydroctatic and the deviatoric stress component.
𝜎𝑚
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑆𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑒 = 3
𝜎𝑉𝑀
where 𝜎𝑚 is the hydrostatic or mean stress and 𝜎𝑉𝑀 is the von Mises equivalent stress
characteristic for the deviatoric or shear stresses:

𝑠𝑥𝑥 + 𝑠𝑦𝑦 + 𝑠𝑧𝑧

𝜎𝑚 =
3

2 2 2
𝜎𝑉𝑀 = √0.5 [(𝑠𝑥𝑥 − 𝑠𝑦𝑦 ) + (𝑠𝑦𝑦 − 𝑠𝑧𝑧 ) + (𝑠𝑧𝑧 − 𝑠𝑥𝑥 )2 ] + 3𝑠𝑥𝑦

The following picture illustrates the stress state on the plane of the pricipal stresses S1-S2 with the
belonging values of (NL) State.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 407

(NL) State

Biaxial tension

Pure tension

Mainly tensioned

Mainly sheared

Pure shear

Mainly sheared

Mainly compressed

Pure compression

Biaxial compression

Using (NL) Utilization together with (NL) State the critical regions and the failure mode of them can be
determined.

 Stress values can be displayed as a diagram, section diagram, as isolines or isosurfaces.

Result Tables See... 6.1.5 Result tables

6.1.23. Spring element nonlinear results

Translational
Description
components

e,x T Deformation in local x direction

(NLP) e,x E Elastic deformation in local x direction
(NLP) e,x P Plastic deformation in local x direction
(NLP) eeff,x P Effective plastic deformation in local x direction
Effective plastic deformation increment in local x direction (static)
(NLP) deeff,x P
Effective plastic deformation rate in local x direction (dynamic)
R,x Spring force in local x direction
(NL) Fy,x Actual limit force in local x direction
(NL) Util.,x Utilization in local x direction
…,y … in local y direction
…,z … in local z direction
408

Rotational
Description
components

e,xx T Rotational deformation about local x axis

(NLP) e,xx E Elastic rotational deformation about local x axis
(NLP) e,xx P Plastic rotational deformation about local x axis
(NLP) eeff,xx P Effective plastic rotational deformation about local x axis
Effective plastic rotational deformation increment about local x axis (static)
(NLP) deeff,xx P
Effective plastic rotational deformation rate about local x axis (dynamic)
R,xx Moment about local x axis
(NL) My,xx Actual limit moment about local x axis
(NL) Util.,xx Rotational utilization about local x axis
…,yy … about local y axis
…,zz … about local z axis

NL elastic Actual limit force, actual limit moment

behaviour It is the actual limit strength influenced by the sign of the load:

𝐹𝑦𝑇 ℎ𝑎 𝑅𝑥 ≥ 0
(𝑁𝐿) 𝐹𝑦,𝑥 = {
𝐹𝑦𝐶 ℎ𝑎 𝑅𝑥 < 0

where 𝐹𝑦𝑇 and 𝐹𝑦𝐶 are the limit forces defined by the user for tension and compression (see…
3.1.17 Spring characteristics library).

Utilization:
𝑅𝑥
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑈𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑧𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑥 = | |
(𝑁𝐿) 𝐹𝑦,𝑥

Plastic behaviour Actual limit force, actual limit moment

It is the actual limit strength influenced by the hardening effect. It is computed on the basis of the
force-displacement diagram of the material (See… 3.1.17 Spring characteristics library):

where 𝑒𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑥 is the effective plastic deformation ((NLP) eeff,x P).

Utilization:
𝑅𝑥
(𝑁𝐿) 𝑈𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑧𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑥 = | |
(𝑁𝐿) 𝐹𝑦,𝑥
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 409

6.1.24. Spring element dynamic results

Translational
Description
components

Spring deformation rate in local x direction

(D) v,x
𝑣𝑥 = 𝑣𝑥,𝑗 − 𝑣𝑥,𝑖
R,x Spring force in local x direction
(D) R,x D Damper force in local x direction
Total spring-damper force in local x direction
(D) R,x S
(D) R, x S = R, x + (D) R, x D
…,y … in local y direction
…,z … in local z direction

Rotational
Description
components

Spring rotational deformation rate about local x axis

(D) v,xx
𝑣𝑥𝑥 = 𝑣𝑥𝑥,𝑗 − 𝑣𝑥𝑥,𝑖
R,xx Spring moment about local x axis
(D) R,xx D Damper moment about local x axis
Total spring-damper moment in local x direction
(D) R,xx S
(D) R, xx S = R, xx + (D) R, xx D
…,yy … about local y axis
…,zz … about local z axis

6.1.25. Influence lines

Displays the internal force influence lines corresponding to the unit applied forces P X, PY, PZ that act in
the positive direction of the global coordinate axes. An ordinate of the influence line represents the
value of the respective internal force that occurs in the respective cross-section caused by an applied
unit force at the position of the ordinate.

Truss Clicking a truss shows the elements’ absolute maximum ordinate value.

Displaying the axial force influence line diagrams of a truss girder:

Unit force in Z direction Influence line of a top bar

Influence line of a truss Influence line of a bottom bar

410

Beam Clicking a beam shows the elements’ absolute maximum ordinate value and its location.
Displaying the internal force influence line diagrams of a frame:
Unit force in Z direction Nx influence line

Vz influence line My influence line

6.1.26. Unbalanced loads

The resultant of all external loads in the global coordinate system (E) is calculated for each load case.
The unbalanced loads for each load case is also displayed (UNB). The unbalanced loads does not
appear on the supports, therefore, if there are non-zero unbalanced load components, it usually
means that a part of the external loads are supported by constrained degrees of freedom and not the
supports.

 It is recommended to check the unbalanced loads after each analysis run.

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 411

6.2. Buckling

Displays the results of a buckling analysis (buckling mode shapes and critical load parameters).

In the Info Window the following will appear: Buckling of a frame:

ncr the critical load multiplier

Error relative Error of the eigenvalue
Iteration the number of iteration performed
until convergence was achieved

 AxisVM stores the buckling analysis results corresponding to each

case.

6.3. Vibration

Displays the results of a vibration analysis (mode shapes and frequencies).

You must specify the mode shape number.
The mode shapes are normalized with respect to the mass.

Displaying mode shapes:

Frame, first mode Frame, second mode

Plate, second mode Plate, sixth mode

In the Info Window the following will appear:

f the frequency
ω the circular frequency
T the period
Ev the eigenvalue
Error the relative Error of the eigenvalue
Iteration the number of iteration performed until convergence was achieved

 AxisVM stores the vibration analysis results corresponding to each case.

412

Displaying vibration Select Vibration response factor from the end of the list of vibration modes. Vibration response factors
response factor determined with different excitation methods (R full, R extr., R self) can be selected from the list of
result components.

Full excitatation of a slab (R full) Self-excitation of a slab (R self)

Values displayed in the info window are:

Design method: CCIP-016 or SCI P354

ξ: Damping [%]
N, L: Number of steps [-] (CCIP-016), Length of the walking path [m] (SCI P354)
m: Mass of the walker [kg]
fp,min, fp,max Minimum and maximum of the pace frequency
on slabs (CCIP-016, SCI P354), on stairs (SCI P354) [Hz]
Result table See... 6.1.5 Result tables

Activated mass The program calculates the activated mass (some article use the term ‘modal mass’) in each X, Y and Z
directions, using the mode shapes ordinates and the masses.
For beams:

Mmod = μ ∫ δ2 (x) ∙ dl
l
For surfaces:

Mmod = μ ∫ δ2 (x, y) ∙ dA
A
where:
μ – the distribution of mass
δ – the normalized mode shape ordinates in the given direction

The calculated ‘activated mass’ values for each mode shapes and for each directions is displayed in
the Frequency Tables/Activated masses table.
The activated masses and frequencies are useful to determine and verify floor designs for vibrations
due to walking. In Eurocode there are few guidelines to the above design. Hence the EU sponsored
research project worked out the OS-RMS90 guideline to vibration design of floors.
Further info can be found in the following PDF file:
http://www.stb.rwth-aachen.de/projekte/2007/HIVOSS/docs/Guideline_Floors_EN02.pdf
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 413

6.4. Dynamic

Displays the results of a dynamic analysis.

Available settings and display modes are the same as for static results. See… 6.1 Static.

6.5. R.C. Design

6.5.1. Surface reinforcement parameters and reinforcement calculation - RC1 module

Design Codes Eurocode 2: EN 1992-1-1:2004

DIN: DIN 1045-1:2001-07
SIA: SIA 262:2013

Surface reinforcement can be calculated based on Eurocode 2. The calculation of the reinforcement of
membrane, plate, and shell elements is based on the 3rd stress condition. Reinforcement directions are
the same as the local x and y directions. The nominal moment and corresponding axial strengths are
determined based on the restricted direction optimal design.

Result components mxD, myD,

nxD, nyD: design forces
axb: calculated reinforcement area at the bottom in x direction
ayb: calculated reinforcement area at the bottom in y direction
axt: calculated reinforcement area at the top in x direction
ayt: calculated reinforcement area at the top in y direction
sxb: calculated reinforcement spacing at the bottom in x direction
syb: calculated reinforcement spacing at the bottom in y direction
sxt: calculated reinforcement spacing in at the top x direction
syt: calculated reinforcement spacing in at the top y direction
xb: actual (applied) reinforcement at the bottom in x direction
yb: actual (applied) reinforcement at the bottom in y direction
xt: actual (applied) reinforcement at the top in x direction
yt: actual (applied) reinforcement at the top in y direction
xb–axb: reinforcement difference at the bottom in x direction
yb–ayb: reinforcement difference at the bottom in y direction
xt–axt: reinforcement difference at the top in x direction
yt–ayt: reinforcement difference at the top in y direction
414

vEd: resultant specific shear force

avEd: principle direction of the resultant specific shear force relative to the x axis
vRd,c: shear resistance of concrete cross-section
vRd,max: maximum shear resistance of the cross-section with shear reinforcement
vEd/vRd,max: shear utilization of the concrete cross-section
vSz–vRd,c: difference between the resultant shear force perpendicular
to the surface and the shear resistance
wk(b) crack opening in the axis of bottom reinforcement
wk(t) crack opening in the axis of top reinforcement
wk2(b) crack opening at the bottom of the plate
wk2(t) crack opening at the top of the plate
wR(b) crack direction at the bottom of the plate
wR(t) crack direction at the top of the plate

Reinforcement In the surface reinforcement design, the following parameters must be assigned to the finite elements:

parameters

Materials Concrete and rebar materials must be

specified. The required minimum of concrete
cover is determined from the structural class
and the environment at the top and bottom of
the surface.

Calculating the minimum rebar spacing all

design code takes into account the maximum
aggregate size. The Swiss code (SIA) also
checks this value for the mimum cover.

You can see coefficient of seimic forces at

4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module.

Nonlinear analysis The value of some parameters considered during nonlinear analysis of surface elements (see... 6.5.6
Nonlinear analysis of RC surfaces) can be set by the user:
• taking into account the tensile or flexural tensile strength of concrete;
• final concrete strain due to shrinkage;
• type of dominant nonlinear behaviour (wall, slab or shell)

 In case of walls the flexural moments, in case of slabs the membrane forces are calculated elas-
tically.
 The purpose of the consideration of nonlinear behavior in nonlinear static analysis is the more
accurate deflection calculation for surface concrete elements by verification in serviceability limit
states considering nonlinear (material and structural) behavior. The verification of reinforced
concrete elements in ultimate limit states using this fiber integration model is not recommend-
ed. It is also important to note that the present model cannot be used in pushover analysis in
order to take into account nonlinear behaviour of reinforced concrete elements instead of plastic
hinges (see... 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module) because the presented material models do not
consider cyclic degradation in concrete and steel strength / stiffness, buckling of steel rein-
forcement bars, etc.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 415

Reinforcement Calculate with actual thickness:

If this option is activated the program calcu-
lates reinforcement using the actual (constant
or variable) thickness.
h is the total thickness used in the calculation,
which may differ from the actual plate thick-
ness.
In case of Eurocode 2 the Unfavorable eccen-
tricity will always be added to the actual value
(calculated from normal forces and moments)
to increase the absolute value of the
eccentricity.
Apply minimum cover can be checked or cT
and cB top and bottom concrete covers can
be entered (i.e. the least distance between the
surface of embedded reinforcement and the
outer surface of the concrete) for the outer
and inner reinforcement layers separately.
The top two rows under Concrete cover, Diam-
eter and Direction represent the top rebars
(the 1st row is the outer one, the 2nd row is
the inner one), the bottom two rows represent
the bottom rebars (the 3rd row is the inner
one, the 4th row is the outer one). The actual
scheme in local x-z view is displayed
accordingly.

Apply minimum The program determines the minimum top and bottom concrete cover from the environment class
cover according to the current design code.

Take into account The program determines the required minimum top and bottom reinforcement according to the cur-
the required min- rent design code. If the calculated amount of reinforcement is smaller than these value the required
imum reinforce- minimum is used.
ment

Load transfer AxisVM takes into account the load transfer mode when calculating minimum and maximum rebar
spacing according to the design code and the respective national annex. Rebar spacing is adjusted
according to design rules only if Follow rebar layout rules for spacing is checked in Result display para-
meters / Miscellaneous settings (see… 6.1 Static).

If the calculated amount of reinforcement would result in rebar spacings above the maximum the
maximum is used. If it would be under the minimum spacing the slab cannot be reinforced.

Cracking On this tab the load duration can be set.

This parameter is used in cracking analysis.

Limiting crack width. If checked, the required

reinforcement is calculated based on the spec-
ified limiting crack width in SLS combinations.
Limiting crack width can be specified at the
perimeter of the concrete (wk2,max) and at the
centre of reinforcement (wk,max).

Take concrete If this option is activated the program assumes that the stress in concrete remains below the concrete
tensile strength tensile strength and does not calculate crack width
into account
416

Reinforcement In SLS load combinations, the required reinforcement is calculated based on user specified limiting
calculation based cracking width. If the actual reinforcement parameters is adjusted to the reinforcement paramters of
on limiting crac- the domain (identical diameters and concrete cover, as defined in this window), the calculated crack
king width width will not exceed the limiting value.

In case of a simple load case or an user defined load combination (not categorized as ULS or SLS), the
required reinforcement is calculated considering both ULS and SLS requirements and the greater value
is selected. In case of Auto critical combination formula (see... 6.1 Static) required reinforcement is
calculated considering both ULS (in ULS combinations only) and SLS (the type of the SLS combination
applied depends on the standard) requirements and the greater value is shown.

Shear The angle of shear reinforcement and shear

crack can be set for the calculation of VRd,max
shear resistance (see... 6.5.8 Shear resistance ).

Reinforcement The required reinforcement can be calculated with the consideration of local x/y or custom
directions reinforcement directions. If custom reinforcement directions are selected, ξ/η symbols are used instead
of x/y to identify the reinforcement directions. α is the angle between local x axis of the surface and ξ
reinforcement direction, while β refers to the angle between the two (ξ and η) reinforcement directions.
Orthogonal reinforcement mesh with custom α angle (-360°<α<360°) and skew reinforcement (β≠90°)
can be also defined. Lower and upper bounds for angle β are 45° and 135°.

 If at least one skewly reinforced surface exists in the model, the labels are replaced on many
drawings and tables. In these cases ξ/η symbols are used instead of x/y. For example, axb is
replaced with aξb (if every surface is skewly reinforced) or with a(x/ξ)b (if there are skewly and
orthogonally reinforced surfaces).

 In case of Airdeck and hollow core surface elements, required skew reinforcement cannot be
calculated. If Airdeck or hollow core surface element is included in the selection, Reinforcement
directions panel is not visible.

6.5.1.1. Calculation of orthogonal x/y reinforcement according to Eurocode 2

Plate If 𝑚𝑥 , 𝑚𝑦 , 𝑚𝑥𝑦 are the internal forces at a point, then the nominal moment strengths are as follows:
The moment optimum is: 𝛥𝑚 𝛥𝑚2 =0
=min!
𝑚𝑥 ≥ 𝑚𝑦
1

m x  m xy

Yes No

m txD = m x + m xy m txD = 0 2
m xy
m tyD = m y + m xy m tyD = m y +
mx

m y  m xy

Yes No

2
mxy
mbxD = mx + mxy mbxD = mx +
my
mbyD = my + mxy mbyD =0
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 417

Results AxisVM calculates the tension and/or compression reinforcements (for doubly reinforced sections).

 The error message 'The section cannot be reinforced' appears if:

The total cross sectional area of top and bottom reinforcement whether in x or y reinforcement
directions is greater than the limit value for maximum reinforcement area. This limit can be set
in the Design codes window under the Reinforced concrete tab (see... 3.3.7 Design codes).

Membrane Only plane stress membranes can be reinforced.

If 𝑛𝑥 , 𝑛𝑦 , 𝑛𝑥𝑦 are the internal forces at a point, then the nominal axial strengths are as follows:
The axial force optimum is: ΔnΔ𝑛=min!2 =0
𝑛𝑦 ≥ 𝑛𝑥
1

nx  nxy

Yes No

nxD = nx + nxy nxD = 0

2
nxy
n yD = n y + nxy n yD = n y +
nx

Results AxisVM calculates the tension or compression reinforcements. Compression reinforcement is

calculated only in the points at which the axial compression resistance of the section without
reinforcement is lower than the compressive design axial force.

Shell If 𝑛𝑥 , 𝑛𝑦 , 𝑛𝑥𝑦 , 𝑚𝑥 , 𝑚𝑦 , 𝑚𝑥𝑦 are the internal forces in a point, the design axial forces and moments are
established based on the reserve axial force optimum and reserve moment optimum criterias that
were emphasized, at the membrane reinforcement and plate reinforcement description.

The program calculates the necessary tensile and compressive reinforcement.

Results The following values are provided as results: axb, axt, ayb, ayt.
These represent the calculated top and bottom reinforcement in x and y directions.

 The error message 'The section cannot be reinforced' appears if:

The total cross sectional area of top and bottom reinforcement whether in x or y reinforcement
directions is greater than the limit value for maximum reinforcement area. This limit can be set in the
Design codes window under the Reinforced concrete tab (see... 3.3.7 Design codes).
Tables The following symbols are used in tables:
(-) compression reinforcement bar
??? the section cannot be reinforced in the corresponding direction

6.5.1.2. Calculation of orthogonal x/y reinforcement according to DIN EN, DIN 1045-1 and SIA 262

Plate, Membrane, Reinforcement of membranes, plates and shells are calculated according to the three-layer method.
Shell The internal forces (𝑛𝑥 , 𝑛𝑦 , 𝑛𝑥𝑦 , 𝑚𝑥 , 𝑚𝑦 , 𝑚𝑥𝑦 ) are calculated in the perpendicular directions of the
reinforcement.
The surface is divided into three layers. Membrane forces for the top and bottom layers are calculated
then design forces and the required amount of reinforcement is determined.
418

Top layer

Medium layer

Bottom layer

Besides calculating the required reinforcement zones of concrete are checked for shear and
compression according to A, B and C cases. The program considers reduced compressive strength if
tensile stress arises in the concrete and the principal tensile stress exceeds the design tensile strength
of concrete (fctd).
Case A Case B Case C

Error message The error message 'The section cannot be reinforced' appears.
If the compressed zone of the concrete fails due shear forces.
If the compression principal stress is higher than 𝑓𝑐𝑑 .
𝐴𝑥 > 0.04𝐴𝑐 , or 𝐴𝑦 > 0.04𝐴𝑐 , where 𝐴𝑐 is the concrete cross-section area.
Tables The following symbols are used in tables:
(-) compression reinforcement bar
??? the section cannot be reinforced in the corresponding direction
No symbol appears when tension reinforcement is required.

6.5.1.3. Calculation of skew reinforcement according to Eurocode 2 and SIA 262

Orthogonal reinforcement meshes with reinforcement directions differing from local x and y axes of
the surface and reinforcement meshes with arbitrary reinforcement directions are called skew
reinforcement and calculated as described in this section. ξ/η symbols are used instead of x/y to
identify the reinforcement directions. α is the angle between local x axis of the surface and ξ
reinforcement direction, while β refers to the angle between the two (ξ and η) reinforcement
directions.
During the calculation of required reinforcements, a sandwich model with three layers is used.
Calculation methodology described in the paper of Peter Marti and Hans Seelhofer is invoked (H.
Seelhofer & P. Marti: Dimensioning of skewly reinforced concrete plates). The calculation
methodology is identical for membranes, plates and shells.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 419

Reference: H. Seelhofer & P. Marti: Dimensioning

of skewly reinforced concrete plates

Calculation Both top and bottom layers of the sandwich model are responsible to resist the bending moments
and membrane forces. The inner layer resists shear forces.
Membrane forces and bending moments are decomposed into equivalent membrane forces in case
of the top and the bottom layer, respectively. Before the decomposition, the internal forces are trans-
ferred from x-y coordinate system into an orthogonal x’-y’ coordinate system where x’ direction is
identical with ξ reinforcement direction.
- bottom layer:
𝑏
𝑛𝑥′ 𝑚𝑥′
𝑛𝑥′ = −
2 𝑑𝑣
𝑛
𝑏 = 𝑦′ − 𝑦′
𝑚
𝑛𝑦′
2 𝑑𝑣
𝑏
𝑛𝑥′𝑦′ 𝑚𝑥′𝑦′
𝑛𝑥′𝑦′ = −
2 𝑑𝑣
- top layer:
𝑛
𝑡 = 𝑥′ + 𝑥′
𝑚
𝑛𝑥′
2 𝑑𝑣
𝑡
𝑛𝑦′ 𝑚𝑦′
𝑛𝑦′ = +
2 𝑑𝑣
𝑡
𝑛𝑥′𝑦′ 𝑚𝑥′𝑦′
𝑛𝑥′𝑦′ = +
2 𝑑𝑣

In order to achieve optimal reinforcement, the thickness of the layers is iteratively changed. The lower
bound for layer thickness is 5 mm, while the upper limit is set to H/2 (in case of membrane-like load-
ing conditions, where H is the thickness of the surface) or ξc0d (in case of plate-like loading condi-
tions, where d is the effective depth of the reinforcement mesh). The 𝑑𝑣 level arm is calculated on the
following way:
𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑏
𝑑𝑣 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 (𝑑𝑏 − , 𝑑𝑡 − )
2 2
Where 𝑡𝑏 , 𝑡𝑡 and 𝑑𝑣 are the thickness of bottom layer, the thickness of top layer and the level arm,
respectively.
The 𝑑𝑏 and 𝑑𝑡 are the effective depths related to the bottom and top reinforcement meshes, respec-
tively. The effective depth is calculated based on the average reinforcement positions of ξ and η rein-
forcements.
The stresses in the top and bottom layers are calculated as follows:
- bottom layer:
𝑛𝑏 𝑛𝑏
𝑏 = 𝑥′ ; 𝜎 𝑏 = 𝑦′ ; 𝜏 𝑏
𝑏
𝑛𝑥′𝑦′
𝜎𝑥′ 𝑦′ 𝑥′𝑦′ =
𝑡𝑏 𝑡𝑏 𝑡𝑏
- top layer:
𝑛𝑡 𝑛𝑡
𝑡 = 𝑥′ ; 𝜎 𝑡 = 𝑦′ ; 𝜏 𝑡
𝑡
𝑛𝑥′𝑦′
𝜎𝑥′ 𝑦′ 𝑥′𝑦′ =
𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡 𝑡𝑡

These stresses are transformed into ξ-η coordinate system (𝜎𝜉 , 𝜎𝜂 , 𝜏𝜉𝜂 ) on the following way (H.
Seelhofer & P. Marti: Dimensioning of skewly reinforced concrete plates):
𝜎𝜉 = 𝜎𝑥′ sin 𝛽 + 𝜎𝑦′ cos 𝛽 cot 𝛽 − 2𝜏𝑥′𝑦′ sin 𝛽
𝜎𝑦′
𝜎𝜂 =
sin 𝛽
𝜏𝜉𝜂 = 𝜏𝜂𝜉 = 𝜏𝑥′𝑦′ − 𝜎𝑦′ cot 𝛽
420

Required ξ/η reinforcement is calculated as follows (k=1):

𝜎𝜉 𝜏𝜉𝜂 𝜎𝜂 1 𝜏𝜉𝜂
+𝑘| | + | |
sin 𝛽 sin 𝛽 sin 𝛽 𝑘 sin 𝛽
𝜌𝜉 = 𝜌𝜂 =
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦

𝐴𝑠,𝜉 = 𝜌𝜉 𝑡𝐵; 𝐴𝑠,𝜂 = 𝜌𝜂 𝑡𝐵

The concrete strut in compression is checked according to the guidelines of Annex F of EN 1992-1-1
and according to the instructions in the paper of Seelhofer and Marti:
(𝜌𝜂 + 𝜌𝜉 )𝑓𝑦 ≤ 𝜈𝑓𝑐𝑑 + 𝜎𝑥′ + 𝜎𝑦′

The program considers reduced compressive strength only if tensile stress arises in the concrete and
the principal tensile stress exceeds the design tensile strength of concrete (fctd).
If the resistance of the concrete strut is not adequate, the layer thickness is increased. Compression
reinforcement is designed in the surface if the upper limit for layer thickness is reached and the utili-
zation ratio of the concrete is still greater than 1.0. If the stresses in the layer and the utilization of
concrete strut are low, the layer thickness is decreased.
Error message The error message 'The section cannot be reinforced' appears in the following cases.
• If the resistance of the concrete strut is not adequate with maximum layer thickness
nothwithstanding that compression reinforcement is applied.
• The total cross sectional area of top and bottom reinforcement whether in ξ or η
reinforcement directions is greater than the limit value for maximum reinforcement area.
This limit can be set in the Design codes window under the Reinforced concrete tab
(see... 3.3.7 Design codes)
Results The following values are provided as results: aξa, aξf, aηa, aηf
Tables The following symbols are used in tables:
(-) compression reinforcement bar
??? the section cannot be reinforced in the corresponding direction

6.5.2. Actual reinforcement

Actual Lets you apply an actual reinforcement to domains or surface elements. Cracking analysis can be
Reinforcement performed only for elements where an actual reinforcement has been applied.
Using the actual reinforcement you can perform a non-linear plate deflection analysis.

There are two ways to define actual reinforcement:

1.) select surface elements / domains then click the button on the toolbar to specify reinforcement

2.) click the button with no selection, specify reinforcement then draw mesh-independent rein-

forcement domains or assign the reinforcement to domains.

Rebar statistics The actual surface, beam and column reinforcements can be checked by displaying Rebar statistics in
the Weight report section of the Table Browser. This table lists total length and mass of rebars and the
total reinforced concrete surface and volume per rebar diameter.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 421

6.5.2.1. Reinforcement for surface elements and domains

Parameters The first tab displays the para-

meters required by the design
code for cracking calculation.
The actual concrete cover and
primary directions can be
different from those used to
determine the required
amount of reinforcement
(see 6.5.1 Surface reinforce-
ment parameters and reinforce-
ment calculation - RC1 module).
Changing these values does
not overwrite surface rein-
forcement parameters.

Min. Thickness Min. Thickness displays the minimum thickness entered as surface reinforcement parameter for the
selected elements, and not the minimum thickness of the elements.

Reinforcement

Add and Delete The applied reinforcement is shown in a tree view on the left. By selecting a reinforcement you can
change its parameters in the right side. Changing the values updates the tree. By selecting a location
(e.g. x Direction / Top Reinforcement) you can set a new reinforcement on the right side and add it.
Use the Delete button (or [Del] key) to delete reinforcement or the Add button (or [Ins] key) to add
reinforcement to a group. If you select a node of the tree view the Delete button (or [Del] key) will
delete all the reinforcements under that node. The Add button (or [Ins] key) will add reinforcement to
the corresponding group.
Calculate rebar positions sets the rebar positions according to the actual concrete cover and primary
directions.
422

 Rebar position is defined as the distance between

the side of the concrete and the axis of the rebar.

When modifying an existing reinforcement domain, two methods are available:

New reinforcfement overwrites the existing one.

Overwrite

New reinforcement is added to the existing one.

Add
Auto refresh If this option is checked changing reinforcement updates the drawing immediately.

6.5.2.2. Mesh-independent reinforcement

To define mesh-independent reinforcement set the parameters and the reinforcement scheme first
then draw rectangular or polygonal reinforcement domains or apply the reinforcement to entire do-
mains.
If no surfaces or domains are selected clicking the button on the toolbar displays this dialog. Rein-
forcement can be edited the same way as above.

The bottom toolbar can be used to control the way the actual reinforcement is placed on the struc-
ture. Mesh-independent reinforcement can also be defined.
Displays the selection toolbar to select existing domains or reinforcement domains. The current rein-
forcement is applied when the selection is completed.
Option to draw rectangular reinforcement domains.

Option to draw skewed rectangular reinforcement domains.

Option to draw polygonal reinforcement domains.

Option to apply reinforcement to domains just by clicking them.

Reinforcement is applied only where reinforcement domains fall on surface elements or domains.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 423

The dialog can be reduced to a toolbar. Clicking the triangle icon at the top right corner shrinks or
opens up the dialog. The reinforcement amounts specified are displayed as symbols. The amounts of
top and bottom y reinforcement are written along a vertical line. The amounts of top and bottom x
reinforcement are written along a horizontal line.

Toolbar icons remain the same.

Reinforcement is applied only where reinforcement domains fall on surface elements or domains.

Contours of reinforcement domains are identified by the cursor. Clicking reinforcement domains allow
making changes in the reinforcement. [Shift] + clicking selects multiple reinforcement domains. Click-
ing on one of the selected domains allow making changes in multiple reinforcement domains. This is
the same method used for elements or mesh-independent loads.
Mesh-independent reinforcement domains are displayed
as contours made of dashed brown lines. A symbol show-
ing top and bottom reinforcement amounts in x(ξ) and y(η)
directions appear at the center. Centerpoint is connected
to two vertices of the domain polygon by continuous
brown lines.

Auto refresh Updates the drawing immediately when the reinforcement changes.

6.5.3. Beam reinforcement parameters (uniaxial bending)

Beam reinforcement parameters and actual beam reinforcement can be assigned to concrete rib and
beam elements without performing design and check of beam reinforcement. Beam reinforcement
design parameters can be different on each finite element. To select only a part of a structural member
check the following option: Settings / Preferences / Editing / Enable selection of finite elements on lines.
Beam reinforcement parameters dialog is suitable to define the reinforcement parameters against uniaxial
 bending. This can be done for vertical elements as well.

Design of beam reinforcement (determining the required amount of reinforcement and checking it,
see… 6.5.11 Beam reinforcement design – RC2 module) uses these parameters.
424

Cross-section

The list contains all beam design cross-sections found in the selection. The geometry parameters of the
selected list item will be displayed and can be edited. Changes won't lead to recalculation of forces so
cross-section dimensions should not be changed unless it is really necessary.
Concrete grade can also be overridden. Structural class and maximum aggregate size (Dmax) must be
entered.

 After changing cross-section dimensions, it is recommended to change the actual cross-section

of the element and recalculate the model.

Environment Environment classes and concrete covers must be specified on all four sides of
classes, the beam (+z, -y, +y, -z).
concrete covers Concrete cover is the least distance between the stirrups and the outer surface
of the concrete. The minimum required cover calculated according to the design
code from environment classes and other parameters is displayed in blue at the
end of each row. Checking Apply minimum cover will set the cv edit fields to the
calculated value. Clicking on the link symbol right to the environment classes will
set the same environment class on all sides.

Reinforcement Parameters (i.e. material, diameter, etc.) of stirrups (green) and torsion rebars (yellow) can be entered
parameters on the left side, parameters of corner rebars (red) and other longitudinal rebars (blue) on the right.
Øt is the diameter of the top rebars, Øb is the same for bottom rebars, Øt is the diameter of side rein-
forcement against torsion. Checking Use this rebar and stirrup steel by default sets the default value of
the rebar and stirrup steel grade to the value set in the dialog.

 The following parameters are used only in beam reinforcement design. The program distributes
stirrups and rebars according to these parameters before checking the calculated reinforcement.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 425

Step of stirrup spacing: Calculated stirrup spacing values will be integer multiples of the step size en-
tered here.
Maximum number of applied rebar schemes limits the number of different rebar distribution schemes
applied along the beam (number of top and bottom distributions can be set separately).

Parameters

These parameters are required to design and check beam reinforcement.

Design Beam reinforcement can be calculated for bending in one direction. So the beam can be designed
internal forces either for Vz-My or for Vy-Mz forces.
Checking Shear force reduction at supports allows the application of shear force reduction methods
according to the current design code.
Angle of the con- Eurocode 2 allows specification of the θ angle of the concrete compression strut. According to 6.2.3 (2)
crete compression 1 ≤ ctg 𝛩 ≤ 2.5. In case of a flat strut (steep cracking angle) cracks intersect only few stirrups, so con-
strut crete gets more shear stress. In case of a steep strut (flat cracking angle) cracks intersect many stirrups
so shear reinforcement gets more shear stress.
In the variable truss angle method (second option) the strut angle is optimized for minimum shear
reinforcement. If tension or torsional moments are not negligible the standard method must be select-
ed (first option) where the fixed strut angle is 45°.

Cracking Checking Increase reinforcement according to limiting crack width the maximum allowed crack width
values can be entered. In this case the program increases the top / bottom reinforcement (maintaining
the relation 𝐴𝑠 ≤ 0.04𝐴𝑐 ) to reduce the crack width under the specified value. To perform cracking
analysis the load duration must be specified. See... 6.5.7.1. Cracking calculation according to Eurocode 2.
If the option Take concrete tensile strength into account is selected no cracking calculations will be per-
formed in points where the tensile stress is below the concrete tensile strength.
Load duration 𝑘𝑡 is a factor depending on load duration.
For short term loads 𝑘𝑡 = 0.6, for long term loads 𝑘𝑡 = 0.8
426

Check allowed The program checks the allowed deflection according to the criteria set for beams and cantilevers. L
deflection represents the beam length. This check will be performed only if the actual concrete grade and cross-
section is set.
For coefficient of seimic forces see 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module.
Capacity design It can be set for the beams whether they are primary (antiseismic beams) or secondary seismic ele-
ments (non-antiseismic beams). Plastic hinges (see… 6.5.11 Beam reinforcement design – RC2 module) can
be defined only in case of antiseismic beams. The ductility class can be selected (M – DCM, H – DCH)
that influences the maximum allowable distance between stirrups in order to provide the expected
ductility. During the calculation of shear resistance, θ=45° is considered for the angle of concrete com-
pression strut if ductility class H is selected (EN 1998-1-1).

Actual reinforce- An actual reinforcement can be

ment against assigned to the selected finite
uniaxial bending elements. Nonlinear analysis can
(beam) take into account this constant
reinforcement when calculating
deflection.
The necessary number of corner
rebars at the top and bottom of
the beam are always there, their
diameter can be changed.
Number and diameter of additi-
onal top / bottom rebars can be
specified. Rebars are distributed
automatically.

Pick up Clicking Pick up allows picking up beam reinforcement design parameters defined for another beam.

Display of actual After actual reinforcement and its prameters have been assigned to the element and the display of
reinforcement cross-section shapes is turned on (Display options / Symbols / Graphics symbols / Cross-section shape,
See… 2.16.18 Display options) actual reinforcement can also be seen in the model view.

If a mesh is assigned to the line element (see… 4.11.1.1 Meshing of line elements), each finite element
can have different actual reinforcement (Turn on Settings / Preferences / Editing / Enable selection of
finite elements on lines). If line mesh display is disabled, three cross-sections are shown, one at the
beginning, one at the midpoint and one at the end of the element. In case of constant actual rein-
forcement only one cross section is shown.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 427

During the definition of beam reinforcement parameters, it is possible to change the cross section. If
the cross section assigned to the line element is not identical to the cross section specified in the beam
reinforcement parameters dialog, the modified cross section is displayed red dashed line in the model
view.

Nonlinear analysis The value of some parameters considered during nonlinear analysis (see... 6.5.5 Nonlinear analysis of
reinforced concrete beam and column elements ) can be set by the user:
• consideration of the tensile or flexural tensile strength of concrete;
• final concrete strain due to shrinkage;

6.5.4. Actual reinforcement against biaxial bending (column)

Parameters for reinforcement against biaxial bending can be specified in the dialog below.
Each finite element can have different reinforcement parameters. (Turn on Settings / Preferences / Edit-
ing / Enable selection of finite elements on lines). Column check based on actual reinforcement can be
performed later (see… 6.5.9 Column reinforcement – RC2 module).

 This type of reinforcement is used for reinforced concrete elements subjected to biaxial bending.
It can be assigned to horizontal elements as well, though in these cases the use of beam rein-
forcement parameters (see… 6.5.3 Beam reinforcement parameters (uniaxial bending)) may be more
practical.
428

Saves the current drawing to the Drawings Library.

Defines a new reinforcement

Opens a new cross-section or reinforcement.

 Only cross-sections with graphics data can be opened.

Saves the reinforcement under a name for further use.

List of existing column reinforcements. You can sort them and delete the marked rows.

Defining The following icons are available on the Defining reinforcement menu:
reinforcement
Parameters Lets you specify the parameters for verification of reinforced concrete columns. The verification covers
bending check with or without axial force, the check against failure caused by shear forces and
torsional effects.
The unfavorable eccentricity increments determined based on the buckling parameters are displayed
in the internal force check table. It can be controlled if eccentricity increments prescribed by the
design code are applied in a certain direction or not. Furthermore, the consideration of second order
eccentricities can also be controlled in each direction. Second order eccentricities can be considered at
the same time or independently in each directions. In checked directions 𝛽𝑦𝑦 and 𝛽𝑧𝑧 buckling length
factors can be specified. (𝛽𝑦𝑦 in x-z plane and 𝛽𝑧𝑧 in x-y plane). It is also possible to change the column
height used in buckling length calculations and select the buckling shape.
You can see coefficient of seimic forces at 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module.
The considered concrete class in the calculation can be altered compared to concrete class assigned to
the structural element. It allows the user to evaluate structural safety of the column with different
concrete class without new static analysis.
ϕef is the so-called effective creep ratio according to Section 5.8.4 of EN 1992-1-1 standard.
Related to non-linear analysis of the column (see… 6.5.5 Nonlinear analysis of reinforced concrete beam
and column elements) the consideration of tensile strength and shrinkage strain can be specified.
Constant or variable stirrup spacing (three different spacing with different diameters) can be defined
to the column. x/L refers to a relative distance from the bottom of the column related to boundary of
zones with different stirrup parameters. The number of stirupp legs is uniform along the element,
however, it can be different parallel to y and z axes, respectively. The considered shear crack angle may
be also defined by the user. In case of columns with circular cross section, spiral stirrup can be used.
In case of dissipative structures with DCM or DCH ductility class (EN 1998-1-1), the design values of
shear forces are determined in accordance with the capacity design rule (if seismic load case is
included in the selected load combination), on the basis of the equilibrium of the column under end
moments Mi,d (with i=1,2 denoting the end sections of the column), corresponding to plastic hinge
formation for positive and negative directions of seismic loading (see… 6.5.9 Column reinforcement –
RC2 module). Plastic hinges can be defined if there is seismic load case in the model and the behaviour
factor (q) (see… 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module) is greater than 1.5 (except Eurocode [RO] standard).
The following parameters can be specified by the user: the safety factor, the ductility class, the clear
length of the colum (clear length: the distance between end sections where plastic hinges can be for-
med) and the ratio between the sum of moment capacity of beams and columns connected to the
same joint, respectively.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 429

If global imperfections are taken into account by extra loads acting on the structure,
they must be ignored in column reinforcement calculation. To achieve this, check
Local imperfections only. If a sway buckling shape is selected only a constant local
geometric imperfection is considered. (see… 6.5.9 Column reinforcement – RC2 module).

Buckling shapes Second order eccentricities are calculated based

on the selected buckling shape (see… 6.5.9 Col-
umn reinforcement – RC2 module). Buckling length
factors are changed accordingly, but can be over-
ridden

 The given buckling shapes and buckling length factors are associated with the local y and z axes
of the section. Accordingly, during the calculation of local geometric imperfections and second
order eccentricities flexural inertias related to y and z axes are taken into account (see… 6.5.9
Column reinforcement – RC2 module).
Reinforcement bars
To position / by Generates a reinforcement bar with a specified diameter to the location of the cursor.
cover If the cursor is on a corner or on the contour line the reinforcement will be generated according to the
concrete cover.

By spacing Inserts evenly N+1 new rebars between two selected points.

On circular arch Inserts evenly N+1 new rebars between a selected starting point and an end-point of a circular arch.
If an entire circle is drawn inserts N rebars evenly around the circle.

Diameter Lets you define or modify the diameter of a rebar.

To modify, select the rebars and than the enter the diameter or select a value from the list.
430

Cover Lets you define or modify the concrete cover.

 In this case the concrete cover is the distance from the extreme
fiber to the rebar!

Modifying the geometry of the rebars:

1. Move the cursor over the centroid of the rebar.
2. Use the left  button (keep depressed) to move the rebar to its new
location, or, enter its new coordinates numerically in the coordinate window.

The division number which defines the number of rebars as N+1.

Creates new rebars by copying existing ones by translation.

Creates new rebars by copying existing ones by roatation.

Creates new rebars by mirroring existing ones.

Display of actual After actual reinforcement and its prameters have been assigned to the element and the display of
reinforcement cross-section shapes is turned on (Display options / Symbols / Graphics symbols / Cross-section shape),
see… 2.16.18 Display options, actual reinforcement can also be seen in the model view.
See also 6.5.3 Beam reinforcement parameters (uniaxial bending)

Nonlinear analysis The value of some parameters considered during nonlinear analysis (see... 6.5.5 Nonlinear analysis of
reinforced concrete beam and column elements) can be set by the user:
• consideration of the tensile or flexural tensile strength of concrete;
• final concrete strain due to shrinkage;;

6.5.5. Nonlinear analysis of reinforced concrete beam and column elements

In case of nonlinear analysis actual reinforcements, concrete parameters and steel/concrete nonlinear
behaviour can be taken into account (see… 5.1 Static analysis) for the following standards:
Eurocode 2: EN 1992-1-1:2004
SIA: SIA 262:2013
Internal forces compatible with strains are calculated through numerical integration of fiber stresses at
Gauss integration points based on ε normal strains, κy and κz curvatures. Concrete cross section is di-
vided into a number of triangle fibers; for steel reinforcements independent fibers are assigned with
circle shape. Fiber stresses are calculated based on the strain at the center of the fiber and based on
concrete/steel nonlinear material model. The difference between the material models built in for EC
and SIA standards is only values of strengths, ultimate strains; the shape of the material model is iden-
tical.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 431

steel
1.05 f yk
f yk
Es

 uk

M kNm
concrete
f ck

Ec ,eff

 cu 3

 1 / m

In order to avoid convergence problems, concrete material model has been changed on tension side.
Based on the results of verification tests, the calculated displacements are close to displacements calcu-
lated with standardized formulae. The error was lower than 5% in every investigated case.
Tensile stress in the concrete is calculated with the following formula that is based on an approximate
method from section 7.4.3 of EN 1992-1-1:
𝜎 = 𝐸𝜀(1 − 𝜁)
𝑓𝑡 𝛾
𝜁 = min [max [1 − 𝛼𝛽 ( ) ; 0] ; 1]
𝐸𝜀
α and γ factors are selected (as a function of ratio of concrete’s and steel’s Young’s modulus and as a
function of the reinforcement ratio) according to the results of a parameteric study in order calculate
deformations in good agreement with section 7.4.3. of EN 1992-1-1.

 β is a coefficient taking account of the influence of the duration of the loading. According to EN
1992-1-1, β may be selected 0.5 and 1.0 in case of sustained loads and short-term loads, respec-
tively. If creep is considered in the nonlinear analysis, β is selected 0.5. If creep is not considered
in the nonlinear analysis, β=0.5 or β=1.0 can also be used. The value for these cases can be spec-
ified in the Design codes window (see... 3.3.7 Design codes).

Creep and The consideration of creep and shrinkage in nonlinear static analysis can be set by the initialization of
shrinkage the analysis (see... 5.1 Static analysis). The creep is taken into account by the modification of the
Young’s modulus of the concrete. In case of shrinkage, two additional κy and κz curvatures (calculated
from the arrangement and the amount of reinforcement) are added to the calculated strains according
to the given shrinkage strain (see... 6.5.3 Beam reinforcement parameters (uniaxial bending) and 6.5.4 Actual
reinforcement against biaxial bending (column)).

 The purpose of consideration of actual reinforcement in nonlinear static analysis is the more
accurate deflection calculation for line reinforced concrete elements by the verification in ser-
viceability limit states considering nonlinear material and structural behavior. The verification of
reinforced concrete elements in ultimate limit states using this fiber integration model is not
recommended. It is also important to note that the present model cannot be used in pushover
analysis in order to take into account nonlinear behaviour of reinforced concrete elements in-
stead of plastic hinges (see… 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module) because the presented material
models do not consider cyclic degradation in concrete and steel strength / stiffness, buckling of
steel reinforcement bars, etc.
 In case of composite sections, nonlinear behavior is not considered. Elements with composite
sections are treated as linear elements. To consider any creep effect in case of a composite sec-
tion, concrete material with reduced Young’s modulus need to be assigned.
After completing nonlinear analysis with actual reinforcement, the following error messages may
appear:
1. „Increment X, Beam Y: Normal force exceeds the tension/compression resistance”
2. „Increment X, Beam Y: Bending moment exceeds the bending resistance”
3. „Increment X, Beam Y: Longitudinal tension reinforcement is insufficient”
4. „Increment X, Beam Y: Actual strain exceeds the limiting strain”
432

6.5.6. Nonlinear analysis of RC surfaces

In case of the linear static analysis the plate deflection is calculated according to the elastic theory. In
fact the behaviour of RC plates is non-linear due to two opposite effects. The actual reinforcement
increases the bending strength but cracking decreases it.
The non-linear RC plate deflection analysis follows up these two effects taking into account the actual
or calculated reinforcement.
 Nonlinear analysis of RC surfaces (considering nonlinear material and structural behavior) can
be used for calculation of deflections of RC structures by verification in serviceability limit
states. The verification of reinforced concrete elements in ultimate limit states using this fiber
integration model is not recommended. It is also important to note that the present model
cannot be used in pushover analysis in order to take into account nonlinear behaviour of rein-
forced concrete elements instead of plastic hinges (see... 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module) be-
cause the presented material models do not consider cyclic degradation in concrete and steel
strength / stiffness, buckling of steel reinforcement bars, etc.

Design codes MSz: MSz 15022-1:1986

Eurocode 2: EN 1992-1-1:2004
SIA: SIA 262:2013
Calculation
Nonlinearity Internal forces compatible with strains are calculated through numerical integration of fiber stresses at
ε-N; κ -M Gauss integration points based on εx, εy and εxy normal strains, κx, κy and κxy curvatures. The concrete
cross section is divided into a number of fibers (namely layers in this case); for steel reinforcements
independent fibers are assigned with circle shape. Fiber stresses are calculated based on the strain at
the center of the fiber and based on concrete/steel nonlinear material model. In order to avoid con-
vergence problems, concrete material model has been slightly changed on tension side similarly to
beams and columns.

steel concrete
1.05 f yk
f yk f ck

Es Ec ,eff
 uk Ec ,eff 4 f ctm

Nonlinearity In this case, nonlinear behavior is considered only in the connection of normal strains and membrane
ε-N (Wall) forces. Flexural moments are calculated elastically without consideration of membrane forces.
Nonlinearity In this case, nonlinear behavior is considered only in the connection of curvatures and flexural mo-
κ –M (Slab) ments. Flexural moments are integrated independently in x and y directions, the effect of membrane
forces on the bending behavior is considered. Membrane forces and Mxy are calculated elastically.
 In case of slabs with considerable torsion a nonlinear analysis based only on κx-Mx and κy-My
bending behaviour may underestimate the deflection, so it is recommended to use the first ε-
N; κ-M complex model. That can follow nonlinear behaviour related to the six strain and in-
ternal force components.
In case of κ-M nonlinearity model, in order to calculate more realistic deformations, torsion
stiffness in the stiffness matrix is considered on a reduced value if the surface is cracked at a
specific point in both x and y main directions. If the height of cracked zone is considerable
(>0.5H), torsion stiffness is considered on 15% of the original elastic value. Linearly interpo-
lated value is used between the two states.
 The nonlinear analysis of skewly reinforced concrete surfaces is not allowed. These surfaces
are treated as materially linear elements without the consideration of cracking and the effect
of reinforcement. The Young’s modulus is calculated with the consideration of the defined
creep factor.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 433

Amount of rein- Actual or calculated reinforcement can be taken into account in nonlinear static analysis by choosing
forcement Use reinforcement in calculation in the Nonlinear static analysis dialog (see... 5.1 Static analysis). The
convergence of such nonlinear analyses is sensisitve to the amount of reinforcement. In order to avoid
convergence problems, AxisVM applies the minimum reinforcement prescribed by the design code
where (top or bottom) actual reinforcement is defined only in one direction. The convergence is usual-
ly better in case of actual reinforcement. It is recommended to use the Take into account the mini-
mum required reinforcement option while defining reinforcement parameters to surfaces (see... 6.5.1
Surface reinforcement parameters and reinforcement calculation - RC1 module)
Elements within the If Adjust mesh to column heads option is selected by domain meshing, finite elements within the
contour of columns contour of RC columns can be identified. In order to avoid convergence problems, nonlinear behavior
of these elements is negelected in the calculation.
Creep and shrink- The consideration of creep and shrinkage in nonlinear static analysis can be set by the initialization of
age the analysis (see... 5.1 Static analysis). The creep is taken into account by the modification of the con-
crete’s Young’s modulus. The shrinkage is considered only in flexural deformations.
Nonlinearity Two calculated (based on the arrangement and the amount of reinforcement and on the state of RC
ε-N; κ -M section) shrinkage induced curvatures (namely κx and κy) are added to the calculated strains according
to the given shrinkage strain (see... 6.5.1 Surface reinforcement parameters and reinforcement calculation -
RC1 module).
Nonlinearity The reinformcement in walls is typically symmetrical, thus shrinkage curvatures are not taken into
ε-N (Wall) account in this case.
Nonlinearity Two calculated (based on the arrangement and the amount of reinforcement and on the state of RC
κ –M (Slab) section) shrinkage induced are added to the calculated strains according to the given shrinkage strain.
Warning messages After completing nonlinear analysis with actual reinforcement, the following warning messages may
appear:
• “Normal force exceeds the resistance.”
• ”Actual strain exceeds the limiting strain.”
(Note: In case of the reinforcement or concrete in compression)

6.5.7. Cracking
Design Codes Eurocode 2: EN 1992-1-1:2004
DIN: DIN 1045-1:2001-07
After the assignment of the actual reinforcement the program calculates the
crack width and crack directions in the membrane, plate and shell elements.
The calculation can be perfromed with reinforcement directions relative to
the surface element’s local x and y axes or with arbitrary ξ and η reinforce-
ment directions. The program displays the crack openings in a color coded
mode, can draw the crack map and the crack angles.
The set of the parameters can be seen in the previous section.
Results In the table of results the following information can be found:
Aa(x/ξ), actual reinforcement in x and y (or in ξ and η in case of skew reinforcement)
Aa(y/η) directions
wk crack width at the axis of the rebar
wk2 crack width at the edge of the slab
xs2 position of the neutral axis relative to the edge on the compressed side
σs2 rebar stress
wR angle of cracking relative to the local x direction
nx, ny, nxy, mx, my, mxy surface forces and moments
434

 A warning message will appear if the calculated

rebar stress is higher than the characteristic yield
strength.
The calculation of crack width is based on the
actual reinforcement assigned to the surfaces.

6.5.7.1. Cracking calculation according to Eurocode 2

𝑤𝑘 = 𝑠𝑟,𝑚𝑎𝑥 (𝜖𝑠𝑚 − 𝜖𝑐𝑚 ), where 𝑠𝑟,𝑚𝑎𝑥 is the maximum cracking,

𝜖𝑠𝑚 is the strain of the rebar, 𝜖𝑐𝑚 is the strain of the concrete between cracks
𝑘𝑡 𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑚 𝐸
𝜎𝑠2 − (1 + 𝑠 𝜌𝜌,𝑒𝑓𝑓 )
𝜌𝜌,𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝐸𝑐𝑚 𝜎𝑠2
𝜖𝑠𝑚 − 𝜖𝑐𝑚 = ≥ 0.6 ⋅
𝐸𝑠 𝐸𝑠
Φ 𝜎𝑠2 𝜙
𝑠𝑟,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = k 3 ⋅ 𝑐 + k 4 ⋅ 𝑘1 𝑘2 (𝑠𝑟,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = in case of DIN EN 1992-1-1)
𝜌𝜌,𝑒𝑓𝑓 3.6𝑓𝑐𝑡,𝑒𝑓𝑓

where
Φ is the average rebar diameter,
c is the concrete cover,
𝑘1 is a factor depending on rebar surface (ribbed or plain),
𝑘2 is a factor depending on the character of the eccentric tension,
k3 is a factor may be equal to 3.4
k4 is a factor may be equal to 0.425
k3 and k4 factors can be set in the Design codes window under the Reinforced concrete tab
(see... 3.3.7 Design codes)
𝑘𝑡 is a load duration factor
for short term loads 𝑘𝑡 = 0.6
for long term (permanent) loads 𝑘𝑡 = 0.4
𝜌𝜌𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 𝐴𝑠 /𝐴𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓 is the effective reinforcement ratio
Φ
If plain rebars are used or the spacing of ribbed rebars exceeds 5 ⋅ (𝑐 + ), then
2
𝑠𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 1.3 ⋅ (ℎ − 𝑥2 ).
The program takes account of the fact that cracking is not perpendicular to any of the reinforcement
directions and calculates its angle relative to the x axis.

6.5.7.2. Cracking calculation according to DIN 1045-1

𝑤𝑘 = 𝑠𝑟,𝑚𝑎𝑥 (𝜖𝑠𝑚 − 𝜖𝑐𝑚 ), where 𝑠𝑟,𝑚𝑎𝑥 is the maximum cracking,

𝜖𝑠𝑚 is the strain of the rebar, 𝜖𝑐𝑚 is the strain of the concrete between cracks
𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑚 𝐸
𝜎𝑠2 − 0.4 ⋅ (1 + 𝑠 𝜌𝑒𝑓𝑓 )
𝜌𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝐸𝑐𝑚 𝜎𝑠2
𝜖𝑠𝑚 − 𝜖𝑐𝑚 = ≥ 0.6 ⋅
𝐸𝑠 𝐸𝑠

𝑑 𝜎𝑠2 𝑑
𝑠𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ≤
3.6 ⋅ 𝜌𝑒𝑓𝑓 3.6𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑚
where
𝑑 is the average rebar diameter
𝜌𝜌𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 𝐴𝑠 /𝐴𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓 is the effective reinforcement ratio

The program takes account of the fact that cracking is not perpendicular to any of the reinforcement
directions and calculates its angle relative to the x axis.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 435

6.5.8. Shear resistance and reinforcement calculation for plates and shells

Design Codes Eurocode 2: EN 1992-1-1:2004

DIN: DIN 1045-1:2001-07
SIA: SIA 262:2013

AxisVM calculates the shear resistance of the reinforced plate or shell without shear reinforcement,
shear reinforcement (asw) if required and the maximum shear resistance of plate and shell structures
with shear reinforcement according to the failure of concrete in compression. Furthermore, the
resultant design shear force, the principal direction (𝜙), the difference between the design shear force
and the shear resistance without shear reinforcement and the ratio of the design shear force and
maximum shear resistance with shear reinforcement are also calculated.

 Due to the differences in the regulations related to shear and punching, this calculation and a
verification based on the presented result components cannot substitute punching verification!

2 + 𝑣 2 is the resultant shear force, where 𝑣 , and 𝑣

𝑣𝐸𝑑 = √𝑣𝑥𝑧 𝑦𝑧 𝑥𝑧 𝑦𝑧 are the shear force components in

planes with normals in the local x and y direction.

𝑣𝑦𝑧
𝜙 = arctan is the angle of the normal of the plane, in which resultant shear force of 𝑞𝑅𝑧 acts
𝑣𝑥𝑧
(this angle can be displayed as a result component).
𝑑 = (𝑑𝑥 + 𝑑𝑦 )/2 is the average effective height.

Orthogonal x/y reinforcement:

𝜌𝑙 = 𝜌𝑥 cos2 𝜙 + 𝜌𝑦 sin2 𝜙 is the reinforcement ratio of the longitudinal reinforcement.
𝜌𝑥 and 𝜌𝑦 are rebar ratios
calculated from tension reinforcement in x and y directions of the reinforcement.

Skew reinforcement:
𝜌𝑙 = 𝜌𝜉 cos2 (𝜙 − 𝛼) + 𝜌𝜂 𝑐𝑜𝑠 2 [𝛽 − (𝜙 − 𝛼)] is the reinforcement ratio of the longitudinal
reinforcement.
𝜌𝜉 and 𝜌𝜂 are rebar ratios
calculated from tension reinforcement in ξ and η directions, respectively.

 The calculation of the shear resistance is based on the actual reinforecement assigned to the
surfaces.

6.5.8.1. Calculation according to Eurocode 2

Shear resistance is
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = [𝐶𝑅𝑑,𝑐 𝑘(100 ⋅ 𝜌𝑙 𝑓𝑐𝑘 )1/3 + 𝑘1 𝜎𝑐𝑝 ] ⋅ 𝑑 ≥ (𝑣𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝑘1 𝜎𝑐𝑝 ) ⋅ 𝑑
where
0.18
𝐶𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = , 𝑘 = 1 + √200/𝑑 ≤ 2.0, 𝑘1 = 0.15
𝛾𝑐
𝑁𝐸𝑑 1/2
𝜎𝑐𝑝 = ≤ 0.2 𝑓𝑐𝑑 , 𝑣𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.035 ⋅ 𝑘 3/2 ⋅ 𝑓𝑐𝑘
𝐴𝑐
𝑁𝐸𝑑 is the normal force in the shell perpendicular to the plane of 𝑞𝑅𝑧 .
𝑁𝐸𝑑 is positive in compression.
The reinforcement ratio is 𝜌𝑙 ≤ 0.02
cot 𝜃 + cot 𝛼
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝛼𝑐𝑤 𝑧𝜈1 𝑓𝑐𝑑
1 + cot 2 𝜃
where
𝑓𝑐𝑘
𝜈1 = 𝜈 = 0.6 [1 − ]
250
𝛼𝑐𝑤 = 1.0 ← 𝜎𝑐𝑝 = 0
𝜎𝑐𝑝
𝛼𝑐𝑤 = (1 + ) ← 0 < 𝜎𝑐𝑝 ≤ 0.25𝑓𝑐𝑑
𝑓𝑐𝑑
𝛼𝑐𝑤 = 1.25 ← 0.25𝑓𝑐𝑑 < 𝜎𝑐𝑝 ≤ 0.5𝑓𝑐𝑑
436

𝜎𝑐𝑝
𝛼𝑐𝑤 = 2.5 (1 − ) ← 0.5𝑓𝑐𝑑 < 𝜎𝑐𝑝 ≤ 𝑓𝑐𝑑
𝑓𝑐𝑑
𝑧 is the level arm of internal forces
Calculation of level The level arm of internal forces is calculated according to one of the two following ways based on the
arm of internal settings specified by the user (See... 6.5.1 Surface reinforcement parameters and reinforcement calculation
forces - RC1 module) :
• calculation from internal forces based on the equilibrium of a three-layered sandwich model;
• approximately: 𝑧 = 0.9𝑑
Calculation of If 𝑣𝐸𝑑 is greater than 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 , shear reinforcement is required to resist shear forces. The required rein-
required shear forcement (e.g. [mm2/m2]) is calculated with the help of the following formula. If 𝑣𝐸𝑑 is greater than
reinforcement 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 , the section cannot be reinforced against shear force. In these cases, the software warns the
user with a warning message.
𝑣𝐸𝑑
𝑎𝑠𝑤 =
𝑧𝑓𝑦𝑤𝑑 1𝑚[(cot 𝜃 + cot 𝛼) sin 𝛼]

 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 , 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 shear resistances, furthermore the difference between design shear force and the shear
resistance 𝑉𝐸𝑑 − 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 and 𝑉𝐸𝑑 /𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 can also be displayed with isolines and isosurfaces.

6.5.8.2. Calculation according to SIA 262

Shear resistance is
𝑉𝑅𝑑𝑐 = 𝑘𝑑 𝜏𝑐𝑑 𝑑

where 𝜏𝑐𝑑 = 0.3√𝑓𝑐𝑘 /𝛾𝑐 ; 𝑘𝑑 = 1/(1 + 𝑘𝑣 𝑑); 𝑘𝑣 = 3.0.

If 𝑓𝑠𝑑 > 435 N/mm2 , then 𝑘𝑣 is increased by 𝑓𝑠𝑑 ⁄435.
If direction of 𝑉𝐸𝑑 resultant design sehar force is not parallel to either x or y reinforcement, 𝑘𝑣 is in-
creased by 1/(cos4 𝜙 + sin4 𝜙).

𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑧𝑘𝑐 𝑓𝑐𝑑 (cos 𝛼 + cot 𝛽 sin 𝛼) sin 𝛼

where
1
𝑘𝑐 = ≤ 0.65 𝜀1 = 𝜀𝑥 + (𝜀𝑥 + 0.002) cot 2 𝛼
1.2 + 55𝜀1
𝑧 is the level arm of internal forces
Calculation of level The level arm of internal forces is calculated according to one of the two following ways based on the
arm of internal settings specified by the user (See... 6.5.1 Surface reinforcement parameters and reinforcement calculation -
forces RC1 module) :
• calculation from internal forces based on the equilibrium of a three-layered sandwich model;
• approximately: 𝑧 = 0.9𝑑
Calculation of If 𝑣𝐸𝑑 is greater than 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 , shear reinforcement is required to resist shear forces. The required rein-
required shear forcement (e.g. [mm2/m2]) is calculated with the help of the following formula. If 𝑣𝐸𝑑 is greater than
reinforcement 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 , the section cannot be reinforced against shear force. In these cases, the software warns the
user with a warning message.
𝑣𝐸𝑑
𝑎𝑠𝑤 =
𝑧𝑓𝑦𝑤𝑑 1𝑚[(cot 𝜃 + cot 𝛼) sin 𝛼]
 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 , 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 shear resistances, furthermore the difference between design shear force and the shear
resistance 𝑉𝐸𝑑 − 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 and 𝑉𝐸𝑑 /𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 can also be displayed with isolines and isosurfaces.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 437

6.5.9. Column reinforcement – RC2 module

The reinforced column check can be performed based on the following design codes:

Design Codes Eurocode 2: EN 1992-1-1:2004 + (MSZ, DIN, SR, DS, NBN, BS, NEN, SFS, SS, NTC, CSN, PN NAs)
DIN: DIN 1045-1:2001-07
SIA: SIA 262:2013

Reinforcement bars Actual reinforcement can be entered the same way as described in 6.5.4 Actual reinforcement against
biaxial bending (column)

Column Check The program performs the verification against bending with or without axial force, shear forces and
torsional moments of the column based on the cross-section properties and reinforcement
parameters and determines the eccentricity increments for the forces in the selected columns (or any
𝑁𝑥 , 𝑀𝑦𝑏 , 𝑀𝑧𝑏 , 𝑀𝑦𝑡 , 𝑀𝑧𝑡 values) based on the given buckling parameters and according to the
requirements of the current design code.
Calculates 𝑁𝑥,𝐸𝑑 , 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 , 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑 design forces using the eccentricity increments and checks if these
points are within the interaction diagram.
The display of the diagram can be set in the Display Parameters window.
In case of shear verification, the software determines the shear resistance of the concrete and the
stirrups and the upper bound of shear resistance related to the failure of concrete strut in
compression. In case of verification against torsional effects, the software determines the torsion
resistance of the concrete and the upper bound of torsion resistance related to the failure of
concrete strut in compression. During the calculation of utilization, the combined effect of shear and
torsion is also accounted.

Allows setting the display modes for the

interaction diagram.
Display Select display mode by clicking a radio
button in the Display Mode group box. It
has the same effect as selecting it from
the dropdown list.

Select axial force values to use when

drawing the 3D interaction diagram (N-M
Surface) from the check list.

In the Labels group you can turn on and

off axial force labeling, the display of
graphic symbols for internal forces of
selected columns in the N-My-Mz space
and display options for the cross-section
display mode.

Blue color shows that the
𝑁𝑥,𝐸𝑑 , 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 , 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑 values are within the
interaction diagram.

Red color shows that 𝑁𝑥,𝐸𝑑 , 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 , 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑

values are ouside the interaction diagram.
Normal forces for these points are always
displayed.
438

N-M surface Displays the Nx-My-Mz strength interaction 3D diagram.

N-M diagram Displays the Nx-My, or Nx-Mz load-moment strength interaction diagram.

This display mode can be used with cross-sections that are symmetric. You can display the design
values of the internal forces, by enabling the Write values to check-box.
The design values of the internal forces are displayed as follows:
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 439

My-Mz diagram Displays the My-Mz interaction diagram at a given N value.

Load eccentricity limit

curves

𝑀𝑦,𝑅𝑑,𝑖 𝑀𝑧,𝑅𝑑,𝑖
Displays the load eccentricity limit curves based on or .
𝑁𝑖 𝑁𝑖
440

Shear/torsion check

The following figures and diagrams are shown in the window:

a) reinforcement drawing of the column,
b) Vy and Vz shear forces together with shear resistance (blue line – without torsion),
c) Tx torsional moment with torsion resistance (blue line),
d) kT factor (utilization of stirrups for torsion) along the column,
e) η maximal utilization along the column,
f) Asl,T required additional longitudinal reinforcement for torsion along the column.
Shear and torsion check can be performed only for rectengular and circular sections.
In case of Critical or Envelope results, the results for only one load combination (that results the
maximum utilization) is shown. Detailed results for every load combinations and cases are available
in the table.
In order to increase the performance of the calculation, the column is divided into several sections.
New section boundary is created where any of internal forces reaches min./max. value, where
stirrup’s parameters change and where Vy, Vz or Tx internal force diagram changes.
kT, η and Asl,T result components are calculated at the bottom and at the top of every sections.
Maximum values are shown only for every section in the window.
See... 6.5.9.5 Shear and torsion check of reinforced concrete columns

 Detailed verification results are available for each section, if the cursor is moved over the
black lines (represent the axis of the column).

The Column internal force check table contains the maximum normal forces and moments at the top
and bottom end of the selected columns and different eccentricity values.
Internal forces
Additional columns displaying 𝑀𝑦𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑖𝑛 , 𝑀𝑦𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 , 𝑀𝑧𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑖𝑛 , 𝑀𝑧𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 moment resistance maximum
values at the given 𝑁𝑥 are also available.
Utilization The calculated utilizations are available in table format. If N-M surface, N-My diagram, N-Mz dia-
gram, My-Mz diagram or Critical eccentricity curves displax mode is active, the presented utiliza-
tions are related to the column verification against bending with or without axial force. If
Shear/torsion check display mode is active, the results of shear and torsion verification are shown.
Utilization – bending The program calculates two types of utilization. The first one is ε (N = const.), the moment utiliza-
with or without axial tion: this is defined on the My-Mz diagram as the ratio of the distance of design force point from
force the origin to the distance of the intersection point of the curve and the half line drawn from the
origin through the same point from the origin. The second one is ε (e = const.) the utilization for
constant eccentricity.
It is defined in the N-My-Mz space as the ratio of the distance of design force point from the origin
to the distance of the intersection point of the N-M surface and the half line drawn from the origin
through the same point from the origin.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 441

Utilization – The program shows the following utilizations in the table:

shear/torsion • ηVy: Shear utilization in local y direction without torsion.
• ηVz: Shear utilization in local z direction without torsion.
• ηVyVz: Overall shear utilization without torsion.
• ηVyVzT: Overall utilization with shear and torsion interaction.
• ηVyVzT,max: Utilization of concrete compression strut.
• ηmax: Maximum utilization (max. value of the above listed utilizations).

Besides the utilizations, the program lists the design shear resistances related to local y and z axes,
the shear resistant reduction factor of stirrups due to torsion and the additional longitudinal rein-
forcement required for torsion.
see... 6.5.9.5 Shear and torsion check of reinforced concrete columns

Show failed columns Check this option to display the failed columns only.
only

6.5.9.1. Eccentricity calculation

Eccentricity calculation in AxisVM is based on a method assuming that the value of bending moments
along the column are the sum of first order bending moments, bending moments due to geometrical
imperfections and second order bending moments (EN 1992-1-1 5.8.8.2). Any of the sections along
the column may be critical.
𝑀𝐸𝑑 = 𝑀0 + 𝑀𝑖 + 𝑀2
where
𝑀0 first order bending moment
𝑀𝑖 bending moment due to geometrical imperfections
𝑀2 second order bending moment
442

(A. J. Bond et al., How to Design Concrete Structures using Eurocode 2. UK, 2006 )
According to this method the verification of a column with arbitrary boundary conditions can be
performed if the bending moments are available in every section.
First order bending AxisVM analyses the first order bending moment diagram along the column and it divides the co-
moments lumn based on the number of moment extremes. This way the effect of intermediate forces on the
column can be taken into account. Bending moments between extreme values are determined with
linear interpolation.
Bending moments In case of braced elements (non-sway buckling shapes) bending moments due to geometrical im-
due to imperfections perfections are taken to be constant along the column because 1) the axis of columns on different
storeys are not necessarily collinear, 2) if the column has rigid connections, a local curvature causes
the same bending moment (N·ei) at the ends than at the middle but of opposite sign.
Buckling shapes of braced elements:

In case of sway buckling shapes, linear bending moment diagram is assumed along the beam if it is
specified in the code.
Buckling shapes of sway elements:

If global imperfections are taken into account by extra loads acting on the structure, they must be
ignored in column reinforcement calculation. To achieve this, check Local imperfections only. If a sway
buckling shape is selected only a constant local geometric imperfection is considered (calculated with
a β ≤ 1.0 buckling factor).
Second order mo- Based on the selected design code, second order moments are calculated from the first order bend-
ments ing moments (extended with bending moments due to imperfections) or based on the buckling
shape. The first calculation method is called nominal stiffness method, while the second one is the
nominal curvature method.
Nominal curvature Second order moments are calculated with trigonometric functions assuming that the bending mo-
method ment at the maximum amplitude is equal to N·e2. The maximum amplitude is obtained according to
the selected buckling shape (see... 6.5.4 Actual reinforcement against biaxial bending (column)).

𝛽 − 0.5 2𝜋𝑥
𝑒2 = [1 − ] cos ( ) 𝑒2,0
𝜋𝑥 0.5 𝐿
𝑒2 = sin ( )𝑒 −
𝐿 2,0
1) 6) 1−𝛽 𝜋𝑥
[1 − ] sin ( ) 𝑒2,0
0.5 𝐿

𝜋𝑥 𝜋𝑥
𝑒2 = cos ( )𝑒 𝑒2 = cos ( )𝑒
2𝐿 2,0 𝐿 2,0
2) 7)

3𝜋𝑥 3𝜋𝑥 𝜋
𝑒2 = cos ( )𝑒 𝑒2 = cos ( + ) 𝑒2,0
2𝐿 2,0 2𝐿 2
3) 8)
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 443

2𝜋𝑥 𝜋𝑥 𝜋
𝑒2 = cos ( ) 𝑒2,0 𝑒2 = cos ( + )𝑒
𝐿 2𝐿 2 2,0
4) 9)

𝜋𝑥
𝑒2 = cos ( )𝑒
𝐿 2,0
5)
e2,0 is the maximum amplitude of second order eccentricity.

Nominal stiffness This method ignores the buckling shape. The sum of first order bending moments and bending mo-
method ments due to imperfections are multiplied based on the ratio of design normal force and the buckling
force. For further details see EN 1992-1-1. Dutch and Danish NA-s require application of this method.
Minimal eccentricity Design codes usually require the consideration of a minimum eccentricity if the calculated eccentricity
is lower than this limit. In AxisVM, if the sum of first order eccentricity, eccentricity due to imperfec-
tions and second order eccentricity does not reach the minimum, eccentricity due to imperfections is
increased in order to ensure that the sum of eccentricities is not less than the minimum

Biaxial bending A reinforced concrete column is generally subjected to biaxial bending

because geometric imperfections and second order eccentricities may
be considered in both principal directions. The center of the cross
represents the sum of first order eccentricity and eccentricity from
geometric imperfections. Second order eccentricties are considered
with both +/- sign. Second order eccentricities can be considered in a)
both y and z directions simultaneously (a) or independently (b) (A. W.
Beeby, R. S. Narayanan (2009): Designer’s guide to Eurocode 2: Design
of concrete structures). (see... 6.5.4 Actual reinforcement against biaxial
bending (column))

b)

 Note: Figures and illustrations in this section have been saved considering case (b). If the
second order eccentricities were considered simultaneously (case(a)), the figures and
illustrations would show different representation of eccentricities.
Double symmetric Double symmetric, circle or square
columns shaped RC columns are very common
in practice. If Ix = Iy both for the cross
section and the reinforcement and the
boundary conditions are also identical
in x and y directions, second order
eccentricities are applied neither in x
nor in y direction but according to the
resultant first order bending moments
at the critical cross section for buckling.
444

6.5.9.2. Check of reinforced columns according to Eurocode 2 (bending with axial force)

Design moments in bending directions are 𝑀𝑑 = 𝑁𝑑 ⋅ 𝑒𝑑

where Nd is the normal force in the column and 𝑒𝑑 = 𝑒𝑒 + 𝑒𝑖 + 𝑒2 is the critical eccentricity in the
given bending direction. Minimal eccentricity: max (20 mm, h/30).
𝑒𝑒 is the initial eccentricity calculated from the first order force and moment.
Initial eccentricities at the ends of the investigated section:
𝑒𝑒 = 𝑀𝐼 /𝑁𝑑
Initial eccentricities at intermediate cross-section of the investigated section (equivalent eccentricity):
0.6 ⋅ 𝑒𝑎 + 0.4 ⋅ 𝑒𝑏
𝑒𝑒 = max { } and |𝑒𝑎 | ≥ |𝑒𝑏 |,
0.4 ⋅ 𝑒𝑎
where 𝑒𝑎 and 𝑒𝑏 are the initial eccentricities at the ends of the investigated section.
𝑒𝑖 is the eccentricity from geometric imperfections.
𝑙 2
𝑒𝑖 = 𝛼ℎ Θ0 0 , where 𝑙0 is the buckling length, 𝛼ℎ = 2/√𝑙 and ≤ 𝛼ℎ ≤ 1, where l is the column height.
2 3
Θ0 – according to NA of the selected code.
𝑒2 is the second order eccentricity.
𝐴𝐵𝐶 𝑁𝐸𝑑
Second order eccentricity is considered if 𝜆 ≥ 𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 = 20 where 𝑛 =
√𝑛 𝐴𝑐 𝑓𝑐𝑑

 The calculation of λlim may be different according to NA of the selected code!

16
In case of DIN EN 1992-1-1: 𝑛 < 0.41 → 𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 = ; 𝑛 > 0.41 → 𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 = 25.0
√𝑛
25
In case of Italian Code: 𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 =
√𝑛
The prescribed calculation method of 𝒆𝟐 can be nominal curvature method or nominal stiffness
method according to NA of the selected code. In some NAs, the application of both methods is al-
lowed. In these cases, nominal curvature method is applied.
Nominal curvature 1 𝑙02
method 𝑒2 =
𝑟𝑐
1 𝑓𝑦𝑑
where = 𝐾𝑟 𝐾𝜑
𝑟 𝐸𝑠 ⋅0.45⋅𝑑′
8 ≤ 𝑐 ≤ 𝜋 2 based on the first order bending moment diagram
𝑁𝑢′ −𝑁𝐸𝑑
𝐾𝑟 = min { ; 1.0} , 𝐾𝜑 = max{1 + 𝛽𝜑𝑒𝑓 ; 1.0},
𝑁𝑢′ −𝑁𝑏𝑎𝑙
𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝜆
𝛽 = 0.35 + − , where 𝑓𝑐𝑘 is in N/mm2 unit
200 150
ℎ
𝑑′ = + 𝑖𝑠 , where 𝑖𝑠 is the radius of inertia of the longitudinal reinforcement
2

Nominal stiffness 𝛽
𝑒2 = (𝑒𝑒 + 𝑒𝑖 ) [1 + ],
method 𝑁𝐵 ⁄𝑁𝑑 − 1
𝜋2
where 𝛽 =
𝑐
𝑁𝐵 is the buckling load based on nominal stiffness
𝐸𝐼 = 𝐾𝑐 𝐸𝑐𝑑 𝐼𝑐 + 𝐾𝑠 𝐸𝑠 𝐼𝑠 is the nominal stiffness, where
𝐸𝑐𝑑 is the design value of the modulus of elasticity of concrete, see 5.8.6 (3)
𝐼𝑐 is the moment of inertia of concrete cross section
𝐸𝑠 is the design value of the modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, 5.8.6 (3)
𝐼𝑠 is the second moment of area of reinforcement, about the centre of area of the concrete
𝐾𝑐 is a factor for effects of cracking, creep etc, see 5.8.7.2. (2), (3)
𝐾𝑠 is a factor for contribution of reinforcement, see 5.8.7.2. (2), (3)
Eccentricities are determined in both bending planes. The program checks the following design situa-
tions:
𝜆𝑦 ⁄ 𝜆𝑧 ≤ 2 and 𝜆𝑧 ⁄𝜆𝑦 ≤ 2, otherwise
𝑒𝑑𝑦 ⁄𝑏𝑒𝑞 𝑒𝑑𝑧⁄ℎ𝑒𝑞
≤ 0,2 or ≤ 0,2 *
𝑒𝑑𝑧⁄ℎ𝑒𝑞 𝑒𝑑𝑦 ⁄𝑏𝑒𝑞
if 𝑒𝑑𝑦 ⁄𝑏𝑒𝑞 > 𝑒𝑑𝑧 ⁄ℎ𝑒𝑞 𝑀𝑑𝑦,1 = 𝑁𝑑 (𝑒𝑒𝑧 + 𝑒𝑖𝑧 )
𝑀𝑑𝑦,1 = 0 𝑀𝑑𝑧,1 = −𝑁𝑑 (𝑒𝑒𝑦 + 𝑒𝑖𝑦 ± 𝑒2𝑦 )
𝑀𝑑𝑧,1 = −𝑁𝑑 (𝑒𝑒𝑦 + 𝑒𝑖𝑦 ± 𝑒2𝑦 ) 𝑀𝑑𝑦,2 = 𝑁𝑑 (𝑒𝑒𝑧 + 𝑒𝑖𝑧 ± 𝑒2𝑧 )
otherwise 𝑀𝑑𝑧,2 = −𝑁𝑑 (𝑒𝑒𝑦 + 𝑒𝑖𝑦 )
𝑀𝑑𝑦,2 = 𝑁𝑑 (𝑒𝑒𝑧 + 𝑒𝑖𝑧 ± 𝑒2𝑧 )
𝑀𝑑𝑧,2 = 0
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 445

* except DIN EN 1992-1-1 NA

AxisVM checks whether the calculated design loads (Mdy, Mdz, Nd) are inside the N-M strength
interaction diagram. If it is not satisfied in any of the design situations, the column with the given
cross-section and reinforcement fails.

The following situations may occur:

Possible reasons:
• the slenderness related to the buckling about y or
z axis is lower than the limit value 𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 ;
• at free ends or at ends with hinged supports the
second order moment is zero;
• in case of biaxial bending, if the criteria met,
eccentricites are shown only in the relevant
direction;
• the consideration of second order eccentricity is
turned off about one axis.

Possible reasons:

• the slenderness related to the buckling about

both y and z axis is lower than the limit value
𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 ;
• at free ends or at ends with hinged supports the
second order moment is zero;
• the consideration of second order eccentricity is
turned off for both axes.

On N-MR strength interaction diagrams and on load eccentricity limit

curves points represent these design loads.Custom force and
moment values can also be entered into the table. These points will
be displayed in the N-MR strength interaction diagrams and in the
load eccentricity limit curves.Signs of the forces and moments are
determined according to the picture.
446

The calculation takes the following assumptions:

, diagrams:

 Longitudinal reinforcement bars thinner than 1/15 of the stirrup distance will be ignored for compression.

6.5.9.3. Check of reinforced columns according to DIN1045-1 (bending with axial force)

Design moments in bending directions are 𝑀𝑑 = 𝑁𝑑 ⋅ 𝑒𝑑

where Nd is the normal force in the column and 𝑒𝑑 = 𝑒0 + 𝑒𝑎 + 𝑒2 is the critical eccentricity in the
given bending direction.
Minimal eccentricity: h/20.
𝑒0 is the initial eccentricity calculated from the first order force and moment.
Initial eccentricities at the ends of the investigated section:
𝑒0 = 𝑀𝐼 /𝑁𝑑
Initial eccentricities at intermediate cross-section of the investigated section (equivalent eccentricity):
0.6 ⋅ 𝑒𝑎 + 0.4 ⋅ 𝑒𝑏
𝑒0 = max { } 𝑎𝑛𝑑 |𝑒𝑎 | ≥ |𝑒𝑏 |,
0.4 ⋅ 𝑒𝑎
where 𝑒𝑎 and 𝑒𝑏 are the initial eccentricities at the ends of the investigated section.
𝑒𝑎 : is the eccentricity from geometric imperfections.
𝛼𝑎1 𝑙0
𝑒𝑎 = ,
2
1 1
where 𝑙0 is the buckling length, 𝛼𝑎1 = ≤ , where l is the height of the column,
100⋅√𝑙 200

16
𝜆𝑚𝑎𝑥 = max {25; 𝑁𝑑
},
√𝐴
𝑐 𝑓𝑐𝑑

if 𝜆 ≥ 𝜆𝑚𝑎𝑥 , then second order eccentricitied need to be considered.

e2 : second order increment of the eccentricity.
1 𝑙02
𝑒2 = 𝐾1 ,
𝑟 10
1 2⋅𝑓𝑦𝑑 𝜆 𝑁𝑢𝑑 −𝑁𝑑
where = 𝐾2 , 𝐾1 = min { − 2.5; 1.0} , 𝐾2 = ≤ 1.0
𝑟 𝐸𝑠 ⋅0.9⋅𝑑 10 𝑁𝑢𝑑 −𝑁𝑏𝑎𝑙
d is the effective height of the cross-section
Eccentricities are determined in both bending planes. The program checks the following design
situations:
𝑀𝑑𝑦,1 = 𝑁𝑑 (𝑒0𝑧 + 𝑒𝑎𝑧 )
𝑀𝑑𝑧,1 = −𝑁𝑑 (𝑒0𝑦 + 𝑒𝑎𝑦 ± 𝑒2𝑦 )
𝑀𝑑𝑦,2 = 𝑁𝑑 (𝑒0𝑧 + 𝑒𝑎𝑧 ± 𝑒2𝑧 )
𝑀𝑑𝑧,2 = −𝑁𝑑 (𝑒0𝑦 + 𝑒𝑎𝑦 )

AxisVM checks whether the calculated design loads (Mdy, Mdz, Nd) are inside the N-M strength
interaction diagram. If it is not satisfied in any of the design situations, the column with the given
cross-section and reinforcement fails.

The calculation takes the following assumptions: , diagrams

 Longitudinal reinforcement bars thinner than 1/15 of the stirrup distance will be ignored for compression.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 447

6.5.9.4. Check of reinforced columns according to SIA 262 (bending with axial force)
Design moments in bending directions are 𝑀𝑑 = 𝑁𝑑 ⋅ 𝑒𝑑
where Nd is the normal force in the column and 𝑒𝑑 = 𝑒1𝑑 + 𝑒0𝑑 + 𝑒2𝑑 is the critical eccentricity in
the given bending direction.
𝑒0𝑑 : increment due to geometric imperfections
𝑙𝑐𝑟 𝑑
𝑒0𝑑 = max {𝛼𝑖 ; }
2 30
1 0.01 1
where ≥ 𝛼𝑖 = ≥
200 √𝑙 300
𝑙𝑐𝑟 is the buckling length, l is the actual length, d is the effective height of the cross-section.
𝑒1𝑑 : is the initial eccentricity calculated from the first order force and moment.
Initial eccentricities at the ends of the investigated section:
𝑒1𝑑 = 𝑀𝐼 /𝑁𝑑
Initial eccentricities at intermediate cross-section of the investigated section (equivalent eccentricity):
0.6 ⋅ 𝑒𝑎 + 0.4 ⋅ 𝑒𝑏
𝑒1𝑑 = max { } 𝑎𝑛𝑑 |𝑒𝑎 | ≥ |𝑒𝑏 |,
0.4 ⋅ 𝑒𝑎
where 𝑒𝑎 and 𝑒𝑏 are the initial eccentricities at the ends of the investigated section.

𝑒2 : second order increment of the eccentricity.

2
𝑙𝑐𝑟
𝑒2𝑑 = 𝜒𝑑 ,
𝜋2
2𝑓𝑠𝑑 𝜀𝑠𝑑 −𝜀′𝑠𝑑 |𝜀𝑐,∞ |
where 𝜒𝑑 = if approximate curvature option is checked, otherwise 𝜒𝑑 = + .
𝐸𝑠 (𝑑−𝑑 ′ ) 𝑑−𝑑 ′ 𝑑
Eccentricities are determined in both bending planes. The program checks the following design
situations:
𝑀𝑑𝑦,1 = 𝑁𝑑 (𝑒1𝑧 + 𝑒0𝑧 )
𝑀𝑑𝑧,1 = −𝑁𝑑 (𝑒1𝑦 + 𝑒0𝑦 ± 𝑒2𝑦 )
𝑀𝑑𝑦,2 = 𝑁𝑑 (𝑒1𝑧 + 𝑒0𝑧 ± 𝑒2𝑧 )
𝑀𝑑𝑧,2 = −𝑁𝑑 (𝑒1𝑦 + 𝑒0𝑦 )

AxisVM checks whether the calculated design loads (Mdy, Mdz, Nd) are inside the N-M strength
interaction diagram. If it is not satisfied in any of the design situations, the column with the given
cross-section and reinforcement fails.
The calculation takes the following assumptions: , diagrams

 Longitudinal rebars will not be taken into account for compression if any of the following criteria is met (s
is the stirrup distance):
 < 8, s > 15 , s > amin, s > 300 mm

6.5.9.5. Shear and torsion check of reinforced concrete columns

Shear resistant According to design codes and design manuals, the transverse reinforcement cannot be fully utilized
reduction factor of for shear and torsion, respectively. For this reason, the program calculates the utilization of the stir-
stirrups due to rups considered only torsional effects (kT) and it calculates a reduced shear resistance for stirrups
torsion (kT) against shear forces, the considered reduction factor is 1-kT (only used for the external stirrups). This
reduced shear resistance is used by the calculation of the overall utilization with shear and torsion
interaction (ηVyVzT). The equilibrium forces in the stirrups against shear and torsional effects, respec-
tively:
448

Vz shear force Tx torsional moment

If the utilization of stirrups considered only torsion (kT) exceeds 1.0, the resistance of stirrups cannot
be considered against shear forces. In these cases, overall utilization with shear and torsion interac-
tion is ηVyVzT cannot be calculated that is marked with ??? symbol.

Torsion is considered by the verification only if torsional moment considerably influences the shear
resistance (kT > 0.01), the torsion moment exceeds 1% of torsional cracking moment, or the following
condition is satisfied:
𝑉𝑦,𝐸 𝑉𝑧,𝐸 𝑇𝑥,𝐸
+ + >1
𝑉𝑦,𝑅,𝑐 𝑉𝑧,𝑅,𝑐 𝑇𝑥,𝑅,𝑐

where Vy,R,c, Vz,R,c and Tx,R,c are the shear resistance of the concrete related to local y and z axes and
the torsional cracking moment, respectively. Otherwise the shear resistant reduction of stirrups due
to torsion is not considered (kT = 0).
Additional In case of a reinforced concrete beam/column, longitudinal reinforcement is also required against
longitudinal rein- torsional moment if condition above is satisfied. This longitudinal reinforcement should be distribut-
forcement required ed over the length of side of the section. Bending reinforcement may not be considered against
for torsion (Asl,T) torsion.
Torsional effects are typically not considerable in case of columns, torsional longitudinal reinforce-
ment cannot be defined. The program calculates an additional longitudinal reinforcement may be
required due to torsion.
 If additional longitudinal reinforcement
is necessary a warning message appears.
If Do not display this message option is
checked, the message is not displayed
while the Checking concrete columns
window is open.
Overall shear utiliza- Rectangular column section:
tion without torsion 𝑉𝑦,𝐸 𝑉𝑧,𝐸
𝜂𝑉𝑦𝑉𝑧 = + ≤1
(ηVyVz) 𝑉𝑦,𝑅 𝑉𝑧,𝑅

where Vy,E and Vz,E are calculated design shear forces related to local y and z axes, while Vy,R and Vz,R
are the design shear resistances related to local y and z axes, respectively.
In case of circular sections, the program calculates the resultant shear force from Vy,E and Vz,E. The
resultant shear force is compared to shear resistance of the section calculated in resultant’s direction:

2 2
√𝑉𝑦,𝐸 + 𝑉𝑧,𝐸
𝜂𝑉𝑦𝑉𝑧 = ≤1
𝑉𝑅
Overall utilization ηVyVzT utilization is evaluated similarly to ηVyVz, however, in this case the resistance of external stirrup
with shear and tor- legs is reduced with a factor (1 – kT) based on the torsional utilization.
sion interaction Torsion is considered only by the verification if torsional moment considerably influences the shear
(ηVyVzT) resistance (kT > 0.01), the torsion moment exceeds 1% of torsional cracking moment, or the following
condition is satisfied:
𝑉𝑦,𝐸 𝑉𝑧,𝐸 𝑇𝑥,𝐸
+ + >1
𝑉𝑦,𝑅,𝑐 𝑉𝑧,𝑅,𝑐 𝑇𝑥,𝑅,𝑐
Utilization of the In case of both shear and torsion verification, the resistance cannot exceed a shear force and torsion-
concrete compression al moment value, respectively, related to the failure of concrete compression strut. If shear forces and
strut (ηVyVzT,max) torsional moments are both present, the effect of shear and torsion interaction need to be consid-
ered by the calculation of the utilization of concrete compression strut.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 449

Rectangular column section:

𝑉𝑦,𝐸 𝑉𝑧,𝐸 𝑇𝑥,𝐸
𝜂𝑉𝑦𝑉𝑧𝑇,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = + + ≤1
𝑉𝑦,𝑅,𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑉𝑧,𝑅,𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑇𝑥,𝑅,𝑚𝑎𝑥

In case of circular sections, the program calculates the resultant shear force from Vy,E and Vz,E. The
resultant shear force is compared to shear resistance of the section calculated in resultant’s direction.
The utilization is calculated as follows:
2 2
√𝑉𝑦,𝐸 + 𝑉𝑧,𝐸
𝑇𝑥,𝐸
𝜂𝑉𝑦𝑉𝑧𝑇,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = + ≤1
𝑉𝑅,𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑇𝑥,𝑅,𝑚𝑎𝑥

If ηVyVzT,max exceeds 1.0, the resistance of the section can be increase only by changing concrete class
or increasing sections dimensions.
Shear resistance of The calculation shear resistance of reinforced concrete columns with circular cross section is mainly
circular cross section identical with the calculation performed in case of rectangular cross sections, there are only few
modifications. For further informations, we recommend the following research: John Orr - Shear
Capacity of Circular Concrete Sections.

Main differences considered in the calculation:

a) By the calculation of shear resistance of the concrete (Vy/z,R,c) and the maxmim design shear
resistance (Vy/z,R,max), 0.8D is used as the width of cross section, where D is the diameter.
b) In case of circular stirrups, a reduction factor (λ1) is used by the calculation of shear resistan-
ce due to the fact that the stirrups are not parallel to the shear force along the height of the
section. λ1 factor is calculated on the following way [Turmo et. al (2008): Shear truss analogy
for concrete members of solid and hollow circular cross sections] [J. Orr (2009): Shear Capacity
of Circular Concrete Sections], where z0 is the distance between the center of tension reinfor-
cement and the center of gravity of the section, z is the level arm and rs is the distance bet-
ween the center stirrup reinforcement and the center of gravity of the section:
1

𝜆1 = ∫ √1 − ((𝑧0 − 𝑧𝑋)⁄𝑟𝑠 )2 𝑑𝑋
0

c) In case of spiral stirrups, an another reduction factor is also used to consider that the vertical
component of resisting force is not parallel to shear force. λ2 factor is calculated on the fol-
lowing way [I. Feltham (2004): Shear in reinforced concrete piles and circular columns], where
p is the pitch of the spiral stirrup:
−0.5
𝑝 2
𝜆2 = (( ) + 1)
2𝜋𝑟𝑠
Level arm During the calculation of shear resistance of a reinforced concrete section, the level arm (z) of inter-
nal forces plays an important role. The level arm is interpreted as the distance between the center of
tension reinforcement and the center of compression zone. In case of beams, z is approximately
selected 0.9d, where d is the effective depth. However, if axial force is present, this approximation
cannot be used. The program automatically calculates the level arm of internal forces with the con-
sideration of the axial force in the section.

 The program checks the detailing rules in the standard regarding minimum/maximum longi-
tudinal reinforcement ratios, maximum distance of stirrups and minimum diameter of stirrups.
Warning message calls the attention of the user in the information window and instantly after
the design calculations if any of these detailing rules is not fulfilled. During the definition of
the parameters, the user is informed of the fulfilment of detailing rules regarding maximum
distance of stirrups and minimum diameter of stirrups by clicking button.
See... 6.5.4 Actual reinforcement against biaxial bending (column)
450

6.5.9.6. Shear and torsion check according to Eurocode 2 and DIN 1045-1
Design shear 𝑉𝑅𝑑 = 𝑀𝑖𝑛[𝑀𝑎𝑥[𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 , 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠 ], 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 ]
resistance
where VRd,c is the shear resistance of concrete, VRd,s is the shear resistance of stirrups, and VRd,max is
the maximal shear resistance of the section according to the resistance of concrete compression
strut.
Shear resistance of 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = [𝐶𝑅𝑑,𝑐 𝑘(100𝜌𝑙 𝑓𝑐𝑘 )1⁄3 + 𝑘1 𝜎𝑐𝑝 ]𝑏𝑤 𝑑 ≥ (𝑣𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝑘1 𝜎𝑐𝑝 )𝑏𝑤 𝑑
concrete where:
• ρsl ratio of tensile reinforcement,
• bw is the smallest width of the cross-section in the tensile area (circular section 0.8D),
• d is the effective depth,
• σcp the axial stress in the cross-section due to loading or prestressing (compression is po-
sitive) <0.2fcd,
• CRd,c, vmin and k1 parameters that are regulated in the National Annex. The values of these
factors can be set in the Design codes window under the Reinforced concrete tab
(see... 3.3.7 Design codes).

In case of DIN 1045-1:

𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = [0.1𝑘(100𝜌𝑙 𝑓𝑐𝑘 )1⁄3 + 0.12𝜎𝑐𝑝 ]𝑏𝑤 𝑑
Shear resistance of Rectengular cross section:
stirrups 𝐴𝑠𝑤
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠 = 𝑧𝑓𝑦𝑤𝑑 cot 𝜃
𝑠
Circular cross section:
𝐴𝑠𝑤
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠 = 𝜆1 𝜆2 𝑧𝑓𝑦𝑤𝑑 cot 𝜃
𝑠
where:
• Asw is the cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement,
• s is the spacing of stirrups or the pitch of spiral stirrup,
• z is the level arm,
• fywd is the design yield strength of the shear reinforcement,
• θ is the angle of shear crack,
• λ1 is the reduction factor for circular stirrups,
• λ2 is the reduction factor for spiral stirrups.
Maximum design cot 𝜃 + cot 𝛼
shear resistance 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝛼𝑐𝑤 𝑏𝑤 𝑧𝜈1 𝑓𝑐𝑑
1 + cot 2 𝜃
where:
• αcw is a coefficient taking account of the state of the stress in the compression chord,
• ν1 is a strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear,
• α is the angle between shear reinforcement and the beam axis perpendicular to the shear
force (in case of stirrups α=90°).
In case of DIN 1045-1:
cot 𝜃 + cot 𝛼
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.75𝑏𝑤 𝑧𝑓𝑐𝑑
1 + cot 2 𝜃
Torsional cracking 𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 2𝐴𝑘 𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 𝑡𝑒𝑓
moment – torsional where:
resistance of concrete • Ak is the area enclosed by the centre-lines of the connecting walls,
• tef is the effective wall thickness.
Maximum design The maximum torsional moment related to the resistance of concrete compression strut is calculated
torsional moment as follows:
𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 2𝜈𝛼𝑐𝑤 𝑓𝑐𝑑 𝐴𝑘 𝑡𝑒𝑓 sin 𝜃 cos 𝜃
Calculation of kT 𝑇𝐸𝑑
𝑘𝑇 =
2𝐴𝑠𝑤 𝐴𝑘 𝑓𝑦𝑤𝑑 cot 𝜃
where:
• TEd is the design torsional moment,
• Asw cross sectional area of a stirrup leg.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 451

Calculation of Asl,T 𝑇𝐸𝑑 𝑢𝑘 cot 𝜃

𝐴𝑠𝑙,𝑇 =
2𝐴𝑘 𝑓𝑦𝑤𝑑
where:
• uk is the perimeter of the area Ak.

6.5.9.7. Shear and torsion check according to SIA 262

Shear resistance of 𝑉𝑅𝑑 = 𝑘𝑑 𝜏𝑐𝑑 𝑏𝑤 𝑑
concrete 1
𝑘𝑑 =
1 + 3𝜀𝑣 𝑑
𝑓𝑠𝑑
𝜀𝑣 = 1.5
𝐸𝑠
where:
• τcd is shear stress limit (𝜏𝑐𝑑 = 0,3√𝑓𝑐𝑘 ⁄𝛾𝑐 ),
• bw is the smallest width of the cross-section in the tensile area (circular section 0.8D),
• d is the effective depth.
Shear resistance of Rectengular cross section:
stirrups 𝐴𝑠𝑤
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠 = 𝑧𝑓𝑠𝑑 cot 𝛼
𝑠
Circular cross section:
𝐴𝑠𝑤
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠 = 𝜆1 𝜆2 𝑧𝑓𝑠𝑑 cot 𝛼
𝑠
where:
• Asw is the cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement,
• s is the spacing of stirrups or the pitch of spiral stirrup,
• z is the level arm,
• fsd is the design yield strength of the shear reinforcement,
• α is the angle of shear crack,
• λ1 is the reduction factor for circular stirrups,
• λ2 is the reduction factor for spiral stirrups.
Maximum design 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑏𝑤 𝑧𝑘𝑐 𝑓𝑐𝑑 sin 𝛼 cos 𝛼
shear resistance 1
𝑘𝑐 = ≤ 0.65
1.2 + 55𝜀1
𝜀1 = 𝜀𝑥 + (𝜀1 + 0.002) cot 2 𝛼
where:
• kc is a strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear.
Torsional cracking 𝑇𝑅𝑑 = 2𝐴𝑘 𝑘𝑑 𝜏𝑐𝑑 𝑡𝑘
moment – torsional where:
resistance of concrete • Ak is the area enclosed by the centre-lines of the connecting walls,
• tk is the effective wall thickness.
Maximum design The maximum torsional moment related to the resistance of concrete compression strut is calculated
torsional moment as follows:
𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 2𝑘𝑐 𝑓𝑐𝑑 𝐴𝑘 𝑡𝑘 sin 𝜃 cos 𝜃
Calculation of kT 𝑇𝐸𝑑
𝑘𝑇 =
2𝐴𝑠𝑤 𝐴𝑘 𝑓𝑠𝑑 cot 𝜃
where:
• TEd is the design torsional moment,
• Asw cross sectional area of a stirrup leg.
Calculation of Asl,T 𝑇𝐸𝑑 𝑢𝑘 cot 𝜃
𝐴𝑠𝑙,𝑇 =
2𝐴𝑘 𝑓𝑠𝑑
where:
• uk is the perimeter of the area Ak.
452

6.5.9.8. Capacity design: calculation the design value of shear force according to Eurocode and SIA
In case of dissipative structures with DCM or DCH ductility class, in order to avoid shear failure in
columns, the design values of shear forces are determined in accordance with the capacity design
rule (if seismic load case is included in the selected load combination), on the basis of the equilibrium
of the column under end moments Mi,d.
Calculation of Mi,d ∑ 𝑀𝑅𝐵
𝑀𝑖,𝑑 = 𝛾𝑅𝑑 𝑀𝑅𝑐,𝑖 𝑚𝑖𝑛 {1; }
∑ 𝑀𝑅𝐶
where:

• i=1,2 denotes the end sections of the column,

• γRd is the factor accounting for overstrength due to steel strain hardening and confinement
of the concrete of the compression zone of the section,
• MRc,i is the design value of moment capacity at end i in the sense of the seismic bending mo-
ment under the considered sense of the seismic action;
• ΣMRB and ΣMRC the sum of moment capacity of beams and columns connected to the same joint, res-
pectively.
Calculation of VEd 𝑉𝐸𝑑 = 𝑉𝐸𝑑,0 + 𝑉𝐸𝑑,𝐸𝑄
where:
• VEd,0 denotes the shear force from non-seismic actions (from dead loads, etc.),
• VEd,EQ is the design value of seismic shear force.

Plastic hinge 𝑀1,𝑑 + 𝑀2,𝑑

at the top and 𝑉𝐸𝑑,𝐸𝑄 =
𝑙𝑐𝑙
at the bottom where:
• lcl is the clear length of the column (set 90% of the column length as default).
Plastic hinge If plastic hinge may be formed only at the top of the column (e.g. due to hinged support, etc.), it can
at the top be set in the parameter window that plastic hinge is expected only at the top. In this case, the design
value of seismic shear force is calculated on the following way:

(𝑀1,𝐸𝑑,0 + 𝑥 ∙ 𝑀1,𝐸𝑑,𝐸𝑄 ) + 𝑀2,𝑑

𝑉𝐸𝑑,𝐸𝑄 =
𝑙𝑐𝑙
where:
• M1,Ed,0 denotes the bending moment from non-seismic actions (from dead loads, etc.) at the
bottom,
• M1,Ed,EQ is the design value of seismic beding moment at the bottom from seismic analysis,
• x is a multiplier for seismic bending moment to reach the bending moment capacity of
plastic hinge at the top.

Plastic hinge 𝑀1,𝑑 + (𝑀2,𝐸𝑑,0 + 𝑥 ∙ 𝑀2,𝐸𝑑,𝐸𝑄 )

at the bottom 𝑉𝐸𝑑,𝐸𝑄 =
𝑙𝑐𝑙
where:
• M2,Ed,0 denotes the bending moment from non-seismic actions (from dead loads, etc.) at the
top,
• M2,Ed,EQ is the design value of seismic beding moment at the top from seismic analysis,
• x is a multiplier for seismic bending moment to reach the bending moment capacity of
plastic hinge at the bottom.

 If seismic shear force from seismic analysis is greater than the shear force calculated based on
capacity design rules, shear force from seismic analysis is used as V Ed,EQ.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 453

Results

The above described calculation of design seismic shear force is performed only if there is seismic
load case in the selected load combination. A seismic shear force calculated in accordance with capa-
city design rules is added to non-seismic shear forces in y and z directions respectively. The design
value of shear force including seismic shear force coming from capacity design is represented by
dashed and solid red lines. The seismic shear force need to be considered with both positive and
negative sign considering positive and negative directions of seismic loading. Solid red line rep-
resents greater absolute values.

 The program checks the detailing rules in the standard regarding minimum/maximum longi-
tudinal reinforcement ratio, maximum distance of stirrups and minimum diameter of stirrups.
Warning message calls the attention of the user in the information window and instantly after
the design calculations if any of these detailing rules is not fulfilled. During the definition of
the parameters, the user is informed of the fulfilment of detailing rules regarding maximum
distance of stirrups and minimum diameter of stirrups by clicking button. (See... 6.5.4 Actual
reinforcement against biaxial bending (column)) Checking the fulfillment of further standard specific
detailing rules is the responsibility of the user.

6.5.10. Composite column design – RC2 module

Design check of composite columns subjected to compression/tension force and biaxial bending can
be performed according to the following design codes:

Eurocode 2: EN 1994-1-1:2010
SIA : SIA 264:2014
The chapter 3.1.16.1 Cross-Section Editor shows how to create a composite section in the software.
Columns fulfill the following criteria can be designed only in RC2 module according to the design
codes:
• steel grade need to between S235 to S460;
• strength class of concrete need to be between C20/25 to C50/60;
• column is isolated and part of a framed structure where the other structural members are
either composite or steel members;
• the column section is doubly symmetrical.

It has to be noted that both Eurocode and SIA standard prescribes further criteria that need to be
checked by the user. The program shows warning messages in the following cases:
• if the steel grade or the strength class of concrete is out of the acceptable range;
• if the effect of local buckling cannot be neglected (the design check performed by the soft-
ware does not take into account the effect of local buckling);
• if the steel contibution ratio (δ) is out of the acceptable range.
454

The steps of design check of composite columns are very similar or identical with the steps need to be
done in course of the design of conventional reinforced concrete columns (i.e. how to define reinfor-
cement, which button need to be clicked). For this reason, the steps described in 6.5.4 Actual rein-
forcement against biaxial bending (column) and 6.5.9 Column reinforcement – RC2 module sections are
not duplicated, however, the differences are underlined.
Parameters

This window is used to define the design parameters similarly to conventional reinforced concrete
columns. Most of the parameters are decribed in previous section see… 6.5.4 Actual reinforcement
against biaxial bending (column). Additionally, the steel grade of steel sections and reduction factor
(ρ) considering the effect of shear force on bending and compression resistance can be specified. ρ
factor is used if the shear force Va,Ed on the steel section exceeds 50% of the design shear resistance
Vpl,a,Rd of the steel section. This factor is used to reduce the considered yield strength of the steel ma-
terial int he web of the steel section:
(1 − 𝜌) ∙ 𝑓𝑦𝑑
Definition of The reinforcement of the section can be defined in the following window. It is identical compared to
reinforcement definition of reinforcement in case of conventional reinforced concrete column see… 6.5.4 Actual
reinforcement against biaxial bending (column). In case of composite columns, the concrete cover on
the steel section (Δ) can be also specified.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 455

Column check The program performs the verification against bending with or without axial force of the column
based on the cross-section and given design properties and reinforcement parameters. The details of
evaluation of the bending utilization are explained in the next sections. The graphical interpretation of
the results and the result tables are discussed in the aforementioned section see… 6.5.9 Column rein-
forcement – RC2 module

6.5.10.1. Design check according to Eurocode and SIA standards

The utilization of the column subjected to uniaxial y-y and z-z bending moments are evaluated on the
following way:
𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑
𝜂𝑦 = ≤ 1.0
𝛼𝑀,𝑦 𝑀𝑦,𝑁,𝑅𝑑
𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
𝜂𝑧 = ≤ 1.0
𝛼𝑀,𝑧 𝑀𝑧,𝑁,𝑅𝑑
where
• My,N,Rd and Mz,N,Rd are the design value of the bending resistance of composite section taking
into account the compressive normal force,
• αM,y and αM,z are coefficients related to bending of a composite column about the y-y axis
and the z-z axis respectively (S235 – S355 αM=0.9; S420 – S440 αM=0.8).

Interaction curves for combined compression and uniaxial bending related y-y and z-z axes are
calculated separately. The utilization of the column subjected to biaxial bending is calculated on the
following way:
𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
𝜂= + ≤ 1.0
𝑀𝑦,𝑁,𝑅𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝑁,𝑅𝑑

 It may happen that in the info window or in the result table ??? symbol can be seen instead of
utilization of the column. This symbol means that the utilization of the column cannot be
evaluated. In most of the cases, the reason of this error is that the design axial force is higher
than the compression/tension resistance of the section, thus, the bending moment based
utilization of the column cannot be calculated.
Design bending My,Ed and Mz,Ed bending moments contain first order bending moment, the bending moment coming
moment from the imperfection and second order effects. The second order effects are taken into account with
the following multiplier coefficient (k) that is used to multiply the sum of first order bending moments
and bending moments from the imperfection:
𝛽
𝑘= ≥ 1.0
𝑁𝐸𝑑
1−
𝑁𝑐𝑟,𝑒𝑓𝑓
456

where
• β is an equivalent moment factor,
• Ncr,eff is the critical normal force for the relevant axis and corresponding to the effective
flexural stiffness calculated as follows.

𝜋 2 (𝐸𝐼)𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝐼𝐼
𝑁𝑐𝑟,𝑒𝑓𝑓 =
𝐿2𝑐𝑟
1
(𝐸𝐼)𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝐼𝐼 = 0.9 ∙ (𝐸𝑎 𝐼𝑎 + 𝐸𝑠 𝐼𝑠 + 0.5 ∙ 𝐸𝑐𝑚 𝐼)
1 + 𝜑𝑡 𝑐
where
• EaIa is the bending stiffness of steel section,
• EsIs is the bending stiffness of reinforcement,
• Ecm, φ and Ic are the secant modulus of elasticity of concrete, the creep coeffiecient and
second moment of area of the un-cracked concrete section.

6.5.11. Beam reinforcement design – RC2 module

Design codes Eurocode 2: EN 1992-1-1:2004
DIN: DIN 1045-1:2001-07
SIA: SIA 262:2013
 The beams are structural elements, with one dimension (the length) significantly greater than
the dimensions of the cross section, loaded in bending and shear, and axial force is zero or of a
small, negligible value.

The beam reinforcement design module can be applied to beam structural elements modeled by
beam or rib finite elements, that have the same material and constant or variable rectangular or T
cross sections, assuming that the load is applied in the symmetry plane of the cross section.
The computed longitudinal top and bottom reinforcement are of the same steel grade, while the
stirrups could have steel grade different from the longitudinal ones.

Beam reinforce- Beam design (calculating the required amount of reinforcement, placing stirrups and rebars, and
ment parameters checking the reinforced beam) uses parameters entered in the Beam reinforcement parameters dialog
(see… 6.5.3 Beam reinforcement parameters).

Variable The change in shear force due to variable

cross-section cross-section is taken into account.
Where sign of the moment does not change
a simple rule can be applied: if section height
changes the same way as the moment along
the line shear capacity increases otherwise it
decreases.

Shear force is modified by

Δ𝑉 = 2𝐴𝑠 𝑓𝑦𝑑 sin 𝛼 ,
where As is the longitudinal tension reinforcement area, α is the angle between the extreme fiber and
the centerline. Longitudinal reinforcement is assumed to be parallel to the extreme fiber.

 The program performs design calculations described below. Every other analysis, if prescribed
by the design code, have to be done by the user.
The present version of the module does not deal with out of plane bending, the effect of com-
plex internal force states, lateral-torsional buckling or the effect of peak stresses perpendicular
to the axis due to the action of concentrated forces and is not suitable for the reinforcement
design of short cantilevers.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 457

6.5.11.1. Steps of beam reinforcement design

The design is performed in two steps:
1. Design of longitudinal reinforcement for moments about y or z axis (My, or Mz).
Beam
reinforcement 2. Determination of spacing of vertical stirrups considering shear forces about y or z axis (Vy or Vz)
design and the twisting moment (Tx).
The axial force is not taken into account. If the axial force cannot be neglected, the use of the column
design module is recommended.
Bending and shear/twisting is analyzed separately, however the longitudinal tensile reinforcement is
taken into account in the determination of the shear capacity.
The increase in the tension in the longitudinal rebars due to the shear cracks are taken into account by
shifting the moment.
The following diagrams can be displayed on the Design tab: Design moment (MyEd), calculated
top/bottom reinforcement (As), design shear force (Vz), stirrup spacing (sw), design torsion moment
(Tx), torsion reinforcement on sides (ASL).

Longitudinal The longitudinal reinforcement against bending is displayed in blue, compression reinforcement in red,
reinforcement the minimum reinforcement required by the design code in gray.
against bending

Stirrup spacing The allowable maximum stirrup spacing is displayed in black, the calculated spacing in blue, and the
 minimal spacing according to the design code in gray.

Longitudinal The longitudinal reinforcement against torsion is displayed in purple.

reinforcement
against torsion

Setting support AxisVM identifies all types of possible supports (columns, walls, beams, nodal supports) automatically
size but their width can be modified. Click on a support to get to the dialog below
458

Checking Auto sets the detected width values. Uncheck it to set the Actual width and the Theoretical
width reduction manually. It lets you specify the a1 and a2 segments on the side of the support that will
be ignored in the calculations. The internal forces are linearly interpolated within the segments.
Checking Shear force reduction activates a method described in the design code to reduce shear force
above the supports. Uncheck Enabled to ignore the support in the design calculation.

Beam parameters See… 6.5.3 Beam reinforcement parameters (uniaxial bending)

Display results The display of diagrams and labels on each tab can be customized.

Plastic hinges In case of dissipative structures with DCM or DCH ductility class (EN 1998-1-1), in order to avoid shear
failure of beams, the design values of shear forces are determined in accordance with the capacity
design rule (if seismic load case is included in the selected load combination), on the basis of the
equilibrium of the beam under: a) the transverse load acting on it in the seismic design situation and b)
end moments Mi,d (with i=1,2 denoting the end sections of the beam), corresponding to plastic hinge
formation for positive and negative directions of seismic loading.
Plastic hinges can be defined if there is a seismic load case in the model and the behaviour factor (q)
(see… 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module) is greater than 1.5 (except Eurocode [RO] standard). The fol-
lowing parameters can be given by the user: the safety factor, the distance between plastic hinges and
the reinforcement of plastic hinges. If Actual reinforcement checkbox is checked, the reinforcement
parameters related to plastic hinges are calculated automatically based on the defined actual beam
reinforcement (see… 6.5.11.3 Checking actual beam reinforcement). The length below the plastic hinges in
the window is the length of critical region where the program considers stricter requirements regar-
ding detailing rules of shear reinforcement in order achieve the expected ductility.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 459

Considering capacity design rules, the design shear force is calculated on the following way (if seismic
load case is included in the selected combination):

𝑉𝐸𝑑 = 𝑉𝐸𝑑,0 + 𝑉𝐸𝑑,𝐸𝑄

where:
• VEd,0 denotes the shear force from non-seismic actions (from dead loads, etc.),
• VEd,EQ is the design value of seismic shear force.

𝑀1,𝑑 + 𝑀2,𝑑
𝑉𝐸𝑑,𝐸𝑄 = 𝛾𝑅𝑑
𝑙
where:
• l is the distance between plastic hinges (xcr2 – xcr1).
The seismic shear force is considered with both positive and negative sign considering positive and
negative directions of seismic loading.
 If seismic shear force from seismic analysis is greater than the shear force calculated based on
capacity design rules, seismic shear force from seismic analysis is used as V Ed,EQ.
 The program considers detailing rules regarding max. distance of stirrups by the calculation of
stirrup arrangement. Checking the fulfillment of further standard specific detailing rules of
beams with plastic hinges is the responsibility of the user.

6.5.11.2. Checking calculated beam reinforcement

After clicking on the Calculated beam reinforcement tab the following diagrams can be displayed:
Envelope of reinforcement (As), side reinforcement against torsion (ASL), cracking (wk), stirrup spacing
(sw), moment resistance (MyRd), maximum shear force (VzRd), torsion resistance (TzRd), bending moment
utilization (MyEd/MyRd), shear utilization (VzEd/VzRd), torsion utilization (TzEd/TzRd), relative deflection
(ez,rel), absolute deflection (ez,abs).

Ultimate Limit State (ULS)

Bending Bendig moment resistance 𝑀𝑅𝑑 is determined from the required (calculated) reinforcement. This ver-
sion does not take into account the normal force. If normal force is considerable it is recommended to
use the column reinforcement module. Bending moment utilization (𝑀𝐸𝑑 /𝑀𝑅𝑑 ) is also displayed as a
diagram.
460

Shear The program calculates:

- the shear resistance without shear reinforcement (𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 ),
- the maximum shear resistance limited by the concrete compression strut (𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 ),
- shear resistance of shear reinforcement (𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠 ),
The overall shear resistance (𝑉𝑅𝑑 ) of the cross-section is based on the components mentioned above.
Shear utilization (𝑉𝐸𝑑 /𝑉𝑅𝑑 ) is displayed along the structural member.

Shear and torsion The program calculates the shear and torsion resistance:
- the shear resistance without shear / torsion reinforcement (𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 and 𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑐 ),
- the maximum shear resistance / torsion moment limited by the concrete compression strut (𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥
and 𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 ),
- shear resistance of shear reinforcement (𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠 ) and the maximum torsion moment (𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑠 )

The amount of stirrup area taken into account for torsion by the following:
𝑉𝐸𝑑,𝑖
𝐴𝑠𝑤,𝑇 = ⋅ 𝐴𝑠𝑤 ,
𝑉𝐸𝑑,𝑖+𝑉𝐸𝑑
where 𝐴𝑠𝑤 is the area of one stirrup leg,
𝑇
𝑉𝐸𝑑,𝑖 = 𝐸𝑑 ⋅ 𝑧 is the shear force from torsion,
2⋅𝐴𝑘
𝑉𝐸𝑑 is the design shear force.

During the calculation of torsional resistance, only the external stirrup legs are considered.

Service Limit State (SLS)

Cracking analysis After clicking on the Check tab AxisVM determines the top and bottom rebar scheme from the top
and bottom reinforcement amounts calculated from the selected load case or combination and
according to the minimum rebar distance specified in the code.
If the required rebars do not fit in one row multiple rows are introduced. A row consists of two rebars
minimum.
In case of T shapes rebars will be placed within the flange only if rebars do not fit into the web. Flange
rebars can form only one row and their number cannot exceed the half of the total number of rebars.
If envelope is selected cracking is calculated from all SLS combinations included in the envelope.
If no SLS combinations are included in the envelope all ULS combinations are used.
Cross-section properties and cracking is calculated with the rebars distributed according to the above
scheme. If an SLS combination is chosen the cracking is calculated with the rebar scheme determined
from the required reinforcement of the SLS sombination. This cracking value can be higher than crack-
ing calculated with rebars from the critical of envelope results.

Cracking If Parameters / Increase reinforcement according to limiting crack width was checked when defining
beam reinforcement parameters AxisVM will increase the number of rebars on the tension side until
the calculated crack width falls below the limit, provided the total area of reinforcement does not ex-
ceed 4% (𝐴𝑠 ≤ 0.04 ∙ 𝐴𝑐 )
Deflection The deflection is calculated using an approximation remaining on the safe side.
The program calculates the 𝜁 distribution factors at the moment field maximum locations and at the
theoretical support edges and assumes that this factor is constant 1) between the support edges and
the zero moment point and 2) between zero moment points in the field.
The absolute deflection determined by the linear analysis is corrected using the support displacement
values.
The approximated deflection at a certain point of the beam is 𝑒 = 𝑒𝐼 ⋅ (1 − 𝜁) + 𝑒𝐼𝐼 ⋅ 𝜁 , where
1 𝑀𝑐𝑟 2
𝜁 is the distribution factor, 𝜁 = 1 − ⋅ ( ) .
2 𝑀
𝑒𝐼 is the approximated deflection of the non-cracked reinforced beam: 𝑒𝐼 = 𝑒0 ⋅ 𝐼𝐼 /𝐼𝑏
𝑒𝐼𝐼 is the approximated deflection of the cracked reinforced beam: 𝑒𝐼𝐼 = 𝑒0 ⋅ 𝐼𝐼𝐼 /𝐼𝑏
𝑒0 is the corrected deflection taking into account the effective modulus of elasticity of the concrete
and the support displacements 𝑒0 = 𝑒𝑙𝑖𝑛 ⋅ 𝐸𝑐𝑚 /𝐸𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 461

Result display Click on this icon to set diagrams and

diagram labels to display.

Check table (ULS) Two rows of data are displayed for each section, one for the top reinforcement and one for the bot-
tom.
Each row contains ULS internal forces and values of different intermediate result components.
A shorter summary is also available displaying values only at certain important sections.
The rebar scheme displays the number of rebars in the flange extension (outside of the web) in [square
brackets]. Rebars in the web is displayed row by row from the outside in (round brackets).
Check table (SLS) Similar tables are generated for SLS internal forces, crack width and deflection values.
Top cracking is calculated from the (max) moment causing tension within the upper part. Bottom
cracking is calculated from the (min) moment causing tension within the lower part. If no tension ap-
pears on a side (max is negative or min is positive), calculations are performed with zero moment. In
this case the table shows zero and shows the actual moment in brackets.

 Internal forces that appear in these two tables are different only if the reinforcement was calcu-
lated for an envelope or critical combination. If a load case or an individual load combination
was selected the internal forces will be the same.

6.5.11.3. Checking actual beam reinforcement

Changing actual On the Actual beam reinforcement tab it is possible to change the actual longitudinal reinforcement or
beam reinforcement stirrup spacing assigned to finite elements.
After changing the reinforcement or stirrup spacing the results are automatically recalculated if Display
/ Recalculate automatically is checked. If this feature slows down the definition (e.g. the beam has to
be checked for a huge number of critical combinations) deactivate this option. In this case click on the
Calculate button at the bottom to recalculate the results.
462

Select all (Ctrl+A)

Selects all finite elements of the beam.
Apply calculated reinforcement / stirrup spacing
Sets the actual reinforcement or stirrup spacing according to the values calculated for the current load
case or combination over the entire beam.
Click on one of the two exclusive buttons to select the definition mode

Longitudinal reinforcement Stirrup spacing

Longitudinal reinforcement
If this button is down the longitudinal reinforcement can be defined.
Select finite elements or remove the selection by clicking or dragging the mouse. To add non-adjacent
elements to the selection press Shift during the operation. Diameter of corner rebars and other longi-
tudinal rebars are set among the beam reinforcement parameters. Edit boxes allow changing the num-
ber of top and bottom rebars in the selected elements. The – and + buttons decrease/increase these
values.
The diagram of the actual reinforcement is filled with sky blue, the As reinforcement calculated for the
current load case or combination can be seen behind it as a red diagram filled with pink.

Checking the actual The program displays the selected results the same way as on the previous tab but for the actual rein-
reinforcement forcement. The tables are the same but display results for the actual reinforcement.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 463

Result display Click on this icon to set diagrams and dia-

gram labels to display.
Special controls for the Actual beam rein-
forcement tab:

Margins. Set the left and right margin of the

diagrams as a percentage of the total width.
This way you can leave space for the info
window.

Vertical size of result diagrams. Sets the ver-

tical size of diagrams between 100% and
300%. This value can also be changed in the
diagram window by rotating the mouse
wheel.

Stirrup spacing
If this button is down the actual stirrup spacing can be set.
A diagram of applied stirrup spacing (s*) and the specific area of reinforcement (as*) appears at the top.
A grid appears on the right displaying the stirrup spacing as a step function constant in continuous
sections along the beam. The x coordinate of the start point of section, the L length of the section, and
the s* spacing over that section can be edited. If the results have been calculated the utilization of each
section is also displayed (if this value is greater than 1 the background is red otherwise it is green).

Editing After clocking on the Apply calculated reinforcement / stirrup spacing button the table shows the calcu-
stirrup spacing lated values. Use the buttons below to edit the table describing the step function
464

Insert a new row before the current one

Creates a new section by dividing the row before the current one into two equal parts. s* remains the
same but can be edited separately.
Insert a new row after the current one
Creates a new section by dividing the current section into two equal parts. s* remains the same but can
be edited separately.
Delete selected rows
After deleting the selected rows the previous section will be extended.
Editing cells The x start point of a section can be changed to any value between the previous and the next x values.
Changing x will also adjust the length of the current and the previous section accordingly. x values
outside this range will be rejected.
The L length of a section can be changed but the end point of the section must fall to the left of the
end of the next section. The length of the next section will be adjusted accordingly.

6.5.11.4. Beam reinforcement according to Eurocode2

Symbols, material properties, partial factors
fcd design value of the compressive strength of the concrete
fctd design value of the yield strength of the concrete
α = 0.85; a coefficient, that takes the sustained load and other unfavorable effects into account
γc = 1.5; partial factor of the concrete
fyd design value of flow limit of rebar steel
εsu limiting strain of rebar steel
Es (=200 kN/mm2); Young modulus of rebar steel
γs = 1.15; partial factor of the steel

Shear & torsion The design is based on the following values of design shear resistance:
reinforcement
design of stirrups
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 Design shear resistance of the cross-section without shear reinforcement.
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 Maximum shear force that can be transmitted without the failure of the inclined
compression bars.
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠 Design shear resistance of the cross-section with shear reinforcement.
𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑐 Design torsional resistance of the cross-section without shear reinforcement.
𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 Maximum torsional moment that can be transmitted without the failure of the inclined
compression bars.

AxisVM calculates the shear & torsion reinforcement assuming that shear crack inclination angle is
45. The relation between the capacity of inclined compression concrete bars and the design values is
checked.

𝑉𝐸𝑑 𝑇𝐸𝑑
+ ≤ 1,
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥
where

𝛼𝑐𝑤 𝑏𝑤 𝑧𝑣1 𝑓𝑐𝑑

𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 =
cot 𝜃 + tan 𝜃
and
𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 2𝜈𝛼𝑐𝑤 𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑘 sin 𝜃 cos 𝜃

If the cross-section does not fail it is checked if shear & torsion reinforcement is required according to
the formula
𝑉𝐸𝑑 𝑇𝐸𝑑
+ ≤ 1,
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑐
1⁄
where 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = [𝐶𝑅𝑑,𝑐 𝑘(100𝜚𝑙 𝑓𝑐𝑘 ) 3 + 𝑘1 𝜎𝑐𝑝 ] 𝑏𝑤 𝑑 and 𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 2𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑘
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 465

If shear & torsion reinforcement is required,

∑ 𝐴𝑠𝑙 𝑓𝑦𝑑 𝑇𝐸𝑑
= cot 𝜃
𝑢𝑘 2𝐴𝑘
therefore
𝑇𝐸𝑑 𝑢𝑘
𝐴𝑠𝑙 =
2𝐴𝑘 𝑓𝑦𝑑 tan 𝜃
Spacing of shear & torsion stirrups is calculated from these formulas:
𝐴
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠 = 𝑠𝑤 𝑧𝑓𝑦𝑤𝑑 cot 𝜃 and 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠 ≥ 𝑉𝐸𝑑 + 𝑉𝐸𝑑𝑖 ,
𝑠
𝐴𝑠𝑤
𝑠= 𝑧𝑓 cot 𝜃
𝑉𝐸𝑑 + 𝑉𝐸𝑑𝑖 𝑦𝑤𝑑
Using the variable angle truss method, significant saving of shear reinforcement can be achieved if the
compressed concrete beams have extra resistance, i.e:
𝑉𝐸𝑑 𝑇𝐸𝑑
+ ≪1
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥
By changing the shear crack inclination angle the compressed concrete beams gets more load while
shear reinforcement gets less. The actual saving depends on the design rules.
If the user chooses the variable angle truss method, AxisVM determines the direction of the shear
crack between 21,8° (ctgΘ=2,5) and 45° (ctgΘ=1) before the calculation of the reinforcement so that
the exploitation of the inclined concrete compression beams reach its maximum (at most 100%).
The shear crack inclination angle is increased in small steps to meet the requirement
𝑉𝐸𝑑 𝑇𝐸𝑑
+ ≤1
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥

 The cross-section fails if critical shear force is higher than the shear resistance of the
compressed concrete beams, i.e.:
𝑉𝐸𝑑 𝑇𝐸𝑑
+ >1
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥
Design rules applied in calculation:
On the basis of equation 9.2.2 (9.5N) 𝜌𝑤;𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.08 √𝑓𝑐𝑘 /𝑓𝑦𝑘 and of equation 9.2.2 (9.4) 𝜌𝑤 = 𝐴𝑠𝑤 /𝑠𝑏𝑤 ,
so the ratio of shear reinforcement is 𝑠𝑚𝑎𝑥,1 = 𝐴𝑠𝑤 /𝜌𝑤𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝑏𝑤 9.2.2 (9.6N) states that: 𝑠𝑚𝑎𝑥,2 = 0.75 𝑑.

Longitudinal beam During the design of reinforcement of concrete

reinforcement beams, it is assumed that reinforcement bars
yield and the compressed concrete zone reaches
the compression strain limit.
In the compressed zone rectangular stress distri-
bution is considered (EC2 3.1.7. (3)).

The software designs compressed longitudinal rebars if the height of the compressed zone exceeds a
limit height. Beyond this limit, the stress does not reach yield strength in the tensioned reinforcement
and yielding cannot be assumed.
The required top and bottom reinforcement along the beam and the moment diagram shift is
calculated for each load case.
Due to inclined cracks tension reinforcement is designed for a force greater than calculated from M/z.
This is taken into account by different design codes by shifting the moment diagram.
Minimum (Mmin  0) and maximum (Mmax  0) values of the moment diagram and the corresponding
reinforcement on tension and compression side is determined. Tension reinforcement is displayed in
blue, compression reinforcement in red, the minimal tension reinforcement required by the design
code appears in grey.
In case of designed compressed longitudinal bars, the stirrup spacing may not be greater than 20
times of the diameter of the designed compressed main bars.
Cracking is calculated according to 6.5.7.1 Cracking calculation according to Eurocode 2
466

6.5.11.5. Beam reinforcement according to DIN 1045-1

DIN 1045-1 Symbols, material properties, partial factors

fcd design value of the compressive strength of the concrete

fctm mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete
α = 0.85; a coefficient, that takes the sustained load and other unfavorable effects into account
γc = 1.5; partial factor of the concrete
fyd design value of flow limit of rebar steel
εsu limiting strain of rebar steel
Es (=200 kN/mm2); Young modulus of rebar steel
γs = 1.15; partial factor of the steel

Shear & torsion The design is based on the following three values of design shear resistance:
reinforcement
design of stirrups
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐𝑡 Design shear resistance of the cross-section without shear reinforcement.
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 Maximum shear force that can be transmitted without the failure of the inclined
compression bars.
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠𝑦 Design shear resistance of the cross-section with shear reinforcement.

No shear reinforcement is required if 𝑉𝐸𝑑 ≤ 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐𝑡 , DIN 1045-1 10.3.1 (2)

The cross-section does not fail if 𝑉𝐸𝑑 ≤ 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 .
If 𝑉𝐸𝑑 > 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐𝑡 shear reinforcement should be applied DIN 1045-1 10.3.1 (3)
Stirrup spacing is determined to meet the requirement 𝑉𝐸𝑑 ≤ 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠𝑦 .

For cross sections with shear reinforcement we can choose between the regular method (45° cracking)
and Variable Angle Truss (VAT) method.
If the assumed compression trusses have reserve (𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 > 𝑉𝐸𝑑 ) according to the regular method, the
VAT method will lead to considerable savings in shear reinforcement.
By changing the shear crack inclination angle the compressed concrete beams gets more load while
shear reinforcement gets less.
The program is calculating the value
𝜎𝑐𝑑
1.2 − 1.4
𝐴
𝑓𝑐𝑑 𝑠𝑤
cot Θ =
𝑉
1 − 𝑅𝑑,𝑐
𝑉𝐸𝑑
In case of regular concrete: 0.58 ≤ cot Θ ≤ 3.0
In case of light concrete: 0.58 ≤ cot Θ ≤ 2.0 DIN 1045-1 10.3.4 (3)
The regular method assumes the angle of shear cracks to be 45, so cot Θ = 1
𝐴
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠𝑦 = 𝑠𝑤 𝑓𝑦𝑑 𝑧 cot Θ DIN 1045-1 10.3.4 (7)
𝑠𝑤
is the shear resistance due to the shear reinforcement.

If torsion is considerable, AxisVM also checks the following condition:

2 2
𝑇𝐸𝑑 𝑉𝐸𝑑
[ ] +[ ] ≤1 DIN 1045-1 10.4.2 (5)
𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥

No calculated shear & torsion reinforcement has to be applied if

𝟒.𝟓𝑻𝑬𝒅
𝑻𝑬𝒅 ≤ 𝑽𝑬𝒅 𝒃𝒘 /𝟒. 𝟓 and 𝑽𝑬𝒅 [𝟏 + ] ≤ 𝑽𝑹𝒅,𝒄𝒕 DIN 1045-1 10.4.1 (6)
𝑽𝑬𝒅 𝒃𝒘

Stirrup reinforce- Resistant twisting moment on the basis of the failure of the compressed concrete bar:
ment from twisting
2𝐴𝑠𝑤
moment 𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑠𝑦 = 𝑓 𝐴 cot Θ
𝑠𝑤 𝑦𝑑 𝑘
The stirrup distance:
𝟐𝑨𝒔𝒘
𝒔𝒘 = 𝒇 𝑨 𝐜𝐨𝐭 𝚯
𝑻𝑬𝒅 𝒚𝒅 𝒌
𝟐𝑨𝒔𝒍
Longitudinal reinforcement is calculated from twisting moment 𝑻𝑹𝒅,𝒔𝒚 = 𝒇𝒚𝒅 𝑨𝒌 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝚯 ,
𝒖𝒌
so 𝑨𝒔𝒍 = 𝑻𝑬𝒅 𝒖𝒌 /𝟐𝒇𝒚𝒅 𝑨𝒌 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝚯, which should be placed evenly along the cross-section contour.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 467

The actual stirrup distance is taken into account 1

𝑠𝑤 =
form the summary of the torsion stirrup distance 1
+
1
and the shear stirrup distance: 𝑠𝑤,𝑉 𝑠𝑤,𝑇

Longitudinal beam During the design of reinforcement of concrete

reinforcement beams, it is assumed that reinforcement bars
based on DIN1045-1 yield and the compressed concrete zone reaches
the compression strain limit.
In the compressed zone rectangular stress distri-
bution is considered (DIN 1045-1 10.2.).

The software designs compressed longitudinal rebars if the height of the compressed zone exceeds a
limit height. Beyond this limit, the stress does not reach yield strength in the tensioned reinforcement
and yielding cannot be assumed.
If from the calculation a greater height than x0 is obtained, compressive steel cross section is applied,
but the sum of the compressive and tensile steel cross section cannot exceed 8% of the concrete cross
section.
The software calculates for each load case and cross section the lower and upper reinforcement, and
the value of the moment shifting.
Due to oblique cracks the tension reinforcement is designed for a tension force greater than
calculated from M / z.
This is taken into account by design codes by shifting the moment diagram (DIN 1045-1 13.2.2)
Minimum (Mmin  0) and maximum (Mmax  0) values of the moment diagram, and the corresponding
tension and compression reinforcements are determined. On the reinforcement diagram the tension
reinforcement is displayed in blue, the compressive in red, and the minimal tension reinforcement
according to the design code in grey.
In case of designed compressed longitudinal bars, the stirrup spacing may not be greater than 12
times of the diameter of the designed compressed main bars.

𝐴𝑠𝑤
Construction rules Ratio of stirrup reinforcement: 𝜌𝑤 = 𝑏𝑤
𝑠
considered in the
From the above expression: 𝑠𝑚𝑎𝑥,1 = 𝐴𝑠𝑤 /𝜌𝑤 𝑏𝑤 , where 𝜌𝑤 = 0.16𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑚 /𝑓𝑦𝑘
program
Minimal value of w is may calculated from Table 29. in DIN 1045-1 13.1.3
The smax stirrup distance is taking into account Table 31. in DIN 1045-1 13.2.1
The maximum stirrup distance from twisting moments is uk / 8.
 The software sends warning message and does not draw any reinforcement diagram in the
following cases:
Message The cross section is not acceptable for shear/torsion
Event Any of the following conditions is not satisfied:
2 2
𝑇𝐸𝑑 𝑉𝐸𝑑
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 > 𝑉𝐸𝑑 or [ ] +[ ] ≤1
𝑇𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥
Solution Increase the cross section of the concrete, or/and the concrete grade.
Message The cross section is not acceptable for bending (As + As2 > 0.08 * Ac)
Event The cross sectional area of the longitudinal reinforcement is greater than 8% of the concrete cross
section
Solution Increase the cross section of the concrete, or/and the concrete grade, or/and the steel grade.

6.5.11.6. Beam reinforcement according to SIA 262:2003

SIA 262:2003 Symbols, material properties, partial factors
fcd design value of the compressive strength of the concrete
fct design value of the yield strength of the concrete
γc = 1.5; partial factor of the concrete
fyd design value of flow limit of rebar steel
εsu limiting strain of rebar steel
Es (= 200 kN/mm2); Young modulus of rebar steel
γs = 1.15; partial factor of the steel
kc = 0.6; reduction factor for compressive strength of the concrete in a cracked zone
468

Shear & torsion The shear reinforcement design is based on three values of the shear resistance:
reinforcement
design of stirrups
𝑉𝑅𝑑 The shear resistance of the cross section without shear reinforcement.
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 The maximum shear force that can be transmitted without the failure of the assumed
compression bars.
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠 The shear resistance of the cross section with the shear reinforcement.
No shear reinforcement is required if 𝑉𝑑 ≤ 𝑉𝑅𝑑
1
𝑉𝑅𝑑 = 𝑘𝑑 𝜏𝑐𝑑 𝑑𝑏𝑤 , where 𝑘𝑑 = , d in m, 𝑘𝑣 = 2.5
1+𝑘𝑣 𝑑

The conrete cross-section does not fail if 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 ≥ 𝑉𝑑

𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑏𝑤 𝑧𝑘𝑐 𝑓𝑐𝑑 sin 𝛼 cos 𝛼

If 𝑉𝑑 ≥ 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 , shear reinforcement should be designed.

𝐴𝑠𝑤
The stirrup distance is determined from the expression 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠 = 𝑧𝑓𝑠𝑑 cot 𝛼
𝑠
𝐴𝑠𝑤
Stirrup spacing is 𝑠 = 𝑧𝑓𝑠𝑑 𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝛼
𝑉𝑑
Longitudinal force from shear: 𝐹𝑡𝑑 = 𝑉𝑅𝑑 cot 𝛼
Additional longitudinal reinforcement: Δ𝐴𝑠𝑙 = 𝑉𝑅𝑑 cot 𝛼⁄𝑓𝑠𝑑
which should be placed ½ to the tension zone, ½ to the compression zone.
𝑇
Shear force from torsion: 𝑉𝑑,𝑖 = 𝑑 𝑧𝑖
2𝐴𝑘
Shear force in a vertical fiber: 𝑉𝑑,ℎ = 𝑇𝑑 ⁄2𝑧𝑏
Shear force in the horizontal fiber: 𝑉𝑑,𝑏 = 𝑇𝑑 ⁄2𝑧ℎ
𝑉𝑑 𝑉𝑑𝑖
The program checks the following expression + ≤ 1,
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐𝑖
where 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐𝑖 = 𝑡𝑘 𝑧ℎ 𝑘𝑐 𝑓𝑐𝑑 sin 𝛼 cos 𝛼
2𝑧 𝑧
Stirrup distance from torsion: 𝑠 = 𝐴𝑠𝑤 ℎ 𝑏 𝑓𝑠𝑑 cot 𝛼
𝑇𝑑
Longitudinal reinforcement from torsion:
𝑇𝑑
∑𝑉𝑑,𝑖 cot 𝛼 𝑧ℎ 𝑧𝑏 (𝑧ℎ + 𝑧𝑏 ) cot 𝛼
𝐴𝑠𝑙𝑇 = =
𝑓𝑠𝑑 𝑓𝑠𝑑
which should be placed evenly along the cross-section contour.
The actual stirrup distance is taken into account from the summary of the torsion stirrup distance and
the shear stirrup distance:
1
𝑠𝑤 =
1 1
+
𝑠𝑤,𝑉 𝑠𝑤,𝑇

Longitudinal Beam During the design of reinforcement of concrete

Reinforcement beams, it is assumed that reinforcement bars
based on SIA yield and the compressed concrete zone reaches
262:2003 the compression strain limit.
In the compressed zone rectangular stress distri-
bution is considered (SIA262 4.2.1.4).

The software designs compressed longitudinal rebars if the height of the compressed zone exceeds a
limit height. Beyond this limit, the stress does not reach yield strength in the tensioned reinforcement
and yielding cannot be assumed.
Due to oblique cracks the tension reinforcement is designed for a tension force greater than
calculated from M / z.
This is taken into account by shifting the moment diagram.
Minimum (Mmin  0) and maximum (Mmax  0) values of the moment diagram, and the corresponding
tension and compression reinforcements are determined. On the reinforcement diagram the tension
reinforcement is displayed in blue, the compressive in red, and the minimal tension reinforcement
according to the design code in grey.
In case of designed compressed longitudinal bars, the stirrup spacing may not be greater than 15
times of the diameter of the designed compressed main bars.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 469

Construction rules Maximum of the stirrup distance:

considered in the 𝐴𝑠𝑤 𝑓𝑦𝑘
program 𝑠𝑚𝑎𝑥 = ≤ 400 mm
0.2 ⋅ 𝑏𝑤 𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑚 sin 𝛼

 AxisVM sends a warning message and does not draw any reinforcement diagram in the
following cases:
Message The cross section is not acceptable for shear/torsion
Event The utilization of concrete cross-section is greater than 1.
Solution Increase the cross section of the concrete, or/and the concrete grade.

6.5.12. Punching analysis – RC3 module

Standards Punching analysis can be performed according to the following design codes:
Eurocode: EN 1992-1-1:2010
Swiss standard: SIA 262:2013

The following design checks are included:

- column and reinforced concrete slab (including base slabs),
- wall end/corner and reinforced concrete slab.

The check of resistance of compression struts and the calculation of required shear reinforcement are
incorporated.

6.5.12.1. Punching analysis according to Eurocode

6.5.12.1.1. Punching analysis of columns according to Eurocode

Punching shear control perimeters are determined based on the column cross-section and the effec-
tive plate thickness. Plate edges and holes are taken into account if they are closer to the column than
six times the effective plate thickness. If column cross-section is concave, a convex section is used
instead.

Punching analysis is enabled if rein-

forcement parameters and actual rein-
forcement are defined and assigned to
the reinforced concrete slab.
After clicking the tool button, please
select a column or a support with stiff-
nesses calculated from column pa-
rameters for analysis (if a rib element is
connected to the column within the
plane of the plate, analysis cannot be
performed).

Materials
Concrete, Concrete and steel grade used in calculation. First, these parameters are automatically selected based
rebar steel grade on model settings, but they can be changed in the window.
470

Plate Plate thickness is automatically selected but it can be changed in this window if By reinforcement pa-
thickness (h) rameter is turned off. In the info window the minimum mushroom head thickness is displayed as H1.
The minimum mushroom head without punching shear reinforcement is displayed as H2.
Reinforcement ratio Reinforcement ratios (𝜌𝑥 , 𝜌𝑦 ) can be taken from the actual or calculated reinforcement or set Custom
ratio and specify manually.
Parameters
Shear reinforce- Angle between the plate and the punching shear rebars (45°-90°).
ment angle
Radial rebar Radial rebar spacing is the difference between the radii of two neighbouring perimeters of shear rein-
spacing forcement.
The OK button is not available until basic design criterion is met: 𝑠𝑟 ≤ 0.75 ⋅ 𝑑. (section 9.4.3. (1))
Distance of the first Distance of the first punching perimeter of shear reinforcement from the convex edge of the column.
perimeter of shear
reinforcement
 factor 𝑀𝐸𝑑 𝑢1
Calculated (6.4.3. (3) (6.39)) 1+𝑘 ⋅
𝑉𝐸𝑑 𝑊1
Internal column 1,15
Approximate value by
column position* (6.4.3. (6)) Edge column 1,4
Corner column 1,5
Custom user-specified value

*For structures where the lateral stability does not depend on frame action between the slabs and the
columns, and where the adjacent spans do not differ in length by more than 25%.
Take soil reaction If this option is checked, soil reaction within the rebar circle is considered when calculating the punch-
into account ing force. This effect increases with the radius and can reduce the size of the necessary reinforcement
area. Its values per rebar circles are listed in the Punching analysis results dialog.
You can see coefficient of seimic forces at 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module.
Open... Loads a saved parameter set.

After entering all parameters control perimeters will appear and the required number of punching
rebars is displayed in the info window.

 AxisVM calculates the effective parts of the control perimeter based on plate edges and holes. Con-
tinuous lines show that reinforcement is needed. AxisVM displays the required amount of reinforce-
ment for each line. The info window shows the amount of critical punching reinforcement. When cal-
culating the length of the critical perimeter it is assumed that rebar spacing on the perimeter is not
above 2d but the fulfillment of this requirement is not checked. If this requirement is not met, the user
should choose a smaller diameter or place additional rebars.
Calculate rein- If this option is checked the reinforcement for control perimeters beyond 2d will be calculated from
forcement for each the actual length of the perimeter. For control perimeters closer than 2d the reinforcement calculated
control perimeter for the critical perimeter is applied.
If this option is not checked the reinforcement calculated for the critical perimeter will be used for all
perimeters.
Results for the critical perimeter are calculated first (these are displayed in the Punching analysis results
dialog). Then the required amount of reinforcement is determined for reinforcement circles defined in
the parameters dialog. The critical perimeter is red, reinforcement circles are black. Dashed line shows
the perimeter where the distance of points from the column is six times the effective plate thickness.
A thin blue line shows the perimeter where no punching reinforcement is needed.
This is also the outline of the mushroom head which can be designed with thickness hmin,2 and without
punching reinforcement.

A thick blue line shows the perimeter where the critical punching force exceeds the compressing
strength of the concrete so the plate with the original thickness cannot be properly reinforced. This is
the outline of the mushroom head which can be designed with thickness hmin,1 and with punching
reinforcement. Punching capacity can be increased by setting the plate thicker, using a better concrete
grade or columns with bigger cross-section area.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 471

Saves the drawing to the Drawing Library.

Loads a saved punching parameter set.

Saves the current punching parameters under a name. You can load back the saved parameters with
the button Loading... on Punching parameters dialog.

Punching parameters dialog.

Inflates the plate boundary so that the entire column cross section is within the boundary.

Fits the diagram to the window.

Column local coordinates are used.

472

Global coordinates are used.

Turns on and off the display of rebar circles.

To follow design calculations in details, click on the

Design calculations button. See… also 6.6 Steel design and
6.6.1.3 Diagrams and design calculations
Clicking on this icon adds the design calculation to the current report.

Clicking on the Settings icon beside the Design calculations button allows setting the units for force and
length used in the design calculations.
Calculation process The required punching reinforcement is calculated based on the following principles:
The column-slab connection does not fail if the shear stress is less than or equal to the design value of
the maximum punching shear resistance along the control section and the design value of the punching
shear resistance of the plate with punching shear reinforcement:
𝑣𝐸𝑑 ≤ 𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 and 𝑣𝐸𝑑 ≤ 𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑐𝑠
𝑣𝐸𝑑 design value of the shear stress
𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 the design value of the maximum punching shear resistance along the control section
𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑐𝑠 the design value of the punching shear resistance of the plate with punching shear reinforce-
ment
𝑉𝐸𝑑
𝑣𝐸𝑑 = 𝛽
𝑢𝑖 ⋅ 𝑑
where 𝑢𝑖 is the length of the control perimeter, d is the mean effective thickness of the plate.
𝛽 is a factor expressing additional stress due to eccentric forces:
𝑀𝐸𝑑 𝑢𝑖
𝛽 =1+𝑘 ⋅
𝑉𝐸𝑑 𝑊1
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 473

Eurocode assumes that the critical section is at a distance of 2d from the edge of the cross-section. The
length of the critical perimeter and the static moment is calculated considering plate edges and holes of
the actual geometry.
Design value of the punching resistance of the connection without punching shear reinforcement is:
𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝐶𝑅𝑑,𝑐 𝑘(100𝜌1 𝑓𝑐𝑘 )1/3 + 𝑘1 𝜎𝑐𝑝 ≥ 𝑣𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝑘1 𝜎𝑐𝑝
𝜌1 = √𝜌𝑥 𝜌𝑦 (𝜌1 = √𝜌𝜉 𝜌𝜂 in case of skew reinforcement)

If 𝑣𝐸𝑑 > 𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑐 then the required punching reinforcement is determined along the critical perimeter
𝑑 𝐴𝑠𝑤 𝑓𝑦𝑤𝑑,𝑒𝑓
𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑐𝑠 = 0.75 ⋅ 𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑐 + 1.5 ⋅ ⋅ sin 𝛼 ; 𝑣𝐸𝑑 ≤ 𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑐𝑠
𝑠𝑟 𝑢1 𝑑
The reinforcemert for each perimeter and the perimeter where no punching reinforcement is needed is
calculated based on the formula:
𝑉𝐸𝑑
𝑣𝐸𝑑 = 𝛽 ≤ 𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑐
𝑢𝑖 𝑑

Info window Under the design code, element identifier and materials the following pa-
rameters are displayed.
h plate thickness
d effective plate thickness
𝜌𝑥 , 𝜌𝑦 ratios of longitudinal reinforcement in x and y directions
α angle between the plate and the punching reinforcement
a1 distance of the first perimeter of shear reinforcement from the convex edge
of the column
sr distance between perimeters of shear reinforcement
fse factor scales only the internal forces from seismic load
vEd shear stress along the u1 perimeter
MEdy, MEdz design value of bending moments
u0 control perimeter at the column perimeter
u1 critical control perimeter at 2d
ϐ* calculated excentricity factor
vEd0 shear stress along the u0 perimeter
vEd shear stress along the u1 perimeter
vRd,max the design value of the maximum punching shear resistance
vRd,c the design value of the punching shear resistance of the slab without
punching shear reinforcement
vEd0/vRd,max utilization on the u0 perimeter

vEd/vRd,c utilization (tension in concrete)

fywd,ef tension in the punching reinforcement
Asw punching reinforcement area on the critical control perimeter
vRd,cs the design value of the punching shear resistance of the slab with punching shear reinforcement
Nsr number of reinforcement circles
hmin,1 minimum plate thickness required with punching reinforcement
hmin,2 minimum plate thickness required without punching reinforcement
474

6.5.12.1.2. Punching analysis of wall ends and corners according to Eurocode

Punching analysis of wall ends and wall corners can be performed using RC3 module including the
calculation of required reinforcement if necessary. The software generates the punching control peri-
meters according to the relative position of the walls. Plate edges and holes are taken into account if
they are closer than six times the effective plate thickness.
After clicking on tool button shown above, a node need to be selected that identifies the wall end or
the wall corner. The program identifies automatically the walls connecting to the node. Walls can be
represented by vertical domains or line supports with section (with stiffnesses calculated from wall
parameters) (see... 4.9.12 Line support). The software is able to identify both elements.

The punching parameters can be defined in the following window:

Punching
parameters

Most of the parameters can be set in the dialog has been already presented in the previous sections
(see... 6.5.12.1.1 Punching analysis of columns according to Eurocode).
The punching force is generally calculate according to one of the following ways in case of wall ends
and corners:
• by integration of rection force along the wall(s);
• by integration of shear forces along a segment around the wall end/corner.

acp

lcp lcp
acp

The second method is implemented in the software. acp and lcp parameters (used to generate section
line) can be specified by the user. The punching force is calculated from the shear forces along the
line on the following way presented below.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 475

The distribution of shear forces along the integration line is shown by clicking on this tool button:

 It has to be noted that the line given by acp and lcp parameters is a tool used to calculate the
punching force and it is not considered as punching perimeter. The punching perimeter is selec-
ted according to the design code (see… 6.5.12.1.1 Punching analysis of columns according to Eurocode
and 6.5.12.2.1 Punching analysis of columns according to SIA 262).

Calculation of VEd Calculated from maximum shear force:

punching force
𝑉𝐸𝑑 = 𝑣𝐸𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 ∙ 𝐿
where
• vEd,max is the maximum value of shear force along the integration line;
• L is the length of the integration line.

Calculated from average shear force:

𝑉𝐸𝑑 = 𝛽 ∙ 𝑣𝐸𝑑,𝑎𝑣𝑔 ∙ 𝐿
where
• β is coefficient that takes into account the effect of bending moment;
• vEd,avg is the average value of shear force along the integration line;

vEd is calculated on the following way:

2 + 𝑣2
𝑣𝐸𝑑 = √𝑣𝑥𝑧 𝑦𝑧

Graphical interface The graphical interface and buttons are described and presented in detail in the previous section
and results (see... 6.5.12.1.1 Punching analysis of columns according to Eurocode). Design results are listed in an info
window and shown graphically in Plate punching analysis window. If punching reinforcement is re-
quired, calculated reinforcement are written on punching perimeters. After clicking on the Design
calculations button, a report of the calculation details is displayed. Design calculations and drawings
can be saved into the documentation.

6.5.12.2. Punching analysis according to SIA 262

6.5.12.2.1. Punching analysis of columns according to SIA 262

Punching analysis is enabled if reinforcement parameters and actual reinforcement are defined and
assigned to the reinforced concrete slab.
After clicking the tool button, please select a column or a support with stiffnesses calculated from col-
umn parameters for analysis.
Some details of design process are discussed in 6.5.12.1.1 Punching analysis of columns according to Euro-
code section and not repeated here.

 If a rib element is connected to the column within the plane of the plate, analysis cannot be per-
formed!
476

Parameters related to punching design check can be specified in the following window similarly to
Eurocode conforming design.

Materials
Concrete, Concrete and steel grade used in calculation. First, these parameters are automatically selected based
rebar steel grade on model settings, but they can be changed in the window.
Plate Plate thickness is automatically selected but it can be changed in this window if By reinforcement param-
thickness (h) eter is turned off.
Reinforcement ratio Reinforcement ratios (𝜌𝑥 , 𝜌𝑦 ) can be taken from the actual or calculated reinforcement or set Custom
ratio and specify manually.

Parameters
Approximation step Approximation level can be selected according to SIA 262:2013 (section 4.3.6.4.2). Approximation steps
1 and 2 can be selected.
𝛽 Angle between the plate and the punching shear rebars (45°-90°).
sw Diameter of punching shear rebars.
𝑐𝑣 Concrete cover of punching shear reinforcement on compression side.
Radial rebar Radial rebar spacing is the difference between the radii of two neighbouring perimeters of shear rein-
spacing forcement.
𝑠1
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 477

Distance of the first Distance of the first punching perimeter of shear reinforcement from the convex edge of the column.
perimeter of shear
reinforcement
𝑠0
𝐷𝑚𝑎𝑥 maximum grain size of aggregate
𝑙𝑥 , 𝑙𝑦 span in x-, y-directions (sections 4.3.6.4.2 and 4.3.6.4.4)
bsr Limit value for width of column strips for the determination of bending resistances.
Design principles The software determines the punching perimeter at 0,5𝑑𝑣 distance (section 4.3.6.2.2) from the convex
edge of the column where punching resistance need to be checked. The resistance of compressive
struts is calculated according to section 4.3.6.5.7:
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 2 ∙ 𝑘𝑟 ⋅ 𝜏𝑐𝑑 ⋅ 𝑑𝑣 ⋅ 𝑢

If 𝑉𝐸𝑑 > 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 , the resistance of compressive struts is not adequate. In this case, the plate thickness
or concrete strength need to be changed.
The punching shear resistance without shear reinforcement is calculated on the following way (section
4.3.6.3.1):
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑘𝑟 ⋅ 𝜏𝑐𝑑 ⋅ 𝑑𝑣 ⋅ 𝑢

If 𝑉𝐸𝑑 ≤ 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 , punching shear reinforcement is not necessary, otherwise the required shear reinforce-
ment is calculated as follows (sections 4.3.6.5.2 (65) and 4.3.6.5.3 (66)):
𝑉𝐸𝑑
𝛴𝐴𝑠𝑤 = ,
𝑘𝑒 ⋅ 𝜎𝑠𝑑 ⋅ 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝛽

where
𝐸𝑠 ⋅ 𝜓 𝑓𝑏𝑑 𝑑
𝜎𝑠𝑑 = ⋅ (1 + ⋅ )
6 𝑓𝑠𝑑 𝜙𝑠𝑤
𝑟𝑠 𝑓𝑠𝑑 𝑚𝑠𝑑 3⁄2 1,4⋅𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑚
𝜓 = 1,5 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( ) and 𝑓𝑏𝑑 =
𝑑 𝐸𝑠 𝑚𝑅𝑑 𝛾𝑐

This required reinforcement need to be applied between 0,35 ⋅ 𝑑𝑣 and 𝑑𝑣 according to the code. Based
on the given design parameters, the number perimeters of shear reinforcement is calculated can be
placed between 0,35 ⋅ 𝑑𝑣 and 𝑑𝑣 . Required reinforcement for a perimeter is calculated by dividing 𝛴𝐴𝑠𝑤
with the number of perimeters. This 𝐴𝑠𝑤 required reinforcement is placed (outside 𝑑𝑣 distance) on each
perimeter until it is needed.
478

Info window Under the design code, element identifier and materials the follow-
ing parameters are displayed.
ℎ plate thickness
𝑑 effective plate thickness

𝜌𝑥 , 𝜌𝑦 ratios of longitudinal reinforcement in x and y directions

𝛽 angle between the plate and the punching reinforcement
𝑠0 distance of the first perimeter of shear reinforcement from the
convex edge of the column
𝑠1 distance between perimeters of shear reinforcement

sw diameter of shear reinforcement

𝑑𝑣 effective plate thickness
𝑙𝑥 , 𝑙𝑦 span in x-, y-directions

fse factor scales only the internal forces from seismic load
𝑉𝑑 design value of punching force
𝑀𝑑𝑦 ,𝑀𝑑𝑧 design value of bending moments
𝑘𝑒 reduction factor for punching shear perimeter
𝑢 length of punching shear perimeter

𝑢’ 𝑢′ = 𝑘𝑒 𝑢 ∙ 𝑢
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 the design value of the maximum punching shear resistance
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 the design value of the punching shear resistance of the slab with-
out punching shear reinforcement
𝑉𝐸𝑑 ⁄𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 utilization for 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝑉𝐸𝑑 ⁄𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 utilization for 𝑉𝑅𝑑,c
𝑉𝑑,𝑠 punching force for calculation of shear reinforcement
𝜎𝑠𝑑 design value of tensile stress in shear reinforcement
𝛴𝐴𝑠𝑤 required shear reinforcement
𝐴𝑠𝑤 required shear reinforcement for one perimeter
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑠 design value of punching shear force for calculation of reinforce-
ment
𝑁𝑠𝑟 number of perimeters of shear reinforcement
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 479

6.5.12.2.2. Punching analysis of wall ends and wall corners according to SIA 262

The software determines the punching shear force as it is described in 6.5.12.1.2 Punching analysis of wall
ends and corners according to Eurocode. In case of SIA conforming design, β factor is not used. Reduction
factor for perimeter length (ke) can be specified by the user.

After clicking on tool button shown above, a node need to be selected that identifies the wall end or the
wall corner. The program identifies automatically the walls connecting to the node. Walls can be repre-
sented by vertical domains or line supports with section (with stiffnesses calculated from wall parame-
ters) (see... 4.9.12 Line support). The software is able to identify both elements.
Some details of design process are discussed in 6.5.12.1.2 Punching analysis of wall ends and corners accord-
ing to Eurocode section and not repeated here.

Details of design principles and equations are discussed in the previous section. see… Punching analysis
of columns according to SIA 262. In case of wall ends and corners, the approximation level cannot be se-
lected (section 4.3.6.4.2. of SIA 262:2013 chapter), the software uses approximation level 1, thus it is
assumed that msd/mRd  1.0 and the rs distance can be specified by the user.
480

6.5.13. Footing design – RC4 module

6.5.13.1. Pad footing design

AxisVM can determine the necessary size and reinforcement of rectangular or circular pad foundations
(with or without pedestal), and can check the footing against sliding and punching according to Euro-
code7 and MSz. It determines the settlement of the foundation as well.
Footing size The size of the foundation can be entered or let AxisVM calculate it. If AxisVM calculates the size a
maximum value must be specified.
Using the soil profile and the internal forces this module determines the necessary size of the founda-
tion in an iterative process. Then it calculates the effective area of the foundation for load cases and
combinations, the design forces, moments and resistances, determines the settlement (for load cases
and Service Limit State [SLS] combinations), efficiencies and the shear reinforcement if necessary. The
module also checks the stability of the footing.
Step sides must not be bigger than the respective side of the foundation.
 The coordinate system used in footing calculations is the coordinate system of the support.
However, eccentricites are calculated relative to the center of the footing.
Footing design Click the Footing design icon and select one or more nodal supports with a vertical or slanted column.
parameters (If supports have been already selected, the dialog is displayed at the first click).
Footing desgn parameters have to be specified in a dialog.

Footing At the Footing tab select the footing type (simple plate / stepped / sloped, rectangular or circular) and
set the geometry parameters and the friction coefficient between the footing and the blind concrete
and the partial factor for the friction coefficient.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 481

Symmetry constraints and geometric parameters for a rectangular footing:

Square footing
b is the side length,
the column is concentric,
value or upper limit of b must be entered

Rectangular footing
bx and by are the sides,
the column is concentric,
value or upper limit of bx and by must be entered

Single eccentric rectangular footing

the column is eccentric in x direction, concentric in y direction
x1 and x2 are the distance of the column axis from the edges of the footing
value or upper limit of x1, x2 and by must be entered

Single eccentric rectangular footing

the column is eccentric in y direction, concentric in x direction
y1 and y2 are the distance of the column axis from the edges of the footing
value or upper limit of y1, y2 and bx must be entered

Double eccentric rectangular footing

the column is eccentric in both directions
x1 and x2 are the distance of the column axis from the edges of the footing in x direc-
tion
y1 and y2 are the distance of the column axis from the edges of the footing in y direc-
tion
value or upper limit of x1, x2, y1, y2 must be entered
Parameters for a circular footing:
Circular footing
the column is concentric
dp is the diameter of the footing
dp or its upper limit (dp,max) must be entered
If the lock button beside the edit field is down (closed), the entered value is fixed (the value
is checked). If the lock icon is up (open) the entered value is the upper limit (the value will be
calculated by the program). If Check is turned on, all values will be closed and cannot be
opened until Check is turned off.
Stepped and There are two options to define the step size.
sloped footings
dx1 and dx2 are the distance of the edges of the step or the upper
base of the frustum from the column axis in x direction. dy1 and
dy2 are the same in y direction. These are always given values.
For circular footings: ds is the diameter of the concentric cylindrical step or the upper base of the
truncated cone. Value of the ds / 2 radius must be entered.
dx*1 and dx*2 are the distance of the edges of the step or the upper
base of the frustum from the perimeter of the footing in x di-
rection. dy1 and dy2 are the same in y direction.
For circular footings: ds is the diameter of the concentric cylindrical step or the upper base of the
truncated cone. Value of ds / 2’ = (dp – ds) / 2 must be entered.
In the first case the step size is always fixed. In the second case step size will grow or shrink with the
footing size if the size is not locked.
Other parameters:
Concrete material of the footing
t foundation depth (distance between the bottom of the base plate and the 0 level)
h2 step height (height of the step or the frustum)
h1 base plate thickness
hb blind concrete thickness
φcvk friction coefficient between the footing and the blind concrete
482

You can see coefficient of seimic forces at 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module.
Under the edit fields the footing and the column is displayed in top view. Given
sizes are drawn as continuous lines, upper limits as dashed lines. The forces appear
as red crosses placed according to their eccentricities. This diagram is for orienta-
tion purposes only because the actual eccentricities are calculated taking into ac-
count the self weight of the footing and the backfill reducing the eccentricity.

If the button Show all support forces is down, the view is scaled to show all force crosses. If the
button is up only crosses within the bounding rectangle of the footing are displayed. These
forces act at the top of the footing and does not include the weigth of the backfill, footing and
blind concrete.
Reinforcement On the Reinforcement tab reinforcement calculations can be activated.
Rebar steel grade, cT and cB top and bottom concrete covers can be entered (i.e. the least distance
between the surface of embedded reinforcement and the outer surface of the concrete). The top two
rows under Diameter and Direction represent the top rebars (the 1st row is the outer one, the 2nd row
is the inner one), the bottom two rows represent the bottom rebars (the 3rd row is the inner one, the
4th row is the outer one). The actual scheme in local x-z view is displayed accordingly.
Punching reinforcement calculations can be activated only for simple plate footings.
For the parameters see… 6.5.12 Punching analysis – RC3 module

Soil At the Soil tab you can specify the soil profile and the properties of the backfill. Soil profiles can be
saved under a name and can be reloaded.
Properties of the selected layer is displayed in the Soil group box. Properties of the backfill is displayed
in the Backfill group box.
Soil layer properties can be changed. These changes can be applied to the soil layer clicking the Modi-
fy layer button. Layer name and description can be modified. Layer color can be changed clicking the
small color rectangle beside the name. Soil library icon is placed beside the color rectangle. Clicking
this icon a soil library is displayed with predefined layer properties.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 483

Saves the soil profile under a name. This way you can reload the same soil profile for other
footings in the model.
If Save a copy to the soil profile library is checked the soil profile is also saved to a library. This
way you can reload the same soil profile in different models.
Opens the soil profile library.

Deletes the selected soil profile

The function available on the Soil toolbox are: Add new soil layer,
Move up, Move down, Delete.

Add new soil layer Adds a new soil layer with the properties and layer thickness set in
the group box. The new layer always gets to the bottom of the soil
profile.
Move up Moves the selected soil layer up within the soil profile.
Move down Moves the selected soil layer down within the soil profile.
484

Delete Deletes the selected soil layer from the soil profile.
Soil layers have the following properties:
Soil type coarse, coarse underwater or fine
Thickness layer thickness
Top surface Position of the top surface relative to the ground level
γ [kg/m3] mass density
φ [°] internal angle of friction
φt [°] Angle of friction between the soil and concrete
E0 [N/mm2] Young modulus of the soil
μ [] Poisson coefficient of the soil
c [kN/m2] cohesion (only for fine soils)

Soil database Clicking the Soil database icon two tables are
displayed. After selecting a soil and clicking
the OK button (or double clicking the soil)
properties of the selected soil are copied to
the Soil or Backfill group box.

Modify soil layer Name, color, description and physical properties of the selected layer can be edited. Click on this
button to apply changes to the selected layer.
Undrained loading Under undrained loading there is no volume change, since water cannot escape. The soil is fully satu-
rated, shear strength is a constant value that can be deteremined by experiments. In this case user
must enter the cuk shear strength.
Passive earth pres- If this option is turned on the sliding resistance is increased taking into account the passive soil pres-
sure sure. Active soil pressure increases the horizontal forces. These effects are usually neglected to be on
the safe side. Activating this option requires extra watchfulness.
γm,EP is the mobilization factor of passive earth pressure.

Checks Required checks and allowed maximum efficiencies can be selected on the Checks tab.
If Settlement evaluation is activated the program checks whether the settlement is greater than the
limit specified here but does not increase footing size.
Stability check allows setting the maximum allowed eccentricity ratio to ensure that the soil will be
compressed under the footing to avoid overturning.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 485

Bearing resistance The size of the footing is increased until the utilization for soil rupture falls below the allowed maxi-
mum:
𝑉𝑑
𝜆𝑅,𝑣 = ≤ 𝜆𝑅,𝑣,𝑙𝑖𝑚
𝑅𝑉,𝑑
Warnings and errors: If the bigger size of the footing exceeds 10 times the thickness a warning ap-
pears.
Sliding check The module determines if the design stress caused by horizontal force is under the sliding resistance
between 1) the soil and the blind concrete, 2) the blind concrete and the foundation calculated from
the effective area. 𝜏𝐸𝑑 ≤ 𝜏𝑅𝑑 and 𝜏𝐸𝑑2 ≤ 𝜏𝑅𝑑2 .
Analysis of If the soil has multiple layers the program calculates the utilization from the stress at the top of the
multi-layer soil soil layer and the bearing resistance assuming that the stress spreads in 45°. Footing size is increased
until utilization for soil rupture falls below the limit.

𝐵𝑖′ = 𝐵′ + 2(𝑧𝑖 − 𝐷) and 𝐿′𝑖 = 𝐿′ + 2(𝑧𝑖 − 𝐷) → 𝐴′𝑖 = 𝐵𝑖′ ⋅ 𝐿′𝑖

𝑉𝑑
𝑞𝐸,𝑑,𝑖 = + (𝑞𝑖′ − 𝑞′ )
𝐴′𝑖
Eccentricity check Footing size is increased until the eccentricity factor (𝛾𝑒𝑐𝑐 ) calculated from load combination eccentri-
cities falls below the allowed limit: 𝛾𝑒𝑐𝑐 ≤ 𝛾𝑒𝑐𝑐,𝑙𝑖𝑚 .
For rectangular footings 𝛾𝑒𝑐𝑐 = 0.5 means that the the bounding rectangle of the eccentricity limit
curve has the dimensions 𝑏𝑥 /2 and 𝑏𝑦 /2, where 𝑏𝑥 and 𝑏𝑦 are the footing dimensions. The eccentrity
factor is calculated according to the Type of eccentricity limit:

Linear (diamond), Quadratic (ellipse) Axis of rotation (rectangle)

𝑒𝑥 𝑒𝑦 2 |𝑒𝑥 | |𝑒𝑦 |
𝛾𝑒𝑐𝑐 = | |+| | 𝑒𝑥 2 𝑒𝑦 𝛾𝑒𝑐𝑐 = max ( ; )
𝑏𝑥 𝑏𝑦 𝛾𝑒𝑐𝑐 = √( ) +( ) 𝑏𝑥 𝑏𝑦
𝑏𝑥 𝑏𝑦

For circular footings the eccentricity limit curve is a circle, 𝛾𝑒𝑐𝑐 = 𝑒/𝑟 , where 𝑟 = 𝑑𝑝 /2

Stability AxisVM calculates the moment of actions around the axes of overtuning, sums up the stabilizing and
destabilizing moments then checks the following:
𝑀𝑑𝑠𝑡
Δ𝐸𝑄𝑈 = | | ≤ Δ𝐸𝑄𝑈,𝑙𝑖𝑚
𝑀𝑠𝑡𝑏

Reinforcement of If rebar positions and diameter are specified the module determines the necessary amount of top and
the foundation bottom reinforcement in x and y direction according to the following diagram.
base plate The minimum requirement is always taken into account.
486

The necessary rebar spacing is calculated from the rebar diameter.

Warnings and errors:
The program sends a warning if compression reinforcement is required or the calculated amount is
more than the maximum allowed (𝐴𝑠 > 0.04𝐴𝑐 ).

Calculating Eurocode 7 allows different design approaches (DA). These are certain combinations of
according to partial factors for actions, material properties and resistances. Partial factor sets applied to actions are
Eurocode 7 referred to as A1, A2, sets applied to material properties are M1, M2, sets applied to resistances are
R1, R2, R3. (See EN 1997-1:2004, Annex A) Each design approach combine these partial factor sets.

Design Approach Combination Actions Material properties Resistances

DA1 Combination 1 ULS A1 M1 R1
Combination 2 SLS A2 M2 R1
DA2 ULS A1 M1 R2
DA3 SLS A2 M2 R3

The program checks A1+M1+R1 (DA1 / 1) and A1+M1+R2 (DA 2) for critical ULS combinations,
A2+M2+R1 (DA1 / 2) and A2+M2+R3 (DA3) for critical SLS combinations.
So for each critical combination two results are calculated.
If design was performed for a user-defined load combination set this combination to ULS or SLS oth-
erwise the footing may be overdesigned.
Bearing resistance is 𝑞𝑅𝑑 = 𝑠𝛾 ⋅ 𝛾 ′ ⋅ 𝐵′ ⋅ 𝑁𝛾 ⋅ 𝑖𝛾 ⋅ 𝑏𝛾 ⋅ 0.5 + 𝑠𝑞 ⋅ 𝑞 ⋅ 𝑁𝑞 ⋅ 𝑖𝑞 ⋅ 𝑏𝑞 + 𝑠𝑐 ⋅ 𝑐 ⋅ 𝑁𝑐 ⋅ 𝑖𝑐 ⋅ 𝑏𝑐

Sliding check calculates if the footing meets the following criterion between the footing and the blind
concrete and between the blind concrete and the soil: 𝐻𝑑 ≤ 𝑅𝑑 + 𝑅𝑝,𝑑
where 𝐻𝑑 is the design value of the horizontal force, 𝑅𝑑 is the design shear resistance, 𝑅𝑝,𝑑 is the
passive soil resistance at the side of the footing.

Design shear resistance is obtained from the formula 𝑅𝑑 = 𝑉𝑑 tan 𝛿𝑑 , where 𝑉𝑑 is the design vertical
tan 𝜑
action, 𝛿𝑑 is the design angle of friction: 𝛿𝑑 = arctan ( ), where 𝜑 is the angle of interface friction,
𝛾𝜑
𝛾𝜑 is the partial factor of shearing resistance, prescribed by the design approach.
Punching check The module checks the shear resistance of the foundation (𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 ), at the perimeter of the column
and determines the necessary amount of shear reinforcement.
The calculation reduces the punching force by the soil reaction on the effective area
(and within the critical punching line).
The punching check is passed if 𝑣𝐸𝑑 ≤ 𝑣𝑅𝑑
Without shear reinforcement 𝑣𝑅𝑑 = min {𝑣 𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑐 }, with shear reinforcement 𝑣𝑅𝑑 = min {𝑣𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑐𝑠 }.
𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥

Warning and errors:

If 𝑣𝐸𝑑 ≤ 𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑐 , no shear reinforcement is necessary.
If 𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 > 𝑣𝐸𝑑 > 𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑐 , shear reinforcement is necessary.
If 𝑣𝐸𝑑 > 𝑣𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 , the base plate fails due to punching. Plate thickness of column cross-section size
should be increased.
If a stepped or sloped footing is designed, the size of the pedestal is determined checking the punch-
ing requirements so utilization for punching is not calculated.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 487

Predicting the AxisVM calculates the elastic settlement caused by additional stress in soil layers.
settlement of Loads cause the following stress at depth of z under the center of the centrally loaded rectangle of
footing the footing (after Boussinesq-Steinbrenner):
4𝜎0 𝑏 𝑎(𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 ) − 2𝑎𝑧(𝑅 − 𝑧) 𝑏𝑧 𝑎(𝑅 2 + 𝑧 2 )
𝜎𝑧 = {arctan [ ⋅ 2 2 2
]+ 2 ⋅ 2 }
2𝜋 𝑧 (𝑎 + 𝑏 )(𝑅 − 𝑧) − 𝑧(𝑅 − 𝑧) 𝑏 + 𝑧 (𝑎 + 𝑧 2 )𝑅
2

where the distance between the characteristic point and the central axes are 0.37B' and 0.37L'.
a and b are the dimensions of the four parts of the loaded rectangle according to the following table:

𝑎 𝑏

I. (0.5 − 0.37) ⋅ 𝐿′ (0.5 − 0.37) ⋅ 𝐵′

II. (0.5 + 0.37) ⋅ 𝐿′ (0.5 − 0.37) ⋅ 𝐵′

III. (0.5 + 0.37) ⋅ 𝐿′ (0.5 + 0.37) ⋅ 𝐵′

IV. (0.5 − 0.37) ⋅ 𝐿′ (0.5 + 0.37) ⋅ 𝐵′

If a < b, the two values are swapped.

𝜎0 is the soil stress at the footing base plane caused by loads (including the self-weight of the footing
and the backfill minus the weight of the removed soil above the base plane),
and 𝑅 = √𝑎2 + 𝑏 2 + 𝑧 2 .
This stress calculation is valid for a homogeneous half space. In case of soil layers effective layer
thicknesses must be calculated:
𝐸𝑠𝑖 𝜌0 2/5
ℎℎ𝑖 = ℎ𝑖 ⋅ ( ⋅ )
𝐸𝑠0 𝜌𝑖
where
ℎℎ𝑖 is the effective thickness of the soil layer i
ℎ𝑖 is the thickness of the soil layer i
𝐸𝑠0 is the Young modulus of the the base layer
𝐸𝑠1 is the Young modulus of the soil layer i
𝜌0 is the density of the base soil layer
𝜌𝑖 is the density of the soil layer i

AxisVM breaks up the user defined soil layers into 10 cm sublayers and calculates the stress due to
soil weight and the stress caused by loading at the bottom of the sublayer. The change in sublayer
thickness is calculated according to the following formulas:
𝜎𝑎𝑖 𝜎𝑖−1 + 𝜎𝑖
Δℎ𝑖 = ℎ𝑖 ; 𝜎𝑎𝑖 =
𝐸𝑠𝑖 2
𝜎𝑎𝑖 is the average stress caused by loading in sublayer i
𝜎𝑖−1 is the average stress caused by loading at the top of sublayer i
𝜎𝑖 is the average stress caused by loading at the bottom of sublayer i
𝐸𝑠𝑖 : the Young modulus of the sublayer i
The predicted settlement at a given depth is calculated as the sum of the changes in sublayer thick-
nesses for the sublayers above the level:
𝑚

𝑠𝑚 = ∑ Δℎ𝑖
𝑖=0
AxisVM calculates the limit depth, where 𝜎 = 0.1 ⋅ 𝜎𝑜𝑏 (i.e. the extra stress caused by loading falls
under the 10% of the stress due to soil self weight.
If this condition is not met at the bottom of the layer structure a settlement estimation is made based
on the settlement at this point and the stress ratio (> 0.1) is calculated.
If the stress caused by loading at the footing base plane is smaller than the stress due to the
original soil layers settlement is not calculated.
AxisVM calculates the settlement for all load cases and SLS combinations. Stress and settlement func-
tions are displayed for the selected load case. Settlement function s(z) is the total settlement of layers
above z.
488

Seismic check If vibration analysis is completed and the seismic loads are generated seismic check of footings can
be performed. Enter the following parameters:

Results The designed foundation will be displayed in top view with soil layers, punching circles and places
dimension lines automatically. The 3D model can be zoomed in and out, shifted and rotated just like
the main model.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 489

If the display of settlement is activated (see

Display parameters) a thick blue diagram plots
the total soil stress against depth. Thin dia-
grams show the stress due to loading and the
self-weight of the soil. The first one is decreas-
ing, the second one is increasing with depth.
Horizontal lines show the sublayers. The gray
diagram on the other side of the axis is the
settlement function.

The settlement displayed in the info window is

the value of the settlement function at the
limit depth (where the stress caused by load-
ing is 10% of the stress due to self weight fo
the soil).
If this condition is not met at the bottom of
the layer structure a settlement estimation is
made based on the settlement at this point
and the stress ratio (> 0.1) is calculated.

If stress caused by loading at the bottom of the layer structure is still more than 10% of the stress due
to soil self weight the limit depth cannot be determined as the further structure of the soil is un-
known.
In this case the info window displays the value of the settlement function at the bottom of the layer
structure as >value.
To improve the estimation further soil layer information must be added.

Footing This table displays the forces of the selected supports and the most important results including calcu-
internal forces lated geometry.
As support forces are calculated in the local system of the support the x and y directions are the local
x and y directions of the support. If the supports are global these are the global X and Y directions.
Rx, Ry, Rz, Rxx, support forces
Ryy, Rzz
qEd design bearing pressure
qRd design bearing resistance
qEd /qRd soil utilization factor
Axb local x direction bottom reinforcement (if calculated)
ayb local y direction bottom reinforcement (if calculated)
axt local x direction top reinforcement (if calculated)
ayt local y direction top reinforcement (if calculated)
490

τEd /τRd utilization based on footing displacement relative to the blind concrete
τEd2 /τRd2 utilization based on blind concrete displacement relative to the soil
vEd /vRd utilization based on punching (for simple plate footings)
Settlement predicted settlement of the footing
bx, by footing base plate size in x and y direction
dx*, dy* pedestal (step or frustum) size in x and y direction
ex*, ey* eccentricity of the pedestal's center of gravity in x and y direction

Detailed Displays the data in the table of Footing internal forces and the following results:
internal forces

Design approach design approach used to calculate the results of the line
cx, c y x and y size of the effective rectangle
e x, e y eccentricity of action in x and y direction
Rebars xb rebar scheme in bottom x direction (if calculated)
Rebars yb rebar scheme in bottom y direction (if calculated)
Rebars xt rebar scheme in top x direction (if calculated)
Rebars yt rebar scheme in top y direction (if calculated)
τEd design shear stress between the footing and the blind concrete
τRd design shear resistance between the footing and the blind concrete
τEd2 design shear stress between the soil and the blind concrete
τRd2 design shear resistance between the soil and the blind concrete
VRdc minimum shear design resistance without punching reinforcement
VRdmax maximum shear design resistance without punching reinforcement
VRdcs shear design resistance with punching reinforcement
u1 length of the critical line
Asw shear reinforcement along the punching line
Stress ratio ratio of stress caused by loading and the stress due to self weight of the soil (if
limit depth is below the bottom of the layer structure its value is determinded at
that point and is greater than 0.1, otherwise it is 0.1)
Limit depth the depth where stress ratio is 0.1 (if limit depth is greater than the bottom of
the layer structure a ? is displayed)

Copies image to the Clipboard

Prints image to the Clipboard

Saves the drawing into the Drawing Library

Display parameters
Turns on and off symbols of the drawing.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 491

6.5.13.2. Strip footing design

AxisVM can determine the necessary size
and reinforcement of strip foundations
(with or without pedestal), and can check
the footing against sliding and punching
according to Eurocode7 and MSz. It
determines the settlement of the founda-
tion as well.
Strip footing design is similar to the pad
footing design. Parameters describing
the geometry of the strip section must
be entered.
492

6.5.14. Design of reinforced concrete cores and walls – RC5 module

Using RC5 module, reinforcement can be assigned to reinforced cores and walls and the design check
of cores/walls subjected to bending and axial force can be performed.
Reinforcement can be assigned to virtual beams or virtual strips (see… 2.16.16 Virtual beams) after
clicking the icon on the left or clicking on the axis of a virtual beam/strip. The icon is visible if there is
reinforced concrete domain, there is at least on virtual beam/strip and statical or dynamical results
are available in the model.

After clicking on the icon, one virtual beam or strip can be selected in the course of selection
procedure (see… 2.16.1 Selection). If the selection is invalid, the software warns with a warning
message. The selection may be invalid in the following cases:
• Neither virtual beam, nor virtual strip has been selected.
• More than one virtual beam/strip has been selected.
• The selected virtual beam/strip has non-concrete domain(s).
• The selected virtual beam/strip is not continuous.
• The cross section of the virtual beam/strip is not supported (e.g. variable section).
• The selected virtual beam/strip is not vertical (max. 15° deviation is allowed).
• Automatic cross section is set to the selected virtual beam/strip but a rib connected to one
of the domains is not concrete.
After a valid selection, the Reinforced concrete cores and walls window is opened where stories and
reinforcement can be assigned to cores and walls and the design check can be performed.
Altogether, there are three tabs on the window: 1) Virtual beams; 2) Virtual strips; 3) Overall
utilization.

Virtual beams can be used to design reinforced concrete cores with the assumption that sections
remain approximately plane before and after loading. This assumption is likely not valid in case of
large and short cores and in case of the presence of considerable wapring torsional moment and a
section that is sensitive to warping effects.
The design check of reinforced concrete cores is performed similarly to the design check of reinforced
concrete columns. The Nx-My-Mz strength interaction diagram of the section is calculated and it is
checked whether the point representing Nx,Ed, My,Ed, Mz,Ed design forces is within the interaction
diagram. During design check of core reinforcement, buckling length coefficient cannot be defined,
since modern design codes (e.g. EN 1992-1-1) includes methods wherewith the effect of
imperfections and second order effects can be taken into account on structural level. In case of
reinforced concrete cores, it is assumed that the integrated design internal forces include the
effect of imperfections and second order effects.

Virtual strips can be used by the design check of wall ends or wall segments considering possible
buckling failures of the wall between floors. The program is able to calculate the additional
eccentricities from imperfections and second order effects regarding a storey, based on the given
buckling length coefficient. After sum with the initial eccentricities (calculated from the integrated
internal forces), the program calculates the Nx,Ed, My,Ed, Mz,Ed design forces. It is assumed that the
integrated design internal forces include the effect of imperfections and second order effects
on structural level. The design check is performed similarly to the case of reinforced concrete cores
that the Nx-My-Mz strength interaction diagram of the section is generated and it is checked whether
the point representing Nx,Ed, My,Ed, Mz,Ed design forces is within the interaction diagram.

On the overall utilization tab, design results of reinforced concrete cores calculated with virtual beams
and design results of wall ends/segments calculated with virtual strips can be summed. It may be
necessary because the Nx-My-Mz strength interaction diagram of cores is generated without
consideration the loss of stability of compressed wall ends and inner wall segments. The program
supports the use of various summation rules as it can be seen in the following figures.

 In case of warping-sensitive cores and the presence of considerable warping torsional mo-
ments, the section warps and it does not remain plane after loading. It is recommended to to
perform the design check for wall segments of the core separately in such cases because the
section cannot designed as a whole.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 493

Virtual beams
Virtual beams of Virtual beams in the model are
the model listed on the left. If at least
stories are assigned to the
virtual beam, the name of the
virtual beam is written bold
letters. After clicking on a
virtual beam written with bold
letters, the stories of the
selected virtual beam is listed
in the listbox on the right of
the window. If actual
reinforcement is assigned to
the storey, than the storey is
shown with bold letters.

If a virtual beam is selected which has no stories, the list on the right remains empty and only the
middle button is visible below the list. After clicking on this button, a new window opens where new
stories can be added, stories can be deleted and modified.

Before definition of actual reinforcement, stories

need to be assigned ot the virtual beams/strips.
Using stories, more economical and efficient rein-
forcement can can be assigned to the virtual beam
that follows the change in the internal forces.
A storey needs to have intersection with the axis of
the selected virtual beam/strip. The software fills the
list of stories with predefined model stories (see…
3.3.4 Stories) if there are any. The stories assigned to
a virtual beam or strips does not necessarily need to
be identical with the stories of the model.

The stories can be deleted (delete icon), modified (pencil) and new stories can be added (+ and
arrow). The stories are saved to the virtual beam/strip. If stories are assigned to the virtual beam/strip,
the cross section will be displayed together with circles on the axis of virtual beam/strip indicating the
boundaries of the defined stories.
Reinforcement can be deleted from the selected storey with this button. It is visible only if
reinforcemet is assigned to the storey.
By clicking on table button, the design results of the selected storey of the selected virtual beam can
be seen summarized in a table (see below). This button is visible only if reinforcemet is assigned to
the storey.
494

Define and check After clicking on the Define and check reinforcement button, a new window opens (see… 6.5.14.1
reinforcment Defining reinforcement) where new reinforcement can be assigned to the storey or an existing
reinforcement can be modified.

Virtual strips On Virtual strips tab, the same

functionalities and buttons are
available than on Virtual beams
tab. Stories and reinforcement
can be assigned to virtual strips
that can be used to model and
design walls ends and segments.

Overall utilization On Overall utilization tab, virtual

beam – virtual strip pairs can be
created, deleted and modified
that are used to calculate the
overall utilization of reinforced
cores and walls.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 495

Virtual beams and Virtual beams and virtual strips in the model
virtual strips in the that have stories and reinforcement are
model listed on the left. If actual reinforcement is
missing from at least one storey, the name of
the virtual beam/strip is written with red
letters. In this case, the overall utilization
cannot be calculated for every storey.
The list supports the multiple selection which
is available while Ctrl button is holding. To
create a virtal beam – virtual strip pair, a
virtual beam and a compatible virtual strip
need to be selected. If a virtual beam is
selected, the incompatible virtual strips will
be displayed with light gray colour.

 A virtual beam and a virtual strip are compatible if they have the same number of storeys and
their storeys are identical.
Calculation of The created virtual beam – virtual strip pairs are listed on the right, below the Calculate overall
overall utilization utilization label.
This button is visible only if a virtual beam and a compatible virtual strip are selected in the list on the
left. After clicking, a new virtual beam – virtual strip pair will be added to the list. The name is
composed from the names of virtual beam and the virtual strip.
This button can be used to delete virtual beam – virtual strip pair from the list.

The combination rule os utilizations for the selected virtual beam – virtual strip pair can be defined
below the list. The different combination rules are available.

1. η = max(η1, η2)
2. η = (η1)a + (η2)b
When creating a new virtual beam – virtual strip pair, the software sets the first combination rule
automatically. To modify the combination rule of the selected virtual beam – virtual strip pair, after
setting the new rule save button need to be clicked.
By clicking on table button, the design results of the selected virtual beam – virtual strip pair can be
seen summarized in a table (see below).

Display If stories and actual reinforcement are assigned to the virtual beam/strip, the cross section with
reinforcement will be displayed together with circles on the axis of virtual beam/strip indicating the
boundaries of the defined stories. The name of the actual reinforcement assigned to the storey is
displayed close to the middle of the storey on the axis of the virtual beam/strip.
496

 With the association of stories and actual reinforcement to virtual beams and virtual strips,
practically, we assign reinforcement to non-existing elements (virtual beam and virtual strip) in
order to integrate the stresses in domains and surfaces and to perform design check for the
integrated internal forces. The given width of virtual strips or the defined stories do not
necessarily match to boundaries of domains or the finite element mesh. For this reason,
reinforcement parameters and actual reinforcement are independent of reinforcement
parameters (see… 6.5.1 Surface reinforcement parameters and reinforcement calculation - RC1 module)
and actual reinforcement (see… 6.5.2 Actual reinforcement) assigned to surfaces. Contradiction
between reinforcement parameters and actual reinforcements defined two different ways is
not investigated. Rebar statistics in weight report (see… 3.2.13 Weight Report) does not
incorporate actual reinforcements assigned to virtual beams and strips.

6.5.14.1. Defining reinforcement

Define and check Parameters for reinforcement and actual reinforcement can be specified in the dialog (Design check of
reinforced concrete core/wall) below. This dialog can be opened after clicking on Define and check
reinforcement button on Virtual beams and Virtual strips tabs, respectively. The functionalities, dialogs
and buttons are very similar to functionalities, dialogs and buttons described and presented by
column reinforcement (see… 6.5.4 Actual reinforcement against biaxial bending (column) and 6.5.9 Column
reinforcement – RC2 module). On the page of Reinfrocement bars, the steel material, the concrete
material, the out-of-plane buckling parameters (only in case of virtual strips) can be specified and
rebars with certain diameter can be placed in the cross section.

Cross-section In this dialog window the design cross-section can be seen. This design cross-section is inherited
from the virtual beam/strip. By the definition of virtual beams and strips, the cross-section can be
automatically created from the intersected surface elements or a custom cross-section can be defined
by the user. The cross-section cannot be modified in this window, it is a property of the virtual
beam/strip. The cross-section can be changed only on Virtual beams window (see… 2.16.16 Virtual
beams).

Local coordinate The local coordinate system of the virtual beam/strip plays an important role in the design check
system procedure due to the fact that the internal forces are integrated from the stresses according to this
coordinate system. The orientation of the cross-section displayed in Design check of reinforced con-
crete core/wall window is also consistent with this local coordinate system.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 497

Add drawing to Saves the current drawing to the Drawings Library.

gallery

New reinforcement Defines a new reinforcement.

Load Loads previously defined reinforcement.

Save Saves the reinforcement.

List of List of existing reinforcements.

reinforcements

Parameters Lets you specify the parameters used in the course of design check.
In case of virtual strips, 𝛽𝑦𝑦 buckling length factor can be specified. (𝛽𝑦𝑦 related to buckling in x-z
plane). It is also possible to select the buckling shape. The buckling length is calculates as the product
of buckling length factor and the height of the wall in the selected storey.
The considered concrete class in the calculation can be altered compared to concrete class assigned
to the structural element. It allows the user to evaluate structural safety with different concrete class
without new static analysis. ϕef is the so-called effective creep ratio according to Section 5.8.4 of EN
1992-1-1 standard.
You can see coefficient of seimic forces at 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module.
498

Virtual beam

Virtual strip

If global imperfections are taken into account by extra loads acting on the structure,
they must be ignored in reinforcement calculation. To achieve this, check Local
imperfections only. If a sway buckling shape is selected only a constant local geometric
imperfection is considered (see… 6.5.14.3 Calculation of eccentricity).

Buckling shape Second order eccentricities are calculated based on the

selected buckling shape (see… 6.5.14.3 Calculation of
eccentricity) Buckling length factors are changed
accordingly, but can be overridden.

To position / by Generates a reinforcement bar with a specified diameter to the location of the cursor.
cover If the cursor is on a corner or on the contour line, the reinforcement will be placed considering the
concrete cover.
Spacing Inserts evenly N+1 new rebars between two selected points.

Spacing with Inserts new rebars between two selected points considering constant s rebar distance. If the distance
constant rebar between to end points is not integral multiple of s rebar distance, the distance between the last and
distance the last but one rebar will be less than s.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 499

Spacing on circular Inserts evenly N+1 new rebars between a selected starting point and an end-point of a circular arch.
arch If an entire circle is drawn, the program inserts N rebars evenly around the circle.

Placing rebars at Places rebars in positive and negative corners (> 5°) if there is no rebar in the corner.
the corners

Storeys Opens a window where the storey can be selected.

Diameter Lets you define or modify the diameter of a rebar.

To modify, select the rebars and than the enter the diameter or select a value from the list.

Concrete cover Lets you define or modify the concrete cover.

N (division number) The division number which defines the number of rebars as N+1.

s (rebar distance) The rebar distance that is considered in spacing with constant rebar distance.

Geometrical Translation Creates new rebars by copying existing ones by translation.

transformations
Rotation Creates new rebars by copying existing ones by rotation.

Mirroring Creates new rebars by mirroring existing ones.

6.5.14.2. Check reinforcement

The design check can be performed based on the following design codes:
Eurocode 2: EN 1992-1-1:2004 + (MSZ, DIN, SR, DS, NBN, BS, NEN, SFS, SS, NTC, CSN, PN NAs)
SIA : SIA 262:2013
500

Wall check After selecting Core/wall check tab, the program performs the verification against bending with or
without axial force based on the cross-section properties and reinforcement parameters. It
determines the eccentricities coming from imperfection and second order effects in case of virtual
strips based on the given buckling parameters and according to the requirements of the current
design code.
The program calculates 𝑁𝑥,𝐸𝑑 , 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 , 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑 design internal forces (see… 6.5.14.3 Calculation of eccentrici-
ty) and it checks if these points are within the interaction diagram.
The design check of reinforced concrete cores and walls is performed very similarly to the design
check of reinforced concrete columns, thus diagrams, functionalities and buttons are very similar or
identical that are introduced in previous sections (for further details see… 6.5.9 Column reinforcement
– RC2 module).
The displayed diagram and its properties can be set in the Display Parameters window.
Internal forces The Design results table contains the maximum normal forces and bending moments at the top and
bottom of the selected storey of the invetigated core/wall. The internal forces are integrated from the
stresses and they are associated with the local coordinate system of the virtual beam/strip.

6.5.14.3. Calculation of eccentricity

Eccentricities due to imperfections and second order effects are calculated only in the course of
design check of reinforcements assigned to virtual strips. These eccentricities are summed with the
initial eccentricities calculates from the internal forces. In case of reinforcements assigned to virtual
beams, the software does not calculate eccentricities due to imperfections and second order effects
and the intial eccentricities are design eccentricities because modern design codes (e.g. EN 1992-1-1)
includes methods wherewith the effect of imperfections and second order effects can be taken into
account on structural level. It is assumed that the internal forces already represent these effects.

The calculation of eccentricities due to imperfections and second order effects in case of
reinforcemets assigned to virtual strips is performed similarly to the calculation presented by
reinforced concrete columns (see… 6.5.9 Column reinforcement – RC2 module). The major difference is
that eccentricities are calculated only in direction perpendicular to the plane of the wall (it is assumed
that this direction is identical with local z axis).

 In case of reinforcements assigned to virtual strips, it is assumed that the local z axis of the
virtual strip is perpendicular to the wall. For this reason, it is assumed that the weak axis is the
local y axis. Among the reinforcement parameters, the buckling length coefficient related to y
weak axis can be specified by the user. Review of the orientation of the local coordinate system
is recommended before performing design check.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 501

6.5.14.3.1. Check reinforcement according to Eurocode 2

Design moments are 𝑀𝑑 = 𝑁𝑑 ⋅ 𝑒𝑑

where 𝑁𝑑 is the axial force and 𝑒𝑑 is the design eccentricity.
• virtual beams: 𝑒𝑑 = 𝑒𝑒
• virtual strips parallel to the plane: 𝑒𝑑 = 𝑒𝑒
• virtual strips perpendiculare to the plane: 𝑒𝑑 = 𝑒𝑒 + 𝑒𝑖 + 𝑒2
ℎ
Minimal eccentrictity: 𝑚𝑎𝑥 (20𝑚𝑚, ).
30

𝑒𝑒 is the initial eccentricity calculated from the first order axial force and bending moment.
Initial eccentricities at the ends of the investigated section:
𝑒𝑒 = 𝑀𝐼 /𝑁𝑑
Initial eccentricities at intermediate cross-section of the investigated section (equivalent eccentrici-
ty):
0.6 ⋅ 𝑒𝑎 + 0.4 ⋅ 𝑒𝑏
𝑒𝑒 = max { } and |𝑒𝑎 | ≥ |𝑒𝑏 |,
0.4 ⋅ 𝑒𝑎
where 𝑒𝑎 and 𝑒𝑏 are the initial eccentricities at the ends of the investigated section.

𝑒𝑖 is the eccentricity from geometric imperfections.

𝑙 2
𝑒𝑖 = 𝛼ℎ Θ0 0 , where 𝑙0 is the buckling length, 𝛼ℎ = 2/√𝑙 and ≤ 𝛼ℎ ≤ 1, where 𝑙 is the storey height.
2 3
Θ0 – according to NA of the selected code.

𝑒2 is the second order eccentricity.

𝐴𝐵𝐶 𝑁𝐸𝑑
Second order eccentricity is considered if 𝜆 ≥ 𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 = 20 where 𝑛 =
√𝑛 𝐴𝑐 𝑓𝑐𝑑

 The calculation of 𝝀𝒍𝒊𝒎 may be different accroding to NA of the selected code!

16
In case of DIN EN 1992-1-1: 𝑛 < 0.41 → 𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 = ; 𝑛 > 0.41 → 𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 = 25.0
√𝑛
𝐶
In case of Italian Code: 𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 = 15.4
√𝑛

The prescribed calculation method of 𝒆𝟐 can be nominal curvature method or nominal stiffness
method according to NA of the selected code. In some NAs, the application of both methods is
allowed. In these cases, nominal curvature method is applied.
502

Nominal curvature 1 𝑙02

method 𝑒2 =
𝑟𝑐
1 𝑓𝑦𝑑
where = 𝐾𝑟 𝐾𝜑
𝑟 𝐸𝑠 ⋅0.45⋅𝑑′
8 ≤ 𝑐 ≤ 𝜋 2 based on the first order bending moment diagram
𝑁𝑢′ −𝑁𝐸𝑑
𝐾𝑟 = min { ; 1.0} , 𝐾𝜑 = max{1 + 𝛽𝜑𝑒𝑓 ; 1.0},
𝑁𝑢′ −𝑁𝑏𝑎𝑙
𝑓𝑐𝑘 𝜆
𝛽 = 0.35 + − , where 𝑓𝑐𝑘 is in N/mm2 unit
200 150
ℎ
𝑑′ = + 𝑖𝑠 , where 𝑖𝑠 is the radius of inertia of the longitudinal reinforcement
2

Nominal stiffness 𝛽
𝑒2 = (𝑒𝑒 + 𝑒𝑖 ) [1 + ],
method 𝑁𝐵 ⁄𝑁𝑑 − 1
𝜋2
where 𝛽 =
𝑐
𝑁𝐵 is the buckling load based on nominal stiffness
𝐸𝐼 = 𝐾𝑐 𝐸𝑐𝑑 𝐼𝑐 + 𝐾𝑠 𝐸𝑠 𝐼𝑠 is the nominal stiffness, where
𝐸𝑐𝑑 is the design value of the modulus of elasticity of concrete, see 5.8.6 (3)
𝐼𝑐 is the moment of inertia of concrete cross section
𝐸𝑠 is the design value of the modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, 5.8.6 (3)
𝐼𝑠 is the second moment of area of reinforcement, about the centre of area of the concrete
𝐾𝑐 is a factor for effects of cracking, creep etc, see 5.8.7.2. (2), (3)
𝐾𝑠 is a factor for contribution of reinforcement, see 5.8.7.2. (2), (3)
Eccentricities are determined in both bending planes. The program checks the following design
situations:
Virtual beams Virtual strips
𝑀𝑑𝑦 = 𝑁𝑑 𝑒𝑒𝑧 𝑀𝑑𝑦 = 𝑁𝑑 (𝑒𝑒𝑧 + 𝑒𝑖𝑧 ± 𝑒2𝑧 )
𝑀𝑑𝑧 = −𝑁𝑑 𝑒𝑒𝑦 𝑀𝑑𝑧 = −𝑁𝑑 𝑒𝑒𝑦

AxisVM checks whether the calculated design loads (Mdy, Mdz, Nd) are inside the N-M strength
interaction diagram. If it is not satisfied in any of the design situations, the core/wall with the given
cross-section and reinforcement fails.

On N-MR strength interaction diagrams and on critical eccentricity

curves, points represent these design loads. Custom force and moment
values can also be entered in the table. These points will be displayed in
the N-MR strength interaction diagrams and in the critical eccentricity
curves. Signs of the forces and moments are determined according to
the picture.

Material models 𝜎, 𝜀 relations for concrete and steel:

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 503

6.5.14.3.2. Check reinforcement according to SIA 262

Design moments are 𝑀𝑑 = 𝑁𝑑 ⋅ 𝑒𝑑

where 𝑁𝑑 is the axial force and 𝑒𝑑 is the design eccentricity.
• virtual beams: 𝑒𝑑 = 𝑒1𝑑
• virtual strips parallel to the plane: 𝑒𝑑 = 𝑒1𝑑
• virtual strips perpendiculare to the plane: 𝑒𝑑 = 𝑒1𝑑 + 𝑒0𝑑 + 𝑒2𝑑

𝑒0𝑑 : increment due to geometric imperfections

𝑙𝑐𝑟 𝑑
𝑒0𝑑 = max {𝛼𝑖 ; }
2 30
1 0.01 1
where ≥ 𝛼𝑖 = ≥
200 √𝑙 300
𝑙𝑐𝑟 is the buckling length, 𝑙 is the actual length, d is the effective height of the cross-section.
𝑒1𝑑 : is the initial eccentricity calculated from the first order force and moment.
Initial eccentricities at the ends of the investigated section:
𝑒1𝑑 = 𝑀𝐼 /𝑁𝑑
Initial eccentricities at intermediate cross-section of the investigated section (equivalent eccentricity):
0.6 ⋅ 𝑒𝑎 + 0.4 ⋅ 𝑒𝑏
𝑒1𝑑 = max { } 𝑎𝑛𝑑 |𝑒𝑎 | ≥ |𝑒𝑏 |,
0.4 ⋅ 𝑒𝑎
where 𝑒𝑎 and 𝑒𝑏 are the initial eccentricities at the ends of the investigated section.
2
𝑙𝑐𝑟
𝑒2𝑑 = 𝜒𝑑 ,
𝜋2
2𝑓𝑠𝑑 𝜀𝑠𝑑 −𝜀′𝑠𝑑 |𝜀𝑐,∞ |
where 𝜒𝑑 = if approximate curvature option is checked, otherwise 𝜒𝑑 = + .
𝐸𝑠 (𝑑−𝑑 ′ ) 𝑑−𝑑 ′ 𝑑

Eccentricities are determined in both bending planes. The program checks the following design
situations:
Virtual beams Virtual strips
𝑀𝑑𝑦 = 𝑁𝑑 𝑒1𝑧 𝑀𝑑𝑦 = 𝑁𝑑 (𝑒1𝑧 + 𝑒0𝑧 ± 𝑒2𝑧 )
𝑀𝑑𝑧 = −𝑁𝑑 𝑒1𝑦 𝑀𝑑𝑧 = −𝑁𝑑 𝑒1𝑦

AxisVM checks whether the calculated design loads (Mdy, Mdz, Nd) are inside the N-M strength
interaction diagram. If it is not satisfied in any of the design situations, the core/wall with the given
cross-section and reinforcement fails.

On N-MR strength interaction diagrams and on critical eccentricity curves,

points represent these design loads. Custom force and moment values
can also be entered in the table. These points will be displayed in the N-
MR strength interaction diagrams and in the critical eccentricity curves.
Signs of the forces and moments are determined according to the
picture.

Material models 𝜎, 𝜀 relations for steel and concrete:

504

6.5.14.4. Results
The design results of reinforced concrete cores and walls are available in many ways in the software.
Drawings

Design check drawings (Nx-My-Mz, Nx-My, Nx-Mz and My-Mz strength interaction diagrams, critical
eccentricity curves) can be saved into the Drawings Library by clicking Save to Drawings Library but-
ton (see… 3.6.9 Drawings Library).
Tables

Design results table is available via Design check of reinforced concrete core/wall and Reinforced
concrete cores and walls windows, as well. The table is editable if it is opened through Design check of
reinforced concrete core/wall window. In this case, columns can be turned on/off and new custom
force and moment values can also be added to the table. If the table is opened from Reinforced
concrete cores and walls window, the table is not editable. In this case, load case/combination,
envelope or automatic critical load combinations can be selected in a listbox which is considered in
the design check. After modifying selection in this listbox, the window automatically performs the
design checks that can take few seconds.
Design results table for overall utilizations can be opened only through Reinforced concrete cores and
walls window. The table summarizes the design results for the virtual beam and the virtual strip and it
shows the overall utilization as well.
If the utilization cannot be calculated due to any reason, that is marked with ??? symbol. If the
calculated utilization exceeds 1.0, the utilization is displayed with red colour.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 505

Result components If there are stories and actual reinforcements assigned to virtual beams/strips in the model and static
(linear/non-linear) or dynamic results are available, new result components become available on R. C.
Design tab related to design check results of cores and walls:
• Utilization (beam) – if there are stories and actual reinforcements assigned to virtual beams
in the model,
• Utilization (strip) – if there are stories and actual reinforcements assigned to virtual strips in
the model,
• Overall utilization – if at least virtual beam – virtual strip pair is defined in Reinforced concrete
cores and walls window.
(Overall utilization results are displayed on virtual strip of virtual beam – virtual strip pairs.)
506

6.6. Steel design

6.6.1. Steel beam design according to Eurocode 3 – SD1 module

EUROCODE 3 The steel beam design module can be applied to the following shapes:

Rolled I shapes Tee shapes

Welded I shapes Rectangular (solid) shapes
Box shapes Round (solid) shapes
Pipe shapes Arbitrary shapes, some checks are not per-
Single-symmetric I shapes formed
Among elements with cross-section class 4, single- and double-symmetric I shaped, rectangular T and
box shaped cross-sections can be designed with this module. Effective section properties are
calculated in the cases of uniform compression and uniform bending. These properties can be found
in the Table Browser under Steel design, in the table Design resistances, or in the pop-up window after
clicking on the element:
Aeff area of the effective cross section when subjected to uniform compression
eN,y the shift of the y neutral axis when the cross-section is subjected to uniform compres-
sion (will be zero if the section is symmetric to axis y). Negative shift will cause a nega-
tive Δ𝑀𝑦 = 𝑁 ⋅ 𝑒𝑁,𝑦 moment in the actual cross-section.
Weff,min elastic section modulus (corresponding to the fibre with the maximum elastic stress) of
the effective cross section when subjected only to moment about the relevant axis.
Weff,(-),min refers to sections where the moment is positive
Weff,(+),min refers to those where the moment is negative
It is important to know, that these section properties are calculated only when the section is in class 4.
It might happen that there is no stress causing plate buckling, but the properties will still be available
in the TableBrowser. Non-uniform members (variable cross-sections) in class 4 are calculated only if α
of the non-rectangular panels are not greater, than 10 degrees (EN 1993-1-5: 2.3).

It is assumed that the cross-sections do not have holes in them and are made of plates with a thick-
ness less than or equal to 40 mm.
The cross section should be constant or tapered. It is also assumed that the loads on single-symmetric
cross-sections act in the plane of symmetry, that is the plane of bending. For general shapes with no
plane of symmetry only Axial Force-Bending-Shear (N-M-V) and Compression-Bending-Buckling (N-M-
Buckling) is checked.
 AxisVM performs only the checks listed below. All the other checks specified in the design code
like constrained torsion, strutting forces, joints, etc. has to be completed by the user.
The principal axes of an arbitrary cross section have to be coincident with the local y and z axes.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 507

Classification of The program performs the classification of the cross-section based on EN 1993-1-1, Table 5.2.
cross-section Whenever possible, it determins the class based on the actual stress distribution of combined
compression and bending. If there is no compression in any point of the cross-section, it is
automatically classified as class 1.

Checks Axial Force-Bending-Shear [N-M-V] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.1, 6.2.8)

Compression-Bending-Buckling (flexural in plane or torsional) [N-M-Buckl.] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.3.3)
Axial force-Bending-Lateral Tors. Buckling [N-M-LTBuckl.] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.3.3)
Shear /y [Vy] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.6)
Shear /z [Vz] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.6)
Web Shear-Bending-Axial Force [Vw-M-N] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.1, 6.2.8)

Resistances Plastic resistance (axial) [Npl,Rd] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.4)

Effective resistance (when subjected to uniform compression) [Neff,Rd] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.4)
Elastic shear resistance /y axis [Vel,y,Rd] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.6)
Elastic shear resistance /z axis [Vel,z,Rd] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.6)
Plastic shear resistance /y axis [Vpl,y,Rd] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.6)
Plastic shear resistance /z axis [Vpl,z,Rd (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.6)
Shear web buckling [Vb,Rd] (EN 1993-1-5, 5.2-3)
Elastic moment Resistance /yy [Mel,y,Rd] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.5)
Elastic moment Resistance /zz [Mel,z,Rd] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.5)
Plastic moment Resistance /yy [Mpl,y, Rd] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.5)
Plastic moment Resistance /zz [Mpl,z,Rd] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.5)
Moment resistance for effective cross-section subjected to bending around axis y [Mpl,y, Rd]
(EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.5)
Moment resistance for effective cross-section subjected to bending around axis z [Mpl,z,Rd]
(EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.5)
Minimal buckling (flexural in plane or torsional) resistance [Nb,Rd] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.3.1)
Lateral torsional buckling resistance [Mb,Rd] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.3.2, ENV 1993-1-1, Appendix F1.2)

These information is given by the program as auxiliary results. The checks are mostly
defined by interaction formulae. The definition and the detailed conditions of the application of the
variables contained by the equations can be found in the design code.
In the following, 𝑁𝑅𝑘 = 𝑓𝑦 𝐴; 𝑀𝑦,𝑅𝑘 = 𝑓𝑦 𝑊𝑦 and 𝑀𝑧,𝑅𝑘 = 𝑓𝑦 𝑊𝑧
where 𝑊𝑦 = 𝑊𝑝𝑙,𝑦 and 𝑊𝑧 = 𝑊𝑝𝑙,𝑧 for class 1 or 2 cross sections,
𝑊𝑦 = 𝑊𝑒𝑙,𝑦 and 𝑊𝑧 = 𝑊𝑒𝑙,𝑧 for class 3 cross sections and
𝑊𝑦 = 𝑊𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑦 and 𝑊𝑧 = 𝑊𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑧 for class 4 cross sections.
508

Axial Force- The member can be in tension or in compression. The check is performed on the basis of
Bending-Shear EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.1 (7).
𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 + Δ𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ + ≤1
𝑁𝑅𝑘 /𝛾𝑀0 𝑀𝑦,𝑅𝑘 /𝛾𝑀0 𝑀𝑧,𝑅𝑘 /𝛾𝑀0

Δ𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 = 𝑁𝐸𝑑 ⋅ 𝑒𝑁,𝑦 : it differs from zero only when the cross section is in class 4 and the original cross
section is asymmetric to axis y.

High shear
If the shear force is greater than 50% of the shear resistance, the effect of shear force is considered as
detailed below.
For section class 1. and 2. allowance is made on the resistance moment accoding to EN 1993-1-1,
6.2.8.
For section class 3. and 4. stresses are calculated and the general and conservative formula in EN
1993-1-1, 6.2.1 (5) is applied. This is done for section types: I, T, C, box and pipe. For other section
types (L shape, rectangular and round sold shapes, and user defined shapes) the effect of hight shear
has to be calculated by the user.

Plastic resistance check

For I, pipe and box shaped secions in section class 1. and 2., the resistance check is performed accord-
ing to EN 1993-1-1 6.2.10. Allowance is made for the effect of both shear force and axial force on the
resistance moment. Besides resistance check of pure axial force and pure shear force, the following
criteria should be satisfied:
𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
≤ 1; ≤1
𝑀𝑁,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 𝑀𝑁,𝑧,𝑅𝑑

where 𝑀𝑁,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 , 𝑀𝑁,𝑧,𝑅𝑑 are reduced moment resistances based on the effect of shear force and axial
force (EN 1993-1-1 6.2.8. and 6.2.9.1). For pipe sections, the reduced moment is calculated as follows:
2
𝑛1.7 𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑉𝐸𝑑
𝑀𝑁,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 = 1.04 ⋅ (1 − 𝜌 − ) ; 𝑛 = ; 𝜌 = (2 − 1)
(1 − 𝜌)0.7 𝑁𝑝𝑙,𝑅𝑑 𝑉𝑝𝑙,𝑧,𝑅𝑑
2
𝑛1.7 𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑉𝐸𝑑
𝑀𝑁,𝑧,𝑅𝑑 = 1.04 ⋅ (1 − 𝜌 − ); 𝑛 = ; 𝜌 = (2 − 1)
(1 − 𝜌)0.7 𝑁𝑝𝑙,𝑅𝑑 𝑉𝑝𝑙,𝑦,𝑅𝑑

For bi-axial bending the criterion in EN 1993-1-1 6.2.9.1. (6) should be satisfied:
𝛼 𝛽
𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
[ ] +[ ] ≤1
𝑀𝑁,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 𝑀𝑁,𝑧,𝑅𝑑

Compression- The check is based on EN 1993-1-1, 6.3.3 (6.61) and (6.62):

Bending-Buckling 𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 + Δ𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ 𝑘𝑦𝑦 + 𝑘𝑦𝑧 ≤1
𝜒𝑦 𝑁𝑅𝑘 /𝛾𝑀1 𝑀𝑦,𝑅𝑘 /𝛾𝑀1 𝑀𝑧,𝑅𝑘 /𝛾𝑀1
𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 + Δ𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ 𝑘𝑧𝑦 + 𝑘𝑧𝑧 ≤1
𝜒𝑧 𝑁𝑅𝑘 /𝛾𝑀1 𝑀𝑦,𝑅𝑘 /𝛾𝑀1 𝑀𝑧,𝑅𝑘 /𝛾𝑀1
(𝜒𝐿𝑇 = 1.0)
∆𝑀𝑦 ,𝐸𝑑 = 𝑁𝐸𝑑 ∙ 𝑒𝑁 ,𝑦 differs from zero only when the cross section is in class 4 and the original cross
section is assymetric to axis y.
Axial Force- When determining the lateral-torsional buckling resistance, it is assumed that the cross section is
Bending-Lateral constant and symmetric to the local z axis. It is also assumed the the loads act in the plane of sym-
Torsional Buckling metry, that is the plane of bending (except for C/U cross sections, see below). The value of k (ENV
1993-1-1, F1.2) is taken equal to 𝐾𝑧 (buckling length factor). The weak axis should be the local z axis.

The check is based on the form of equations (6.61) and (6.62) of EN 1993-1-1, 6.3.3 :
𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 + Δ𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ 𝑘𝑦𝑦 + 𝑘𝑦𝑧 ≤1
𝜒𝑦 𝑁 /𝛾𝑀 𝜒𝐿𝑇 𝑀𝑦,𝑅𝑘 /𝛾𝑀 𝑀𝑧,𝑅𝑘 /𝛾𝑀
𝑅𝑘 1 1 1
𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 + Δ𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ 𝑘𝑧𝑦 + 𝑘𝑧𝑧 ≤1
𝜒𝑧 𝑁 /𝛾𝑀 𝜒𝐿𝑇 𝑀 /𝛾𝑀 𝑀𝑧,𝑅𝑘 /𝛾𝑀
𝑅𝑘 1 𝑦,𝑅𝑘 1 1

𝛥𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 = 𝑁𝐸𝑑 ⋅ 𝑒𝑁,𝑦 : it differs from zero only when the cross section is in class 4 and the original cross
section is asymmetric to axis y.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 509

𝜒𝐿𝑇 is calculated according to EN 1993-1-1 6.3.2.2 or 6.3.2.3.

As a default, the determination of the 𝑘𝑦𝑦 , 𝑘𝑦𝑧 , 𝑘𝑧𝑦 , 𝑘𝑧𝑧 interaction factors is based on EN 1993-1-1,
Appendix B Method 2 (Tables B.1 and B.2). Using Method 1 of Appendix A can be set in the Standard
window.
The equivalent uniform moment factors 𝐶𝑚𝑦 , 𝐶𝑚𝑧 , 𝐶𝑚𝐿𝑇 are listed in Table B.3.
For tensile axial force, the check is performed using the effective moments based on ENV 1993-1-1,
5.5.3.
The lateral torsional check of beams with U or C cross sections is based on the method of Snijder et al.
(Design rules for lateral torsional buckling of channel sections subject to web loading, Stahlbau, Vol. 77,
2008). The method assumes that the eccentric load is parallel to the web and acts in the plane of the
web. The method was derived for beams with UPE cross section in which the span-to-height ratio is
between 15 and 40.

The stability interaction formula is valid for beams that have an axis of symmetry in their plane of
bending. For C and U cross sections, the results are only informative.

 Compared to earlier versions of the software, the lateral torsional buckling of beams with C or U
cross section is no longer checked in the plane of symmetry, but it is checked for an eccentric
load that is parallel to the web, and that goes through the center of the web.
Shear /y The check is performed on the basis of EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.6.
𝑉𝑦,𝐸𝑑
≤1
𝑉𝑐,𝑦,𝑅𝑑
Elastic sections:
𝐼 ∙ 𝑡 𝑓𝑦
𝑉𝑐,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 =
𝑆 √3𝛾𝑀
0

Supported sections:
Plastic or non-supported sections:
𝑓𝑦
𝑉𝑐,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 = 𝐴𝑣
√3𝛾𝑀0

Shear /z The check is performed on the basis of EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.6.

𝑉𝑧𝐸𝑑
≤1
min(𝑉𝑐𝑧𝑅𝑑 , 𝑉𝑏𝑅𝑑 )
𝑉𝑏,𝑅𝑑 = 𝑉𝑏𝑤,𝑅𝑑 : The resistance is calculated with the contribution of the web but not the flanges.
Elastic sections:
𝐼 ∙ 𝑡 𝑓𝑦
𝑉𝑐,𝑧,𝑅𝑑 =
𝑆 √3𝛾𝑀
0

Supported sections:
Plastic or non-supported sections:
𝑓𝑦
𝑉𝑐,𝑧,𝑅𝑑 = 𝐴𝑣
√3𝛾𝑀0

Web Shear- The check is performed for cross-sections with web (I and box sections) based on EN 1993-1-5 7.1,
Bending-Axial Force 6.2.8, 6.2.9 assuming that the web is parallel to the local z axis.
2
𝑀𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑓𝑅𝑑 𝑉𝐸𝑑
+ (1 − ) ⋅ (2 − 1) ≤ 1
𝑀𝑝𝑙,𝑅𝑑 𝑀𝑝𝑙,𝑅𝑑 𝑉𝑏𝑤,𝑅𝑑

In case of high shear force or high axial force formulas in EN 1993-1-1 6.2.8, 6.2.9 are applied.
510

Basic section types

Section type N-M-V N-M- N-M- Shear Shear Shear Effective
Stress Buckling LT buckling Vy Vz buckling section
I ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Single
symmetric I
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
T ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — ✓
Box ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Welded box ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Pipe ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — —

L ✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ — —

L equal if bending acts in

✓ ✓ the plane of ✓ ✓ — —
symmetry

U ✓ ✓ approximative ✓ ✓ — —

C ✓ ✓ approximative ✓ ✓ — —

Round ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — —

Rectangular ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — —

(*)
Double-sections

Section type N-M-V N-M- N-M- Shear Shear Shear Effective

Stress Stability LT buckling Vy Vz buckling section
2I
✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ — —

2I
if a=0 → welded box ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2L
✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ — —

2L
if a=0 → T ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — ✓
2U opened ][
✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ — —

2U opened ][
if a=0 → I ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2U closed []
✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ — —

2U closed []
if a=0 → Box ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2LX
✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ — —
4X
✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ — —
4X
if a=0 → X
✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ — —
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 511

Other section types

Section type N-M-V N-M- N-M- Shear Shear Shear Effective

Stress Stability LT buckling Vy Vz buckling section
Z ✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ - -
J —
Asymmetric C —
Asymmetric Z —
S —
X ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — —
Arc ✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ — —
Half circle ✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ — —
Reg. polygon shape ✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ — —
(***)
Wedged I ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(**)
Complex/ Other ✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ — —

(*) For double-section types, it is assumed that the connection between the two elements is continuous
(EN 1993-1-1 6.4.4: Closely spaced built-up members), and the buckling check is performed accord-
ingly. If the distance between the two sections is zero, the program will assume that the connection
between the elements is continuous and will replace the two with one section (I, T, X or box). The
connection needs to be calculated by the user.
(**) These sections are designed only if local coordinates are the same as principal directions.

(***) Calculate with the total height of the cross-section, stiffening effect of the middle flange is neglected.

 If the manufacturing process of the section is cold-formed or other, the member is not de-
signed.
512

6.6.1.1. ULS design parameters

For the design based on Eurocode 3, the following design parameters should be defined and assigned
to the structural members to perform ULS checks:

ULS
(Ultimate Limit
State)

Cross-section
5
For the steel design, a cross-section size can be defined, that is different from the original cross-section
used for the static calculation. If the cross-section size is modified, the steel design checks will be per-
formed for the original internal forces and deflections, but with the modified cross-section size. Similar-
ly, in case of designing for fire, the original fire reduction factors are used (see… 6.6.2 Steel beam fire
design according to Eurocode 3 – SD8 module). When viewing the results, a modified steel design member
is indicated by a * after the name of the cross-section, to distinguish it from the original cross-section.
In the drop-down menu, we can select from the cross-section sizes, that were loaded earlier into the
model.

Clicking on this icon will allow us to load further cross-sections from the Cross-section library or by
defining a parametric shape. On the right side of this icon, the original cross-section sizes can be seen.
Design approach By section class (elastic/plastic): both elastic and plastic design methods are allowed, depending on the
section class of the structural member.

Elastic design: all checks use elastic design methods. Resistances are calculated from elastic cross-
section properties; in Class 4 effective cross-section properties are used.

Section class Automatic classification classifies the cross-section by the actual stress values.

Design member If the design member has a sway frame buckling mode in local x-y or x-z plane the respective bracing
bracing must be turned off. These settings affect the automatic flexural buckling calculation (AutoNcr), and in
case of lateral torsional buckling the lateral supports for the AutoMcr method. Furthermore, they affect
equivalent uniform moment factors Cmy and Cmz of the stability interaction check (EN 1993-1-1: 2005
Annex B: Method 2: Table B.3).

Assemble design The program assembles design members from the selected elements before performing design
members calculations. Design members consist of finite elements with the same material and local system
orientation. Finite elements must be on the same line.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 513

 Steel design members are not the same as the structural members (see... 3.2.14 Assemble structural mem-
bers)
The program allows two methods to define design members as follows:

Any node of a selection set of finite elements where another

finite element is connected will become an end-point of a
design member within the selection set of finite elements.

The finite elements in the selection set become one design

member irrespective of other finite elements connecting to
its nodes.

Factor for seismic forces see... 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module
Stability AxisVM performs checks against buckling, lateral-torsional buckling and web shear buckling. Each
parameters check can be activated separately by clicking on the checkbox before its name. For example, if it is sure
that there is no need to check lateral-torsional buckling that part of the check can be deactivated and
no parameters has to be specified.
Buckling To determine buckling resistance in y and z directions
(flexural) end support conditions must be defined.
There are three ways to specify buckling behaviour.

Ky, Kz buckling factors (effective length factors). The buckling factor will be multiplied by the length of
the design members and not the total length of the selected elements. Note that connecting elements
might lead to separation of a selected member into multiple design members (see Assemble design
members above)!
Ly, Lz buckling lengths. The entered buckling length will be used regardless of the length of the design
member. This often leads to more straightforward design in case of complex structures.
Auto. The buckling length of design members is calculated automatically. The so-called AutoNcr meth-
od determines buckling length based on the model geometry and the distribution of internal forces in
the model. The buckling length of each design members is calculated after considering the stabilizing
effect of connected other members. This method is based on the rules recommended by the European
Convention for Constructional Steelwork (ECCS TC8: Rules for Member Stability in EN 1993-1-1: Back-
ground documentation and design guidelines).
The original method was developed for vertical columns of simple frames. The improved algo-
rithm of AxisVM can handle any three dimensional structures but for special geometries the error can
be considerable. In such cases it is recommended to check if the calculated buckling length values are
within the expected range. For complex structures it is also advisable to determine the critical load
parameter solving an eigenvalue problem (see… 6.2 Buckling) or to perform a nonlinear analysis with
material nonlinearity and geometric imperfection.
The buckling length heavily depends on whether the design member has a sway buckling mode.
Check the Braced in local x-y / x-z plane checkboxes according to the sensitivity of the member to
second-order effects. It is important to recognize for instance that columns of a portal frame typically
buckle in sway mode in-plane, while its beam does not (because both endpoints are supported by the
columns).
AxisVM takes into account the effect of all beam elements (including steel beams with no steel
design parameters defined or non-steel beams). As a conservative assumption, all columns are consid-
ered to be in sway mode while all beams are in non-sway mode by default.
514

The algorithm takes into account hinges, rigid and semi-rigid connections. Nonlinear connec-
tions are represented by their initial stiffness. Nodal supports and constrained nodal degrees of free-
dom are also taken into account. Due to constrained nodal DOFs planar structures can show very small
buckling length for out of plane buckling. This is not an error but the consequence of the constrained
motion at the endpoints of finite elements. For planar structures it is recommended to specify the
buckling length for out of plane buckling or to model the actual supports instead of constraining nodal
DOFs.
The buckling length of design members is heavily affected by the distribution of internal forces.
As these forces are different in each load case and combination, the calculated buckling length also
depends on the selected load case or combination! Calculation speed can be increased in the concep-
tual design phase by neglecting the influence of internal force distribution; uncheck the Take N into
account checkbox in the Design Parameters dialog to do so. When the internal forces are not taken into
account, the design parameter under consideration is assumed to have uniform normal force distribu-
tion, while other members are assumed unloaded.
Limitations:
This buckling length calculation method can determine the critical load parameter only for structures
made of truss, beam or rib elements. Design members are considered to have piecewise constant
cross-section. The calculation method is not available for tapered beams yet. Effects from other types
of structural components (e.g. plates, springs, rigid bodies, line or surface supports) are ignored. Only
nodal supports are considered; the influence of line and surface supports is not taken into account.
Additional information on the automatic flexural buckling coefficient calculation tool is available from
the menu Help / AutoNcr Guide.

Lateral-torsional K is a factor related to the constraints against warping. Its value must be between 0.5 and 1.
buckling - if warping is not constrained it is 1.0.
- if warping is constrained at both ends of the beam, it is 0.5.
- if warping is constrained at one of the ends of the beam, it is 0.7.
See in detail: Appendix F1 of ENV 1993-1-1.

Calculation of Mcr Two options are available to calculate the critical moment of the lateral-torsional buckling (Mcr).
(critical moment)
1.) By formula
𝜋 2 𝐸𝐼𝑧 𝑘 2 𝐼𝑤 (𝑘𝐿)2 𝐺𝐼𝑡 2
𝑀𝑐𝑟 = 𝐶1 [ √( ) + 2 + (𝐶2 𝑧𝑔 − 𝐶3 𝑧𝑗 ) − (𝐶2 𝑧𝑔 − 𝐶3 𝑧𝑗 )]
(𝑘𝐿)2 𝑘𝑤 𝐼𝑧 𝜋 𝐸𝐼𝑧
Meaning of the parameters can be found in the literature or in the Appendix F1.2 of ENV 1993-1-1. The
value of 𝐶1 , 𝐶2 , 𝐶3 parameters depends on the shape of the moment curve and the k factors.
To enter parameter values choose Custom C1, C2, C3.
In certain cases 𝐶1 can be calculated automatically. Choose C1 Lopez formula from the Calculation meth-
od for Mcr combo. This option is not available if the steel structural member is a cantilever or 𝐾𝑧 > 1.
𝐶2 must be entered if external loads are applied to the structural member and the point of application
is not coincident with the shear center of the cross section. In case of a single-symmetric cross-section
𝐶3 shall also be entered. 𝐶 parameter values can be set using ENV 1993-1-1, F1.2.
2.) The AutoMcr method

This method makes a separate finite element model for each design member and calculates Mcr di-
rectly for each load combination making 𝐶1 , 𝐶2 , 𝐶3 unnecessary but increasing calculation time. This
method handles variable cross-sections and cantilevers as well. The finite element submodel of a
beam contains at least 30 finite elements where each node has four degrees of freedom essential to
determine lateral torsional buckling: 1) 𝜈, lateral shift in local y direction, 2) Θ𝑥 torsion, 3) Θ𝑧 lateral
rotation, 4) w, warping. This method builds the beam stiffness form two parts: the first one is linear, the
second one has geometric nonlinearity.
It applies loads with their eccentricity then reduces the calculation to an eigenvalue problem. The
method is developed for bending constant cross-sections in their plane of symmetry, so for variable
cross-sections the program creates the appropriate number of finite elements. [See Yvan Galea: Mo-
ment critique de deversement elastique de poutres flechies presentation du logiciel ltbeam, CTICM, 2003]
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 515

Lateral supports AxisVM determines the support conditions for the submodel
automatically by default.
Alternatively, the following methods may be chosen:
Estimated from kz, kw: the position of the supports are estimat-
ed similarly a sin version 12 of AxisVM;
Fork supports at both ends;
User defined: the user may edit/define the supports.
The four stiffness components of a lateral supports are 𝑅𝑦 , 𝑅𝑥𝑥 , 𝑅𝑧𝑧 , 𝑅𝑤 .
It the mentioned option above was set to Automatic, the program determines the support conditions
as follows:
Model support: based on the supports along the beam defined earlier in the Elements tab; the 𝑅𝑦 , 𝑅𝑥𝑥
and 𝑅𝑧𝑧 values are directly taken from the support stiffness values, while 𝑅𝑤 = 0.
Connecting elements: line and shell elements directly connected to the designed member provide
some support against lateral torsional buckling. The estimated support stiffness values are summarized
in the AutoMcr Guide. See Help / AutoMcr Guide
Limitations:
The submodel does not take into account the effect of nodal DOFs.
Without having proper supports the submodel has no stability against lateral torsional buckling. To
avoid this kind of instability the following conditions must be met: 1) 𝑅𝑦 is nonzero in at least one
point and 𝑅𝑦 or 𝑅𝑧𝑧 is nonzero in another one. 2) 𝑅𝑥𝑥 is nonzero in at least one point.
If the first condition is not met, the default settings are applied: 𝑅𝑦 and 𝑅𝑥𝑥 is rigid at both ends. It is
an approximation of the 𝑘𝑧 = 𝑘𝑤 = 1 in the ENV formula. For a cantilever beam, the default setting is a
support on one end with rigid 𝑅𝑦 , 𝑅𝑥𝑥 and 𝑅𝑧𝑧 .

If the second condition is not met, i. e. no torsional support was defined, the default setting is to make
𝑅𝑥𝑥 rigid at one end.
Lateral support conditions can be edited by clicking the … button.
A dialog appears with a table of lateral supports of the design members created from the selection.
Design members are listed on the left. The table shows the lateral supports of the selected item.
The last item of the list is Same supports on selected elements. Selecting this item the table shows only
the common supports on the selected design members. Adding or deleting supports will change the
support configuration of all selected design members.
Add new support.
Adds a new line to the table and allows entering support properties.
Delete selected supports.
Deletes selected rows of the table.

The following properties can be edited: support position, eccentricity of the support in z direction
relative to the center of gravity of the cross-section, stiffness components. The last column shows the
support type:

Additional support was defined by the user.

Support from model refers to a nodal support connected to the design member.
Connecting element refers to a truss, beam or rib element connecting to the design member.
Default support refers to supports created automatically when the first condition was not met.
Default torsional support refers to supports created automatically when the second condition was not
met.
516

The table displays connecting elements even if the angle between their axis and the design member
axis is greater than 15°, but only if the direction vector of the connecting element has a nonzero com-
ponent in the local y axis of the design member (lateral support). So if the design member is a horizon-
tal beam, vertical columns and other horizontal beams in line with the design member will not appear
in the table.
Table fields allow entering numbers and certain parametric values as well:
Pos. L is the length of the design member. So relative position can be entered like L/2 or 2*L/3.
Exc. h is the cross-section height. So eccentricity can be entered like h/2 or 2*h/3.
R… Stiffness components: m will be interpreted as 1E+10.
In case of a connecting element with a length of a and an E*I stiffness 6*EI/a can be entered.

Right click on a list item on the left for additional operations Right click on a table row for additional operations

Continuous lateral support

If a plate (e.g. metal roof panel) is connected to the designed member, its stiffness can be considered
as a continuous lateral support.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 517

In the Continuous lateral support window, the position, the eccentricity and the stiffness of the plate
can be defined. By checking the Apply to all, the support will be added to all the selected steel desing
members. Otherwise, it will be added only to the design member, that is selected in the Lateral support
window.

The continuous support is converted to individual supports by the program. The density of the
individual supports can be defined by the user (Min. number of the supports per meter, n). The
individual supports on the end of the plate have half of the stiffnes, as those in the middle.

 Changing the Assemble design members option will redefine design members so lateral sup-
ports will be reset to default values and all modifications will be lost.

Version 12 estimated support conditions from kz and kw values. Models created with this version will
appear with Estimated from kz, kw setting.
In order to help using and understanding the AutoMcr method and defining the lateral supports cor-
rectly, guidelines and examples can be found in the AutoMcr Guide. See Help / AutoMcr Guide

Load position Za is the z coordinate of the point of application of the transversal load (relative to the center of gravity
of the cross-section), based on ENV 1993-1-1, Figure F1.1. It is a signed value and must be defined as
the ratio of this distance to the height of the cross-section. The positions of the center of gravity and
the top or bottom of the cross section can also be chosen by radio-buttons.

Web Shear For shapes with webs, the web can be supported or not with stiffeners:
Buckling No stiffeners: assumes no transversal stiffeners along the structural member.
Transversal stiffeners: In any cases the program assumes that there are transversal stiffeners (non-rigid
end post) at the ends of the structural members (e.g. at the supports).
You can see coefficient of seimic forces at 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module.

6.6.1.2. SLS design parameters

The parameters for the serviceability limit state (SLS) checks can be set on the SLS tab in the Design
parameters window.
SLS
(serviceability limit
state)
518

The program checks the deflections of beams and the horizontal displacements of columns. Inclined
steel design members are categorized by the angle between their centerline and the horizontal plane. If
this angle is above α = 45°, then the member is considered a column, and if it is below α = 45°, then it is
considered a beam. This α value can be modified at Checking inclined members.
 If the critical load combinations are generated automatically, the program performs the SLS
checks in the characteristic load combinations.
Vertical deflections Deflections can be checked according to the z or y local axis directions of the steel design member. The
check in each direction can be activated/deactivated by checking/unchecking the box before the limit
values. The deflection limit values shall be set according to the length (L) detailed below.
Deflections can be considered in several ways: based on the actual displacements or based on the
displacements relative only to the left, only to the right or to both endpoints of the design member.
Length (L) Deflections of a design member and the deflection limits (e.g. L/300) are based on one of the chosen
length values below:
Design member length: L is equal to the length of the design member;
Based on connecting members and supports: If the Assemble design members parameter in the ULS tab
is set to the first option (members are broken at connecting elements and supports), then this length is
equal to the design member’s length, and thus this is the same as the length above. If it is set to the
second option (the selected beams are checked as one design member), then the program checks if
there are any supports or connecting members along the design member in the direction of the
deflection check that prevents the deflection of the design member. Between these, the SLS check is
performed for each section of the member. For example, checking a 15-meter-long beam, if there are
supporting columns in the endpoints and at one-third of the length of the beam, then the program
performs SLS checks separately for the first 5-meter-long section and the remaining 10-meter-long
section of the beam.
Custom length: any value can be entered.
Pre-camber Pre-camber can be defined for the design members, where the pre-camber amounts (uz and uy) are
interpreted in the local coordinate-system. The shape of the pre-camber can be set with three para-
meters: Quadratic or Linear curves may be chosen, for which the maximum value (u) and its location
along the member (xmax) shall also be defined by the user. As an exception, if the actual displacements
are set by the user (e.g. only a section of a beam is selected as a design member), then the pre-camber
values are constant along the length. If the length L is set to the design member length or to a custom
length, the pre-camber is zero in the endpoints of the design members. If L is Based on connecting
members and supports, the pre-camber will be zero in the endpoints and at the supports found by the
program in the relevant direction.
 It is important to note, that the pre-camber value set here has an effect in the SLS checks only, by
reducing the previously calculated deflections that is based on the original shape.
Horizontal dis- Horizontal displacements can be checked in two directions at a time, according to the global or local
placements coordinate system. If the global coordinate system is chosen, the program checks the displacements in
horizontal X and Y axis directions. If the local coordinate system is chosen, then the horizontal
components of the deflections (wx and wy) are checked in the local z and y directions of the design
member.
The height (H), along which the program performs displacement checks, can be the whole length of the
structure, or only the height of the design member or the level. In the first case, the actual deflections
are considered, while in the latter cases, only the relative displacements along the considered height are
checked. In case of inclined members, the height is defined as the vertical component of the design
member length. The height can be set by the user:
• Design member length (relative horizontal displacements);
• Height of the entire structure (actual horizontal displacements);
• Measured from height h (actual horizontal displacements).
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 519

6.6.1.3. Diagrams and design calculations

Diagrams You can display the diagrams corresponding to all individual checks and their envelope by clicking on
the steel design member. Results for any position of any steel design member in any load case or com-
bination can be obtained by setting the combo boxes and dragging the tracking line. If a check cannot
be performed with the current cross-section the respective diagram is replaced by a cross.

Design calcula- Clicking on the Design calculations button a report of the calculation details can be displayed. All
tions strength and stability checks appear as formulas completed with substituted actual values and refer-
ences to the design code.
The report consists of the six basic interaction checks listed above and several partial results which
make it easier to follow the calculations and provide useful details for cross-section optimization.
The partial results are:
1. Axial Plastic Resistance
2. Plastic Moment Resistance about the y axis
3. Plastic Moment Resistance about the z axis
4. Plastic Shear Resistance in z direction
5. Bending-shear interaction check
6. Bending-axial force interaction check
7. Flexural Buckling Resistance
8. Lateral-Torsional Buckling Resistance

Clicking on the Settings icon beside the Design calculations button allows setting the basic units for
force and length used in the design calculations. Important results also appear converted to standard
AxisVM units (see… 3.3.8 Units and Formats).
520

Design calculations The details of calculations according to the current design code are displayed as a multi-page docu-
ment. References to sections and formulas of the design code appear in blue.

This window can be resized.

Substitution Substitution into formulae can be turned on / off. Eliminating substitution makes the report somewhat
shorter.
Select the font size of the report.

Prints the design calculation.

Clicking on this icon adds the design calculation to the current report.

6.6.1.4. Steel cross-section optimization - SD9 module

SD9 module requires SD1 module.

Cross-section optimization of steel structures makes steel design members previously defined and
designed more efficient by fine-tuning cross-section dimensions and reducing self weight.

 Optimization checks the design members for the same internal forces ignoring stiffness changes
due to changing dimensions. In certain structures recalculation of the model may show consid-
erable changes in internal force patterns. In these cases several consecutive optimizations may
find the more efficient structure.

Optimization uses the steel design parameters previously assigned to the design members.
Cross-section types suitable for optimization are: I, asymmetric I, rectangular, T, C, 2U shapes and pipes.
Variable cross-sections cannot be optimized.

Optimization groups The first step of the optimization is to create optimization groups from the existing steel design mem-
bers. Each member of an optimization group must have the same cross-section and optimization will
assign the same cross-section to the group members. The actual optimization can be started from the
second tab (Optimization).
The list of optimization groups (see it on the left side of the Design optimization groups tab) shows the
common cross-section and the number of design members within the group (<n>). Select a group and
set the optimization parameters on the right (see below).
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 521

Objective Objective of optimization can be (1) minimum weight, (2) minimum height or (3) minimum width.
of optimization
This defines the objective function. The process will seach for the cross-section with a utilization <1 for
all group members and closest to the objective. This cross-section is called optimized cross-section. The
objective is reached separately for each group.
A maximum of utilization can also be set. Limiting the utilization can help when optimizing statically
indeterminate structures where cross-section modifications can cause big changes in internal forces.
Optimization It is possible to ignore certain checks during the optimization process. All strength checks are always
checks performed but checks for flexural buckling, lateral torsional buckling and web buckling can be deactiva-
ted.
Optimization types There are two ways to define the range of cross-sections to be checked. Optimization from predefined
shapes works on a given number of cross-sections while Parametric optimization finds the optimal
shape within different geometry parameter ranges.

Optimization from This method finds the optimal cross-section from a given number of predefined shapes. Candidates can
predefined shapes be selected from model cross-sections and from the library. Candidates must have the same cross-
section type as the original cross-section of the group.
The range of candidates can be reduced by setting Constraints. Only cross-sections between the limits
for height and width will be used as candidates (other sections will appear greyed).

If a group contains more than one design member all members will be checked. Members are checked
along their entire length. Not all candidates will be checked. The program analyses only those ne-
cessary for finding the global optimum.

Parametric This method finds the optimal cross-section within different geometry parameter ranges.
optimization Many different optimum search algorithms are known and used successfully for optimizing frame
structures. Due to the nonlinearity of the problem and the large number of local optimums it is hard to
find a global optimum with pure mathematics. It is even harder if the optimization has to perform not
only strength checks but also stability analysis.
AxisVM uses the so called Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO), a stochastic computational method for
finding optimum. It is an evolutionary algorithm developed in the 1990s.
The PSO process runs for a given number of iterations and due to its stochastic nature it can find mul-
tiple local optimums. The number of iterations is determined by the program trying to balance running
time and the fullest possible mapping of the search-space. Moreover if the algorithm finds no changes
in the result after a long period it assumes that it is the global optimum and quits. In multi-threaded
mode the search space is partitioned among the threads.
522

The algorithm estimates the necessary number of iterations and selects the optimization method. It can
be either a simple linear search or a PSO optimization. The decision is based on the following parame-
ters: (1) size of the search space, (2) iteration step size, (3) number of fixed parameters, (4) the objective
of the optimization, (5) single- or multi-threaded mode (see Settings / Preferences / Analysis) (6) range
of beams taken into account (all or x% of the most efficient beams). Reducing the number of beams
taken into account make the calculation faster but reduces the precision. This is useful if optimization
groups consist of many members with different utilization and the utilization comes from a check which
is also performed in the optimization.

In case of PSO optimization the user can set a custom

Number of iterations, checking Custom.

The calculation can start parallel search processes using all processor cores going through the search
space faster. A typical graph for the optimization process is like this:

The blue line shows the decreasing population diversity on a reversed scale, the filled graph displays
the fitness value in the percentage of the initial (the lower the better). If fitness value does not change
through many iterations and the population diversity is small we can accept the current result by
jumping to the optimization of the next group or pressing Esc to quit optimization.
Skip to the next group. Stops the optimization of the current group and jumps to the next one.

The current status is considered to be the result.

Stop the optimization. Stops the entire optimization. The current status of each group is considered to
be the result. Same as pressing the Esc key.

The advantage and drawback of this algorithm is its stochastic nature. Running the optimization mul-
tiple times for the same problem can lead to slightly different results. This tendency is stronger in large
search-spaces. For small search spaces like pipes within a narrow size range a simple linear search is
made (analysing all candidates for finding the best one).

Setting constraints Cross-section parameter constraints and increments

can be defined. Clicking on the lock icon locks the
parameter to its original value. To set any parameter
to a desired value set the lower and upper bound to
the same value.
The algorithm tries to find a cross-section which is as
close to the maximum utilization as possible and is
closest to the selected objective of optimization.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 523

Too big intervals and/or too small increments makes the search space extremely large and as a result,
the calculation time increases and/or the convergence slows down. So it is important to set the ranges
around the estimated optimum.
If an optimization group contains multiple design members, the overall utilization will be the highest
utilization of the members. Therefore it is not recommended to place members with very different
length or internal forces into the same optimization group.

Optimization After setting the parameters go to the Optimization tab to run the optimization for the selected load
case, combination, envelope or critical combination.

The table displays the group parameters and the results of the optimization (weight per length unit,
weight reduction, width and height. The Opt. column can be used to control which group is to be opti-
mized.
If optimization was based on predefined shapes a dropdown list can be opened with all checked and
usable cross-sections sorted from higher utilization to lower.
The Replace column controls which cross-sections are to be replaced. Clicking on the Replace cross-
sections button will actually replace the cross-sections in the selected groups.

 Cross-section optimization may be a time-consuming task depending on the range of candidates

and the size of groups so in case of a large search space (e.g. parametric optimization) it is rec-
ommended not to choose the slower AutoMcr method for lateral buckling calculations.

6.6.2. Steel beam fire design according to Eurocode 3 – SD8 module

Standards AxisVM performs steel fire design according to different national codes. In case of Eurocode National
Annexes that are not listed below, general rules of EN 1993-1-2 are considered.

EN 1993-1-2
Eurocode
Eurocode 3: Design of steel strucutures
Part 1-2: Strucutural fire design

EC DIN EN 1993-1-2:2010-12 NA
German

EC SZ EN 1993-1-2:2013 NA
Hungarian

EC SR EN 1993-1-2:2006/NB:2008
Romanian

EC STN EN 1993-1-2/NA:2008
Slovakian

EC PN EN 1993-1-2 NA
Polish

EC BS EN 1993-1-2:2005 NA
British

EC SFS-EN 1993-1-2:2005 NA
Finnish
524

Fire design of steel Steel beam fire design (SD8 module) is based on the ”ordinary” steel beam design (SD1 module;
structures according see… 6.6.1 Steel beam design according to Eurocode 3 – SD1 module), so SD1 module is a prerequisite to
to EN 1993-1-2 use SD8 module.
EN 1993-1-2 (EC3-1-2) discusses fire design of steel structures. EC3-1-2 is very close to EN 1993-1-1, so
we note only the difference.
Steel beam fire design can be performed in AxisVM if 1) the selected load combination includes a fire
load case (4.10.1 Load cases, load groups) 2) if a fire effect has been assigned to any of the selected ele-
ments (4.10.29 Fire effect on steel elements – SD8 module) in that fire load case. If different fire effects have
been assigned to elements of a design member, an error message appears and fire design cannot be
performed.
If the selection contains elements without fire effect the ordinary steel design will be performed on
them. Certain steel fire design parameters also has to be assigned to the elements (see below).
Member analysis EC3-1-2 discusses different methods: member analysis, analysis of a part of the structure and analysis of
the entire structure. Member analysis is the most widespread verification method due to its simplicity.
Analysis of a part or whole of the structure usually requires complex nonlinear numerical models and
nonlinear statical analysis.
Guiding principles of member analysis according to EC3-1-2:
• Design member internal forces can be calculated with linear static analysis;
• „Only the effects of thermal deformations resulting from thermal gradients across the cross-
section need to be considered. The effects of axial or in-plain thermal expansions may be neg-
lected.” (EC3-1-2, 2.4.2 (4));
• „The boundary conditions at supports and ends of member may be assumed to remain
unchanged throughout the fire exposure.” (EC3-1-2, 2.4.2 (5)).
SD8 performs member analysis. It has to be checked if that structure/structural part can be verified with
member analysis according to the guidelines of EC3-1-2.
In certain cases analysis of a part of the structure can be also executed in AxisVM if 1) boundary condi-
tions are set carefully, 2) fire effects are taken into account as thermal load and 3) we consider the
guidelines in section 2.4.3 of EC3-1-2.
ky,θ, kE, ky,θ,4 According to the EC3-1-2, the following reduction factors for mechanical properties of carbon steels are
considered in steel fire design in AxisVM:
• ky,θ – reduction factor for yield strength (Class 1, 2 and 3 cross-sections), relative to yield
strength at 20 °C;
• ky,θ,4 – reduction factor for yield strength (Class 4 cross-section), relative to yield strength at 20
°C;
• kE – reduction factor for Young’s modulus, relative to Young’s modulus at 20 °C.
It has to be noted that in case of the design of stainless steel different reduction factors need to be
used.
θs [°C] ky,θ ky,θ,4 kE
20 1.000 1.000 1.000
100 1.000 1.000 1.000
200 1.000 0.890 0.900
300 1.000 0.780 0.800
400 1.000 0.650 0.700
500 0.780 0.530 0.600
600 0.470 0.300 0.310
700 0.230 0.130 0.130
800 0.110 0.070 0.090
900 0.060 0.050 0.0675
1000 0.040 0.030 0.045
1100 0.020 0.020 0.0225
1200 0.000 0.000 0.000
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 525

Steel fire design For the fire design based on EC3-1-2, fire design parameters should be defined and assigned to the
parameters structural members. Cick the button displayed below in red rectangle.
This button is visible only if
1) SD8 module is part of the configuration and
2) steel fire design according to the current design code is supported.
The button adds an additional panel on the right side. If it remains hidden, fire design of the element
will not be performed.

Buckling coefficients in fire

Flexural buckling It is possible to define different buckling length or buckling length coefficient for the calculation of
buckling resistance about y and z axes in fire, as deflection of the element is often prevented by thin-
walled elements (purlins, etc.) that lose their stiffness very quickly on elevated temperature. The defini-
tion/calculation of buckling length is the same as in case of normal temperature design (blue rectangle).
If the automatic buckling length calculation is selected, the fire design module uses the same buckling
length as in normal temperature design.
If Flexural buckling is checked, buckling resistance calculation and verification are performed on both
normal and elevated temperature.
Lateral-torsional 𝐾_𝜔: factor related to the constraints against warping can be different on elevated temperature.
buckling If Lateral-torsional buckling is checked, resistance calculation and verification are performed on both
normal and elevated temperature.
Mcr – critical Different parameters can be defined for the consideration and calculation of critical bending moment,
bending moment The way of calculation of critical bending moment and load position are the same as in normal temper-
ature design (blue rectangle).
If AutoMcr is selected, automatically calculated or user defined lateral supports are taken into account
by the calculation of Mcr.
Flexural buckling + Verification against flexural torsional buckling is performed if Flexural buckling and Lateral-torsional
Lateral-torsional buckling are checked and the stability parameters are defined. The verification method is explained
bucklings below. Equivalent uniform moment factors (βM,y, βM,z and βM,LT of EC3-1-2; Fig. 4.2) need to be defined. It
is possible to calculate these factors automatically based on the bending moment diagram.

Check only EN 1993-1-1 and EN 1993-1-2 standards are similar, but EN 1993-1-2 does not discuss verification in
prescribed failure several failure modes (e.g. strength failure caused by internal forces in interaction with each other or
modes shear web buckling failure). According to the relevant literature, EN 1993-1-1 verification formulae can
be used in these cases but with reduced yield strength and Young’s modulus. Nevertheless, these ve-
rifications are not prescribed by the code.
If Check only prescribed failure modes is checked, only EC3-1-2 design checks are performed.
526

Classification of AxisVM classifies cross-sections according to Table 5.2 of EN 1993-1-1. In case of fire design, the ε pa-
cross-sections rameter is calculated according to EC3-1-2:
235
𝜀 = 0.85√
𝑓𝑦

Design checks in fire SD8 performs the following design checks:

Check only pre- Axial force-Bending-Shear [N-M-V] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.1, 6.2.9.3)
scribed failure (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.1-4.2.3, Annex E)
modes Compression-Bending-Buckling (flexural in plane or torsional) [N-M-Buck] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.5, Annex E)
Axial force-Bending-Lateral Tors. Buckling [N-M-LTBuckl] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.5, Annex E)
Shear /y [Vy] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, 4.2.3.4, Annex E)
Shear /z [Vz] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, 4.2.3.4, Annex E)

Check only Axial force-Bending-Shear [N-M-V] (EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.1, 6.2.8, 6.2.9.3)
prescribed failure (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.1-4.2.3, Annex E)
modes Compression-Bending-Buckling (flexural in plane or torsional) [N-M-Buck] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.5, Annex E)
Axial force-Bending-Lateral Tors. Buckling [N-M-LTBuckl] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.5, Annex E)
Shear /y [Vy] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, 4.2.3.4, Annex E)
Shear /z [Vz] (EN 1993-1-5, 5.1-5.3)
(EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, 4.2.3.4, Annex E)
Web shear-Bending-Axial force [Vw-M-N]
(EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.1, 6.2.8, 6.2.9)
(EN 1993-1-5, 5.1-5.3, 7.1)
(EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.1-4.2.3, Annex E)

Resistances
Plastic resistance (axial) [Npl,fi,Rd] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.1, Annex E)
Effective resistance (when subjected to uniform compression) [Neff, fi,Rd] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.1, Annex E)
Elastic Shear Resistance /y axis [Vel,fi,y,Rd]
(EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.6, EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, 4.2.3.4, Annex E)
Elastic Shear Resistance /z axis [Vel,fi,z,Rd]
(EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.6, EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, 4.2.3.4, Annex E)
Plastic Shear Resistance /y axis [Vpl,fi,y,Rd]
(EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.6, EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, 4.2.3.4, Annex E)
Plastic Shear Resistance /z axis [Vpl,fi,z,Rd]
(EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.6, EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, 4.2.3.4, Annex E)
Shear Web Buckling [Vb,fi,Rd] (EN 1993-1-5, 5.1-5.3, EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, 4.2.3.4, Annex E)

Elastic Moment Resistance /yy [Mel,fi,y,Rd] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.4, Annex E)

Elastic Moment Resistance /zz [Mel,fi,z,Rd] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.4, Annex E)
Plastic Moment Resistance /yy [Mpl,fi,y, Rd] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, Annex E)
Plastic Moment Resistance /zz [Mpl,fi,z,Rd] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, Annex E)
Moment Resistance for effective cross-section subjected to bending around axis y [Meff,fi,y, Rd]
(EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, 4.2.3.4, Annex E)
Moment Resistance for effective cross-section subjected to bending around axis z [Meff,fi,z,Rd]
(EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, 4.2.3.4, Annex E)
Minimal Buckling (flexural in plane or torsional) Resistance [Nb,fi,Rd] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.2, Annex E)
Lateral Torsional Buckling Resistance [Mb,fi,Rd] (EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, 4.2.3.4, Annex E)
Critical temperature [θcr] (EN 1993-1-2)
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 527

Axial force-Bending-
Shear
Check only Elastic design check (Class 3 cross-sections)
prescribed failure General formula:
modes
𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ + ≤1
𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃
𝐴 𝑊𝑒𝑙,𝑦 𝑊𝑒𝑙,𝑧
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
If shear force is greater than 50% of the shear resistance or torsional moment is present, the following
yield condition is checked (only for I, T, C, box and pie sections):
2 2 2
𝜎𝑥,𝐸𝑑 𝜎𝑧,𝐸𝑑 𝜎𝑥,𝐸𝑑 𝜎𝑧,𝐸𝑑 𝜏𝐸𝑑
( ) +( ) −( )( )+ 3( ) ≤1
𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 ⁄𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 ⁄𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 ⁄𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 ⁄𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 ⁄𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖

Elastic design check (class 4 cross-sections)

General formula:

𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 + Δ𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑

+ + ≤1
𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4
𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝑊𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑦 𝑊𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑧
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
If the shear force is greater than 50% of the shear resistance or torsional moment is present, the
following yield condition is checked (only for I, T, C, box and pie sections):
2 2 2
𝜎𝑥,𝐸𝑑 𝜎𝑧,𝐸𝑑 𝜎𝑥,𝐸𝑑 𝜎𝑧,𝐸𝑑 𝜏𝐸𝑑
( ) +( ) −( )( ) +3( ) ≤1
𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 ⁄𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 ⁄𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 ⁄𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 ⁄𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 ⁄𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖

∆𝑀𝑦 ,𝐸𝑑 = 𝑁𝐸𝑑 ∙ 𝑒𝑁 ,𝑦 : it differs from zero only when the cross section is in Class 4 and the original cross-
section is asymmetric to axis y.
Plastic design check
For I, pipe and box secions in section Class 1 and 2, the resistance check is performed according to EN
1993-1-1 6.2.10 and EC3-1-2. Allowance is made for the effect of both shear force and axial force on the
resistance moment. Beyond the resistance check of pure axial force and pure shear force, the following
criteria should also be satisfied:
𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
≤ 1; ≤1
𝑀𝑁,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 𝑀𝑁,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑
where MN,fi,y,Rd, MN,fi,z,Rd are reduced moment resistances based on the effect of shear force and axial
force (EN 1993-1-1 6.2.8. and 6.2.9.1). For pipe sections, the reduced moment is calculated as follows:
2
𝑛1.7 𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑉𝐸𝑑
𝑀𝑁,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 = 1.04 ⋅ (1 − 𝜌 − ) ; 𝑛 = ; 𝜌 = (2 − 1)
(1 − 𝜌)0.7 𝑁𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 𝑉𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑
2
𝑛1.7 𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑉𝐸𝑑
𝑀𝑁,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑 = 1.04 ⋅ (1 − 𝜌 − ); 𝑛 = ; 𝜌 = (2 − 1)
(1 − 𝜌)0.7 𝑁𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 𝑉𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑

For bi-axial bending the criterion in EN 1993-1-1 6.2.9.1. (6) should be satisfied (I, box and pipe shaped
cross-sections):
𝛼 𝛽
𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
[ ] +[ ] ≤1
𝑀𝑁,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 𝑀𝑁,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑
Other cross-section types:
𝐴𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝑊𝑝𝑙,𝑦 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝑊𝑝𝑙,𝑧 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃
𝑁𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 = ; 𝑀𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 = ; 𝑀𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑 =
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ + ≤1
𝑁𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 𝑀𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 𝑀𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑
If the shear force is greater than 50% of the shear resistance, the bending moment resistance is
reduced considering the effect of shear force according to EN 1993-1-1 6.2.8. and EC3-1-2 (MV,fi,y,Rd,
MV,fi,z,Rd).
528

Check only Elastic design check (class 3 cross-sections)

prescribed failure 𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ + ≤1
modes 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃
𝐴 𝑊𝑒𝑙,𝑦 𝑊𝑒𝑙,𝑧
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
𝑉𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑉𝑧,𝐸𝑑
≤ 1; ≤1
𝑉𝑒𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 𝑉𝑒𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑
Elastic design check (class 4 cross-sections)
𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 + Δ𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ + ≤1
𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4
𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝑊𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑦 𝑊𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑧
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
𝑉𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑉𝑧,𝐸𝑑
≤ 1; ≤1
𝑉𝑒𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 𝑉𝑒𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑
Plastic design check
𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ + ≤1
𝑁𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 𝑀𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 𝑀𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑
𝑉𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑉𝑧,𝐸𝑑
≤ 1; ≤1
𝑉𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 𝑉𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑

Compression- According to EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.5 (4.21a, c):

Bending-Buckling
Elastic design check (class 3 cross-sections)
𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ 𝑘𝑦 + 𝑘𝑧 ≤1
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝜒𝑚𝑖𝑛,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝑊𝑒𝑙,𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝑊𝑒𝑙,𝑧 𝑘𝑦,𝜃
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
𝜇𝑦 𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝜇𝑧 𝑁𝐸𝑑
𝑘𝑦 = 1 − ≤ 3; 𝑘𝑧 = 1 − ≤3
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝜒𝑦,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝜒𝑧,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑘𝑦,𝜃
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
Elastic design check (class 4 cross-sections)
𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 + Δ𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ 𝑘𝑦 + 𝑘𝑧 ≤1
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝜒𝑚𝑖𝑛,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 𝑊𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 𝑊𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑧 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
𝜇𝑦 𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝜇𝑧 𝑁𝐸𝑑
𝑘𝑦 = 1 − ≤ 3; 𝑘𝑧 = 1 − ≤3
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝜒𝑦,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 𝜒𝑧,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
Plastic design check
𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ 𝑘𝑦 + 𝑘𝑧 ≤1
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝜒𝑚𝑖𝑛,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝑊𝑝𝑙,𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝑊𝑝𝑙,𝑧 𝑘𝑦,𝜃
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
𝜇𝑦 𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝜇𝑧 𝑁𝐸𝑑
𝑘𝑦 = 1 − ≤ 3; 𝑘𝑧 = 1 − ≤3
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝜒𝑦,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝜒𝑧,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑘𝑦,𝜃
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
where
𝜇𝑦 = (2𝛽𝑀,𝑦 − 5)𝜆̅𝑦,𝜃 + 0.44𝛽𝑀,𝑦 + 0.29 ≤ 0.8
𝜇𝑧 = (1.2𝛽𝑀,𝑦 − 3)𝜆̅𝑧,𝜃 + 0.71𝛽𝑀,𝑧 − 0.29 ≤ 0.8
The calculation of χy,fi and χz,fi reduction factors is according to EC3-1-2 4.2.3.2.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 529

Axial force-Bending- According to EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.5 (4.21b, d):

Lateral-torsional Elastic design check (class 3 cross-sections)
buckling 𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ 𝑘𝐿𝑇 + 𝑘𝑧 ≤1
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝜒𝑧,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝜒𝐿𝑇,𝑓𝑖 𝑊𝑒𝑙,𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝑊𝑒𝑙,𝑧 𝑘𝑦,𝜃
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
𝜇𝐿𝑇 𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝜇𝑧 𝑁𝐸𝑑
𝑘𝐿𝑇 = 1 − ≤ 3; 𝑘𝑧 = 1 − ≤3
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝜒𝑧,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝜒𝑧,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑘𝑦,𝜃
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
Elastic design check (class 4 cross-sections)
𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 + Δ𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ 𝑘𝐿𝑇 + 𝑘𝑧 ≤1
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝜒𝑧,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 𝜒𝐿𝑇,𝑓𝑖 𝑊𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 𝑊𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑧 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
𝜇𝐿𝑇 𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝜇𝑧 𝑁𝐸𝑑
𝑘𝐿𝑇 = 1 − ≤ 3; 𝑘𝑧 = 1 − ≤3
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝜒𝑧,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4 𝜒𝑧,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
Plastic design check
𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑧,𝐸𝑑
+ 𝑘𝐿𝑇 + 𝑘𝑧 ≤1
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝜒𝑧,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝜒𝐿𝑇,𝑓𝑖 𝑊𝑝𝑙,𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝑊𝑝𝑙,𝑧 𝑘𝑦,𝜃
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
𝜇𝐿𝑇 𝑁𝐸𝑑 𝜇𝑧 𝑁𝐸𝑑
𝑘𝐿𝑇 = 1 − ≤ 3; 𝑘𝑧 = 1 − ≤3
𝑓𝑦 𝑓𝑦
𝜒𝑧,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑘𝑦,𝜃 𝜒𝑧,𝑓𝑖 𝐴𝑘𝑦,𝜃
𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖 𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖
where
𝜇𝐿𝑇 = 0.15𝜆̅𝑧,𝜃 𝛽𝑀,𝐿𝑇 − 0.15 ≤ 0.9
𝜇𝑧 = (1.2𝛽𝑀,𝑦 − 3)𝜆̅𝑧,𝜃 + 0.71𝛽𝑀,𝑧 − 0.29 ≤ 0.8
The calculation of χLT,fi and χz,fi reduction factors is according to EC3-1-2 4.2.3.2 and 4.2.3.3.

Shear /y [Vy] According to EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.6, EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, 4.2.3.4, Annex E:

Elastic design check (class 3 cross-sections)

𝑉𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝐼𝑧 ∙ 𝑡 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃
≤ 1; 𝑉𝑒𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 =
𝑉𝑒𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 𝑆𝑧 √3𝛾𝑀
𝑓𝑖

Elastic design check (class 4 cross-sections)

𝑉𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝐼𝑧 ∙ 𝑡 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4
≤ 1; 𝑉𝑒𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 =
𝑉𝑒𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 𝑆𝑧 √3𝛾𝑀
𝑓𝑖

Supported sections:
Unsupported cross-section types or plastic design:
𝑉𝑦,𝐸𝑑 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃
≤ 1; 𝑉𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 = 𝐴𝑣
𝑉𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑦,𝑅𝑑 √3𝛾𝑀 𝑓𝑖

Shear /z [Vz]
Check only AxisVM performs the following design check:
prescribed failure
𝑉𝑧𝐸𝑑
modes ≤1
min(𝑉𝑧,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 , 𝑉𝑏,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 )

𝑉𝑏,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 shear web buckling resistance (for I and box cross-sections) is based on the shear resistance of
webs. The calculation of 𝑉𝑧,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 is shown below.

No guidelines may be found in EC3-1-2 about verification against shear web buckling in fire. In this
case, the verification is performed according to sections 5.1-5.3 of EN 1993-1-5 with reduced yield
strength and Young’s modulus due to the elevated steel temperature (EC3-1-2). Furthermore, research
results of André Reis, Nuno Lopes, Paulo Vila Real are also considered by this verification (A. Reis, N.
Lopes and P. Vila Real: Numerical study of steel plate girders under shear loading at elevated tempera-
tures, Journal of Constructional Steel Research, 117 (2006) 1-12).
530

Class 1, 2 and 3 cross-sections:

𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃
𝑉𝑏,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 = 𝜒𝑤,𝜃 ℎ𝑤 𝑡𝑤
√3𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖

Class 4 cross-sections:
𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4
𝑉𝑏,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 = 𝜒𝑤,𝜃 ℎ𝑤 𝑡𝑤
√3𝛾𝑀𝑓𝑖

where
0.61
𝜒𝑤,𝜃 = 1.2 𝜆̅𝑤,𝜃 <
1.2
0.55 0.61
𝜒𝑤,𝜃 = 0.1 + ̅
𝜆𝑤,𝜃 ≥
𝜆̅𝑤,𝜃 1.2
ℎ𝑤 235
𝜆̅𝑤,𝜃 = ; 𝜀 = 0.85√
37.4𝑡𝑤 𝜀√𝑘𝜏 𝑓𝑦

Check only pre- According to EN 1993-1-1, 6.2.6, EN 1993-1-2, 4.2.3.3, 4.2.3.4, Annex E:
scribed failure
modes Elastic design check (class 3 cross-sections)
𝑉𝑧,𝐸𝑑 𝐼𝑦 ∙ 𝑡 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃
≤ 1; 𝑉𝑒𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑 =
𝑉𝑒𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑 𝑆𝑦 √3𝛾𝑀
𝑓𝑖

Elastic design check (class 4 cross-sections)

𝑉𝑧,𝐸𝑑 𝐼𝑦 ∙ 𝑡 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃,4
≤ 1; 𝑉𝑒𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑 =
𝑉𝑒𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑 𝑆𝑦 √3𝛾𝑀
𝑓𝑖

Supported sections:
Unsupported cross-section types or plastic design:
𝑉𝑧,𝐸𝑑 𝑓𝑦 𝑘𝑦,𝜃
≤ 1; 𝑉𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑 = 𝐴𝑣
𝑉𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑧,𝑅𝑑 √3𝛾𝑀 𝑓𝑖
Web shear-Bending- In case of I and box cross-sections, this interaction design check is also performed according to sec-
Axial force tion 7.1 of EN 1993-1-5 and sections 6.2.8, 6.2.9 of EN 1993-1-1 with reduced yield strength and
Young’s modulus due to the elevated steel temperature (EC3-1-2).
Check only
2
prescribed failure 𝑀𝐸𝑑 𝑀𝑓,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 𝑉𝐸𝑑
modes + (1 − ) ⋅ (2 − 1) ≤ 1
𝑀𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 𝑀𝑝𝑙,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 𝑉𝑏,𝑓𝑖,,𝑅𝑑

where 𝑀𝑓,𝑓𝑖,𝑅𝑑 is the plastic bending resistance of the flanges.

If Check only prescribed failure modes is checked, this interaction design check is not performed..
Critical temperature In many cases the critical temperature (the steel temperature where failure of the element occurs) also
has to be determined. For example, the thickness of intumescent coating fire protection is selected on
the basis of section factor (A/V) and critical temperature.
AxisVM can calculate the critical temperature for the above listed failure modes. The critical tempera-
ture of the element is the minimum of the critical temperatures for the different failure modes. The
investigated range is 20 – 1000 °C. So if AxisVM displays 20 °C as critical temperature in case of an
element, it means that the utilization is high and the safety of the element against failure cannot be
confirmed even at room temperature in accidental design situation based on the regulations of EC3-
1-2. In this case, it is very likely that the resistance is not adequate in persistent design situation nei-
ther. If AxisVM displays 1001 °C as critical temperature in case of an element, it means that the utiliza-
tion is very low and the critical temperature is above 1000 °C.
Diagrams Click on the steel design member to display the diagrams all individual checks and their envelope.
Results for any position of any steel design member in any load case or combination can be obtained
by setting x or dragging the tracking line. If a check cannot be performed with the current cross-
section the respective diagram is replaced by a cross.
If the selected or the critical combination contains fire load case and fire design was performed for the
selected steel design member, buckling coefficients in fire and critical temperature are shown.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 531

Design calculations Click on Design calculations button to see the design details. The calculation can be saved into the
documentation. In case of fire design, the type of fire curve, the design temperature and the critical
temperature are also shown.

Result table Among steel design result tables, Utilization in fire summarizes the fire design results in order to help
the communication with fire safety engineers.
532

Besides the basic initial parameters the following parameters are listed: required time of fire resistance
(e.g. R30), type of selected fire curve, design steel temperature, critical failure mode, utilization and
critical temperature.
Cross-section opti- If SD9 module is installed, steel cross-section optimization can be performed for load combinations
mization that contain fire load case with respect to steel fire design rules. During the optimization, design steel
temperature is not recalculated automatically. For this reason, the utilization may be slightly different
after analysis of the optimized structural configuration.
See… 6.6.1.4 Steel cross-section optimization - SD9 module

6.6.3. Bolted joint design of steel beams

From AxisVM X4 version this module, earlier called SD2, is built-in into the basic packages. AxisVM
calculates the moment-curvature diagram, the resistance moment and initial strength of steel column-
beam bolted joints based on Eurocode3 (Part 1.8 Design of Joints).
Type of joints Beam to column or beam to beam joints.

 Assumptions:
- The beam and column cross-sections are rolled or welded I shapes.
- The beam end plate connect to the flange of the column.
- The pitch range of the beam is beetwen ± 30°.
- The cross-section class should be 1, 2 or 3.
- The normal force in the beam should be less than 0.05* Npl,Rd
The program checks if these requirements are met.

The steps of the Select the beam and one of its end nodes.
design (We can select several beams in one process if the selected beams have the same material and cross-
section properties and connected columns also have the same material and cross-section properties.)

Click on the Joint design icon.

The Bolted Joint Designer will appear:

This dialog lets you assign the parameters of the joint in three steps.
Bracings We can assign horizontal, diagonal bracing plates and web thickening plates to increase the strength
of the connection.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 533
Horizontal bracings

Diagonal bracing

Web thickening plate

t1: thickening plate thickness on the column web

t2: thickening plate thickness on the beam web
Web shear area The program calculate the web shear area including the thickening plate area. If there is a hole in the
web near to the connection you can decrease this value in the data field depending on the hole size.

End plate

Parameters of the end plate:

Thickness
Material
Welding thickness
Width of the end plate (a)
Height of the end plate (c)
Distance between top flange of the beam and top of the end
plate (b)
Bolts in the extension of the end plate

Bolt rows can be assigned to the tensile part of the end plate.
534

Bolts

The program places bolts in two columns symmetrical to the beam web. The same type of bolts is
used in the connection.
Bolt parameters: Size, Quality, Material safety factor, Number of bolt rows, distance of bolt columns (d)

In case of automatic positioning of bolts the program places bolt rows in equal distances.
The program checks the required minimal distances between bolts and from the edge of plates.
Turn off the option Use default positions to place the bolt rows individually.

 An error message will appear if the distances does not meet the requirements.
Minimal bolt distances are checked based on EC2: 2.2 d between bolts, 1.2 d from edge of plate and in
the direction perpendicular to the force.

Results When we click on the Results tab AxisVM calculates the Moment-curvature diagram, the design
resistant moment (𝑀𝑟𝐷 ) and the initial strength of the connection (𝑆𝑗,𝑖𝑛𝑖𝑡 ).
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 535

 A warning message will appear if the resistant moment is less than the design moment. The
calculation method considers shear forces and normal forces together with the moments. As a
consequence we can get different resistant moments (MrD) for the same connection depending
on the load cases (or combinations). Therefore AxisVM checks the MrD-MsD condition in all load
cases.

IconBar

Load the connection parameters.

Save the connection parameters. Saved parameters can be loaded and assigned to other beam-end
joints later.
List of existing joints

Prints the displayed diagram. See... 3.1.12 Print

Copies the diagram to the Clipboard

Saves the diagram to the Gallery

The result table contains the followings:

- node number
- beam number
- name of the load case or combination
- design moment (𝑀𝑠𝐷 )
- design resistant moment (𝑀𝑟𝐷 )
- a summary of the calculation results and intermediate results
Saving to Drawing Library

Additional parameters (𝑓𝑠𝑒 Coefficient for seismic forces, see… 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module)
536

6.7. Timber design

6.7.1. Timber beam design – TD1 module

EUROCODE 5 The timber beam design module can be applied to the following cross-sections and timber materials:
(EN 1995-1-
1:2004)
a) Rectangle for solid timber, Glued laminated timber (Glulam) and for Laminated veneer lumber (LVL)
b) Round for solid timber

Solid timber (softwood, hardwood) Glulam LVL

Material properties The material database contains the solid, Glulam and LVL timber material properties according to the
related EN standard. (Solid timber: EN338, Glulam: EN 1194)

Characteristic strength Notation

Bending strength fm,k
Tensile strength parallel to grain ft,0,k
Tensile strength perpendicular to grain ft,90,k
Compression strength parallel to grain fc,0,k
Compression strength perependicular to grain in y direction* fc,90,k,y
Compression strength perependicular to grain in z direction* fc,90,k,z
Shear strength perpendicular to the grain in y direction* fv,k,y
Shear strength perpendicular to the grain in z direction* fv,k,z
*In case of solid and Glulam timber fv,k,z = fv,k,y = fv,k and fc90,k,z = fc90,k,y = fc90,k

Modulus of elasticity Notation

Mean value parallel to grain E0,mean
Mean value perpendicular to grain E90,mean
5% value of modulus parallel to grain E0,05
Mean value of shear modulus Gmean

Density Notation
Characteristic value of density ρk
Mean value of density ρmean

Partial factor Notation

Partial factor for material γM

Size effect factor Notation

for LVL timber s

Timber classes Timber elements must have a service class. Service class can be set in the line elements
definition dialog, at Service Class field. See... 4.9.9 Line elements
Service classes (EN 1995-1-1, 2.3.1.3):
Service class 1 – where the average moisture content in most softwoods will not exceed 12%. This
corresponds to a temperature of 20°C and a relative humidity of the surrounding air only exceeding
65% for a few weeks per year.
Service class 2 – where the average moisture content in most softwoods will not exceed 20%. This
corresponds to a temperature of 20°C and a relative humidity of the surrounding air only exceeding
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 537

85% for a few weeks per year.

Service class 3 – where the average moisture content in most softwoods exceeds 20%.
Design strength and other design properties of the timber materials depend on the service class.
Load-duration Timber design module requires information on the load duration. So if a timber material has
classes been defined in the model load case duration class can be entered.
See... 4.10.1 Load cases, load groups
Design strength The design values of strength is calculated from the characteristic values of strength according to the
components following formulas:
In case of 𝑓𝑡,90,𝑑 , 𝑓𝑐,0,𝑑 , 𝑓𝑐,90,𝑑 , 𝑓𝑣,𝑑 (Solid, Glulam, LVL timbers): 𝑓𝑑 = 𝑘𝑚𝑜𝑑 𝑓𝑘 ⁄𝛾𝑀
In case of 𝑓𝑚,𝑑 (Solid, Glulam, LVL timbers): 𝑓𝑑 = 𝑘𝑚𝑜𝑑 𝑘ℎ 𝑓𝑘 ⁄𝛾𝑀
In case of 𝑓𝑡,0,𝑑 (Solid and Glulam timbers): 𝑓𝑑 = 𝑘𝑚𝑜𝑑 𝑘ℎ 𝑓𝑘 /𝛾𝑀
In case of 𝑓𝑡,0,𝑑 (LVL timber): 𝑓𝑑 = 𝑘𝑚𝑜𝑑 𝑘𝑙 𝑓𝑘 /𝛾𝑀
where
𝑘𝑚𝑜𝑑 is a modification factor (EN 1995-1-1, 3.1.3)
𝑘ℎ is the depth factor (EN 1995-1-1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4)
𝑘𝑙 is the length factor for LVL timber (EN 1995-1-1, 3.4)
𝑓𝑘 is the characteristic strength
𝛾𝑀 is the partial factor of material (EN 1995-1-1, Table 2.3)
kh factor The 𝑓𝑚,𝑘 and 𝑓𝑡,0,𝑘 characteristic strength values are determined for a reference depth of beam. In case
of solid and Glulam timber if the depth (h) of the cross-section less than the refe-rence value, the
design strength is multiplied with the following factor.
150 0.2
Solid timber: 𝑘ℎ = min {( ) ; 1.3} (if 𝜌𝑘 ≤ 700 kg/m3)
ℎ
600 0.1
Glulam: 𝑘ℎ = min {( ) ; 1.1}
ℎ

In case of LVL timber if the depth (h) of the cross-section not equal to the reference value, the design
strength is multiplied with the following factor.
300 𝑠
LVL: 𝑘ℎ = min {( ) ; 1.2}
ℎ
(where s is the size effect exponent, h is the cross-section depth in mm.
Reference depths for solid timber is 150 mm, for Glulam it is 600 mm, for LVL it is 300 mm.
kl factor The 𝑓𝑡,0,𝑘 characteristic strength value of LVL timber is determined for a reference length of beam. If
the length of the beam is not equal to the reference length, the design strength is multiplied by the
following factor.
3000 𝑠/2
𝑘𝑙 = min {( ) ; 1.1}
𝑙
(where s is the size effect exponent).
𝑙 is the beam length in mm. Reference length: 3000 mm.
Stiffness values for Analysis type Modulus (SLS) Modulus (ULS)
analysis First order, 𝐸𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 𝐸𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛
𝐸𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛,𝑓𝑖𝑛 = 𝐸𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛,𝑓𝑖𝑛 =
linear elastic 1 + 𝑘𝑑𝑒𝑓 1 + 𝜓2 𝑘𝑑𝑒𝑓
𝐺𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 𝐺𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛
𝐺𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛,𝑓𝑖𝑛 = 𝐺𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛,𝑓𝑖𝑛 =
1 + 𝑘𝑑𝑒𝑓 1 + 𝜓2 𝑘𝑑𝑒𝑓
Second order, 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐸𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 /𝛾𝑀 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐸𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 /𝛾𝑀
linear elastic
𝐺𝑑 = 𝐺𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 /𝛾𝑀 𝐺𝑑 = 𝐺𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 /𝛾𝑀
Frequency 𝐸𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 , 𝐺𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 𝐸𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛 , 𝐺𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛

Conservative way 𝜓2 = 1 is used.

Design assump- • There is no hole or other weaking in the beams.
tions • The cross-section constant (rectangle, round) or linear changing depth along the beam (tapered
beam).
• The grain parallel to the beam x axis.
• In case of tapered beam the grain parallel one of the longitudinal edge.
• The dominant bending plane is the x-z plane of the beam (moment about y axis).
• 𝐼𝑦 ≥ 𝐼𝑧
• In case of Glulam the laminates are parallel to the y axis of the cross-section.
• in case of LVL the laminates are parallel to the z axis of the cross-section.
538

Checks Normal force-Bending [N-M] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.2.3, 6.2.4)

Compression-Bending-Buckling (in plane) [N-M-Buckling] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.3.2)
Normal force-Bending-Lateral tors. buckling [N-M-LT buckling] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.3.3)
Shear /y -Torsion /x [Vy-Tx] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.1.7, 6.1.8)
Shear (y) - Shear(z) - Torsion (x) [Vy- Vz-Tx] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.1.7, 6.1.8)
Moment /y - Shear /z (tensile stress perpendicular to the grain) [My-V z] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.4.3)
Calculated parame- 𝜆𝑟𝑒𝑙,𝑦 Relative slenderness ratio (y) /in z-x plane of the beam/ []
ters 𝜆𝑟𝑒𝑙,𝑧 Relative slenderness ratio (z) /in y-x plane of the beam/ []
𝑘𝑐,𝑦 Buckling (instability) factor (y) /in z-x plane of the beam/ [] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.3.2)
𝑘𝑐,𝑧 Buckling (instability) factor (z) /in x-y plane of the beam/ [] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.3.2)
𝑘𝑐𝑟𝑖𝑡 Lateral torsional buckling factor [] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.3.3)
𝑘ℎ Depth factor [] (EN 1995-1-1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4)
𝑘𝑚𝑜𝑑 modification factor [] (EN 1995-1-1, 3.1.3)
𝜎𝑡,90,𝑑 (tensile stress perpendicular to the grain) [N/mm2] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.4.3)

 AxisVM performs the following checks only. All the other checks specified in the design code
like supports, joints, etc. has to be completed by the user.
Normal force- The design value of normal force can be tension or compression.
Bending Tension and moment (EN 1995-1-1, 6.2.3)
𝜎𝑡,0,𝑑 𝜎𝑚,𝑦,𝑑 𝜎𝑚,𝑧,𝑑
+ + 𝑘𝑚 ≤1
𝑓𝑡,0,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,𝑦,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,𝑧,𝑑
𝜎𝑡,0,𝑑 𝜎𝑚,𝑦,𝑑 𝜎𝑚,𝑧,𝑑
+ 𝑘𝑚 + ≤1
𝑓𝑡,0,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,𝑦,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,𝑧,𝑑

Compression and moment (EN 1995-1-1, 6.2.4)

2
𝜎𝑐,0,𝑑 𝜎𝑚,𝑦,𝑑 𝜎𝑚,𝑧,𝑑
( ) + + 𝑘𝑚 ≤1
𝑓𝑐,0,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,𝑦,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,𝑧,𝑑
2
𝜎𝑐,0,𝑑 𝜎𝑚,𝑦,𝑑 𝜎𝑚,𝑧,𝑑
( ) + 𝑘𝑚 + ≤1
𝑓𝑐,0,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,𝑦,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,𝑧,𝑑

where 𝑘𝑚 = 0.7 in case of rectangle cross-section, 𝑘𝑚 = 1 in all other cases.

Compression- (EN 1995-1-1, 6.3.2)
Moment-Buckling 𝜎𝑐,0,𝑑 𝜎𝑚,𝑦,𝑑 𝜎𝑚,𝑧,𝑑
+ + 𝑘𝑚 ≤1
𝑘𝑐,𝑦 𝑓𝑐,0,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,𝑦,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,𝑧,𝑑
𝜎𝑐,0,𝑑 𝜎𝑚,𝑦,𝑑 𝜎𝑚,𝑧,𝑑
+ 𝑘𝑚 + ≤1
𝑘𝑐,𝑧 𝑓𝑐,0,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,𝑦,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,𝑧,𝑑
where,
𝑘𝑐,𝑦 Buckling (instability) factor (y) /in z-x plane of the beam/ (EN 1995-1-1, 6.3.2)
𝑘𝑐,𝑧 Buckling (instability) factor (z) /in x-y plane of the beam/ (EN 1995-1-1, 6.3.2)
In case of tension force the 𝑓𝑐,0,𝑑 is replaced with 𝑓𝑡,0,𝑑 and 𝑘𝑐,𝑦 = 𝑘𝑐,𝑧 = 1
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 539

Normal force- For lateral torsional buckling check the program assumtions that the beam is bending in z-x plane
Bending- (about y axis). If there is simultaneous 𝑀𝑧 moment on the beam and the compression stress from 𝑀𝑧
LT buckling reach the 3% of the 𝑓𝑐,0,𝑑 a warning message appears.
Bending only (EN 1995-1-1, 6.3.3)
𝜎𝑚,𝑑
≤1
𝑘𝑐𝑟𝑖𝑡 𝑓𝑚,𝑑

Compression and moment (EN 1995-1-1, 6.3.3)

2
𝜎𝑚,𝑑 𝜎𝑐𝑑
( ) + ≤1
𝑘𝑐𝑟𝑖𝑡 𝑓𝑚,𝑑 𝑘𝑐,𝑧 𝑓𝑐,0,𝑑
Tension and bending
In case of small tension and bending that lateral torsional buckling could be occur, however there is
no rule in EC5 for this case.
The following conservative check is used.
|𝜎𝑚𝑡,𝑑 |
≤ 1;
𝑘𝑐𝑟𝑖𝑡 𝑓𝑚,𝑑
𝑀𝑑 𝑁𝑑
𝜎𝑚𝑡,𝑑 = + <0
𝑊𝑦 𝐴

where 𝑘𝑐𝑟𝑖𝑡 is the lateral buckling factor according to the following

𝜆𝑟𝑒𝑙,𝑚 ≤ 0.75 𝑘𝑐𝑟𝑖𝑡 = 1
0.75 < 𝜆𝑟𝑒𝑙,𝑚 ≤ 1.4 𝑘𝑐𝑟𝑖𝑡 = 1.56 − 0.75 ⋅ 𝜆𝑟𝑒𝑙,𝑚
1.4 < 𝜆𝑟𝑒𝑙,𝑚 𝑘𝑐𝑟𝑖𝑡 = 1/𝜆2𝑟𝑒𝑙,𝑚

Shear-Torsion There is no rule in EC5 for case of simultaneous shear force and torsional moment.
In this case the program uses the interaction formula according to DIN EN 1995-1-1/NA:2010.
Shear(y) , Shear(z) and torsion
2 2
𝜏𝑣,𝑦,𝑑 𝜏𝑣,𝑧,𝑑 𝜏𝑡𝑜𝑟,𝑑 𝜏𝑣,𝑦,𝑑 𝜏𝑣,𝑧,𝑑
max [ ; ; +( ) +( ) ]≤1
𝑓𝑣,𝑑 𝑓𝑣,𝑑 𝑘𝑠ℎ𝑎𝑝𝑒 𝑓𝑣,𝑑 𝑓𝑣,𝑑 𝑓𝑣,𝑑
where,
𝑘𝑠ℎ𝑎𝑝𝑒 is a factor for the shape of cross-section.
For round cross-section 𝑘𝑠ℎ𝑎𝑝𝑒 = 1.2,
for rectangular cross-section 𝑘𝑠ℎ𝑎𝑝𝑒 = min{1 + 0.15 ⋅ ℎ⁄𝑏 ; 2.0}

Moment-Shear In case of curved beams the program checks the tensile stress perpendicular to the grain from M y and
Vz forces. (EN 1995-1-1, 6.4.3.)
Moment(y)-Shear(z)
𝜏𝑑 𝜎𝑡,90,𝑑
+ ≤1
𝑓𝑣,𝑑 𝑘𝑑𝑖𝑠 𝑘𝑣𝑜𝑙 𝑓𝑡,90,𝑑

𝑘𝑑𝑖𝑠 is a factor which takes into account the effect of the stress distribution in the apex zone (𝑘𝑑𝑖𝑠 =
1.4 for curved beams)
𝑘𝑣𝑜𝑙 is a volume factor 𝑘𝑣𝑜𝑙 = [𝑉0 ⁄𝑉]0.2
540

Design Parameters For the design based on Eurocode 5, the following design parameters should be defined and assigned
to the design members:

Layer thickness In case of Glued laminated timber (Glulam) arcs thickness of one layer has to be defined.

Grain direction Set of grain direction in case of tapered beam. The grain direction can be paralel with the top edge or
with the bottom edge. The top edge lays in the +z direction of the cross-section.
Stability parame-
ters

Buckling Ky, Kz: buckling length factors corresponding to the y and z axis, respectively.
𝐾𝑦 = 𝑙𝑒𝑓,𝑦 ⁄𝑙 ; 𝐾𝑧 = 𝑙𝑒𝑓,𝑧 /𝑙
where 𝑙 is the member length
𝑙𝑒𝑓,𝑦 is the buckling length in x-z plane of the member
𝑙𝑒𝑓,𝑧 is the buckling length in x-y plane of the member
Lateral torsional KLT: lateral buckling length factors corresponding to the z axis.
buckling 𝐾𝐿𝑇 = 𝑙𝑒𝑓 /𝑙
where 𝑙 is the member length
𝑙𝑒𝑓 is the lateral buckling length of the member corresponding to the z axis.
When the load not applied to the center of gravity, the program modify the lateral buckling length
according to the following:
- if the load is applied to the compression edge of the member the 𝑙𝑒𝑓 is increased by 2ℎ
- if the load is applied to the tension edge of the member the 𝑙𝑒𝑓 is decreased by 0.5ℎ

Common values of KLT factor.

(Some of these values can be found in EN 1995-1-1, Table 6.1)
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 541
My moment distribution Lateral support condition
Loading type between the lateral (in x-y plane)
(direct load) supports

pz 0.9

Fz
0.8

Fz Fz
0.96
¼ ½ ¼

pz
0.42

Fz
0.64

My moment distribution Lateral support condition

Loading type between the lateral (in x-y plane)
(no direct load) supports

M M
1.0

M ½M
0.76

M 0
0.53

M ½M
0.37

M M
0.36

Lateral support condition

Loading type My moment distribution (in x-y plane)
(cantilever)

pz
0.5

Fz 0.8

Design members The design is performed on design members that can consist of one or more finite elements (beams
and/or ribs). A group of finite elements can become a design member only if the finite elements in the
group satisfy some requirements checked by the program: to be located on the same straight line or
arc, to have the same material, cross-section and to have joining local coordinate systems.
The program allows two methods to define design members as follows:
542

Any node of a selection set of finite elements

where another finite element is connected will
become an end-point of a design member with-
in the selection set of finite elements.

The finite elements in the selection set become

only one design member irrespective of other
finite elements connecting to its nodes.

SLS The parameters for the serviceability limit state (SLS) checks can be set on the SLS tab in the Design
(serviceability limit parameters window. The program checks the deflections of beams.
state)

 The program checks the final deflections (ufin). When determining the deformations, the effect
of creep is considered throughout the whole loading (in each SLS load combination) by using
the kdef parameter of each beam.
 If the critical load combinations are generated automatically, the program performs the SLS
checks in the quasipermanent load combinations.
Deflections can be checked according to the z or y local axis directions of the timber design member.
The check in each direction can be activated or deactivated by checking the box in front of the limit
values. The deflection limit values shall be set according to the length (L) detailed below.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 543

Deflections can be considered in several ways: based on the actual displacements or based on the
displacements relative only to the left, only to the right or to both endpoints of the design member.

Length (L) Deflections of a design member and deflection limits (e.g. L/300) are based on one of the following
length values:

Design member length: L is equal to the length of the design member;

Based on connecting members and supports: if the Assemble design members parameter in the ULS tab
is set to the first option, then this length is equal to the design member’s length, and thus this is
the same as the length above. If it is set to the second option (the selected members are
checked as one design member), then the program looks for supports or connecting members
along the design member in the direction of the deflection check that can prevent the deflection
of the design member and defines segments between these supported nodes. The SLS check is
performed for each segment. For example, if a 15 m long beam has supporting columns at the
endpoints and at one-third of the beam, the program performs SLS checks separately for the
first 5 m segment and the remaining 10 m segment of the beam.

Custom length: any value can be defined.

Pre-camber Pre-camber can be defined for the design members, where the pre-camber values (wcz and wcy) are
defined in local coordinates. The shape of the pre-camber can be set with three parameters: linear or
second-order curves may be chosen, the maximal value (w) and its location along the member (xmax)
must also be defined. If deflection is based on actual displacements (e.g. only a section of a beam is
selected as a design member), then the pre-camber values are constant along the length. If the length
L is set to the design member length or to a custom length, pre-camber is zero in the endpoints of the
design members. If Based on connecting members and supports is selected, pre-camber will be zero at
the endpoints and at the supported nodes in the relevant direction.

 It is important to note, that the pre-camber value set here has an effect in the SLS checks only,
reducing the previously calculated deflection based on the original shape.

Result diagrams By clicking on a design member the program displays the diagrams corresponding to all the checks.

Report editor Add to Report Load case / combination

Gallery
Member number
Print
544

Design calcula- Clicking on the Design calculations button a report of the calculation details can be displayed. All
tions strength and stability checks appear as formulas completed with substituted actual values and design
code references.

Clicking on the Settings icon beside the Design calculations button allows setting the basic units for
force and length used in the design calculations. Important results also appear converted to standard
AxisVM units (see… 3.3.8 Units and Formats). For further details see… 6.6.1 Steel beam design according to
Eurocode 3 – SD1 module

6.7.2. Timber beam fire design – TD8 module

Standards AxisVM performs timber fire design according to many national codes. In case of Eurocode National
Annexes that are not listed below, general rules of EN 1993-1-2 are considered.
EN 1995-1-2 Eurocode 5: Design of timber strucutures
Eurocode
Part 1-2: General - Strucutural fire design

EC DIN EN 1995-1-2:2010-12 NA
German
EC MSZ EN 1995-1-2:2013 NA
Hungarian

EC SR EN 1995-1-2:2004/Ac:2006
Romanian
EC CSN EN 1995-1-2/NA 2011
Czech

EC STN EN 1995-1-2:2008/NA:2011
Slovakian
EC BS EN 1995-1-2:2004 NA
British

EC NEN EN 1995-1-2/NB:2016
Dutch
EC SFS-EN 1995-1-2:2004 NA
Finnish

Fire design of Timber beam fire design (TD8 module) is based on methods of general timber beam design (TD1 mo-
timber structures dule; see… 6.7.1 Timber beam design – TD1 module), thus TD1 module is a prerequisite to use TD8.
according to EN EN 1995-1-2 (EC5-1-2) discusses fire design of timber structures. This section describes the differences
1995-1-2 between the general design and fire design.
Timber beam fire design can be performed in AxisVM if
1) the selected load combination includes a fire load case (see… 4.10.1 Load cases, load groups)
2) if a fire effect has been assigned to any of the selected elements (see… 4.10.30 Fire effect on timber
elements – TD8 module) in that fire load case.
If different fire effects have been assigned to elements of a design member fire design cannot be per-
formed and an error message appears.
For selected elements without fire effect the general timber design will be performed. Timber fire
design parameters also has to be assigned to the elements (see below).

Member analysis EC5-1-2 discusses different methods: member analysis, analysis of a part of the structure and analysis of
the entire structure. Member analysis is the most widespread verification method due to its simplicity.
Analysis of a part or whole of the structure usually requires complex nonlinear numerical models and
nonlinear statical analysis.
Guiding principles of member analysis according to EC5-1-2:
• Design member internal forces can be calculated with linear static analysis;
• The boundary conditions at supports may be assumed to be constant with time. (EC5-1-2,
2.4.2 (4)).
TD8 module performs member analysis. It has to be checked whether the structure/structural part can
be verified with member analysis according to the guidelines of EC5-1-2.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 545

Timber fire design Fire design based on EC5-1-2 requires fire design parameters defined and assigned to structural
parameters members. This button is available only if 1) TD8 module is part of the configuration and 2) the current
design code supports timber fire design. The button adds an additional panel on the right side. If it
remains hidden, fire design of the element will not be performed.

Buckling coeffi- It is possible to define different buckling length coefficients in fire because deflection of the element is
cients in fire often prevented by other elements that may lose their stiffness or resistance in shorter period of time.
The definition/calculation of buckling length is the same as in case of normal temperature design.
Reduced cross- EC5-1-2 provides two different methodology to calculate the mechanical resistance in fire:
section method • reduced cross-section method,
• reduced properties method.
In the software, the reduced cross-section method is implemented. As a first step, the so-called
effective charring depth is calculated on the following way using the notional charring depth (𝑑𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑟,𝑛 ;
see… 4.10.30 Fire effect on timber elements – TD8 module)

𝑑𝑒𝑓 = 𝑑𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑟,𝑛 + 𝑘0 𝑑0
where 𝑑0 = 7𝑚𝑚, 𝑘0 is a coefficient
The cross-section is reduced with this effective charring depth on the exposed sides. This reduced
cross-section is called effective cross-section.
Design checks in The TD8 module, similarly to the TD1 module, performs the following design checks:
fire
Axial force-Bending [N-M] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.2.3, 6.2.4)
Compression-Bending-Buckling (in plane) [N-M-Buckling] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.3.2)
Axial force-Bending-Lateral tors. buckling [N-M-LT buckling] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.3.3)
Shear (y) - Shear(z) - Torsion (x) [Vy- Vz-Tx] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.1.7, 6.1.8)
Moment /y - Shear /z (tensile stress perp. to the grain) [My-V z] (EN 1995-1-1, 6.4.3)

The details of the calculation are presented in the previous section (see… 6.7.1 Timber beam design – TD1
module), thus we note only the differences in this section:
1. different strength need to be considered,
2. different stability parameters are considered.
Calculation of According to EC5-1-2, the timber strength is calculated on the following way:
strength of timber
𝑓20
𝑓𝑑,𝑓𝑖 = 𝑘𝑚𝑜𝑑,𝑓𝑖
𝛾𝑀,𝑓𝑖
𝑓20 = 𝑘𝑓𝑖 𝑓𝑘
where
𝑓20 is the 20% fractile strength at normal temperature
𝑘𝑚𝑜𝑑,𝑓𝑖 = 1 is the modification factor for fire
𝑘𝑓𝑖 is a coefficient, 𝛾𝑀,𝑓𝑖 is a partial factor
Stability checks Buckling length (Ky,fi and Kz,fi) and lateral torsional buckling length (KLT,fi) coefficient given in Design
parameters window are used to evaluate the flexural buckling and lateral torsional buckling resistances.
546

Result diagrams Click on a timber design member to display diagrams for all individual checks and their envelope.
Results for any position of any timber design member in any load case or combination can be obtained
by setting x or dragging the tracking line. If design check cannot be performed with the current cross-
section, the diagram is replaced by a cross.
If the selected or the critical combination contains fire load case and fire design was performed for the
selected design member, buckling coefficients in fire and charring depth are also shown.

Design calculations Click on Design calculations button to see the design details. The calculation can be saved into the
documentation. In case of fire design, the type of fire curve and the calculated effective charring depth
are also shown.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 547

Result table Among timber design result tables, Utilization in fire summarizes the fire design results in order to help
the communication with fire safety engineers.

Cross-section opti- If TD9 module is present, timber cross-section optimization can be performed for load combinations
mization that contain fire load case with respect to fire design rules.

6.7.3. Timber cross-section optimization – TD9 module

TD9 module requires TD1 module.

Cross-section optimization of timber structures makes timber design members previously defined and
designed more efficient by fine-tuning cross-section dimensions and reducing self weight.
Optimization checks the design members for the same internal forces ignoring stiffness changes
due to changing dimensions. In certain structures recalculation of the model may show consid-
erable changes in internal force patterns. In these cases several consecutive optimizations may
find the more efficient structure.
Optimization uses the timber design parameters previously assigned to the design members.
Cross-section types suitable for optimization are: rectangle, rounded rectangle and circular shapes.
Variable cross-sections cannot be optimized.
For the details of the optimization see… 6.6.1.4 Steel cross-section optimization - SD9 module

6.8. Design of XLAM domains – XLM modul

Design codes There is no currently valid, overall design regulation for XLAM (CLT) panels. For further details on the
detailed calculation procedure and the references see the “XLAM Theory and Design Guide”.
Material properties There is a dedicated XLAM material in the material library with predefined stiffness and strength prop-
erties. If the user wishes, the material properties can be arbitrarily modified in the material library asso-
ciated with the model.

Characteristic values of material parameters Denotement

Bending strength fm,k

Tensile strength parallel to the grain direction ft,0,k
Tensile strength perpendicular to the grain direction ft,90,k
Compressive strength parallel to the grain direction fc,0,k
Compressive strength perpendicular to the grain direction (y) fc,90,k
Compressive strength perpendicular to the grain direction (z) fc,90,k
Torsional strength fT,k
Shear strength in y direction fv,k
Shear strength in z direction fv,k
Rolling shear strength fr,k*

*assumed as 1.0 N/mm2, independently of the strength class

548

Stiffness values Denotement

Mean value of Young’s modulus parallel to the grain direction E0,mean

Mean value of the Young’s modulus perpendicular to the grain direction E90,mean
Young’s modulus parallel to the grain direction for the significance level of 0.05 E0,05
Mean value of the shear modulus Gmean
Mean value of the rolling shear modulus GR,mean*

*it is assumed that GR,mean / Gmean = 0,1 holds, independently of the strength class

Density Denotement

Apparent density ρk
Mean value of the density ρmean

Partial safety factor Denotement

Partial safety factor of the material γM

Service classes See in chapter 6.7.1 Timber beam design – TD1 module

Load duration See in chapter 6.7.1 Timber beam design – TD1 module
classes

Charasteristic value The stress values are to be determined independently due to bending, normal and shear actions.
of strength
𝜎𝑚𝑥,𝑡 – relevant value of the normal stress in x direction due to bending, on the upper half of the re-
gion (the side of te region associated with the positive direction of the local z axis).

𝜎𝑚𝑥,𝑏 – relevant value of the normal stress in x direction due to bending, on the lower half of the re-
gion (the side of te region associated with the negative direction of the local z axis).
𝜎𝑚𝑦,𝑡 – relevant value of the normal stress in y direction due to bending, on the upper half of the re-
gion (the side of te region associated with the positive direction of the local z axis).

𝜎𝑚𝑦,𝑏 – relevant value of the normal stress in y direction due to bending, on the lower half of the re-
gion (the side of te region associated with the negative direction of the local z axis).

𝜎𝑛𝑥 – relevant value of the normal stress in x direction due to normal forces.

𝜎𝑛𝑦 – relevant value of the normal stress in y direction due to normal forces.

𝜏𝑛,𝑥𝑦 – relevant value of in plane shear stress from normal force.

𝜏𝑚,𝑥𝑦 – relevant value of in plane shear stress from twisting moment.

𝜏𝑥𝑧,𝑚𝑎𝑥 – relevant shear stress acting in direction z on the plane whose normal is in direction x.

𝜏𝑦𝑧,𝑚𝑎𝑥 – relevant shear stress acting in direction z on the plane whose normal is in direction y.

𝜏𝑟𝑥,𝑚𝑎𝑥 – relevant rolling shear stress acting in direction z on the plane whose normal is in direction x.

𝜏𝑟𝑦,𝑚𝑎𝑥 – relevant rolling shear stress acting in direction z on the plane whose normal is in direction y.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 549

When clicking on a node, one can see the distribution of each calculated stress component through
the thickness:

Design value of The design values of strength can be calculated according to the formula:
strength 𝑓𝑐0𝑑 , 𝑓𝑐90𝑑 , 𝑓𝑣𝑑 , 𝑓𝑟𝑑 : 𝑓𝑑 = 𝑘𝑚𝑜𝑑 𝑓𝑘 ⁄𝛾𝑀
𝑓𝑚90𝑑 , 𝑓𝑡0𝑑 , 𝑓𝑡90𝑑 : 𝑓𝑑 = 𝑘𝑠𝑦𝑠 𝑘𝑚𝑜𝑑 𝑓𝑘 /𝛾𝑀
𝑓𝑚0𝑑 : 𝑓𝑑 = 𝑘𝑠𝑦𝑠 𝑘𝑚𝑜𝑑 𝑘𝑓𝑖𝑛 𝑓𝑘 /𝛾𝑀
where,
𝑘𝑚𝑜𝑑 modification factor for duration of load and moisture content (EN 1995-1-1, 3.1.3)
𝑘𝑠𝑦𝑠 system strength factor
𝑘𝑓𝑖𝑛 bending strength reduction factor
𝑓𝑘 charasteristic value of strength
𝛾𝑀 partial safety factor of the material (EN 1995-1-1, Table 2.3)

ksys factor 𝑘𝑠𝑦𝑠 = min {1 + 0.025 ⋅ 𝑛; 1.2} (𝑛 denotes the number of layers, but 𝑛 > 1)

Interactions Normal force-Bending moment in grain direction [M-N-0]

Normal force-Bending moment perpendicular to grain direction [M-N-90]
Shear-Torsion [V-T]
Normal force – Rolling shear [Vr-N]

Normal force – In case of tension

Bending moment
𝜎𝑡,0,𝑑 |𝜎𝑚,0,𝑑 |
in grain direction + ≤1
𝑓𝑡,0,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,0,𝑑
(M-N-0)
In case of compression
2
𝜎𝑐,0,𝑑 |𝜎𝑚,0,𝑑 |
( ) + ≤1
𝑓𝑐,0,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,0,𝑑
550

Normal force – In case of tension

Bending moment
𝜎𝑡,90,𝑑 |𝜎𝑚,90,𝑑 |
perpendicular to + ≤1
𝑓𝑡,90,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,90,𝑑
grain direction (M-
N-90) In case of compression
2
𝜎𝑐,90,𝑑 |𝜎𝑚,90,𝑑 |
( ) + ≤1
𝑓𝑐,90,𝑑 𝑓𝑚,90,𝑑

Shear – Torsion 2 2
|𝜏 𝑇,𝑑 | 𝜏𝑑 𝜏𝑟,𝑑
(V-T) +( ) +( ) ≤1
𝑓𝑇,𝑑 𝑓𝑣,𝑑 𝑓𝑟,𝑑

Rolling shear – In grain direction

Normal force (Vr-N) 𝜎𝑡,90,𝑑 |𝜏𝑟,𝑑 | |𝜎𝑐,90,𝑑 | |𝜏𝑟,𝑑 |
+ ≤1; + ≤1
𝑓𝑡,90,𝑑 𝑓𝑟,𝑑 𝑓𝑐,90,𝑑 𝑓𝑟,𝑑

Parallel to grain direction

𝜎𝑡,0,𝑑 |𝜏𝑟,𝑑 | |𝜎𝑐,0,𝑑 | |𝜏𝑟,𝑑 |
+ ≤1; + ≤1
𝑓𝑡,0,𝑑 𝑓𝑟,𝑑 𝑓𝑐,0,𝑑 𝑓𝑟,𝑑

When clicking on a node, one can see the distribution of the calculated utilization component through
the thickness:
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 551

6.9. Masonry wall design – MD1 module

MD1 module gives the opportunity to check masonry walls and to specify their design parameters
required for the design check.
In the module, an overall design check is available for unreinforced masonry walls subjected to mainly
vertical loading. It provides a solution for the global analysis of one or multi-storey masonry walls and
also the masonry joints can be specified which usually influence the load bearing capacity of the walls.
The verification is available for Eurocode, NTC and SIA standards.

6.9.1. Unreinforced masonry walls subjected to mainly vertical loading

General principles The masonry walls can be checked according to EN 1996-1-1 (chapter 6.1), NTC (chapter 4.5.6.2) and SIA
266 (chapter 4.3.1 and 4.4.) considering the following assumptions and applications limits.
These standards assume that the walls are supported horizontally by the slabs, so cantilevered walls
cannot be analysed by the adapted algorithm.
In the modul, only the eccentricites perpendicular to the plane of the wall are taken into account, irre-
spective of the width of the wall strip, two directional eccentricity cannot be analysed.
It is assumed that the wall has constant wall thickness along a storey, only single leaf wall can be speci-
fied.
Various parameters can be added to the model (see Joint settings) which can result additional bending
moments on the structural model (multi-storey walls with various wall thickness, joint settings, the ef-
fect of eccentric slab reaction force).
These effects are not negligible in the calculation of the load bearing capacity of the elements, but
accurate modeling may require significiantly complicated models in some cases. To facilitate the design
check, two approximate calculatation methods (see… Calculation of additional bending moments) are
provided to consider these effects in a simplified way. In all cases, the user should consider the applica-
bility of these solutions.
The module works with virtual strips (see… 2.16.16 Virtual beams). The design parameters can only be
assigned to these elements and the check can only be performed on the integrated results of the strips.
Virtual strips can involve multi storeys, so the whole wall segment can be analysed as a complete struc-
tural system. Various design parameters can be assigned to the storeys.
Chapters 6.9.1.5…6.9.1.8 serves information about standard specific limitations.

6.9.1.1. Definition of masonry walls and their parameters

Design parameters After clicking on the Design parameters icon, the storeys of the masonry wall strip can be specified and
checked in the Masonry walls window.
The necessary parameters can be assigned to virtual strips (see… 2.16.16 Virtual beams) after clicking the
icon on the left or clicking on the axis of a virtual strip. The icon is visible if there is masonry domain,
there is at least on virtual strip and statical or dynamical results are available in the model.
After clicking on the icon, one virtual strip can be selected in the course of selection procedure (see…
2.16.1 Selection). If the selection is invalid, the software warns with a warning message. The selection
may be invalid in the following cases:

• No virtual strip has been selected.

• More than one virtual strip has been selected.
• The selected virtual strip has masonry domain(s).
• The selected virtual strip is not continuous.
• The cross-section of the strip is not supported (e.g. variable section).
• The selected virtual strip is not vertical (max. 15° deviation is allowed).
552

Once the selection is complete, the Masonry walls appears, where the storeys has to be defined before
setting the design parameters, or the existing masonry wall strips can be modified or checked.
 Masonry walls window opens automatically when clicking on a (valid) virtual strip in the model.
Check domain as a The function of Check Domain as a masonry wall can be applied for the checking a single storey wall. In
masonry wall this case, there is no need for an existing virtual strip, it is automatically created following the instruc-
tions in the command line. A simple masonry region has to be selected and a reference point for the
virtual strip. The created virtual strip is always 1 m wide, but certainly its width can be set freely among
the settings of Virtual beams. If the entered starting point is near to the edge of the domain, the axis of
the virtual strip is automatically aligned, such that its edge does not hang over.
Finishing the selection, the Design check of masonry walls window opens, where the design parameters
and joints can be set and the results can be checked.
The masonry wall strip defined by the function of Check Domain as a masonry wall, can also be man-
aged by the Design parameters function like the other virtual strips.
Remark: using this function the software assumes that calculation of additional bending moment (see
later) is not needed. If it is necessary, then this setting is only available after its definition, opening the
virtual strip in the Masonry wall window.
Virtual strips Clicking on the Design parameters icon, the valid (masonry) virtual strips are displayed in left side list of
the Masonry walls window.

If a virtual strip already contains storey(s), then its title is shown in bold. The number in the parenthesis
indicates the number of storeys assigned to the virtual strip. Clicking one of the virtual strips shown in
bold, the set storeys are loaded into the list of Storeys. Clicking on a strip that has no storey, the list
remains empty.

Storeys Before setting the masonry parameters, storeys have to be assigned to the strips. The design check is
performed for the storeys. On the other hand, the set levels are identified as the levels of the slabs
which support the wall laterally.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 553

Storeys can be specified after clicking on the Edit storeys icon.

A storey needs to have intersection with the axis of the selected virtual beam/strip. The software fills the
list of stories with predefined model stories (see… 3.3.4 Stories) if there is any. The stories assigned to a
virtual beam or strips does not necessarily need to be identical with the stories of the model.
The stories can be deleted (delete icon), modified (pencil) and
new stories can be added (+ and arrow). The stories are saved
to the virtual strip. If stories are assigned to the virtual strip,
the cross-section and vertical section (see… 6.9.1.3 Display of
masonry walls in the model) of the wall. The circles on the axis of
virtual strip indicating the boundaries of the defined stories.

Automatic design After setting the storeys, Automatically design parameters are assigned to the virtual strips and their
parameters storeys. These parameters are loaded to the list shown under the Storeys and summarized in table of
Design parameters.
(The contents of the list and table are different depending of the applied standard.)

Parameters The following parameters are taken from the model based on the properties of the domains associated
based on the model with the virtual strip:
• The masonry material of each storey.
If the virtual strip passes thorugh differnt masonry (wall) domains, only one of the materials is
assigned to the strip (only one type of material can be considered on each storey). The auto-
matically set material can be modified among the Design parameters.

The moduli of elasticity (applied for the design check) are indentified examining the local
coordinate system of the domain. If neither axes of the local coordinate system coincides with
the vertical direction, then the axis most closer to the vertical direction is used to determine
the parameter. The set moduli of elasticity can modified in the Design parameters window
(see… 6.9.1.2).
554

• The wall thickness of each storey.

If the virtual strip passes thorugh differnt masonry (wall) domains, only one of the thickness
parameters is assigned to the strip (only constant wall thickness can be considered).
The thickness of the wall cannot be modified later, the property of the domain concerned has
to be changed if necessary.

• The width of the wall, which is the same as the width of the virtual strip.
The load bearing capacity is calculated by the consideration of the total width.

• The type of the (concrete) slab and its thickness which is connected to the wall strips.
The type of the slab can be Continuous and One-side slab. If no concrete slab is identified, the
setting called Slab is not defined is applied (see… 6.9.1.2).

Remark: the available standards assumes that the walls are supported laterally by the
slabs. Here, the setting called ’Slab is not defined’ here only indicates that any concrete
slab could not be found.

If there are more domains that has connection to the examined node of the virtual strip, then
the lowest slab thickness is applied.

The type of the slab and its thickness can be modified later - independently of the model in
the Masonry joint window.

If the domains connected to the storeys are modified after the setting of masonry parameters,
the program no longer refresh the changing. These shall be updated by the user with deleting
the masonry parameters and redifining it again, or the affected joint has to be changed manually
in the settings.
Other design pa- Other standard specific parameters are set according to the standard recommendations or default
rameters setting is used (predefined in the software).
Automatic or In the top of the list of parameters, the origin of the parameters is indicated. If the design parameters
Custom design have not been changed yet, then Auto label is written in the first row, otherwise Custom.
parameters
Coordinate system In the modul, the local coordinate system of the virtual strip is used when displaying the internal forces
of the strip and the side view of the masonry wall. In the Masonry walls and the Design check of masonry
walls window, this coordinate system is presented and gives information.

Side view of a storey The side of view of the masonry wall strip with the connecting slabs is shown in the bottom right side of
the Masonry walls window. The local coordinate system of the virtual strip is used for displaying (see
section before).
Closing the Masonry walls window, the software displays the vertical section of the wall with its joints
that helps interpret the settings (see… 6.9.1.3).
Settings The following settings are available for the selected virtual strip in the Masonry walls window:
Aligment If the selected virtual strip contains storeys with various wall thicknesses, the user can adjust their refer-
ence plane of the walls as follows:
By default, the program assumes that the mid-planes (Axis) of the walls coincide (like internal walls).
In case of facade walls or on other demand, the walls can be arranged to the Left or Right (based on the
locasl coordinate system of the virtual strip), so that left or right side of the wall become in a common
plane. Due to this setting, in the calculation additional bending moment has to be taken into account
(see next section).
On the side view of the wall, the green axis line indicates the axis of the virtual strip and the axis of the
wall with the largest wall thickness as well. The yellow one shows the axis of the wall on the selected
storey.
If there is no various wall thickness among the storeys of the virtual strip, this option is disabled.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 555

Calculation of In the calculation, additional bending moments has to be be taken into account depending on the
additional bending settings of the masonry wall strip (alignment of the walls in case of various wall thicknesses, masonry
moments joint settings, stress distribution unde the slab reaction force). If the model does not contain the effects
of these, then the program offers two different approximation methods to calculate the additional
bending moments.

• Hinged model
• Continuous model:
For details, see… 6.9.1.5 Principles of checking.
The design bending moment is the sum of the moment of the virtual strip and the results of the above
models.
The figure symbolizes the eccentric forces of the joints and the various wall thicknesses. The figure of
the approximate static model also depends on the reference plane of the walls (Left/Axis/Right) in case
of various wall thickness).

If the checkbox called Calculation of additional bending moments is not selected, then the software does
not calculate additional moments based on the settings assuming that the results of the virtual model
contains it.
Design parameters Clicking on the Design parameters of masonry walls icon, the design parameters of the virtual strips can
of masonry wall be seen summarized in a table. The icon is only active if the model already contains at least one (ma-
sonry) virtual strip that has storey(s).
For details, see… 6.9.1.4 Results.
Design calculations Clicking on the Design calculations icon, the software generates a detailed documentation of the results
based on the active virtual strip and the load combination/load case selected in the model. The icon is
only active if the model already contains at least one (masonry) virtual strip that has storey(s).
For details, see… 6.9.1.4 Results.
Design results Clicking on the Design results icon, the design results of the virtual strips can be seen summarized in a
table. The icon is only active if the model already contains at least one (masonry) virtual strip that has
storey(s).
For details, see… 6.9.1.4 Results.
Restore automatic The automatic design parameters of the selected storey of the actual virtual strip can be restored (see
design parameters Automatic design parameters).
The following parameters can be restored separately:
• Masonry material (and its parameters that can be set independently),
• Wall thickness,
• Masonry joints (top and bottom joint, with all the reference cross-sections),
• Design parameters (all the data in the Design parameters window except the material).
For details, see… 6.9.1.2
556

6.9.1.2. Design check of masonry walls, definition of design- and joint parameters

Design check of After clicking Check button, the Design check of masonry wall window opens where the design parame-
masonry wall ters of the wall can be specified and design check is performed.

Active storey On the left side of the window, a drawing shows the investigated storey of the selected masonry wall
(virtual strip). Dimensions and joints are shown in detail including the connecting slab, thermal insula-
tion, etc. The coordinate system in the right corner shows the coordinate system of the virtual strip,
thus it can be seen how the masonry wall is related to its virtual strip.
The green axis shows the axis of the virtual strip. If the thickness of the wall varies along stories, this axis
is identical width the axis of the thickest wall. The yellow axis shows the axis of the storey. It is not nec-
essarily identical with the axis of the strip if the wall thickness varies.
Material color is used as the color of masonry elements. Filling pattern cannot be changed and it does
not follow the type of masonry elements.
 If the mouse is moved over the masonry wall, the cursor changes to a hand symbol. In this case,
after double click on the wall, Design parameters of masonry wall window opens.
 If the mouse is moved over the top or bottom joint of masonry wall, the cursor changes to a
hand symbol. In this case, after double click with the mouse, Masonry joints window opens.
Reference cross- The position of reference cross-sections can be set by the user. Three positions can be defined where
section the software reads the internal forces of the virtual strip. These internal forces are used in the design
check.
Thick, blue lines show the positions of reference cross-sections. These lines can be dragged with the
mouse between the black dashed lines. The height of the zones where the lines can be dragged are 20
% of the storey height (middle section) and equal to the wall thickness (top and bottom sections), re-
spectively.
The position of reference cross-sections is automatically adjusted to the edge of concrete slabs at the
top and the bottom if concrete slabs are present according to the joint settings. By clicking on the small
button shown on the left, the automatic positons can be restored.
Using the three editboxes on Internal forces tab, the positions can be given by exact values. These val-
ues are accepted only if they are between the dashed lines.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 557

The position of arrows above the thick blue lines represents the eccentricity of the compression force in
that specific cross-section. Usually, the color of arrows is blue. The color changes to red if the resistance
of the cross section is not adequate according to the design check. If the resistance cannot be calculat-
ed due to an error, the arrow is not shown.
 The considered internal forces and the design results are changed together with the change of
positions of reference cross-sections.
 In case of SIA 266 standard, the position of middle cross-section cannot be set.

Internal forces In the Design check of masonry wall window, the following internal force diagrams are shown:
Nx axial force (design axial force)
My bending moment about y axis
DMy additional bending moment due to eccentric effects (calculated only if Calculation of additional
bending moments option is checked on Masonry walls window)
SMy desing bending moment (the sum of bending moment of the virtual strip and additional bend-
ing moment)
Vz out-of-plane shear force of the virtual strip
Thin black lines indicate the position of reference cross-sections on the internal force diagrams.
Results panel The design results are summarized in a table on Results tab. For further information see… 6.9.1.4 Re-
sults.

Design parameters The design parameters of the selected storey can be specified in Design parameters of masonry wall
of masonry wall window:

Masonry material After the definition of stories, the software automatically sets the material of the masonry wall based on
the material of the involved domains. This automatically selected material can be changed in this win-
dow.
Variable material The following parameters can be specified by the user (Any changes in this window will not result the
parameters change of parameters of material. These values are considered only in the course of the design check of
investigated storey of the selected masonry wall.):
558

Eurocode • E - Young’s modulus

• φ∞ - final value of creep coefficient
• M - partial safety factor of material strength

NTC • M - partial safety factor of material strength

SIA 266 • Exk - Young’s modulus

• M - partial safety factor of material strength
 As it is explained in the previous section, the masonry material is selected first automatically
after the definition of stories. In case of orthotropic materials, the orientation of local axes need
to be revised.
 Any changes in this window related to the material of masonry wall does not imply the change of
the material of the domains connected to the virtual strip. The material of the domains need to
changed by the user if necessary.
Standard specific
parameters
Eurocode 6 • (ed/t)max – limit value of relative eccentricity:
If the relative eccentricity is higher than this limit value in any cross-section, then the design
check fails and the resistance of the cross-section is considered inadequate.
In case of top and bottom sections, the relative eccentricity is calculated based on the effective
thickness of the wall and relative to it’s axis.
• ρn reduction factor considering buckling, default value is 1.0,
• C value of the slenderness ratio up to which eccentricities due to creep can be neglected.

NTC • (ed/t)max - limit value of relative eccentricity,

• ρ reduction factor considering buckling, default value is 1.0.

SIA 266 • h0 is the sum of the height of masonry element and the height of mortar layer,
• rmax is the maximum acceptable crack width,
• boundary conditions (E1 / E2 / E3).
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 559

Stress distribution In case of one-side slabs, constant and linear stress distribution can be considered under the slab reac-
tion force. The stress distribution set has significant effect on the calculated additional bending mo-
ment.

Additional bending moment is calculated as the product of slab reaction force and eccentricity based
on the position of resultant of stress distribution. The slab reaction calculated from the difference be-
tween the axial forces of subsequent stories.
 Stress distribution can be selected only if Calculation of additional bending moments option is
checked on Masonry walls window.
 In case of the topmost storey, the total axial force at the top is considered slab reaction force.
For multi-storey structures, it is highly recommended to use virtual strips that span all of the
stories if the wall is continuous, otherwise the software cannot calculate the additional bending
moments properly.
 If SIA standard is selected, constant stress distribution can be considered only.
Seismic For further details about coefficient of seimic forces see… 4.10.23 Seismic loads – SE1 module.

Joint settings The parameters of joints can be specified in Masonry joint window:

On the left side of the window, a drawing shows the top and bottom masonry joints. Purple rectangle
shows which joint is active whose parameters can be modified on the right side. Active joint can be
switched by selecting between the two tabs on the top or by clicking on the joint on the drawing.
 If the mouse is moved over the top or bottom joint of masonry wall in the Design check of ma-
sonry wall window, the cursor changes to a hand symbol. In this case, after double click with the
mouse, Masonry joints window opens.
Type of the slab Different cases can be handled:
• slab is not specified,
• continuous slab,
• one-sided slab.
Based on the selection, different parameters can be specified. The lower indices indicate the position of
the joint (1 – top; 2 – bottom).
560

Slab is not specified Slab is not specified option can be used if the user does not want to define the parameters of the slab.
Optional parameters:
• e1,N is the eccentricity of the slab reaction (it is originated from the ’jump’ in the axial forces or
the difference between the axial forces of subsequent stories.). (This parameter is only availab-
le for top joints). The sign of the eccentricity is selected according to the coordinate system of
the virtual strip.

erel,1 is the relative eccentricity based on the wall thickness (calculated).

 The calculated relative eccentricity is revised relative to the limit set in Design parameters with-
out the consideration of the (other) internal forces that reduces the eccentricity of the slab reac-
tion.
In the verification, at the top section the effective wall thickness is identical with the wall thickness of
the storey. This rule is also valid for the bottom section, but if the thickness of the wall below the inves-
tigated storey is lower than the wall thickness of the actual storey, then only the lower wall thickness is
taken into account in the calculation.
Continuous slab In case of Continuous slab, it is assumed that the slab reaction loads are centric. The storey height is
calculated with the consideration of slab thickness.
Optional parameters:
• v is thickness of the slab.

One-side slab The eccentricity of slab reaction is calculated with the consideration of joint parameters (e.g. thickness
of thermal insulation) and the type of stress distribution as described above. The storey height is calcu-
lated with the consideration of slab thickness.
Optional parameters:
• external side of the wall (left/right), in agreement with the local coordinate system of the se-
lected virtual strip,
• v is thickness of the slab,
• i is thickness of thermal insulation,
• b is the width of soft inlay (only for top joint).

If Calculation of additional bending moments option is checked on Masonry walls window, the software
shows the defined stress distribution on the drawing.
Calculated The software calculates and showes the following parameters:
parameters
• teff if the effective thickness (considering the thickness of thermal insulation and the width of
soft inlay)
• ez is the difference between the center of effective area and the center of the wall.
Copy the actual Using Copy of actual settings of the joint to the other joint option, the defined parameters can be copied
settings of the joint to the opposite joint of the storey.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 561

More parameters Further relevant parameters that cannot be read from the drawings are listed in More parameters list.

Further tools & On the top of Design check of masonry wall window, the further tools and buttons are also available:
buttons
Save to Saves the drawing to the Drawing Library.
Drawings Library

Design parameters see… 6.9.1.4 Results.

of masonry walls

Design results see… 6.9.1.4 Results.

Design calculations see… 6.9.1.4 Results.

Switch between The investigated storey can be selected from the list below. The arrows beside the list can be used to
storeys switch one storey up/down.

6.9.1.3. Display of masonry walls in the model

Based on the defined or automatically assigned parameters, the

software shows the vertical section of the wall. It can help to control
the joint parameters and to interpret a coordinate system of the
strip.
Red circles on the axis of virtual strip indicate the boundaries of the
defined stories.

6.9.1.4. Results

The design results of masonry walls are available in many ways in the software.
Control results The results of the investigated storey of the selected wall are listed in summarized form on Results tab
of Design check of masonry wall window. If any error occurs during the design check, the software
warns the user for it underlining the source of the error.
According to the selected design code, the Results tab is shown differently. If SIA or NTC standard is
selected, design and interpolated curves are also presented.
562

Eurocode NTC SIA 266

In the reference cross-section the program indicates the point of

action of the vertical force based on the internal forces (the eccen-
tricity does not contain the initial eccentricity/ minimum eccen-
tricity).
If the resistance of the wall section is adequate then color of the
arrow is blue, if not then it is red. If the vertical resistance cannot
be calculated then the arrow is not displayed.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 563

Tables
Design parameters Design parameters of masonry wall table is available via Design check of masonry wall and Masonry walls
of masonry walls windows, as well. This table shows the defined or automatically assigned design parameters.
If the table is opened from Masonry walls window, it summarizes the parameters of every masonry walls
in the model, otherwise only the investigated virtual strip is listed with its stories.

The table can be printed and can be saved into the documentation.
Design results Design results table is available via Design check of masonry wall and Masonry walls windows, as well. If
the table is opened from Masonry walls window, load case/combination, envelope or automatic critical
load combinations can be selected from a listbox which is considered in the design check. After modify-
ing selection in this listbox, the window automatically performs the design checks that can take few
seconds.

The table can be printed and can be saved into the documentation.
Design calculations Click on Design calculations button to see the design details. The calculation can be saved into the
documentation. Design calculations is available via Design check of masonry wall and Masonry walls
windows, as well.
If it is opened from Masonry walls window, it summarizes the design details for the selected storeys (in
the dialog box that appears) of the actual masonry wall strip. If it is opened from Design check of ma-
sonry wall window, only the design results of the investigated storey is summarized.
564

Masonry wall If there are masonry wall parameters assigned to virtual strips in the model and static (linear/non-linear)
utilization result or dynamic results are available, new result component becomes available on Masonry wall design tab
component related to design check results.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 565

6.9.1.5. Principles of checking

Checking The program considers the followings:

• The tensile strength of masonry perpendicular to bed joints is zero.
• Only the eccentricites perpendicular to the plane of the wall are taken into account, irrespecti-
ve of the width of the wall strip, two directional eccentricity cannot be analysed.
• Only single-leaf walls can be examined with constant wall thickness along a storey.
• Shear is not checked neither in the plane of the wall, nor perpendicular to it.
• The additional bending moments due to the eccentric effects of the settings can only be calcu-
lated by approximation models, if the results of the model does not contain them. The chan-
ges in the stiffness due to the eccentric effects cannot be taken into account.
Calculation of In all cases, the design vertical force is the same as the normal force of the virtual strip Nx, which is
design internal calculated by the integration of the internal forces of the domain considering
forces
total width of the strip.
The design bending moment is the sum of the moment of the virtual strip My and the additional bend-
ing moment calculated by the approximate models. In the calculation, additional bending moments has
to be be taken into account depending on the settings of the masonry wall strip (alignment of the walls
in case of various wall thickness, masonry joint settings, stress distribution under the slab reaction). If
the calculation based on the model does not contain the effects of these, then the program offers two
different models to calculate the bending moments:
• Hinged model:
This is simple beam model whith bottom hinges. The walls are supported laterally on each
storey.
• Continuous model:
The additional bending moment calculated using a continuous beam model which involves all
the walls. The walls are supported laterally on each storey, the bottom joint of the lower storey
is supposed to be fixed.
 In theee models, only the linear stiffness properties of the walls are considered, and the stiffness
supposed to be constant for a storey. The various stiffness of connecting slabs and lateral sup-
ports cannot be taken into account.
 In SIA standard only the Hinged model is available.
Standard The specific verification rules of the available standards see… 6.9.1.6…6.9.1.8.
specifications

6.9.1.6. Design check according to Eurocode 6

General principles Following the general principles of the standard (chapter 6.1.) a wall has to be checked at three section
(top, mid height of wall, bottom).
The resistance of the wall section is adequate if the following criterion
𝑁𝐸𝑑 ≤ 𝑁𝑅𝑑
and the detaling rules are satisfied.
The program uses the following formula to determine the vertical resistance of a wall:
N𝑅𝑑 = Φ ∙ 𝑡 ∙ 𝑓𝑑 ∙ 𝑏
where  is the capacity reduction factor.
At the top and bottom sections, the capacity reduction factor is calculated by the effective wall thick-
ness - teff (see masonry joint settings).
The design compressive strength fd is calculated by the following:
𝑓𝑘
f𝑑 =
𝛾𝑀
If the cross-sectional area of a wall strip is less than 0,01 m2, the design compressive strength should be
lowered using the next formula:
566

f𝑑,𝑟𝑒𝑑 = 𝑓𝑑 ∙ (0,7 + 3𝐴),

where A is the loaded horizontal gross cross-sectional area of the wall, expressed in square metres.
In the module, only the cross-sectional area of the virtual strip can be considered, irrespective the total
width of the concerned domain.
Checking at In EN 1996-1-1, the design eccentricity is calculated by the following equation:
the top or bottom of
𝑀𝑖𝑑
the wall 𝑒𝑖 = + 𝑒ℎ𝑒 + 𝑒𝑖𝑛𝑖𝑡 ≥ 0,05 ∙ 𝑡
𝑁𝑖𝑑
where ei is the eccentricity at the top (i=1) or the bottom (i=2) of the wall.
The program does not separate the eccentricities depending on the load type (vertical/horizontal) and
indicates the sum of them in the calculation as follows. The eccentricity based on the internal forces
calculated to the axis of the wall:
𝑀𝑖𝑑
𝑒0 = + 𝑒ℎ𝑒
𝑁𝑖𝑑
In the verification, the program applies lowered wall thickness (teff), if not the whole section is working
(due to the masonry joint settings). In this case, the eccentricity is calculated to the axis of the effective
wall thickness:
𝑒0,𝑖 = 𝑒0,𝑖 − Δ𝑧
where z is the difference between the axis of the wall and effective wall thickness.
(If the wall thickness t is not reduced due to the joint settings, then 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 𝑡 and 𝑒0,𝑖 = 𝑒0 .)
Considering the rules of the standard and the markings above, the design eccentricity comes from the
following expression:
𝑒𝑖 = 𝑒0,𝑖 + 𝑒𝑖𝑛𝑖𝑡 ≥ 0,05 ∙ 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓
The the initial eccentricity measured in the unfavorable direction relative to the axis of the effective
thickness, the minimum eccentricity is calculated by teff.
The i capacity reduction factor is calculated as follows:
2 ∙ 𝑒𝑖
Φ𝑖 = 1 −
𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓
Considering the total wall width b, the vertical resistance is the following:
N𝑅𝑑,𝑖 = Φ𝑖 ∙ 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓 ∙ 𝑓𝑑 ∙ 𝑏
Checking in the In EN 1996-1-1, the design eccentricity is calculated by the following expression:
middle of the wall
𝑀𝑚𝑑
height 𝑒𝑚 = + 𝑒ℎ𝑚 ± 𝑒𝑖𝑛𝑖𝑡
𝑁𝑚𝑑
The program does not separate the eccentricities depending on the load type (vertical/horizontal) and
indicates the sum of them in the calculation as follows. The eccentricity based on the internal forces
calculated to the axis of the wall:
𝑀𝑚𝑑
𝑒0,𝑚 = + 𝑒ℎ𝑚
𝑁𝑚𝑑
and the eccentricity due to loads:
𝑒𝑚 = 𝑒0,𝑚 ± 𝑒𝑖𝑛𝑖𝑡
finally, the design eccentricity comes from the following expression:
𝑒𝑚𝑘 = 𝑒𝑚 + 𝑒𝑘 ≥ 0,05 ∙ 𝑡
where ek is the eccentricity due to creep, but it only has to be taken into account if the slenderness of
the wall exceeds the limit of C :
ℎ𝑒𝑓
> 𝜆𝑐
𝑡𝑒𝑓
in this case
ℎ𝑒𝑓
𝑒𝑘 = 0,002 ∙ 𝜙∞ ∙ √𝑡 ∙ 𝑒𝑚
𝑡𝑒𝑓
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 567

C is specified in the National Annex (in the program the parameter C can be modified if necessary).
In NEN-EN 1996-1-1 (Dutch rules) the following criterion is considered when calculating emk:
ℎ𝑒𝑓
𝑒𝑚𝑘 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {𝑒𝑚 + 𝑒𝑘 ; 0,05 ∙ 𝑡; ; 10 mm}
300
The factor of m is calculated by Annex G (G1…G4) in EN 1996-1-1.
Considering the total wall width b, the vertical resistance is the following:
N𝑅𝑑,𝑖 = Φ𝑚 ∙ 𝑡 ∙ 𝑓𝑑 ∙ 𝑏
Design and detailing The following rules are checked:
rules
• slenderness of the wall: ≤ 27.
• minimum wall thickness according tot he National Annex. It is examined, only if a specific valu-
es is given in the National Annex. In cases, when the minimum thickness depends on the type
of the wall, the program applies only the minimum of the given values.
• minimum area of wall: 0,04 m2.
• maximum relative eccentricity (it is not clearly regulated in EN 1996-1-1). In the program, the
limit can be set freely (see Design parameters). The default setting is: erel,max = 0,40 (only one
value can be set, and it is taken into account in all three sections).
Checking
- at the top (i=1) or bottom (i=2):
𝑒𝑖
𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑙,𝑖 = ≤ 𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑙,𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓
- in the middle of the wall height:
𝑒𝑚𝑘
𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑙,𝑚 = ≤ 𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑙,𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝑡
Error messages The following error messages appears in the results of the calculation:

Displayed error message: Interpretation of the error:

Not passed! The resistance of the wall/section section is not adequate.

The force is out of the cross- The point of action of the vertical force is out of the cross-section.
section
Relative eccentricity is too In the cross-section the relative eccentricity exceeds the limit (see
high. Design parameters).
The cross-section is in tension. The cross-section is in tension, the vertical resistance cannot be calcu-
lated.
Axial compression force is zero. In the cross-section the axial compression force is negligibly small, less
than 0,1 kN.
Slenderness is too high. The slenderness of the wall exceeds the limit according to the stand-
ard.
The wall thickness is insuffi- The wall thickness is less than the limit according to the National An-
cient. nex.
The wall section is insufficient. The cross-sectional area of the wall (cross-section of the virtual strip)
is less then the limit according to the standard.

6.9.1.7. Design check according to NTC

General principles Following the general principles of the standard (NTC 2018) a wall has to be checked at three section
(top, mid height of wall, bottom) similar to Eurocode 6.
In the standard, it is supposed that the wall has hinges at the top and bottom. The user has to build
such a model with the right settings that follows the guidelines of the standard.
The resistance of the wall section is adequate if the following criterion
𝑁𝑑 ≤ 𝑁𝑟
and the detaling rules are satisfied.
568

The program uses the following formula to determine the vertical resistance of a wall:
N𝑟 = 𝑓𝑑,𝑟𝑖𝑑 ∙ 𝑡 ∙ 𝑏
and
f𝑑,𝑟𝑖𝑑 = Φ ∙ 𝑓𝑑
where  is the reduction factor of the strength of material determined using the interpolation table
given in the standard.
At the top and bottom sections, the reduction factor is calculated by the effective wall thickness (see
masonry joint settings).
The design compressive strength fd is calculated by the following:
𝑓𝑘
f𝑑 =
𝛾𝑀
Checking at In NTC, the design eccentricity is calculated by the following equation:
the top or bottom of
𝑒1 = |𝑒𝑠 | + 𝑒𝑎
the wall
where es is the eccentricity of vertical loads.
The program does not separate the eccentricities depending on the load type (vertical/horizontal) and
indicates the sum of them as e0.
In the verification, the program applies lowered wall thickness (teff), if not the whole section is working
(due to the masonry joint settings). In this case, the eccentricity is calculated to the axis of the effective
wall thickness:
𝑒0,1 = 𝑒0 − Δ𝑧
where z is the difference between the axes of the wall and effective wall thickness.
(If the wall thickness t is not reduced due to the joint settings, then 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 𝑡 and 𝑒0,𝑖 = 𝑒0 .)
Finally, the design eccentricity comes from the following expression:
𝑒1 = 𝑒0,1 + 𝑒𝑎
where
ℎ
𝑒𝑎 =
200
in which h is the storey height.
The initial eccentricity ea is measured in the unfavorable direction relative to the axis of the effective
thickness (teff).
Based on the initial parameters, the factor of i is calculated by linear interpolation using the table
given in the standard (see below).
𝑒1
The relative eccentricity: e𝑟𝑒𝑙,1 = , where teff is the effective wall thickness.
𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓

The eccentricity coefficient m is calculated by the following: 𝑚 = 6 ∙ 𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑙,1 ,

ℎ0
and the slenderness: 𝜆 = , where ℎ0 = 𝜚 ∙ ℎ.
𝑡

Considering the total wall width b, the vertical resistance is the following:
N𝑟 = Φ ∙ 𝑓𝑑 ∙ 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓 ∙ 𝑏
Checking in the In NTC, the design eccentricity is calculated by the following expression:
middle of the wall 𝑒1
height 𝑒2 = + 𝑒𝑣
2
where e1 is the design eccentricity at the top, ev eccentricity is calculated from horizontal loads.
The program does not separate the eccentricities depending on the load type (vertical/horizontal) and
indicates the sum of them as e0.
The design eccentricity comes from the following expression:
𝑒𝑎
𝑒2 = 𝑒0 + ≥ 𝑒𝑎
2
where
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 569
ℎ
𝑒𝑎 =
200
In the above formula, half of the ea is taken in the calculation considering the hinged model recom-
mended in the standard.
If the user uses hinges for the domains and also applies the model called Hinged model to determine
the additional bending moments, then this formula gives the same result as the standard. The applied
models have to be considered by the users.
Based on the initial parameters, the factor of i is calculated by linear interpolation using the table
given in the standard (see below).
𝑒
The relative eccentricity: e𝑟𝑒𝑙,2 = 2 , where t is the total wall thickness.
𝑡

The eccentricity coefficient m is calculated by the following: 𝑚 = 6 ∙ 𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑙,2 ,

ℎ0
and the slenderness: 𝜆 = , where ℎ0 = 𝜚 ∙ ℎ.
𝑡

Considering the total wall width b, the vertical resistance is the following:
N𝑟 = Φ ∙ 𝑓𝑑 ∙ 𝑡 ∙ 𝑏

Interpolation table The following table (given in the standard, Tab. 4.5.III) is used to determine the factor of .
for the determina-
m=6·e/t
tion of  factor Slenderness - 
0 0,5 1,0 1,5 2,0

0 1,00 0,74 0,59 0,44 0,33

5 0,97 0,71 0,55 0,39 0,27

10 0,86 0,61 0,45 0,27 0,16

15 0,69 0,48 0,32 0,17 -

20 0,53 0,36 0,23 - -

Design and detailing The following rules are checked:

rules
• slenderness of the wall: ≤ 20.
• minimum wall thickness: t ≥ 150 mm (only this value is considered, the minimum value de-
pending on the type of the unit is not checked).
• minimum area of wall: 0,04 m2 (applying the rule given Eurocode 6).
• maximum relative eccentricity (default valus is 0.33, but it can be modified).
Checking
- at the top or bottom:

𝑒1
𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑙,1 = ≤ 0,33
𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓
- in the middle of the wall height:
𝑒2
𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑙,2 = ≤ 0,33
𝑡
Error messages The following error messages appears in the results of the calculation:

Displayed error message: Interpretation of the error:

Not passed! The resistance of the wall/section section is not adequate.

The force is out of the cross- The point of action of the vertical force is out of the cross-section.
section.
Relative eccentricity is too In the cross-section the relative eccentricity exceeds the limit (see
high. Design parameters).
The cross-section is in tension. The cross-section is in tension, the vertical resistance cannot be calcu-
lated.
Axial compression force is zero. In the cross-section the axial compression force is negligibly small, less
than 0,1 kN.
570

Slenderness is too high. The slenderness of the wall exceeds the limit according to the stand-
ard.
The wall thickness is insuffi- The wall thickness is less than the limit according to the National An-
cient. nex.
The wall section is insufficient. The cross-sectional area of the wall (cross-section of the virtual strip)
is less then the limit according to the standard.
F cannot be calculated!  cannot be evaluated based on the initial parameters of interpola-
tion.

6.9.1.8. Design check according to SIA

General principles The principles of SIA 266: 2015 standard calculation method differ significantly from the procedure
described in Eurocode 6. Based on the standard, the wall has to be checked in ultimate and serviceabil-
ity limit state (ULS and SLS) as well.
The program performs ULS or SLS verification depending on the type of the combination. If the type is
not known, both checking is performed, but only the result of the critical state is displayed.
The standard contains constraints on the static model, so the user should take care of the correct choice
of the static model. For the assumptions, see details below.
Calculating the additional bending moment only the Hinged model is available, and only constant stress
distribution can be applied.
The applied static model (E1, E2 and E3) has to be selected by the user, the program cannot determine
based on the model.

ULS verification In ULS verification, the wall is checked in two sections of the wall: at the top and the bottom of the wall.
Checking the wall at the bottom, the program uses approximations described in the standard.
Checking at The program follows the regulations of the standard (SIA 266:2015) described in chapter 4.3.1.3 (11):
the top of the wall
𝑁𝑥𝑑 ≤ 𝑘𝑁 ∙ 𝑙𝑤 ∙ 𝑡𝑤 ∙ 𝑓𝑥𝑑
where
• Nxd is the design vertical force at the top of the wall,
• lw width of the wall (in the program it is equal to the width of the virtual strip)
• tw wall thickness,
• fxd is the design compressive strength, which is calculated as follows:
𝑓𝑥𝑘
f𝑥𝑑 =
𝛾𝑀
The factor of kN is calculated by linear interpolation based on the set static model (E1, E2 and E3) using
the design curves given in the standard (SIA 266:2015, Figure 5).
The interpolation is determined by the relative slenderness of the wall (hw/tw or hcr/tw) and the relative
eccentricity (ez/tw) calculated at the top of the wall.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 571

In case of ez, the software assumes the followings:

- the eccentricity is originated of the eccentricity of slab reaction. The resultant of the slab reac-
tion force is in the axis of the effective wall thickness (lowered wall thickness considering ma-
sonry joint settings).
- the eccentricity of the vertical force from the wall above is supposed to be zero at the investi-
gated top section (ez  0).
The user should consider whether these approximations are appropriate based on the built model and
settings.
In the standard the relative eccentricity (ez/tw) is limited by the formula (6) and the Figure 4 (ez/tw ≤
0,375). But in the program this value is limited to 0.35, because of the limits of the design curve for
interpolation.
𝑒𝑧 1 𝑁𝑥𝑑
≤ 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { ∙ (1 − ) ; 0,35}
𝑡𝑤 2 𝑙𝑤 ∙ 𝑡𝑤 ∙ 𝑓𝑥𝑑
If this regulation is not satisfied then the vertical resistance of the wall cannot be calculated.
Checking at The program follows the regulations of the standard (SIA 266:2015) described in chapter 4.3.1.5 (6):
the bottom of the
wall
𝑁𝑥𝑑 ≤ 𝑙𝑤 ∙ 𝑎 ∙ 𝑓𝑥𝑑
where Nxd is the design vertical force at the bottom of the wall,
„a” is the effective thickness of the wall.
This expression assumes that the point of action of the vertical force acts in the axis of the effective
thickness. In the program, if the eccentricity relative to the axis of the wall is bigger then zero, the pro-
gram shows a warning message, but it does not influence the result of the check. The assumptions
should always be considered by the users.
The standard does not contain a similar check method for the mid-height section as Eurocode 6, so the
wall is not checked in the middle.
Error messages The following error messages appears in the results of the calculation:

Displayed error message: Interpretation of the error:

Not passed! The resistance of the wall/section section is not adequate.

The force is out of the cross- The point of action of the vertical force is out of the cross-section.
section.
Relative eccentricity is too In the cross-section the relative eccentricity exceeds the limit (see
high. Design parameters).
The cross-section is in tension. The cross-section is in tension, the vertical resistance cannot be calcu-
lated.
Axial compression force is zero. In the cross-section the axial compression force is negligibly small, less
than 0,1 kN.
Slenderness is too high. The slenderness of the wall exceeds the limits of the design curves for
interpolation (hw/tw≤ 50 or hcr/tw≤ 50), the factor of kN cannot be
calculated.
572

SLS verification The program follows the regulations of the standard (SIA 266:2015) described in chapter 4.4.1.5 (21):
The maximum crack width can be calculated by the next formula:
𝑁𝑥 ∙ ℎ0
𝑟 = 𝑘𝑟 ∙
𝐸𝑥𝑘 ∙ 𝑙𝑤 ∙ 𝑡𝑤
where
• Nx is the vertical force on the top of the wall,
• h0 is the total height of the masonry unit and mortar,
• Exk moduli of elasticity,
• lw width of the wall (in the program it is equal to the width of the virtual strip),
• tw wall thickness,
• kr factor.
The factor of kr is calculated by linear interpolation based on the set static model (E1, E2 and E3) using
the design curves given in the standard (SIA 266:2015, Figure 12).
The interpolation is determined by the relative slenderness of the wall (hw/hE or hcr/hE) and the relative
eccentricity (ez/tw) calculated at the top of the wall.

The parameter of hE is calculated as follows:

3
𝐸𝑥𝑘 ∙ 𝑙𝑤 ∙ 𝑡𝑤
ℎ𝐸 = 𝜋 ∙ √
12 ∙ 𝑁𝑥

The wall is adequate for the SLS verifications, if 𝑟 ≤ 𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑥 , where rmax is the maximum crack width ac-
cording to 4.2.2.2. The default value of the maximum crack width is 0,2 mm, but it can be set among the
design parameters.
Error messages The following error messages appears in the results of the calculation:

Displayed error message: Interpretation of the error:

Not passed! The resistance of the wall/section section is not adequate.

Relative eccentricity is too high. In the cross-section the relative eccentricity exceeds the limit of 0.35.
The cross-section is in tension. The cross-section is in tension, the vertical resistance cannot be
calculated.
Axial compression force is zero. In the cross-section the axial compression force is negligibly small,
less than 0,1 kN.
kr cannot be calculated! Tha factor of kr cannot be evaluated based on the initial parameters
of interpolation (hw/hE or hcr/hE and ez/tw)
Design and detailing The following rules are checked during the verification:
rules
• slenderness of the wall: ≤ 50 (limit of the design curves of kN factor, =hw/tw or =hcr/tw).
• maximum relative eccentricity (limited in the design curves for the interpolation):
erel,max = 0,35.
The relative eccentricity is checked only at the top cross-section:
𝑒𝑧
𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑙,𝑖 = ≤ 𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑙,𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝑡
where t is the effective cross-section.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 573

7. AxisVM Viewer and Viewer Expert

AxisVM Viewer AxisVM Viewer is a freely downloadable version of the
program for viewing models without the possibility of
making changes. Printing of drawings, tables or reports
is not available.
This programs allows a detailed presentation of a mo-
del in an environment where AxisVM has not been
installed.

If you do not want others to use your work as a basis for their models but you would like to let them
see it save the model in an AxisVM Viewer (*.AXV) file format (see File/Export). The market version
cannot read AXV files but the Viewer can. This format guarantees that your work will be protected.

AxisVM Viewer Owners of the AxisVM market version can buy the Viewer Expert version which lets the user print
Expert diagrams, tables and reports or place temporary dimension lines and text boxes. No changes can be
saved.

8. Programming AxisVM – COM module

AxisVM AxisVM like many other Windows application supports Microsoft COM technology making its opera-
COM server tions available for external programs. Programs implementing a COM server register their COM clas-
ses in the Windows Registry providing interface information.

Any external program can get these descriptions, read object properties or call the functions provided
through the interface. A program can launch AxisVM, build models, run calculations and get the re-
sults through the AxisVM COM server. This is the best way to

• build and analyse parametric models,

• finding solutions with iterative methods or
• build specific design extension modules.

DLL modules placed in the Plugins folder of AxisVM are automatically included in the Plugins menu
imitating the subfolder structure of the Plugins folder. The AxisVM COM server specification and pro-
gramming examples are downloadable from the AxisVM website, www.axisvm.eu
574

This page is intentionally left blank.

User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 575

9. Examples

9.1. Linear static analysis of a steel plane frame

Input data AK-ST-I.axs

Geometry:

Material: Steel
Cross-section: I 240

Loads:

Results AK-ST-I.axe

Component Analytic AxisVM

1 Lc. e( C)
X
[mm] 17.51 17.51
M (A )
y
[kNm] -20.52 -20.52
2 Lc. e(XC)
[mm] 7.91 7.91
M (A )
y
[kNm] 63.09 63.09
576

9.2. Geometric nonlinear static analysis of a steel plane frame

Input data AK-ST-II.axs

Geometry:

Material: Steel
Cross-section: I 240

Loads:

Results AK-ST-II.axe

Component With Stability AxisVM

Functions
1 Lc. e(XC)
[mm] 20.72 20.58
M (A )
y
[kNm] -23.47 -23.41
2 Lc. e(XC)
[mm] 9.26 9.22
M (A )
y
[kNm] 66.13 66.25

Verify The equilibrium must be verified taking into account the deflections.
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 577

9.3. Buckling analysis of a steel plane frame

Input data AK-KI.axs

Geometry and loads:

Material: Steel
Cross-section: I 240

Results AK-KI.axe

Buckling mode:

Critical load Cosmos/M AxisVM

parameter
ncr 6.632 6.633
578

9.4. Vibration analysis (I-Order) of a steel plane frame

Input data AK-RZ-I.axs

Geometry:

Material: Steel
Cross-section: I 240

Results AK-RZ-I.axe

Frequency [Hz]
Mode Cosmos/M AxisVM
1 6.957 6.957
2 27.353 27.353
3 44.692 44.692
4 48.094 48.094
5 95.714 95.714
6 118.544 118.544
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 579

9.5. Vibration analysis (II-Order) of a steel plane frame

Input data AK-RZ-II.axs

Geometry and loads:

Material: Steel
Cross-section: I 240

Results AK-RZ-II.axe

Frequency [Hz]
Mode Cosmos/M AxisVM
1 0.514 0.514
2 11.427 11.426
3 12.768 12.766
4 17.146 17.145
5 27.112 27.109
6 39.461 39.456
580

9.6. Linear static analysis of a reinforced concrete cantilever

Input data VT1-ST-I.axs

E=880 kN/cm2
=0
t=0.10 m
p=100 kN/m
Mesh: 4x16

Results VT1-ST-I.axe

Component Beam theory AxisVM

(shear deformations
included)

ez( B)
[mm] 15.09 15.09

n(xA )
[kN/m] 1800.00 1799.86
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 581

9.7. Linear static analysis of a simply supported reinforced concrete plate

Input data VL1-ST-I.axs

E=880 kN/cm2
=0
t=0.15 m
p=50 kN/m2
Mesh: 8x8

Results

Component Analytic AxisVM

(shear deformations (shear deformations
not included) included)
( A)
ez
[mm] 51.46 51.46
( A)
mx
[kNm/m] 46.11 46.31

Convergence
analysis

Meshes:
582

9.8. Linear static analysis of a clamped reinforced concrete plate

Input data VL2-ST-I.axs

E=880 kN/cm2
=0
t=0.15 m
p=50 kN/m2
Mesh: 16x16

Results VL2-ST-I.axe

Component Analytic AxisVM

(shear deformations (shear deformations
not included) included)
e(zA ) [mm] 16.00 16.18
m(xA ) [kNm/m] 22.01 22.15
m(B
x
)
[kNm/m] 64.43 63.25
q(B
x
)
[kN/m] 111.61 109.35

Convergence
analysis

Meshes:
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 583

10. References
1. Bathe, K. J., Wilson, E. L., Numerical Methods in Finite Element Analysis, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1976

2. Bojtár I., Vörös G., A végeselem-módszer alkalmazása lemez- és héjszerkezetekre, Műszaki Könyvkiadó, Budapest,
1986
3. Chen, W. F., Lui, E. M., Structural Stability, Elsevier Science Publishing Co., Inc., New York, 1987

4. Hughes, T. J. R., The Finite Element Method, Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1987

5. Owen D. R. J., Hinton E., Finite Elements in Plasticity, Pineridge Press Limited, Swansea, 1980

6. Popper Gy., Csizmás F., Numerikus módszerek mérnököknek, Akadémiai Kiadó  Typotex, Budapest, 1993

7. Przemieniecki, J. S., Theory of Matrix Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill Book Co., New York, 1968

8. Weaver Jr., W., Johnston, P. R., Finite Elements for Structural Analysis, Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New
Jersey, 1984

9. Dr. Szalai Kálmán, Vasbetonszerkezetek, vasbeton-szilárdságtan, Tankönyvkiadó, Budapest, 1990. 1998

10. Dr. Kollár László: Vasbeton-szilárdságtan, Műegyetemi Kiadó, 1995

11. Dr. Kollár László: Vasbetonszerkezetek I., Vasbeton-szilárdságtan az Eurocode 2 szerint, Műegyetemi Kiadó, 1997

12. Dr. Bölcskei E., Dr. Dulácska E.: Statikusok könyve, Műszaki Könyvkiadó, 1974

13. Dr. Dulácska Endre: Kisokos, Segédlet tartószerkezetek tervezéséhez, BME Építészmérnöki Kar, 1993
14. Porteous, J., Kermani, A., Structural Timber Design to Eurocode 5, Blackwell Publishing, 2007

15. Dulácska Endre, Joó Attila, Kollár László: Tartószerkezetek tervezése földrengési hatásokra, Akadémiai Kiadó,
2008

16. Pilkey, W. D., Analysis and Design of Elastic Beams - Computational methods, John Wiley & sons, Inc., 2002
17. Navrátil, J., Prestressed Concrete Structures, Akademické Nakladatelství Cerm®, 2006

18. Szepesházi Róbert: Geotechnikai tervezés (Tervezés Eurocode 7 és a kapcsolódó európai geotechnikai szabványok
alapján), Business Media Magyarország Kft., 2008

19. Györgyi József: Dinamika, Műegyetemi Kiadó, 2003

20. Bojtár Imre, Gáspár Zsolt: Végeselemmódszer építőmérnököknek, Terc Kft., 2003
21. Eurocode 2, EN 1992-1-1:2004

22. Eurocode 3, EN 1993-1-1:2005

23. Eurocode 3, EN 1993-1-3:2006

24. Eurocode 3, EN 1993-1-5:2006

25. Eurocode 5, EN 1995-1-1:2004

26. Eurocode 8, EN 1998-1-1:2004

27. Paz,M., Leigh, W., Structural Dynamics - Theory and Computation, Fifth Edition, Springer, 2004

28. Chopra, A. K., Dynamics of Structures - Theory and Applications to Earthquake Engineering, Third Edition, Pearson
Prentice Hill, 2007

29. Biggs, J. M., Introduction to Structural Dynamics, McGraw-Hill, 1964

30. Weaver, W., Jr., P. R. Johnston, Structural Dynamics by Finite Elements, Prentice-Hall, 1987

31. Bathe, K. J., Finite Element Procedures, Prentice-Hall, 1996

32. Borst, R., Crisfield, M. A., Remmers, J. J. C., Verhoosel, C. V., Non-Linear Finite Element Analysis of Solids and
Structures, Second Edition, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2012
584

33. Willford, M.R., Young, P. A Design Guide for Footfall Induced Vibration of Structures, Concrete Society, 2006

34. Smith, A. L., Hicks, S. J., Devine, P. J. Design of Floors for Vibration: A New Approach, The Steel Construction Institute, Ascot,
2009

35. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Von_Mises_yield_criterion

36. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bresler_Pister_yield_criterion
37. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Whittaker%E2%80%93Shannon_interpolation_formula

38. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nyquist%E2%80%93Shannon_sampling_theorem

39. Wilson, E. L., Three-Dimensional Static and Dynamic Analysis of Structures – A Physical Approach With Emphasis on
Earthquake Engineering, Computers and Structures Inc., Berkeley, 2002
User’s Manual X5 Release2 e3 585

Notes
586

Notes